-J
oC
THE PHILIPPINE
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE
ALVIN J. COX, M.A., Ph.D.
GENERAL EDITOR
Section D
general biology, ethnology,
and anthropology
EDITED WITH THE COOPERATION OF
M. L. MILLER, Ph. D. ; R. P. COWLES, Ph. D. ; C. S. BANKS, M. S. ALVIN SEALE, A. B. ; C. F. BAKER, A. M.
RICHARD c. McGregor, a. b.
Volume IX
1914
With 56 Plates, and 46 Text Figures
180429
MANILA
BUREAU OP printing
1914
CONTENTS
No. 1, February, 1914
Page.
Seale, Alvin. Preservation of commercial fish and fishery products
in the tropics 1
Two plates.
Day, Artemas L. The osseous system of Ophiocephalus striatus
Bloch 19
Nineteen plates and 7 text figures.
Worcester, Dean C. Note on the occurrence of a flying crustacean
in the Philippine Islands 57
Seale, Alvin. Pishes of Hongkong 59
Two plates.
Kerremans, Ch. Buprestides recueillis aux iles Philippines par C. F.
Baker, I 83
Une figure dans le texte.
SCHULTZE, W. Notes on the Malay pangolin, Manis javanica Des-
marest ...- 93
Two plates.
No. 2, April, 1914
Christie, Emerson B. Notes on irrigation and cooperative irrigation
societies in Ilocos Norte 99
One plate.
Christie, Emerson B. Notes on the pottery industry in San Nicolas,
Ilocos Norte 117
Three plates.
Cain, Andrew W. History of the Spanish normal school for men
teachers in Manila, 1865-1905 123
Four plates.
Melichar, L. Neue Homopteren von den Philippinen 173
Eine Tafel.
Kieffer, J. J. Nouveaux cynipides des Philippines 183
Day, Artemas L. Two new cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus
from Lake Manguao, Palawan, P. 1 187
One plate.
No. 3, June, 1914
Light, S. F. Some Philippine Scyphomedusse, including two new
genera, five new species, and one new variety 195
Sixteen text figures.
iii
285804
iv Contents
Pagre. Light, S. F. Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria. Part II: Lemnalioi- des kiikenthali, a new genus and species of Alcyonaria from the Philippines and a discussion of the systematic position of the new genus 233
One plate and 8 text fii?ures.
WiLEMAN, A. E. Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera and their larvae:
Part I 247
Three colored plates.
Meuchar, L. Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: I. Theil 269
Eine Tafel.
KiEFFER, J. J. Enumeration des serphides (proctotrupides) des lies Philippines avec description de genres nouveaux et d'especes nou- velles 285
SCHULTZE, W. Notes on a nesting place of Crocodilus palustris
Lesson .-. 313
One plate.
No. 4, August, 1914
COWLES, R. P. Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 319
Three plates and 1 text figure.
Banks, Charles S. A new Philippine malaria mosquito 405
No. 5, September, 1914
Baker, C. F. Studies in Philippine Jassoidea: I. Some remarkable
Tettigoniellida 409
Eleven text fij?ures.
BiCKHARDT, H. Philippinische Histeriden: 1 423
Eine Tafel.
Melichar, L. Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen : II 433
Eine Tafel.
Fleutiaux, Ed. Elateridae des lies Philippines 441
Rapfray, a. Catalogue des pselaphides (coleopteres) des iles Philip- pines 451
Crawford, J. C. New Philippine Hymenoptera 457
No. 6, November, 1914
Robertson, James A. The Igorots of Lepanto 465
Nine plates and one map.
McGregor, Richard C. Description of a new Prionochilus from the
highlands of Luzon 531
One colored plate.
Grouvelle, a. Nitidulidae des Philippines recoltes par C. F. Baker.... 535 Index 543
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology, AND Anthropology
Vol. IX FEBRUARY, 1914 No. 1
PRESERVATION OF COMMERCIAL FISH AND FISHERY PRODUCTS IN THE TROPICS
By Alvin Seale
{From the Section of Ichthyology, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of Science, Manila, P, L)
Two plates PRESERVING BY DRYING AND SALTING
Almost every country has its own methods for drying and salting fish due to local conditions.
In the provinces of the Philippine Islands almost all of the fish for home consumption are simply sundried with but a sprinkling of salt or without salt. This economy of salt is probably due to the difficulty of securing it and to the fact that the fish are not to be kept for a great length of time. However, in some places, like Sitanki Island, where the salting of fish is the most important industry and the work is chiefly in the hands of Chinese, the following method is employed: The fish are caught by the Moro fishermen who clean them promptly, usually while still on the fishing ground. The fish is placed in front of the operator with the belly uppermost and the head inward ; a cut is made along the side of the backbone from the base of the tail to near the head. The fish is then turned over, and a similar cut is made on the other side of the backbone to the tip of the snout, the skin on the belly alone remaining intact. The fish is then opened by cutting the upper or head end of the
123716
2 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
backbone and the posterior end of the body cavity. This enables the operator to spread the fish out flat in three united sections, the backbone constituting one section. If the fish is very large, two gashes are cut in the thickest part of the flesh on each side so that the salt may penetrate more quickly. The entrails are then removed. The entire operation requires less than half a minute by an experienced Moro using a bolo. The fish are then sold to Chinese, who place them at once in a large vat of brine sufficiently strong to float a potato. About 1 sack of salt to 3 picules of fish (418.5 pounds) is used, but this brine is too weak. The fish are usually left in these vats for three or four days ; then they are placed on platforms to dry ; each evening, or when rain threatens, they are gathered up and piled in kenches. This process is continued until they are thoroughly dry and ready for the market. Dried fish from Sitanki are said to spoil very readily. I believe this to be chiefly due to the lack of care in keeping the brine sufficiently strong and the vat sanitary.
In Manila, where a very large quantity of small fish is cured, especially sardines and young herring, the process is as follows : The fish are washed in sea water when they are removed from the boat, placed in strong brine for from two to three hours, and spread on flakes until thoroughly sundried (Plate I). They are then ready for packing and shipping. These fish are dried in the round, and are covered each night and during showers. Owing to the fact that frequently fish of from 20 to 22 centimeters were included in the lot, they were not cured properly. Consequently, a city ordinance was passed requiring the evisceration of fish of more than 15 centimeters in length, when they were to be sundried. This was purely a sanitary measure.
During the dry months in the Philippines, it is much better to depend upon sundrying with a minimum amount of salting for preserving fish. On the Grand Banks of the Newfoundland coast, the fish are stored in kenches on shipboard. About 11.4 hectoliters (1.5 bushels) of salt for 45.30 kilograms (100 pounds) of fish are used for these. When the fishermen reach the shore, however, they cure the fish by pickling or by a combination of drying and pickling.
PICKLING
In pickling fish it is customary to use either a rectangular trough or a large hogshead which will hold about 193.05 liters (51 gallons). This is called a butt. A thick layer of salt is sprinkled on the bottom of the butt, then the fish are placed in
ix,D, 1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 3
the butts in layers, the split surface up. Salt is sprinkled over each layer so that all parts of the fish are well covered, and a half bushel of salt is placed on top to make a strong pickle. The amount of salt required for each hogshead is from 1.4 to 2.5 hectoliters (4 to 6 bushels). When the fish settle, they are covered with strong brine, and in this condition they will keep until needed.
When the fish are taken from the butts, they are carefully stacked in piles from 0.9 to 1.2 meters (3 to 4 feet) high called kenches. This is to allow the brine to drain oflf. With the exception of the lower layer, they are stacked with the cut side down. At the end of from twenty-four to forty-eight hours they are put out to dry on bamboo racks about a meter from the ground, being spread cut side up. After one day of drying they are replied or kenched for from twenty-four to forty-eight hours and then dried again for two days or until perfectly dry. I strongly advise that they then be packed in large cooking bags or oilpaper, made up into neat packages, and stored in a dry place. Fish prepared in this manner will keep in good condition in the Philippines for months.
Regarding the quantity of salt used in curing iced or fresh fish in the United States, A. W. Bitting writes: ^
About half a pound of salt is used to the pound of iced fish in the regular course of curing the full salted fish; for export fish about three-eighths of a pound is used, and for slack salted one-fourth of a pound. As the cured fish contains only from 14 to 20 per cent of salt, it is evident that about 33 per cent of the amount used serves as a preservative while the remainder acts as a drying agent, and it would seem that improved methods might effect a marked saving in this part of the process, * ♦ ♦ sufficient drying and retention of that dryness under varying weather conditions will assist in preventing spoilage.
It is in this connection that we urge the use of oilpaper or large cooking bags for packing fish, as this tends to prevent the entrance of dampness which would cause the fish to mold — and this is the greatest difficulty we have to contend with in pre- serving dried fish in the Philippines.
SALTED SHRIMPS OR PRAWNS
At certain times of the year very young prawns from 2 to 3 centimeters in length are sold in the Manila markets. These are preserved by being mixed with a liberal quantity of coarse salt and then placed in kerosene tins. They find a ready sale.
'Bull U. S. Dept. Agr., Bur, Chem. (1911), 133, 27, 29.
4 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
SALTED CRABS
During the rainy season, great quantities of small crabs are caught in the brackish waters of the esteros near Manila. They are usually lightly sprinkled with salt and offered for sale the next morning in the Manila markets. This crab, Varuna lit- ter ata (Fabr.), is apparently not taken in large numbers at any other season.
MULLET ROES
There are at least 16 species of mullets or banak found in Philippine waters. They are good food fishes and usually abun- dant in all parts of the Islands. Several thousands have been caught at one haul of a big seine. The roes of these fish are a great delicacy, but I am not aware that they are conserved in any manner in the Philippines. The following is an abstract of one method ^ for preparing mullet roes :
The fish are split open and the roes removed, care being taken to avoid breaking the roe bags or bruising the eggs. They should be separated carefully from the surrounding viscera. The roes are placed in tubs with holes in the bottom so that the water can run off. The roes, still in the roe bags, are then placed in boxes or kegs with fine salt sprinkled over and between them. An excess of salt must be avoided as it will cause the egg sacs to break. About 1 peck of Liverpool, or any fine, salt should be used to 160 pounds of eggs.
On removal from the salt, the roes are spread on boards and exposed to the sun for about one week, being covered at night. They are turned over each morning and protected from rain. Sometimes, after one day's exposure, other boards are laid on top of the roes to compress them slightly. When properly cured they are from 4 to 8 inches long, from 2 to 4 inches wide, and from one-half to two-thirds of an inch thick. They vary in color from yellowish to dark red. These are now ready to be packed in small boxes and marketed.
In Italy the hard roes of mullet are converted into cakes termed bolarge or bolargo, which are prepared by washing and sprin- kling with salt and pressing between two boards. They are then smoked or sundried, and are a good appetizer in that they promote thirst. In India these roes are considered excellent for curries.
BAGOOSe
Bagoofig is the most common fish preparation in the Philip- pines. In almost every native home it is more or less of a staple. It is prepared by mixing 2 parts of young or small fish — anchovies
'Bull, U. S. Fish Comm. (1898), 18, 546.
IX.D.1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 5
preferred — with 3 parts of salt. This is placed in stone jars, covered to exclude flies and dirt, and allowed to ferment for one month. It is then ready for use, the liquid portion being used as a sauce and the solid fried or mixed with rice. Care should be taken to prevent flies from depositing their eggs in this mixture as otherwise it becomes filled with larvae and is most unappetizing. However, it is sometimes eaten in this condition.
PRESERVING BY SMOKING
In its simplest form, the preservation of fish by smoking is as follows: The fish are first dressed. If large, they are split down the belly from head to tail so that they lie flat. The head and most of the backbone are removed. Usually the flesh is gashed in several places to allow the salt to penetrate. The fish are next placed in vats or barrels with 22.66 kilograms (50 pounds) of No. 2 salt and from -2.27 to 4.54 kilograms (5 to 10 pounds) of granulated sugar to 91 kilograms (200 pounds) of fish. On the second day, brine made by dissolving 13.61 kilograms (30 pounds) of salt in 18.9 liters (5 gallons) of water is added. After the fifth or sixth day, the fish are removed and soaked in fresh water for three hours. They are trussed out flat, hung on sticks or bamboos, and permitted to dry for from two to three hours in the open air. They are then hung in the upper part of the smokehouse away from the heat, but not so high as to be in the hot air which accumulates at the top. The smoking is continued for from eighteen to thirty-six hours, twenty-four of which are usually required to complete the process. When low smokehouses are used, in which the fish are hung within from 2.5 to 3 meters (8 to 10 feet) of the fire, the smoking is usually completed in less time than this. The smoke must be even throughout and with little fire. When sufficiently smoked, the fish are permitted to cool and are then packed with paper wrapped about them. The price in the United States for fish prepared in this way is usually from 36 to 40 centavos per pound.
The smokehouse may be of almost any shape or size, from an inverted barrel to the elaborate brick house with outside fur- naces. A common form is one with three or four chambers, ranged side by side, from 1.83 to 4.27 meters (6 to 14 feet) high, 1.22 to 1.52 meters (4 to 5 feet) wide, and 1.83 to 3.66 meters (6 to 12 feet) deep. Hardwood or hardwood sawdust is used for producing the smoke.
6 The Philippine Journal of Science i^h
Variations from the above method are innumerable, and depend largely upon the variety of smoked product to be prepared, and the size and variety of the fish to be smoked must be taken into consideration.
For the smoking of small fish such as young herring or sar- dines, the Chinese of Manila have very extensive smokehouses and drjring yards, and a large business is carried on by them. This business has increased wonderfully within the past six years. In 1909 there were but 14 houses and yards for drying and smoking fish; in 1911 I counted 36 such establishments all owned by Chinese, who were preparing the fish, not only for local consumption, but for export to China as well. In 1912 almost all of these establishments were destroyed in the great Tondo fire, but at this date (1913) many have resumed operations.
The method of their operation, which is effective and eco- nomical although rather crude, is as follows: The fish — usually herring or sardines — are landed at Tondo beach (Plate I). They are dipped in salt water and washed, but not eviscerated. They are then put in strong brine for from two to three hours (very small or young fish for less time) and then dipped in boiling water for a few moments (Plate II). For the latter purpose, large kettles over a crude earthen furnace are used. The fish are then drained and spread in the sun for about one hour to dry (Plate I). They are next placed in round baskets about 40 centimeters in diameter, 100 fish to the basket (Plate II). These baskets are placed over one of the openings in the furnace to smoke. The furnace (Plate II) is usually constructed of stone or cement, and is about 1 meter high and 1 meter wide, while the length usually is limited only by the length of the house. There may be two or more rows of these furnaces in each house. The furnaces are supplied with holes in the top about 50 centimeters apart for the smoke to pass out; otherwise they are entirely closed. A smoke of hardwood sawdust is started, and the basket of fish is placed over one of the holes of which there are from 5 to 40 in each furnace. Usually several baskets are placed one above another, and over the top basket is always placed a tightly woven basket cover (Plate II) . After smoking for ten hours the lowest basket in shifted to the top and the smoking is continued until the fish are properly cured. The length of time necessary for this process depends largely upon the size of the fish. The fish intended for sale in the local markets are usually smoked for twenty-four hours. Small
ix,D,i Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 7
fish require less smoking, export fish more. These baskets retail for 60 centavos each.
If the fish are placed at a distance from the fire so that the temperature is never above 26°. 7 C, the product is called **cold smoked," but if the fish are hung very near the fire and are more or less cooked it is called **hot smoked.*' The latter method requires only about two hours, but the product will keep but a very short time.
The "cold smoked" is the better product. The smoking may last from a few hours to two or three weeks, depending upon the product desired. Hardwood or hardwood sawdust makes the best smoke, but I have succeeded in making a very good prod- uct by using half-dry and green coconut husks.
I have conducted a number of experiments in smoking fish, using the following, all of which are very common in the Phil- ippines: Barracuda, sea bass, mullets, cavalla, snappers, and porgies. The fish were thoroughly cleaned and washed, and the backbones removed. Some of the larger ones were cut in strips. They were put in strong brine for one day, allowed to drain and dry two days in the sun and wind, and then transferred to the smokehouse and smoked slowly for fourteen days, after which they were placed in the sun for half a day. Finally, they were wrapped in oilpaper and were sealed in tin boxes. After nine months in Manila, these fish were eaten and pronounced excellent.
A very appetizing fish product was made by cutting the flesh of large fish in rather small strips, which were placed in brine for one hour and transferred to spiced vinegar for three days, then sundried and slow smoked nine days. When wrapped in oilpaper and packed in tin boxes, these kept in good condition in Manila for four months. The following is an abstract of a method which the United States Bureau of Fisheries ^ recom- mends for preparing a choice fish product for warm climates:
The fish, after being smoked, are cooled and placed in layers in wooden barrels. Between each layer of fish a layer of dry salt is placed in the proportion of about 6 pounds of salt to 100 pounds of fish. The barrels, after being filled, are kept in a cool place until the fish have become com- pletely hard, which will require from three to fifteen days, depending upon the kind and size of the fish. The barrels are then filled with brine and closed by a tight-fitting cover. The brine must be carefully prepared in the following manner: Filtered water is boiled with salt to a saturated solution, cooled, skimmed, and as much drawn off as appears fully clear and fine. If the brine is not carefully prepared, the fish will not keep for
'Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm. (1898), 18, 477.
8 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
any length of time, which will likewise be the case if the process of hardening has not completely taken place.
Fish prepared in this manner will keep for many months and can be sent to hot climates without danger of spoiling.
SMOKED HERRING
The ordinary hard-smoked herring is prepared by pickling it in a tank of about 842 liters' (225 gallons') capacity. This tank is first partially filled with weak pickle made by adding 0.53 hectoliter (1.5 bushels) of salt to 100 gallons of water. From about 379 to 568 liters (100 to 150 gallons) of fish are then placed in the pickle, after which half a bushel of salt is put over them, and a third more of the fish is added. A second layer of salt, about 0.53 hectoliter (1.5 bushels), is laid on, and enough fish are then added to fill the tank which is finally covered with from 1.06 to 1.8 hectoliters (3 to 5 bushels) of salt. Each tank when filled contains 4 hogsheads of fish and from 2.11 to 3.17 hecto- liters (3 to 5 bushels) of salt, the quantity of salt depending upon the size of the fish and the condition of the weather.
When the salt has struck, the time for which will require from twelve to forty-eight hours depending upon the size of the fish, the fish are dipped out and strung on sticks. They are then dipped in a trough of clean salt water and allowed to drain and dry for about one hour, after which they are hung in the smoke- house and the fires are started. The fish are smoked from three to five weeks. The sticks should be shifted so that a regular smoking is insured. It is best to fill the smokehouse gradually.
BLOATERS
The following is an abstract^ of the method of preparing the popular fish product known as bloater.
Fresh herring are used and are pickled as soon as received, 1 bushel of salt being used to 1 barrel of fish. After remaining in the pickle for from two to three days they are removed, drained, and placed on sticks for smoking. In order to "bloat," the herring must be thoroughly moist. After they have commenced to dry in the smokehouse, the heat must be increased. If they hang for from ten to twelve hours without heat, they will not "bloat.*' The smoking continues for from two and one-half to six days, when the fish are usually sufficiently cured. Bloaters will keep but a short time, unless put in cold storage.
KIPPERED HERRING
To kipper herring, the fish are cleaned and salted like the bloaters, except that they are not kept in pickle so long. They
'Bull U. S. Fish Comm. (1898), 18, 485.
IX, D, 1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 9
are then hung up to dry for a few hours and smoked for from six to eight hours at temperatures of from 26°.7 to 29°.4 C, the fish being hung in such a way as to keep the abdomen open. They are then ready for cooUng and packing.
"Kippered herring differ from bloater herring principally in that they are split and eviscerated before smoking." These will not keep well in the Philippines unless put in cold storage.
SMOKED CAT FISH
Cat fish may be smoked in the same manner as herring. However, if they are very large, they should first be cut into strips.
SMOKED EELS
The following is an abstract of a method used in Germany for smoking eels, from the United States Bureau of Fisheries:^
The head, skin, tail, and viscera are removed, and the eel is split open the entire length, tha^ backbone and many of the smaller bones attached to it are removed. It is then laid in strong salt brine for six hours and is then wiped dry with a towel and covered with the following preparation which has been pounded in a porcelain mortar; One large anchovy, 1 ounce fine salt, 8 ounces of su^ar, 1 ounce saltpeter, and sufficient butter to make a paste of the ingredients. The eel, thoroughly cured with this preparation, is rolled up tightly in the form of a disk, beginning at the tail end, tied with a cord to hold it in position, and then sewed up in a linen cloth, which covers the disk and allows the end to project. These disks are next suspended in an ordinary smokehouse and smoked for from five to six days, then allowed to cool and become firm, when they are ready for the table.
MARINATING FISH
The method of conserving fish in spiced vinegar known in Europe as marinating has never been practiced to any extent in the Philippines. However, I believe that fish put up in this man- ner would meet with a favorable reception from consumers. For this purpose young herring, sardines, or anchovies are most desirable, although almost any small food fish may be used. Good firm fish, however, should be selected. The fish should be cleaned, washed, and dried for from half an hour to one hour in the air, then boiled or fried in hot oil (in Italy they are dipped in flour before frying), and put out to cool and to let the oil drain off. They are then packed in barrels, kegs, or glass jars, and spiced vinegar sufficient to fill the containers is poured in. After allowing them to stand a short time, the
'Bull U, S. Fish Comm. (1898), 18, 505.
10 The Philippine Journal of Science ish
bung is driven in or the cans sealed up. An excellent account of the method of marinating eels as practiced in Italy is given by James Hornell.^
CANNING SARDINES AND OTHER FISHES IN THE PHILIPPINES
I believe that there is a good opening for a moderate amount of capital in the canned fish industry in the Philippines. This is especially true if the fish cannery is operated in conjunction with some allied industry; for instance, a tomato-catsup fac- tory. These two could easily be combined. Excellent tomatoes are grown in the vicinity of Manila, and a good market would stimulate additional planting. Oriental people prefer sardines put up in tomato sauce, so a portion of the output could be used for that purpose. The refuse of the fish cannery could readily be ground and pressed for chicken feed or fertilizer. There- fore, in a properly organized cannery there would be three prod- ucts to put on the market — sardines, tomato catsup, and **bone meal" or fertilizer. Satisfactory labor at a r^sonable rate could be readily secured. Taking into consideration the large quanti- ties of fresh sardines landed each morning at Tondo beach, it is surprising that some local capitalist has not opened a cannery.
In brief outline, the method of preparing sardines is as fol- lows:
Catch the fish.
Rinse the fish well in salt or fresh water.
Spread on tables or a clean floor and sprinkle with a little salt.
Clean by removing heads and entrails.
Place the fish in brine of sufficient strength to float a potato, where they
should remain until the salt "strikes in." This will take from one-half
to one hour. Rinse rapidly in two waters to remove scales, dirt, and excess of salt. Dry in the open air by placing the fish, tails up, in shallow wire baskets,
so that water will run out of the abdominal cavity. In good weather
one hour or even less is sufficient for drying. In bad weather, dry
indoors. The wire baskets full of fish should be hung up so the air may
circulate freely through them. Cook the fish in oil by immersing these wire baskets with the fish in them
in boiling peanut or olive oil. They should remain in the oil about two
minutes or until the tail fin breaks easily. Hang up the baskets so that the oil will drain off, and leave until the fish
are cool. Pack the fish in tins. Fill the packed tins with olive oil, tomato catsup, or whatever is desired;
a few cloves, small peppers, or thyme may be used. Solder or clamp the covers so that they are absolutely air-tight.
^ Bull. Madras Fisheries Bureau (1911), 2, No. 6, 50.
IX. D, 1
Scale: Fish and Fishery Products
11
Immerse the cans of fish in boiling water for two hours. This cooks the fish
and softens the bones. Remove the cans from the water, allow them to cool, and rub them in dry
sawdust to remove all oil from the outside. The sardines are then ready for the market.
Using the above method, I prepared 100 tins of Philippine sardines to be used as an exhibit and afterward to be sent to various packing associations in order to interest them in the subject. The letters received in reply to these samples of sar- dines were in most cases very satisfactory. Owing to imperfect soldering, the oil leaked from some of the tins and the contents spoiled.
Dr. David Starr Jordan, president of Stanford University, wrote :
I had the can of the Philippine sardines you sent me served at the table. I consider them equal to the European sardines.
A member of the firm of Messrs. Castle Bros.-Wolf & Son, one of the largest commercial houses in Manila — now the Pacific Commercial Company — wrote :
I consider the quality of the sardines you sent us very good and see no reason why, eventually, the canning of these fish should not be an important industry.
According to the decision of the pure food experts of the United States Bureau of Agriculture, any small clupeoid fish may be put up in oil and labelled sardine, provided that the name of the country where the fish were caught and the kind of oil used in the tins are printed on the label.
This practically includes the entire family Clupeidae. The following species of this family are found in Philippine waters, several of them in great abundance.
Species of clupeoid fishes found in Philippine waters. Stolephorus gracilis (Temm. and Sardinella gibbosa {Bleeker) .
Schleg.). Stolephorus delicatulus (Bennett). Ambly g aster sirm (Riippell). Ambly g aster clupeoides (Bleeker). Ambly gaster perforatum (Cantor). Dussumieria acuta Cuv. and Val, Dussumieria elopsoides Bleeker. Dussumieria hasseltii Bleeker. Sardinella moluccensis (Bleeker).
Sardinella sundaica (Bleeker). Sardinella fimbrata (Cuv. and Val.). Sardinella longiceps (Cuv. and Val.). Sardinella vancibris (Jordan and
Snyder) . Sardinella m,elanostica (Schleg.). Sardinella klunzi (Bleeker). Sardinella zunazi (Bleeker) . Ilisha hoevenii (Bleeker).
There are in addition a large number of anchovies, family Engraulidse, and a number of fishes of the mackerel family
12 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
found in the Philippines that could undoubtedly be canned with profit and sold on their merits.
However simple the process of canning sardines seems to be, I strongly advise against anyone entering the business without first securing the services of an experienced canning operator; otherwise failure would probably result.
In this connection, the following note is of special interest : ^
The sardine packers of France have of late, as a consequence of the very poor catch in the last few years, decided to close all their factories along the coast of Brittany and Vendee.
This decision is partly due to the poor catch owing to the lack of fish and the antiquated fishing implements used by the Britton fisherman. It is noticed that in past years the fish which abounded along the coast of Brittany seem to have almost disappeared therefrom, or at least the sardine shoals are no longer to be found close to the shore as formerly and seem to be now in the offing. The fishermen being poorly equipped can not go too far off from the coast, and the consequence is that their catch is very trifling. They are unable to supply the factories with a sufficient quantity of fish, and when they secure a good catch try to sell it at very high prices. The manufacturers claim that the Spanish and Por- tuguese fish caught in large quantities are, on the contrary, sold at very low prices, and thus the Spanish and Portuguese manufacturers are en- abled to favorably compete with French manufacturers.
Over 100 factories were closed on January 1, 1913, and many others, it is said, will close before the end of January, 1914. It is also said that several manufacturers will reestablish their works in Spain and Portugal. It is, however, hoped that their decision is not irrevocable, and that if the fishermen are enabled to improve their fishing implements the closed factories may perhaps be reopened before the next fishing season.
The manufacturers' decision affects quite a number of industries, such as tin-can factories, olive-oil manufacturers, etc., and in Brittany alone over 50,000 people will thus be put out of employment. If the matter is not arranged between the canners and the fishermen, French sardines will be very scarce in the markets of the world.
PRESERVING FISH BY LOW TEMPERATURE OR REFRIGERATION
The preserving of fish and fish products in the tropics by means of cold is of sufficient importance to merit the most care- ful scientific observation. The subject is one of primary importance not only to the people of Manila, but also to the inhabitants of every city situated within the tropics and to all transoceanic vessels.
It has no doubt been the experience of almost every one who has traveled by sea that on some vessels all of the fish and fre- quently the meat and game from the cold storage were as dry as
^ Daily Consular & Trade Rep., Washington (1913), 523.
ix.D,i Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 13
chips and almost as tasteless, while on others they were all that could be desired.
I venture to state that this difference in the cold-storage foods was due almost entirely to a lack of understanding on the part of the engineer in charge of the refrigeration, a condition en- tirely inexcusable, considering the amount of information avail- able and the numerous good books that have been published on the subject of cold storage. With the exception of salmon, hali- but, and perhaps two or three other species, fish should never be frozen if it can possibly be avoided. A fish that has been fully frozen has a good appearance, and it is only when it is thawed out and cooked that its poor condition is revealed, the flesh being woolly in appearance, dry, and devoid of flavor. This is explained by the fact that fish flesh is largely made up of loosely bound, pale, muscular fibers which rupture very easily when frozen in contrast to the firmly bound red muscles of beef or mutton. Also, fish contain a much larger percentage of water than beef or mutton; therefore, freezing has a more disastrous effect.
Regarding the proper degree of cold at which fish should be kept, there is considerable difference of opinion among experts. The Director of the Insular Cold Storage plant recommends a temperature of — 9°.4 C. for fish in Manila. The director of the Philippine Cold Stores states as a result of his experience that fish keep nicely in Manila at a temperature of from —6°. 7 to — S'^.O C. This is also the opinion of the manager of the Inter- national Cold Stores. On the other hand, Mr. Heron, who has large cold stores and steam trawlers operating for the London trade, says:
I am firmly of the opinion that if fish is required to be kept for a considerable period it must not be frozen, as the tissues cannot stand the freezing as in the case of beef and mutton.
He fully agrees with Anderson ^ who states in his recommen- dations to the Fishery Board of Scotland that —
he found that from 0 degrees centigrade to —3 centigrade (32 degrees Fahrenheit to 25.6 degrees Fahrenheit) will prevent the action of most bacteria of putrification and at the same time maintain the fish in a con- dition of rigor, and thus preserve the fish for a considerable time in a comparative fresh condition, and with little deterioration in the tissue.
My own experience indicates that in Manila a round fish with the ordinary market handling, if placed in the refrigerative
^ Proc. Cold Storage & Ice Assoc. England (1909), 9, 81.
14 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
room and kept at a temperature of from —0° to —3° C, will keep for from ten to fourteen days only. If the fish is carefully handled and gutted, the gills removed and the inside wiped with a dry cloth, and the fish wrapped in oilpaper, it will keep in sweet condition and retain its flavor for three weeks.
Herring and mackerel stand freezing better than most other Philippine fishes. Many people who have cold storage, espe- cially Americans, believe the best way to preserve fish is to freeze them, then immerse in water, and ref reeze or glaze. This method is extensively used in the Canadian and American fisheries.
There is also a method of freezing fish in ice while they are still alive, using oxygen to reduce the amount of water necessary to be frozen, but this method is still in the experimental stage. It is difficult to predict its future.
For ordinary transportation of fish from the fishing grounds to the market, it is usual for the vessel to carry a cargo of ice in the bins. This should be between decks in the coolest part of the ship and be as well insulated as possible. When the fish are caught, they are cleaned and washed at once. A layer of cracked ice from 7 to 10 centimeters thick is placed on the floor of one of the bins. A layer of fish is placed over this and covered with chiseled ice, grading into cracked ice to the size of a walnut. Alternating layers of fish and ice are put in until the bin is full, when a layer of ice 15 centimeters or more thick is placed over the top. If the room is kept at freezing point, these fish will remain from twelve to fourteen days or longer in sweet condition. If possible, and there need be no great difficulty if the fishing is along shore, the fish should be chilled before they are packed in the above manner, as they will keep longer and not require so much ice in shipping.
Great strides have been made in the shipping of iced fish in the past few years, and it is well demonstrated that careful handling and packing will amply repay the additional expense and trouble.
PREPARING FISH FOR SHIPMENT
A number of complaints have been received by the Bureau of Science that the dried fish put up in certain places in the Islands will not keep and that as a matter of fact quantities have to be thrown away because they are spoiled. This, undoubtedly, in the cases examined, resulted from slack salting and storage in damp bodegas. The only remedy for this is to spread the
ix,D. 1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 15
fish in the sun for half a day and to keep the brine up to full strength. Shippers should see to it that the fish are absolutely dry — a simple matter in a country where the moisture evaporates as rapidly as it does in the Philippines.
Any firm that would take the slight additional trouble of put- ting up selected fish in smaller packages and wrapping these packages in oilpaper and then sacking them (instead of merely packing them in gunny sacks as is now the custom) would soon build up a most profitable trade.
With the exception of a few marketable fish brought from one or two southern ports, there are practically no fish shipped in fresh condition anywhere in the Philippine Islands. This is to be regretted and should be remedied as soon as possible, as there are a number of places in the Islands where large quan- tities of excellent food fish are caught which could easily be shipped to Manila. I believe there has been but one serious attempt to ship a large quantity of fresh fish, and that resulted disastrously, chiefly because of a lack of cooperation among the people handling the fish. A sailing ship with a quantity of ice was sent to bring a cargo of fresh fish from Mindoro. Owing to lack of ice, fish sufficient to make the voyage profitable could not be carried, although the fish shipped (alces or gray snappers) arrived in Manila in excellent condition. There is absolutely no reason why with proper care quantities of fine fresh fish could not be sent to Manila from numerous places such as Mindoro and Lingayen.
The results of some very interesting experiments in ship- ping fish have been published by the United States Bureau of Fisheries.^ The results of these experiments show :
(a) That fish spoil more rapidly if the viscera are not removed. (6) Free access of air retards putrefaction.
(c) Drainage of blood retards putrefaction.
(d) That if the intestines and head are removed and the fish is suspended
by the tail so that the blood drains out, the fish will keep a con- siderable time without ice.
In 1908 a valuable paper ^^ was presented to the Inter- national Fishery Congress regarding an improved method of packing fish. This method consisted in cleaning the fish thor- oughly by removing the viscera and gills as soon as the fish
' Tower, Ralph W., Improvements in preparing fish for shipment, Bull. U. S, Fish Comm, (1899), 19, 231.
*• Soiling, A., An improved and practical method of packing fish for transportation, Bull U. S. Bur. Fish. (1908), 28, pt. 1, 297.
16 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
were caught. They were then washed in salt water so that all the blood was removed. The water was then allowed to drain off, and the fish were wrapped in vegetable parchment called fish-wrapping paper. It is probable that the paper bags used for cooking in the United States could be used for this purpose where the regular fish-wrapping paper is not obtain- able. It was found that the fish wrapped in this paper and put between layers of cracked ice (the pieces being about the size of a walnut) would retain their flavor and keep in sweet condition for a month or more, much longer than the fish pre- pared in the ordinary way. As the paper keeps the water out and prevents the fish from coming in direct contact with the ice, this system from a sanitary standpoint alone is to be strongly commended. It will be found that the fish keep and look so much better that they readily sell for a sum sufficient to pay for the paper and extra care.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I
Fig. 1. Landing fish at Tondo beach, Manila. 2. Fish spread on flakes for drying.
Plate II
Fig. 1. Furnace for dipping sardines and herring.
2. Smoked herring, showing furnace and baskets in which the fish are
smoked and the basket covers. 128716 — 2 17
Seale: Preservation of Fish.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Landing fish at Tondo Beach, Manila.
Fig. 2. Fish spread on flakes for drying. PLATE I.
THE OSSEOUS SYSTEM OF OPHIOCEPHALUS STRIATUS
BLOCH
By Artemas L. Day
(From the Department of Zoology, College of Liberal Arts, University of the Philippines)
Nineteen plates and 7 text figures
In working out the internal skeleton of Ophiocephalus striatus Bloch, several specimens were dissected, although for the most part bones of a single individual have been used for purposes of illustrating the disarticulated bones. The bones of the skeleton of the fish represented in Plate I have been illustrated in this plate only, with the exception of a certain few, as for example anterior dorsal radials (85,115) shown in text fig. 2, the dorsal ray and internal spine, and the anal ray and interhaemal spine shown in text fig. 5.
In a few other instances bones of other individuals have been used; as, for instance, the glossohyal (65) shown in text fig. 7, the top of the skull, disarticulated, and a part of the suspensorium at the top of Plate VII.
The fish from the skeleton of which the illustrations of the disarticulated bones were made, with the exception of the few just named, was 50 centimeters long. Several smaller fish were also dissected, and the number of bones was found to vary considerably in specimens of different sizes. In several large individuals the total number of ribs varied from 41 to 45, the double ribs from 12 to 15, the vertebrae from 50 to 51, the interneural spines from 40 to 42, and the interhaemal spines from 23 to 25.
The character of certain bones in the larger specimen is very different from that of the bones of smaller fish. In small specimens the supraethmoid (75) and the glossohyal (65) are cartilaginous, and even in the largest specimen dissected the latter was found to be somewhat ossified in the central portion only. The partially ossified region is indicated in text fig. 7. With few exceptions the nomenclature of Starks ^ is here followed.
^Proc. Wash, Acad. Sci. (1901), 3, 507.
19
20 The Philippine Journal of Science i»i4
Plate I is taken from the left side of the whole skeleton of a fish 49.5 centimeters long. The numbers used in this plate to mark the bones are the same as are used in the individual descriptions throughout the paper.
I. THE SKULL AND ORBITALS PLATES I, II, III, IV, AND V, AND PLATE VI, FIG. 1
The nasals (16) are somewhat rectangular, rather flat bones, with curved edges. Sensory canals pass from posteriorly ante- riorly from the frontals (36) opening on the dorsal side a short distance from the anterior end. They articulate posteriorly with the frontals (36) and prefrontals (76), with the orbital (18 ^) outside, with the ethmoid (81) and supraethmoid (75) inside, with each other in front, and with the premaxillaries (1) below and anteriorly. Their curved interior sides form an opening through which project the dorsal side of the ethmoid (81) and the dorsal processes of the premaxillaries (1) . (Plates I and II.)
The supratemporals (26) are somewhat right-triangular with the outward right angle slightly rounded off. They are per- forated throughout the whole length by sensory canals. They lie above the articulation of the pterotics (38) and epiotics (79), and articulate with the parietals (37) anteriorly, while the posterior portion articulates with the base of the sl^prt spine of the posttemporals (27). (Plate II.)
The posttemporals (27) have a comparatively large oval body posteriorly, and anteriorly are widely forked, the larger branch, inside, articulating with the epiotics (79) and the shorter with the process of the pterotics (38). The posterior oval portion covers a part of the space between the opercles (14) and the epiotics (79). (Plates I and II.)
The supraoccipital (35) is situated between the parietals (37), about half of the upper surface extending anterior to them, and to which they are joined by broad flat condyles. The V-shaped anterior end is articulated with the frontals (36). Posteriorly it is joined to the exoccipitals (72) and the epiotics (79). Below it is joined to the prootics (78). The wide flat lateral processes form a part of the roof of the accessory branchial chamber. (Plate II; Plate IV, fig. 1; Plate V, fig. 1.)
The frontals (36) are somewhat rectangular, and twice as long as broad. They are extensively tunneled by sensory canals. The ventral side has an oblique ridge for articulation with
IX. D, 1 Day: Ophiocephahis' striattis 21
the basisphenoid (83) and the parasphenoid (66). They also articulate anteriorly with the nasals (16) and the prefrontals (76), outwardly laterally with the sphenotics (39), and with the ethmoid (81) anteriorly. Posteriorly they articulate with the pterotics (38). Just posterior to the ventral processes of the frontals, and lying close to them, the alisphenoids (122) are found. The oblique ridge-like ventral process of the fron- tals is continuous with the alisphenoids (122), and the some- what flattened dorsal portion of the alisphenoids (122) lies against the flat ventral side of the frontals, posterior to their processes. In Plate II the frontals are seen from the dorsal side in the articulated top of the skull. In Plate III, dis- articulated, the right is seen from the ventral side and the left from the dorsal. In Plate IV, fig. 2, the right frontal is seen from the right margin as also in Plate VI, fig. 1. In Plate V, fig. 1, they are seen in the articulated skull, from the ventral side. The left frontal is seen in Plate I.
The parietals (37) are roughly pentagonal in form, being almost flat — slightly convex above — and very thin. They artic- ulate with the frontals (36) anteriorly, the supraoccipital (35) inside, the pterotics (38) outside, the epiotics (79) posteriorly, and form a part of the roof of the accessory branchial chamber. In Plate II the parietals are seen in the articulated skull from the dorsal side. In Plate III they are disarticulated, the right being seen from the ventral side and the left from the dorsal.
The pterotics (38) are somewhat rectangular in form, but with a spine-like process on the posteroextemodorsal side. The lower side has a ridge in the form of an arc, which bounds the portion serving as a part of the roof of the accessory branchial chamber. They articulate with the sphenotics (39) anteriorly, the parietals (37) inside, the epiotics (79) internally, and with the head of the hyomandibulars (10) below. The interno- posteroventral portion of the pterotics articulates with the externoanterior portion of the opisthotics (123). The pterotics are seen in Plate II from the dorsal side in the articulated skull. In Plate III they are disarticulated, the right being shown from the ventral side and the left from the dorsal side. The left is seen in Plate I. In Plate VI, fig. 1, the right pterotic is seen from the right side. In Plate V, fig. 1, the pterotics are seen from the ventral side in the articulated skull.
The sphenotics (39) are somewhat triangular and flat above, with a ridge below, slanting inward, which unites with the prootics (78). Internally and anteriorly the articulation is with
22 The Philippine Journal of Science im
• the frontals (36), and posteriorly with the pterotics (38). On the ventral side there is a fossa for the articulation of the anterior limb of the head of the hyomandibular (10). They are perforated throughout the whole length by the large sensory canals passing from the frontals (36). On the ventral side they articulate internally with the alisphenoids (122). In Plate I the left is seen. In Plate II both are viewed in position, from the dorsal side. In Plate III they are disarticulated, the right having the ventral surface in view, while the left, the dorsal surface. In Plate IV, fig. 2, the right is seen from the right side, as also in Plate VI, fig. 1. In Plate V, fig. 1, both are seen from the ventral side.
.The parasphenoid (66) extends from about the median dorsal portion of the vomer (67) to almost the posterior portion of the basioccipital (69). It sends out lateral laminae in the region of the prootics (78), and on the sides, in the region ventral to the basioccipital (69), are the posterior openings and grooves from the myodome. Ventrad to the basisphenoid (83) and anteriorly is another thin lamina on each side, which, together with the central ''stock'' or ''rib,'' help to form the brain cavity. Anteriorly, the articulation is with the vomer (67) and the ethmoid (81), between which this portion lies. In Plate III the parasphenoid is seen from the dorsal side, disarticulated; in Plate IV, fig. 2, in the articulated skull from the right side; in Plate V, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the ventral; and in Plate VI, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the right side.
The vomer (67) anteriorly is broad with 2 triangular patches of teeth. Just back of this "head," there is a horizontal thin portion with a median rib, the latter extending to the posterior end. The dorsal outline is clearly shown in Plate III. It artic- ulates with the ethmoid (81) dorsally, laterally with the pre- frontals (76), and posteriorly with the parasphenoid (66). In Plate II the anterior end of the vomer is seen in the articulated skull; in Plate III the dorsal side in the disarticulated skull; in Plate IV, fig. 2, from the right side; in Plate V, fig. 1, in the articulated skull, from the ventral; and in Plate VI, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the right side.
The basioccipital (69) forms the centrum of the condyle for the attachment of the atlas (70). There is a longitudinal suture separating it from the exoccipitals (72), and anteriorly a vertical suture separating the basioccipital and exoccipitals (72) from the prootics (78). The longitudinal suture between the basioccipital and exoccipitals (72) passes through the middle
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephaliis striatus 23
of the auditory capsule. The dorsal side borders the foramen magnum. In Plate IV, fig. 1, it is seen from the dorsal side; in Plate IV, fig. 2, from the right side, articulated; in Plate V, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the ventral side; and in Plate V, fig. 2, in the articulated skull from the posterior.
The exoccipitals (72) border the foramen magnum on the dorsal and internal side. A short distance within the foramen they unite as a narrow bridge of bone just dorsad to the bassioccipital (69), which latter forms the ventral side of the foramen at the posterior opening. The lateral portions extend outward and upward, articulating with the epiotics (79) later- ally, with the supraoccipital (35) anteriorly above, with the prootics (78) anteriorly ventrally, and with the bassioccipital (69) below. The median portion of the dorsolateral process articulates with the ventral margin of the opisthotics (123). The exoccipitals are seen from the dorsal side of the articulated skull in Plate II; in Plate IV, fig. 1, disarticulated from other bones, from the dorsal ; and in Plate V, fig. 2, in the articulated skull from the posterior. In Plate IV, fig. 2, and Plate VI, fig. 1, the right shows from the right side.
Otoliths (73). In a fish 50 centimeters in length, these are 18 millimeters long, 10 millimeters wide, and 3 millimeters thick. They are irregularly oval, somewhat curved, and on the convex side is a somewhat S-shaped groove over the whole length. In color they are like milky quartz, and there are concentric lines running about them like the rings of growth in the shell of the Pelecypoda. In Plate II the left, and in Plate III the right, is seen from the side fitting against the outer margin of the prootic (78), while in the same plates the other is seen from the inside or concave surface.
The supraethmoid (75) is a light, spongy bone, which in very young forms is cartilaginous. It is thickest posteriorly. The general form from the dorsal side can be seen very well in Plates II and III. It is situated dorsad to the anterior por- tion of the ethmoid (81) and the posterior portion of the head of the vomer (67). It is partly ventrad and partly posterior with respect to the dorsal processes of the premaxillaries (1). The supraethmoid, together with the dorsal processes of the premaxillaries, extend dorsally through the opening between the curved sides of the nasals (16).
Lying laterally to the ethmoid (81) and anteriorly to the frontals (36) are the prefrontals (76), somewhat wing-like laterally, and perforated anteriorly posteriorly by a large sen-
24 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
sory canal. In Plate II they are seen articulated from the dorsal side; in Plate III from the dorsal, disarticulated; and in Plate V, fig. 1, articulated, from the ventral side. In Plate IV, fig. 2, and Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen, articulated, from the right side. In Plate I the left is dimly seen.
In Plate V, fig. 1, the ventral side of the prootics (78) is shown in position. In Plate III the left is shown from the dorsal side, and the right from the ventral. In Plate IV, fig. 2, and Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen laterally. They articulate with the parasphenoid (66) ventrally and internally, the sphenotics (39) laterally, the alisphenoids (122) latero- dorsally, the basisphenoid (83) interodor sally, the exoccipitals (72) posterodor sally, the basioccipital (69) posteriorly, and contain within them the otoliths (73). The form is shown in the illustrations. The myodome or chamber for the insertion of the rectus muscle of the eye is formed by projecting shelves of bone from the internal sides of the prootics, and is separated from the brain cavity by them. The basioccipital (69) also assists here. It is concave on the ventral side, forming a cavity with the parasphenoid (66), This cavity opens to the exterior by an opening on either side from above the posterior end of the parasphenoid (66).
The epiotics (79) articulate with the pterotics (38) on the out- side, with the exoccipitals (72) on the inside, and internoante- riorly with the supraoccipital (35) and parietals (37). The main portion is somewhat pyramidal, with the base turned ante- riorly and outwardly. Posteriorly and obliquely toward the spi- nal column is a broad expanse of thin bone about the same length as the main portion of the bone. This is somewhat fan-like with concentric rings. This thin expanse stands at almost a right angle to the body of the bone. As illustrated in Plate V, fig. 1, they articulate with the opisthotics (123) which overlie the posterolateral portion of the ventral surface of the epiotics. They are seen in Plate II, articulated, from the dorsal side; in Plate V, fig. 1, the posterior fan-like expanse from the ventral side; and in Plate V, fig. 2, is the posterior view. In Plate IV, fig. 1, the right is displayed from the dorsal side, while the left has the ventral side uppermost. In Plate IV, fig. 2, the right side of the posterior portion of the right bone is visible.
The ethmoid (81) is somewhat oval above, with two lateral processes dorsally which articulate with the nasals (16). Lat- erally it articulates with the prefrontals (76), posteriorly with the frontals (36), and ventrally with the parasphenoid (66) and
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus strmtus 25
the vomer (67). Anteriorly are 4 cartilaginous projections, 2 in front and 1 at each side, and posteriorly 1 cartilag- inous projection, which aid in articulation. These projections are shown in the illustration. Ventrally the ethmoid is a much narrower oval, and the thin median ventral portion overlies the median paras phenoid (66) anteriorly. The whole bone is very porous, especially the laterodorsal portions. It is visible from the dorsal side, articulated, in Plate II, and disarticulated in Plate III.
The basisphenoid (83) has rather thick lateral wing-like pro- cesses, which are slightly wider anteriorly than posteriorly, and there is a short spinous portion posteriorly that fits into a longi- tudinal slit-like fossa in the dorsal side of the parasphenoid (66). The lateral portions articulate with the ventral ridges of the frontals (36) and the alisphenoid (122) and slightly with the anterior portions of the prootics (78). Plate III shows it from the dorsal side; Plate IV, fig. 2, shows the anterior process of the right side; and Plate V, fig. 1, the anterior process of the left side — that of the right side not being visible here.
The alisphenoids (122) articulate with the frontals (36), laterally and dorsally, interoventrally with the basisphenoid (83), posteroventrally with the prootics (78), and laterally with the sphenotics (39). They lie close against the ventral side of the frontals, and closely posterior to their ventral process. On the dorsal side there is a flange supporting them against the ventral side of the frontals (36). They are porous and some- what perforated with sensory canals. They are shown in posi- tion in Plate V, fig. 1, from the ventral side, while in Plate III that of the right side is shown from the ventral side, disarti- culated, with the outer margin toward the inside of the plate.
The opisthotics (123) articulate with the exoccipitals (72) and pterotics (38), overlying the space between the two bones named and covering the epiotics (79) on the ventral side. They are seen in Plate IV, fig. 1, the right being shown from the dorsal side, while the left is shown from the ventral side. In Plate V, fig. 1, both are seen from the ventral side in position, and in Plate V, fig. 2, the view is from the posterior. In Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen from the right side. They are somewhat triangular, porous, and perforated by sensory canals. These, together with parts of the epiotics (79) , inclose a small cavity in the ventral side of the latter.
Suborbitals and preorbitals, 18 ^-^. The suborbitals are 18 % 18*, 18«, 182, and 18^ ; and 18« is the preorbital. These are all
26 The Philippine Jotirnal of Science 1914
shown in Plate VI, fig. 2. At the right in the top line all are shown united, while at the left in the same line the bones are shown separately, with the 4th suborbital, 18^, seen from the posterior side showing the flange that forms the posterior side of the orbit. Those in the lower row are seen from the left side and from the outer — lateral — side. All of the orbitals are per- forated by sensory canals almost continuously and with various openings to the exterior. Anteriorly and posteriorly the artic- ulation is with the frontals (36), while 18^-18% inclusive, closely overlie the maxillaries (5). Those at the right, united, are from a somewhat smaller fish than those disarticulated. They are also illustrated in Plate I.
II. SUSPENSORIUM AND OPERCULAR APPARATUS PLATES VII AND VIII
The palatines (2) articulate anteriorly with the vomer (67), with the pterygoids (80) posteriorly, and the mesopterygoids (71) dorsally. The anterior process of the palatines passes dorsally over the maxillaries (5), articulating with them. The palatines are continuous with the pterygoids (80) and the quad- rates (7). The posterior portion of the palatines lies interior to the maxillaries (5). The exterior side is shown in Plate VII and the interior side in Plate VIII.
The quadrates (7) are almost right-triangular in form, the right angle being ventral. Anteriorly there is a broad, flat- tened portion, articulating with the pterygoids (80) and the mesopterygoids (71) and dorsally with the metapterygpids (8). The posterior portion, which is in the form of a broad flat spine at right angles to the anterior portion, projects posteriorly into a fossa in the lower anterior portion of the preopercles (11). On the inside, between the anterior and posterior parts, is a groove, at the bottom of which is a fossa into which the lower spinous portion of the symplectics (9) fits. The wide portion at the right angle articulates with the posterior end of the an- gulars (12). Plate VII shows the quadrates from the exterior side both articulated and disarticulated, while Plate VIII ex- hibits them from the internal side.
The metaptery golds (8) articulate with the mesopterygoids (71) anteriorly, the quadrates (7) ventrally, the symplectics (9) posteriorly, and with the hyomandibulars (10), the frontals (36), and the sphenotics (39) dorsally. From the center of the posterior somewhat square portion there arises an oblique ridge
ix.D, 1 Day: Ophioeephalus striatits 27
on the inside, which passes along the inside of the hyomandi- bulars (10). The outside of the right bone is shown in Plate VII and the inside in Plate VIII. The left is also included in Plate I.
The symplectics (9) consist of a somewhat curved central triangular portion with the base upward, and anteriorly and posteriorly from this extends a wing-like process. They articu- late with the metaptery golds (8) anteriorly, while the pointed ventral portion becomes ankylosed with the inside of the quad- rates (7). They are little more than laminate in the central triangular portion only. The outside of the bone on the right side is shown in Plate VII, and the inside of the bone on the left side of the head is shown in Plate VIII. The left is also included in Plate I.
The hyomandibulars (10) consist of a somewhat columnar head or dorsal portion, from which there projects a ventral lamellar portion, reenforced in the middle region by a thickened triangular area similar to that of the symplectics (9) with which this portion of the hyomandibular articulates. From this lateral part of the bone there projects, at right angles, into the region of the accessory branchial chamber, a lamellar por- tion, internally, which assists in supporting the membranes there. The anterior portion of the head of the hyomandibulars fits into a groove on the ventral surface of the sphenotics (39), the posterior portion fits into a similar but shallower fossa on the ventral surface of the pterotics (38), while the posterior end of the head fits into the socket on the inner, anterior, upper portion of the opercle (14). Ventrally they articulate with the symplectics (9) and the metapterygoids (8), with the interhyals (21) internally, and with the preoperculars (11) posteriorly. They are perforated with canals continuous with those of the preoperculars (11). The outside of the bone of the right side is shown in Plate VII, and the inside of the bone on the left side is shown in Plate VIII, while the left is seen in Plate I.
The outline of the preopercles (11) is clearly shown in the plates. Plate VIII shows the inside of the bone on the left side, and Plate VII the outside of the bone on the right side. They articulate with the hyomandibulars (10), the symplectics (9), and the quadrates (7) anteriorly, with the operculars (14) posteriorly, and the interoperculars (40) on the inside pos- teriorly. On the inside they articulate with the interhyals (21), which lie vertically on the preopercles (11). They are perforated throughout the whole length by sensory canals.
28 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The subopercles (13) articulate with the opercles (14) dorsally, the angle following the lower margin of the same and over- lapping slightly on the inside. Ventrally and anteriorly they articulate with the interopercles (40), and the anterior dorsal process lies on the inside of the median portion of the preopercles (11). They are lamellar throughout except for a slight per- forated thickening anteriorly and dorsally, and are convex on the outside. The inside of the bone on the left side is shown in -Plate VIII, and the outside of the bone on the right side is shown in Plate VII. In. Plate VI, fig. 1, the posterolateral margin of the left is seen from the inside. In Plate I the left is shown from without.
The opercles (14) are roughly right-triangular with the right angle anterior and dorsal, and are convex outwardly. They are thickly lamellar with reenforcements along the anterior margin, dorsoanteriorly, and with a ridge running anteriorly posteriorly about one-third of the distance from the dorsal margin, along the inside. This ridge continues anteriorly in a large expanse, concave anteriorly, which serves for the socket of the posterior end of the head of the hyomandibular (10). The opercles appear to be made up of a considerable number of concentric rings like the shell of the Pelecypoda, with the center, corre- sponding to the umbo of the shell, just inside the socket for the articulation of the posterior end of the head of the hyoman- dibulars (10). The inside of the bone on the left is shown in Plate VIII, and the outside of the bone on the right side is shown in Plate VII. In Plate VI, fig. 1, a part of the inner surface of the left is in view. The left is also seen in Plate I.
In Plate VIII the left interoperculum (40) is shown from the interior and in Plate VII the right from the exterior. In Plate VI, fig. 1, the inner ventral margin of the left may be seen, and in Plate I the left is viewed. The interopercula overlie the branchiostegal rays (22) and a portion of the epihyals (20), and also posteriorly they overlie the anterior margin of the sub- opercles (13). The dorsoanterior portion lies internally with respect to the ventral part of the preopercles (11), with which they articulate. The dorsal process overlies the epihyals (20). Posteriorly the interopercles are somewhat lamellar, while the anterior portion, as also the dorsal process, is somewhat thickened. Anteriorly they articulate with the posterior portions of the angulars (12) and the articulars (4).
The mesoptery golds (71) are thin wing-like bones, somewhat convex on the outside, and about twice as long as broad. They
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 29
articulate forward and on the outside with the palatines (2), on the lower side with the pterygoids (80), posteriorly and ventrally with the palatines (2), on the lower side with the pterygoids (80), posteriorly and ventrally with the quadrates (7), and posteriorly with the metapterygoids (8). They are about as long as the palatines and about three-fourths as long as the frontals (36). The outside of that of the right side is represented in Plate VII and the inside of the left in Plate VIII.
In Plate VIII the interior side of the left pterygoid (80) is shown, and in Plate VII the exterior of the right. They artic- ulate with the palatines (2) anteriorly, the posterior ends of which extend into the anterior fossa in the pterygoids. The posterior end lies inside of, and articulates with, the anterior portion of the quadrates (7). The ventral margin of the meso- pterygoids (71) lies internally to, and articulates with, the in- terior and dorsal margin of the pterygoids. The anterior spinous portion lies along the dorsal side of the palatines (2). At the top of Plate VII the pterygoid is seen still articulated.
III. MANDIBLE PLATE IX
The premaxillaries (1) are curved and tapering from the middle region posteriorly, where they are cartilaginous and almost spinous. At the anterior end is a dorsal process divided into two parts, the more anterior being the higher. The shorter sets just below the nasals (16), while the longer passes dorsally through the opening between the nasals (16) and anteriorly to the supraethmoid (75). The teeth anteriorly on the ventral side are moderately large, while those posteriorly are very fine. On the inside margin of the posterior two-thirds is a ridge of cartilage which is continuous with a short ridge-like process of bone, originating a short distance posterior to the dorsal process. The premaxillaries articulate with the maxillaries (5) anteriorly and posteriorly, lying ventrad to them. They articu- late with each other anteriorly, and the higher dorsal process at the anterior end of each overlies the anterior surface of the supra- ethmoid (75). They lie laterad of the palatines (2) and the pterygoids (80), and the anterior end of each overlies the vomer (67). (Plate I; Plate VI, fig. 1; and Plate IX.) In Plate IX the dorsal side of the left and the central side of the right are exposed. The left is also seen in Plate I.
The left and right dentaries (3) are shown from the dorsal side and the outer lateral side, respectively. They dovetail
30 The Philippine Journal of Science im
into the articular (4) posteriorly, and articulate with each other in front. There is a deep fossa extending anteriorly into the dentaries, opening toward the inside posteriorly, into which the outer longer portion of the articular (4) extends. There is also a canal on the inside of the furrow, leaving two openings anteriorly, one on the ventral side and the other forward on the outside.
There is a single row of large conical teeth extending for a part of the length of the dentaries but not continuing either entirely anteriorly or posteriorly, while posterior to these large teeth are some smaller conical teeth. Anteriorly is a mass of cardiform teeth. Also on the outside of the large teeth is a row of the very small conical teeth, and some of them have still smaller teeth at their bases on the inside. (Plate I and Plate IX.)
The articular s (4) articulate anteriorly with the dentaries (3) and with the quadrates (7) and with the angulars (12) posteriorly. They form an obtuse angle at the outer lower mar- gin, with a high dorsal process at the outer posterior part. Anteriorly are two processes, the outer being the longer and sharper. These two articulate with the dentary (3), the outer and longer process extending into the fossa of the dentary (3) and the other lying along the inside of the dentary (3). The sensory canal in the dentaries (3) is continuous with a similar canal in the articulars. In the depression continuous with that formed by the union of the two anterior processes is a small scale-like bone, the intra-articular (86). (Plates I and IX.)
The maxillaries (5) extend inside the suborbitals (18) just above the premaxillaries (1), articulating with them anteriorly and posteriorly, and the dorsal process fits in between the dorsal processes of the premaxillaries (1) and the anterior processes of the palatines (2). Posteriorly they extend as far as the pos- terior end of the articulars (4) and the dorsal angle of the quadrates (7). The dorsal view of the left is shown in Plate IX, as is also the ventral view of the right, and in Plate I the left is displayed.
The angulars (12) articulate closely with the posterior inner end of the articular sl (4) and with the inter opercles (40) pos- teriorly. The dorsal side of the left is shown disarticulated from the articular (4) and the right still articulated. (Plate IX.)
These **intra-articulars'' (86) lie in the angle of the articulars (4). In Plate VI that of the right side is seen detached, from
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatits 31
the dorsal side, and the left is seen still lying in the angle of the left articular (4). The ventral side is flattened, while the dor- sal is somewhat conical. They lie with the median portion opposite the attachment of Mackel's cartilage with the articulars (4). This name is here given because of the location.
IV. PECTORAL AND PELVIC GIRDLES PLATE X
At the left of Plate X is the left clavicle (62), with the dorsal portion of the postclavicle (77), the hypercoracoid (15), and the hypocoracoid (30) attached, and seen from the inside. To- ward the right is the right clavicle, seen from the outside, and disarticulated. The two clavicles articulate together forward and ventrally, then pass posteriorly diagonally toward the dorsal side, and lie along the interior side of the interopercles (40), the subopercles (13), and the opercles (14). The dorsal por- tion of the clavicles is articulated with the supraclavicles (28). (Plates I and X.) The dorsal end of the clavicles, which is seen toward the bottom of the plate, is somewhat lamellar, but is reenforced posteriorly by a considerable thickening, continuous with the thickening of the middle part of the bones passing upward from the ventral expanded condyles. From the middle portion extends a somewhat lamellar portion, convex anteriorly and concave posteriorly. Within this concavity the hypercora- coid (15) and the hypocoracoid (30) are articulated. _ The anterodorsal spinous process extends interiorly to the posterior end of the supraclavicles (28). The posterior expanse or wing of the right clavicle, which aids in the articulation of the hyper- coracoid (15) and the hypocoracoid (30), is seen a short dis- tance from the dorsal end.
The interior side of the left supraclavicles (28) is shown on the left of Plate X, while that of the right side is seen from the outside. The anterior end articulates with the ventral side of the body of the posttemporal (27). The supraclavicles extend backward along the inside of the opercles (14) and along the outside of the dorsal portion of the clavicles (62) with which they articulate. Along the inside at the dorsal margin there is a fossa which looks as if formed by the rolling over of the dorsal margin. The condyle at the anterior end is somewhat hooked externally, as is shown especially in the bone of the right side. The left is also indicated in Plate I.
Postclavicles, lower part (6). These, as well as the upper part of the postclavicles (77), are lamellar. The upper one-
32 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
third of the lower part lies over or outside of the upper part (77). The form is well shown in Plate X. On the right side of the plate the upper part (77) and lower part lie separately. On the left side of the plate the parts of the left postclavicle overlie the inside of the clavicle (62), the hypercoracoid (15), and the hypocoracoid (30).
The postclavicle, upper part (77), articulates with the pos- terior upper expanse of the clavicles (62), and lies almost parallel with it. The lower end articulates with the lower part of the postclavicle (6). This part of the postclavicle also is lamellar, and the form can be readily seen in Plate X.
On the left side of Plate X the inside of the bases of the pectoral rays (29) of the left side is shown, whil^ on the right side of the plate are the pectoral rays of the right side. These articulate with the actinosts (31) in each fin. In Plate I the left pectoral is present. The number of rays articulating with each of the actinosts may be determined from the plate.
The pelvic rays (33) are attached to the pelvic girdle (32), and are shown in Plate X and, also, in Plate I.
The hypercoracoids (15) are somewhat roughly quadrangular bones, articulating with the actinosts (31), the hypocoracoids (30), and the clavicles (62). In Plate X the left is shown articulated with the hypocoracoid (30) and the clavicle (62), while on the right side it is isolated. Each is pierced by a large foramen. The edge articulating with the actinosts (31) is much thickened, while the remainder is very thin, being thinnest around the foramen. The dorsal portion of the hypo- coracoids extends inward at an angle to conform to the interior of the clavicles (62). The left is indicated in Plate I.
The hypocoracoids (30) are articulated with the clavicles (62) anteriorly by two processes, with the two ventral actinosts (31) posteriorly, and with the hypercoracoids (15) dorsally. In Plate X the left hypocoracoid is seen at the left side, internally, with the ventral portion of the postclavicle (6) lying over it, and articulated with the hypercoracoid (15) and the clavicle (62). On the right side the right hypocoracoid is shown from the outside. Interiorly the ventral portion has an angular furrow, at the bottom of which is the prolongation of the ventral process seen at the top in the plate. The sides of the furrow are lamellar. The dorsal portion is lamellar with a considerable thickening at the region of articulation with the actinosts (31). In Plate I the posterior and ventral portions are to be seen.
The actinosts (31) are 4 in number on each side. The most
rx, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatiis 33
ventral articulates anteriorly with the hypocoracoid (30), the next articulates with the hypocoracoid (30) and the hyper- coracoid (15), and the 2 dorsal ones articulate with the hyper- coracoid (15), while posteriorly all articulate with the pectoral rays (29). The condyles are much thickened, being about 1.5 millimeters, while between them the bones are about 0.5 milli- meter. The epicondyle of the ventral actinost is very thin. The actinosts are found in Plate X, and are shown from within, the left actinosts being at the left side. The right actinosts are represented from the outside. The left actinosts- may also be seen in Plate I.
The pelvic girdle (32) is united anteriorly with the ventral portions of the clavicles (62) by ligaments, and is separated from them a distance about two-thirds its length. The posterior condyles of the two parts of the girdle are much thickened to articulate with the anterior ends of the pelvic rays (33). The right and left parts are shown from the dorsal side in Plate X, and the left part from the left side in Plate I.
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebra, the last but 2 (131 ) , anterior view. X 2.
V. VERTEBRA, RIBS, AND HYPURALS PLATES XI AND XII
The first 3 vertebrae have no transverse processes (46, 47). From the 4th to the 8th they grow longer and extend farther laterally, although they immediately begin to slant ventrally, so that a little posterior to the median abdominal region they are almost vertical. The fossae of the transverse processes of the 3d, 4th, and 5th ribs are turned dorsally, then in the suc- ceeding ribs they begin to turn more and more posteriorly, until in the 18th vertebra they face posteriorly.
The first 2 vertebrae, atlas and axis, receive the articulation of a pair of single ribs, the succeeding 15 vertebrae the articula- tion of a pair of double ribs, and the remainder, except the last 5 vertebrae, have a pair of single ribs articulated.
In Plate XI the atlas (70) is seen from the posterior side and slightly tilted posteriorly, showing the centrum, neural arch, and neural spine. It is seen also in text fig. 2.
The axis (87) is seen from the posterior, showing the centrum,
123716 3
34 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
neural arch (126), and neural spine (43). (Plate XL) This is seen also in text fig. 2.
The 5th vertebra (88) of the spinal column is here seen pos- teriorly. It shows the neural spine (43), neural arch (126), centrum, and transverse processes (46). The last are here horizontal, and receive the articulation of a pair of double ribs. (Refer to Plate XI.) The neural spine of this vertebra may be seen in Plate I.
The 6th vertebra (89), 6th of the spinal column, seen from the left side shows the neural spine (43), while the transverse processes are over the body of the vertebra. Prezygapophyses (127) and small postzygapophyses (128) are seen. This is shown in Plate XI from the left side, and the neural spine is indicated in Plate I.
Fio. 2. Atlas (70) ; axis (87) ; 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae; interneural spines; dorsal rays; and anterior dorsal radials (85 and 115). Natural size.
The 7th vertebra (90) (42 in Plate I) is seen from the anterior side, showing the neural spine (43), the transverse processes (47), the neural arch, and the centrum (97). This is indicated in Plate XI and, also, in Plate I.
The 20th vertebra (91), from the posterior side in Plate XI, shows the transverse process (49), the neural spine (43), the neural arch, and the centrum (98). Transverse processes are here passing toward the vertical. Plate I also shows this ver- tebra from the left side.
The 21st vertebra (92) is viewed from the left side. It shows the prezygapophysis (127), the postzygapophysis (128), neural spine (125 and 43), and the transverse process (49). The transverse processes approach more nearly the vertical. Plates I and XI illustrate this vertebra.
The 22d vertebra (93) shows the neural spine (43), centrum
IX. D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatits 35
(99), and transverse process (49). It is viewed from the an- terior side in Plate XI. In Plate I the left side is shown.
The 7th vertebra (94) from the last, in Plate XI, is viewed from the posterior side showing the neural spine (43), neural arch (126), and centrum (100). It is also seen, articulated, from the left side in Plate I.
The 6th vertebra (95) from the last shows the neural spine (43, 125), prezygapophysis (127), and postzygapophysis (128). This is viewed from the left side. Plate XI represents it from the left side disarticulated, and Plate I, articulated.
The 5th vertebra (96) from the last is viewed from the ante- rior side in Plate XI, showing the centrum (101), the neural spine (43), and the neural arch. Also, Plate I shows it, articu- lated, from the left side.
The last caudal vertebra but 4 (129) illustrated in Plate XII, fig. 2, shows a neural spine (51), haemal spine (52), prezyga- pophysis, postzygapophysis, anterior ventral process, and lat- eral foramina, being seen from the left side.
The last caudal vertebra but 3 (130) in Plate I and Plate XII, fig. 2, shows the same parts as 129, but with much longer neural (51) and hsemal (52) spines.
The last caudal vertebra but 2 (131) in Plate I and Plate XII, fig. 1, shows the same structures as number 129, but the neural and hsemal spines arise from the middle and anterior portion of the centrum of the vertebra. Also, there is a dorsal process on the hsemal spine a short distance from the centrum. This pro- cess on the dorsal side of the hsemal spine (52) helps to artic- ulate with the detached hsemal spine (52) of the last caudal vertebra but 1 (132). The anterior side is illustrated in text fig. 1.
The last caudal vertebra but 1 (132) bears the neural spine (51), prezygapophysis, and hsemal spine (52), the last being detached. This last contains the hsemal arch within itself. In Plate I this is seen in the articulated skeleton, and in Plate XII, fig. 1, it is disarticulated, with the hsemal spine (52) detached.
The hypural vertebra (34) is the last vertebra, and articulates with all of the hypurals except 102 and 103, dorsally, posteriorly, or ventrally. Anteriorly it articulates with the next vertebra. The posterior dorsal process receives the condyles of the hypurals (53) in its deep ventral fossa. It bears prezyga- pophyses (?) which extend dorsally, and the posterior ventral process is at the extreme posterior ventral margin. Plate I and
36 The Philippine Journal of Science isu
Plate XII, fig. 1 (the articulated skeleton), illustrate this vertebra from the left side.
Suspended above the anterior end of the spinal column are the two -anterior dorsal radials (85, 115). In Plate I, as also in text fig. 2, they are represented in their natural positions. It will be observed that the convex side of the first (85) is dorsal, overlying the neural spine of the axis, while the concave side of the second (115) is dorsal, and overlies the neural spine of the third vertebra.
Neural spine 41 is somewhat posterior to the median abdom- inal region.
Neural spine 43 is the spine of the 7th vertebra, bearing Nos. 42 and 90 in Plate I, while in Plate XI it represents the neural spines of all the vertebrae illustrated.
Neural spines 51 are shown in Plate I and in Plate XII, fig. 1 ; the latter are the neural spines in the caudal region. In Plate XII, fig. 1, the vertebrse are disarticulated, while Plate I shows them articulated.
Neural spines 125 are of vertebrae 92 and 95. Other neural spines are No. 43. These are illustrated in Plates I and XL
The neural arch (126) is of the vertebra that is the last but 7, No. 94, and of the 2d and 5th vertebrae, Nos. 87 and 88, in Plate XI.
Haemal spines (52). In Plate I the vertebrae are articulated, and in Plate XII, fig. 1, they are disarticulated. It will be noted that the haemal spine of the last vertebra but 1 is disarticulated from the centrum.
Transverse process (46). This number indicates the trans- verse process of the 5th vertebra, No. 88. Plate XI.
Transverse process (47). This is on the 7th vertebra, Nos. 90 and 42. Plate XL
Transverse process (49). This number indicates the trans- verse process on the 21st vertebra, No. 92; and on the 22d vertebra, No. 93 ; and also in Plate I it indicates the transverse process on the 25th vertebra. (Plate XL)
The prezygapophyses (127) are illustrated in Plate XI, the 21st vertebra being No. 92; and in the last vertebra but 6, No. 95.
The postzygapophyses (128). These are designated in Plate XI in the 6th vertebra. No. 89; the 21st vertebra. No. 92; and in the last vertebra but 6, No. 95.
The anterior ventral process (134) and the posterior ventral
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 37
process (135) are used in Plate XI in describing the last ver- tebra but 6, No. 95.
The hypurals (53) articulate anteriorly with the hypural vertebra (34) and posteriorly with the caudal rays (54, 55). The second from the ventral has its anterodorsal processes designated No. 60. No. 124 lies over the anterior end of the dorsal broad hypural articulating with it, joining this hypural with the dorsal surface of the hypural vertebra (34). The second broad hypural from the dorsal side articulates with the posterodorsal process of the hypural vertebra (34), the next 3 hypurals with the posterior surface of the hypural vertebra (34), while the last broad hypural, or that bearing the process No. 60, articulates with the posterior surface of the hypural vertebra, the two anterodorsal processes passing dorsally at the sides. Lying along the most dorsal broad hypural is the narrow hypural (102) , and below the most ventral broad hypural is also a narrow hypural ( ?) (103) , very similar to 102. (Plates I and XII.)
The anterodorsal processes (60) of the most ventral wide hypural (53) pass off from the anterior dorsal surface of the most ventral wide hypural, extending laterally around the hypural and hypural vertebra (34) lying dorsally, and really forming the haemal arch. The dorsal tips of these processes lie at a considerable distance from the hypurals (53) above, embedded in the muscle. (Plate I and Plate XII, fig. 1.)
Hypural (?) No. 102 articulates with the anterior portion of the most dorsal broad hypural (53) and with the neural spine of the vertebra that is the last but one. It is of a form similar to the neural spines of the four vertebrae anterior to the hypural vertebra, but in thickness, color, and certain other characteristics it resembles the other hypurals (53) although being narrower. It lies between 124 and the body of its hypural (53) and the neural spine of the vertebra that is the last but one, and articulates with them. In Plate I it lies in articulation, while in Plate XII, fig. 1, it is disarticulated.
Hypural (?) No. 124 is the anterior detached portion of the most dorsal wide hypural (53). This bone receives, in the fossa on the ventral side, the anterior dorsal portion of the first broad hypural (53) and articulates with the hypural ver- tebra (34) ventrally and with the neural spine (51) lying in front. With the neural spine (51) just in front, it forms an arch dorsad of the body of the hypural vertebra (34). Plate
38 The Philippine Journal of Science lau
I illustrates it still articulated, while Plate XII, fig. 1, represents it detached.
Rays of caudal fin No. 54 articulate with the posterior ends of the hypurals (53) clasping around them and on the dorsal side with the neural spines (51) of the 2 vertebrae immediately preceding the hypural vertebra (34). On the ventral side they articulate with the haemal spines (52) of 3 caudal vertebrae immediately preceding the hypural vertebra (34). (Plate I.) No. 55 is used in Plate I to indicate the caudal rays at the dorsal side. These are short, those in the median region being the longest, the fin being homocercal.
RIBS
Articulated with the atlas and axis is a pair of single ribs. Posterior to these are about 15 pairs of double ribs, while pos- terior to these there is a pair of single ribs articulated with each of the vertebrae except the last 5 in the caudal region. In the last 4 pairs of double ribs the more dorsal is articulated to the transverse process, not at the place with the ventral, but slightly proximally, and so may be designated epipleurals. The last 3 double ribs in Plate I show this condition.
Rib 48 is in the anterior abdominal region in Plate I.
Rib 50 is attached to the 28th vertebra as shown in Plate I.
Rib 56 is in the posterior abdominal region, and is articulated with the 38th vertebra. (Plate L)
Ribs 59 are the ventral of the first 3 double ribs, those of the right side lying above. They are articulated with the 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae, respectively.
Ribs 61 are the dorsal of the first 3 double ribs. These are articulated with the 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae. (Plate XII, fig. 2.)
The 13th upper double rib (104). All of these ribs at the bottom are of the left side of the body, and those at the top of the right side. Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 13th lower double rib (105) is seen in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 14th upper double rib (106) is seen in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 14th lower double rib (107). Anteriorly to this point, the dorsal ribs have been the longer. (Plate XII, fig. 2.)
The 15th upper double rib (108). Here the lower instead of the upper double rib is the longer. (Plate XII, fig. 2.)
The 15th lower double rib (109) is in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 25th rib (110) of the trunk is a single rib, and is il- lustrated in Plate XII, fig. 2.
ix,D. 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 39
The 26th rib (111) of the trunk is shown in Plate XII, fig. 2. The 39th rib of the trunk (112), a single rib, is illustrated in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 40th rib (113) is shown in Plate XII, fig. 2. The 41st rib (114) is represented in Plate XII, fig. 2.
VI. HYOID APPARATUS PLATE XIII
Plate XIII shows the hyals from the outside, except the urohyal (68), which is seen from the ventral side. On the left side of the plate the hypohyal (84) , the ceratohyal (19) , and the epihyal (20) are shown articulated, while on the right side they are shown disarticulated.
The ceratohyal (19) is shown in the natural size, the anterior end being 4.5 millimeters in thickness and the posterior end 3 millimeters. Along the exteroventral margin is a fossa for the articulation of the branchiostegals (22).
The flange on the ceratohyal is seen not to be continuous with that of the epihyal (20). The first and second branchiostegals (22) are articulated with the ceratohyal, and the end of the third is opposite the V-shaped opening on the ventral side between the pterygoid (80) on the outside and the urohyal (68) on the inside. The ends are much splintered, especially the posterior end. These are also seen from the dorsal side in Plate XV.
The outHne of the epihyals (20) is clearly seen in Plate XIII. The ventral side has a wide flange similar to that on the cera- tohyals (19) for the articulation of the branchiostegals (22). The posterior end has a condyle 4 millimeters thick. The anterior end is splintered with a very large process or "splinter'' on the ventral side, which fits into a fossa in the posterior end of the ceratohyal (19).
The end of the third branchiostegal ray overlies the V-shaped interruption between the ceratohyals (19) and the epihyals on the ventral side, and the 4th and 5th rays articulate with the flange of the epihyals. Dorsally, at the extreme posterior end, the epihyals articulate with the ventral end of the interhyals (21). The epihyals he opposite the posterior end of the quad- rates (7), the ventral end of the preopercles (11), and the dorsal anterior portion of the interopercles (40). The dorsal portion of the extreme posterior end lies at the side of the
40
The Philippine Journal of Science
ceratobranchials (63) of the first branchial arch. In Plate XIII the exterior side of the bones is shown at the right and left sides. They are also seen from the dorsal side in Plate XV.
In Plate XIII the anterior side of the interhyals (21) lies in view. The condyle of the ventral end is larger than that of the dorsal end, and articulates with the glenoid fossa of the epihyals (20). The epicondyle, which here lies below, in its natural position is toward the interior. That of the left side is indistinctly seen in Plate XV.
The branchiostegals (22) are seen from the exterior and are curved as shown in Plate XIII. The anterior two articulate with the ceratohyals (19), the 3d lies over the V-shaped in-
FlG. 3. Hypohyals (84), ceratonyals (19), epihyals (20), and branchiostegal rays (22). "Teeth" are found on some of the rays. Natural size.
terval between the ceratohyals (19) and the epihyals (20), and the 4th and 5th articulate with the epihyals (20). They lie opposite the inner surfaces of the interopercles (40), the sub- opercles (13) , and the opercles (14) . In one specimen examined, the 2d and 3d branchiostegals on the right side are seen to be notched or toothed as shown in text fig. 3, and on the left side the third is of like structure. In Plate XI the branchios- tegals are in position, and the extended epibranchials (64) and superior pharyngeals (23) are underneath the posterior ends. Plate VI, fig. 1, shows those of the left side from the interior. From the ventral side the urohyal (68) presents a flat, sgme- what oval surface, with a posterior spinous portion. However,
ix.i>.i Day: Ophiocephalus striatits 41
the median line and the seeming posterior portion indicate the presence of a dorsal lamellar flange at right angles to the part shown. The anterior view shows the urohyal to be somewhat like an inverted t seen in text fig. 4. Anteriorly, both the horizontal and vertical lamellae are thickened, so that the anterior end is of the shape shown in the figure. It articulates by the anteroventral fossa with the ventral side of the second basi- branchial (17). Laterally and anteriorly it lies between, and articulates with, the hypohyals (84) and continues posteriorly between the ceratohyals (19) and the branchiostegals (22). (Plates VI and XIII.)
The hypohyals (84) articulate with each other just anterior to the urohyal (68) and with the anterior portion, both hori- zontal and vertical, of the urohyal. Poste- riorly they articulate with the ceratohyals (19) . Dorsally they articulate with the first basibranchial (17) and also with the ventral vertical ridge of the same. On the left side the hypohyal is still articulated with the ceratohyal (19), while on the right side the right hypohyal is disarticulated. These are seen from the outer side. In Plate XV the ^^"teriortw'' xT' posterodorsal condyles articulate with the second basibranchial (17) internally. The hypohyals are per- forated with sensory canals. These are illustrated in Plate VI, fig. 1, and Plates XIII and XV.
VII. DORSAL RAYS AND INTERNEURAL SPINES AND ANAL RAYS AND INTERH^MAL SPINES
The interneural spines and the interhsemal spines articulate with the dorsal rays and anal rays, respectively, by ball-and- socket joints. Between the two lateral parts of the rays at the proximal ends are situated small spherical bodies (cartilaginous nodules) which fit into the sockets at the distal ends of the spines. In Plate XIV one of those posteriorly in the anal fin is seen disarticulated and others in both fins are plainly visible. Certain of the rays in both dorsal and anal fins present the posterior view, which shows the two lateral parts of the rays, their partial separation at the proximal end, and the cartilag- inous nodules lying between their proximal ends.
All of both the interneural and interhsemal spines are repre- sented from the left side, the left side of the plate being anterior. The posterior dorsal rays are not represented.
42
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
The form, outline, and articulation of the dorsal rays and the interneural spine, as well as the same characters of the anal rays and interhsemal spines, are shown in text fig. 5.
The interneural spines (44) of the anterior abdominal region are illustrated in Plate I, and in Plate XIV they are disarticulated. Dorsal ray (45) . In Plates I and XIV this number indicates the 8th dorsal ray, shown from the left side. ' Dorsal ray (116). This is the second, and is seen in Plates I and XIV.
The 6th ray of the dorsal fin (121) is indicated in Plates I and XIV. In the latter plate it is exposed from the posterior
side, while in Plate I it is still articulated and is in the natural position.
The interhsemal spine (57) is in the posterior abdominal region. The first spine in this series is almost straight, with a condyle at its ventral ex- tremity to articulate with the anal ray. In the others there is an anterior vertical fossa, while the posterior portion is lamellar. No. 117. This is illustrated in Plates I and XIV. In- terhsemal spines (117). The 19th and 20th spines are indicated by this number in Plates I and XIV, being situated in the posterior abdominal region.
Rays of the anal fin (58). This number in Plates I and XIV represents one of the anal rays from the posterior side, showing the two lateral portions and the cartilaginous nodule between their distal ends.
Interneural spines (82) , The spines indicated by this number, 82, in Plates I and XIV are in the posterior abdominal region. In Plate XIV the dorsal rays in this region are not represented, but they are present in Plate I.
Anal ray (118). The 3d anal ray in Plates I and XIV bears this number.
The 24th anal ray is labeled 119 in Plates I and XIV. Anal rays 4 to 11 are indicated by number 120 in Plates I and XIV. Those in Plate XIV are viewed from the posterior
FiQ. 5. Dorsal ray, interneural spine, anal ray, interhaemal spine, and cartilaginous nodules. The nodules are seen between the rays and spine. X1.5.
ix,D. 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 43
side, except the 5th, which presents the left side and shows no cartilaginous nodule. They lie opposite the corresponding inter- haemal spines.
VIII. BRANCHIAL APPARATUS
PLATES XV AND XVI
Basibranchials (17). These are clearly illustrated in Plates XV and XVI, in the former articulated, and in the latter dis- articulated, but contiguous to those bones with which they are articulated.
The 1st is thickest at the posterior end, where it is not quite as thick as wide. A slight ridge extends from the anterior to the posterior end on the ventral side.
The 2d is seen from the dorsal side, but, as the bone is rather deep, a profile drawing from the left side is shown in text fig. 6.
The 3d is about two-thirds as thick as broad, and has fossae at the articulations of the hypobranchials (24) of the second branchial arch and also at the posterior end.
The 4th basibranchial has a shaft posteriorly, becomes thinner, and just posterior to the middle widens out into 2 thin lateral flanges. Anteriorly, it is broadly wedge-shaped.
Hypobranchials (24) of the first arch. The outline of the hypobranchials of the first arch is shown in Plate XVI, except the epicondyle of the interior end. The dorsal portion of the interior end articulates with the lateral fossa of the 3d basi- branchial (17). The epicondyle passes to the ventral side of the 3d basibranchial (17) and forward, articulating with the posterior ventral portion of the 2d basibranchial (17). The anterior process is almost lamellar. Laterally and distally these hypobranchials articulate with the ceratobranchial (63). The anterolateral margin is covered with small detachable plates of cardiform teeth (133) which take the place of gill rakers.
Hypobranchials of the 2d arch. These bones articulate distally with the ceratobranchials (63). Proximally the articulation is with the fossae of the 4th basibranchial (17), the posteroventral margin of the 3d basibranchial, and with the anteroventral process of the hypobranchials of the 3d branchial arch. They are convex anterodorsally and concave posteroventrally. The ventral anterolateral epicondyle is lamellar. The anterolateral surface is covered with detachable plates of cardiform teeth.
Hypobranchials of the 3d arch. The outline is clearly seen in Plate XVI. Medially and posteriorly they articulate with
44 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
the ceratobranchials (63) of the 4th arch, the posterodorsal por- tion of the 4th basibranchial (17), and the hypobranchials of the 3d arch on the opposite side. Distally they articulate with the ceratobranchials (63) of the 3d arch. The anterior process articulates with the proximal ventral epicondyle of the hypo- branchials of the 2d branchial arch and with the anterior process of the hypobranchials of the 3d arch on the opposite side.
Unlike other hypobranchials, those of the 3d arch have areas of cardiform teeth on the posterodorsal side which are firmly fixed and not detachable. Also, these areas are much larger than the detachable areas of the other hypobranchials and modified epibranchials (74) of the 1st branchial arch. There are no hypobranchials in the 4th branchial arch.
In Plate XV the hypobranchials are still articulated, and are shown from the dorsal side.
Upper or superior pharyngeals (23). These are designated by 23^ 23^ 23*, referring to the different branchial arches, 232 articulates with the epibranchial (64) of the 2d arch, 23^ articulates with the epibranchial (64) of the 3d arch, and 23* articulates with the epibranchial (64) of the 4th arch. In Plates XV and XVI the upper pharyngeals are shown moved outwardly and posteriorly, together with the epibranchials (64), on the articulation of the epibranchials and the ceratobranchials (63) as a hinge. In the latter plate they are not articulated, while they are in the former. In their natural position the upper pharyngeals lie dorsad of the inferior pharyngeals (25), so that their toothed surfaces lie together. The upper pharyn- geals of the 2d and 3d arches and the epibranchials (64) of the 2d arch articulate with the ventral side of the basioccipital (69).
In some specimens examined, certain of the teeth of the superior pharyngeals of the 4th arch were seen to be growing from the sides of large sockets, presumably of larger, more mature teeth already shed.
Lower or inferior pharyngeals (25). These are articulated anteriorly and laterally with the ceratobranchials (63) of the 4th branchial arch, the posterodorsal portion lying interior to the ceratobranchials (63). As seen in Plate XVI, they are provided with teeth which increase in size posteriorly. They are very small anteriorly and very large posteriorly. Along the posterior margin small teeth are seen in large sockets — the same condition existing as is described in No. 23. Plate VI, fig. 1, and Plates XV and XVI illustrate these.
ix,D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 45
Ceratobranchials (63). These are concave below and convex above. The condyles or glenoid surfaces of the proximal ends are much larger than those of the distal ends. All are at least slightly concave. Those of the 1st, 2d, and 3d branchial arches articulate with the hypobranehials (24) proximally and distally with the epibranchials (74) of the 1st branchial arch and (64) of the 2d and 3d branchial arches. As there are no hypo- branehials (24) of the 4th branchial arch, the ceratobranchials of this arch articulate proximally with the hypobranehials (24) of the 3d branchial arch, the 4th basibranchial, and the proximal end of the inferior pharyngeals (25). Distally the articulation is with the distal end of the epibranchials (64) of the 4th branchial arch. All of the ceratobranchials are covered, on the convex surface, with detachable patches of cardiform teeth, the same as are spoken of in the descriptions of the hypobranehials (24) and the epibranchials (74) of the 1st branchial arch. The margins of the concavity on the ventral side of each of the ceratobranchials are fringed with branchial lamellae. (Plates XV and XVI.)
Epibranchials (74) of the first branchial arch. These bones form a part of the accessory branchial apparatus. Each con- sists of a dorsal vertical portion, about two-fifths of the total length, which articulates dorsally with the margin of the flat ventral portion of the pterotic (38), where the pterctic forms a part of the roof of the accessory branchial chamber. Contin- uous with the dorsal spinous portion and at the internal angle of the more ventral lamellar part is a thickening or reenforce- ment which becomes thicker at the ventral end where this epi- branchial articulates with the ceratobranchial (63) of the first branchial arch. The lower portion is lamellar, with a broad internal more ventral part at an angle of about 60 degrees to an external lateral portion, which extends farther dorsally into the accessory branchial chamber. Ventrally the broad edge of the posterior portion and the narrow ventral part of the flange at an angle are continuous with the posterolateral end of the first ceratobranchial (63), helping to form the first branchial arch. The whole ventral margin and, also, the ventral part of the in- terior angle are provided with the detachable patches of cardiform teeth (133), as in the ceratobranchials (63) and the hypobran- ehials (24). In Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen from the outer side, in Plate XVI both are seen from the inner side, disarticu- lated, and in Plate XV the left is but indistinctly seen.
Epibranchials (64) of the 2d branchial arch. These artic-
46
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
ulate distally with the ceratobranchials (63) of the 2d bran- chial arch and with the ventrolateral region of the basioccipital (69) and the superior pharyngeals (23 ^) of the 2d branchial arch internally and ventrally, respectively. Because of being
66
17
17
Fig. 6. Glossohyal (65) ; basibranchials (17) of the 1st, 2d, and 3 branchial arches from the left side ; the basibranchial of the 2d arch in detail. X 2.
extended, the ventral instead of the dorsal surface is shown. The dorsal surface is concave, with the outside of the curve, the region of the epicondyle, lying anteriorly and dorsad of the cera- tobranchials (63) and the anterior portion of the inferior pha- ryngeals (25). The proximal or internal condyle or that which articulates with the basioccipital (69) is much larger than that which articulates with the ceratobranchials (63) of the 2d branchial arch.
Epibranchials of the 3d branchial arch. These bones also are seen from the ventral side. The articulations distally are with the ceratobranchials of the 3d branchial arch and proxi- mally with the superior pharyngeals (23^) of the 3d arch. The two epicondyles shown at the top in Plate XVI lie dorsad in posi- tion against the anterior surface of the epibranchials of the 4th arch. The large condyle articulates with the dorsal surface of the superior pharyngeals (23 *) of the 4th branchial arch.
The epibranchials are seen in Plates XV and XVI.
Glossohyal (65). The more solid central por- tion of the glossohyal is shown articulated with the anterior end of the first basibranchial (17). The complete outline is shown in text fig. 7, the central, more solid portion being indicated. The glossohyal in small specimens is entirely carti- laginous, with the anterior and lateral margins much softer than the central portion. The draw- ing is the actual size of the glossohyal from a different fish from that of Plate XVI. In Plate XV the glossohyal has been re- moved. (Plate XVI.)
This number (133) in Plate VI, fig. 1, and in Plate XV in-
Fig. 7. Glossohyal (65), dorsal view, showinsT the more solid central por- tion. X 1.5.
IX, D, 1
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus
47
dicates detachable plates of cardiform teeth found on the branchial arches.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bridge, T. W. Fishes. Cambridge Natural History. Macmillan and Co.,
London (1904), 7, 141-537. Parker, T. Jeffery, and Haswell, Wm. A. A Text-book of Zoology.
London (1910). Goodrich, E. S. Vertebrata Craniata (First fascicle: Cyclostomes and
Fishes). A Treatise on Zoology edited by Ray Lankester. Adam and
Charles Black, London (1909), Part IX. Cuvier, Georges, and Valenciennes, Achille. Histoire naturelle des
Poissons. Paris, F. G. Levrault (1828), 1-2, and Plates I-III. Starks, Edwin Chapin. Synonymy of the fish skeleton. Proc, Wash,
Acad, Sci, (1901), 3, 507-539. Idem. The osteological characters of the genus Sebastolobus. Proc. Cal.
Acad. Sci., Zool. (1897-1899), III, 1, 361-370. WiEDERSHEiM, ROBERT. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates. Adapted by
W. N. Parker, 3d ed. Macmillan and Co., London (1907).
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Actinosts, 81. Alisphenoid, 122. Anal ray, 3d, 118. 24th, 119.
4th to 11th inclusive, 120. Angular, 12. Anterior dorsal radials, 85, 115.
ventral process, 134. Articular, 4. Atlas, 70. Axis, 87.
Basibranchials, 17. Basioccipital, 69. Basisphenoid, 83. Branchiostegals, 22. Caudal fin-rays, 64, 65. Cardiform teeth, patches of, 133. Centrum of the 7th vertebra, 97.
20th vertebra, bearing No.
91, 98. 22d vertebra, bearing No.
93, 99. vertebra, the last but 7, bear- ing No. 94, 100. Centrum of vertebra, the last but 5, bearing
No. 96, 101. Ceratobranchials, 63. Ceratohyal, 19. Clavicle, 62. Dentary, 3. Dorsal rays, 45. Dorsal ray, the 2d, 116. the 6th, 121. Epibranchial, 64.
modified, arch, 74. Epihyal, 20. Epiotic, 79.
of Ist branchial
Ethmoid, 81. Exoccipital, 72. Frontal, 36. Glossohyal, 65. Hsemal spine, 52. Hyomandibular, 10. Hypercoracoid, 15. Hypocoracoid, 80. Hypobranchial, 24. Hypural, 63, 102, 108.
anterior part of most dorsal, broad, 124.
vertebra, 34. Hypohyal, 84.
Inferior or lower pharyngeals, 25. Interhaemal spine, 57.
of 19th and 20th verte- brae, 117. Interhyal, 21. Intemeural spine, 44, 82. Interopercular or interopercle, Intra-articular, 86. Lower or inferior pharyngeals. Maxillary, 5. Mesopterygoid, 71. Metapterygoid, 8. Naaal, 16. Neural arch on vertebrse bearing Nos. 87, 88,
and 94, 126. spine, 41, 43, 51, 125. spines of vertebras bearing Nos. 92
and 95, 126. Operculum, 14. Opisthotic, 123. Otolith, 73. Palatine, 2. Parasphenoid, 66. Parietal, 37.
40.
25.
48
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Patches of cardiform teeth, 133. Pectoral rays, 29. Pelvic fin, 33.
girdle, 32. Pharyngobranchial (see Inferior pha- ryngeals ) . Postclavicle, upper part, 77. Postclavicle, lower part, 6. Posterior ventral process, 135. Posttemporal, 27. Postzygapophyses, 128. Prefrontal, 76. Premaxillary, 1. Preopercle, 11. Preorbital, 18. Prezygapophyses, 127. Prootic, 78. Pterotic, 38. Pterygoid, 80. Quadrate, 7. Rib, second single or 19th, 48.
11th and 12th single, 50.
22d and 23d single, 56.
lower of double ribs, 59.
upper of double ribs, 61.
upper double, the 13th, 104.
lower double, the 13th, 105.
upper double, the 14th, 106.
14th double, 107.
15th upper double, 108.
15th lower double, 109.
25th, 110.
26th, 111.
39th, 112.
Rib, 40th, 113.
41st, 114.
Sphenotic, 39.
Spine on lowest wide hypural, 60. Subopercle, 13. Suborbitals, 18.
Superior or upper pharyngeals, 23. Supraclavicle, 28. Supraethmoid, 75. Supraoccipital, 35. Supratemporal, 26. Symplectic, 9.
Transverse process, 46, 47, 49. Upper or superior pharyngeals, 23. Urohyal, 68. Ventral process, anterior, 134.
posterior, 135. Vertebra, the 2d, 87.
hypural, 34.
the 5th, 88.
the 6th, 89.
the 7th, 90 in Plate XI; 42 In Plate I.
the 20th, 91.
the 21st, 92.
the 22d, 93.
the last but 7, 94.
the last but 6, 95.
the last but 5, 96.
the last but 4, 129.
the last but 3, 130.
the last but 2, 131.
the last but 1, 132. Vomer, 67.
NUMERICAL INDEX
|
1. Premaxillary. |
30. |
|
|
2. Palatine. |
81. |
|
|
3. Dentary. |
32. |
|
|
4. Articular. |
33. |
|
|
5. Maxillary. |
34. |
|
|
6. Postclavicle, lower |
part (see 77). |
85. |
|
7. Quadrate. |
36. |
|
|
8. Metapterygoid. |
37. |
|
|
9. Symplectic. |
38. |
|
|
10. Hyomandibular. |
39. |
|
|
11. Preopercle. |
40. |
|
|
12. Angular. |
41. |
|
|
13. Suboperculum. |
42. |
|
|
14. Operculum. |
||
|
15. Hypercoracoid. |
43. |
|
|
16. Nasal. |
44. |
|
|
17. Basibranchials. |
45. |
|
|
18. Orbitals. |
46. |
|
|
19. Ceratohyal. |
47. |
|
|
20. Epihyal. |
48. |
|
|
21. Interhyal. |
49. |
|
|
22. Branchiostegals. |
50. |
|
|
23. Upper or superior |
pharyngeals. |
51. |
|
24. Hypobranchials. |
52. |
|
|
25. Lower or inferior pharyngeals. |
53. |
|
|
26. Supratemporal. |
54. |
|
|
27. Posttemporal. |
65. |
|
|
28. Supraclavicle. |
56. |
|
|
29. Pectoral rays. |
Hypocoracoid.
Actinosts.
Pelvic girdle.
Pelvic fin.
Hypural vertebra.
Supraoccipital.
Frontal.
Parietal.
Pterotic.
Sphenotic.
Interoperculum.
Neural spines.
Seventh vertebra in Plate I. (In Plat«
XII this vertebra is No. 90.) Neural spines. Interneural spine. Dorsal rays.
Transverse process (see 47 and 49). Transverse process (see 46 and 49). Rib, 19th.
Transverse process (see 46 and 47). Ribs, 11th and 12th single. Neural spine. Haemal spine. Hypural. Caudal rays. Caudal rays. Rib, posterior abdominal, 22d and 23d
single.
IX, D, 1
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus
49
57. Interhsemal spine.
58. Anal rays.
69. Ribs, Plate XII, ventral of double ribs.
60. Spine on lowest wide hypural.
61. Dorsal of double ribs, Plate XII.
62. Clavicle.
63. Ceratobranchials.
64. Epibranchials.
65. Glossohyal.
66. Parasphenoid.
67. Vomer.
68. Urohyal.
69. Basioccipital.
70. Atlas.
71. Mesopterygoid.
72. Exoccipital.
73. Otoliths.
74. Epibranchial modified of let branchial
arch.
75. Supraethmoid.
76. Prefrontal.
77. Postclavicle, upper part.
78. Prootic.
79. Epiotic.
80. Pterygoid.
81. Ethmoid.
82. Interneural spines.
83. Basisphenoid.
84. Hypohyals.
85. Anterior dorsal radial.
86. Intra-articular.
87. Vertebra, the 2d, axis.
88. Vertebra, the 5th.
89. Vertebra, the 6th.
90. Vertebra, the 7th in Plate XI and
No. 42 in Plate I.
91. Vertebra, the 20th.
92. Vertebra, the 21st.
93. Vertebra, the 22d.
94. Vertebra, the last but 7.
95. Vertebra, the last but 6.
96. Vertebra, the last but 5.
97. Centrum of vertebra, the 7th, bearingr
No. 90. 123716 4
98. Centrum of vertebra, the 20th, bearingr
No. 91.
99. Centrum of vertebra, the 22d, bearingr
No. 93.
100. Centrum of vertebra, the last but 7,
bearing No. 94.
101. Centrum of vertebra, the laat but 5.
bearing No. 96.
102. Hypural (?) 108. Hypural ( ?)
104. Upper double rib, the 13th.
105. Lower double rib, the 13th.
106. Upper double rib, the 14th.
107. Lower double rib, the 14th.
108. Upper double rib. the 15th.
109. Lower double rib, the 15th.
110. Rib, the 25th.
111. Rib, the 26th.
112. Rib, the 39th.
113. Rib, the 40th.
114. Rib, the 41st.
115. Anterior dorsal radial.
116. Second dorsal ray.
117. 19th and 20th interhsemal spines.
118. 3d anal ray.
119. 24th ray of anal fin.
120. Anal rays, 4th to 11th inclusive.
121. 6th ray of dorsal fin.
122. Alisphenoid.
123. Opisthotic.
124. Upper anterior part of hypural.
125. Neural spines of vertebrae bearing Nos.
92 and 95.
126. Neural arch of vertebwe bearinflr Noe,
87, 88, and 94.
127. Prezygapophyses.
128. Postzygapophyses.
129. Last vertebra but 4.
130. Last vertebra but 3.
131. Last vertebra but 2.
132. Last vertebra but 1.
183. Patches of cardiform teeth on brainchial
arches in Plate XVIL i34. Anterior ventral process. 135. Posterior ventral process.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plates from photographs by Day and Martin; text figures from drawings by Espinosa. The species represented in all of the plates and the text figures is OphiocephaluM atriatug Bloch.
Plate I The whole skeleton, articulated; from the left side.
Plate la Anterior part of skeleton, natural size.
Plate lb Middle part of skeleton, natural size.
Plate Ic Posterior part of skeleton, actual size.
Plate II
The top of the skull from the dorsal side.
16, nasal. 67, vomer.
26, supratemporal. 72, exoccipital.
27, posttemporal. 73, otoliths.
35, supraoccipital. 75, supraethmoid.
36, frontal. 76, prefrontal.
37, parietal. 79, epiotic.
38, pterotic. 81, ethmoid.
39, sphenotic.
Plate III
A part of the disarticulated skull.
16, nasal, from dorsal side.
36, frontals, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
37, parietals, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
38, pterotics, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
39, sphenotics, left from dorsal side and right from ventral. Q6, parasphenoid, from the dorsal side.
67, vomer, from the dorsal side.
73, otoliths, left from the inside and right from the outside.
76, prefrontals, from the dorsal side.
78, prootics, left from dorsal side and right from ventral. . 81, ethmoid, from the dorsal side.
83, basisphenoid, from the dorsal side. 122, alisphenoid, right from the ventral side.
51
52 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
Plate IV
Fig. 1. Posterior portion of disarticulated skull. The left side of the figure is anterior. 35, supraoccipital, from the dorsal side. 69, basioccipital, from the dorsal side. 72, exoccipitals, from the dorsal side.
79, epiotics, left from ventral side and right from dorsal. 123, opisthotics, left from ventral side and right from dorsal. 2. Top of skull from right side.
36, frontal. 72, exoccipital.
38, pterotic. 76, prefrontal.
39, sphenotic. 78, prootic.
66, parasphenoid. 79, epiotic.
67, vomer. 83, basisphenoid. 69, basioccipital.
Plate V
Fig. 1. Ventral side of top of skull.
35, supraoccipital. 72, exoccipital.
36, frontal. 76, prefrontal.
38, pterotic. 78, prootic.
39, sphenotic. 79, epiotic.
66, parasphenoid. 83, basisphenoid.
67, vomer. 122, alisphenoid. 69, basioccipital. 123, opisthotic.
2. Posterior view of top of skull.
35, supraoccipital. 72, exoccipital. 38, pterotic. 79, epiotic.
69, basioccipital. 123, opisthotic.
Plate VI
Fig. 1, Right side of skull with suspensorium and jaws removed. 1, premaxillary. 65, glossohyal.
13, suboperculum. 66, parasphenoid.
14, operculum. 67, vomer. 16, nasal. 68, urohyal. 22, branchiostegals. 70, atlas.
25, lower or inferior pha- 72, exoccipital.
ryngeals. 74, epibranchial, modified of Ist
26, supratemporal. branchial arch.
27, posttemporal. 76, prefrontal.
36, frontal. 78, prootic.
38, pterotic. 84, hypohyal.
39, sphenotic. 123, opisthotic.
40, interoperculum. 133, patches of cardiform teeth. 2. Orbitals.
18* to 18", suborbitals; 18^ of top row from the posterior side. 18", preorbital from outside.
IX, D. 1 Day: Ophiocephalus atriatus 53
Plate VII
Suspensorium, opercles, and palatine. All the bones of the right side are seen from the outside. Those at the top — articulated — are from a smaller specimen than those below.
2, palatine. 13, suboperculum.
7, quadrate. 14, operculum.
8, metapterygoid. 40, interoperculum.
9, symplectic. 71, mesopterygoid. 10, hyomandibular. 80, pterygoid.
11, preoperculum.
Plate VIII
Suspensorium, opercles, and palatine. The bones of the left side seen from the inside.
2, palatine. 13, suboperculum.
7, quadrate. 14, operculum.
8, metapterygoid. 40, interoperculum.
9, symplectic. 71, mesopterygoid.
10, hyomandibular. 80, pterygoid.
11, preoperculum.
Plate IX The mandible.
1, premaxillaries, left from dorsal and right from ventral side.
3, dentaries, left from dorsal and right from outer side.
4, articulars, left from dorsal and right from outer side.
5, maxillaries, left from dorsal and right from ventral side. 12, angular, right from outer side.
86, intra-articulars from dorsal side.
Plate X The girdles.
6, postclavicles ; lower part, left from inside, right from out-
side. 15, hypercoracoid ; left from inside, right from outside.
28, supraclavicles ; left from inside, right from outside.
29, pectoral rays ; left from inside, right from outside.
30, hypocoracoid ; left from inside, right from outside.
31, actinosts; left from inside, right from outside.
32, pelvic girdle; from dorsal side.
33, pelvic rays; from dorsal side.
62, clavicles; left from inside, right from outside.
77, postclavicle ; upper part, left from inside, right from outside.
54
The Philippine Journal of Science
Plate XI
Anterior and median abdominal vertebrae. 43, neural spine. 97,
46, transverse process.
47, transverse process. 98, 49, transverse process.
70, atlas. 99,
87, axis.
88, 5th vertebra. 100,
89, 6th vertebra.
90, 7th vertebra. 101,
91, 20th vertebra.
92, 21st vertebra. 126,
93, 22d vertebra.
94, vertebra, the last but 127,
seven. 128,
95, vertebra, the last but 134,
six. 135,
96, vertebra, the last but
five.
centrum of vertebra, the 7th bearing No. 90.
centrum of vertebra, the 20th bearing No. 91.
centrum of vertebra, the 22d bearing No. 93.
centrum of vertebra, the last but seven bearing No. 94.
centrum of vertebra, the last but five bearing No. 96.
neural arch of vertebra, bear- ing Nos. 87, 88, and 94.
prezygapophyses.
postzygapophyses.
anterior ventral process.
posterior ventral process.
Plate XII
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebrae and hypurals.
34, hypural vertebra.
51, neural spine.
52, haemal spine.
53, hypural.
60, anterodorsal spine of
hypural. 102, hypural. 2. Ribs.
59, ventral of double ribs.
61, dorsal of double ribs.
104, upper double rib ; the
13th.
105, lower double rib; the
13th.
106, upper double rib; the
14th.
103, hypural.
124, upper anterior part of hypural.
129, last vertebra but four.
130, last vertebra but three.
131, last vertebra but two.
132, last vertebra but one.
107, lower double rib ; the 14th.
108, upper double rib; the 15th.
109, lower double rib; the 15th,
110, rib; the 25th.
111, rib; the 26th.
112, rib; the 39th.
113, rib; the 40th.
114, rib; the 41st.
Plate XIII
Hyoid apparatus.
19, ceratohyals, from
outside.
20, epihyals, from out-
side.
21, interhyals, from out-
side.
22, branchiostegals, from outside. 68, urohyal, from ventral side. 84, hypohyals, from outside.
IX, D. J
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus
55
Plate XIV
Interneural spines and dorsal rays and interhaemal spines and anal rays.
44, interneural spine, an- 117, 19th and 20th interhaemal spines.
terior abdominal. 45, dorsal rays.
57, interhaemal spine.
58, anal rays.
82, interneural spines. 116, second dorsal ray, from left side.
118, 3d anal ray.
119, 24th ray of anal fin.
120, 4th to 11th anal rays.
121, 6th ray of dorsal fin, from pos-
terior end.
Plate XV
Branchial arches, articulated. 17, basibranchials.
19, ceratohyal.
20, epihyal.
21, interhyal.
22, branchiostegals.
23, upper or superior
pharyngeals.
24, hypobranchials.
25, lower or inferior pharyngeals.
64, epibranchials.
74, epibranchials, modified of 1st
branchial arch. 84, hypohyal. 133, patches of cardiform teeth on
branchial arches.
Plate XVI
Branchial arches, disarticulated. 17, basibranchials.
23, upper, or superior
pharyngeals.
24, hypobranchials.
25, lower or inferior
pharyngeals.
63, ceratobranchials.
64, epibranchials.
65, glossohyal, central, more solid
portion. 74, epibranchial, modified of 1st branchial arch.
text figures
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebra, the last but 2 (131), anterior view.
2. Atlas (70) ; axis (87) ; 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae; interneural
spines; dorsal rays; and anterior dorsal radials (85 and 115).
3. Hypohyals (84), ceratohyals (19), epihyals (20), and branchios-
tegal rays (22). "Teeth" are found on some of the rays.
4. Urohyal (68), anterior view.
5. Dorsal ray, interneural spine, and ray, interhaemal spine, and carti-
laginous nodules. The nodules are seen between the rays and spines.
6. Glossohyal (65) ; basibranchials (17) of the 1st, 2d, and 3d bran-
chial arches from the left side; the basibranchial of the 2d arch in detail.
7. Glossohyal (65), dorsal view, showing the more solid central
portion.
I- <
<
-I
Q.
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
PLATE II. THE TOP OF THE SKULL FROM THE DORSAL SIDE.
3
<
_J
O
I-
<
<
Q.
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Posterior portion of disarticulated skuli.
Fig. 2. Top of skull from the right side. PLATE IV.
Day: Ophiocrphalus striatus.1
[Phil. Journ. Scl, IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Ventral side of top of skull.
Fig. 2. Posterior view of top of skull. PLATE V.
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.1
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Right side of skull with suspensorium and jaws removed.
Fig. 2. Orbitals. PLATE VI.
55
O DC U Q. O
oc o
Q. CO
> UJ
I- <
-J
Q.
X
<
Q.
0. O
s
QC O
UJ
-J m
Q
z <
UJ
I »-
<
Q.
Q
O Q
m
<
<
Q UJ
Q Z <
O
(T UJ
Z <
<
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.]
[Phil. Journ. Sri., IX, D, No. l.
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebrae and hypurals.
or "7 i.i
Fig. 2. Ribs. PLATE XII.
D
<
< Q. Q.
O
>- X
< Q.
PL,
>- <
<
Q
<
>- < QC
CO O Q
< QC
Z
I- <
D O
<
I O DC <
<
I
<
_i Q.
NOTE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF A FLYING CRUSTACEAN IN THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
By Dean C. Worcester {Manila f P. L)
While fishing along the base of a limestone cliff in Bacuit Bay, Palawan, during the month of December, 1912, I saw close to my launch what I at first mistook for a peculiarly formed flying fish of some species which I had never previously observed. It was translucent, rose from the water somewhat sharply, and **flew" not more than two or three rods before dropping into the water again.
The more I pondered on what I had seen the more it seemed to me that the creature could not be a fish. It had looked more like a crayfish or shrimp, with one or two pairs of much flat- tened legs directed forward and others curving backward, the legs and the lobes of the tail making the supporting planes.
On the evening of August 15, 1913, when trolling off the edge of the shoal extending in a southeasterly direction from East Island near the coast of Palawan, I again saw the same sort of a creature, and this time there was no mistaking it. It rose close to the boat, mounted into the air rapidly, then held a level course for a short distance, and dropped suddenly into the water again. It was unquestionably a very transparent crustacean, from 15 to 20 centimeters in length.
On the morning of August 17, when trolling off the shoal on the north side of Lumbucan Island, I saw a third specimen, and later in Malampaya Sound I saw a fourth. At this place Mr. W. Schultze, of the Bureau of Science, also saw one, and there remains no doubt of the existence in the Philippines of a marine crustacean, from 15 to 25 centimeters in length, which has the power of rising rapidly from the water and "flying,'* after the fashion of a flying fish, for several rods.
The specimens observed by me invariably rose against the wind.
57
FISHES OF HONGKONG
By Alvin Seale
(From the Section of Ichthyology, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.)
Two plates
The following notes are based on a collection of fishes secured by me from the markets in Hongkong during the month of Au- gust, 1910. The native names of the fishes are copied from the Hongkong Official Market Report of April 28, 1910. With but few exceptions the species here listed are used as food by the people of Hongkong.
The measurements given are: 1, length of head in length of fish without caudal; 2, greatest depth in length to last caudal vertebra ; 3, length of head, exclusive of opercular flap, in length of fish without caudal. The scale count is from head to last caudal vertebra; total length is taken from tip of snout to tip of caudal fin. The numerals given at the end of each description are the numbers of the specimens in the collection of the Bureau of Science, Manila.
ENGRAULID^. (Anchovies)
Anchovia dussumieri Cuv. and Val.
This species is characterized by the elongate posterior exten- sion of the maxillary which ends on a line with the anterior third of the ventral fins. (6398.)
Anchovia indica (Van Hasselt). Engraulis russelli Gunther. Dorsal, 15; anal, 19; length, 5.5 to end of vertebra; 3 or 4 elongate spines on belly in front of ventrals. (6393, 6394, 6397, 6399, 6400, 6401, 6402, 6403, 6404, 6405, 6407.)
SYNODONTID^. (Lizard fishes)
Trachinocephalus myops (Forster).
One specimen. (6595.)
Synodus japonicus (Houttuyn).
(6573, 6590, 6592, 6615, 6653, 6665.)
59
60 The Philippine Journal of Science isu
CYFRINID^. (Carp, li yu)
Cyprinus carpio (Linn.).
Six specimens of the common carp were secured. This fish is extensively cultivated in Canton and brought alive to the Hongkong markets where it is kept in large fresh-water tanks. The Chinese seem to be very fond of the soft flesh of this species (6472, 6538, 6539, 6540, 6542, 6547).
SILURID^. (Catfishes, chik yu)
Ariiis falcarius Richardson.
Three specimens; length, 150 to 160 millimeters. (6587, 6627, 6659.)
PLOTOSID^. (Naked catfishes)
Plotosus arab (ForskM).
Seven specimens. Color brown with 2 longitudinal white bands. Length, 50 to 200 millimeters. (6570, 6591, 6597, 6617, 6619, 6628, 6825.)
BELONID^. (Gar fishes, fa paw poong)
Tylosurus caudimaculatus (Cuvier).
Head, 2.90 to end of caudal vertebra ; snout, 4.30 ; eye slightly less than the interorbital space; dorsal, 14; anal, 17. (6475.)
EXOCCETID^. (Flying fishes)
Cypsilurus simus (Cuv. and Val.).
Dorsal, 12; anal, 8; ventrals reaching middle of anal base; pectorals uniform dark blue, neither banded nor spotted. (6529, 6534, 6545.)
Hemiramphus cantoris Bleeker. (Half beak)
Head, 2.3 to end of caudal vertebra; snout beyond end of upper jaw, 2.25 in length; eye slightly less than interorbital space; dorsal, 15; anal, 14; upper lobe of caudal strongly tipped with black, lower lobe yellowish. Length, 195 to 225 millimeters, (6473, 6487, 6514, 6517, 6525, 6537.)
ATHERINID^. (Silversides) Atherina forskilii Riippell.
Length, 51 to 60 millimeters. (7687, 7688.) Atherina bleekeri Giinther.
Length, 65 millimeters. (6406.)
IX, D, 1 Scale: Fishes of Hongkong 61
MUGILID^. (Mullets, chal yu)
Mugil longimanus Gunther.
Scales, 32-12 ; dorsal, IV, 8 ; anal. III, 9. A dark spot in axil of pectorals ; tip of caudal dusky ; tip of soft dorsal dusky ; max- illary completely hidden; adipose eyelid well developed; origin of dorsal over the anterior third of anal ; pectorals equal to length of head ; origin of spinous dorsal midway between end of caudal vertebra and origin of ventrals. (6270, 6273, 6274, 6276, 6278, 6279, 6282, 6283, 6284, 6286.)
Mugil cephalus Linn. (Striped mullet.)
Mugil oeur ForskAl.
Mugil macrolipidotus Richardson.
Dorsal, IV, 8; anal. III, 8; scales, 38-40; head, 3.90; depth, 4; eye about equal to snout; a dusky stripe on center of each series of scales on upper half of body; a large dusky blotch on base of pectorals, adipose eyelid present and covering all of eye except pupil. Maxillary hidden except at tip. (6280, 6285.)
Mugil planiceps Cuv. and Val.
Greenish brown above, each series of scales with a darker line; pectorals short, equal to length from center of eye to posterior margin of opercles ; adipose eyelid narrow, of greatest width posteriorly, scarcely covering half of iris ; no spot in axil of pectorals; maxillary showing at tip. (6281.)
SPHYR.3ENID.E. (Barracudas)
Sphyrsena obtusata Cuv. and Val.
Head, 3; depth, 6; eye, 5.5; opercle ending in a single point. Length, 120 to 375 millimeters. (6452, 6492, 6496, 6498, 6507.)
Sphyraena jello Cuv. and Val. (Banded barracuda.)
One specimen, length, 175 millimeters. This species is charac- terized by the 16 dark bands over the back, the very small scales, and the 2 points on the opercle. (6448.)
POLYNEMID^. (Threadfins)
Polydactylus tetradactylus Shaw.
Four pectoral appendages ; tip of dorsal black ; pectorals usually with a grayish wash. (6341, 6360, 6361, 6362, 6364.)
62 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Polydactylus plebeius (Broussonet).
Young with 5 pectoral appendages, some of them of greater length than the pectorals; a black spot above origin of lateral line; tip of dorsals dusky; caudal lobes elongate, grayish at tip. (6368.)
FISTULARIID^. (Cornet fishes) Fistularia serrata Cuv.
Two specimens were secured, length, 320 and 410 millimeters, respectively ; a young, probably of this species, has the scutes less developed, and is also characterized by some darker bars over the back. (6494, 6530.)
HOLOCENTRID^. (Soldier fishes) Holocentrus ruber Lacepede.
This beautiful species is very common in Hongkong. Length, 160 to 210 millimeters. (6395, 6396.)
SCOMBRID^. (Mackerels, chi yu) Scomberomorus guttatum (Bloch) .
This is one of the best flavored fishes of the Hongkong market. Length, 223 millimeters. (7757.)
CARANGID^. (Cavallas) Trachums trachurus Linn.
This species is characterized by the plates which extend the entire length of the lateral line ; opercular spot, black. Length, 135 to 137 millimeters. (7759, 7765.) Scomberoides lysan (Forsk&l).
Length, 130 millimeters. (7769.) Caranx ophthalmotsenia (Bleeker).
Length, 75 to 120 millimeters. (7760, 7766, 7770, 7771.) Caranx malabaricus (Bloch and Sch.).
Length, 120 millimeters. (7764.) Caranx boops Cuv. and Val.
Length, 80 to 90 millimeters. (7763, 7772.) Caranx calla Cuv. and Val.
Length, 150 millimeters. (7762.) Caranx djeddaba (Forskal).
Length, 200 millimeters. (7761.)
ix,D.i Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 63
STROMATEID^. (Butterfishes)
Stromateus niger Bloch. (Black pomfret, hak chong.)
The dorsal and anal rays are elongate and extend to a line with base of caudal; the ventrals extend to origin of anal. In specimens 10 centimeters in length, the ventrals and dorsal are considerably shorter and there is but a slight trace of a keel on the caudal peduncle. The very young are marked with indistinct dusky bands, and there is a dusky spot at the base of each lobe of caudal. (5405, 6289, 6291, 6299, 6315, 6317, 6318.)
Stromateus argenteus Bloch. (White pomfret, pak chong.)
Young. — No ventrals; no spines before dorsal or anal, the lobe of caudal not elongate, color white. (6311, 6312, 6320.)
EQUULID^. (Slip mouths)
Equula insidiator (Bloch).
Length, 90 to 107 millimeters. Ten specimens. (6575, 6586, 6621, 6636, 6638, 6639, 6642, 6657, 6663, 6672.)
Equula ruconia (Hamilton-Buchanan) .
One specimen, length, 56 millimeters. (6676.) Leiognathus edwardsi Evermann and Seale.
Length, 60 to 170 millimeters. (6558, 6582, 6601, 6631, 6632, 6637, 6658, 6669, 6670.)
Leiognathus virgatus Fowler.
Length, 60 to 67 millimeters. (6551, 6584, 6645, 6655, 6673.)
Leiognathus daura (Cuvier).
Tip of snout and a portion of nape, dark. Length, 90 to 95 millimeters. (6565, 6599, 6662, 7394.)
APOGONICHTHYID^. (Cardinal fishes)
Amia elizabethae Jordan and Seale. Length, 42 millimeters. (6335.)
Amia bifasciata (Riippell). (Yang sun ko.) Amia trimaculatus Richardson. Yellowish with a dusky vertical strip from the origin of spinous dorsal downward, another from the anterior portion of soft dorsal; a round spot at base of caudal; ventrals dusky; dorsal, caudal, and anal grayish. (6287, 6288, 6295, 6307, 6308.)
64 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Amia marginatus Doderlein.
Color in alcohol yellowish ; top of head and nuchal region with fine black specks; top of dorsals black, a black band through middle of soft dorsal; tips of anal and caudal dusky. (6290, 6294, 6302, 6348.)
Amia doderleini Jordan and Snyder.
Color in alcohol yellowish; a blackish stripe from snout through eye to the round distinct caudal spot ; a dark line from above eye to near the upper margin of the caudal spot, another from subopercle to just below the caudal spot, another (fre- quently obliterated) on sides of belly, and another (often oblit- erated) along the base of the dorsal fins; a black line through bases of anal and soft dorsal; tips of caudal, soft dorsal, and anal grayish. (6266, 6292, 6298.)
Amia semilineatus (Schlegel).
Color in alcohol yellowish white; a jet black caudal spot; a black line from tip of snout through eye to posterior margin of opercle, another from snout over interorbital space to below origin of soft dorsal, and a third on median line of nuchal region; tip of spinous dorsal black. (6304.)
Amia lineatns (Schlegel).
Color in alcohol yellowish white, with a silvery wash on sides; about 11 or 12 vertical dark bars on each side, scarcely as wide as interspaces; tip of spinous dorsal and tip of caudal grayish. (6345, 6353.)
Amia kiensis Jordan and Snyder.
This is undoubtedly the species discovered and figured by Jordan and Snyder, but I suspect that it is A. frsenata of Valen- ciennes; it is most certainly the species figured by Day as A, frsenata. All of our specimens are without the caudal spot, the dark line from tip of snout extends to tip of caudal, the second dusky line is from tip of snout above eye to upper margin of caudal peduncle; the most persistent marking in all ages is the dusky tip to ventrals which is present in all speci- mens. There is a dark line through base of anal and soft dorsal. (6296, 6297, 6300, 6301, 6310, 6325, 6327, 6328, 6329, 6333, 6334, 6336, 6338, 6339, 6340, 6343, 6351, 6354, 6357, 6359.)
ix.D,i Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 65
AMBASSID^. (Wharf fishes)
Priopis urotaenia (Bleeker).
Color yellowish white; a silver stripe from head to caudal; membrane between 2d and 3d dorsal spines dusky; 2 rows of scales on cheeks. (6323, 6324, 6326, 6330, 6331, 6332, 6337, 6342, 6346, 6347, 6352, 6355, 6356.)
SERRANID^. (Garoupa, sek pan)
Cephalopholis boenack (Bloch).
One specimen, length, 180 millimeters. (7776.) Epinephelus moara (Schlegel).
This species is characterized by the 7 bands of dark brown over the back, the 2 or 3 anterior ones extending forward on to the head. This fish is well figured by Jordan and Seale.^ Fif- teen specimens. (7712, 7722, 7724, 7725, 7780, 7781, 7790.)
Epinephelus septemfasciatus Thunb.
Thirteen specimens of this species were secured. Length, 60 to 210 millimeters. This species is characterized by the 8 black vertical bands over the body; there are some enlarged teeth at the angle of the preopercle. (7778, 7779, 7782, 7783, 7791- 7799.)
Epinephelus boenack (Bloch) .
One specimen, this fish resembles somewhat E. septemfasciatits, but it has less distinct bands on the sides and the preopercular angle is distinctly rounded, with the teeth scarcely enlarged at angle. Length, 120 millimeters. (1784.)
Epinephelus merra Bloch.
This is a food fish of considerable importance in Hongkong. One specimen, length, 176 millimeters. (7715.)
Epinephelus dermopterus (Temm. and Schleg.).
Head, 3; depth, 2.55; eye slightly less than interorbital, 5 in head; snout slightly longer than diameter of eye; maxillary ex- tending to a line with anterior margin of pupil ; posterior margin of preopercle almost straight, some enlarged teeth at angle.
Dorsal, XI, 21; anal, IH, 10; about 135 rows of scales from head to end of caudal vertebra; caudal rounded, body covered
^Proc. Davenport Acad. Sci, (1905), 10, PI. 5.
123716 5
66 The Philippiyie Journal of Science 1914
with minute ctenoid scales ; teeth in 2 or more rows ; 2 enlarged curved canines anteriorly.
Color uniform brown, fins all darker, being almost black pos- teriorly; length, 111 to 185 millimeters. (7756, 7757.)
Epinephelns gilberti Richardson.
Color yellowish brown, with round darker brown spots the size of pulpil, over body. Two specimens, length, 235 to 270 millimeters. (7795, 7797.)
LUTIANID^. (Snapper, lap yu)
Lutianus annularis (Cuv. and Val.).
Luiianus erythropterus Day.
This species is distinguished by the black stripe from snout to origin of dorsal; the black saddle over the caudal peduncle bordered anteriorly and posteriorly with white; dark lines on body; ventrals tipped with black. Six specimens, length, 75 to 120 millimeters. (7704, 7705, 7706, 7707, 7708, 7709.)
Lutianus monostigma (Cuv. and Val.).
One specimen, length, 104 millimeters. (7753.) Lutianus erythropterus Bloch.
This species resembles L. vitta, but is without the dark line on sides. Length, 67 to 180 millimeters. (7732, 7748, 7749, 7752, 7754, 7755.)
Nemipterus japonicus (Bloch).
Length, 98 to 115 millimeters. (7750, 7751.) Diploprion bifasciatum (Kuhl and Van Hasselt) .
This species is characterized by the 2 broad black bands which are very distinct even in alcoholic specimens. Length, 185 to 190 millimeters. (7773, 7774.)
THERAPONID^. (Grunts)
Scolopsis vosmeri Bleeker.
This species is easily distinguished by the silvery white saddle over the neck and the black spot in upper axil of pectorals. Length, 140 millimeters. (7726.)
Therapon cuvieri (Bleeker).
Six specimens, length, 105 to 127 millimeters. The dark stripes terminate at the caudal, the markings below the median line of the side are almost obliterated. (7728, 7730, 7731, 7734, 7736, 7737.)
IX.D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 67
Therapon theraps (Cuv. and VaL).
Four small specimens, length, 95 to 105 millimeters. A com- mon food fish of Hongkong. (7727, 7729, 7733, 7735.)
Therapon jarbua (Forskal).
Length, 51 to 72 millimeters. (7679, 7680, 7681, 7682, 7683, 7684, 7685.)
H^MULID^
Prlstapoma hast a Bloch.
Six young specimens (6562, 6671, 7689, 7690, 7691, 7692) have the bands over the back; length, 65 millimeters. In the large specimen (7697) these bands are broken up into black spots; length, 170 millimeters.
SPARID^. (Porgies)
Lethrinus mahsenoides Ehrenberg.
All of these specimens show the round black spots below the lateral line above the middle of pectorals. Length, 100 to 120 millimeters. (7693, 7694, 7695, 7696.)
Spams datnia (Hamilton).
A food fish of importance. Length, 100 to 115 millimeters. (7744, 7746, 7747.)
Sparus berda Forskal.
Length, 110 to 142 millimeters. (7738, 7739, 7740, 7741, 7742, 7743, 7745.)
GERRID^. (Moj arras)
Xystaema punctatum (Cuv. and Val).
Length, 67 to 100 millimeters. (6564, 6572, 6667.)
MULLID^. (Surmullets) .
Upeneus displurus Playfair.
Color yellowish, with a slight brownish wash above. A yellow stripe from eye to below second dorsal, a second yellow stripe from upper lip through lower border of eye to below second dor- sal; these give the appearance of a brown stripe to the area between the two yellow lines ; a yellow saddle over free portion of tail, a brown stripe down sides of snout. In old specimens the first dorsal is clouded with brown and the second dorsal and the anal are indistinctly barred with pale brown; in young specimens the fin markings are indistinct. (6444, 6457, 648S, 6506, 6512, 6513.)
68 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
XJpeneus bensasi (Temm. and Schleg.)-
No yellow band on sides (in alcohol), the dorsal with dusky bands; teeth of vomer very distinct — ^those of the palatine in an interrupted band. (6429, 6442.)
Upeneoides sulphureus (Cuv. and Val.).
One specimen. (6244.) Upeneoides moluccensis Bleeker.
Head, 3.75; depth, 3.5; eye, 3.75; snout, 2.60; interorbital, 3.50 ; depth of caudal peduncle, 2.75 ; scales, 34 to end of caudal vertebra; villiform teeth in jaws, vomer, and palatines; dorsal, VIII, 1, 8; anal, 1, 6. The palatine teeth form a continuous band on each side ; the vomerine teeth consist of a minute patch on the head of the vomer, easily overlooked. Length of the spinous dorsal is 1.20 in the depth of the fish. Color in alcohol pale yellowish brown above, yellow below, a bright orange band from eye to caudal; spinous dorsal, soft dorsal, and upper lobe of caudal with about 4 cross bars; tip of spinous dorsal dusky. It is probable that U, moluccensis Bleeker will be found to be synonymous with U. bensasi Temminck and Schlegel as these specimens partake of the characters ascribed to each of these species, with a predominance of those ascribed to U. moluccensis. (6420, 6423, 6425, 6431, 6436, 6441, 6445, 6458, 6460, 6488, 6526.)
Upeneoides tragula (Richardson).
This fish is known to the Chinese as yang tswan or yeung tsun. It is a common food fish in the Hongkong market. The color is yellowish white with a dusky stripe along the middle of side from eye to caudal. The body is thickly dotted with small brownish spots. The caudal has 4 oblique dusky bars. The dorsal fins are marked with blackish. Length, 20 centimeters. (6440.)
SCIu^NID^. (Croakers)
Sciaena diacanthus (Lacepede).
Corvina catalea Richardson.
Dorsal, IX, I, 20; anal, II, 7; scales about 52 in lateral line. Color in alcohol grayish yellow, dark spots on back and sides, pectorals and anal dark, remaining fins spotted, caudal very acute; teeth of upper jaw rather large, teeth of lower jaw large, upper jaw overhanging. Length, 50 to 70 millimeters. (6344, 6358, 6426, 6428, 6491, 6516, 7710.)
ix,D. 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 69
Scisena aneus Bloch.
Length, 60 to 125 millimeters. (6349, 6350, 6415, 6456, 6461, 6467, 6481, 6490, 6497, 6520, 6544, 6674.)
Sciaenoides biauritus Cantor.
Length, 150 to 165 millimeters. (6421, 6476.)
SILLAGINID^. (Whitings)
Sillago sihama (Forskal).
One specimen, length, 165 milHmeters. (6480.) Sillago maculata Quoy and Gaimard.
Two specimens, length, 141 to 165 centimeters. (6471, 6532.)
CEPOLID^. (Bandfishes)
Acanthocepola krusensternii (Temm. and Schleg.).
A narrow dark margin on anal and posterior portion of dorsal. Length, 130 to 140 millimeters. (6550, 6583, 6596, 6661, 7387, 7389.)
CIRRHITID^. (Sea goldfishes)
Cirrhitities aureus (Temm. and Schleg.).
When alive these fish were golden in color, but in alcohol 5 or more very indistinct dusky vertical bands are visible on the body. It is probable that C. oxycephalus of Bleeker and C aureus Temminck and Schlegel are the some species. These specimens have teeth on vomer and palatine. One specimen has the first dorsal ray prolonged into a filament. (6585, 8654.)
LABRID.gE. (Wrasse fishes, wong fa yu)
Duymaeria flagellifera Cuv. and Val.
Duymasria aurigaria Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1862), 4, 121. Duymxria flagellifera Jordan and Snyder, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1902), 24, 623.
This species exhibits a large variety of color patterns, and shows great diversity in the length of the dorsal filaments. All of our specimens show the black tip to opercle. (6563, 6567, 6569, 6600, 6609, 6641, 6651.)
Thalassoma lunare (Linn.).
Characterized by the longitudinal purple bar extending on to the 4th to 8th pectoral rays. (6610.)
70 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Stethojulis kalosoma Bleeker.
Color dull yellowish, lighter below; a dark, white-margined stripe from slightly below eye to a line with origin of soft dorsal fin; each scale on the lower posterior portion of body with a round brown spot; no spot on caudal or dorsal. (6635.)
Halichoeres dussumieri (Cuv. and Val.).
Julis exomatus Richardson, Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845
(1846), 258. Halichceres nigrescens Bleeker.
(6568, 6578, 6584, 6605, 6614, 6647, 6652.) Halichoeres javanicus Bleeker.
Color in alcohol yellowish, with 6 irregular purplish bands over the back, these being made up of purplish spots; dorsal with yellowish rings; anal with yellowish rings, almost obliter- ated in one specimen and entirely faded out in another; head with yellowish violet specks; a blue spot behind orbit and in axil of pectorals. (6580, 6589, 6626.)
Halichoeres poecilopterus (Schlegel).
One specimen, length, 170 millimeters. (6648.) Choerops ommopterus Richardson.
Dorsal spines, 12; scales of lateral line, 30; color in alcohol dull greenish, almost all the scales on the side showing a short vertical blue mark; on the caudal peduncle the blue marks are longitudinal instead of vertical, these form a'bciut 5 blue stripes on each side of the caudal peduncle; a blue stripe from angle of mouth to margin of opercle ; a blue circle on base of pectoral ; a darker line from eye along sides of snout to upper jaw; some blue lines on upper opercle; a jet-black spot below the base of the last dorsal spines. No yellowish area behind this spot as in C. schoenlieni Bleeker. Anal fin with blue lines and spots ; ventrals yellowish, with slight markings of blue; none of the fins elongate. Length, 22 centimeters. (6571.)
SCARICHTHYID.E. (Parrot fishes, kai kung yu)
Callyodon limbatus (Richardson) . (6555, 6556, 6557, 6558, 6559.)
Callyodon dubius Bennett.
Pseudoscarus aeruginosa Gunther. Color in alcohol pale greenish brown, 3 white stripes on sides of belly; lips wide, 3 rows of scales on cheeks, the lowest row of 2 scales. (6603, 6611.)
IX, D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 71
EPHIPPID^. (Indian spade fishes, ying kung)
Ephippus orbis (Bloch).
Color yellowish with round blackish spots, usually larger than eye. The young have a dark ocular band, with the addition of a second dusky band on the shoulders. (6303, 6306, 6316, 6322.)
DREPANIDuE. (Spade fishes)
Drepane punctata (Gmelin). (Ke lung tsang.)
Drepana punctata Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1860), 2, 62; Richardson, Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845 (1846), 244,
One specimen. (6277.)
CH^TODONTID^. (Butterfly fishes)
Chaetodon aureus Temm. and Schleg.
Ocular band about equal in width to eye and with a broad yellowish white area in front and back of eye; ventrals yellow; the brownish lines on the rows of scales are almost longitudinal, except on shoulders where they are decidedly oblique ; the caudal has a terminal margin of white and a narrow black line at a short distance from the margin. To this species belong C collaris Jordan and Fowler ^ and C. aureus Gunther both of which are from Japan. Evidently Richardson suspected that C aureus Temminck and Schlegel and C. collaris Bloch might be the same, for he says that, "they agree tolerably well,*' which makes it certain they did not agree fully ; therefore, he was not warranted in uniting them.
Chxtodon reticulatus Cuvier and Valenciennes is quite distinct from both C, aureus Temminck and Schlegel and C. collaris Bloch, and is characterized by the broad black ocular band, which in most of its length is of much greater width than the eye; the lower portion of the ocular band extends backward to the origin of the ventrals and covers a large part of the thorax ; the ventrals are yellow; the caudal has a very narrow margin of white with 2 black intermarginal lines separated by a yellow band ; the base of caudal is jet black. Chxtodon prMextatus Cantor seems to be a valid species most nearly related to C. collaris of Bloch, being characterized by the dusky ventrals, wide ocular band, and black tip to the opercles; Gunther, who has specimens of both C. prsetextatus and (7. collaris, regards them as being different.
'Proc. U. S. Nat Mus. (1902), 25, 534.
72 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
Cheetodon collaris Bloch.
Chastodon collaris Day, Fishes of India, Atlas (1878), PL 27, fig. 6; Sleeker, Atlas Ichth. (1877), 9, PL 23, fig. 2; Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1860), 2, 21; Jordan and Evermann, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1903), 25, 356.
This species, which is without doubt C. collaris of Day, of Bleeker, and of Gunther, is characterized by the dark ventrals, comparative narrow ocular band which does not extend to the origin of the ventrals, and the color of caudal which is broadly margined with white with a broad black bar near its center. Chsetodon collans Giinther ^ is possibly a variety of C. reticulatus Cuvier and Valenciennes with the black ocular band extending backward on the thorax to the origin of the ventrals ; it certainly has but slight resemblance to Bloch's type of C collaris. The species described by Jordan and Evermann * is probably distinct and should be described as such.
Chaetodon modestus Temm. and Schleg.
Chsetodon desmotes Jordan and Fowler, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1902), 25, 539.
This species is related to C. rafflesii Bennett which is, however, probably a valid species. (6293.)
Chaetodon bella-maris Scale, sp. nov. Plate I, fig. 1.
Head, 3.10 in length without caudal; depth, 1.45; eye, 3.15 in head; snout slightly greater than diameter of eye; interorbital space slightly greater than snout; dorsal, XII, 23; anal. III, 21; lateral line strongly curved, ending at axil of soft dorsal, pores 46 ; scales in 34 series between head and end of caudal vertebra, 23 in a vertical series; head covered with fine scales; mouth small; teeth setiform; gill rakers low and pointed, about 17 on lower arch; spinous dorsal fitting into a scaled sheath at base, the 4th, 5th, and 6th spines the longest; soft dorsal rounded, no rays prolonged, length of longest ray but slightly less than head; caudal 1.35 in head, its margin almost straight; anal similar to soft dorsal; ventrals equal to length of head without opercular flap; a large axillary scale; pectorals equal to head with opercular flap.
Color in life yellowish, a black ocular band which is slightly greater than width of eye above the eye and slightly less than width of eye below; this band is continuous above, and extends to margin of subopercular below the eye; the band is margined
• Giinther, Fische der Sudsee (1873-75), Heft II, Taf. 31 A.
* Jordan and Evermann, Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus. (1903), 25, 356.
ix,D, 1 Scale: Fishes of Hongkong 73
anteriorly and posteriorly with white; snout yellow; the tip of upper jaw black; a large black wedge-shaped mark on shoulder from spinous dorsal to the white border of the ocular band ; this black area has a narrow prong of black extending from its pos- terior margin to upper tip of opercle ; a narrow black margin to dorsal; a wide submarginal black band on posterior half of caudal; tip of caudal white; 12 to 14 rather wide, indistinct, brownish lines extending obliquely forward and downward on rows of scales; anal yellowish, with a marginal brown band; ventrals and pectorals yellowish.
This species is related to C, lunula Lac^pede (C. fasciatus Bleeker), but differs in lacking the second black area on the shoulders and the semilunar band of black on soft dorsal, our specimen being without any black on the caudal peduncle, which according to Gunther is present in C. lunula at all ages.
Type is No. 6321, Bureau of Science collection, collected in the Hongkong market by Seale, 1910.
Microcanthus strigatus (Cuv. and Val.).
Microcanthus strigatus Cuv. AND Val., Hist. Pcis. (1831), 7, 25, PI. 120; Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1880), 11, 34; Jordan and Fowler, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1902), 25, 541.
Color in alcohol yellowish with about 5 or 6 longitudinal, slightly inclined, brown stripes, about the width of the eye. Spinous dorsal blackish, stripes on body projected into anal fin, ventrals with dusky tip ; pectorals and caudal yellowish. (6313.)
SIGANID^. (Siganids) Siganus oramin (Bloch and Schn.).
Scattered white spots over body, caudal indistinctly barred, upper margin of eye serrated ; a distinct shoulder spot. Length, from 80 to 205 millimeters. (6417, 6442, 6446, 6451, 6482, 6483, 6518, 6574, 6604, 6606, 6613, 6618, 6620, 6622, 7392.)
MONACANTHID^. (File fishes, hih pe yang)
Monacanthus chinensis (Bloch).
Monacanthus chinensis Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1870), 8, 236; Richardson, Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845 (1846), 201. (6566, 6634.)
Monacanthus setifer Bennett.
Monacanthus setifer Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1870), 8, 239; Schlegel, Fauna Japonica (1842), 290, PI. 130, fig. 1 (good).
Dorsal, 32 ; anal, 32. The second dorsal ray produced. Color in alcohol brown with obscure blackish spots or streaks.
74 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Monacanthus lineolatus Richardson.
Color in alcohol dirty light brown with from 6 to 8 fine dark lines on the body from head to near caudal. A dark spot below anterior half of soft dorsal, a dark blotch on opercles, margin of ventral membrane black, caudal with 2 dusky bands. This species is well described by Richardson.^ (6629.)
TETRAODONTID^. (Puffers)
Spheroides spadiceus (Richardson).
This fish is believed to be poisonous. (6366, 6367, 6370, 6373, 6374, 6375, 6376, 6377, 6378, 6380, 6381, 6382, 6384, 6385.)
ELEOTRID.^.^ (Eleotrids)
Bostrychus sinensis (Lacepede).
This species is very common in Hongkong. It is distinguished by the black ocellus on the upper base of the caudal rays. Length, 110 to 150 millimeters. (6414, 6424, 6427, 6450, 6465.)
Butis butis (Hamilton-Buchanan).
Length, 117 millimeters. (6433.) Butis caperata Cantor.
Distinguished from B, butis by the shorter head, shorter snout, and larger eye. Length, 65 millimeters. (6495.)
GOBHD^. (Gobies)
Boleophthalmns chinensis (Osbeck).
Gobius pectinirostris Gmelin. Boleophthalmns boddaerti Schlegel.
Length, 90 to 110 millimeters. (6410, 6413, 6454, 6466, 6468, 6469.)
Boleophthalmus glaucus Day.
Length, 67 millimeters. (6531.) Rhinogobius hongkongensis Seale, sp. nov. Plate I, fig. 2.
Head, 4; depth, 5.60 without caudal; eye, 3.1 in head; snout equal to eye; interorbital space a narrow ridge; dorsal, VI, 12; anal, 11; scales 25 to end of vertebra, 8| in a vertical series;
• Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845 (1846), 201.
•It seems advisable to advance the subfamily of Eleotrinse to the posi- tion of a family characterized by the separate ventrals, and thus in part separating the cumbersome family Gobiidae.
ix.D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 75
no scales on cheeks or opercles, nape fully scaled to posterior margin of eyes, 10 series anterior of spinous dorsal; snout rounded, jaws equal; maxillary extending to anterior margin of eye, teeth of lower jaw small, sharp pointed, in several rows — the outer row being enlarged curved teeth resembling canines; an extra large recurved canine on each side, upper jaw with a single series of strong sharp teeth; tongue truncated or but slightly rounded ; gill openings wide, but not extending forward ; body fully scaled, the scales on posterior half of body somewhat larger ; no free silk-like rays at the origin of pectorals.
Spinous dorsal with the 2d, 3d, and 4th rays longest; soft dorsal and anal similar in form and of about equal height, their posterior rays being about 1.50 in head. The origin of soft dorsal is on a line with anal pore; origin of anal below the 2d dorsal ray ; ventrals firmxly united for entire length, the basal cup deep, length of the fin equal to distance from nostril to posterior margin of opercle ; pectoral slightly greater than length of head ; caudal rounded, 1.20 in head.
Color in alcohol pale wood brown with a series of about 14 small, more or less complete, circles of darker brown (sepia) along the median line of sides, margin of scales on upper half of body also slightly shaded with sepia, 1 or 2 narrow lighter longitudinal lines above the row of median circles; a black line from posterior margin of eye to upper base of pectoral fin, 4 or 5 blue spots on opercles and irregular brown blotch on cheeks below eye; 2 brownish blotches on base of pectoral; dorsals marked with about 4 longitudinal brownish lines; tip of spinous dorsal dusky ; anal shading into slaty gray on outer third ; caudal marked with whitish spots; pectorals and ventrals pale yellowish brown, the ventral with a slight grayish wash.
Three specimens from Hongkong market, August 9, 1910. Type is No. 6474, Bureau of Science collection ; length, 70 centi- meters ; cotypes are Nos. 6489 and 6541.
Gobius poecililicthys Jordan and Snyder.
Dorsal, VI, 10; scales about 35, upper pectoral rays silk-like; tongue truncate. Length, 57 to 60 millimeters. (6408, 6523.)
Glossogobius giuris (Hamilton-Buchanan).
Length, 74 to 78 millimeters. (6409, 6463, 6477, 6504.)
Oxyurichthus cristatus (Day).
Length, 85 millimeters. (6484.)
76 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Oxyurichthus amabalis Seale, sp. nov. Plate II, fig. 1.
Head, 4 without caudal; depth, 6; eye, 4 in head; dorsal, VI, 13; anal, 14; scales, 50; enlarged scales on posterior half of body; 21 scales in vertical series; snout 3.30 in head; interor- bital space a mere ridge; mouth large, the lower jaw slightly the longer; maxillary extending to below middle of eye; upper jaw with a single series of rather strong sharp teeth, lower jaw with a single row of similar but smaller teeth ; tongue rounded ; head naked except on the occiput which is finely scaled; no tentacles ; about 24 scales in front of dorsal ; anterior anal spine longest, 1.25 in head; soft dorsal and anal similar, origin of anal under 1st ray of soft dorsal; caudal long and acuminate, 2.60 in length of fish without caudal; ventrals scarcely equal to length of head, their origin is anterior to the origin of dorsal, their tip scarcely reaching to anal pore; length of pectorals, 3.5 in body without caudal; no silk-like rays.
Color a very light brown, white on chin and thorax, fins with a slight grayish wash, anal blackish.
Type is No. 6432, Bureau of Science collection, secured in Hongkong market by Seale ; length, 130 millimeters ; 3 cotypes, Nos. 6411, 6438, and 6453.
Gobiichthys tentacnlaris (Cuv. and Val.) .
Length, 75 to 110 millimeters. 6500, 6501, 6505, 6510, 6515, 6519, 6523, 6524.)
Cryptocentrus filifer (Cuv. and Val.).
Length, 105 to 130 millimeters. (6412, 6430, 6447, 6449, 6470, 6478.)
Cryptocentrus venustus Seale, sp. nov. Plate II, fig. 2.
Head, 3.75; depth, 5.50; dorsal, VII, 10; anal, 11; scales on anterior portion of body very small, becoming larger posteriorly, about 90 in lateral series from posterior border of opercle to end of caudal vertebra, about 27 in a vertical series; mouth large, the maxillary ending slightly posterior to eye; teeth in several series, some slightly enlarged ones in the outer row of upper jaw and in the inner row of lower jaw, no recurved canines; no posterior canines; tongue truncate; gill rakers rather blunt, 14 on lower arch; head naked, without filaments or barbules; eye rather small, 4.5 in head, and about equal to length of snout; interorbital space very narrow, being equal to pupil; anterior dorsal rather high, its longest spine being equal to length of head, the 6th spine is located a considerable space from the 5th ; origin of soft dorsal midway between end of caudal
ix.D. 1 Seale: Fishes of Horigkong 77
vertebra and posterior margin of eye, the soft dorsal is similar to anal; caudal rather pointed, its length 3.25 in fish without caudal; origin of anal below 3d ray of soft dorsal; ventrals united and long, almost equal to caudal, the tip extending to anal pore, the cup at the base very deep; origin of ventral midway between tip of snout and origin of anal ; pectoral slightly less than length of head, its base rather muscular.
Color in alcohol, a wide dark-brownish saddle over back at the spinous dorsal which extends downward on sides of belly ; there is a similarly colored area above the anal fin along the middle of sides, remaining area lighter brown ; a brownish area on head back of eyes and on cheeks, about 15 small scattered blue spots on cheeks; spinous dorsal, ventral, and anal dark purplish ; soft dorsal dark with several lighter longitudinal lines, caudal and pectorals uniform brown.
One specimen, type No. 6419, Bureau of Science collection, from Hongkong; length, 103 centimeters. Collected by Seale and Canonizado.
Trypauchen vagina Bloch and Schn.
Color yellowish while. Length, 60 to 75 millimeters. (6493, 6527, 6543.)
Tridentiger bifasciatus Stindachner.
Outer row of teeth trifid, the middle cusp the longest, 2 black bands on sides, the one on middle of sides very wide and distinct, the other at base of dorsal much less distinct. Length, 40 to 55 millimeters. (6486, 6502, 6535, 6536, 6549.)
Apocryptes bato (Hamilton-Buchanan).
Dorsal, V-1, 13; anal, 14; length, 110 to 140 millimeters. (6418, 6439.)
SCORP^NID^. (Scorpion fishes)
Sebastopsis marmorata (Cuv. and Val.).
The dark bands over the back and spots on caudal, dorsal, and anal fins distinguish this species. Length, 100 to 130 milli- meters. (7723, 7758.)
PLATYCEPHALID^. (Flatheads)
Platycephalus insidiator (Forskal).
This fish is very common in the Hongkong markets. It is easily distinguished by the black and yellow stripe of the caudal fin. Length, 30 centimeters. (6593.)
78 'J'he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Thysanophrys neglectus (Troch.).
This species is characterized by the spinate lateral line, the dusky spinous dorsal, and the dusky bars over back. (6559, 6623, 6630, 6664, 6675.)
Thysanophrys bataviensis (Bleeker) .
Lateral line, 57; dorsal, caudal, pectorals, and ventrals with rows of black dots. (6656.)
CEPHALACANTHID^. (Flying gurnards)
Cephalacanthus orientalis Cuv. and Val.
One young specimen, length, 65 centimeters. (6499.)
PLEURONECTID^. (Plaice, pan us)
Psendorhombns misakius Jordan and Starks.
Pseudorhombus misakius Jordan and Starks, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 31, 173.
Color light brown, mottled with darker brown; a black spot at branching of lateral line; dorsal, 80; anal, 63. (6579, 6581.)
Pseudorhombus russellii (Gray).
Yellowish, clouded with brown, some darker spots on back. Scales, 92; anal, 58; dorsal, 78. (6588.)
Pseudorhombus olegolepis Bleeker.
Two young specimens, scales 48. (6560, 6607.)
Tephritis sinensis (Lacepede).
Body with fine black spots, some of which are ocellated ; fins, except pectorals and ventrals, marked with black. (6633.)
SOLEID.E. (Soles, yat sa yu)
Cynoglossus melanopterus Richardson.
Two lateral lines on left side, scales 60, fins dusky. (6577.)
Cynoglossus abbreviatus Gray.
Three lateral lines on left side, fins gray, lighter at tip, 120 scales in lateral line. (6646.)
Synaptura orientalis Bloch and Schneider. Soles faleacea Richardson. Synaptura pan Bleeker.
Brown with darker blotches and narrow black bands crossing the lateral line; posterior half of pectorals black. (6624.)
Solea ovata Richardson.
This seems to agree in all essential respects with Richardson's description. ( 6561. )
ix,D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 79
PTEROPSARID^. (Pterosparids)
Parapercis pulchella (Temm. and Schleg.).
The figure of this species given by Temminck and Schlegel is excellent. It is a common species in Hongkong. Length, 160 millimeters. ( 6363-6371. )
Parapercis cylindrica (Bloch) .
Body with narrow dark bands below and 5 wide bifurcated bands above ; white and dark spots on throat and chin ; a brown band from eye to throat, a dark spot at base of pectorals and on upper base of caudal; spinous dorsal black; soft dorsal and anal with yellowish spots; ventrals yellow. Length, 93 centi- meters (6649) ; length, 82 centimeters (8503).
Percis sexfasciatus Temm. and 'Schleg.
Five bifurcated dusky bands over the back; a brown ocellus on the upper base of caudal ; some dark dots at base of dorsal. Length, 85 millimeters. (6660.)
CALLIONYMID^. (Dragonels)
Callionymus curvicornis Cuv. and Val.
I very much doubt if this species is synonymous with C. valenciennesi Schlegel, as in our specimen, as well as in the specimens Giinther had from China, the preopercular spine is nearly as long as the orbit and is curved upward ; it terminates in 4 hook-like processes, one of which is directed backward; a 5th process at the base of the spine points forward. The posterior of spinous dorsal, which is fin shaped, has a large black spot surrounded by white. The anal fin is white with dusky blotches near its tip. (6612.)
Callionymus hindsii Richardson.
This fish is characterized by the alternating vertical lines of jet black and pure white of the spinous dorsal, the black lines being somewhat crooked and of greater width in some places than in others. The preopercular spine ends in 4 recurved claws, with a fifth at the base of the spine directed forward. The anterior dorsal has S rays, the posterior has 10. In alcohol the fish is indistinctly speckled with very pale brown on the back, the caudal fin is indistinctly barred with brown and white ; some indistinct light specks in soft dorsal, otherwise fins colorless, except the spinous dorsal. Length, 8.5 centimeters. (6650.)
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Drawings by T. Eepinosa)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Chsetodon bella-maris Seale, sp. nov.
2. Rhinogobius hongkoyigensia Seale, sp. nov.
Plate II
Fig. 1. Oxyurichthus amahalis Seale, sp. nov. 2. Cryptocentrus vemistus Seale, sp. nov.
123716 6 81
Seale: Fishes of Hongkong.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci.. IX, D. No. 1.
Fig. 1. Chaetodon bella-maris Seale, sp. nov.
Fig. 2. Rhinogobius hongkongensis Seale, sp. nov. PLATE I.
Seale : Fishes of Hongkong,]
[Phil. Journ. Sri., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Oxyurichthus amabalis Seale, sp. nov.
Fig. 2. Cryptocentrus venustus Seale, sp. nov. PLATE II.
BUPRESTIDES RECUEILLIS AUX tLES PHILIPPINES PAR C. F. BAKER, I ^
Par Ch. Kerremans
(Brussels, Belgium)
Une figure dans le texte
Acmaeodera luzonica Nonfr., Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. (1895), 40, 302.
Luzon, Los Banos. Epidelus wallacei Thorns., Arch. Ent. (1857), 1, 109.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling. Chrysodema eximia Cast, et Gory, Monogr. Bupr. (1835), 1, 8, PI.
2, fig. 9.
Luzon, Los Baiios. Chrysodema adjuncta Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 310.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling. Dicercomorpha argenteoguttata Thoms., Typ. Bupr., App. (1879), 13.
Luzon, Los Banos. Philanthaxia lata sp. nov.
Long. 8 ; larg. 3 mm. Oblong ovale, elargi au tiers posterieur, entierement bronze obscure, un peu mat, avec les angles poste- rieurs du pronotum d'un bronze plus clair, legerement pourpres ; dessous plus noir, pattes bronzees, tarses et antennes noirs, le 1^^ et le 2® article de celles-ci bronzes.
Tete plane ; front vaguement deprime ; la surface couverte de points fins, confluents. Pronotum en trapeze, faiblement bisinue en avant et tronque en arriere, les cotes obliques et a peine ar- ques, la surface couverte d'une ponctuation fine, tres egale, sem- blable a celle de la tete, mais presentant sur le disque de fines rides sinueuses. Ecusson triangulaire, presque deux fois aussi large que long. Elytres legerement elargis au tiers posterieur, finement denteles sur les cotes de la jusqu'au sommet; celui-ci etroitement tronque ; la surface couverte de stries lineaires, plus rapprochees sur les cotes que sur le disque, les interstries aplanis, subrugueux, tres egalement et densement ponctues. Dessous moins rugueux que le dessus, la ponctuation de Tabdomen aci-
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
83
84 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
culee, et simulant de tres fines ecailles, couvert d'une pulveru- lence blanche. Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Chrysobothris bistripunctata H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864),
8, 111.
Luzon, Los Bafios. Belionota fallaciosa H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864), 8, 84.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling. Melibseus bakeri sp. nov.
Long. 4; larg, 1 mm. Petit, etroit, assez convexe, attenue en avant et en arriere, entierement bronze obscur et brillant, la par- tie anterieure du front verte.
Tete etroite, convexe avec une legere depression longitudinale au dessus de Tepistome. Pronotum grand, convexe, faible- ment bisinue en avant et en arriere; les cotes deprimes, la de- pression prolongee le long de la base, la marge laterale arquee, anguleusement rentrante en arriere tout pres de la base ; la sur- face assez rugueuse, couverte de petites rides sinueuses et trans- versales. Ecusson petit, triangulaire. Elytres impressionnes de part et d'autre a la base avec le calus humeral saillant; les cotes sinues a hauteur des hanches posterieures, attenues en arc depuis le milieu, celui-ci separement arrondi et inerme; la sur- face couverte de rugosites simulant de tres fines ecailles entre des rides sinueuses. Dessous moins rugueux que le dessus, men- tonniere du prosternum bilobee.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Melibseus seneifrons H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864), 8, 134.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling; Los Baiios. Sambus auricolor Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 322.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Sambus lugubris Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 323.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling; Los Baiios. Cryptodactylus philippinensis Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London
(1874), 321.
Luzon, Los Banos. Agrilus luzonicus sp. nov.
Long. 6.5-7; larg. 1.7 mm. Voisin de VA. acutus Thunb., mais different de celui-ci par une serie de caracteres constants. Tou- jours plus petit et moins ventru, Timpression m^diane de la base
IX, D, 1 Kerremans: Biiprestides, I 85
du pronotum moins profonde et moins large, Tepine terminale des elytres tou jours moins longue et plus grele, moins elargie a la base et montrant, sur le cote externe, une fine dentelure bien marquee, tandis qu'elle est moins nette et moins aigue chez Vacutus, la coloration constante, d'un bronze verdatre clair, rarement bleuatre; enfin, Taspect general plus lisse et plus brillant. Luzon, Los Baiios.
Agrilus nigTocinctus Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 325. Luzon, Los Baiios.
Agrilus discicollis H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864), 8, 189.
Luzon, Los Bafios. Agrilus vilis Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 327.
Luzon, Los Bafios. Agrilus bakeri sp. nov.
Long. 8-8.5 ; larg. 2 mm. Allonge, legerement elargi au tiers posterieur, attenue en arriere, tete, cotes du pronotum et extre- mite des elytres cuivreux pourpre ainsi que le dessous, le pro- notum et les elytres bleu verdatre, ceux-ci ornes de part et d^autre de deux taches pubescentes et blanches. Tune au milieu, Tautre vers le tiers posterieur; le dessous convert d'une pulve- rulence blanche.
Tete forte, de la largeur du pronotum, sillonnee sur toute sa longueur, et couverte de rides sinueuses bien marquees. Pro- notum un peu plus large que long et aussi large en avant qu'en arriere, faiblement bisinue en avant, plus fortement en arriere, les cotes paralleles, a peine arques, sans carene posterieure distincte, la carene laterale oblique et a peine sinueuse, rappro- chee de Tinferieure; une vague impression lineaire et arquee longe tout le milieu; la surface couverte de rides sinueuses. Ecusson cuivreux, large, transversalement carene. Elytres peu convexes, impressionnes a la base, plans sur le disque, declives sur les cotes, legerement elargis au tiers posterieur, denteles et separement arrondis au sommet, la surface couverte de tres fines rugosites regulieres et simulant de petites ecailles. Dessous plus finement rugueux que le dessus; mentonniere du proster- num forte, echancree au milieu; pattes mediocres.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Agrilus monticola sp. nov.
Long. 7; larg. 1.8 mm. Moins allonge et plus robuste, plus convexe en dessus que le precedent, le sillon transversal du pro-
86 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
notum beaucoup plus large, plus profond et situe plus en arriere vers la base, le sommet des elytres plus largement arrondi, subtronque et plus f ortement dentele, la region suturale deprimee, entierement bleu indigo fonce, verdatre sur les elytres, avec, de chaque cote de ceux-ci, deux monchetures pubescentes et blanches superposees, Tune apres le quart posterieur, Tautre a Fapex.
Tete assez forte, un peu plus etroite que la base du pronotum, le vertex convexe et profondement sillonne, la surface ponctuee, moins f ortement ridee que chez le precedent; antennes courtes et epaisses. Pronotum plus large que long, un peu plus etroit en avant qu'en arriere, bisinue en avant et en arriere, le lobe median de Tavant tres arque ; les cotes obliques et a peine arques, la carene posterieure ne rejoignant pas la marginale, celle-ci oblique et sinueuse, Tinferieure parallele a celle-ci en avant et sinueuse; le disque transversalement impressionne en avant et largement sillonne en arriere du milieu, le sillon remontant sur les cotes au dessus de la carene posterieure; la surface couverte de tres fines rayures sinueuses et trans ver sales. Ecusson triangulaire, plus large que haut et carene transversalement. Elytres deprimes de part et d'autre a la base, sinues sur les cotes, ensuite elargis au tiers posterieur ou ils laissent a decouvert une etroite portion de la region dorsale des segments abdominaux, attenues obliquement jusqu'au sommet, celui-ci assez largement tronque et assez f ortement dentele; region suturale tres legere- ment declive; suture saillante en arriere; la surface assez ru- gueuse et couverte de rugosites simulant des ecailles. Dessous moins rugueux que le dessus, couvert d'une pubescence tres courte, regulierement espacee sur I'abdomen; mentonniere du prostemum large, subsinueuse et tronquee en avant; pattes peu robustes.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Agrilus fontanus sp. nov.
Long. 5; larg. 1 mm. Allonge, subparallele sur les cotes, en- tierement noir en dessus, la moitie interne des elytres couverte d'une courte pubescence grisatre peu visible, le dessous d'un noir plomb6, entierement couvert d'une courte pubescence grise.
Tete forte, aussi large que la base du pronotum, convexe, faiblement sillonnee sur le vertex, couverte de tres fines rides transversales et sinueuses. Pronotum presque carre, plus large que long, aussi large en avant qu'en arriere, la marge anterieure plus fortement bisinuee que la posterieure, avec un large lobe median avance; les cotes subparalleles, a peine arques; carene posterieure grande, arquee, rejoignant la marginale en avant
IX, D, 1 Kerremans: Buprestides, I 87
du milieu; carene laterale subsinueuse, visible en dessus, Tin- ferieure assez eloignee d'elle en avant; le milieu du disque avec une tres vague fossette en avant et une autre plus nette, au dessus de Tecusson; la surface couverte de rides sinueuses et transversales bien marquees. Ecusson petit, plus large que long, carene transversalement. Elytres couvrant entierement Tab- domen, transversalement deprimes k la base, legerement le long de la suture, celle-ci elevee et lisse sur presque toute sa longueur, sauf a la base ; le sommet separement arrondi et a peine dentele ; la surface egalement couverte de rugosites simulant de tres fines ecailles. Dessous plus clair et un peu plus luisant que le dessus; mentonniere du prosternum grande, largement lobee; pattes assez robustes. Luzon, Los Banos.
Agrilus balnearis sp. nov.
Long. 4.5; larg. 0.7 mm. Ecourte, assez convexe, attenue en arriere, entierement bleu brillant, avec, sur les elytres, une large bande bleu d'acier fonce et glabre, tandis que le reste des elytres et du dessous sont converts d'une tres courte pubescence gris blanchatre, plus dense sur la region post6rieure des elytres, apres la bande noire.
Tete forte, avec les yeux epais et tres saillants en dehors, sillonnee longitudinalement au milieu, et entierement couverte de rides sinueuses. Pronotum bisinue en avant, aussi large en avant qu'en arriere, sa plus grande largeur au milieu, les cotes arques; carene posterieure grande, sinueuse et rejoignant la marginale en avant du milieu; carene marginale plus sinueuse que rinferieure; le milieu du disque a peine deprime transver- salement au dessus de Tecusson; la surface couverte de rides sinueuses et transversales identiques a celles de la tete. Ecusson mat, transversalement caren6. Elytres legerement elargis au tiers posterieur, impressionnes a la base, tronques et tridentes de part et d'autre au sommet; la suture finement corboree du tiers posterieur a Tapex; la surface couverte de rugosites simul- ant de tres fines ecailles. Dessous plus lisse et plus brillant que le dessus ; mentonniere du prosternum assez grande et lob^e ; pattes peu robustes.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Agrilus atomus sp. nov.
Long. 3.5; larg. 0.7 mm. Subparallele, un peu plus large en avant qu'en arriere, entierement bronze verdatre, le front vert
88 The Philippine Jourmal of Science i9i4
et mat, les elytres et le dessous couverts d'une courte pubescence grise, rare.
Tete etroite en avant et large en arriere, le front aplani, le vertex bombe et sillonne. Pronotum un peu plus long que large et un peu plus large en avant qu'en arriere, la marge anterieure bisinuee avec un large lobe median avance et arque; les cotes l^gerement courbes et convergents vers la base; celle-ci faible- ment bisinuee, carene posterieure sinueuse et allongee, rejoignant la marginale en avant du milieu ; celle-ci oblique, presque droite, en entierement visible en dessus, Tinferieure arquee; le milieu du disque sillonne, le sillon elargi en arriere ; la surface couverte de rides sinueuses et transversales. Ecusson petit, carene. Elytres largement et peu profondement deprimes a la base, couverts de rugosites simulant de petites ecailles, separement arrondis et inegalement denteles au sommet. Dessous plus f once et plus luisant que le dessus ; mentonniere du prosternum grande et arquee; pattes peu robustes.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Aphanisticus bodongi sp. nov.
Long. 3.5 ; larg. 0.7 mm. Appartient au groupe des Aphanis- ticus allonges et cylindriques de TEurope. Entierement noir, tres legerement bronz6, brillant. Tete forte, finement pointill^e, sillonnee profondement sur toute sa longueur. Pronotum un peu plus large que long, a peine plus etroit en arriere, lisse et brillant comme la tete et tres finement ponctue ; la marge ante- rieure bisinuee; les cotes faiblement arques et un peu conver- gents en arriere; le disque convexe, limite en avant par un sillon longement la marge et en arriere par un autre sillon plus large; une carene posterieure nette, etroite et perpendiculaire k la base, la marge laterale tres oblique. Ecusson tres petit, triangulaire. Elytres tres rugueux, couverts de rides transver- sales, legerement deprimes le long de la suture, largement et separement arrondis au sommet. Dessous beaucoup moins rugueux que les elytres; marge anterieure du prosternum tron- qu6e, sans mentonniere.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Cette espece se retrouve dans Tlnde, a Simla.
Endelus bakeri sp. nov.
Du groupe des E. weyersi Rits. et modiglianii Kerrem. voisin, pour la tete et le prolongement des tubes oculaires, de VE. diabo- licus Kerrem., mais different de celui-ci par les impressions ^Ijrtrales et par la coloration generale.
ix,D. 1 Kerremans: Buprestides, I 89
Ecourte, pentagonal, entierement bronze plus ou moins clair en dessus; dessous presque noir.
Tete large, profondement creusee; yeux tres saillants en dehors, emergeant de tubes ecourtes ; la surface presque lisse et tres brillante. Pronotum beaucoup plus large que long, ecourte, tronque en avant avec les angles anterieurs aigus et avances; les cotes largement arques en avant et sinues en arriere avec les angles posterieurs obtus ; le milieu du disque avec deux larges carenes transversales. Ecusson petit, triangulaire. Elytres ecourtes, saillants a Tepaule, sinueux sur les cotes, attenues obliquement en arriere, largement et separement arrondis au sommet et tres finement denteles ; la surface gondolee et inegale, avec de larges impressions laterales et discales, arrondies sauf celles-ci longeant la suture, de chaque cote du sommet et qui sont allongees. Dessous plus lisse et plus luisant que les elytres.
Long. 3.5-4; larg. 1.25-1.5 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Trachys dubia Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1879), 328. Luzon, Los Baiios.
Trachys cornuta sp. nov.
Long. 3; larg. 1.6 mm. Remarquable par la forme toute par- ticuliere des antennes dont le premier article, tres developpe, a la forme d'une mandibule arquee en dedans et ^ cintree en dehors, comme le montre la figure ci (txixooax^ contre de Tantenne du cote droit, alors que les autres articles sont presque moniliformes. Le seul speci- fig. i.L'antenne men que j'aie sous les yeux est un male; il se peut ^^ Trachv» done qu'il s'agisse d'un caractere sexuel, mais il est si tranche qu'a premiere vue il semble que Tantenne soit im- plantee sur une mandibule dirigee vers Texterieur.
Triangulaire, acumine en ligne presque droite en arriere, tete et pronotum bronze presque noir, les cotes du second garnis d'une pubescence pulverulente de blanc, les elytres bronze clair avec une large postmediane noire, avec, en arriere de cette bande, de chaque cote, une bande pubescente blanche en forme de V; dessous noir.
Tete largement creusee avec le bord interne des yeux tranchant. Pronotum trois fois aussi large que long, echancre en avant et fortement bisinue en arriere, avec les cotes deprimes, largement et obliquement arques, confluents en avant. Ecusson petit, triangulaire. Elytres graduellement et regulierement attenues sur les cotes depuis la base jusqu'au sommet, avec, de chaque
90 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
c6t6, une fine cote naissant du calus humeral et longeant la marge laterale a une certaine distance de celle-ci; la surface finement granuleuse, plus lisse sur la bande noire. Dessous luisant, plus lisse que les elytres. Luzon, Los Baiios.
Trachys bakeri sp. nov.
Long. 3 ; larg. 1.6 mm. Ressemble, pour le facies general, au r. subbicornis Motsch., du Japon; entierement different de celui- ci pour la coloration et pour le dessin elytral.
Ovo'ide, peu convexe, la tete et le pronotum bronzes, la premiere, plus claire que le second, couverts d'une pubescence couchee, rare et courte; elytres noirs couverts d'une dessin lineaire pubescent de blanc forme par des cercles sur la moitie anterieure et par deux lignes superposees et en zic-zac sur la posterieure. Dessous noir.
Tete brillante, largement et peu profondement creusee en triangle en avant, le bord des yeux non tranchant. Pronotum a bords non aplanis, largement et peu profondement ^chancre en avant; les cotes obliquement arques et convergents vers Tavant ; la base f ortement bisinuee, la surface couverte de points tres fins et acicules. Ecusson reduit a un point a peine visible. Elytres regulierement attenues en arc despuis Tepaule jusqu'au sommet, celui-ci conjointement arrondi; le calus humeral peu saillant; la base deprimee contre le calus; la surface finement granuleuse ; vus de profils, les elytres f orment une ligne sinuante legerement bombee vers le sommet et declive ensuite. Dessous moins rugueux que le dessus.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Trachys formosana Kerrem., Arch. f. Naturgesch. (1912), 209. Luzon, Los Baiios. Le type provient de Tile Formose.
ILLUSTRATION
Figure dans le texte Fig. 1. L'antenne de Trachys comuta.
91
NOTES ON THE MALAY PANGOLIN, MANIS JAVANICA DESMAREST '
By W. SCHULTZE
{From the Entomological Section, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.)
Two plates
During a recent trip to Palawan I had the opportunity to observe a specimen of the pangolin, Manis javanica Desmarest, in captivity for a period of about three weeks. The animal was captured by a native boy who discovered it in the act of climbing a tree. Previous to the capture of the animal, I had given some attention to the collecting of specimens of termites or white ants. The species that builds the roughly globose nests on the trunks or branches of trees was fairly common about Taytay, and I had observed that many of the nests had been destroyed or partly destroyed. Generally, the disturbed nests had a round or ir- regularly shaped hole in one side and all or part of the contents of the interior had been removed. Some of the disturbed nests still remained attached to the trunks or branches of trees, while others had been broken off. I was at first inclined to attribute the destruction of the nests to some species of bird, and thought it possible that the bird was feeding on the termites or that it utilized the hollowed nests as breeding places.
Upon receiving the pangolin, I offered it various species of large true ants, but it paid no attention to them and refused to eat. I then secured a fresh brood comb from a terrestrial termite nest with its included termites, and the pangolin quickly consumed all the insects. To supply the animal in this way with sufficient food presented considerable difficulties, and remember- ing the destroyed and partly destroyed nests of the arboreal termites that I had observed in the forests the idea occurred to me that the pangolin was probably responsible for their destruc- tion and that these particular termites, to a large degree, sup-
^ Desmarest, Mammalogie (1822), 2, 377; Blandford, Fauna Brit. India, Mammalia (1891) 599, fig. 199; Hollister, This Journal, Sec. D (1912), 7, 35.
93
94 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
plied the food of the animal. I accordingly secured several of these arboreal termite nests, and placed them in the cage with the animal. The pangolin commenced to break open a nest shortly after dark. Its method of accomplishing this is very peculiar. First, it is necessary to give some idea of the characters of the nest in order better to understand how well the animal is adapted to its food supply.
The termite nests are usually subglobose, sometimes being rather irregular in shape, and from 20 centimeters to 50 centi- meters in diameter. In color they are usually dark brown or black, and externally have a rather flaky appearance. The outer- most part of the nest is rather thin, and is brittle in texture. The entire interior of the nest is made up of a somewhat porous material that is more or less sponge-like in appearance, but not at all sponge-like in texture, being very hard and somewhat brittle. In the region where the queen chamber is located, the surrounding material is still harder, and the passages or cells are slightly smaller than in the external portions.
In opening the nest the pangolin at first removes the outer layer from one side by means of its powerful claws. The animal then commences working its way into the interior of the nest by inserting its claws into the passages or qells and using them as levers, thus breaking away, in small pieces, the very hard material that makes up the interior of the nest. While doing this work, the animal may assume any position — standing on its hind legs or lying down on its side, on its belly, or even on its back on the top or on the sides of the nest — depending on the location of the nest. As soon as it has worked a short distance into the interior, it reaches the regions inhabited by the termites, and, while busily engaged with its claws in breaking down the interior of the nest, it keeps its tongue constantly protruded, licking up the termites that are disturbed or dislodged, in its efforts to reach the interior of the nest. In this manner, the pangolin hollows out the nest sometimes to such a degree that only a thin crust or shell about 3 centimeters in thickness is left. If the nest be very large, it is generally more or less broken up ; small nests are rarely broken, but retain their original shape after being hollowed out completely (Plate I). The pangolin under observation consumed the contents of as many as four medium- sized nests in one night. Very probably during the dry season, the Palawan pangolin lives mostly on these arboreal termites. In Palawan, the terrestrial termite nests or mounds are mostly found in rather open brush or grass lands and are so hard that the animal could not burrow into them during the dry season.
ix.D, 1 Schultze: Malay Pangolin 95
It probably uses them as food supply during the rainy season. The pangolin seems to have poor eyesight, at least during the daytime. However, its sense of smell is apparently very acute. Its sense of direction is undoubtedly largely dependent on scent. The animal under observation was repeatedly liberated, and soon after being removed from its cage it raised its head and sniffed in various directions. It then invariably turned toward the nearest forest or thicket and walked away in that direction. When it had decided upon a given course, no amount of turning could deflect it, and after being turned about it always resumed its original direction. Even lifting the animal by its tail and quickly revolving it failed to confuse it. It never turned toward open places or toward the sea. There is little doubt that it depends largely upon its sense of smell in locating termite nests, especially those that are placed high in the trees. If disturbed when walking about, it quickly puts its head between its front legs, turns a somersault, and rolls up into a ball (Plate II, fig. 2) , making a hissing noise when so doing. Its powerful tail (Plate II, fig. 3), which has a horny pad on the end, is a great aid to the animal in climbing and in hanging on branches of trees. The animal has a very peculiar odor.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I
(Photographs by Charles Martin)
Fig. 1. Arboreal termite nest hollowed out by Manis javanica Desmarest, showing opening. 2. Opposite side of the termite nest shown in fig. 1.
Plate II
(Photographs by courtesy of Dean C. Worcester)
Fig. 1. Manis javanica Desmarest in walking position.
2. Manis javanica rolled up.
3. Manis javanica climbing.
Vol. VI 11, Sec. D, No. 6 of this Journal was issued May 25, 191^.
123716 — 7 97
Schultze: Malay Pangolin.]
[Phil. Journ. Scl, IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 2. Opposide side of the nest shown in fig. 1. PLATE I. ARBOREAL TERMITE NEST HOLLOWED OUT BY MANIS JAVANICA DESMAREST.
><
X
cc 2
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology, AND Anthropology
Vol. IX APRIL, 1914 No. 2
NOTES ON IRRIGATION AND COOPERATIVE IRRIGATION SOCIETIES IN ILOCOS NORTE ^
By Emerson B. Christie (From the Museum, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.)
One plate
Reports of the Bureau of Public Works state that the Prov- ince of Ilocos Norte has some 15,000 hectares under a fairly satisfactory degree of irrigation. Besides this land, there is a considerable area irrigated only during the season of trans- planting and growing rice ; that is to say, the wet season.
Irrigation works of some sort are to be found in all the municipalities in the province. Bangui and Nagpartian, the two northernmost towns in the province, have together some 1,500 hectares of rice land under irrigation. About nine-tenths of this land is under irrigation only during the wet season, owing to the imperfection of the irrigation works. Neither town has dams of a permanent nature. Diversions are made usually by temporary dams of bamboo and rock from 0.5 meter to 3 meters high. These are crudely constructed, and are either completely destroyed each year or require considerable repairing. Some of the 27 ditches in these towns have no headgate nor wasteway provisions, and as a consequence their channels have been cut so deep as to leave portions of the lands they once watered above water. The most ambitious irrigation work to be seen in this part of the province is the heading of an old canal which was destroyed about a generation ago. It had a
^ I am indebted to the courtesy of the Bureau of Public Works for the data on the extent of irrigation in Ilocos Norte which appear in this article.
126083 99
100 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
solid masonry gate, and the heading is cut for some distance through a rock cliff. There are 10 canals in Bangui-Nagpartian, each 1 kilometer or more in length. The two longest are about 3 kilometers long.
The people of Pasuquin, south of Nagpartian, have exploited the available water supply to a considerable extent. In the northern part of the territory of this municipality, 4 small rivers are made to irrigate about 1,000 hectares of rice land during the wet season, and in the southern part of the town about half as much land is watered from a lateral of the Paratong canal, which draws water from the Bacarra or Bubuisan River. An attempt is made to water these 500 hectares the year around, but complaints made by the landowners indicate that the supply of water is unreliable owing to certain imperfections in the canal.
Laoag, the capital of the province, is badly off with regard to irrigation. Certain works which formerly utilized the water of one or two minor creeks for wet-season irrigation have been destroyed in course of time, and according to the latest data available only about 600 hectares of land in the municipality are under irrigation. Of this land, about 100 hectares are irrigated only during the wet season. The rest is watered by a branch of the Kamungao canal, which draws water from the Bacarra River. The people of Laoag who use this canal complain of a shortage of supply during dry weather. This shortage, in the opinion of an engineer of the Bureau of Public Works, is due not to a failure of the supply in the river, but to defects of an engineering order.
Laoag is situated on the largest river in the province. There is a gauge record of a quarter of a million second liters for this stream, and it is probable that this amount of water is ex- ceeded at times. The want of irrigation work on this river is sufficiently accounted for by the size and the difficulty of the problem of utilization. The problem is further complicated by the circumstance that the river bears a heavy raft-traffic in rice which is floated from towns on the upper reaches to Laoag, and any obstructions to this traffic would cause an uproar from those interested in it.
San Miguel has 9 ditches which irrigate some 500 hectares during the wet season.
Piddig is better supplied with irrigation than any town in the province except the three dependent on the Bacarra River. Nearly 2,000 hectares of land in the municipality are under irrigation, more than half of it all the year around. The water
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 101
is drawn from the Gisit River, a tributary of the Laoag. The most important canal is provided v^ith a masonry headgate and wasteway, and shows good maintenance. This canal irri- gates some 800 hectares.
Dingras has a good deal of land under irrigation, but lacks proper provisions for the control and distribution of water.
Batac has canals and other irrigation works. The Kiawit River runs in an artificial channel which is said to have been made for it as far back as 1760, under the direction of the Filipino after whom it is named. In course of time, however, the bed of this stream has become badly eroded, resulting in an inconven- ient lowering of the water below the fields which it was intended to irrigate. The water, both of this and other irriga- tion works, is far from sufficient for the needs of the land under present arrangements. It is worth noting that many ditches in this municipality are provided with masonry diversion weirs and headgates, with proper provision for varying the openings.
Paoay has several old ditches in poor condition which are inadequately supplied with water.
Badoc, the southernmost town of the province, has nearly 4,000 hectares of irrigated land. On the high land which cannot be reached by canals, extensive masonry walls have been constructed to catch the flood water and distribute it over areas devoted to raising rice. Most of the ditches are small, and belong to individual landowners.
The Badoc River runs through the municipality. Water is diverted from this stream by low temporary dams of bamboo and rock, which may last one or several seasons. The ditches are well constructed, and show good maintenance. Masonry headgates, checks, and other necessary structures have been provided on most of the systems, and largely eliminate the bad waste noticeable in other municipalities of the province. The longest ditch is about 2 kilometers in length. Most of the land irrigated is watered only during the wet or rice-growing season.
Irrigation works in the municipalities of Bacarra and Bintar, watered from the Bacarra or Bubuisan River, deserve special mention, for they exemplify the fullest development of irriga- tion practice to be found in the province. They cover some 7,000 hectares of land, most of which is supplied with water all the year, and thus is enabled to raise two or three crops a year.
Practically all the water used for irrigation in these towns
102 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
is drawn from the Bacarra or Bubuisan River. This stream rises in the northeastern part of the municipality of Bintar, and runs its entire course to the China Sea through this municipality and that of Bacarra. From its source to the latter town, the stream is made up of a series of rapids, a circumstance which makes it easy to divert water for irrigation purposes. The stream carries a fair amount of water even in the dry season. According to a gauging made in April, 1909 — that is, during a dry month — below the town of Bacarra and below all points where water was diverted ther^ was a discharge of 3,300 second liters going to waste.
There are 8 canals which divert water from the Bacarra River, covering from 200 to 1,800 hectares each, and some 35 small ditches, watering from 2 to 70 hectares each. All of these ditches, it is said by the people of the towns, have been built by the landowners and are maintained by them. The larger ditches have been well constructed, and show fairly good maintenance. Diversions are made by temporary dams of bamboo and rock, which are either destroyed or require considerable repairing each year. Rows of stakes are driven into the bed of the stream, and the spaces between are filled with stones and brush. Permanent headgates and wasteways above the high-water mark have been provided on a number of the larger ditches, reducing repair work on the ditches. Important structures employed on the canals such as checks, drops, and culverts are of a permanent nature, and are usually constructed of cobblestones laid in lime mortar.
It would be beyond the scope of this article, which aims only to convey a general idea of the degree of development of native irrigation in Ilocos Norte, to give a detailed description of all the irrigation works in Bacarra and Bintar. In order to illustrate the utmost that has been done in this region, I shall give a few facts regarding the two most ambitious works, the Paratong and the Kamungao canals.
The former is the largest and most important canal in the province. Heading just above the town of Bacarra, it extends across this municipality and waters about 500 hectares in the municipality of Pasuquin, besides nearly 850 hectares in Bacarra. The main canal and the Bacarra and Pasuquin laterals are about 20 kilometers long. It is claimed, and I know of no evidence to the contrary, that this canal was built by the landowners without the assistance of any regular engineer. Many repairs are necessary each year, and these are made by the landowners benefited by the system. At one place, where the Pasuquin
IX. D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 103
lateral heads, the water of the canal is carried across the Bang- sirit estero in flumes. The Paratong canal has a capacity of 3,000 second liters.
The Kamungao canal is about 6 kilometers long, and serves over 800 hectares. It heads opposite the tov^n of Bacarra, and crosses the divide between the valley in which that town is situated and Laoag, about 500 hectares of the land it serves being situated in the latter municipality. The system is well constructed, and is provided with masonry headgates and waste- way. But conditions at the heading are such as to give rise to some complaints from landowners on the Laoag side of the shortage of water. The heading of the canal is at a bend in the river; there is no diversion dam, and the channel is so high that an inadequate supply of water is diverted.
The Bisaya ditch which irrigates certain lands in Bintar is of interest as showing what the natives are capable of doing, because for the greater part of its course of 3 kilometers down the canon of the Bacarra River the waterway is formed by a masonry wall at the foot of the rock cliffs.
All the irrigation done in this province depends on gravity. No pumps, water wheels, or other mechanical devices are in use.
It is of interest to know how the foregoing works and others similar to them have been built and are maintained. No very large landed estates are found in this province.^ Even the few landholdings of comparatively large extent are almost invariably divided into several parcels separated from each other. Hence, it is but seldom that any one man finds it to his interest to build irrigation works of any considerable size for the use of his land. Therefore, the necessary feed canals and other works for bringing water from the rivers to the land must be built by cooperation if they are to be built at all. This state of things has given rise to a large number of irrigation societies. These are of interest to a student of the Ilocano people for two reasons; namely, their importance to the agriculture of the region and their indication of the capacity of the people for cooperative effort.
These societies of the Ilocano people are a marked charac- teristic of the Province of Ilocos Norte. In the Ilocano Provinces of Ilocos Sur and La Union, not very much irrigation from rivers and springs is practiced. Of the irrigation situation among
'According to the Philippine census of 1903, the average size of farms and other parcels of land under cultivation in Ilocos Norte is only 0.622 hectare. This is one of the lowest averages to be found in the Philippine provinces.
104 ^''^^ Philippine Journal of Science leu
the Ilocano element of the population of Pangasinan, Zambales, and Nueva Ecija, I am ignorant. In Cagayan Province, certain Ilocano towns — for example, Claveria and Sanchez Mira — have irrigation works of considerable extent. Claveria is said to have more than 2,000 hectares of rice land under irrigation. I suspect that these works have been built and maintained in the same way as those in Ilocos Norte; that is, by popular cooperative societies. But the total extent of irrigation works built and maintained by Ilocanos in this province does not reach that of the works existing in Ilocos Norte. In the latter province, I have enjoyed good opportunities of observing the working of a number of irrigation societies, and some details about them may be of interest.
There are irrigation societies in all the municipalities of this province, but owing to the local conditions these societies play the most important role in the northern half of the province and are of special importance in Pasuquin, Bacarra, Bintar, and Piddig.
The members of each society are bound together by a written agreement which prescribes the organization of the body and the field of its operations, defines the duties of its members, and provides penalties for disobedience which range from a small fine to expulsion from the society and confiscation of a member's share in the land irrigated. I have read a number of these agreements as enforced in Bangi, Bintar, and Badoc. There seems to be no standard or pattern for these documents, for they differ widely one from the other. They range in preci- sion and formality from agreements drawn up by lawyers and composed of scores of paragraphs down to a simple statement that *'the undersigned agree to undertake the irrigation of such-and-such a piece of land under the leadership of So-and-so." The majority of agreements occupy a middle ground between elaborate precision and sketchy simplicity. They have been drawn up in most cases by men who have local influence, but no legal training. Some of them at least were drawn up with a view to taking up and irrigating a piece of public land; it is not easy otherwise to understand the provision for con- fiscation of the holding of a member who does not fulfill his obligations. This provision occurs in the following instrument organizing an irrigation society in an outlying settlement of Bintar. The agreement is given here because it is fairly typical of many.
We, who sign our names or make a cross below, agree to make a canal to bring water to the place called Gimamaga. There is no one compelling or
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 105
coercing us; we are expressing our spontaneous desires, and we say the following:
First. — We all equally agree to choose a chief to give us orders, to the end that there may be order in our work on the said canal.
Second. — We also agree to choose foremen and designate them as assist- ants to the said superintendent of construction.
Third. — We agree further that on being given an order by the said chiefs we will not make objections, but will all equally obey the order, and he who disobeys this provision of our agreement shall be given two lashes to punish him for his disobedience, and if he is guilty a second time we will confiscate his share of the property to punish him for his disobedience.
Fourth. — We agree further that when a day fixed upon for our work arrives and our superintendent sounds his horn to call us, we will hasten to present ourselves and will not wait for a third or fourth blowing of the horn, and that that one of us who shall be the last to arrive shall be fined six cuartos * as a punishment for his lateness, unless he has a reason.
Fifth. — We agree further that when the work on the said canal is begun no one of us may go away or hide; and he who shall be caught hiding shall be given five lashes to punish him for his disobedience, and his expla- nations shall not be listened to.
Sixth. — We agree further that after the month of July arrives it shall not be permitted to furnish a woman or a child as a substitute, especially if our work consist in building dams, and he who contravenes this agreement of ours shall be liable to a fine of an eighth of a peso, and his explanations shall not be listened to.
Seventh. — As soon as our shares of work shall be allotted, whether the work consist in canal digging or fencing, we will make haste to perform the work, without waiting for the assistance of the whole society; and he who disregards this provision of our agreement shall be fined an eighth of a peso for his disobedience.
Eighth. — We agree also that the obligation of furnishing labor or mate- rials, whether for excavation or for fencing, shall be equally distributed among us.
Ninth. — We agree further that the cost of fenced ways for the passage of animals, such as, horses, buffaloes, oxen, and pigs, shall be equally distri- buted, and no one shall fail to conform to this rule.
Tenth. — We agree further that we shall be free to invite outsiders to work with us for half a day or a day,*^ but' the superintendent shall not have authority to make contracts without first submitting the matter to us at a meeting.
* Literally, a man to serve as our father.
* About 4 centavos in Philippine currency or 2 cents in United States currency.
^ In Ilocos Norte it is not unusual for country people to assist a neighbor or relative for a short time without money payment, but on the under- standing that they are to be given food and drink. If the work lasts only about half a day, a few drinks of hasi are considered sufficient compensa- tion; if the work lasts longer, it is incumbent on the man who has invited the workers to regale them with unusually good food, including a meat or fish element, as well as drink. It is in this way that houses are often built and ditches dug without the expenditure of any cash.
106 "^h^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Eleventh. — Those who work against our agreement to exploit lands in common shall receive five lashes from us for the first offense, and shall be deprived of their rights for the second, as a punishment for their evil custom, and we will not listen to their explanations.
Twelfth. — We shall have no right to disobey the orders of our superin- tendent, when he assigns us work, whether the work consist of digging or fencing, and he who acts contrary to this agreement shall be punished as is set down in article seven for his first offense, and for the second he shall be deprived of his share of land as a punishment for his disobedience.
Thirteenth. — It shall not be allowable to call us unexpectedly to a place distant from these fields. If it is desired to call us to a distant place, we must not be called unexpectedly but must be advised in advance.
Fourteenth. — We shall all leave our implements (i. e., in the places where work is being done), whether plow or harnessing rope or harrow, and none but the owners shall take the said implements, and he whom we may catch in the act of taking articles belonging to another person shall, for the first offense, be condemned by us to suffer a suitable penalty, and for the second offense he shall have his share in these fields confiscated as punishment for his disobedience, and no explanations shall be listened to.
All the above clauses of our most true agreement and convention for cultivating the soil in common shall be strictly obeyed; no one is coercing us nor causing us to be coerced, but of our own free will we make this agreement in order to have discipline in our work, and in testimony of our adhesion to this, our agreement and convention, those of us who know how to write sign their names, and those who do not know how to write make their mark and have their names written for them, now in the year eighteen hundred ninety-four.
Dimamaga, sitio of Bintar, September 15, 1894.
[Twenty crosses (marks) and three signatures follow.]
There is a supplementary paragraph, dated March 24, 1911, in which it is agreed to choose a new superintendent and to substitute certain names for others.
In this case, the cabecilla, or chief, is also the maestro, or superintendent of construction. But it is not at all uncommon to find the office of chief of the organization and that of the superintendent of construction divided. Most societies also have a special officer known as the papelista,^ because he keeps the papers ; that is, the accounts. His duties are those of a secretary- treasurer. It is his duty, besides keeping the society's funds, to keep account of the fines incurred by the members. Small societies — I have seen the membership list of one which comprised only about half a dozen names — may do without any officers except a chief (cabecilla). On the other hand, a large society may have in addition to all the above officers two or three members who may be called a commissariat. These men, instead of working on the canals and structures of the irrigation scheme,
•A Spanish word meaning one who has to do with papers.
IX. D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 107
fish and cook for their fellow members while the latter are at their labor.
Nominally the officers are elected, and may be deposed by vote at any time. In other words, they are subject to the recall. But as a rule, a society has one or more members whose influence is preponderating because of property, shrewdness, education, or past or present government oflSce, who constitute the real controlling force. It must be borne in mind that a very large proportion of the members cannot even read or write. This fact is sufficiently evidenced by the long rows of marks seen at the end of the agreements. The ignorance and humble station in life of the mass of the members make it easy for a local boss who gets to be the chief of an irrigation society to keep control of its activities.
In the case of those societies whose constitutions I have read, the land irrigated is divided into equal shares among the majority of the members, with the stipulation, in the case of many of the larger societies, of larger shares for one or more of the officers. The chief is often thus favored, sometimes to the extent of having twice as much allotted to him as the ordinary members; the superintendent of construction and the secretary-treasurer are also given an advantage sometimes; the foremen have no advantage except that they do not do as much manual labor as the ordinary members.
Landowners who do not belong to a given society frequently want the association to bring water to their land, or wish to enjoy water rights in some canal that passes their land, but which they have not helped to build. In such cases, it is often possible for them to secure the advantages desired by agreeing to give the members of the society a part of the crop. The payment demanded is usually high, amounting often to two-fifths of the crop.
The danger of the chief of an irrigation society enriching himself at the expense of the labor of the members is realized by the Ilocanos, and the article found in the agreement quoted above, forbidding the chief to enter into irrigation contracts without first submitting the proposition to a meeting of the society, is a very common one in instruments of this kind.
Another common provision is one expressly forbidding a member to alienate his share of land without the consent of the society. It is often provided that in case a member wishes to sell he must give the first choice to a fellow-member. On the death of a member, his rights and obligations in a society descend to his heirs.
108 "T^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
A provision sometimes seen in the constitutions of irrigation societies in Ilocos Norte is that disputes arising from the work or the shares must be submitted for adjustment to a meeting of the society, recourse to the courts being punished by expulsion.
Money for the purchase of building material, such as timber or lime, is raised by a levy on all the members, or the material may be furnished by members in lieu of work.
An omission which strikes one forcibly in reading the agree- ments is the lack of any definite provision for dividing the water supplies. This omission corresponds to one seen in the irrigation works ; namely, the almost, though not quite, universal lack of any system by which a definite amount of water can be drawn from the main canals to the small ditches of the individual fields. It seems to be assumed that there will be water enough for all. If there is any system to insure rotation and equality of supply, I am not aware of it. Doubtless, the question of a square deal in this matter comes up and is acted upon in meetings of the society.
These meetings take place in some societies at regular intervals. In others, they are called from time to time by the chief.
As may be supposed, something is required to hold slack members of the society to their work. For this reason, in most agreements a definite fine is levied for each day's absence from work when a call has been issued by the head of the society. This fine is expressed in the agreements in terms of money, but in fact is collected in kind at harvest time. It is the principal duty of the secretary-treasurer to keep a record of the number of day's absence of each man and to collect the corresponding amount of fines. These go into the common fund, which is mainly expended for food and drink for the members.
There is a good deal of difference between societies in the degree of strictness with which the payment of fines is enforced. Some societies are evidently very slack in this regard ; in others, there is a businesslike strictness.
I have heard of one or two cases of embezzlement on the part of the treasurers, but the circumstances of the collection of fines, namely, that it takes place under the eyes of so many members of the society and that the fines are collected not in money but in the form of bundles of rice, easily noted in amount and rather difficult to get rid of secretly, serve as deterrents to breach of trust.
Besides the ordinary irrigation societies composed of land-
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 109
owners, I know of at least one society in Ilocos Norte organized to do irrigation work for hire. The society comprises about thirty men, who are said to own little or no land themselves, but who hire themselves out to propietors in return for a share of the crop. I have been informed that this society conducts the irrigation work for land that produces about 5,625 hecto- liters of unhusked rice. The collection is effected at harvest time by the secretary-treasurer of the society. These men have a recognized chief (cabecilla) at the head of their affairs. I do not know what advantage in compensation, if any, is enjoyed by the officers of this society.
It must not be supposed that the members of this society make their entire livelihood by doing irrigation work. That work, as conducted in Ilocos Norte, lasts only a few months of the year, sometimes only a few weeks. During the rest of the year the members are free to work at anything they can. In irrigation work, as in other matters, it is unusual in Ilocos Norte to see specialization.
All the irrigation societies with which I am acquainted hold an annual feast at which they enjoy all the rice, meat, and fermented sugar-cane juice that they can hold. The means to do this come from the fines levied on sluggards ; often they are eked out by the results of the chase. From twenty to forty men with nets and dogs can usually get a deer or two or a wild pig in Ilocos Norte, and a few men are commonly told off before- hand to catch fish. The drink — basi — can be easily obtained in exchange for rice. In case means are still lacking, the chief levies a contribution of a few centavos on each member.
Most irrigation societies are placed under the patronage of some particular saint, such as San Isidro Labrador (Saint Isidore, the Ploughman or Farmer). But as the most opportune time for holding the feast is at the conclusion of harvest, it is not necessarily held on the day assigned to the patron saint in the calendar.
A feast is preceded by religious ceremonies. Money is paid to a priest by the society to celebrate mass on the preceding Sunday. If all or most of the members are adherents of the Aglipayan organization (the Independent Filipino Church), the money goes to the local representative of that body. I have known of cases where the members have been divided in their allegiance and money has been paid for a mass to the local Roman Catholic priest and also to the local head of the Aglipayan society. The mass, I was always informed, is applicable to
110 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
the souls of the deceased members of the society and all those persons from whom the members of the society may have inherited their land.
But besides this and other Christian ceremonies, it is the rule among the societies with which I am acquainted to perform other rites which are not due to the teaching of the Christian Church. One of these is performed at the annual feast just mentioned. It consists of setting forth food and drink for spirits, having in mind not only the ancestors of the members, but spirits in general. I have been present several times at the annual feast of irrigation societies, and once had the good fortune to arrive at the scene early enough to see the offering set out for the spirits and to hear the invitation extended to them. The offering in this case consisted of plates of rice, of two kinds, one of which was the sticky sort called diket. There were also dishes of rice cooked with coconut milk (not coconut water) and a little basi. These articles were set out on the floor of a room in the evening and left untouched until early morning. After everything was placed in order, a woman went to each window of the room and invited the spirits in turn in the words which I found to be, in Ilocos Norte, the commonest formula of invitation to them, couched in such general terms as to include not merely ancestors, but any other spirits that might wish to come. These were the words :
Come now, come now, sirs, come, come all, all, let the lame have them- selves carried, let the blind be led/
After this, the room was left empty till morning, when the feast began.
This offering of food and drink to spirits at the annual feast is in line with the practice of irrigation societies at other times. An important ditch or canal is seldom opened without certain preliminary ceremonies of a propitiatory nature. Those related below show the practice in the northern two-thirds of the province of Ilocos Norte, where I saw more land being irrigated from streams than in any other part of the Ilocano provinces. Minor details may differ in various towns, but on the whole I found an unexpected degree of uniformity.
When a society has been formed for the purpose of digging a canal and bringing a piece of land under irrigation, a cross about a meter high is planted where the canal is to be opened. Some basi is sprinkled on the ground. Now ensues a wait,
' Umaikayon Appo, umaikayon, umaikai amin amiriy dagiti pilai obhaenyo, dagiti bulsek kibinenyo.
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in I locos Norte HI
which may extend from only one night to several days, to see whether or not any unfavorable omen appears to any of the members of the society, or a sangkabagi or other spirit appears to warn against the proposed undertaking. If an unfavorable omen or vision occurs, the place where it is proposed to start the canal is abandoned; unless the spirit, if there is one in the place, can be appeased by an offering. If a spirit warns against beginning the work, an attempt is made to learn what sort of propitiation it wants. In case a sacrifice is requested, a chicken, for example, the society must learn whether the animal is to be set free at the spot or is to be killed and cooked. In a society with numerous members there is usually at least one who is supposed to know more about spirits, omens, etc. than the other members, and his observations and advice are acted on. Various unfavorable omens are watched for, perhaps the commonest being the falling down or removal of the cross. If nothing occurs during the wait to contraindicate the digging of the ditch, the work is begun, offerings being first put on the platform or altar. These offerings ordinarily consist of rice cooked with coconut, chicken, betel-nut for chewing, tobacco, and basi. When the canal has been made, another ceremony is commonly performed, especially if some difficulty is met with in getting the water to run in the ditch. This rite consists in killing an animal at the edge of the canal and saying the words given below. The animal is usually a pig, but I know of cases in which an ox has been sacrificed. The animal is killed in such a position that the blood spurts into the ditch, while the master of ceremonies recites the following :
Ditch, this blood is spurted into you in order that your current may be as strong as the current of this blood.'
The body of the animal is then dragged along the bed of the canal up to the land to be irrigated.
It is also a very common practice to sprinkle the route of the canal with blood before starting to dig. The throat of a pig or chicken is cut, and the animal is dragged along the line of route for this purpose.
I know of an authentic case which occurred near Laoag, Ilocos Norte, where a dog's blood was used for sprinkling a piece of ground which was to be leveled to make a rice field, the dog being eaten afterward. But in this case the workers were not Ilocanos but Tingians working for an Ilocano. Whether
^ Kali naisuyat kenka daitoi a dara tapno Hi peggesna nga agwayawai padaen kuma ti danuvimo iti pigsana nga agayus.
112 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Ilocano peasants sprinkle blood on the ground before leveling or clearing ground I do not know positively, but such action would be in line with their practice in canal digging.
I have heard frequently of Ilocanos burying an animal in the masonry of the canal intakes or gates, but I am not able to vouch for the existence of the practice except in one case in which my information seemed thoroughly reliable. In this case the man who had performed the act was an Ilocano living in San Miguel. He informed me that he had buried a chicken alive in the masonry on first constructing it, but on the gate or intake being destroyed by a flood he had consulted a Tingian as to what he should do. The Tingian recommended that a dog should be buried alive when the gate was reconstructed. This was done, and according to my informant the gate has stood solidly ever since.
Before taking leave of the subject of irrigation in Ilocos Norte, I wish to mention certain unsatisfactory features. One is the danger of a local boss who initiates a canal-building society or gets control of one already formed claiming the pro- prietorship of the works. This is especially liable to be the case after the lapse of time has eliminated the original constructors. There are several factors which may favor his success in such an attempt. As the chief, he controls the original of the document organizing the society. It is not difficult to cause this paper to disappear in a plausible manner; for example, during one of the typhoons or fires which frequently destroy the flimsy houses of a provincial town. The frequency of destructive flres in the towns of Ilocos Norte during the time covered by the memory of men still living is very striking. Even if the documents were kept at the town hall, the danger would be but little lessened. It would seem that papers of such importance should be kept in the provincial building at the capital, certified copies being furnished to the chiefs of the various societies.
A point in which improvement is possible lies in the direction of definite provision for an equitable distribution of water. It may be that there are irrigation agreements in Ilocos Norte in which such provision is made. I can only say that I have seen none in the various agreements that I have read, which were chosen at random in different sections of the province. It seems to have been assumed by those who signed these papers thai; the proposed works would supply sufficient water to all concerned under any circumstances. In point of fact, it happens with great frequency that there is not water enough
IX, D. 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 113
to go around under the present haphazard way of distributing it.
It is probable in the extreme that there are also considerable possibilities of improvement in some cases in the line of coordina- tion of the work of the various irrigation societies operating in a given region. The societies have been organized independently of each other at different times to meet the problems of groups of cultivators who have had an eye solely to their own needs. The consequence has been that some effort has been expended and some work accomplished which might have been either avoided altogether or made to pay greater returns by coordination of effort with other groups. It is, however, a merely academic wish to desire such coordination at the present time. No sub- stantial improvement in this direction should be expected as long as the irrigation societies carry on their activities without supervision by the Insular Government.
Finally, in cases where the Government takes action, such, for example, as taking over existing systems of irrigation during the process of creating new systems, it is necessary to exercise great vigilance to protect the interests of the small peasant. It is easily conceivable that in such cases a few influential men might claim exclusive right to compensatory water rights granted by the Government which ought in justice to be divided among a large number of persons who helped to build the old systems under a cooperative plan or whose ascendants did so. The importance, in this connection, of a scrutiny of the original papers organizing the local irrigation societies is self-evident.
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I. Feed canal in the canon of the Bacarra River. (Photograph by Cortes.)
126083 2 115
NOTES ON THE POTTERY INDUSTRY IN SAN NICOLAS, ILOCOS NORTE
By Emerson B. Christie
{From the Museurriy Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.)
Three plates
Pottery of some sort is in use in every household in the Province of Ilocos Norte. The principal objects are cooking pots, which are also used for carrying and storing water ; tobacco pipes; hearths or stoves; extra large jars for molasses or basi (a fermented drink made from sugar cane) ; various sorts of bowls; linings for wells; and bricks. Pots, jars, pipes, and stoves are in practically universal use. Thus, although the money value of pottery used in any one house is small, the sum total for the province amounts to a considerable investment.
Part of this money goes out of the province. The large jars mentioned are not, as far as I know, made in Ilocos Norte. Some come from Manila and a good many from Vigan, Ilocos Sur, as containers of molasses or unrefined sugar. There are in Vigan a number of Chinese who manufacture these large jars.
The manufacture of bricks and pipes in Ilocos Norte is diffused among several towns. Laoag, the capital, and San Nicolas make bricks; Piddig and San Nicolas make pipes. But the manufacture of by far the largest class of earthenware used in the province, namely, cooking pots, is almost entirely confined to San Nicolas. I venture to say that if statistics on the subject were available they would show that four-fifths of all the pottery made in Ilocos Norte, as reckoned in money value, is produced in this town.
San Nicolas is a town of some eleven thousand inhabitants, situated almost directly across the river from Laoag. Its lands, as at present cultivated, do not suffice for the inhabitants, and several hundred persons derive their means of subsistence in whole or in part from the manufacture of pottery vessels, especially those for cooking and for holding water.
Bricks are made to a limited extent, mostly for local use. Those I saw were poorly molded, and seemed to be poorly baked
117
118 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
as well. The manufacture of bricks constitutes an industry of scarcely any importance.
Linings for wells are made mostly by men, owing probably to the fact that they are comparatively large pieces and require some strength to manipulate. They are frequently made to order, in which case their size, of course, depends on the diameter of the wells for which they are intended. They are not cast in molds, but are built up by hand in the open air by adding one layer of wet clay to another. They are then left to dry in the sun, after which they are covered, out of doors, with rice straw and other combustibles which are fired. Before the firing, they are commonly smeared with a mixture of red earth and water which gives them a uniform bright red color. These linings are usually about 30 centimeters in height. They are superimposed one upon another in wells, the top one project- ing above the well mouth and serving to keep dirt from falling in.
For making pipes and cigar holders, clay is dug, dried, pulverized, and sifted. The clay is then mixed with considerable water, and is left to stand. After a good deal of sediment has settled at the bottom, the water is drawn off and left to stand in another vessel. The sediment which sinks to the bottom of this second vessel is necessarily the finer part of the original clay.
The tools used in making pipes and cigar holders consist of a knife, a few small pieces of bamboo, and one or two slender metal rods (Plate III, fig. 2). The worker, who in almost all cases is a woman, keeps a small dish of oil at hand in which to dip her fingers or her tools from time to time, to prevent them from sticking to the clay. In default of oil, she may use perspiration from her forehead or nose. After the clay has been well kneaded, the object is shaped with the fingers, then trimmed off with the knife. The bowl of the pipe is then cut out with the oblique cutting edge of one of the bamboo instruments. A thrust or two with one of the metal rods makes the opening for the smoke to pass through. After this, the pipes or cigar holders are left to dry for a time. Then they are placed in an earthenware bowl filled with combustibles, usually consisting of rice straw. The straw is set on fire and bakes the objects.
San Nicolas pipes and cigar holders are usually plain. A little ornamentation is sometimes produced by incising the unbaked clay with the edge of a piece of bamboo. Many of them are blackened by being covered, while still very hot, with rice
IX, D, 2 Christie: Pottery Industry in San Nicolas 119
bran. The bran is imperfectly consumed, and leaves a black deposit on the clay.
Undoubtedly the principal clay product manufactured in San Nicolas is cooking pots. Thousands of them are made every year. The clay is dug from open pits on the outskirts of the town, dried, beaten into dust, and sifted. It is then moistened and kneaded. Some sand from the river is mixed with the clay to prevent cracking. Then the woman shapes the mixture into the form of a short thick cylinder and lays it on a round board. This board is laid on another board, but it is not connected with it by a bearing pin. From time to time she gives the upper board a turn with one hand while she works the clay with the other. Thus she gets some of the effect of a wheel. She has a dish of water at hand, and frequently dips her fingers and her tools into it to prevent sticking. At first she uses only her fingers to shape the vessel ; later she uses a smooth stone which she holds against the inner surface of the vessel with her left hand while working on the outside with a paddle in her other hand. Her tools consist of a stone, a shell, and paddles of various shapes and sizes. With the paddles she beats the outside of the vessel, causing it to spread. When the vessel is fairly well shaped, she lays it aside for a time to set and partially to dry. After this, she starts working with it again, giving the last touches. When the vessel is completely formed, she smooths the outside with a shell. Then she may give it a few strokes with an incised paddle to impress on it a simple pattern. It is common for the worker to smear the outside of the vessel with red earth mixed with water, in order to give it a uniform red color. If she does not do this, the clay, which is grayish brown before being fired, turns a poor and irregular red color on being burned. As in the case of pipes, it is often desired to give the pot a black color. This effect is secured in the same way as with pipes.
A few hearths or stoves and bowls of various sizes and shapes are also made. The bowls are made in the same way as the cooking pots. The hearths or stoves are built up in layers in the open air, and are then covered with straw and other combustibles and burned.
Pottery making in San Nicolas is strictly a household industry. To a large extent it takes the place in the family Economic system which weaving by hand occupies in most other towns of the province. A woman working steadily at making pottery may earn from 25 to 30 centavos (12.5 to 15 cents United
120 r^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
State currency) a day, but in fact the work is taken up and dropped according to the family convenience or needs and according to the state of the weather. As all cooking pots are burned out of doors, without shelter of any kind, the work is interrupted by rainy weather.
Just as the manufacture of pottery is strictly a household industry, so the distribution is usually a family affair. It is true that some one occasionally buys a cargo of pottery from the manufacturers in San Nicolas and takes it up or down the coast in a sailboat. But speaking broadly, each family that makes pottery sells it to the ultimate consumer. This part of the work is also in the main the women's affair. There are several towns within a few kilometers of San Nicolas. Nearly every morning, if the weather is favorable, San Nicolas women may be seen starting for the markets of these towns, carrying on their heads large trays loaded with earthenware, which ordinarily consists of cooking pots. The pots are kept from falling off by a network of cords. The price at which the women retail the pots at the markets varies from 1 to 5 centavos according to size. It often takes a whole day to dispose of 50 centavos' worth of pots.
When the desired market is at a considerable distance from San Nicolas, the men of the family often take charge of the distribution. They do not use ox carts much for freighting earthenware because of the danger of breakage, but sling the vessels on the end of the carrying pole (pingga) borne on one shoulder. If the load is too heavy for one man, it is slung from the middle of the pole and two men take each one end of the pole on a shoulder. At harvest time, which is, of course, the best season for sales, San Nicolas men may frequently be seen carrying their wares even in remote barrios of the province. Sales at this time of the year frequently take the form of barter, the purchaser of earthenware paying in unhusked rice. At this time of the year, also, a considerable number of people from all parts of the province go to San Nicolas to trade their rice for pottery.
It is impossible to state accurately the value of the annual production of San Nicolas pottery. Taking into account the fact that this town practically supplies the whole Province of Ilocos Norte, and even sends some wares to Cagayan, I think that it amounts to a business of not less than 10,000 pesos a year, and probably reaches from 40 to 50 per cent higher.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Photographs by Cortes.)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Potters kneading clay. 2. Women shaping pottery.
Plate II
Fig. 1. Interior of potter's house. 2. Woman burning pottery.
Plate III Fig. 1. Peddler of pottery.
2. Woman making pipes. The deep bowl on her left is for burning the pipes.
121
Christie: Pottery Industry in San Nicolas.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Potters kneading clay.
Fig. 2. Women shaping pottery. PLATE I.
Christie: Pottery Industry in San Nicolas.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX. D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Interior of potter's house.
|
'■■■ ■ .rji |
Fig. 2. Woman burning pottery. PLATE 11.
Christie: Pottkry Industry in San Nicolas.]
fPlIIL. JOURN. Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Peddler of pottery.
Fig. 2. Woman making pipes. The deep bowl on her left is for burning the pipes. PLATE ill.
HISTORY OF THE SPANISH NORMAL SCHOOL FOR MEN TEACHERS IN MANILA, 1865-1905*
By Andrew W. Cain {From the Bureau of Education^ Manila, P. I.)
Four plates
CONTENTS Introduction. Preliminary Plans. The Royal Decrees of 1863.
General plan of organization of the normal school.
Means of support.
The course of study.
Who were to be admitted as students.
Cost to pupils.
Interior regulations.
Certificates.
Responsibilities and privileges of graduates. The Equipment of the Normal School. The Founding of the Normal School, 1865.
Existing educational conditions.
The formal opening. Early History of the Normal School.
Distribution of graduates.
Program of duties.
Outline of subjects in the course of study for elementary teachers. Contemporary Comment.
Difficulties in the way.
Conditions confronting graduates.
Was the purpose of the school achieved.
Recollections of a graduate. The Normal School is Elevated to the Grade of Superior.
Organization.
Support.
Curriculum.
Pensioners.
Regulations.
Teachers' examinations. The Normal School Booth at the Exposition. The Pedagogical Academy.
The First Pedagogical Contest in the Philippines. The Normal School under the American Flag.
A statement to the patrons of the school.
A statement to the Philippine Commission.
The creation of the Department of Public Instruction.
A request for authority to continue the normal school.
The withdrawal of financial support and final closing of the normal school. Graduates of the Normal School from 1866 to 1905. Bibliography.
*A thesis written to satisfy, in part, the requirements for the degree of master of arts in the University of the Philippines.
123
124 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
INTRODUCTION
This study was undertaken for the purpose of determining the extent to which the Spanish Government in the Philippine Islands provided for the professional training of its public-school teachers. It will be noted that prior to the promulgation of the royal decrees of 1863 there was nothing in the Philippines that could be termed public education. Previous royal orders regarding education had been issued from time to time, but as no provisions were made for putting these orders into effect they all came to naught.
When educational reform was finally inaugurated in 1863, and thereafter, the work was carried on largely through the Jesuits. The Jesuits have a well-established reputation as a teaching order. After an exile of nearly a century, they were permitted to return to the Philippines in 1852 upon the conditions that their missionary fields be limited and that they devote a part of their time to the spread of education. The Jesuits gave Spain that assistance which made possible the founding of a system of public education in the Philippines. The normal school was to be at the head of this proposed system of instruction. When the plan for the establishment of the normal school was finally completed, the school was given over to the Jesuits to be adminis- tered as they thought proper. The part of the Government in the undertaking was merely to pay the expenses.
This article is based largely upon original documents which heretofore have not been published or translated into English. Lack of space forbids my mentioning the names of many to whom I am under obligations for assistance. Especial thanks are due Father Marcial Sola, prefect of studies in the Ateneo de Manila, for placing at my disposal the archives of the Ateneo ; Father Miguel Marti, secretary of the Central Seminary of St. Xavier, for courtesies extended in allowing me to examine the registers and libraries of that institution; and finally to Mr. Alexander E. W. Salt, instructor in history in the University of the Philippines, for advice, helpful suggestions, and assistance rendered throughout the preparation of this paper.
PRELIMINARY PLANS
On February 7, 1855, Don Manuel Crespo y Cebrian, governor- general of the Philippine Islands (1854-1856), appointed a commission to draft a set of resolutions for the schools of the Philippines, in compliance with the royal order of November
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 125
3, 1839. This commission was given the following instructions for guidance in its deliberations, and empowered :
1. To draft a course of study for the schools of both sexes, paying parti- cular attention to the teaching of the Spanish language; and to provide for uniform teaching in the schools.
2. To determine the number of men and women teachers necessary for the service of the public schools, and to estimate the amount of revenue required for their support.
3. To report upon the necessity of a normal school, the advantages to be derived therefrom, the advisability of undertaking the establishment of such a school, and to draft a plan for a school from which trained teachers suitable for teaching in the provinces might graduate.
This commission held but few meetings, and accomplished but little during the first five years of its existence. Governor- General Ramon Maria Solano y Llanderal (1860), moved by the tardiness of the commission, delegated an official from the office of the executive secretary to draw up a plan for reform along lines similar to those intrusted to the commission. Within two weeks, this official had completed the work assigned him, and his promptness had the effect of spurring on the commission to the completion of its task.
The principal point of debate during the sessions of the commission was the teaching of Spanish. The opposition was led by Father Francisco Gainza, vice-rector of the University of Santo Tomas, one of the most active and influential members of the commission.^ His chief argument against the teaching of Spanish was that if there was a uniform language in the Philippines the door would be opened to Protestantism. It was also pointed out by him that Russia and Prussia were unable to force their respective languages on unhappy Poland, and their failures were held up as examples and warnings to Spain. The opponents of Spanish acted also from political considerations. They hoped that by keeping alive and in op- position the several language groups, they would isolate the many separate sources of insurrection. The commission finally voted to make Spanish obligatory.
A report was rendered in 1861, nearly six years after the appointment of the commission,^ and two years later the Madrid officials promulgated the famous royal decrees, which were by far the most significant legislation ever produced by the
^ See No. 24 of the bibliography.
' For reports of other commissions and individuals, see Nos. 10 and 32 of the bibliography.
126 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Spanish Government for the cause of public education in the Philippines.
THE ROYAL DECREES OF 1863
The royal decrees, promulgated by Queen Isabela II on December 20, 1863, were the foundation of the system of state education in the Philippines.^ A resume of those decrees which relate to the Spanish Normal School for men teachers is given in this chapter, as they form the basic legislation upon which the school rested, and throw light upon its subsequent history.
In the opening article we read :
A normal school for primary teachers is to he established in the city of Manila^ in charge of and under the direction of the fathers of the Society of Jesus. The normal school is to serve as a seminary for religious, obedient, and trained teachers for the management of schools of primary instruction for the natives throughout the whole Archipelago.
GENERAL PLAN OF ORGANIZATION OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL
The decrees provided for a director, at least four teachers, such brother coadjutors as might be necessary, one porter, and indispensable subordinates.
The director was to be the official superior, and was to exercise authority over all the teachers, employees, and students of the school. He was to plan the education and direct the training of students, to preside at all literary ceremonies, to visit the rooms, to preserve discipline, to correct any infringement of rules, and, when necessary, to expel pupils.
Of the four or more teachers, one was to be spiritual adviser, teacher of sacred history, morals, and religion, and was to preside at all religious ceremonies. Another was to be prefect of manners, to accompany students in their walks, and to attend to the general ceremonies incident to the interior life of the institution. The remaining teachers were to handle the other subjects of the curriculum.
MEANS OF SUPPORT
The royal decrees provided that the normal school should be supported out of the central treasury of ways and means, but as the latter was subsequently suppressed the normal school was thereafter supported by a charge upon the local funds.*
^ See No. 14 in the bibliography.
* For an estimate of the amount of money necessary for the support of the normal school, see page 150. For an account of the final withdrawal of Government support, see page 166.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 127
THE COURSE OF STUDY
During the first four years after the opening of the normal school, the course of study was to cover a period of two years. Thereafter, the time was to be increased to three years. For the purpose of perfecting their studies, graduates were to be permitted to return to the school for a year of postgraduate work, in case this did not interfere with the work of the undergraduate students.
The decrees provided that the course of study should comprise the following subjects: Reading, writing, arithmetic, music, rules of courtesy, religion, morals, sacred history, Spanish geography and history, practical agriculture, physical and natural science, geometry, the Spanish language, and the elements of pedagogy.
The director of the normal school was to select a list of books for use in the school. Upon the approval of the superior civil government, these were to become the textbooks of pupils and were to be used as the basis of the explanations given in the schools. When necessary, these texts were to be revised in such a way as better to meet educational conditions.
In the same locality as the normal school, but separated therefrom, was to be a primary school composed of nonresident boys. This was to be under the supervision of a teacher of the normal school, and was to be used as a training school for the students. As a requisite for graduation, each student was to be required to do at least six months of practice teaching.^
Provision was made for a private examination at the end of each month in each of the classes of the normal school and also for an examination at the close of the first semester, cover- ing all of the subjects studied up to that time. As a reward for deportment, application, and progress, as well as a mark of punishment for bad manners, laziness, and a lack of interest, the ratings of all pupils were to be read monthly in the presence of the students, the instructors, and the director. At the close of each year, public examinations were to be held in the presence of the government officials and other distinguished persons of the capital. At the close of the examinations, the results were to be announced and prizes were to be awarded.
WHO WERE TO BE ADMITTED AS STUDENTS
The decrees provided for regular resident students, who were to be selected from the several provinces in proportion to the
° For a description of the manner in which the practice school was con- ducted, see pages 147 to 149.
128 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
population, the total number to be determined by the superior civil government, and for a limited number of day students, who were to come from reputable families living in the capital or in neighboring provinces and to be under the immediate care of parents or guardians who would guarantee that the stu- dents would complete their course and become an honor to the institution.
The following were to be the requisite qualifications for entering the normal school. The prospective student was required: (1) To be a native of the Spanish dominions; (2) to be 16 years of age;^ (3) to be free from contagious diseases and of sufficient health to enable him to fulfill his duties as a teacher ; (4) to possess certificates of good conduct; and (5) to be able to speak the Spanish language, to know the Christian doctrine, and to be able to read and write well.
COST TO PUPILS
The regular resident pupils, who were to be selected by the council of the superior civil government, were to receive free support, medical treatment, school equipment, and tuition, but were to be required to furnish their own clothing.'^ The supernumerary resident students — that is, those students not selected by the government — were to pay 8 pesos per month for board. In 1866 this amount was raised to 10 pesos per month, in 1870 it was fixed at so much for each study pursued, and at a still later date the price was raised to 140 pesos a year.
Each student was required to provide himself with certain specified articles of clothing. The total annual cost of his clothing was reckoned at 40 pesos.
After leaving the normal school, the regular resident students were required to serve the state for a period of ten years as teachers in the public primary schools.
INTERIOR REGULATIONS
The royal decrees provided further that "special regulations shall detail minutely the organization of the normal school." ^
• The minimum age limit was later reduced to thirteen.
' The government pensioners received an allowance of 10 pesos a month. From this amount they paid a part or all of their expenses.
* The most important of these regulations are given on page 151 et seq. The students' daily program of duties is given on page 136. For the details of the student's conduct in and about the building, see No. 26 of the bibliography.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 129
The decrees set aside the following holidays for the school: Sundays, feast days, Ash Wednesday, All Saints' Day, the birth- day anniversaries of the Spanish sovereigns, the day of the patron saint of the superior civil governor, twelve consecutive days beginning from Christmas eve, the three days preceding Lent and those from Holy Wednesday until Easter Sunday. The students were not to leave the institution during any of these days. It was provided that there should be a long vacation of one and one-half months during the period of greatest heat. By a later decree, the vacation period was made to include the months of April and May.
Regarding punishments, the decrees ran as follows:
The punishments shall be public censure, deprivation of recreation and walks, banishment and separation from the other students, and if these are not sufficient the definitive punishment shall be expulsion from the school. Expulsion shall take place because of any contagious disease, for notable laziness and lack of application, for serious lack of respect to the teachers, and for bad conduct or depraved morals.
CERTIFICATES
It was provided in the decrees that students of the normal school who successfully completed all the work of the three-year course and passed the prescribed examination with a rating of "excellent'' were to receive certificates showing their attain- ments ^ and were to be regarded as eligible to teach in the intermediate schools. Those who completed the work in like manner and passed the examination with a rating of "good" or "fair" were to receive certificates indicating their fitness to teach in the primary schools. Students who completed all of the work but failed of promotion on account of low ratings in the examination were to be offered employment as assistant teachers.
RESPONSIBILITIES AND PRIVILEGES OF GRADUATES
Regular resident students who received the benefits of the normal school were to teach in the public school for ten years at stations to which they might be assigned by the superior civil government. Those who left the school of their own accord or were taken from the school by their parents, as well as those who were expelled for lack of application or for bad conduct, were required to repay to the state the amount expended on their education.
The teachers appointed from the normal school were not to
^ Facsimiles of certificates are given in the plates.
130 "^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
be discharged except for legitimate cause and by resolution of the superior civil governor, after hearing the interested party. The causes for which an action might be brought were faults of religion, public or private immorality, lack of zeal in the fulfillment of duty, and abandonment of the Spanish language in the explanations or in the ceremonies of the school.
Teachers and assistants were to be exempt from personal service as long as they discharged their duties as teachers, and even after they ceased to perform these duties, provided they had been in the teaching service for fifteen years.
After five years of service for teachers and ten years for assistants, these persons were to become principales^^
It was provided that teachers who were disabled in the discharge of their professional duties were to receive a pension, subject to certain restrictions. The same rule was to apply to those who reached the age of 60 in the teaching service. After twenty years of service, all teachers were to receive a pension equivalent to half the retiring salary. After thirty-five years' service, the pension was to be three-fourths of the retiring salary.
Teachers and assistants with certificates were to be preferred for appointment to various government positions after ten and fifteen years' service, respectively. No examination or other test of fitness was to be required.
In addition to their regular salaries, teachers were to receive quarters for themselves and their families and fees paid by wealthy pupils.
THE EQUIPMENT OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL
A list of the equipment provided for the normal school throws light upon the life of the student body, the kind of instruction given, and the size and importance of the institution. Moreover, it emphasizes the fact that the Spanish Normal School, like nearly all of the other schools of the Philippines during this period, was a combination of school, dormitory, and chapel. The following is a list of the equipment with which the school was provided on July 1,1866:^^
Reception hall. — Three sofas, 3 armchairs, 12 black chairs, 12 small chairs, 2 small tables, 1 image of the Virgin of the Immaculate Conception with bell, 1 picture.
'"The important people of the town. They enjoyed' social distinction, and had a limited share in the administration of tlie government. " See No. 9 of the bibliography.
IX. D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 131
Class rooms. — Sixteen writing tables with 16 railings, 4 extra tables, 1 small revolving table, 2 tables with low benches, 2 easy-chairs for the teachers, 1 large blackboard mounted on 2 supports, 4 easels, inkwells, blotting paper, pens, ink, chalk, and sponge.
Study hall. — Five large double tables, 5 dozen American chairs, 4 lamps, maps with chains and frames, pictures, charts, and 1 wall clock.
Gymnasium and baths. — One trapeze, 2 ninepin sets, 6 large and 4 small earthen jars, and bath towels.
Chapel and sacristy. — One box for ornaments, 1 cupboard for the sac- risty, 2 confessional boxes, 1 crucifix, 1 laver, 6 coverings for the altar together with 6 sets of small cloths, 1 tabernacle, 6 small brass candle- sticks, 2 gilded candlesticks, 1 chalice, lamps, vinegar cruet, carpets, wax tapers, and holy-water basin.
Students' dormitories. — Fifty iron bedsteads, 50 beds, canvas, thread, rope, 60 narra screens, 18 pieces of rough dimity, 50 chests and small cupboards for the rooms, 20 pieces of coconut fiber for curtains, 45 commodes, and 17 dozen towels.
Rooms of director, fathers, and lay brothers. — Five bedsteads, 5 mos- quito nets, 2 large tables, 2 small tables, 24 chairs, 7 washstands, 7 shoe boxes, 4 writing desks, 6 easy-chairs, 6 commodes, and 3 cupboards.
Dining room. — Six large tables, 2 dozen chairs, 2 couches, 12 benches, 3 cupboards, 12 dozen plates, 8 dozen pieces of a dinner service, 8 large spoons, 24 dozen serviettes, 8 dozen glasses, 8 dozen cups, 6 pepper shakers, 5 coffee sets, 20 water bottles, 5 servers, 8 soup tureens, 8 preserve dishes, and table linen and oilcloth covers.
Kitchen. — One cooking range complete for more than 100 persons, 1 heater, 17 saucepans, 1 colander, 5 baking pans, 2 stewpans, 1 funnel, 2 coppers, 4 knives, 2 cleaners, 3 ladles, 3 skimmers, 2 heaters, 12 jars, and 30 dishes.
Hospital. — One cupboard with glass doors, 1 large table with 10 drawers, 2 armchairs with stands, and 1 complete medicine chest.
Servants' room. — Eight bamboo beds, 8 pillows, 8 petates, 12 coverings, 4 small tables, 2 benches, 2 pairs of tongs, 2 zinc baskets, 2 benches, 6 clay filters, 2 large saucepans, 6 small tables, 8 baking pans, 8 frying pans, 2 coffee pots, 2 milk jugs, 2 small basins and beaters, 1 bread grater, 2 sieves, 1 lantern, 3 cupboards.
Miscellaneous equipment. — Altar, cross, chalice, eucharist set, missal, incense, bread, wine, rochets, 3 wardrobes, 2 bookcases, pictures for the corridors, 1 clock, 40 flower pots, 9 bulletin boards, 6 curtains, 14 table lamps, 4 copper candlesticks, 8 benches, brooms, and feather dusters.
The equipment was at this time valued at 6,000 Spanish pesos.
THE FOUNDING OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL, 1865
EXISTING EDUCATIONAL CONDITIONS
At the time of the founding of the normal school, primary instruction was exceedingly meager. In most schools there was no teaching except that of reading and writing, and in many not even the latter. There were very few that gave even the most elementary work in arithmetic, and fewer still that taught
126083 3
132 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
the rudiments of geography and history. Religious instruction was superficial and flimsy, amounting to a mere repetition of the catechism, and there was absolutely nothing taught in the way of morals and manners.
No other state of affairs could be possible, as any one who desired to teach was permitted to do so, even if he were prompted only by the most audacious ignorance : teachers were often found who could barely read and write.^^
To remedy this condition of affairs, the government proposed to establish a normal school, and created a board composed of some of the most respectable and competent men in Manila to study conscientiously and in detail the manner and method of instituting primary teaching. This board, after six months of careful investigation and frequent discussion, submitted a favorable report, setting forth a plan of elementary education for the natives, to be conducted under the auspices of the normal school. It was not the purpose of the board to provide a high academic education which would not be necessary for the teachers, but rather to provide an ordinary, elementary training, suitable for the class of individuals for whom it was intended, and at the same time to make the training adequate for those who might afterward enter commercial life or take higher academic work.
THE FORMAL OPENING
As we have already seen, the organization and management of the normal school was intrusted to the fathers of the Society of Jesus. Those who were to take charge of the school arrived in the Islands late in June, 1864, having embarked at Cadiz, Spain.13
After resting for a few days, these priests prepared for the opening of the normal school in a building located on Calle Palacio in the Walled City, Manila. The inauguration and open- ing exercises of the school were held on January 23, 1865, the Governor-General, Rafael de Echague of Biemingham (1862- 1865), presiding. Attending this function were the members of the Superior Commission of Primary Instruction and many other noted guests, all of whom showed their pleasure at being present at the inauguration of the first normal school in the Philippine Islands.
'' See No. 27 of the bibliography.
" Historla de la Escuela Normal de Manila, a ten-page MS. in the Ateneo.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 133
On the following day, Father Francisco Xavier was appointed director of the school, the priests Jacinto Juanmarti and Pedro Lacasas were appointed teachers, Gabriel Pujol and Segis- mundo Berengueras taking charge of the domestic arrangements. Classes were opened, and a number of pupils were matriculated.
On December 3 of the same year, the great apostle of the Indies, San Francisco Xavier,^* was declared patron of the school.
EARLY HISTORY OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL
The first public examinations and the distribution of prizes took place about the middle of January, 1866. These examina- tions were presided over and prizes were awarded by the superior commission of instruction, and were attended by persons of religious distinction.
During the second year the attendance increased to such an extent that additional teaching facilities had to be provided. The course of study was also better organized, and the pupils were required to pursue the various subjects in accordance with the regulations.
In April and May the apartments on the ground floor of the building were rearranged, in order that the practice school of primary instruction provided for in the decrees might be established. This department was maintained as a model school for the benefit of third-year students in the normal school proper. The classes in the training department were composed of pupils ranging in age from 6 to 12 years and residing in the vicinity of the school. The instruction included all the subjects of a primary education, special attention and time being given to the teaching of Spanish.
On the morning of December 3, the anniversary of the patron saint of the school, solemn mass was held in the chapel. The afternoon of the same day the hall was beautifully decorated with little colored lanterns and the pupils sought relaxation in a comedy and in a variety of games, accompanied by the orchestra.
The pupils were not without spiritual instruction and admoni- tion. They had daily exercises and instruction in offerings, masses, spiritual lectures, and rosary, and were taught to confess and receive the sacrament once a month.
" The name of Father Francisco Xavier, the first director of the normal school should not be confused with that of San Francisco Xavier (1497- 1552), the apostle of the Indies.
134 T^h^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
The final examinations were held and prizes distributed December 19 to 21, 1866. On this occasion, 14 pupils, who had completed two full years' work, were granted the title of teacher of primary instruction. This was the first class to graduate from the normal school.
In April, 1867, the first examinations were held in the training department, the pupils who had distinguished themselves in studies and conduct being awarded prizes consisting of books and medals.
In December of this year the general examinations for the pupils in professional courses were held, and 25 students received the title of teacher.
Early in 1868 the director and teachers formerly chosen were assigned to other duties in the mission, and Father Alejan- dro Zans was appointed director. Fathers Pascual Barrado, Jose Casadovale, and Santiago Buntas were appointed teachers.
The number of pupils having increased, it was found necessary to provide for 20 additional boarders.
At the end of the school year examinations were held and 27 students were granted certificates of graduation.
By the superior decree of March 22, 1869, the date for the opening of the school year was changed from January to June, for the greater convenience of pupils and teachers. During this year 127 students were registered and 29 received the title of teacher.
The year 1870 was uneventful except that the personnel of the administrative and teaching staff was increased to 8 — 4 priests, 2 brothers, and 2 student assistants. A class of 39 students was graduated.
In 1871 news came from Madrid of the publication of the Moret decree transferring the charge of the normal school to the secular clergy. This order was received in the Philippines with great dissatisfaction by those who had been intrusted with the work of the normal school. On the other hand, there were those who welcomed the change, as they believed it signified greater progress. Arrangements were finally made for the withdrawal of the decree before the end of the year.
As the school year drew toward a close, examinations were held in the two grades of the training department and in all classes of the normal school. The director and other government officials were well pleased with the results of the examinations.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 135
and on April 5 prizes were awarded and diplomas issued to 39 graduates.
At the opening of the school year in June 125 new pupils were admitted and a considerable number turned away for lack of accommodations.
Two material changes in the internal regulations of the school were effected at this time. The first of these prescribed the time and fnanner of making confessions by both boarders and day pupils. The other pertained to the inspection of the students in the evening. A priest was placed on duty as door- keeper, and the passing in and out of the building after supper was thus regulated.
The feast of San Francisco Xavier was celebrated with especial joy. A comedy was given, two balloons were let go, and the sky was brilliantly illuminated with hundreds of rockets.
In 1872 occurred the famous Cavite revolt, but the authorities of the normal school were pleased to note that this did not have any apparent effect upon the student body.
In 1874 the superior civil government of the Philippines decreed that no petition for admission to the normal school should be sent except through a provincial governor. During the same year other decrees were issued fixing the number of resident pupils.
On June 22, 1880, a royal order of the ministry of the colonies set aside a permanent sum of money to be assigned in the budget for the maintenance of the school. It was during the same year that the building was destroyed by an earthquake. The classes were for a few days accommodated at the Ateneo, being held in hallways, corridors, and every other available space large enough for a recitation. As it was impossible to continue this arrangement for a long period and as no other house sufficiently large could be found, the mission of the company of Jesuits rented to the government for the use of the school a building which it possessed in the neighboring pueblo of Santa Ana. This was occupied by the school for a period of six years. Meanwhile, seeing that no other means were forthcoming for giving this school a suitably large building and as the house at Santa Ana was inconveniently located, the mission resolved to take under its care the enterprise of erecting and equipping a new building. This structure, situated in the district of Ermita, was the home of the normal school from 1886 until the institution finally closed its doors.
136
The Philippine Journal of Science
DISTRIBUTION OF GRADUATES
The following table shows the places of residence of the graduates of the normal school from 1865 to 1887.
Peninsula teachers
Abra
Albay
Antique
Basilan
Bataan .\
Batanes
Batangas
Bohol
Bulacan
Cagayan
Calamianes
Camarines
Capiz
Cavite
Cebu
Cotabato
Ilocos Norte
Ilocos Sur
Iloilo
Infanta
Isabela
8
4
12
4
1
9
3
77
20
84
23
2
14
40
31
23
1
45
42
38
1
9
Laguna
Leyte
Manila
Mariano (Guam).
Masbate
Mindoro
Misamis
Morong
Negros
Nueva Ecija
Nueva Vizcaya ...
Pampanga
Pangasinan
Romblon
Samar
Surigao
Tarlac
Tayabas
Union
Zambales
Zamboanga
43
20
230
2
2
14
9
8
3
8
14
54
48
7
18
11
4
27
42
14
7
Total 1,076
PROGRAM OF DUTIES
The distribution of the time of resident students was as follows ;
|
a. m. |
p. m. |
|
5.00 Rise. |
12.30 Lunch, recess. |
|
5.30 Mass. |
1.45 Rest. |
|
6.00 Bath, study. |
2.15 Study. |
|
6.55 Breakfast, recess. |
2.45 Recess. |
|
7.25 Recitations. |
2.55 Recitations. |
|
10.00 Recess. |
5.00 Go out from the classes. |
|
10.10 Drawing, music. |
6.00 Rosary and spiritual lecture. |
|
11.10 Study. |
6.30 Study. |
|
Tk |
8.15 Supper, rest. |
|
9.00 Inspection, retiring. |
OUTLINE OF SUBJECTS IN THE COURSE OF STUDY FOR ELEMENTARY TEACHERS
The following is an amplification of the principal subjects in the course of study for elementary teachers, and is also the outline upon which the competitive examinations of teachers were based.^^
" For an outline of the subjects required for the degree of superior teacher, see No. 5 in the bibliography.
IX. D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 137
RELIGION AND MORALS
1. What is religion and in how many ways can it be considered? What is the natural and what is the true one?
2. Who is God and what are his principal attributes? Why do we say that God is eternal, omnipotent, immense, spiritual, wise, good, kind, and just?
3. What is man? What is the human body? What is the soul and what is the difference between the body and the soul?
4. Of what does the true religion consist? What is worship and in how many ways is it exercised? What is internal worship? Is the internal worship sufficient?
5. What is morality and how is it divided? What is duty? What are good or meritorious actions? What are bad actions?
6. What is meant by moral order and what are its properties? What are laws, natural law, divine law? Civil law?
7. What are punishments and what are rewards? What are natural rewards, positive rewards? Positive punishment?
8. What is conscience? Virtue? Vice? What is the immediate conse- quence of virtue and what is that of vice? Of what does happiness in this and in the other life consist?
9. What duties have men to God and what is the greatest of them all? How is a knowledge of our duty to God conceived?
10. What duties has man to himself? How should man take care of his soul and his body?
11. Is man compelled to work? What is idleness and what bad effects does it bring?
12. What is suicide? Is suicide licit? What is fame? Can we be in- different to the acquiring of fame?
13. What duties has man to his equals? How can we contribute to the conservation of our equals?
14. What are the chief duties of children to their parents? After the parents who has the preference? To whom do we owe respect and sub- mission?
15. What duties have the parents to their children? Duties of teachers to their pupils and of the pupils to their teachers. Mutual duties between masters and servants.
16. What is homicide? Is it licit? Do all the duties that we have to our equals require equal accomplishment?
1. Definition and division of pedagogy. Education and its object.
2. Importance and necessity. Parts that it comprises. Its agents.
3. Difference between education and instruction. Principles of education.
4. Physical education. Importance of air, light, ventilation, clothes, and exercise in physical education.
5. Physical education in the schools. Cleanliness in the school. Other matters of sanitation that require attention.
6. The teacher as a model of cleanliness. How will he inculcate clean- liness in the children? Care of the teacher with respect to air and light in school and with respect to sick children.
7. Necessity of varying the school exercises. Care that the teacher ought to exercise in order that the children may avoid undesirable places.
138 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
8. Intellectual education. Of what does it consist? What is perception and how is it developed?
9. Attention. Importance of this faculty and way of awakening it in the children. How is it sustained and how cultivated?
10. Memory. What is it? How make it strong and active?
11. What is the use of imagination? What contributes to its develop- ment and what things tend to mislead it?
12. Judgment. What is the importance of this faculty? What exer- cises contribute to develop it?
13. Esthetic education. Esthetic sentiments.
14. What does a moral education include? What should the teacher do in order that the children may receive a good moral education?
15. How is religious education inculcated? Fear of God. Obedience to his commandments. Means of religious education.
16. Instruction. Purpose, means, and object of teaching.
17. What are methods of teaching? Explain the most important of these.
18. Teaching of the Christian doctrine. Sacred and moral history.
19. Teaching of reading and grades that it comprises. General proce- dure in this subject.
20. Teaching of writing. Its object. To what is this teaching reduced? Correction of exercises.
21. Teaching arithmetic. Verbal and written exercises.
22. Teaching of Spanish language. Its object and importance. Teach- ing of Spanish where another language is spoken.
23. Systems of teaching; advantages and inconveniences that each offers.
24. Organizations of the schools according to the existing legislation.
25. What is discipline? Its base. Prizes and punishments. Discretion and judgment ought to be used.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
1. Definition of grammar; its division; object of each.
2. Names of the parts of speech. The noun and its various divisions.
3. The adjective and its division. Difference between the noun and the adjective and rule for distinguishing them.
4. Number of nouns. How is the plural formed from the singular. Gender and its division.
5. Declension. Use of each of the cases.
6. The pronoun, its various classes, declension, use.
7. The article, its division, declension, use, and way of distinguishing it from the pronoun in the third person.
8. The verb, its division and accidents in grammar.
9. Moods of the verbs, tenses, ways of distinguishing them and of form- ing them. Voice and conjugation.
10. Regular and irregular verbs, impersonal and defective. Conjuga- tion of the most common.
11. The participle and its divisions. The way of distinguishing it from the adjective. The verb and its various classes. Adverbial moods.
12. The conjunction. Its various classes. Figures of diction.
13. Syntax and its divisions. Concord and its various classes.
14. The cases of the noun and the rules for each case.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 139
15. The use of the transitive verb, of the preposition, and of the conjunc- tion.
16. What is the accusative construction? The nominative? The rela- tion of each to the verb.
17. Construction after the accusative. Construction of the verbs with the pronouns.
18. The grammatical sentence and its various classes. Of what parts is each made?
19. Syntax. Figures of speech. How many are there and of what does each consist.
20. Prosody. Prosodial accent. Syllabication, diphthongs, triphthongs, words accented on the last syllable, on the antepenult, or on the penult.
21. Rules of accents.
22. Orthography and its parts. Principles that will be used as standards of good orthography with respect to the use of the letters. Spanish alphabet and classification of the letters forming it.
23. Use of the letters b and v. Also of g, j, y, x, and h.
24. Use of i, y, and of m. Duplications of the letters. Use of the capital letters. Punctuation and its signs. Cases in which the use of the comma is common.
25. Use of the period and of the other signs used in orthography. Also of the Roman numbers.
ARITHMETIC
1. Arithmetic, number, amount, and unit.
2. Entire numbers, fractions, mixed, abstract and concrete, homogeneous and heterogeneous numbers.
3. Numeration and its division into oral and written. Base of a system of numeration, and when is it called decimal? Units of first order, of second order, etc.
4. Different orders of units in the decimal numeration.
5. Absolute and relative value of the cyphers. Modes of writing and reading entire numbers.
6. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Different names of the signs. The use of these in arithmetical operations.
7. Numbers that can be divided. Even and odd numbers. Prime num- bers, numbers divisible by 2, 3, 5.
8. Decimal metric system. How is it distinguished from other systems. Models used to express the multiples and divisions of the unit and way of verifying them.
9. Unit of length, its multiples and divisors. Units of surface, their mul- tiples and divisors and what relation each bears to the immediate higher denomination.
10. Usual unit of volume and relation it bears to its divisors. Usual unit of capacity, its multiples and divisors. Units of weight, their multiples and divisors.
11. Fractions. Numerator, denominator, proper fractions, improper frac- tions, way of writing them and reading them. How to reduce a mixed number to a fraction.
12. Simplification of the fractions, reduction of the same to a common denominator and way of valuing them.
13. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of fractions.
14. Decimal fractions. Nomenclature of the decimal units, place they
140 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
occupy. Way of reading them and writing them. When are they called homogeneous?
15. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of decimal numbers.
16. Approximation of the quotient in an inexact division. Reduction of ordinary fractions to decimal and from decimal to ordinary fractions.
17. Complex and simple numbers. Reduction of a complex number to the simple form. Reduction. Way of making this reduction in the decimal metric system. Reduction from a superior species to another and inter- mediate.
18. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of complex numbers.
19. Powers of numbers, roots, exponents. Way of indicating a power. Names that the powers receive and how to form them.
20. Square root. Cube root. Way of indicating the extraction of roots. Way of finding the square root of an entire number, of a decimal number.
21. Ratio of numbers, ways of indicating it. Proportion and its funda- mental property. Way of finding one of the means.
22. Rule of three and its division. Way of solving it. When is it simple and when is it compound?
23. Partnership. Three cases that may occur and way of solving them.
24. Rule of alligation. Mode of solving it. When is it direct and when inverse? Interest, how to solve interest when simple and when compound.
25. Drafts. Different ways of negotiating them. How to find the real value and the nominal value. Discount of a draft and how to find it.
PRINCIPLES OF GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY OF SPAIN
1. Geography: Its divisions. Astronomical geography, heavenly bodies, fixed and errant stars or planets.
2. Primary planets. What are they? Their double movement. Satel- lites. Comets. Solar system and that of Copernicus.
3. The sun. Its diameter, volume, and distance from the earth. The moon. Its diameter, volume, and distance from the earth.
4. The earth, its movements. Meridians, equator, tropics, polar circles, and various zones. Horizon. Cardinal points.
5. Physical geography. Figure and dimensions of the earth. Continent, island, peninsula, coast, cape, isthmus, mountain, mountain range, desert.
6. Spring, rivulet, river, torrent, lake, sea, gulf, bay, strait, currents, tides.
7. Atmosphere and elements that constitute it. Meteors. Winds, clouds, rain, lightning, thunder.
8. Political geography. Great divisions of the earth. Races of human species. Government and its principal forms.
9. Europe, its population and location, seas that bound it, its capes, moun- tains, volcanoes, rivers, islands, and principal straits.
10. Political divisions of Europe. States of the north and their respective capitals.
11. States in central and southern parts of Europe and their respective capitals.
12. Spain. Its population, its boundaries, climate, capes, mountain ranges, and main rivers.
13. Territorial divisions of Spain. Capital of the monarchy. Ultrama- rine possessions and population.
14. Population, extension, and location of the Philippine Islands. Moun-
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 141
tain ranges, rivers, lakes, and more important straits. Territorial divi- sions. Location and capital of each of the provinces.
15. Asia, its population, location, straits, rivers, and principal mountains. Political divisions and capital of each one of its states.
16. Location and population of Africa. Seas that bound its coasts and large rivers. Political divisions and capital of each one of the states.
17. Location and population of America. Its mountain ranges and large rivers. Political divisions and capitals of its states.
18. To what is the name "Oceania" given? Climate of Oceania, its divi- sion, and islands that form each one of the three great divisions.
19. History of Spain. What is it and into how many periods is it di- vided? First occupants of Spain, Phoenicians, Greeks, and Carthaginians. Purpose that they had in entering Spain.
20. Who were the Romans? Divisions they made of Spain. Resistance of the Spaniards and their glorious deeds.
21. Barbarians of the north who settled in Spain. Kings of that period who are of greatest historical interest.
22. Arabian Spain. Who were the Arabs? Struggle of the Arabs with the Christians. Who was the illustrious Caliph who was a warrior and was feared by the Christians? Who conquered him and what memorable event took place later?
23. Progress of the small monarchy of Peloyas and his brilliant victories. Kings of greater historical importance in this period.
24. The house of Austria. Origin of this dynasty. Kings of this dy- nasty and their notable deeds.
25. House of Bourbon. Origin of this dynasty. Kings of this dynasty and their principal deeds.
PRINCIPLES OF GEOMETRY
1. Object of geometry, divisions of the subjects, kinds of figures.
2. Straight line, curved, broken, mixed.
3. Circumference, radius, diameter, arc, cord, secant, tangent.
4. Degrees in which the circumference can be divided and subdivisions of these.
5. Angles, right, acute, and obtuse.
6. Adjacent angles and value of both angles.
7. Perpendicular, oblique, and parallel lines.
8. Divisions of the triangle because of its sides or angles.
9. Vertex, base, and altitude of a triangle. Value of angles of a tri- angle.
10. What is a quadrilateral? How are quadrilaterals divided?
11. Parallelogram. In how many ways can it be placed?
12. The polygon and the different value it has according to the number of its sides.
13. The circle, ring, sector.
14. Inscribed and circumscribed polygon.
15. Way of describing a circumference or drawing any triangle or regular polygon.
16. Way of inscribing a regular hexagon in the circumference.
17. Method of finding the area of a parallelogram, triangle, square, and trapezium.
18. How is the area of a regular polygon found, of an irregular polygon, of a circle, of a circular sector?
142 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science isu
19. The more important equivalents of the plane figures.
20. Polyhedron, intersections, dihedral and polyhedral angles. Regular and irregular polyhedrons.
21. How many and what are round bodies? How are they originated?
22. Volume of geometrical body and unit of volume.
23. Way of finding the volume of a pyramid, of a prism, and of a; rectangular parallelogram.
24. How is the volume of the regular polyhedron, of the cylinder, and of the sphere found?
25. Relation between two spheres of different radii.
NATURAL SCIENCE
1. Natural science and its division into physics, chemistry, and natural history.
2. General properties of bodies.
3. Three states in which bodies can be found.
4. Movement and its different classes.
5. Anemometers and their use.
6. The barometer, its use, and the principle on which it is based.
7. The thermometer, its use, and the principle on which graduation is based.
8. Instruments for measuring humidity, on what are they based, and what are their uses? How is the electromotive force valued? How is it named when it is of high pressure?
9. Light, how it is propagated, its velocity, and time required to pass from the sun to us.
10. Reflection of the luminous rays, angles they form on falling on a polished body. Refraction of the same.
11. Microscope, eyeglass, and telescope.
12. Lenses and especial property of the convex, of the concave. Who uses the former? Who uses the latter?
13. Colors that a ray of the sun is composed of and how to decompose it.
14. Electricity. Its properties. How is it developed? Different ways of developing it.
15. The magnets, the compass, and the electromagnet and their important applications.
16. Simple and compound bodies. Metals and metaloids, properties of the former and the latter.
17. Oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen and their principal properties.
18. Pure water and of what it is composed. The atmospheric fluid and of what it is formed.
19. Minerals. How do they appear and into how many groups can they be divided?
20. Vegetables. How do they appear, and of what are they composed? Divisions.
21. Organs of nutrition and of reproduction of vegetables.
22. Functions of nutrition and functions of reproduction in the vegetable kingdom.
23. Animals. How do they appear and of what are they composed?
24. Nutritive functions for the preservation of the animal.
25. Four great groups into which they are divided. Subdivisions of each of them.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 143
ELEMENTARY AGRICULTURE
1. Agriculture, its object and divisions.
2. Purposes to which the agriculturist should aspire and conditions neces- sary to his success.
3. Tillable soil, soil test, and means of improving the soil.
4. Climate for agriculture, its agents and composition of soil.
5. Improvements of the soil and how they are made.
6. How to prepare virgin soil for cultivation.
7. Fertilizer, its different classes and method of application.
8. Special advantages of mineral fertilizers. Plants that need chalk or ashes.
9. Agricultural instruments, their division and the object of their use.
10. Object of agricultural labor, preparatory labor, and labor for cultiva- tion.
11. Principal organs of the plant and parts of the flower.
12. Three ways of planting. Of what do they consist?
13. How many ways are there to water and how are they varied?
14. Time of harvesting and way of preserving the fruits.
15. Among the cereals, what is the richest fruit? How is it planted and irrigated?
16. Two kinds of rice and way of cultivating and cleaning.
17. Planting of maize and cultivation of barley and buckwheat.
18. Cultivation of sugar cane and way of propagating the common bamboo.
19. How are leguminous plants cultivated in the Philippine Islands?
20. Roots and tubercles used for food and how they are multiplied.
21. Preparation of tobacco seed-beds, how the plants are transplanted, and way of harvesting.
22. Lawns. Plants that can form an artificial lawn.
23. Usefulness of animals to the farmer; work animals in the field and their general characteristics.
CONTEMPORARY COMMENT
DIFFICULTIES IN THE WAY
The early years of the normal school were not without their vicissitudes. The following were the most pronounced difficulties that confronted the school :
A lack of competent teachers. — Father Luengo says: ''First of all the normal school needs a sufficient and capable staff/' ^® The Jesuit fathers, who had been previously banished from the Islands, were allowed to return in 1852, upon the condition that they devote their attention to higher education and to the missionary fields of Mindanao. Great efforts were put forth to extend the Christian faith to the new charge. A zealous priest writing from Mindanao says:
By the mercy of God, the conquest of heathen people is continuing at a tremendous rate, and I believe that, despite the lack of laborers, God is
" See No. 19 in the bibliography.
144 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
blessing our efforts so greatly that the day is not far distant when the com- pany of Jesus will say to the Spanish Government: ''It is finished." To-day there are many villages that we have settled with converted heathen where we once reluctantly undertook the cure of souls."
This work drew away from the normal school every teacher who could possibly be spared.
A lack of suitable textbooks in Spanish, — An observer voices his complaint in these words:
Going along Calle Rosario on a holiday, we saw three book stalls which we thought would be full of pious books. On stopping to examine them, great was our surprise when at one alone we found 35 pamphlets and other books of prose and verse, all in Tagalog. Not one of the three had a single Spanish book. These books (that is, the books seen at the stalls) and cer- tain novels, always in the local dialect, circulate through the villages after twenty years of the most complete legislation as to primary education and the diffusion of the official language.^^
It is evident that for these and other reasons the abandonment of the normal school by the Jesuits was discussed, but it is equally certain that there was an overwhelming sentiment against such action. Father Francisco G. Martin Luengo, writing to Father Juan Ricart from Surigao under date of January 25, 1881, says:
We have seen the normal school sickening for several years for lack of members of our own order who shall do their work ^perfectly and freely. The question of abandonment was seriously considered at our conference in Manila in 1877. In my opinion, it would be an irreparable mistake to give up such an institution as the normal school, which is a strong and powerful arm in protecting our power in these Islands. We ought to hold it more strongly in order that it may not be torn from us, until the day comes when we can place it in good hands, faithful to religion and to the throne of Spain, zealous and able to defend our glory.
The same writer goes on to specify in detail why the normal school should neither be abandoned to its fate nor turned over to another religious order.
It would be to the great glory of God, the salvation of souls, and the prosperity of the Spanish Crown in these Islands that it should continue under our care, for through this means we shall advance the welfare of the Islands, since well-trained teachers will be as apostles in their native villages.
We shall take our share in the spread of the Spanish language, whereby new truths may be implanted in the souls of the people.
We shall secure a place on the education board of Manila, which will be a great step toward advancement in the schools and will prevent certain troubles which may harm them.
We shall obtain an influence in the villages, and we shall win the sym-
" Father Luengo.
^' See the document referred to in No. 27 of bibliography..
IX. D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 145
pathy of the people. Every schoolmaster who goes out will praise the Jesuits, for which reason many persons, especially their relations, will seek confession and discuss the affairs of the soul with the fathers of the society.
If the elementary schools are conducted by the third-year pupils of the normal school, an immense good may be done. If possible, the school should be situated in the outskirts of Manila. We should have far more children, and our administration would have an open field.
Of the influence of the schoolmaster among the children in the provinces, there can be no doubt, since they will be in accord with the teaching of the fathers and the rule of the society.
Let us suppose that we transfer our school to others. Who will take charge of it? Will they be religious? It is very doubtful. It is feared that, considering the ideas of the century and the tendency which has shown itself in Manila in various movements, instead of being religious men they will be laymen, and laymen trained in Spanish normal schools, who in their ignorance have spoken and still speak to the depreciation of the bishops, the parish priests, and family life.
Let us suppose that the school falls into the hands of some other religious order. Whoever they may be, I am doubtful if the normal school would be as productive as the government and the country expect. If they belong to the religious orders well known in this country, we have sufficient reason to distrust their ideas. With regard to education and the spread of Spanish, the normal school can show results in support of our arguments. Daily ex- perience supports my contention — every day the attitude of the graduates toward religion is evident.
If the school falls into the hands of the religious men of the orders, we should be sorry for the results of their experience, as it is always essential to have a knowledge of the nature and habits of those to be educated, especially in the Philippines. It may be expected that before securing experience they will make such serious mistakes as will bring to ruin the plan of primary instruction in these Islands, which is one of the fairest jewels in the crown of the illustrious and venerable Father Cuevas. Let us look forward to the day when we can turn our attention from our parishes to the welfare of the normal school.
CONDITIONS CONFRONTING THE GRADUATES
A contemporary writer gives an admirable summary of the situation, indulging fully in his own opinions : ^^
After three years in the normal school, the prospective teacher comes fresh from his studies to don the toga of the schoolmaster. He goes to a village where he has secured a school. His youth and his inexperience do not augur success. If the parish priest lives in isolation from municipal affairs because of his character, his manner of life, and his belief that his intervention in teaching should be confined to certain definite lines, the poor teacher has recourse only to the petty governor who has no especial qualifica- tions. It will be truly marvelous if he attains his end, introduces order into the school and obtains anything he needs, which is everything.
In a majority of the villages the people look with absolute indifference on the youth whose age is a slight recommendation, since knowledge and authority in Malay villages are conceded only to maturity.
'' See No. 27 of the bibliography.
146 The Philippine Journal of Science vnA
New teachers who have recently left the normal school should spend two or three years on probation, helping others w' : should be experienced and well known for their behavior to the village and the local and provincial inspectors. After this apprenticeship, the normal-school graduate would enter upon his duties with greater care.
There ought to be established, under the presidency of the parish priest, a board or committee composed of a certain number of resident parents chosen for their possession of property and by other qualifications to take their turn in looking after the school and giving the teacher moral support.
These municipal boards should assist the young teachers at the outset; should second the watchfulness of the local inspector; and, if they did their duty, they would render very difficult, if not impossible, the common fault that, where the parish priest fails in his duty of inspection, the teacher does as he wishes, and often behaves in a manner that is both reprehensible and impossible to correct.
As for textbooks, their absence is almost unbelievable. We can look for no remedy except on the part of the government; since they must be cheap, and cheapness can only be obtained by publishing large editions by contract and by distributing them wholesale through the provinces. Without text- books, it is foolish to hope for the diffusion of Spanish.
WAS THE PURPOSE OF THE SCHOOL ACHIEVED
On this point let us hear the testimony of the director of the normal school in a letter to the director of civil administra- tion dated May 31, 1889:
The normal school entered upon its academic career and always kept its purpose in mind until it could boast of having given the Archipelago over 1,100 teachers and assistants. As to the quality of the professional training which they have received, the normal school has vigorously complied with the government regulations, and has lately even done more by devoting more attention than the government prescribes to certain subjects. Its methods have never been unfavorably criticised, nor have any suggestions been modified. On any occasion where the government officials have honored the school with their presence, they have expressed themselves as thoroughly satisfied with its labors on behalf of education, as happened this year when Governor-General Weyler attended the commencement exercises.
Despite all this, there is a common complaint as to poor teachers and their inability to speak Spanish. While there is much exaggeration on this subject, due to the fact that modernism is always opposed to the religious atmosphere of the normal school, it must be recognized that many of the teachers are stupid and careless, that unless their minds are continually sharpened they grow rusty as they grow old, and that private affairs usurp the place of their studies and their professions.
But there are honorable exceptions. There are model teachers who carry out in full the plan of instruction authorized by the government. And all may reach this standard by strict inspection, continuous watchfulness, and the stimulus of rewards and punishments.
There is a general reason why there are only a few good Filipino teachers, but there are also many external causes which are partly excusable. The most important one is that every year about 50 graduates leave the school.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 147
Of these, about a quarter secure positions as teachers, some go home satis- fied with the education iiti dady obtained, some look for clerical positions, some secure in a short time larger salaries with less work and responsibility than would befall them as teachers, while some go on with their studies to higher schools to secure a surveyor's or a commercial degree and thus rob the schools of the^best educated teachers. These causes would cease if the pay of teachers were increased; they now receive less than other employees of much inferior education, although they have more work and greater responsibility.
Another reason why Filipino teachers are not careful in the performance of their duties is that they have little assistance. Some have no proper schoolhouses and no suitable equipment and accommodations, while others are confronted by the opposition of parents. Some spend most of their time in lowering the standards of their profession and are unable to keep up the position demanded of a teacher, until at last they possess little or nothing but the name. If then there are poor teachers, this affords no reason why the normal school should be characterized as useless.
We might make complaints on similar grounds to the effect that Spanish is little spoken. Fifty per cent of this criticism is exaggeration. Those who have spent some years in the country agree that in the last fifteen to twenty years they have noticed a remarkable increase in the number of those who speak Spanish in the provinces. To hope for universal Spanish is to disregard history and linguistics. The Basque and Catalan provinces of Spain, Alsace-Lorraine in Germany, and Roussillon in France are examples of the fact that, after a lapse of many centuries under a more advanced civilization and with more compulsion, primitive dialects have not been superseded by the official language. On this account, then, there is no charge against the normal school.
PwECOLLECTIONS OF A GRADUATE
Don Mariano Padilla, who graduated from the normal school in 1888, furnishes the best description we have of the methods of teaching practiced in the training department of the normal school and in the public schools generally.^^
The practice school, supervised by a graduate of the normal school, furnished the students an illustration of how to teach, as well as how to organize and manage a large school. Each pupil of the third year was required to attend this school two weeks before graduating. The method of teaching was also studied in the class. The pupil teachers were not only required to master the lessons and practical exercises assigned, but were also expected to be able to present and explain each subject in such a way that it could be understood by the children.
We studied four systems of teaching, which we called individual, simul- taneous, mutual, and mixed. The individual system consisted in teaching pupils one by one all the lessons they studied. This system was not appli- cable to a large school, but for a few pupils it furnished excellent advan- tages as the teacher could instruct according to the capacity and intelligence of each.
"" See No. 21 in the bibliography.
148 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
The simultaneous system consisted in dividing the school into classes or sections and teaching one after another of these. The size of sections depended upon the number of pupils in the school and the ability of the teacher to handle classes. This system was similar to that which is in operation in the public schools at the present time. The system had its advantages on account of the superior organization and supervision which it made possible, but in the time of the Spanish government the general adoption of this system was impossible on account of the scarcity of teachers. Owing to a lack of funds in the public treasury, there were seldom more than two teachers in a town, one male and the other female. As boys and girls did not attend the same schools, one teacher was com- pelled to give instruction in all classes and all subjects. In spite of the many advantages of this system, it was not then applicable to any consider- able number of schools.
The mutual system consisted in selecting the more advanced pupils of the school and organizing them into groups of monitors, who were taught at different hours by the regular teacher. The instruction of the monitors included both subject matter and methods of teaching less advanced pupils. While the monitors taught the several sections, the teacher went about the room supervising the work of monitors, correcting errors, and keeping order in the school. In the larger schools, this was the most practical system then in vogue, but it was far from being perfect. As the teacher was often overcome with fatigue on account of his arduous duties, it was impossible for him properly to instruct the monitors.
The mixed system was a combination of the simultaneous and mu- tual system. The teacher divided the school into sections of 15 pupils each, grouping in the same section those pupils of equal knowledge. He then formed, from the most advanced section, two groups of monitors, called first and second monitors, whose instruction came direct from the teacher. One first monitor and one second monitor were assigned to teach each section by turns. The teacher divided his own time into three equal parts, one of which was devoted to the instruction of the first monitors, one to the second monitors, and the remainder was given to the general supervision of the school. The chief merit of this system lay in the fact that it com- bined direct supervision by the teacher with the aid rendered by monitors.
The training department of the normal school was organized under the mixed system. The pupils of the third year were compelled to attend this department for two weeks. Then the critic teacher in charge of the prac- tice school submitted to the director of the normal school a report on the work of the student teacher, together with his opinion as to the ability of the student to direct a school.
The following may be said with reference to the movement of classes when the practice school was in operation. The ringing of the bell an- nounced the beginning of the classes. At once the monitors, one first and one second, went to their respective sections. The teacher announced in a loud voice what subject was to be taught; for example, Spanish grammar. Upon the ringing of the second bell, the first monitors assem- bled in an appointed place to receive the instruction of the teacher. At the same time, the second monitors took charge of their respective sections. The time for teaching grammar having been finished, the teacher rang two bells, indicating a change in subjects. At once the whole school became
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 149
very quiet in order to hear what the teacher was about to announce. With the ringing of another bell, the first monitors took charge of sections and the second monitors went to their recitations. After the instruction of the monitors was completed, the teacher spent the remainder of his time in supervision.
THE NORMAL SCHOOL IS ELEVATED TO THE GRADE OF SUPERIOR
The fondness of the natives for instruction and ' the great increase in educational interest since the founding of the normal school led to the conclusion that the course of training offered teachers should be prolonged and improved. Accordingly, on November 10, 1893, the government of the Philippine Islands drew up a proposed decree elevating to the degree of "superior'' the normal school for men teachers in Manila, and approving provisionally the new regulations for that school. On December 15 of the same year another decree was issued with orders supplementary to the superior decree and the regulations of the normal school, approved November 10. In April of the following year a royal order of the ministry of the colonies confirmed the decrees which elevated the normal school to the rank of ''superior.'' That part of the decrees and regulations which in any way modified or extended previous decrees is in substance as follows : -^
ORGANIZATION
Under the authority of the director, it is provided that there shall be at least six teachers, besides one instructor in drawing, one for vocal music, one for gymnastics, three assistants, and the number of servants and dependents necessary for the school. One of the teachers shall be spiritual instructor and have charge of the religious ceremonies ; he shall also be instructor in sacred history and ethics. Another shall discharge the special duties of prefect of morals. The remaining instructors shall be occupied in teaching other subjects.
SUPPORT
The salaries to be received by the director, instructors, assist- ants, and dependents, as well as the expenses for equipment and the rent of a building, shall be paid out of the local funds of the Islands.
From a note furnished the director of civil administration by the director of the normal school in May, 1889, we obtain
'^ See No. 14 in the bibliography.
150
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
the following estimate of the annual expenses of the normal school :
Pesos.
A director and 4 teachers 4,000
Three assistant priests 1,200
One teacher in drawing 600
Fifteen positions, pupils in school 1,800
Servants' and waiters' services 600
Materials for teaching 1,000
Rent of the normal school building 4,000
Materials for drawing classes 120
Total
13,320
The normal school continued to receive similar support until some years after the American occupation (page 166).
CURRICULUM
The course of study then included two grades, elementary and superior. The work necessary for obtaining a certificate as elementary teacher extended over a period of three years. Pupils of the normal school who completed the course prescribed for elementary teachers and passed all examinations with an average of "excellent'' were entitled to become candidates for the degree of superior teacher. Those who did not obtain the mark of "excellent," but that of "good'' or "fair," were entitled to receive a certificate as elementary teacher and to take charge of a school of a lower grade.
The course of study for elementary teachers was as follows:
Subject.
Recitation.
First year.
Second year.
Third year.
Religion and sacred history
Religrion and morals
Spanish grammar
Arithmetic
Reading
Writing
Music, drawing, and calisthenics
Manners and right conduct
Geography
History of Spain and the Philippines.
Elementary geometry
Pedagogy
Elementary agriculture
Daily .
Daily .
Daily
do
do
Half hour daily.
Daily
Biweekly
Daily
do
do
Half hour daily
Daily
Biweekly
Alternate days _.- do
Daily. Do.
Daily.
Half hour daily.
Daily.
Alternate days. Do. Do.
The requirements for the degree of superior teacher were a general average mark of "excellent" in the course prescribed for elementary teachers and in addition thereto the following :
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 151
Advanced pedagogy, together with a knowledge of legislation in force regarding primary instruction in the Philippines; religion and ethics; universal history; algebra; industry and
commerce; the ordinary phenomena of nature.
\
PENSIONERS
No tuition was charged, the school being supported by the government, but all boarders were required to pay for their maintenance. Among the latter class were the government pensioners. At one time there were 30 of these, but the number was reduced to 20, at a later date to 15, and finally the system was abolished altogether, as it was thought unnecessary. The allowance of pensioners was 10 pesos per month.
REGULATIONS
At the end of each month a review was given covering all the subject matter passed over during that month. A private examination was given on the work of each quarter, and a public final examination at the close of the year.
The holidays set aside for the normal school were the following: Sundays, Thursdays, feast days. Ash Wednesday, All Saints' Day, the birthdays of the Spanish sovereigns and of the Prince of Asturias, the day of the patron saint of the governor-general of the Philippine Islands, the Christmas holi- days extending from Christmas Eve until January 2, and the Day of the Three Kings. The long vacation extended from the close of the examinations, about the last of March, until the first of June.
The merit of pupils was recompensed with honorable marks, which were entered in the book of the institution, and with annual prizes whose solemn distribution took place at the close of the final examinations.
The following internal regulations, governing the conduct of the pupils, were promulgated on November 24, 1893, and in- corporated in these decrees : ^^
1. Every pupil was required to be:
(a) A native of the Spanish dominions.
(b) At least thirteen years of age.
(c) Free from contagious diseases and in good health.
(d) Able to speak Spanish, understand the Christian doctrine, read
and write, and know something of arithmetic.
(e) Able to write to the director, giving his Christian name, sur-
name, birthplace, and age. (/) Vaccinated.
"" See footnote 8.
152 I'f^^ Philippine Journal of Science i^h
2. The fees for all except government students were 140 pesos a year, payable in two installments — on the day of entrance and on the 1st of October. Ten pesos were paid as an entrance fee. For this, students re- ceived instruction in all classes, including ornamentation and the use of all scientific instruments and collections, as far as necessary.
3. Students were provided with iron bedsteads, beds, white bedclothes, washstand, and table linen. They were given the free use of the infirmary, dispensary, and the free services of the physician in cases of ordinary illness.
4. If a student left the school before the end of the year, he had the right to recover all that he had deposited, except for the unfinished part of the month in which he left. For absences or late registration, no more than a month's fee was deducted.
5. A prescribed uniform was required to be worn on certain days.^^
6. Every three months a report as to conduct, application, and improve- ment in studies was sent to the parents.
7. A gentle and persuasive method of discipline was used, and every effort was made to impress upon the mind of the youth the sentiments of honor and noble rivalry.
8. Pupils were admitted only on the opening day, unless they justified their absence on serious grounds.
9. Pupils were permitted to receive visits from their parents or per- sons authorized by them, only once a week, and that during the recrea- tion. In no case were they allowed to leave the school with friends or write or receive letters without the consent of the director.
10. Every pupil was required to speak Spanish, even in private conver- sation, and to write letters in Spanish only.
11. No student was allowed to possess money, but parents were permitted to leave with the director an amount not to exceed 30 pesos. From this fund, sons were granted a moderate weekly allowance to be spent on useful or healthful objects or given to the poor.
12. There were no vacations except at the end of the school year, when pupils were not allowed to remain longer in the school. No pupil was permitted to leave during the year except in the case of poor health.
In accordance with the superior decrees of December 15, 1893, the follow- ing regulations were set forth, prescribing the manner of holding written and oral examinations:
WRITTEN EXERCISES
1. The applicant will sharpen the pencils and prepare the pens.
2. He will write an alphabet of capital letters and another of small letters on ruled paper to be furnished him.
3. He will write from dictation a paragraph taken from a book.
^' The following clothing was prescribed : Two pairs of white pantaloons, 2 pairs of colored pantaloons, 2 white jackets, 1 black alpaca coat, 2 black ribbons for the neck, 1 black cap, 2 pairs of shoes, 1 pair chinelas, 10 white shirts, 2 colored shirts, 12 handkerchiefs, 12 pairs of socks, 4 pairs of drawers, 1 mat, 1 pillow, 4 pillowcases, 4 sheets, 2 bed covers, the neces- sary toilet articles. (See GrifoPs La Instruccion Primaria en las Islas Filipinas, page 20.)
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 153
4. He will solve problems in arithmetic that have been approved by the judges.
5. He will write a simple explanation of not less than half a sheet on his choice of three pedagogical subjects drawn by lot.
6. The applicant will work in full all problems submitted to him and leave all of the explanations on the paper to hand to the examiner. He must also explain the pedagogical point involved in the problem.
7. The examinations will continue for such a time as the judges may think fit, not to exceed two hours for writing and the solution of problems, one hour for the explanation of pedagogical points, and another hour for copying the work.
ORAL EXERCISES
1. Questions on some point of a subject drawn by lot, except pedagogy.
2. A reading exercise in printed letters and in handwriting.
3. A grammatical analysis of the words and sentences in a dictated paragraph.
4. A simple lesson demonstrating how some part of the work of the training school should be conducted.
The question or exercise upon which each student was expected to recite in the oral test was determined in the following manner :
The president of the board of examiners put into a box 50 balls, each bearing a number. The secretary drew out a ball in the presence of the applicant and read the number. The applicant was required to take the question or exercise of the corresponding number and give an answer at once. The judges listened to the recitation and gave the student a mark. The judges were also permitted to ask suitable questions. The oral examinations did not continue more than half an hour.
teachers' examinations
It was provided that examinations be held four times each year for the benefit of those who desired certificates as assistants. The examinations were conducted by the director and the teachers of the normal school.
The general division of civil administration was empowered to issue teachers' certificates upon the recommendation of the director of the normal school.
When there was a vacancy in any of the better positions of the teaching service, the place was filled by competitive examination : any one who had a certificate as elementary teacher was eligible to enter the contest. In case of a tie in the examina- tion ratings obtained, consideration was given to the teacher of most experience or to the one who had the best record in the practice school.
154 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science i jh
THE NORMAL SCHOOL BOOTH AT THE EXPOSITION
The Philippine Territorial Exposition was held in Manila in 1895. At this exposition was an exhibit by the Superior Normal School. It is interesting to note the contrast between that exhibit and those which are given at the present day by the public schools at the Philippine Carnival.
In the center of the hall was a large booth surmounted by the sign of the normal school. On the right-hand side hung 12 geographical and statistical maps, showing the condition of public instruction in the Philippines. All of the villages in which there were schools were shown, even the number of grades in the various schools being given. These maps were drawn by the pupils of the normal school under the direction of their teachers. On the left side were the plans of the building of the Superior Normal School and the observatory of Manila. On each side were photographs of the pupils in their holi- day, Friday, and ordinary uniforms. There were photographs of the various rooms in the building, including the chapels of the fathers and the students, the dining room, the study hall, the upper classrooms, the baths, the garden, the basin, and the gallery. ,
Below these plans were carefully colored maps of Spain and the Philippines, surrounded by a collection of trophies and prizes and by beautiful copy-book pages, the whole forming an artistic and intricate pattern on a bright green ground, surmounted by the normal-school shield. This was drawn by the boys in the practice school.
In the center of the normal-school booth was a table with drawers, and on its sides two pyramid-shaped stands on which were placed the following agricultural implements in miniature : A spade, a shovel, a hoe, a rake, a pick, a trowel, a mattock, a hatchet, various instruments for cutting, a harrow, a combina- tion pickaxe and hammer, a Coleman cultivator, a Scott cultivator, a foot ruler, a Crasskill ruler, a Bochin seeder, a lawn mower, a hay mower, a riddle, a Bochin straw cutter, a Bochin weeder, a modern thrasher, a plow, a two-pronged fork, a small grape vat, a coconut vat, a grape squeezer, a well, and a hydraulic chain pump.
In the central cabinet were the following: Different prizes given in the Normal School, consisting of medals, diplomas, and recitation rewards; the Regulations in Force, as applied in the schedule of the course for superior teachers ; the Elements of Pedagogy, by Father Jose Murgadas; the three volumes of
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 155
Spanish grammar lately published by Father Santiago Mazo; Yove's Sacred History, in three parts; Carderara's Industry and Commerce, dedicated to the normal school. This cabinet also contained the work of several provincial teachers, including pedagogical and literary articles, and maps and charts of various kinds.2*
THE PEDAGOGICAL ACADEMY
The pedagogical academy was an association of teachers for the study of educational questions and the betterment of the teaching profession. The academy was founded by the director of the Superior Normal School on February 23, 1894. The organic regulations according to which the academy was to be governed were approved by the governor-general on July 20, 1894. These were in substance as follows :
1. The academy proposes to cultivate the pedagogical studies among the teachers of the Philippines, to promote a love for these, and to devise suit- able means for their development.
2. The board of directors shall be composed of the director of the normal school as president, the dean of the academic classes as vice-president, two councilors to be chosen by the president and vice-president, and a secretary to be elected by the board.
3. There shall be three classes in the academy. The first class shall be the superior teachers; the second class, the elementary teachers; and the third class, the assistant and the substitute teachers.
4. In order to be admitted to the academy, it is required that: (a) An application addressed to the board shall be filed with the president; (b) the credentials of the applicant, together with a statement regarding his profession or business, shall be submitted; (c) the applicant shall possess a good name and an exemplary character.
5. Teachers living in the provinces may become members in the same manner as others.
6. The members of the academy will meet fortnightly in the normal school, at an hour previously appointed, for a literary performance. The meetings will continue for two hours, and the following will be the order of business: (a) Call to order; (6) reading of minutes of the last meeting; (c) the subject to be discussed will be proposed by the president, and some member named by him will talk on the point indicated. In lieu of this, a lecture of not more than thirty minutes* duration will be given by a member of the society; (d) remarks by the chairman; (e) adjournment.
On October 1, 1894, the governing board of the academy held its inaugural session in the normal school. At this meeting a librarian and a director of the pedagogical museum were elected.
We can better understand the purpose of this association
^* Boletin Oficial de Magisterio Filipino, 1 , 34.
156 The Philippine Journal of Science 19 h
and more fully appreciate the work which it accomplished by examining the following excerpt from a report of the sec- retary. This report included a general review of the work of the academy during the first two years of its existence.
The director of the Superior Normal School, cognizant of the necessity of providing some means by which the teachers who graduate from the normal school may develop, proposed the establishment of a pedagogical academy. This association was the means of impressing upon the teachers the dignity and honor of their profession, inspiring them with the desire to spread morality and culture among their pupils, to carry intelligence from province to province and from town to town, to awaken the families to the call of necessity knocking at their doors, and to enkindle in the minds of the common people the sentiments of virtue, knowledge, patriotism, and Christianity; as these things insure more and more the moral and material enlargement of the Archipelago.
Enough has been said to convince one of the utility and great impor- tance of the pedagogical academy. It is filling a want which has been felt throughout the history of these Islands, and is destined to remedy many of the faults of the teaching profession.
In corroboration of what I have just said, let us take a look into the past. Not long ago, the schools of the Archipelago were rated as woefully defi- cient. This condition of affairs resulted from a lack of schoolhouses and equipment, a lack of interior organization, poor attendance, the inexperience of the teachers, and the want of pedagogical knowledge. It is not my pur- pose to censure the Spanish Government nor reprove the teachers, but, with my hand upon my heart, I am constrained to lament the fact that in spite of the ardent fondness and powerful means put forth by the government of His Majesty and the diligence of those in charge of education in this distant region the results up to date cannot be compared with those achieved else- where in the same time and with the same labor.
The academy tends to dissipate these difficulties. At first the effect may be small, but it will become constantly greater as the fight goes on against those things which restrain or annul teaching.
The academy has already given palpable proof of its vitality and use- fulness in disentangling the difficulties that are opposing the instruction and education of the Filipino youth. Evident proof of this truth lies in the good results reported by the teachers who took part in the literary sessions held periodically in the academy. In these meetings, they acquired useful knowledge which was entirely new. Even the teachers in the prov- inces who did not attend the sessions were benefited by those meetings, accounts of which were published in the Official Bulletin for Filipino Teachers.
Our academy has other effective means of instruction. These are the pedagogical library and the museum which the academy has been forming little by little from the beginning, in order to refresh and enrich the knowl- edge of the teachers.^^
The following may further serve to show the character of the work undertaken by the pedagogical academy.
^' See No. 5 in the bibliography.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 157
THE FIRST PEDAGOGICAL CONTEST IN THE PHILIPPINES
This contest was instituted by the Pedagogical Academy, through its president, the director of the Superior Normal School, for the purpose of stimulating interest in matters edu- cational. The zest and enthusiasm with which the contestants and the audience entered into the occasion show unmistakable signs of an educational av/akening. The range of subjects dis- cussed and the manner of treatment are not without significance. Incidentally, the occasion was representative of the rather strik- ing type of literary entertainments which characterized the Spanish schools of that day and is still common in the better private schools of the Islands.
This contest was held on December 3, 1895, exactly thirty years after San Francisco Xavier was declared patron of the normal school. We cannot do better than let the chronicler of the time tell the story of the pedagogical contest in his own way.-^'
The occasion was solemnly begun, and it took place in the chapel of the Superior Normal School for teachers, the hall eloquent in its simple, but fitting decoration. The top of the stage was protected by a curtain artis- tically painted for the occasion. Under this artistic dais was placed a presidential table which was occupied by the judges of the contest. Sitting near this table was the honorary president, his excellency, the governor- general of these Islands; on his right, the archbishop of the diocese; and, on the left, the major-general of the naval squadron. On both sides, the seats in the first row were occupied by the director-general of civil adminis- tration, the president of the royal audiencia, and the fiscal and the governor- general of Manila. The other seats were occupied by a numerous and select audience.
A symphony executed with great precision opened the meeting. Then followed a short opening address by the chairman of the judges of the contest. The speech may be summed up as follows: The exordium con- sisted in declaring the solemnity, importance, scope, and transcendency of pedagogical contests, emphasizing the fact that this, the first to be cele- brated in the Philippines, opened a new era and should be marked with golden characters in the annals of primary education in the Islands.
The subject matter of the address was the following: The Greatness of the Profession of the Primary Teachers, in which two principal arguments were discussed and which formed the body of the address. These two argu- ments were: The origin of the profession of teaching and the object of the same. In the second argument was considered, in meaning words, the good that it gives to individuals, as well as to the family and the community as a whole. On the other hand were explained the evils that confront not only the vicious teacher, but also the teacher who is negligent in the perform- ance of his duties.
^^ This account is an abridgement of that which appears in Boletin Oficial de Magisterio Filipino, 2, No. 1. See No. 23 of the bibliography.
158 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The peroration of the speech contained an expression of gratitude to his excellency, the governor-general, to the metropolitan archbishop, to the di- rector-general of civil administration, to the superior of the Company of Jesus, and to the director of the Superior Normal School, for their protec- tion and patronage of the first pedagogical contest held in the Philippines and for the prizes which they had offered to the winners of the five themes. The speaker also thanked the teachers, who had rendered their services to make the contest a success, praising those who were awarded prizes, giving them his good wishes, and encouraging those who were less fortunate, so that in future contests they may also wear the wreath of victory.
This was followed by the reading of a paper, containing the result of the work done and the prizes obtained. The gist of the paper read was as follows: Five compositions were awarded prizes for excellence, 28 others were rated as "good," while 7 were rejected because the writers did not observe the instructions. The paper whose subject was To the Progress of the Philippines was unanimously considered by the judges as the best, and therefore received first honors.
After the secretary had read the subject of this composition, the sealed envelope containing the paper was brought on a silver plate to his excel- lency, the governor-general, who announced the name of the author, Don Catalino Sevilla, a teacher, by merit, of the first municipal school of Binondo. The author having declined to read his paper, his emotions preventing him from doing so, the task was undertaken by Senor Baldosano, whose excellent reading helped to emphasize the beautiful thoughts of the composition. Immediately after the reading, Senor Sevilla was called to the front to receive from the hands of his excellency, the governor-general, the prize offered by his excellency. It consisted of the works of Seiior Benor in three volumes, Arquitectura de las Lenguas. The volumes were elegantly bound in Russian leather; on the obverse was a monogram of the name of Jesus, inlaid with silver; in the center was inscribed, in plated letters. First Pedagogical Contest. Just below this was inlaid in silver the arms of the city of Manila. On the back of each of the three volumes was the silver inscription. First Prize, and in the lower part were the silver initials of the governor-general, with the crown of a marquis.
In this paper, the writer expressed his sorrow at the scarcity of children attending schools in most of the towns of the Philippines, and gave three causes for this sad misfortune, with the corresponding remedies.
1. Lack of schoolhouses, materials, and furniture. — He proposed a rem- edy to the effect that the municipalities should work out a plan for the building of schoolhouses. He treated this point with practical wisdom, praising all, without laying blame on anybody.
2. Internal organization of the schools. — He prescribed moderate treat- ment. He divided the schools into three classes which might be subdivided indefinitely, according to the number of children, and he also presented the program of study for each of the sections. He insisted that a teacher should prepare the lesson before going to the class and that his explanations should be made simple in order to reach the understanding of the pupils. He recommended the method of teaching by object lessons. He treated of reward and punishment of pupils, citing opinions to substantiate his state- ments and alluding to the fact that the Eternal Judge rewards the good and punishes the bad. He concluded this argument by saying that prizes are not sufficient to gain the love and good will of the pupils. He condemned
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 159
those teachers who cannot be respected by the pupils without resorting to harsh punishment.
^. Administrative acts of local authorities. — He said that these should be efficient and continuous, and finished his essay by quoting the words of Governors Izquierdo and La Torre.
After this, the secretary proceeded to the consideration of the essays for the second theme whose subject was A Treatise Concerning the Teaching of Spanish in the Philippines. The envelope in which it was inclosed was opened by the archbishop of Manila, and the author was found to be Don Mariano Leuterio, superior teacher and secretary of the Pedagogical Academy.
He divided his essay into three parts: Importance of the wide extension of the Spanish language in all parts of the Philippine Archipelago; legis- lative acts conducive to this end; and comments on the Spanish language, showing the difference between language and grammar.
1. The author began with the statement that language is to the nation as a mother is to her child, the home to the family, and society to the indi- vidual. He went on to prove that the most effective means to spread education, agriculture, industry, and commerce in the Philippines is through the diffusion of the Spanish language everywhere.
2. This paragraph showed that the author had fathomed the depths of legislation.
3. This paragraph marked the line between the study of the language and the study of grammar and the methods to be pursued for the acquisition of both.
After the reading, Don Mariano Leuterio was called to receive his prize from his excellency, the prelate. It consisted of a magnificent geographical, statistical, and historical dictionary of Spain and its domains. He received an ovation from the audience as he took his seat, after receiving the prize.
The third theme was A Brief Treatise Concerning the Duties of Teachers in the Philippine Islands. The prize was obtained by Don Pedro Serrano. Sr. Baldosano read a part of this composition, which was greatly applauded by the audience. The giver of the prize, Senor Bores, himself delivered the prize, which was an elegantly bound edition of Monlau^s Rhetoric and Poetry.
There were no papers presented for the fourth theme, and the prize, offered by the superior of the Company of Jesus, was awarded to the essay that got second place in the first theme, whose author was found to be Don Florencio L. Gonzales, vice president of the academy, superior teacher, and director of the College of the Immaculate Conception. The author read a part of this essay, which was greatly applauded by the audience. The prize, consisting of the works of Donosa Cortes, in four volumes, was awarded by the governor-general.
The secretary then passed to the fifth theme. Discourse on Teaching by the Object Method. Padre Isidoro de la Torre opened the envelope, and the superior teacher and proprietor of the school in Quiapo, Don Pedro Serrano, received the prize, consisting of a book, Heterodozos Espafioles, by Don Marcelino Menendez Pelayo, from the hands of the governor-general.
After the reading of the records of the secretary was finished, the contest was concluded by a hymn sung by the students of the Superior Normal School. The press of Manila eulogized the great success of the first peda- gogical contest; the director of the Superior Normal School, who had origi-
160 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
nated the contest; the Pedagogical Academy; and all the teachers who contributed to this intellectual competition.
We cannot close this short description of the pedagogical contest without quoting the words of El Comercio, which show the quality of our modest celebration: We consider this contest of such importance, that we thought to devote a special edition to it, thinking that the celebration of yesterday, by its influence upon the culture and advancement of the Filipinos, in all spheres of moral development, and the stimulus it gives to public education, deserves more attention than the limited applause of a mere local and passing comment.
And although the contest of yesterday has yet to show the public the practical application of the varied activities discussed in the various essays, yet the knowledge that there exist energy and talent among those most con- cerned in primary education in these Islands, as shown in the recent contest, namely, among bright young pedagogues, merits the decided help and protec- tion of the government and of the public in general ; and these circumstances are sufficient to make us dedicate our pen to the contest. It was indeed a great lesson that was taught yesterday at the Superior Normal School for teachers, which was not perhaps realized by all. As the sound that it pro- duced in the atmosphere echoes and reechoes to unknown limits, as a stone that falls on the surface of a lake causes the waters to move in concentric circles away from it, until they reach the very shore of the lake itself, so will the celebration of yesterday extend its undying influence over every locality in the Archipelago. It will encourage the unpretentious teacher in some dark corner of these Islands to carry on with greater efforts his educational work and to live up to the heights of his noble profession; and as his extraordinary talents and activities are placed before the eyes of the public and receive its applause, his individual efforts will be more and more encouraged, and will thus contribute greatly to the welfare of his country. May God, in His infinite kindness, make this first pedagogical contest in the Philippine Islands the beginning of a new era of progress for the education of the Filipino youth.
THE NORMAL SCHOOL UNDER THE AMERICAN FLAG
A STATEMENT TO THE PATRONS OF THE SCHOOL
Soon after Spanish sovereignty came to an end in the Phil- ippine Islands, the following circular letter was issued by the authorities of the normal school :
This center of education, well known to the Filipino people as it now is in the thirty-third year of its existence, has trained thousands of young men for every province in the Archipelago, and still remains open to all those who desire to avail themselves of its advantages.
The few fathers of the society, who conduct the school, will be obliged in the future, as in the past, to give its pupils a sound, moral, and religious education, so that they may fulfill the desires of the Filipino people, who are Catholic and intend to remain so; and second the aims of the United States Government in bringing about the welfare of the country.
Teaching will be given in Spanish, the only language in general use in
IX, D, 2 Cain: Histoi^y of the Spanish Normal School 161
the Archipelago, and indispensable now and for a considerable period in the future. For this reason, three courses in Spanish are compulsory.
Three courses with a daily recitation in each will also be given in English, since English has not only come to be of great value, but a knowledge and use of this language are always necessary.
As a study of these two languages is somewhat difficult, it must occupy a greater part of the time of pupils, to the reduction of other courses which may be less important. These are preparatory courses essential to the primary and secondary teacher.
The degrees conferred by the school have such a value that they will be recognized by the American Government, and in any case will be sufficient proof that the pupil is ready for any position.^^
In 1899, Father Pedro Torra, giving evidence before the Philippine Commission regarding the educational conditions in the Islands, furnished the following interesting statement concerning the normal school and its graduates, which is given in abstract: 2^
In order to be a teacher in an official school, a degree as master from the normal school was exacted, but at times when there were no such persons holding degrees substitutes were appointed, and only at such times.
Of those who have graduated from the normal school some have died. Others have never cared to teach, having pursued the course only to learn Spanish and get a general education. If they had all desired to teach, there would have been no scarcity of teachers. The career of teacher is an arduous one, involving a great deal of hard work, and they do not care to undertake it. The salary which would be sufficient in an ordinary walk of life is not sufficient for a teacher. It does not compensate him for the amount of hard work he has to do to fit himself for his profession. Those who have actually taken up their profession have done it either because they have been encouraged to do so by the fathers, or as a simple matter of honor. If it had not been for the fathers, hardly any of them would have put their learning into practice. Then, too, it must be remembered that in the towns there were other things which would bring them much more remuneration than they would receive as teachers. For instance, they could serve as interpreters for the petty governors, which, without the hard work involved in exercising their profession, would bring them a very much higher return. The way to induce them to exercise their profession would be to give them better compensation, more privileges, and make the profession more attractive for them.
Teaching was obligatory only for those to whom the government paid a pension. These were required to teach for a period of ten years.
The school has no connection with the United States Government, except that the latter has continued to pay us the amount the Spanish Government gave us, and the courses are continuing. The amount of the endowment is 8,880 pesos a year ; but in consideration of the fact that the necessaries of life are a great deal more expensive now than formerly, an increase of this amount has been asked for through the inspector of schools. An increase
^^ Copy in the Ateneo, Manila.
''Report of the Philippine Commission (1900), 2, 285.
162 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
equivalent to one-third of the present amount is necessary for the continu- ance of the establishment.
The following year, a complete prospectus was issued, showing the degrees offered by the school and the conditions necessary to obtain these degrees, the entrance requirements of pupils, the length of terms, and supplementary classes, and giving an account of the practice classes, methods of discipline, terms and accommodation offered to boarders, requirements in dress, and the course of study.
The course of study as revised at the opening of the school year in 1900 was as follows i^^
FIRST YEAR
Spanish language Recitation daily.
English language Recitation daily.
Arithmetic Recitation daily. United States, general, and Philippine
geography Recitations on alternate days.
Catechism and sacred history Recitations on alternate days.
Writing Half an hour daily.
SECOND YEAR
Spanish language Recitation daily.
English language Recitation daily.
Arithmetic and elementary algebra Recitation daily.
United States and Philippine history Recitations on alternate days.
Explanation of the catechism Recitations on alternate days.
Writing Half an hour daily.
THIRD YEAR
Spanish Recitation daily.
English Recitation daily.
Elementary geometry and surveying Recitation daily.
Elementary pedagogy Recitation daily.
Elementary agriculture Recitation daily.
Religion and morals Recitations on alternate days.
Lectures on politeness Weekly.
The study of Spanish and English comprised all the grammar, suitable exercises in reading, writing from dictation, analysis, translation, composition, and speech making.
The requirement for candidates for the degree of superior teacher was the possession of the degree of elementary teacher with a rating of "excellent'' and in addition the following :
Advanced pedagogy.
Elements of physics, chemistry, and natural history.
Studies and literary exercises in Spanish and in English.
A study of certain religious, moral, and ethical questions of value.
^^ The prospectus mentioned in No. 25 of the bibliography.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 163
Vocal and instrumental music. Drawing of every kind. Hygienic gymnastics. ' Meteorology and seismology. General principles of fine arts.
In sending out the above-mentioned prospectus, Father Torra inclosed the following circular letter:
The change that is taking place in the social and religious life of the Philippines makes every day more necessary the maintenance and multipli- cation of Catholic teaching centers of all kinds and grades, which may deserve particular confidence. On the other hand, the attitude of the Gov- ernment of the United States on the subject of education in this country is unknown. We cannot tell how they will regard institutions that have not been established by the Government, and are therefore unofficial, or what value they will attach to the degrees won in these institutions, and what requirements they will exact in the future.
The Jesuit fathers, who claim by the help of God to have done some little good in the Islands, through the sound instruction and Christian education which they have given for many years in the Superior Normal School, are anxious to continue at work, if this is for the good of the country. They hope that the Government will recognize the value of their work. Up to the present, the great majority of those who have obtained the degree of schoolmaster in the normal school have used their education both to teach and to obtain dignified positions.
This being so, I am sending you the inclosed prospectus, in order that, if you think fit, you may show it to all parents of your acquaintance, whom you think may be interested, because the more pupils the normal school obtains, the more consideration it will secure: it will be able to interest the Government and the general public of these Islands, and more thoroughly diffuse the Catholic faith.
A STATEMENT TO THE PHILIPPINE COMMISSION
In September, 1900, the director of the Superior Normal School addressed to the Philippine Commission the following exposition :
The object of this establishment is the creating of suitable teachers to fill the position of schoolmaster in the public schools throughout the Phil- ippine Archipelago. It was founded by the Spanish Government and in- augurated on the 23d of January, 1865.
The course covered three years, and included all those subjects usually taught in the primary schools. In 1893, an extra course was added to amplify the knowledge of the teachers and equip them for giving superior primary instruction. By virtue of this improvement, the school was raised to the category of a superior normal school. Since the last course wa^ completed, the study of the English language has been added in all classes, including those in the school of practice. This school of youth is associated with the normal school, and in it the future masters are exercised in the practice of teaching.
126083 5
164 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
The Spanish Government appropriately subsidized this school, and paid the expenses of the material and furniture, and therefore the teaching was, and still remains, entirely gratuitous. At the close of the Spanish dominion in these Islands, the Government of the United States continued to give this subsidy, and even made it somewhat larger, up to a little more than a year ago.
The average number of pupils when conditions are normal is:
In the course for the degree of master 450-500
In the school of practice 150-200
Total 600-700
The present number of pupils is:
In the course of the degree of master 304
In the school of practice 201
Total 505
The total number of masters up to the present is 1,606
Annual average 53
Total number of assistants 340
Some of the above-mentioned pupils are boarders, and their number has varied according to the capacities of the various buildings which the normal school has successively occupied. In 1896, the boarders numbered 184; at the present time there are 102. The unpeaceful state of the times in many provinces of the Archipelago has been the reason that more pupils have not entered.
The school being without suitable quarters, the Company of the Jesuits erected in Ermita the building now occupied by the normal school. For this undertaking, it was necessary for the mission to burden itself with a considerable debt which it hoped to extinguish in a few years by the help of the 4,000 pesos^ loan which the Spanish Government offered it, and the economies it would be able to make. As it stands now, the structure has cost more than 200,000 pesos and at the present could not be erected at three times the cost. Therefore, we do not believe that we exceeded the bounds of justice when we asked last year of the Government of General Otis an increase of appropriation. Nevertheless our petition was rejected.
The increase of the endowment has become more necessary on account of the notable increase in price which articles of actual necessity have reached. Without claiming, then, any right by the sacrifice mentioned or the merits of our teaching, the writer limits himself to submitting to the consideration and wisdom of the Commission the necessity in which the normal school finds itself for an increase in endowment, in order that with more ease and better results it may continue its work in the future.
Besides this, in order that this institution may retain its reputed import- ance and show a reason for existence, it is necessary that it should acquire a special title for the granting of degrees to teachers. This has not been done in the last two years.
It is necessary in the same way to recompense the masters well and to stimulate their zeal by all possible inducements, otherwise the last of
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 165
them will withdraw from the occupation of teaching to seek more gain in other employments or business which call for much less work and subjection.
The undersigned in the name of the corporation which he represents asks, moreover, that if he inspires the Commission with sufficient confidence in his corporation it will vouchsafe to leave it entire liberty in the election of the teaching staff, texts, and methods of teaching, and above all in the teaching and practice of the Catholic religion in the same way as this liberty is understood and practiced in the Catholic colleges of the United States.
Finally, as it is of the utmost importance to the teaching institutions represented by me to know as soon as possible and with all possible cer- tainty for future guidance and determination what is to be the future lot of this normal school, I ask the Commission to have the kindness to manifest to me, with loyalty and frankness-, its feeling and wishes regarding the above-mentioned points and any other which may at the time affect the well-being and prosperity of this establishment.
THE CREATION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION
The Commission did not grant the foregoing petition. On January 21, 1901, the Philippine Commission enacted the law creating the Department of Public Instruction. This Act placed all public schools under the immediate charge of the Director of Education. Some of the duties assigned this official were the general supervision of the entire Bureau, the fixing of a curriculum for all public schools,. the prescribing of the attain- ments necessary for teachers, the appointment of teachers, and the fixing of a definite salary for each. The Act further provides that no teacher or other person shall teach or criticize the doctrine of any church, religious sect, or denomination, or shall attempt to influence the pupils for or against any church or religious sect in any public school.^^
In contemplation of the foregoing Act, the reasons for declining the petition of Father Torra are obvious. While his request was in perfect accord with the practices of the Spanish Govern- ment, an institution endowed by the Government and managed wholly as a private enterprise, without any direction or super- vision by the Government, is very unusual under the American flag.
A REQUEST FOR AUTHORITY TO CONTINUE THE NORMAL SCHOOL
On March 18, 1901, Father Torra wrote Brig. Gen. George W. Davis, provost-marshal of Manila, as follows :
I have the honor to inform you that the school called the Superior Normal School for Schoolmasters is about to be incorporated by law, but in the meanwhile, according to the president of the Philippine Commission, it
^^' Act 74 of the Philippine Commission.
166 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
requires authorization to continue in the work of teaching. The name of the school up to the present has been the Superior Normal School for Schoolmasters and in the future will be known by this name.
I hope, sir, that you will be kind enough to grant written authority for the continuation of this school on the same conditions as during the last two years.
The following reply to the foregoing communication was submitted by Dr. David P. Barrows, at that time city super- intendent of schools for Manila :
This institution, although belonging to and under the direction of a reli- gious order, was established by the Spanish Government as a factor in its system of instruction, all salaries and expenses being paid from the public funds. This arrangement continued after the American occupation by a verbal order of the military governor authorizing the payment to this insti- tution and to the Ateneo of 1,145 pesos every month for the salaries of the teachers and 187.17 pesos for rent of the buildings used by the said religious order. The normal school was also furnished material for its classes through this department.
By a recent resolution of the Philippine Commission, this institution ought not to receive any aid from the public funds after the present month. This school will not henceforth form part of the public-school system, but will be on the same footing as any other private school. In section 25 of the law establishing the Department of Public Instruction we read: "There shall be nothing in this law to prevent, hinder, or stop the formation and continuation of private schools in these Islands." It appears that written authority is not necessary for the continuation of this institution as a private school, but there seems to be no reason why it shall not be given.
THE WITHDRAWAL OF FINANCIAL SUPPORT AND FINAL CLOSING OF THE NORMAL
SCHOOL
On March 30, 1901, Maj. Gen. Arthur McArthur promulgated an order authorizing the Superior Normal School to continue its work as a private institution, but withholding further financial assistance.
Owing to the unsettled times incident to the war, the increase in the cost of living, the withdrawal of financial support, the discarding of Spanish as the language of the schools, and the change in the- sovereignty of the Islands, the normal school was never able to get fairly upon its feet after the American occupation. However, it remained open and continued to turn out small classes of graduates until 1905, when its doors were finally closed after a useful career of forty years.'^^
^"^ The present Philippine Normal School is in no way an outgrowth of the Spanish Normal School for Men Teachers. For several years the two insti- tutions were located on adjoining campuses, but each managed its own affairs and sent forth its graduates entirely independent of the other.
IX, D. 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 167
GRADUATES OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL FROM 1866 TO 1905
Graduates. Graduates.
1866 14 1887 46
1867 25 1888 59
1868 27 1889 50 1869''= 0 1890 39
1870 29 1891 40
1871 39 1892 46
1872 54 1893 51
1873 53 1894 111
1874 65 1895 32
1875 79 1896 39
1876 120 1897 26
1877 78 1898 26
1878 81 1899^^ 0
1879 66 1900 10
1880 55 1901 12
1881 51 1902 20
1882 50 1903 19
1883 29 1904 25
1884 33 1905 11
^^^^ ^^ Total 1,693
1886 49
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Barrantes, Vicente. La Instruccion Primaria en Filipinas desde 1595.
Madrid (1870). — In the Philippine Library.
2. Blair, Emma H., and Robertson, James A. The Philippine Islands,
1493-1898. The Arthur H. Clark Company, Cleveland (1904).— A documentary history comprising accounts of explorations, military expeditions, descriptions of the Islands and their peoples, and records of the Catholic missions. 55 volumes.
3. Ba^es. — A code of regulations applicable to students of Mindanao who
desire to attend the Normal School. MS. in the Ateneo de Manila, dated May 18 (1894).
4. Bases propuestas entre la Compania General de Tabacos y por la Com-
pafiia de Jesus. — This document is a preliminary agreement for the erecting of the building in Ermita where the Normal School was located from 1886 until 1905. MS. in the Ateneo.
5. Boletin Oficial de Magisterio Filipino. Manila (1895-1898), 1-3.— Co-
pies in the Philippine Library, the Ateneo, and the Central Seminary of San Francisco Xavier.
6. Comision de Estudios. A statement dated May 3, 1866, giving the
names of the Commissioners of Instruction. MS. in the Ateneo.
'^ During the first few years of the history of the normal school, the annual sessions closed in December; but in 1869 the time of closing was changed from December until the following April; hence the lack of grad- uates for 1869.
^ In 1899 no one took the examination on account of the war which was then in progress.
168 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
7. Communication to the Governor-General by the Director of the Superior
Normal School regarding the renting of a building at Santa Ana, dated August 14, 1880. Reply of the Governor-General, dated October 30, 1880. Letters in the Ateneo.
8. Creacion Oficial del Observatorio de Manila y relaciolies de la misma
con la Escuela Normal (1884-1900).— MS. in the Ateneo.
9. Cuenta de Gastos de Instruccion de la Escuela Normal de Maestros de
Instruccion Primaria de esta Capital. — This is a statement of the equipment, together with the cost of each article. MS. in the Ateneo.
10. CUEVAS, Jose Fernandez. Plan de Instruccion Primaria, April 20
(1861). Also, Instruccion Primaria, April 29 (1861).— MSS. in the Ateneo.
11. Datos facilitados al Exmo. Sor. Director de Admon. Civil por el R. P.
Director de la Escuela Normal a fines de Mayo de 1889. — MS. in the Ateneo.
12. El Seminario y Escuela Normal de San Xavier a Maria Imaculada en
el quincuagesimo aniversario de su Definicion Dogmatica (1904). — MS. in the Ateneo.
13. Estados de la Escuela Normal. — A series of tables and outlines, giving
statistical and other information. In the Ateneo.
14. Grifol, Daniel. La Instruccion Primaria en las Islas Filipinas. — A
collection of school laws from 1863 to 1894. Manila, 1894. In the Philippine Library, the Ateneo, and the Central Seminary of San Francisco Xavier.
15. Historia de la Escuela Normal de Manila (1865-1872).— MS. in the
Ateneo.
16. Index of Examinations for the Degree of Teacher (1865-1905). — A
book in the Central Seminary of San Francisco Xavier.
17. Instruccion Primaria. Clippings from the Diario de Manila, September
19 and 20 (1883).— In the Ateneo.
18. Instruccion Primaria. — Clippings from La Oceania Espafiola, September
18 and 20 (1880). In the Ateneo.
19. Luengo, Francisco G. Martin. A letter to Father Juan Ricart, written
from Surigao, January 25 (1881). In the Ateneo.
20. Official Register, giving a digest of decrees, correspondence, and other
information relating to the Normal School. A book in the Central Seminary of San Francisco Xavier.
21. Padilla, Mariano. San Carlos, Pangasinan, graduated 1888. A MS.
prepared by Mr. Padilla. It is in the possession of the author. Facsi- miles of diplomas appear in the appendix.
22. Parrafo sobre las Escuelas Normales. — A general discussion on secular
normal schools. MS. in the Ateneo.
23. Primer Certamen Pedagogico de Filipinas. This is a book of about 100
pages comprising the proceedings and essays presented in the first pedagogical contest. The book is No. 1 of volume 2 of the Boletin Oficial de Magisterio Filipino. In the Ateneo.
24. Proyecto de Plan de Instruccion Primaria y de Establecimiento de una
Escuela Normal de Maestros en Manila redactado por la Junta nom- brada al efecto en 1855, y Presentado al Gobernador General en 7 de Marzo de 1861 seguido del voto particular del vocal P. Gainza, Domi- nico, sobre Escuelas en idioma Castellano, al cual se opone. — MS. in the Ateneo.
IX, D. 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 169
25. Prospectos y Reglamentos de la Escuela Normal de Manila (1900-
1901). —In the Ateneo.
26. Reglamento Interior de la Escuela Normal. — MS. in the Ateneo.
27. Relacion de la Fundacion, Regimen Interior, Desarrollo y Frutos de
la Escuela Normal de Maestros escrita en 1887. — MS. in the Ateneo.
28. Report of the Philippine Commission, 1900. Government Printing
Office, Washington (1900).
29. Education in the Philippines. Report of the United States Commis-
sioner of Education, 1902. Government Printing Office, Washington (1903), 2.
30. Ricart, Father Juan. A letter written to the Director of Civil Admin-
istration, October 1, 1883, regarding the destruction of the normal school building. In the Ateneo.
31. Reyes, Francisco. Comunicacion al Gobernador General por el Presi-
dente de la Comision de E studios. — MS. in the Ateneo.
32. Varios Proyectos de Planes de Estudios Redactados por las Comisiones
Nombrados al Efecto. Manila (1856-1866).— MSS. in the Ateneo.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plates I and II. Certificates issued by the Spanish normal school.
Ill and IV. Indorsements on certificates issued by the Spanish normal school.
171
o o
I o
<
DC O
Q UJ
<0 W
u
I- < o
L.
H QC UJ O
UJ
<
_l Q.
<
Q. (f)
Ml
I I-
>-
m
<
<
11^
\^^^
V
.^_^J * 1 >4^
^~n ^ ^ i ©' ?~ 4
^^
I- < O
I-
QC O Q
<
-I Q.
Q
><
I- <
o
Ll X
o
u
V)
a: o
Q
<
-J
>/
NEUE HOMOPTEREN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN
Von L. Melichar
(Briinn, Moravia, Austria)
Ein Tafel
DIETYOPHORIN^^
Orthopagus (Udugama, Anagnia) philippinus sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig.
1 u. 2.)
Scheitel doppelt so lang wie zwischen den Augen breit, zwischen den vorderen Augenecken eingeschniirrt, die Seiten- rander gescharft und aufgerichtet, die Oberflache zwischen den Augen zu einem kleinen schwarzen starkglanzenden Knopfe erhoben, welcher mit dem ebenso kallosen glanzenden schwarzen Hocker der Scheitelspitze zusammenhangt. Eine ebensolche schwarze runde Schwiele befindet sich an der Basis der Stirne am Ende des Mittelkieles, wahrend die Seitenkiele an der Aussenseite von einer Reihe von schwarzen Makeln begleitet, sich oberhalb der Schwiele mit einander verbinden. Die Seitenkiele der langen Stirne konvergieren nach unten und reichen bis zur Clypeusnaht. Der Clypeus in der Mitte und an den Seiten gekielt, die untere Halfte dunkelbraun, das Labrum an der Basis hellgelb; auf der Clypeusnaht 4 kleine dunkle Punktchen die • inneren einander genahert, die ausseren am Rande. In der oberen Wangenecke (zur Scheitelspitze) 3 schwarze Punkte, der 3. dicht am Rande, je eine kleine Makel vor der Ocelle, der Fiihlergrube und am unteren Wangenrande. Pronotum halb so lang wie der Scheitel, hinten stark stumpf- winkelig ausgeschnitten, im Winkel selbst deutlich eingekerbt, auf der Scheibe mit 2 eingestochenen Punkten, zwischen denselben ein starker hellgelber Langskiel. Schildchen mit 3 Langskielen, der Mittelkiel stark, und wie die Schildchenspitze hellgelb. Die Fliigeldecken hyalin, glashell, glanzend, mit gelblich braunen Adern, einer breiten halbmondformigen Langsbinde am inneren Apikalrande ohne hyaline Randflecken, in welcher die Quernerven hellgelblich sind, und eine das Stigma nach innen iiberragende Langsmakel in der Mitte des Costalrandes. Stigma vierzellig. Auf den Seiten der braunen Vorderbrust eine helle breite schrage Binde. Der Bauch unregelmassig braun gefleckt. Die Vorder- schenkel an der Unterkante erweitert, die Erweiterung vor der
173
174 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Spitze zahnformig abgesetzt, dunkel gefleckt und gebandert, die Schienen an der Basis und Spitze und zwei Ringe in der Mitte braun. Hinterschienen mit 6 schwarzen Dornen, an der Basis derselben schrage schwarze Striche. Vordertarsen und die Spitzen der hinteren Tarsenglieder braun.
Lange sammt Flugeldecken 12.5 mm. {$ , $ ) .
Luzon, Los Baiios, Mt. Maquiling (C. F, Baker).
Fiinf Exemplare erhalten.
CIXIIN.^ Dystheatias punctata sp. nov.
Schmutzig zitronengelb oder rostgelb, mit schwarzen Punkten auf den Flugeldecken.
Scheitel quer viereckig, die Augen nicht uberragend, der Hinterrand gerade, auf dem Scheitelrande 2 flache Eindrucke. Stirne zum Clypeus verbreitert, in der Mitte ein deutlicher Langskiel, welcher sich auf den Clypeus fortsetzt. Ocellen klein, die 3. Ocelle nicht vorhanden, Fiihler kurz. Pronotum vorne gerade, den Hinterrand des Scheitels beriihrend, hinten winkelig ausgeschnitten. Schildchen von den Seiten zusammengedriickt, oben flach mit 3 parallelen Langskielen, von welchen der Mittel- kiel besonders eleviert erscheint. Flugeldecken stark vertikal gestellt, nach hinten allmahlig verbreitert, hinten schief nach vorne gerundet. Das Geader mit feinen farblosen Kornchen ohne Harchen besetzt. Der aussere und innere Sektor ist im ersten Drittel des Coriums gegabelt, der mittlere Sektor einfach. Auf der Teilungsstelle der Clavusader, ein schwarzer Punkt, in der Mitte des Coriums 2 solche in einer Querlinie stehende Punkte, zuweilen treten noch am Costalrande 2 braunliche Plinkt- chen auf; am Apicalrande an den Spitzen der Apicaladern schwarze Punkte. Fliigel hyalin, nicht getriibt, die Unterseite und Beine blass gelblich, zuweilen grlinlichgelb.
Lange 4-4.5 mm. ($ , $ ) .
Luzon, Los Bafios (C. F. Baker).
Dystheatias fuscovenosa sp. nov.
In der Form und Struktur der vorhergehenden Art gleich, nur sind die Sektoren rostbraun und mit ebensolchen Kornchen besetzt, das Geader im Apicalteile ist mit der Grundfarbe (blass gelblich) gleich. Am Apikalrande dunkle Randpunkte.
Lange 4.5 mm. ( $ ) .
Luzon, Los Bafios (C F. Baker).
Die Gattung Dystheatias Kirk, steht den Gattungen Kirhyana
IX, D. 2 Melichar: Neiie Homopteren von den Philippinen 175
Melich. und Ptoleria Stal sehr nahe. Kirbyana unterscheidet sich durch den winkelig ausgeschnittenen Vorderrand, Ptoleria durch den in der Mitte des Coriums gegabelten mittleren Sektor der Fliigeldecken von Dystheatias.
Genus BENNARIA novum
Scheitel sehr schmal, stark reduziert, als schmaler nach hinten abfallender quer viereckiger Raum wahrnehmbar, so dass von oben der grosste Teil der Stirne sichtbar ist. Die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet, lang und schmal, die Rander gescharft und aufgerichtet, die Stirnflache glatt, ohne Mittelkiel. Clypeus kurz, in der Mitte und seitlich gekielt, an der Clypeusnaht die 3. Ocelle deutlich sichtbar. Rostrum diinn, bis zur Mitte des Hinterleibes reichend. Fuhler kurz. Pronotum sehr schmal, hinten breit winkelig ausgeschnitten. Schildchen so breit wie lang, mit 3 parallelen Langskielen. Fliigeldecken an der Basis schmal, nach hinten verbreitert, hinten quer gestutzt, mit abgerundeten Ecken. Verlauf der Adern wie bei Benna Walk. An den Seiten der Brust ein nach aussen vorstehendes stielartiges Organ, welches an der Spitze becherartig erweitert und mit weissem Sekret bedeckt ist (wie bei Benna). Fliigel hyalin. Beine massig lang, Hinterschienen ohne Dornen.
Von der Gattung Benna Walk, insbesondere durch die nicht gekielte Stirne zu unterscheiden.
Typ. gen : Bennaria bimacida sp. nov.
Bennaria bimacula sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig. 3.)
Braun, die Kiele des Schildchens schwarz. Fliigeldecken gelblich braun, mit einer grossen runden schwarzen Makel auf der Teilungsstelle des inneren Sektors. Das Geader und die Costalrandader schwarzlich. Im Apikalteile 3 bogenformige aus braunen Makeln zusammengesetzte Querbinden. Fliigel rauchbraun, mit schwarzen Adern. Hinterleib dunkelbraun. Beine braunlichgelb.
Lange 8 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios (C. F, Baker).
TJgyops g^anulatus sp. nov.
Gelblichbraun. Scheitel klein, trapezoidal, die Basis der Stirne von oben sichtbar, auf welcher die beiden Stirnkielaste in die Ecken des Scheitels einmiinden. Stirne sehr lang, oben schmal, zum Clypeus etwas wenig verbreitert und dann wieder verengt. Die Rander fein gekielt. In der Mitte der Stirn ein Langskiel
176 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
welcher sich im unteren Drittel gabelig teilt, die Gabelaste, dicht neben einander eine schmale Spalte bildend, mlinden in die vorderen Scheitelecken. Clypeus halb so lang wie die Stirne, in der Mitte und an den Seiten gekielt. Die Ftihler lang, den Kopf weit uberragend, das 1. und 2. Fiihlerglied fast gleich lang, die Fuhlerborste kurz. Pronotum etwas wenig langer als der Scheitel, vorne gerade gestutzt, hinten sehr schwach gebuchtet, fast gerade, oben mit 3 Kielen und 2 eingestochenen Punkten. Schildchen so breit wie lang, mit 3 Langskielen. Die Flugeldecken schmal, lang, 4 mal so lang wie einzeln breit, nach hinten nicht verbreitert, hinten einfach gerundet. Der aussere Sektor in der Mitte des Coriums gegabelt, der aussere Gabelast vor der Queraderlinie nochmals geteilt, der 2. Sektor einfach, der 3. Sektor hinter der Mitte geteilt. Aus der Queraderlinie entspringen 9 Apikaladem, von denen die 3. (von aussen) gegabelt ist. Die Apicalzellen sind sehr lang und schmal, der Apikalrand hat einen fein quergestrichelten Saum. Im Clavus eine Gabelader, deren Schaft in den Schlussrand mundet. Die ganze Coriumflache ist mit feinen Kornchen besetzt, die auch zu beiden Seiten der Sektoren liegen. Die rauchbraune Apikalmembrane ist nicht gekornt, nur die Apikaladern fein granuliert, so dass sie bei schiefem Lichte wie angenagt erscheinen. Fliigel rauchbraun. Unter- seite und Beine blass gelblich, die nicht besonders langen Hinterschienen mit 3 Dornen.
Lange 6 mm. ( 9 ) .
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
ACHILIN./E
Genus TANGINA Melichar
Tangina Melichar, Horn. Fauna Ceylon (1903), 44. Eurynomeus Kirk, Bull. Haw. Sugar PI. Assoc. (1906), 1, 422.
Tangina qnadripunctulata sp. nov.
Blassgelb, die Unterseite heller. Auf der Scheitelspitze 2 schwarze Punkte, und auf dem Schildchen jederseits ausserhalb der Seitenkiele ein grosser schwarzer Punkt. Die Augen grau, am unteren vorderen Rande derselben eine schwarze Makel. Die Stirne ist etwas gewolbt, mit starkem Mittelkiel, die Rander fein gekiel. Flugeldecken hyalin blassgelb, der aussere Sektor ist vor der Mitte des Coriums gegabelt, beide Gabelaste am Ende bogenformig in die Costa einmiindend. (Auf. Taf. II, Fig. 19b, Tangina hipunctata Mel. ist die Gabelung des 1. Sek-
IX, D, 2 Melichar: Neue Homopteren von den Philippinen 177
tors nicht eingezeichnet.) Hinterschienen mit einem Dorn vor der Mitte.
Lange 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Tangina quadrilineata sp. nov.
Scheitel quadratisch, nach unten geneigt, die Augen nicht iiberragend, in der Mitte fein gekielt. Die Stirne wie bei T. bipunctata Melich. gebildet, mit einem Mittelkiel, welcher sich auf den Clypeus fortsetzt. Kopf und Pronotum gelblichweiss. Schildchen gelb mit 2 schwarzen Punkten und zwar befindet sich jederseits ein Punkt in der vom ausseren Kiele und dem Schildchenrande gebildeten Ecke. Ein grosser schwarzer Punkt auf den Seiten der Vorderbrust. Fliigeldecken hyalin, milch- weiss, an der Basis mehr gelblich, mit 2 scharfen schwarzen Langsstreifen, der aussere Streifen befindet sich auf dem ersten Sektor und dem inneren Gabelaste derselben, der zweite nimmt den Schlussrand ein. Apicalmembrane iibereinander geschla- gen, rauchbraun. Flugel hyalin, milchig getriibt. Die Unter- seite und Beine gelblichweiss. Hinterschienen mit einem kleinen Dorn vor der Mitte.
Lange 4 mm. (s , ? ) .
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Majella philippina sp. nov.
Der Scheitel die Augen iiberragend, schmal, nach vorne verschmalert, die Seitenrander blattartig erweitert und auf- gerichtet mit den gleichfalls blattartigen Randern der Stirne in eine stumpfe Ecke zusammenstossend. In der Mitte der Scheitelflache ein feiner Langskiel. Der Scheitel sowie die blattartigen Rander derselben und der Stirne weiss, vor den Augen an den Seiten des Kopfes 3 schwarze Striche. Die Stirne dreieckig, oben einen scharfen Winkel bildend, nach unten verbreitert, die Seiten abgerundet, die Flache schwarzbraun, mit einer weissen dreieckigen Makel in der oberen Stirnecke. Clypeus kurz, braun. Augen schwarz, Fiihler kurz, gelblich. Pronotum sehr schmal, der Vorderrand zwischen den Augen bis zur Mitte derselben vorgeschoben, dunkel gefleckt, Pronotum so lang wie breit, mit 3 parallelen Langskielen, die Oberflache schwarz und braun gefleckt, die hintere Partie zwischen den Seitenkielen einschliesslich, diese und die Schildchenspitze weiss, dasselbst 2 dunkle Punkte zwischen den Kielen und 2 braune Stricheln vor der Spitze. An diese weisse Makel schliesst sich ein schwarzer Langsstrich, der auf dem Mittelkiele liegt.
178 'J'he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Flugeldecken langlich, hinten stark abschiissig, wie gebrochen, und iibereinander geschlagen, braun, an der Costalseite mit roten Kornchen, auf den dunklen Adern mit weissen Kornchen dicht besetzt. Im Clavus am Schildchenrande ist ein kleiner hyaliner Fleck mit schwarzem Punkte auf der weissen Cla- vusader. In der rauchbraunen am Apikalrande schmal rot gesaumten Apikalmembrane sind die Apikaladem und Queradern weisslich, mit schwarzen Piinktchen besetzt. Am Stigma ein schwarzer glanzender Punkt mit rotem Hofe in Form eines Auges. Fliigel rauchbraun, Unterseite schwarz, die Beine braun, die Schenkel schwarzlich, Hinterschienen mit einem kleinen Dome in der Mitte.
Diese Art ist der australisehen M. majella Kirk, ahnlich, doch nach der sehr kurzen Beschreibung Kirkaldy's lasst sich die Identitat nicht feststellen.
Lange 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios (C F. Baker).
Callinesia philippina sp. nov.
Gelblichbraun mit braunen Flecken gezeichnet. Scheitel etwas wenig Ifenger als an der Basis breit, vorne gerundet, flach, die Seiten fein gekielt, auf der Scheitelspitze beiderseits des durch- laufenden Mittelkieles ein schwarzer Langsstrich. Stirne ziem- lich breit, nach oben deutlich aber nicht stark verschmalert, in der Mitte gekielt, die Rander fein gekielt und zum Clypeus gerundet. Die Stirne gelblichbraun, der Clypeus dunkler. Das Gesicht ist stark horizontal geneigt, der Scheitel nach unten abschiissig. Ocellen gross, rot, Fiihler globulos. Pronotum halb so lang wie der Scheitel, vorne gebogen, hinten gebuchtet, in der Mitte gekielt, Schildchen hellgelb mit 3 hellen Langskielen, zwischen denselben vorne und hinten und an den Seiten braun gefleckt, Flugeldecken hyalin, mit zahlreichen braunen Flecken, welche 2 nach vorne und innen schrag laufende Binden bilden, am Costal- rande mehrere schrage Striche und ein schwarzer Punkt an der Basis der 2. Apikalzelle. Die Apicalmembrane rauchbraun. Die Unterseite dunkelbraun, die Beine schmutzig gelblichbraun.
Lange 4.25 mm.
Luzon, Los Bafios (C. F, Baker).
Zu dieser Gattung gehort: C fimbriolata Melich., Hom. Fauna Ceylon, s. 47 (Paratangia) .
Nysia alba sp. nov.
Etwas wenig grosser und breiter als N. atrovenosa Leth. Cremeweiss, bloss das Schildchen blass gelb. Der Scheitelkiel
IX, D, 2 Melichar: Neue Homopteren von den PhiKppinen 179
parallel, gescharft und aufgerichtet in die ebenso gescharften Seitenrander der Stirne bogenformig (Seitenansicht) iibergehend. Die Stirne parallel, zwischen die Augen sehr unbedeutend verschmalert, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Clypeus klein dreieckig, gewolbt, an den Seiten gekielt. Fiihler kurz, gelblich. Pronotum sehr schmaL Schildchen gewolbt, mit einem deutlichen Langs- kiel in der Mitte. Fliigeldecken milchweiss, opak, mit weissen Adern, der aussere Sektor an der Innenseite, die aussere Clavusader auf beiden Seiten gekornt. Verlauf der Adern wie bei N. atrovenosa. Sechs Apikalnerven, der 2. und 3. von aussen gerechnet gegabelt. Fliigel hyalin, milchweiss. Hinter- leibsriicken schwarzlich. Die Unterseite und Beine blass gelb- lichweiss. An der Hinterleibsspitze beim $ haufig weisses flockiges Sekret.
Lange 6 mm., Breite 1.5 mm. ( ^ , $ ).
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F, Baker),
Lamenia flavescens sp. nov.
Kopf, Pronotum und Schildchen rotgelb, Fliigeldecken hyalin, schwach gelblichbraun tingiert. Augen schwarz. Der Scheitel ist quer viereckig. Die langliche Stirne in der Mitte nicht gekielt, die Seitenrander gescharft. Augen verhaltnismassig sehr klein, schwarz. Unter den Fuhlern eine deutliche lamellen- artige Querleiste. Das Geader der Fliigeldecken dunkler, Flugel graulichbraun, mit dunklen Adern. Der Mittelkiel des stark gewolbten Schildchens ist stark, die Seitenkiele kaum angedeutet. Vor der Schildchenspitze eine tief e Querf urche- Beine blassgelb.
Lange 4 mm.
Luzon, Los Banos (C F. Baker).
RICANIIN^^ Pochazia marginalis sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig. 4.)
Pechschwarz, matt. Stirne schwarz, in der Mitte mit einem feinen Langskiel versehen. Clypeus schwarz. Pronotum in der Mitte gekielt, mit 2 eingestochenen Punkten. Schildchen mit 3 Kielen, die inneren Gabelaste der Seitenkielen mit dem Mittelkiel vorne verbunden. Fliigeldecken breit dreieckig, der Costalrand vor der Apicalspitze flach eingebuchtet, der Marginalrand konvex. Die Fliigeldecken schwarz, ein langlicher Randfleck hinter der Mitte des Costalrandes und der ganze Marginalrand weiss hyalin. Die Costalrandader rostgelblich. Fliigel ranch braun. Die Unterseite schwarz, Beine braunlichgelb.
Lange 13 mm. ; Spannweite 24 mm.
Luzon, Mt. Maquihng (C. F. Baker) .
180 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Pochazina bakeri sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig. 5.)
Der P. handlirschi Melich. ahnlich, die Stirne, Unterseite und Beine lehmgelb, die Oberseite braun, die Flugeldecken mit griinlichem Schimmer auf der Diskalflache und kupferartig glanzenden Impressionen am Costal- und Marginalrande. Hinter der Mitte der Costa nur ein schmutzig gelblicher hyaliner Keilfleck, in den Apikalecken und langs des Marginalrandes 3 kleine hyaline Punkte.
Lange 13 mm. ; Spannweite 24 mm.
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I
Fig. 1. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf und Thorax von oben gesehen.
2. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf von vorn.
3. Bennaria himacula gen. et sp. nov.
4. Pochazia marginalis sp. nov.
5. Pochazina hakeri sp. nov.
181
Melichar: Neue Homopteren.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf und Thorax von oben gesehen. 2. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf von vorn. 3. Bennaria bimacula gen. et sp. nov. 4. Pochazia marginalis sp. nov. 5. Pochazina bakeri sp. nov.
TAFEL I.
NOUVEAUX CYNIPIDES DES PHILIPPINES
Par J. J. KlEFFER {Bitsch, Germany)
I. EUCCELIN^^
Genus PROMIOM(ERA Ashmead
Ashmead a donne une courte diagnose du genre Promiomcera, mais il n'a pas decrit Fespece typique et jusqu'a present on ne connaissait aucune espece qui put s'y rapporter. Meme Tespece que nous allons decrire ne concorde pas entierement avec la diagnose etablie par Ashmead, les antennes n'etant pas filiformes, comme chez Fespece observee par Ashmead, mais en massue.
Promiomoera rufithorax sp. nov. ( 9 .)
Noir, lisse et brillant ; thorax d'un roux clair, antennes, hanches et pattes jaunes, massue antennaire noire. Les antennes se composent de 11 articles, dont les deux premiers sont gros, le 2« globuleux, 3-5 tres minces, graduellement raccourcis, le 3^ deux fois aussi long que gros, les 6 suivants subitement grossis, un peu plus longs que gros, le dernier en ovo'ide. Thorax aussi haut que long; sillons parapsidaux nuls. Scutellum a fossettes petites, cupule mediocre. Ailes ciliees, stigmatique droite, trois fois aussi longue que la 3« partie de la sous-costale, un peu plus courte que le radius, cellule radiale un peu plus longue que large, ouverte a la marge dans sa moitie distale, areole nulle. Abdomen avec une ceinture rousse a sa base, un peu comprime, allonge, aussi long que le reste du corps.
Taille: 1 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Genus SCHIZOSEMA Kieffer
Schizosema cellularis sp. nov. ( $ -)
D'un roux marron; vertex noir, antennes et pattes d'un roux clair. Front convexe, lisse et brillant comme tout le corps. Antennes composees de 14 articles et non de 15 comme d'ordi- naire, articles 3-14 subcylindriques, un peu plus longs que gros, subegaux ; 3® article non excave ni grossi. Thorax pas plus long que haut, sillons parapsidaux nuls. Scutellum avec une impres- ' sion transversale en avant, sans fossettes, cupule petite, elevee. Ailes longues, ciliees, echancrees en arriere de Textremite alaire,
183
184 The Philippine Journal of Science i9X4
nervures pales, cellule radiale ouverte a la marge, exactement semicirculaire, cubitus oblitere dans sa I®'* partie, bien marqu6 et percurrent dans la 2®. Abdomen sans ceinture a sa base, a peine comprime, plus long que le thorax, moitie anterieure plus sombre que le thorax, moitie posterieure plus claire que le thorax.
Taille: 1.2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling (C. F. Baker).
Genus COTHONASPIS Hartig
Cothonaspis (Hexaplasta) minima sp. nov. ( ? .)
Noir, lisse et brillant; articles antennaires 3-7 roussatres, pattes d'un blanc brunatre. Antennes de 13 articles, dont les 6 demiers sont subitement grossis, deux fois aussi gros que les precedents, presque deux fois aussi longs que gros, subcy- lindriques et munis de quatre aretes percurrentes et depassant un peu leur extremite, 13® article ellipsoidal, 3-8 beaucoup plus minces que les deux premiers, subcylindriques et serres, le 3« deux fois aussi long que gros, le 4® un peu plus long que gros, 5-7 pas plus longs que gros. Thorax tres convexe, subglobuleux. Sillons parapsidaux nuls. Fossettes du scutellum petites, cupule assez grande, elliptique, avec un point enfonce en avant et un autre en arriere. Ailes hyalines, longuement ciliees, nervures brunes, cellule radiale triangulaire, ouverte a la marge dans les deux tiers distaux, un peu plus longue que large, 3® partie de la sous-costale ponctiforme, radius un peu plus long que la stigmatique, cubitus oblitere dans sa 1«^ partie, percurrent et bien marque dans la seconde. Abdomen comprime, un peu plus long que le thorax, ceinture etroite.
Taille: 0.8 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (C F. Baker),
Genus EUCCELIDEA Ashmead
Euccelidea maquilingensis sp. nov. ( 9 .)
Noir, lisse et brillant; mandibules, hanches et pattes d'un roux jaune. Tete transversale vue d'en haut, triangulaire et plus haute que large vue de devant. Yeux allonges et glabres, relies a la bouche par un sillon oblique. Joues egalant les deux tiers de la longueur des yeux. Antennes de 13 articles, dont le 2« est globuleux, 3-13 filiformes, pubescents, graduellement raccourcis, le 3® presque trois fois aussi long que gros, plus mince que les autres, le 12® un peu plus long que gros, un peu plus court que le 13®. Thorax aussi haut que long, tres convexe.
IX, D, 2 Kieffer: Nouveaux Cynipides des Philippines 185
Pronotum profondement decoupe en arriere. Mesonotum pas plus long que large, sillons parapsidaux percurrents, profonds, reunis un peu avant le bord posterieur, vers le i posterieur, en une arete qui atteint le bord. Scutellum sans fossettes en avant, tout le dessus etant occupe par la cupule qui est elliptique et creusee en ellipse, surface posterieure perpendiculaire. Ailes hyalines, depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, brievement ciliees, nervures brunes, cellule radiale pointue, fermee, deux fois et demie aussi longue que large, 3® partie de la sous-costale et stigmatique tres obliques, la stigmatique de moitie plus longue que la 3^ partie de la sous-costale, radius deux fois et demie aussi long que la stigmatique, areole nulle, cubitus evanoui en avant, percurrent dans sa 2^ partie. Petiole aussi long que gros ; abdomen tres comprime, ayant sa plus grande hauteur en arriere, ceinture nulle.
Taille: 1.8-2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios et Mont Maquiling (C F. Baker) .
II. LIOPTERONIN^^
Genus ALLOCYNIPS novum
S . Tete vue de devant trapezoidale, vue de dessus tres transversale. Yeux gros, allonges, glabres, touchant le bord occipital, d'un tiers plus longs que les joues. Vertex avec deux aretes qui vont du cote externe de chaque scape jusqu^au bord occipital, un espace triangulaire et releve, borde par une arete, va en s'elargissant depuis les antennes jusqu'au bord occipital, ou il renferme les ocelles disposes en triangle. Palpes maxil- laires de 5 articles, les labiaux de 3. Antennes filiformes, situees un peu avant le milieu des yeux, presque deux fois plus distantes de la bouche que du bord occipital, composees de 14 articles. Thorax deux fois aussi long que haut, peu convexe. Pronotum decoupe en angle posterieurement, son milieu presque ponctiforme et portant une spinule courte et verticale, les lobes atteignent les ecaillettes. Mesonotum allonge, pointu en avant, sillons parapsidaux percurrents. Scutellum allonge, graduellement aminci en arriere, presque horizontal, avec deux fossettes en avant. Metathorax en cone horizontal et court, termine par un anneau auquel s'insere le petiole, comme chez Aulacinus, Ailes pubescentes, cubitus ayant son origine au-dessus du milieu de la basale, cellule cubitale unique et fermee, cellule radiale fermee aussi au bord alaire. Tons les tarses plus longs que les tibias, depourvus d'appendices, pattes poste-
186 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
rieures grossies, crochets tarsaux simples. Petiole aussi long que gros, insere au-dessus des hanches posterieures, abdomen aussi long que le thorax, graduellement grossi en arriere ou il est obtus, non comprime, 2« tergite a peine plus long que le 3^ non ligulif orme quoique ses cotes soient graduellement retrecis, 3® et 4^ subegaux, 5® a peine plus court que le 4^, egal au 6% tous deux declives, 7® perpendiculaire et semicirculaire, les 3 derniers grossierement sculptes. Le type est Allocynips ruflceps sp. nov.
Allocynips ruficeps sp. nov. ( S .)
Noir, lisse et brillant. Tete d'un roux clair, avec une ponctua- tion grosse et dense. Palpes rouges. Antennes a peine plus courtes que le corps, d'un noir brillant, scape le plus gros, de moitie plus long que gros, 2^ article presque transversal, 3® egalant les 2 premiers reunis, deux fois aussi long que gros, 4-14 graduellement amincis, trois a quatre fois aussi long que gros. Prothorax d'un roux clair, lobes du pronotum a points gros, ombiliques et denses. Mesonotum traverse par des aretes transversales et assez denses, sillons parapsidaux profonds, divergents fortement en avant. Scutellum reticule, a cellules ombiliquees, les deux fossettes grandes et separees seulement par une arete. Metathorax mat, grossierement ride, pubescent de blanc. Ailes anterieures enfumees, cellule sous-costale, mediane et sous-mediane presque hyalines, cellule radiale et cubitale et une bande le long du bord en arriere de la cellule radiale d'un brun noir, cellule cubitale etroite, deux fois aussi longue que large, cellule radiale de moitie plus longue que la cubitale, trois fois aussi longue que large, 2^ partie du radius double de la 1^3® triple de la 2% presque droite, cubitus percurrent. Ailes inferieures enfumees dans leur moitie distale, avec 3 crochets frenaux et la nervation ordinaire des Cynipides. Pattes anterieures et intermediaires, y compris les hanches, d'un roux clair, pattes posterieures a hanches deux fois aussi longues et deux fois aussi grosses que les intermediaires, leur tibia et leur tarse densement pubescent de gris, metatarse egalant les 4 articles suivants reunis, les articles 2-4 graduellement raccourcis, 5® egalant les 3 precedents reunis. Petiole avec 2 aretes con- vergentes en avant, moitie anterieure du 5^ tergite, 6^ et 7^ tergite en avant couverts de points denses et tres gros; les tergites se prolongent lateralement au-dela des sternites en forme de lobes translucides.
Taille: 7.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquihng (C. F. Baker),
TWO NEW CYPRINOID FISHES OF THE GENUS BARBUS FROM LAKE MANGUAO, PALAWAN, P. L
By Artemas L. Day
{From the Department of Zoology j College of Liberal Arts, University of the Philippines)
One plate
During the long vacation at the end of the University year 1912-13, a joint expedition from the University of the Philip- pines and the Bureau of Science was made to Palawan Island in the interest of biological study. The party proceeded to Taytay, a village of about 30 houses on a bay of the same name. From the Coast and Geodetic Survey, I had learned of the presence of a lake supposed to be southwestward of Taytay. Exploration led to the location not only of one lake near Taytay, but of two, one of them, however, being more of a swamp full of grass than a lake except in the rainy season.
Lake Manguao is about 5 kilometers long from east to west and from 2.5 to 3 kilometers wide from north to south. The greatest depth discovered was 7 fathoms, a little to the south- east of Bamboo or Cemetery Island, between the island and the shore. There are very many islands in the lake, perhaps as many as 25. These vary in size from a mere point of rock to those having an area of perhaps 1 hectare.
Two trips were made to the larger of these lakes. Lake Manguao, from which the new species of fishes, described in this paper, were taken. With the exception of the shore along the south side of the lake, which was mainly a sandy beach, there was a shelving shore and small rock fragments, in many places falling precipitously into the water. Some of the fishes were taken from the extreme northeastern part of the lake nearest to the town of Bantolan, but most were taken on the western side near the site of the second camp. Many of the larger fishes were readily caught with hook and line. The smaller ones were taken in large numbers on a small net of cheesecloth baited with cooked rice. This was placed in shallow water and raised when a considerable number of fishes were feeding above it.
In this paper, ''length of body'' is the distance from the tip of snout to the end of the caudal vertebrae ; "length of head" means from the tip of snout to the posterior margin of the hard opercle; ''length of caudal peduncle'' covers the distance from the posterior margin of anal to the uncovered ventral margin of the caudal fin ; "length of snout" refers to the distance
187
188
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
from the median anterior point of the snout to the nostril; "snout to occiput" covers the distance from the tip of the snout to the posterior median dorsal line of the head; "height of dorsal" and "height of anaF' refer to the distance from the distal ends of the longest rays to their proximal ends, even though they may be somewhat covered by scales at their proximal ends.
Barbus bantolanensis sp. nov.
Length of head 2.85 to 3.2 in total length; depth of body 2.5 to 2.9 in total length; diameter of eye 5.3 to 5.8 in head, that is, to the posterior margin of the hard opercle; diameter of eye 1.84 to 2.06 in interorbital space and 1.08 to 1.35 in snout; rostral barbel 1 to 1.3 in diameter of eye and % to % in maxillary barbel.
Type, No. 2.
Measurements of 6 specimens of B, bantolanensis are given in Tables I and II.
Table I. — Measurements of Barbus bantolanensis sp. nov.
Length of body
Length of head
Depth of body
Depth of caudal peduncle __ Length of caudal peduncle .
Length of snout
Diameter of eye
Interorbital width _.
Depth of head.-
Snout to occiput ._
Snout to dorsal
Snout to ventral
Length of dorsal base
Length of anal base —
Height of dorsal
Height of anal ___ —
Length of pectoral
Length of ventral
Length of caudal
Specimen No.-
Per cent J b89 0.320 0.382 0.140 0.185 0.073 0.067 0.101 0.213 0.230 0.601 0.533 0.157 0.089 0.202 0.157 0.174 0.174 0.314
Per cent.^ bll8 0.313 0.377 0.152 0.169 0.080 0.059 0.122 0.228 0.245 0.601 0.533 0.156 0.084 0.199 0.165 0.177 0.169 0.305
Per cent.B. bl02 0.352 0.352 0.137 0.171 0.088 0.063 0.122 0.230 0.240 0.607 0.578 0.151 0.088 0.215 0.156 0.215 0.186 0.343
Per cent.* bl05 0.314 0.366 0.147 0.176 0.081 0.061 0.119 0.228 0.240 0.633 0.542 0.166 0.109 0.209 0.142 0.193 0.180 0.333
Per cent J bl07 0.336 0.390 0.168 0.168 0.070 0.065 0.120 0.219 0.240 0.602 0.562 0.154 0.093 0.205 0.158 0.177 0.186 0.336
13
Per cent» bll6 0.353 0.345 0.128 0. 176 0.088 0.061 0.123 0.247 0.256 0.626 0.566 0.154 0.079 0.207 0.163 0.216 0.190 0.347
Dorsal raysc _
Anal raysc
Scales in lateral line
Scales above lateral line.. Scales below lateral line. Scales before dorsal
ni-8 ni-5
26 4i 4 9
in-8 ni-5
25
4i 4
III-8
in-5
25
4i
4
9
III-8
ni-5
26 4i 4 9
ni-8 ni-5
26 4i 4
III-8
ni-5
26
4i
4
10
« Referred to length of body, b Measurement in millimeters. <= Spinous and soft rays, respectively.
IX. D, 2 Day: Two New Cyprinoid Fishes 189
Table II. — Proportional measurements of Barhus bantolanensis sp. nov.
Proportional measurement.
Specimen No.—
Head in body
Depth in body
Eye in head —
Snout in head
Interorbital space in head- Third dorsal spine in head.
3.06 2.61 4.83 4.14 3.22 1.70
Dorsal . Anal---
Scales
Scales between lateral line and base of ventrals
Distance from tip of snout to base of dorsal in distance from tip of snout to end of caudal vertebrae _..
Pharyngeals
b2-l
III-8 III-5
4
2i
0.601 5-3-2
3.05 2.62 5.42 3.45 2.81 1.94
III-8 III-5
2i
0.621 (?)
2.79 2.70 5.66 4.05 2.80 1.92
III-8 III-5
3.04 2.69 5.30 3.45 2.65 1.81
III-8 III-5
2i
0.607 0.628
2-5-3-2 I c 2-5-3-2
0.626 c 5-3-2
Origin of ventrals midwaybetweenoriginof pectorals and of anal.
a Type. Plate I, fig. 1.
^ 2. As some were missing, the arrangement could not be definitely determined.
c Another pharyngeal was found ; it was probably of the first row.
^ Several pharyngeals were missing.
^ Origin of ventrals is 0.474 of distance from origin of pectorals to origin of anal.
Barbus manguaoensis sp. nov.
Length of head 2| to 3 in total length; depth of body 2.5 to 2.7 in total length ; diameter of eye 4 to 6 in head ; interorbital width 2i to 3i in head, that is, to the posterior margin of the hard opercle; diameter of eye 1^ to 2f in interorbital space and 1 to If in snout; posterior barbel 1^ times as long as the diameter of eye and I of the length of the maxillary barbel; third dorsal spine strong, strongly serrated, and 1^ to 2i in head; anterior side of the first dorsal spine 0.57 to 0.61 of the distance from the snout to the end of the vertebrae ; origin of dorsal porterior to origin of ventral. A distinct large black ocellus over the end of the caudal vertebrae, one above base of anal, one above base of ventrals, and one elongated area above posterior margin of opercle. These spots are more or less connected by not very distinct broad black bands.
Type, No. 15.
Measurements of 6 specimens of Barbus manguaoensis are given in Tables III and IV.
190 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Table III. — Measurements of Barbus manguaoensis sp. nov.
Length of body
Length of head
Depth of body
Depth of caudal peduncle. _. Length of caudal peduncle _
Length of snout
Diameter of eye
Interorbital width
Depth of head
Snout to occiput
Snout to dorsal
Snout to ventral
Length of dorsal base
Length of anal base
Height of dorsal
Height of anal
Length of pectoral
Length of ventral
Length of caudal
Specimen No. and sex.
Dorsal raysc
Anal raysc
Scales in lateral line
Scales above lateral line.. Scales below lateral line . Scales before dorsal
«9.
Per cent, i bll7 0.350 0.401 0.153 0.179 0.098 0.059 0.126 0.239 0.269 0.640 0.575 0.153 0.094 0.192 0.141 0.205 0.179 0.324
nT-8 ni-5
27 4^ 4 9
»?.
Percent.^ bl32 0.329 0.371 0.141 0.193 0.088 0.056 0.121 0.229 0.242 0.621 0.575 0.161 0.091 0.185 0.141 0.174 0.166 0.300 i
ni-8 ! ni-5 I
28 j 4^ I
'\ 9 i
lod".
Percent.'' b89 0.325 0.387 0.142 0.172 0.084 0.067 0.101 0.224 0.235 0.634 0.550 0.162 0.108 0.191 0.146 0.207 0.179 0.337
II1-8 III-5
27
^l
4
9
26d".
Percent.^
b54 0.324 0.370 0.129 0.185 0.083 0.083 0.111 0.222 0.240 0.620 0.527 0.160 0.092 0.231 0.157 0.2a3 I 0. 185 ' 0.342 I
in-8
III-5 ,
27 i 4i ,
4 !
9 :
29 9.
319.
Per cent. 3. b52 0.317 0.384 0.157 0.182 0.076 0.076 0. 105 j 0.230 I 0.250 ! 0.615 0.528 0.163 0.102 0.240 0.168 0.211 0.192 0.336
III-8
in-5
27 4i 4 9
Per cent. »^ b59 •0.336 0.364 0.142 0.184 0.089 0.084 0.117 0.226 0.260 0.630 0.637 0.168 0.084 0.218 0.159 0.210 0.184 0.325
ni-8
III-5
27
4i
4
^ Referred to length of body.
b Measurement in millimeters.
^ Spinous and soft rays, respectively.
Table IV. — Proportional measurements of Barbus manguaoensis sp.
|
Specimen No.— |
||||||
|
Proportional measurement. |
■ |
|||||
|
1 |
||||||
|
2 92 |
9 3 00 |
a 15 j 3 06 i |
-« 1 — j- 3 000 ' |
29 |
31 |
|
|
Head in body _. . |
3 150 |
2.83 2.79 4.66 |
||||
|
Depth in body . |
2.48 |
2.75 |
2 57 |
2 840 ' |
2 600 |
|
|
Eye in head |
5.71 |
5.86 |
3.16 I |
3.750 ; |
4.125 |
|
|
Snout in head |
3.32 |
4.00 |
3.56 |
4.030 ; |
4.125 |
3.81 |
|
Interorbital space in head |
2.76 |
2.66 |
3.16 1 |
2.916 |
2. 750 |
3.00 |
|
Third dorsal spine in head |
2.27 |
2.20 |
1.74 1 |
1.520 |
1.540 |
1.75 |
a Type, Plate I, fig. 3.
IX, D, 2 Day: Two New Cyprinoid Fishes 191
Table IV. — Pr^oportional measurements of Barbus etc. — Continued.
Proportional measurement.
Dorsal. Anal ._
Specimen No.—
Scales
Scales between lateral line and base of ventrals
Distance from tip of snout to base I of dorsal in distance from tip of ] snout to end of caudal vertebra3 __
Pharyngeals |
Origin of ventrals j
III-8 i III -5
2T:1
2i
0.662 b 5-3-2
III- 9 II1-5
•4
28:-
0.625
b 5-3-2
midway
III-8 I III-5 j
4-i i
i
2i!
|
26 |
29 |
|
III-8 |
III-8 |
|
III-5 |
III-5 |
|
-t |
-li |
|
2i |
2i |
|
0.615 |
0.615 |
|
b 5-3-1- ? |
b4-2 |
31
III-8 III-5
27:
0.603 b2-5-3-2
between origin of pectorals and origin of anal.
a Type, Plate I, fig. 3.
b 2. As some were missing, the arrangement could not be definitely determined, c Origin of ventrals, 0.532 of distance fro morigin of pectorals to base of anal.
In comparing these new species with Barbus ivis Seale and B, Palawan ensis Boulenger, certain striking differences of body- proportions are apparent. The length of head in body is much less, the diameter of eye in depth of body is much greater, the depth of head in body is less, the distance from snout to occiput is much less, the length of base of dorsal in body is more, the height of dorsal and of anal in body is more, and the length of pectoral in body is more in B, ivis and B. pala- luanensis than in the two new species here described.
In these two new species, not only are there three rows of pha- ryngeals as stated by Giinther,^ but another row was discovered consisting of three pharyngeal teeth, so that the pharyngeals are 3-5-3-2 instead of 5-3-2. The extra row of pharyngeals was also found in specimens of Barbus ivis Seale and B. palawanensis Boulenger.
Unfortunately, several specimens of the species here described were dissected before the extra pharyngeals were discovered. But because of the fact that they were definitely determined in several specimens and because a part of the pharyngeals of this extra row were seen in several other specimens, there can be no doubt of the existence of the extra row, and it is undoubtedly always present in both of these species. In some of the fishes dissected, as in B. bantolanensis, No. 45, from which the drawing of the pharyngeals was made, these pharyngeals are very minute. The microscope is often necessary to identify them.
^Cat Fishes Brit. Mus. (1868), 7, 3 and 84.
192 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Those of the extra row differ from the other pharyngeals in being not inserted in the bone, but embedded in the tissue surrounding the bone. They may thus be easily detached and lost unless great care is used in the dissection.
While working on the species of this paper, I had access to the type specimen of Barbus ivis Seale, taken by Seale on Balabac Island, August 11, 1908, and to other specimens of this species and several specimens of Barbus palawanensis Boulenger, col- lected by Seale at Puerto Princesa, Palawan, on August 20, 1909. I wish to acknowledge the valuable assistance rendered by Mr. Seale while I was working on these species and to express my appreciation for the use of his private library on the Cyprinidse.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Gill, Theodore. Some noteworthy extra-European Cyprinids. Smith'
sonian Misc. Colls, (Quarterly Issue) Feb. 4 (1907), 48, 297-341. Boulenger, G. A. List of fresh-water fishes collected by A. Everett on
Palawan and Balabac. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VI, 25, 185-
188. Jordan, David Starr, and Everman, Barton Warren. The Fishes of
North and Middle America. Part I. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1896),
No. 47, 199-329. Sydner, John O. The fishes of the streams tributary to Monterey Bay,
California. Bull. Bur. Fish. (1912), 32. Seale, Alvin. New species of Philippine fishes. Phil. Journ. Sci., Sec. A
(1909), 4, 494-495. Gunther, Albert. Catalogue of the Physostomi. Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus.
(1868), 7, 12-372 (Cyprinidae).
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I
Fig. 1. Barbus bantolanensis Day, sp. nov. No. 2. (Drawn by Rodolfo Fajardo.)
2. Pharyngeal of B. bantolanensis, No. 45; A, the additional row of
teeth. (Drawn by Rodolfo Fajardo.)
3. Bo/rbus manguaoensis Day, sp. nov. No. 15. (Drawn by Jose
Santos.)
193
Day: Two New Cyprinoid Fishks.1
[Phil. Journ Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig 2. Pharyngeal of No. 45, showing additional row of teeth, A.
Fig. 1. Barbus bantolanensis Day, sp. nov. No. 2.
Fig. 3. Barbus manguaoensis Day, sp. nov. No. 15. PLATE I.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology, AND Anthropology
Vol. IX
JUNE, 1914
No. 3
SOME PHILIPPINE SCYPHOMEDUSiE, INCLUDING TWO NEW GENERA, FIVE NEW SPECIES, AND ONE NEW VARIETY
By S. F. Light
{From the Zoological Laboratory, College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
Sixteen text figures
The Scyphomedusse described in this paper are in the museum of the zoological department of the University of the Philip- pines. Many of them were collected on the joint scientific expeditions of the University of the Philippines and the Bureau of Science, while others were collected at various times by members of the zoological department. They are not the result of a systematic collection of Philippine Scyphomedusse which, judging from the percentage of new species in the Philippine collections of the United States Bureau of Fisheries steamer Alba- tross ^ and in the present collection, should produce many new and interesting forms.
The collection includes medusae of 12 species in 11 genera, and 1 doubtful immature form. All but three are new to the Philippines, and 2 genera, 5 species, and 1 variety are new to science. A list of the genera and species follows. Those starred are reported from the Philippines for the first time. The new genera and species are indicated by black-faced type.
7. Catostylus purpurus Mayer. *8. Mastigias papua L. Agassiz. *9. Acromitus maculosus gen. et sp. nov. *10. Lobonema mayeri sp. nov. *11. Lobonemoides gracilis gen. et sp.
nov. *12. Rhopilema visayana sp. nov. 13. Cassiopea poly poides Keller (?).
1. Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Hae-
ckel. *2. Dactylometra quinquecirrha L.
Agassiz, "Chrysaora stage. ^* 3. Aurellia labiata Chamisso and
Eysenhardt. *4. Cassiopea polypoides Keller var.
culionensis var. nov. *5. Cassiopea medusa sp. nov. *6. Cephea cephea (Forskal) Mayer.
^ Mayer, A. G., Medusae of the World, Pub. Carnegie Inst. Wash. (1910), No. 109, 3.
124685 195
196 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
It will be noted that 8 of the species reported, including all the new forms, belong to the suborder Rhizostomse. This essentially tropical suborder seems to include the greater part of the Philippine forms as 16 of the 29 species and varieties reported from the Islands belong to that group. There are undoubtedly many medusae new to science and others as yet unreported from the Philippines to be found in the waters of the Archipelago. While on launch trips, during May and June, 1913, along the coast of Palawan and the islands between Pala- wan and Culion, I saw many medusae not found in this collection. Most of them were Rhizostomse, but at least three species of Pelagidse were common. Large Beroe-like ctenophores were also very numerous, but attempts to preserve them were unsuccessful.
While I have attempted to give a fairly complete description of new species and a sufficiently complete description of old species for diagnostic purposes, I have not attempted detailed anatomical discussions. In the diagnosis of old species, and in matters of general classification, I have, folio wed very closely Mayer's monumental work. The Medusae of the World. Full synonymies of previously described species will be found in that work.
Mayer describes 20 species and varieties of Scyphomedusse which have been reported from the Philippines. The fact that all but one of these were reported for the first time from the Albatross collection made during the years 1908 to 1910 shows how little attention has been paid to the collecting of Scyphome- dusae in Philippine waters. The present paper adds 9 species and varieties, making a total of 29 species and varieties of Scyphome- dusae from the Philippines. A list of these, with localities when known, follows.
1. Carybdea rastonii Haacke, Luzon and Mindoro [Mayer, 1910].
2. Carybdea alata Reynaud var. moseri Msiyer =Charybdea philippina
Haeckel [Semper, I860].
3. Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel, common [Mayer, 1910] [Light,
1914].
4. Periphylla hyacinthina Steenstrup forma dodecabostrycha (Haeckel)
Mayer [Mayer, 1910].
5. lAnuche aquila (Haeckel) Mayer, Mactan [Mayer, 1910].
6. Atolla bairdii Fewkes forma valdiviae Vanhoffen, Albatross station 5202
[Mayer, 1910].
7. Atolla wyvillei Haeckel, Albatross station 5201 [Mayer, 1910].
8. Pelagia panopyra Peron and Lesueur var. placenta (Haeckel) Mayer
[Mayer, 1910].
9. Dactylometra quinquecirrha L. Agassiz, **Chrysaora stage," Manila Bay
[Light, 1914]. 10. Sanderia malayensis Goette, Sulu Sea [Mayer, 1910].
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 197
11. Discomedusa philippina Mayer, Catingan Bay [Mayer, 1910].
12. Aurellia labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt, Masbate [Mayer, 1910],
Palawan and Manila Bay [Light, 1914].
13. Cassiopea polypoides Keller var. culionensis Light, Culion Bay, Culion
[Light, 1914].
14. Cassiopea medusa Light, Culion Bay, Culion [Light, 1914].
15. Cassiopea ornata Haeckel, Simaluc Islands, Subic Bay, Luzon and Samar
[Mayer, 1910].
16. Cephea cephea (Forskal) Mayer, Mariveles [Xiight, 1914].
17. Cephea octostyla L. Agassiz, Jolo [Mayer, 1910].
18. Catostylus purpurus Mayer, Manila Bay [Mayer, 1910] [Light, 1914].
19. Lychnorhiza bartschi Mayer, Jolo [Mayer, 1910].
20. Mastigias papua L. Agassiz, Mindoro and Palawan [Light, 1914].
21. Mastigias ocellata Haeckel [Mayer, 1910].
22. Versura maasi Mayer, Bohol [Mayer, 1910].
23. Lobonema smithii Mayer, Manila Bay [Mayer, 1910].
24. Lobonema mayeri Light, Malampaya Sound, Palawan and Manila Bay
[Light, 1914].
25. Lobonemoides gracilis Light, Palawan [Light, 1914].
26. Acromitus maculosus Light, Palawan [Light, 1914].
27. Thysanostoma thysanura Haeckel, Mindanao and Mindoro [Mayer,
1910].
28. Lorifera flagellata (Haeckel) Mayer, Albatross station D. 5226 [Mayer,
1910.]
29. Rhopilema visayana Light, Palawan [Light, 1914].
IMMATURE FORM
Cassiopea polypoides Keller (?), Port Galera Bay, Mindoro [Light, 1914].
Order CARYBDEID^
Genus CHmOPSAI]«[XJS L. Agassiz, 1862
Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel.
The bell is dome shaped and 4-sided, with an evenly rounded aboral surface. Four laterally flattened, hand-shaped, inter- radial pedalia arise from the sides of the bell a short distance above the velar margin. Each bears from 5 to 9, typically 7, finger-shaped projections, each of v^hich gives rise to a very long, slender, flexible, hollow tentacle banded with nematocysts. There are 4 perradial sense clubs in covered notches in the sides of the bell, a little above the level of origin of the pedalia. A distinct velarium supported by a bracketlike, perradial f renulee stretches partly across the mouth of the bell cavity. The central stomach is short and wide, with 4 lanceolate lips with simple margins. From each of the flattened perradial sides of the stomach arises a pair of gastric saccules which project downward into the bell cavity. Each saccule is laterally flattened and cockscomb shaped with an irregularly notched margin.
198 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
This distinguishes the medusa from C. quadrumanits, the most nearly related form, which has finger-shaped saccules.
This medusa was very abundant in Taytay Bay, Palawan, and in Culion Bay, Culion, in May and June, 1913. Numerous specimens were obtained, including many immature forms. They agree exactly with Mayer's description of specimens collected in Philippine waters by the Albatross. Much larger specimens were seen than any as yet reported, some in Culion reaching a diameter of at least 200 mm. There are 7 tentacles to each pedalium in by far the greater number of specimens, and these tentacles show in life narrow, lavender bands of nematocysts. The tentacles are very long, slender, and flexible, reaching a length of 1.5 meters or more. They are very delicate, and usually break off and remain attached to the clothing or the body when encountered in the water.
The sting of this medusa is very dangerous. One of the women in the party of the expedition to Palawan, who was stung while in bathing, was very seriously ill. I have described the symptoms more in detail in another place.^ Swelling and in- flammation began almost immediately in the areas which came in contact with the tentacles, and later blisters formed along the lines marked by contact with the tentacles. The lower limbs be- came swollen, the heart action was impaired, respiratory spasms and nervous twitchings of the muscles ensued, and the patient ex- perienced intense general pain. The natives of Palawan reported a number of deaths caused by the sting of this medusa.
Mayer reports this medusa in the Albatross collection from Masbate, Luzon, and Mindanao, and I have found it plentiful in Culion and Palawan, from which it may be seen that it has a wide range in the Philippines.
Family PELAGID^ Genus DACTYLOMETRA L. Agassiz, 1862 Dactylometra quinquecirrlia L. Agassiz, ''Chrysaora stage.''
At certain seasons of the year, particularly in October and November, this medusa is found in large numbers in Manila Bay where it is a menace to bathers and fishermen who hold it in great fear. While all the specimens which I have seen have shown only 24 tentacles and 32 marginal lappets and many of them are apparently sexually mature, this medusa agrees so closely in every other respect with D. qidnquecirrha that I have considered it as the ''Chrysaora stage" of that species,
' This Journal, Sec. B (1914), 9, 291.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 199
corresponding to the similar ''Chrysaora stage" of the species found in the bays of the Atlantic Coast of the United States.
The flatly rounded bell is from 70 to 100 mm. in diameter. There are 24 marginal tentacles of about equal length. In life, these reach a maximum length of almost a meter. In preserved specimens, they are seldom perfect and are much contracted, not usually exceeding a length of twice the bell diameter. There are 32 bluntly rounded marginal lappets, and the 2 next the sense organs in each octant are usually about one-half as wide as the 2 between the tentacles. The sense organs are marked by shallow notches in the margin. They are covered above by a shelf of tissue nearly twice as wide as the length of the sense club. Below they are exposed, but lie in deep narrow furrows. The mouth arms are complexly folded, presenting along their edges regular pairs of extended points. They are from two to three times as long as the bell radius in preserved specimens and many times as long in life. The umbrella is transparent white, and is covered on the exumbrellar surface with tiny, semiopaque, white spots. The 16 stomach pouches are semiopaque, the dividing membranes entirely transparent, and the exumbrellar radial muscle strands opaque white. The gonads are light yellow, light brown, or yellow with a lavender tinge, the inner edges of the oral palps are light transparent pink to light lavender brown, and the tentacles are opaque white.
This medusa is known to be very dangerous. The natives call it fosforo (''match'' in Spanish). This name is used by the fishermen, because the long oral artns suggest the stick and the bell the head of a match. I have heard of several cases of severe poisoning from this medusa both among natives and Americans. The native remedy is sugar solution taken internally and external applications of vinegar.
Old ^ has reported a number of cases of poisoning from jelly- fish in which there was a definite symptom complex differing from that in the case of poisoning by Chiropsalmus quadrigatus already mentioned. Mayer ^ cites Doctor Smith ^ as considering that these cases of poisoning were due to the sting of Lobonema smithii Mayer. It seems more probable that they were due to Dactylometra, since it is so com^mon in the bay and is the form commonly considered to be poisonous by the natives, especially the fishermen. I have not seen L. smithii, but the
' This Journal, Sec. B (1908), 3, 329.
'Pub. Carnegie Inst. Wash. (1910), No. 109, 3, 690-691.
° Dr. Hugh M. Smith, deputy United States fish commissioner.
200 The Philippine Journal of Science im
sting of L. mayeri sp. nov., a closely related form, while unpleas- ant is not dangerous. I hope to be able to report more fully on this matter in the future.
Order SEM^OSTOME^
Genus AURELLIA Peron and Lesueur, 1809 Aiirellia labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt.
The margin is divided into 16 velar lobes. The bell margin projects downward from the subumbrellar side as a velumlike membrane, forming a fold between each 2 sense organs. The tentacles and marginal lappets have moved a considerable dis- tance up the sides of the exumbrella. The subgenital ostia are very small.
This seems to be a rather widely distributed form in Phil- ippine waters, as Mayer reports it from Masbate from specimens in the Albatross collection and we have specimens from Taytay, Palawan, and Manila Bay. We have 4 specimens in our collec- tion, 2 collected by Dr. R. P. Cowles in Taytay, Palawan, and 2 from Pasay Beach, Manila Bay. They all show the 16 notches in the bell margin, the velumlike subumbrellar membrane mark- ing the true margin, and the very small subgenital ostia which characterize A. labiata, so I have considered them as belonging to that species in spite of rather marked individual differences and differences in proportion as compared with other specimens whose measurements are given by Mayer.
The smallest specimen (D in the table) is relaxed, flabby, and without definite shape. The bell is only 10 mm. thick at the base of the mouth arms, and the whole medusa has the appearance of having completely relaxed in death. The marginal tentacles are very slender and flexible, and are from 12 to 15 mm. in length.
In another specimen (B in the table), the bell thickness at the base of the mouth arms is 25 mm. The material of the umbrella has a very solid, stiff consistency, and is thick up to the tentacle zone. It appears to be in a state of contraction, and nearly all the marginal tentacles are tightly contracted. The velumlike margin is here represented only by a very slight fold which has the appearance of a line connecting the sense organs. The thick bell with a solid consistency and the rounded genital pouches and small ostia give it a resemblance to A. solida Browne. Owing to the condition of the specimen, it was impos- sible to determine the arrangement of the sense organs, but the 16 velar lobes show that the medusa is A. labiata.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
201
Measurements of Aurellia lahiata.
|
Specimen. |
Diameter of the umbrella. |
Diameter across the zone of gonads. |
Length of each mouth arm. |
|
A _ _ |
mm. 225 167 150 145 |
mvi. 107 86 65 50 |
TYitn, 1*00 71 |
|
B - |
|||
|
C- - |
|||
|
D |
65 |
||
Order RHIZOSTOM^
RHIZOSTOMATA PINNATA Vanhoffen Genus CASSIOPEA Peron and Lesueur, 1809 Cassiopea polypoides Keller var. culionensis var. nov. (fig. 1).
Type, — No. C. 2420, zoological collection, University of the Philippines.
The disk is flat, from 120 to 150 mm. in diameter, with a broad, shallow sucker cavity and a central thickened area. The thickened outer margin of the sucker cavity is from 15 to 20 mm. from the margin of the bell, and the diameter of the sucker is about two-thirds of the bell diameter. The margin is thin and divided into from 16 to 20 parameres by as many sense organs. There are twice as many radial canals as sense organs, and there is no ring canal. Each paramere has 5 blunt marginal lappets, the lappet in the center of each paramere being the largest, the 2 ocular lappets being about one-half as wide as the 2 on each side of this central lappet. The sense or- gans show no pigment spot. The mouth arms are from 1.25 to 1.5 as long as the bell radius, and project considerably beyond the bell margin. They are cylindrical or somewhat dorsally flattened in their proximal portions and higher than broad in their distal portions. The arms give rise in their proximal portion to about 3 pairs of short, alternately arranged lateral branches beyond which the arm divides to form from 3 to 5 long branches which may in turn subdivide. There are numerous, small, berrylike vesicles between the mouths over the entire surface of the arms. In most specimens, there is a central flattened appendage in the center of the arm disk
Fig. 1. Cassiopea poly' poides Keller var. culionensis var nov., a sense organ from the subumbrellar side. Much enlarged.
202
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
surrounded by a whorl of smaller similar appendages. This central appendage reaches a length of 30 mm. and a width of 40 mm. The arms may have toward their distal ends a number of ribbonlike or leaflike appendages, reaching a length of 20 mm. and a width of from 8 to 15 mm. Of the 27 specimens in the collection, 10 have the large central appendage and a whorl surrounding it, 11 have a large central appendage without a surrounding whorl, 3 have no enlarged appendage, and 3 have enlarged appendages on the arms but none in the center of the disk.
The central stomach is circular in outline, and is encroached on from below by the 4 gonads. Twice as many radial canals as sense organs originate from it and extend to the margin, giv- ing off branches which form a very complex network of anas- tomosing vessels. The rhopalar canals increase in size toward the margin, while the interrhopalar canals become small distally.
In preserved specimens the umbrella is light olive green. On close examination dull white bands may be seen running to each sense organ. The mouth arms usually exhibit 3 color zones : A central circular area which is yellow, a zone composed of the portions of the arms projecting beyond the disk which is also yellow, and between these zones a zone of green. The append- ages are opaque white, and contain a network of canals, giving them a leaflike appearance. The color of the live medusa is very similar to that of the preserved specimens.
Measurements and numbers of sense organs and of marginal lappets to a paramere of lA specimens from Culion.
|
Specimen No. |
Diameter of the bell. |
Diameter of the arm disk. |
Length of the mouth arms (from the center of the arm disk). |
Sense organs. |
Marginal lappets to a para- mere. |
|
1 |
mm. 121 129 120 128 145 130 130 143 151 145 145 154 118 150 |
mm. 50 58.5 55 58 57 58 60 50 79 62 63 68.5 60 60 |
mm. 95 89 90 99.5 104 112 99 102 145 120 114 176 95 120 |
20 20 16 20 19 17 20 19 17 17 16 19 18 16 |
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 |
|
2 |
|||||
|
3 |
|||||
|
4 - |
|||||
|
6 — - |
|||||
|
6 |
|||||
|
7 |
|||||
|
8.__ |
|||||
|
9 |
|||||
|
10 |
|||||
|
11. . |
|||||
|
12 |
|||||
|
13 ._ |
|||||
|
14 |
|||||
IX. D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 203
The museum has 27 specimens of this new variety of C. polypoides collected by Dr. L. E. Griffin and Mr. L. D. Wharton in Culion Bay, in October, 1911. They were present in great numbers in the bottom of a boat slip near the Leper Colony pier. I found them in the same place in May, 1913, and Dr. Ernest Clements, the superintendent of the Leper Colony, tells me that they are nearly always to be found there. This boat slip is from 1 to 2 meters deep, is protected from storms, and has a sandy bottom; it seems to be an ideal habitat for the medusae. They were all found lying with the exumbrellar surface downward and looked, as Keller^ has remarked of C. polypoides forma typica in the Red Sea, extraordinarily like some large sea anemone. They are able to retain their hold firmly by means of the sucker cavity. Indeed, when the pre- served specimens are placed with the exumbrella down in a glass dish, it is practically impossible to turn them over by lifting on the arms and arm disk. The living medusae on being turned over immediately begin to pulsate. At each con- traction, the arms of one side are pulled farther in and bent upward thus lifting the disk on that side. A final pulsation causes it to fall over on the exumbrellar surface, the pulsations cease, and the arms and margin are slowly adjusted.
This medusa resembles C. polypoides forma typica in general appearance, in the number of lappets to a paramere, in the length and branching of the mouth arms, in the canal system, and to some extent in the coloring. While it differs in some particulars, such as in the shape of the central stomach and the lack of pigmentation in the sense organs, I do not consider these dif- ferences sufficient to warrant the making of a new species in a genus which contains so many intergrading forms, and so I have considered it as a new variety of C. polypoides to which I have given the name culionensis as Culion seems to be a constant habitat of the medusa.
In coloration of the bell and in the arrangement of the appendages of the mouth arms, this form approaches most nearly to Keller's color variety "rosse."
Cassiopea polypoides Keller ( ?) .
One immature medusa collected in Port Galera Bay in May, 1912, differs from C polypoides var. culionensis in having pigmented eyespots, in that the arms do not project beyond the bell margin, and in the arrangement of the appendages
'Zeitschr, /. wiss, Zool (1883), 38, 634.
204 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
of the mouth arms. It has besides the berrylike vesicles a small central appendage, surrounded by a double whorl of 8 appendages, 2 in the axil between each two arms supported by the same interostial pillar. The appendages of the inner whorl are smaller than those of the outer whorl. Near the distal end of each arm is a large ribbonlike appendage reaching a length of 15 mm. and a width of 4 mm., which is surrounded by a number of similar but smaller appendages. Besides these, there are scattered among the mouths a number of small leaf like appendages.
The entire medusa is, in formalin, a dull grayish white.
Measurements of the specimen in millimeters: Diameter of the bell, 55 ; diameter of the arm disk, 25 ; length of the mouth arms (measured from the center of the disk) , 26. Number of sense organs, 17; number of lappets to a paramere, 5.
While this is probably an immature individual of C. polypoides forma typica, it is impossible to place it definitely, so I have indicated it as a doubtful immature example of that species.
Cassiopea medusa sp. nov. (figs. 2 ^nd 3).
Type, — C. 2421, zoological collection. University of the Phil- ippines, from Culion Bay, Culion.
The disk is flat with a broad, shallow sucking surface bounded externally by a circular raised area and having a broad thickened central disk. The disk measures 260 mm. in diameter, the suck- ing surface 180 mm., and the raised central disk 115 mm. The raised margin of the sucking surface is 15 mm. wide, and its outer edge is 25 mm. from the bell margin.
There are 17 sense organs, and each paramere contains 7 irregular, very blunt marginal lappets which are often more distinct as spaces between grooves in the exumbrella than as actual lappets in the very thin and nearly smooth margin. The sense organs are very small, slender clubs hidden in deep clefts. They are covered above by a shelf of exumbrellar tissue, but they are quite distinct from the subumbrellar side. They are without pigmented eyespots. The 8 large mouth arms arise from an 8-sided arm disk 114 mm. in diameter. They are 170 mm. in length, send off numerous small lateral branches in their proximal portion, and divide distally into 3 main branches, which are again subdivided. The mouths and branches are much more scattered than in C. polypoides, and arising in the axils of the branches and between the mouths from the center of the disk to the distal ends of the branches are hundreds of transparent appendages. These appendages are of two types
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
205
which graduate into one another — a small, inconspicuous, ribbon- like form and a large, very flexible form, cylindrical at the base, flattened toward the outer end, and containing a broad central canal. These reach a length of 110 mm. and a diameter of 7.5 mm., giving the animal an appear- ance remarkably suggestive of the classical Medusa, hence the specific name. The canal system consists, as usual in the genus, of an equal num- ber of ocular and interocular canals. The former run to the sense organs at the margin, while the latter break up into branches some distance in- side, which anastomose with those from the ocular canals to form a net- work of canals running out to the margin. The subgenital ostia are small and considerably longer than broad as opposed to C. polypoides.
Fig. 2. Cassiopea medusa sp. nov., a sense organ and the adjacent canal system from the subum- brellar side. Very much enlarged.
Fig. 3. Cassiopea medusa, a portion of a mouth arm, showing the scattered mouths and the very typical appendages. X 1.
In the preserved specimen the disk is opaque white with a slight grayish or greenish tinge. The mouths are light yellow, the arms and appendages are transparent white, and the canals are outlined in semiopaque white.
206 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
This very interesting and distinctly new Cassiopea is rep- resented by a single specimen collected by Dr. L. E. Griffin and Mr. L. D. Wharton in Culion Bay, where it was found with C. polypoides var. culionensis. It is most nearly related to C. polypoides and C xamachana, but it is differentiated from them as from all other species by the numerous very large ap- pendages, by its very large size, and by the combination in one medusa of the following characteristics : 7 lappets to a paramere, mouth arms longer than the bell radius, and an unpigmented sense organ.
Owing to the extreme fragility of the specimen, it is impossible to make as complete a description as might be desired.
RHIZOSTOMATA DICHOTOMA Vanhoffen Genus CEPHEA Peron and Lesueur, 1809 Cephea cephea (Forskal) Mayer.
I have a single worn specimen of this widely distributed species collected at Mariveles, Manila Bay, in January, 1912. It is undoubtedly a form of Cephea cephea as shown by the deep clefts of the sense organs and the high, heavily warted central dome. The bell diameter is 220 mm., and the distance from the lower surface of the arm disk to the top of the dome is 120 mm. The 8 mouth arms arise in 4 pairs. Each arm is shorter than the bell radius, and shows decided lateral compres- sion in the proximal portion. The two outer branches are considerably stouter than the inner branches. The mouths are borne only on the faces of the main branches and their sub- branches. Scattered among the mouth arms are numerous short, ribbonlike, narrow appendages which when contracted have a berrylike appearance. These reach a maximum length of 40 mm., most of them being from 10 to 20 mm. in length. There is a very conspicuous set of folded ridges containing the radial muscles and extending from the arm disk to the ring canal, which is about 50 mm. from the margin. On these ridges are numerous very small, flexible, cone-shaped projections. The circular muscles which are also distinct folds lying between the ring canal and the margin are interrupted, partially at least, in the rhopalar radii. The canal system agrees with that given by Mayer for Cephea cephea, except that the ocular canals are considerably wider, in their distal portion at least, than are the interocular canals. The subgenital ostia are small, half- moon shaped, convex below, and concave above.
The central dome of the exumbrella is 80 mm. high and
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusde 207
about 70 mm. in diameter. It is covered at the bottom with small granular warts. Toward the top, these increase in size, reaching at the apex a length of 18 mm. and a diameter of 14 mm. They are irregular, and may be slender and pointed or irregular and massive.
The margin is not in a good state of preservation, but there are evidently 8 sense organs, which lie in deep notches, and about 80 marginal lappets — 8 velar and 2 ocular between each two sense organs. The lappets show very plainly as thicken- ings of the gelatinous material, but are not distinct at the edge where they are joined by a web. The dome is transparent rosy pink, shading to light blue at the apex.
RHIZOSTOMATA TRIPTERA Vanhoffen sensu Maas Genus CATOSTYLUS L. Agassiz, 1862 Catostylus purpurus Mayer.
The disk is somewhat flatter than a hemisphere in preserved specimens, but more convex than a hemisphere in life. The ex- umbrella is smooth. The 8 rhopalia are flanked by short, nar- row, bluntly rounded lappets. In each octant there are 4 cleft and 2 simple velar lappets ; in all, 10 velar terminal lappets to an octant. In the whole bell there are 96 marginal lappets, 16 rhopalar, and 80 velar terminal lappets. In any octant the velar lappets are arranged as follows : One cleft lappet, 1 simple lap- pet, 2 cleft lappets, 1 simple lappet, and 1 cleft lappet.
The arm disk at the base is about half as wide as the bell diameter, and is much smaller at the level of origin of the mouth arms. The long, narrow genital ostia are nearly as wide as the interostial pillars. They are constricted by a thick, wide median projection which extends from the arm disk. A long finger-shaped or swollen papilla is seen on the subumbrellar surface. It arises on the outer margin of the ostia in the line of the rhopalar canal. The subgenital porticus is unitary and cruciform.
The mouth arms are from 0.75 to 1.25 as long as the bell radius, and the mouths extend to the extreme tip of each arm. In living specimens, particularly those that are immature, a considerable part of the mouth arms is covered by edges of the bell. In preserved specimens the bell is flattened and the edges are turned in, leaving the mouth arms exposed.
The circular muscles extend uninterruptedly from the arm disk to the margin, being most prominent between the circular canal and the margin.
208 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Sixteen radial canals, 8 of which are rhopalar and 8 adradial, leave the cruciform central stomach. The ocular canals extend past the ring canal to the sense organs, while the adradial canals end in the ring canal. The fine-meshed network of canals outside the ring canal extends to the margin. The coarser inner network is always connected with the adradial canals, seldom with the ocular canals, and never with the stomach.
The sense organs have in life brilliant silver spots which fade in preserved specimens. The size of these ocelli is in inverse ratio to the size of the medusa.
The medusa is deep purplish brown in life, and fades to dull brown in formalin.
This is the commonest medusa of Manila Bay. During the months of November and December it is especially abundant on the beach at Pasay just outside of Manila. The fishermen say that these jellyfish are blown in by southwest winds which pre- vail during these months. The largest specimen in the collection measures 105 mm. in bell diameter, but I have seen many con- siderably larger specimens. Mayer reports this species as living on the bottom in shallow water. I hardly think this is the case, as they are always to be seen on or near the surface in shallow water along the beach and in the esteros (brackish water canals) , where they sometimes occur in countless numbers. The im- mature medusae vary considerably. Some are transparent white, and resemble in general appearance the immature forms of Acromitus maculosus *gen. et sp. nov. which is described later in this paper. The chief and most apparent difference is, of course, the absence of appendages of any kind on the mouth arms of Catostylus. Others resemble in general form the mature medusae, but have such striking differences that I have thought it worth while to give a short description of one of them.
Catostylus purpums Mayer, immature form.
The bell, which measures 27 mm. in diameter, is more con- vex than a hemisphere when relaxed and much more so in con- traction. The margin in life hangs down below the short mouth arms, but in f ormahn is curved inward exposing the mouth arms. There are 8 prominent rhopalia, which in life have a bright silvery color. The exumbrellar sensory pit is broad and shallow and dendritically grooved. The ocular lappets are roundly pointed and longer than the velar lappets. There are typically 10, sharply pointed, narrow, velar lappets between each 2 ocular lappets arranged as in the adult medusa.
The subgenital ostia are irregular in size and from once
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 209
to twice as wide as the interostial pillars. The genital porticus is unitary and cruciform. The circular muscles extend uninter- rupted from the outer end of the arm disk to the margin.
The arms are 6 mm. long. Each has a swollen area near the base, culminating on the outside in a laterally projecting point beyond which the arms are decidedly narrowed. The mouths are on the lower and inner surfaces of the three branched arms.
In life, the medusa is deep, rich plum; in formalin, it is pur- plish brown.
This immature form was collected from a seine at Pasay Beach, Manila Bay, October, 1913. It is particularly interesting, because of the presence under the edge of the margin of several small cyclopslike Crustacea, evidently leading a commensal existence. Four of these crustaceans were found, each lying just below a sense organ and along the line of a rhopalar canal, the head end lying innermost. They were all females with well-developed egg sacks, and were difficult to make out in position as they have many minute brown pigment spots scattered over the body, giving them the same general color as the medusa.
I have since found that these Crustacea are to be found in great numbers on living specimens whether mature or immature and are not confined to any one region of the medusa.
Genus MASTIGIAS L. Agassiz, 1862
Mastigias papua L. Agassiz.
There are 3 immature and 2 mature specimens of this medusa in the collection from Port Galera Bay, Mindoro, collected during May and June, 1912. I saw many small specimens in Taytay Bay, Palawan, in May, 1913.
These forms differ somewhat from the typical M. papua, and while these differences coincide to some extent with those noted in M. papua var. sibogse Maas they differ to about the same extent. They seem to be intermediate in form between M. papua var. sibogse and M. papua forma typica, and the specimens differ among themselves as to coloration, length of filaments, etc. These facts lead me to believe, as Mayer says, that there are numerous very closely related or even intergrading forms in this genus. It would be interesting to compare large series of these medusae from localities joining two rather widely separated habitats, say Japan and Papua, getting series from Japan, Formosa, Luzon, Mindanao, Jolo, Amboina, and Papua. I have no doubt that the individuals of such a series would so inter-
210 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
grade as to make it necessary to consider them as local forms of a single very variable species.
The largest specimen in the collection measures 60 mm. in bell diameter, and the arm disk is 33 mm. in diameter. The arms measure 35 mm. in length from the center of the arm disk, and project only slightly beyond the edge of the disk. There are 8 rhopalia, with large, cup-shaped, pigmented ocelli and long, pointed, ocular lappets. Between each 2 sense organs are 9 rounded or bluntly pointed velar lappets. The subgenital ostia are three times as wide as the interostial pillars. There are 7 anastomosing interocular canals in each octant. The rounded clubs are scattered on the mouth arms, and the terminal appendages which are somewhat less in length than the bell diameter are distinctly 3-sided and show a network of internal canals. The general color in life is light greenish blue, shading into light brown, purple, or olive green. The exumbrella is covered, particularly in the mature medusa, with prominent white spots. Those above the ring canal are double-headed or dumb- bell shaped. The rhopalar canals are outlined by a broad violet or deep blue band. The arm clubs are violet or blue at the tip and base with intermediate zones of olive green, gray, and white. In preserved specimens the colors fade with the excep- tion of the violet band on the circular canal, which is not present in some immature medusse, and the violet bases of the terminal appendages.
Genus ACROMITUS novum ^
Generic characters, — Rhizostomata triptera with scattered filaments and axial, terminal, filamentous appendages on the oral arms. The cruciform stomach gives rise to 16 radial canals, 8 of which are rhopalar and 8 adradial and inter- rhopalar. The rhopalar canals extend beyond the ring canal to the margin, while the adradial canals end in the ring canal. Externally, the ring canal sends off many small canals which anastomose and form a network between the ring canal and the margin. Internally, it gives off several larger canals on each side of each rhopalar canal which anastomose and join the rhopalar canals. The exumbrellar sensory pits show radiat- ing furrows. The subgenital porticus is unitary and cruciform. The circular muscle is partially interrupted in the rhopalar radii.
The type species is A. maculosus sp. nov. from Taytay Bay, Palawan.
' a/cpos, at the point, terminally; /^tVos, a thread.
IX. D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
211
The genus Acromittts is most closely related to Catostylus on one hand and less closely to Lychnorhiza and Crambione on the other. It resembles Catostylus in its canal system, the
Fig. 4. Acromitus maculosus gen. et sp. nov., lateral view of the medusa. X 8/9.
shape and structure of its mouth arms, and in the presence of furrows in the sensory pit, but differs from it in having filaments and an axial terminal appendage on each mouth arm.
124685 2
212 The Philippine journal of Science 1914
While resembling Lychnorhiza and Crambione to some extent in its canal system, in having filaments on the mouth arms and in the presence of radiating furrows in the sensory pits, it differs from them in having an axial terminal appendage, in that the internal branches of the ring canal join the rhopalar canals, and in that the circular muscles are interrupted, partially at least, in the rhopalar radii. It differs from Mastigias in that the exumbrella sensory pit is furrowed, in that the interocular canals are regular in number (8) and in position and do not anastomose, running directly from the central stomach to the ring canal, and in that the axial terminal appendages of the mouth arms are long, slender filaments and not clubs. It differs from Pseudorhiza in having slender terminal appendages, in the presence of filaments on the mouth arms, in that the sensory pits are furrowed, and in the absence of a central mouth. It differs from Phyllorhiza in having axial terminal appendages and in that the inner branches of the ring canal do not reach the stomach. It differs from Versura in that the interradial canals are separate and in the presence of a definite ring canal. It diflfers from Lobonema most strikingly in the small size of the marginal lappets and in the absence of windowlike apertures in the oral arms. It differs from Lobonemoides gen. nov. in that there are not more than 8 rhopalia, in that the interocular canals do not extend to the margin, and in that the axial, terminal appendages of the mouth arms are filamentous.
Acromitus maculosus sp. nov. (figs. 4, 5, and 6).
Type. — No. C. 2081, zoological collection. University of the Philippines.
The bell reaches a width of 90 mm. or more, and is hemi- spherical or somewhat flatter than a hemisphere. It has a solid consistency, being thick in the central region and thin out- side the ring canal. The surface of the exumbrella is covered with minute, bluntly cone-shaped projections. There are 8 rhopalia, each with a pigmented area and a deep, triangular, grooved, exumbrellar sensory pit. The marginal lappets are typically 80 in number — 8 pointed velar lappets in 4 pairs and 2 narrow pointed ocular lappets being present in each octant. The grooves between the pairs of velar lappets are deep, and extend some distance up on the exumbrellar surface. The arm disk is about 1.2 or 1.25 of the bell radius. The genital ostia are from 1.3 to 1.5 as wide as the column between them. They have a regular but sinuous outline, and are partially closed by
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
213
a median flaplike projection from the outer margin. The sub- genital porticus is cruciform and unitary.
The mouth arms vary in length from 1.3 to twice the bell radius. The proximal area, in the adult, is about 0.25 of the arm length and considerably more in the immature medusa. It is narrow and unbranched, and bears mouths only on its inner side where they extend to the center of the arm disk. The distal portion has the shape of a 3-cornered pyramid, the branches of the wings of the mouth arms extending alternately in opposite directions. The mouths are found only on the outer surfaces of the secondary branches of the 'three main divisions of the mouth arms, but these branches are so elongated laterally as to cover the bare spaces between the branches and present in all directions a surface composed of fringed mouth open- ings interspersed with filaments. The cap- itate tentacles fringing the mouths are very numerous and heavily loaded with nema- tocysts. The filaments are covered with large nematocyst warts, giving them a knobbed and knotted appearance. The fila- mentous axial terminal appendages are about as long as the mouth arms and very flexible. They contain a central canal, and are covered with nematocyst warts considerably smaller than those of the other filaments. The cen- tral ducts of the mouth arms join in pairs before passing into the stomach, the ducts of the two arms arising from a common interostial pillar uniting. Each of these 4 main ducts enters the outer end of a stomach pouch. The main duct of each mouth arm gives off about 6 small branches to the mouths of the upper portion of the mouth arm. At the point of origin of the two outer arm branches it gives off 3 main branches, one to each arm branch, and con- tinues beyond that point to the tip of the mouth arm as a small central canal giving off a few small branches to each of the three arm branches and is continued as the central canal of the terminal filament. The canals to the two outer arm branches are broad and bifurcated near their outer ends.
The stomach is cruciform in shape, the 4 lobes tapering some- what toward the outer ends. From the outer extremity of each lobe there are given off 3 radial canals, a central rhopalar canal and an ardradial canal on either side arising from the outer
Fig. 5. Acromitus ma- culo8U8, an exumbrel- lar view of a sense organ; diagrammatic. Much enlarged.
214 The Philippine Jou7mal of Science im
edge of the end of the lobe. In the cleft between each two lobes, a rhopalar canal is given off. So, of the 8 rhopalar canals, the 4 perradial canals — since they arise from the ends of the stomach lobes — are short and the 4 interradial canals — since they arise between the stomach lobes — are long. The 8 rhopalar canals extend straight to the sense organs, while the 8 interocular canals end in the circular canal. The area of the bell between the circular canal and the margin is filled with a network of anastomosing canals, taking their origin from the outer surface of the ring canal and intercommunicating with the branches of the rhopalar canals. Arising from the inner sur- face of the circular canal on each side of each ocular canal is a series of anastomosing canals usually 3 in number, which joins the ocular canals by a common lateral branch. This canal network has, typically, no connection with the interocular canals
Fig. 6. Acromitus maculosus, an exumbrellar view of a portion of the bell, showing the canal system as seen when injected ; somewhat diagrammatic.
which run directly from the stomach to the ring canal without branching or anastomosis.
There is a wide band of circular muscles covering the space between the margin and a line a little external to the level of the ends of the stomach pouches. The part of the muscle band lying within the ring canal is interrupted in the 8 rhopalar radii, while that outside the ring canal is only partially interrupted.
The whole medusa is pale blue in life, the color being deepest along the radial canals and oral arms. The exumbrella is covered with circular, ring-shaped, solid, elongated, or irregular spots. In life, these are iridescent purplish black to dark brown. In specimens preserved in formalin, the blue fades to slightly opaque white with a faint bluish tinge and the spots fade to bronze brown and finally dissappear.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 215
These medusae were common in the shallow water along the beach at Taytay, Palawan, in April and May, 1913. Great numbers of immature forms were present the second week in May. They first appeared after a very severe wind storm of several days' duration, but were never noted in the deeper waters of the bay.
Measurements of the type specimen in the collection of the zoological department of the University of the Philippines y No. C, 2081.
mm.
Bell diameter 90
Length of the mouth arms 60 Length of the bare proximal portion of the mouth arm 15
Diameter of the arm disk 50
Width of the inturned portion of the exumbrella 15
Diameter of the largest exumbrellar spots 5
Width of the subgenital ostia 20
Width of the interostial pillars 15
Numerous specimens of the different stages of this medusa were collected at Taytay, Palawan, in the summer of 1913 by Dr. R. P. Cowles and myself while on the joint scientific expedi- tion of the University of the Philippines and the Bureau of Science. During the time in which they were numerous in the vicinity of Taytay, I visited neighboring islands and other parts of Palawan, but was unable to find the medusa.
Among the numerous immature specimens, some variations and abnormalities are to be noted. The time at which the spots appear on the umbrella seems to vary. Some specimens whose umbrella is but 15 mm. in diameter show distinct spots, while others which have reached a diameter of 40 mm. show no markings at all. In the immature forms, the spots are arranged in more or less circular groups of 4 or 5 which coalesce to form the large spots of the adult form. The proximal portion of the mouth arms is more prominent, and makes up a larger portion of the arms of the immature medusa. The canal system of the bell seems the same in mature and immature specimens, but the side branches of the upper portion of the main canals of the mouth arms are conspicuous in the immature forms. The canal pattern is strikingly brought out by injecting pure Delafield's hsematoxylin through an opening in the center of the exumbrella. The only notable variation is that in a very few cases the inner canal network is connected to the adradial canals as well as to the interradial and perradial canals. This
216 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
connection is very slight, and is by no means common. One specimen has 5 stomach lobes, 5 gonad lobes, 9 mouth arms, 18 radial canals — 10 of them rhopalar and 8 adradial — and 96 marginal lappets. There are 9 rhopalia present, and as the margin is gone at the end of another rhopalar canal we may say there are 10 rhopalia, so it is as if a new area equivalent to a quadrant has been developed in this specimen to correspond to the extra stomach lobe, lacking, however, two adradial canals. In another specimen there are 18 canals, but 5 of them — 3 adradial and 2 rhopalar — arise from a single enlarged stomach pouch. Another specimen has 10 mouth arms, 4 of them develop- ing from a single interostial pillar, but the canal system is of the normal type. At first glance, the canal system of the bell of this species appears to be very similar to that of Catos- tylus piirpurus Mayer, to which it is undoubtedly closely related. But in the injected specimens of C purpurus it can be seen that the internal network of canals from the ring canal is connected most conspicuously with the adradial canals, while in A. macu- losus it is connected with the rhopalar canals and typically not at all with the adradial canals.
I have given the species the name maculosus, as the spots on the umbrella constitute one of its most striking specific characters.
Genus LOBONEMA Mayer, 1910, emended
Generic characters. — Rhizostomata triptera, in which the velar lappets are greatly extended, tapering to pointed ends. The mouth arms show numerous filaments, and the mouth-arm mem- branes are perforated by windowlike openings. There are from 8 to 16 rhopalia, twice as many radial canals as rhopalia, and a ring canal which gives off an anastomosing network of vessels on both its inner and outer sides. The inner network does not connect with the stomach. All of the radial canals extend beyond the ring canal, the ocular canals always to the sense organs. The subumbrella shows a well-developed system of ring muscles extending from the mouth-arm disk to the margin, interrupted partially or not at all by the radial canals. There are numerous prominent tapering papillae upon the exumbrella. There is an exumbrellar sensory pit above each rhopalium, whose floor is covered with radiating dendritic furrows.
This is Mayer's original definition emended so as to include Lobonema mayeri sp. nov.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine S<^yphomedusse
217
Lobonema mayeri ^ sp. no v. (figs. 7, 8, and 9).
Type. — No. C. 2424, zoological collection, University of the Philippines.
During the middle and latter part of May, Malampaya Sound on the west coast of Palawan contained great numbers of this very beautiful and interesting medusa. Two specimens were
«^i^i\'fM???\n
Fig. 7. Lobonema mayeri sp. nov., a quadrant of the exumbrellar surface, showing the papillse, sense organs, and tentaclelike marginal lappets. X h-
taken in as perfect a condition as was possible in the case of forms with such long and fragile arm filaments.
The bell is much flatter than a hemisphere both in preserved and living specimens. The portion of the bell beyond the ring
* I have named this species in honor of Dr. A. G. Mayer without whose Medusae of the World the completion of this report would have been ex- tremely difficult if not impossible and who (1910) described the genus Lobonema and the only other known species, L. smithii Mayer.
218
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Fig. 8. Lobonema mayeri, a mouth arm, showing the appendages, the windowlike openings, and the irregular arrangement of the ducts ; somewhat diagrammatic. X h-
canal, which is a considerable distance from the margin, is very thin, and hangs down as a sort of fringe when floating. The bell is from 340 to 500 mm. in diameter measured from a sense club to the one 180° from it. Medusae having a diameter of at least 500 mm. and prob- ably much more were very numerous. The subumbrella is covered with very flexible tapering papillae, increasing in size and number toward the center of the exumbrella where they reach a length of 60 mm. and a basal diameter of 15 mm. Those in the center of preserved specimens are stiff and solid at the base, but their tips like the entire papillae toward the outer position of the exumbrella are very soft, shrunken, and without rigidity. In life, they are all conical and flexible, waving about in the currents of water. Toward the center of the exumbrella, the Fig. 9. Lobonema mayen, a rather broad bases of thesc papillae cover
sense organ from the ex- ^-j^q entire SUrface.
umbrellar side. Much en- im^^i^^i -,» ,
larged. The 12 to 16 rhopalia are very short
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 219
with broad swollen ends, and are covered above and below by shelves of tissue, the exumbrellar shelf being very short and the subumbrellar much larger. No pigment spots are present. The exumbrellar sensory pit it small, rather deep below, and dendrit- ically grooved. It lies in the surface of an oval, papillalike, raised area. The ocular lappets are short, plump, and closely approximated, being 4 mm. in length from the base of the ex- umbrellar sensory pit to the tip and 3 mm. in diameter. There are from 70 to 80 complete marginal lappets, from 3 to 6 in a paramere. Some of the lappets show a distal bifurcation. The lappets are elongated, tentaclelike, tapering to a point. They reach a length of 200 mm., measured from the inner end of the cleft, are very slender and flexible distally, and have the appearance of true tentacles. For about 25 mm. of their inner length they are joined by a web. They are concave below and convex above, with thin edges. They contain a number of large longitudinal canals joined by small lateral branches, and no muscle fibers could be detected in stained sections. The velar grooves of the exumbrella are about 25 mm. and the ocular grooves are about 12 mm. long. The rhopalar clefts are V-shaped rather than Y-shaped as in L. smithii. From 24 to 32 radial canals, half of them rhopalar and half interrhopalar, leave the central stomach. There are always half as many sense organs as canals. The ocular canals extend to the sense organs in the margin, but the interocular canals while extending for some distance beyond the ring canal are lost in the network of anastomosing canals before reaching the margin, differing in this character from L. smithii. This is well shown by injecting one of these canals with Delafield's hsematoxylin. There is a distinct ring canal about 45 mm. inward from the sense club zone giving off an anastomosing system of canals internally and externally, which connects with both the ocular and inter- ocular canals but not with the central stomach.
The bell between the arm disk and the ring canal is from 25 to 30 mm. in thickness, while from the ring canal to the margin it is not thicker than 10 mm. The thickest point is at the level of the ring canal, where there is a circular swollen subumbrellar area over which the radial canals curve to meet the ring canal whose greatest breadth is at right angles to the plane of the subumbrella. At this point, just before it joins the ring canal, there is a bulbous enlargement of each ocular canal.
There is no radial muscle. The circular muscles form a series of circular folds between the arm disk and the zone of the sense organs. That part of the muscle band which lies within
220 '^^^ Philippine Journal of Science im
the ring canal is completely interrupted in the ocular radii and thinned in the interocular, while that portion lying outside the ring canal is thinned in the ocular radii and only slightly so in the interocular radii.
The arm disk is two-thirds as wide as the bell radius, very thin in the center, and swollen and rounded along the outer edge. The subgenital ostia are compressed, are twice as wide as the interostial pillars, and have a small papillalike projec- tion in the center of their subumbrellar lip. The subgenital porticus is unitary. The gonads are in the form of long lines in the thin reduplicated and folded wall of the stomach. On each side of these lines of reproductive organs are lines of blunt gastral filaments. These reduplicated membranes are inflated and pushed out through the subgenital ostia in the two specimens in the collection. Each of the interostial pillars contains a slitlike false ostium about two-thirds as wide as the pillar. One specimen examined had a large cone-shaped papilla on the upper margin of this false ostium, while others did not.
The supporting membranes of the 3 main branches of the mouth arms are pierced by windowlike openings. Typically, there seem to be 2 in the membrane of each wing, but the weakened arm membranes have broken down in most of the arms. In no arm are there more than 2 in each wing, in some none at all, and in others the branch is only attached by its upper edge, the membrane between the openings having given away. The mouth arms are equally spaced, the two arms arising from the same interostial pillar being widely separated, the base of each extending partly over the adjacent subgenital ostium. The proximal portion of each arm is about one-half the length of the 3-winged distal portion. The fringed mouths extend on the inner surface to the center of the arm disk. Scattered among the mouths are very numerous filaments. Those of the central disk and the proximal portion of the arms are slender, threadlike filaments. Toward the distal portion they increase in length and become spindle-shaped, circular in cross section, and tapering to a long threadlike portion. The larger filaments contain an axial canal, and reach a maximum length of 200 mm. and a diameter of 10 mm.
In life, the medusa has an exquisite color scheme of purple, violet, and rose pink. The gonads are, as a rule, pink, the general color is violet, and the fringe of tentaclelike marginal lappets purple. These colors vary considerably in intensity and arrangement. In f ormalian, the entire medusa is milky gray and the gonads and mouth fringes are yellow.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 221
These medusae with their numerous tentaclelike velar lappets, their exumbrellar papillae, and their arm appendages — all of which are very long, slender, and flexible and all of which are colored some shade between rose pink and purple — present a most striking and beautiful appearance, and as they are found on or near the surface are most conspicuous objects.
Numbers of young fish of the genus Caranx were found living in the mass of filaments and mouth arms.
L. mayeri differs from L. smithii in that it has from 12 to 16 rhopalia instead of 8, in that the circular muscle is completely in- terrupted in the ocular radii, in that it has a false ostium in each interostial pillar, and in that the interocular canals do not reach the bell margin.
I have handled this medusa and have seen and experienced the results of the sting which are very similar to those of a nettle sting and are not at all serious. This is surprising in view of the statements of Dr. H. M. Smith as given by Mayer with regard to the closely related L. smithii Mayer.^ It seems to me much more probable that the cases of poisoning reported by Old ^° were due, as I have said before, to the ''Chrysaora stage" of Dactylometru quinquecirrha which is common in the harbor. The Filipinos state that the latter form is very pois- onous, and a number of instances are known in which it has caused severe symptoms of poisoning.
I append a table of comparative measurements and the num- ber of rhopalia and lappets to a paramere of the two specimens of L. mayeri in the collection.
Measurements of Lobonema mayeri sp, nov.
Specimen A.
Specimen B.
Bell diameter - - millimeters
Arm disk, diameter do__
Maximum length of the velar lappets __do--
Number of rhopalia
Number of velar lappets
Width of the subgenital ostia - millimeters—
Width of the interostial pillars - do.
Width of the pillar cavity (false ostium) __ do.
Length of the mouth arms from the center of the arm disk do.
350
125
180
12
«3-6
c75
32
25
180
340
110
200
16
D3-4
c70
33
22
180
*6 in 4 parameres, 5 in 2, 4 in 5, and 3 in 1. c More than twice the width of the pillar,
b 4 in 13 parameres and 3 in 3.
^ Pub. Carnegie Inst, Wash. (1910), No. 109, 3, 690. '' This Journal, Sec. B (1908), 3, 329.
222 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Genus LOBONEMOIDES novum
Generic characters, — Lobonema-like Rhizostomata triptera in which the marginal lappets are pointed but not greatly extended. The mouth-arm membranes are not perforated by windowlike openings. There are more than 8 rhopalia, twice as many radial canals as sense organs all extending to the margin, and a ring canal. The ring canal gives off externally a network of anas- tomosing canals, extending to the margin, and internally a series of anastomosing canals on each side of each rhopalar canal, which do not reach the stomach and are connected with the rhopalar canals but not the interrhopalar canals. The exumbrellar sensory pits are furrowed with radiating dendritic grooves. Each mouth arm bears numerous small scattered appendages and one large terminal spindle-shaped appendage, all of which taper to filamentous outer ends.
The type species is L. gracilis sp. nov. from Taytay, Palawan.
Fig. 10. Lobonemoides gracilis, an exumbrellar view of half the bell, showing the canal system, the marginal lappets, etc. X 1.
Lobonemoides gracilis sp. nov. (figs. 10, 11, 12, and 13).
Type. — No. C. 2422, zoological collection. University of the Philippines.
The bell is flat, 50 to 85 mm. in diameter, and very trans- parent. The stomach and canals are semiopaque white and the gonads opaque white. That part of the bell which lies outside the ring canal is very thin and flexible, while the central portion is rather thick and stiff. This outer thin region is about 17 mm. wide in the type specimen. The bell is 7 mm. thick out- side the ring canal, 14 mm. high through the outer edge of the arm disk, and 10 mm. high through the center of the arm disk. There are a few scattered papillae on the exumbrella.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
223
increasing in size toward the center. They are small, slender, and flexible, and reach a length of 2 mm. and a basal diameter of 0.5 mm. In preserved specimens they lie flat on the disk.
There are 14 rhopalia and twice as many radial canals, all extending to the margin. The sense organs are very short, thick clubs lying at right angles to the plane of the bell with the swollen end toward the exumbrellar surface. Between each pair of sense organs, there are 6 marginal lappets — 4 large pointed triangular .velar lappets between 2 small pointed ocular lappets. The rhopalar canals are somewhat larger than the interrhopalar canals, and divide distally to form a U-shaped sinus in the upper part of the ocular lappets. In the curve
Fig. 11. Lohonemoides gracilis gen. et sp. nov., ventral view of the medusa. X i- Two of the mouth arms of this specimen are aborted.
between the limbs of this sinus lies the sense organ. The ex- umbrellar sensory pit is dendritically grooved. The ring canal lies at the outer edge of the swollen central region of the bell, and its greatest breadth is at right angles to the plane of the umbrella. The radial canals curve over this swollen area to the ring canal, which gives off externally and internally a set of anas- tomosing canals. The external network Is connected in a number of places with both the ocular and interocular canals, and it approaches the latter more closely and is joined to it in a greater number of places. Internally, a network of 3 or 4 anastomosing canals is given off by the ring canal on each side of each ocular canal to which it is joined in 2 or 3
224
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
places. The interocular canals internal to the ring canal are broader than the ocular canals, and show a sinuslike broadening where they join the ring canal. Beyond the ring canal the interocular canals are small and are closely surrounded by the network of anastomosing canals, while the ocular canals maintain a uniform size to the margin and have on either side just outside the ring canal a small area free from the anastomosing canals.
The arm disk is 50 mm. in diameter, swollen in the zone of origin of the arms, and thin in the center of the disk. The sub- genital ostia are 18 mm. in width and 4 mm. high, with a concave upper and swollen convex lower lip. The interostial
pillars are 9 mm. wide. The subgenital porticus is unitary and square. Each gonad lies in a complex series of folds in the floor of the stomach. The folds are longest in the center and shortest at the ends, where at the level of the center of the interostial pillars the gonads are separated from one another by a very short space. Thus the outer edges of the gonads out- line a square area, the corners of which coincide with the cen- ters of the interostial pillars. The bases of the pillars are rounded, and the edge of the portion of the arm disk between them is straight, so the arm disk may be considered 8-sided — rounded and straight faces alternating with one another — or more exactly 4-sided, each corner being rounded. The outline of the stomach is square, but the invaginated gonads have so encroached on it as to leave only a narrow cruciform cavity whose outer ends are joined by a marginal sinus from which the radial canals originate.
The arms are about equally spaced. The two arms on a common interostial pillar are widely separated, so that the base of each arm lies over the outer one-third of a gonad. The arm disk at the base is a little wider than the bell radius, while at the point of origin of the arms it is only five-ninths as wide as the bell radius. The arms are 50 mm. long from
Fig. 12. Lohonemoidea gracilis, a dia- firrammatic representation of a quadrant of the bell from the subumbrellar side, showing: the subgrenital ostium, canals, etc. X 1.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusx
225
the center of the disk, and so a little longer than the bell radius. They are very flexible. The inner wings bear mouths to the center of the disk. The distal 3-winged portion of the arm is about one-half the total length of the arm. The branches are slender and delicate, and the fringed mouths are not crowded, except toward the tip of the arms. At the center of the disk is a slender filament, and around this a whorl of similar fila- ments, one in the axil between each pair of arms arising from a common interostial pillar. Scattered among the mouths are a few similar but smaller filaments. At the end of each mouth
Fig. 13. Lobonemoides gracilis, lateral view of one mouth arm and an interostial pillar, showing the ducts as seen in an injected specimen ; diagrammatic. X 1.
arm there is a large spindle-shaped appendage tapering to a filamentous distal end and having a central canal. Scattered on the distal ends of the arms are a few similar but smaller appendages. The terminal appendages reach a length of 45 mm. and a maximum diameter of 6 mm.
Each of the very narrow, interradial limbs of the stomach receives two ducts from the mouth arms, one (fig. 13, a,) at a point about one-third of the distance from its outer end to the center and the other (fig. 13, b) at the outer end. These
226
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
two ducts originate from the point of junction of three main ducts in the mouth arms. The central one (fig. 13, c) is formed by the union of the ducts, which run along the outer edge of the inner wing of the two arms supported by a common pillar and give off smaller ducts to the branches of their inner wings. This union occurs not far from the disk center in the axil between two mouth arms supported on the same interradial pillar. The other two (fig. 13, d) are the main central ducts from the same two mouth arms. Each of those two main ducts divides at the point of origin of the two outer arm wings into 3 main branches, the two larger of which run to each of the outer arm wings and join the ducts running along the outer surfaces of these wings. These and the main ducts of the arms are often double (fig. 13). The smaller one runs through the center of the arm, giving off branches to the outer ducts of the 3 wings till at the tip of the arm it and the outer ducts of the 3 wings are joined. The main duct of each arm sends off in its proximal portion one large connecting branch and numerous smaller connecting branches to the outer duct of the inner mouth arm.
The medusa is transparent white, and the gonads are yellow.
There are 3 specimens of this new and interesting medusa collected by Dr. R. P. Cowles along the beach at Taytay, Palawan. Measurements of them are given in the following table.
Measurements of Lobonemoides gracilis sp. nov.
|
Specimen. |
Bell di- ameter. |
Arm-disk diameter. |
Lengrth of the mouth arms. |
Width of the sub- genital ostia. |
Width of the inter- ostial pillars. |
|
Type C. 2422 _._ _ |
mm. 85 70 47 |
m,m. 50 44 84 |
mm. 50 44 30 |
mm. 18 16 12 |
mm. 10 8 5 |
|
Cotype A |
|||||
|
Cotype B . _-, _ . |
|||||
This is a very puzzling form to place systematically. It may possibly be a growth form of Lobonema mayeri or some other species of that genus, for in many ways it resembles these medusae, but it lacks the two main generic characters of Lobonema, the tentaclelike marginal lappets and the perforated arm membranes. Further, it was collected on the east coast of Palawan, whereas L. mayeri was found only on the west coast. The gonads of Lobonemoides gracilis are well developed although not fully mature, and its sense organs and the arrangement of the canals of the mouth arms are different from those of L. mayeri.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 227
For these reasons, I have decided to consider it as a mature form which necessitates the formation of the new genus to which I have given the name Lobonemoides, because of its resemblance in certain characters to Mayer's genus Lobonema.
The classification of a form such as this brings in question the purpose of systematic work. As I see it, the function of such work is to bring before scientific workers the forms of life in such a way as to make possible their differentiation and consequently to allow of their being placed in a general system and used as a basis for scientific inductions. The binomial system of nomenclature has been adopted as the most practical method of accomplishing this end. The placing of scientific data before the world is the essential part of such a work. The mere introducing into the literature of the group of a new generic or specific name is the smallest part and should be but a means to an end. It seems to me, therefore, that the possibility that these names may in the future become synonyms should not prevent the worker from accomplishing this purpose. For example, I might have described the above species as a doubtful, immature form of L. mayeri. But this denies a place in the classification and nomenclature of the group to a very interesting medusa form, which in so far as present data is concerned is a new species of a new genus and concern- ing which there may be no more data for years. It practically buries it from all but a very few workers; whereas, if it be given a generic and specific name it receives a place in the nomenclature of the group and is thus brought to the attention of all workers, and the question as to whether it is a mature form or not will, no doubt, be sooner settled and the medusa put in its proper place. If it be a growth form, the name which I give it will become a synonym and be discarded, but it will have accomplished the purpose for which it was given.
RHIZOSTOMATA LORIFERA Vanhoffen
Genus RHOPILEMA Haeckel, 1880
Rhopilema visayana sp. nov. (figs. 14, 15, and 16).
Type. — No. C. 2423, zoological collection. University of the Philippines. From Taytay Bay, Palawan.
The bell is from 200 to 400 mm. in diameter, and is hemi- spherical or more convex than a hemisphere. The central por- tion which forms the upper wall of the stomach is thick and stiff, while the remainder is very thin and flexible. The exumbrella is covered with numerous small, pointed, spinelike projections.
124685 3
228
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
These are about 0.5 mm. in basal diameter and 0.75 mm. high. They are scattered over the surface, are about 2 mm. apart at the margin, and increase in number toward the apex, where they are only about 0.5 mm. apart. Scattered among these on the sides of the exumbrella are a few low, flatly rounded papillae about 1.5 mm. in diameter and 0.5 mm. in height.
Each of the 8 rhopalia shows a distinct, brown, pigmented area. There are typically 8 thin, rounded, velar lappets in each octant. The free outer ends and the deep irregular grooves between them are free from the projections found on the rest of the exumbrella. The width of these lappets is variable, and their outer ends sometimes show bifurcation.
The canal system is very similar to that of R, hispidum Maas, the 16 radial canals extending to the margin. Each adradial canal shows a sinuslike swelling at the point of origin of its innermost and largest branch. The radial
Fig. 14. Rhopilema visayana s p . nov., an exum- brellar view of a sense organ, showing the ad- jacent canals as seen in an in- jected specimen. Enlarged.
Fig. 15.
Rhopilema visayana, subumbrellar view of a quadrant, showing the canal system, the radial muscles, and the subgenital ostium with the three papillae. X J.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusx
229
canals divide the radial muscle into triangular areas which are widely separated proximally.
The genital ostia are as wide as the interostial pillars, and are partly closed by 1 large median papilla and 2 smaller, lateral, elongated, roughened, wartlike papillse, each lying in the line of a radial canal. The partitions between the 4 genital cavities are narrow but complete.
The arm disk is supported by 4 broad, flat pillars. The distance from the base of one of these to the base of the one opposite it is 170 mm. The united arms arise from the center of the arm disk, and are only 60 mm. in diameter where they leave
l^j^^-^^w^.-f'
Fig. 16. RhopUema visaycuna, a diagram of the arrangement of the ducts of two mouth arms supported by a common pillar and of their scapulets. X i.
the disk. The mouth arms, measured from the outer surface of the arm disk, are 190 mm. in length. They are united proximally for more than two-thirds of this distance, the distal free portion measuring 75 mm. When the arms are spread out, the specimen is 200 mm. from the tip of one arm to the tip of the arm 180° from it, the central united portion being 50 mm. across at this point. The 3-winged portion of the arm makes up less than one-half of the free distal portion of the arm. Each of the two outer wings bears a dichotomously divided branch near its origin, and is divided distally into 4 flattened, tapering, nearly naked branches. Scattered among the mouths are appendages of three types: Long, flexible, somewhat flattened, filamentous append-
230 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
ages; shorter, flattened, ribbonlike appendages; and pointed, spindle-shaped or wedge-shaped appendages, the largest of which is usually terminal.
The scapulets are about 65 mm. long and 45 mm. wide at the base, their upper and outer surfaces bearing numerous mouths, among which are many long, filamentous appendages. The scapulets are branched along either side, and are deeply bifurcated at the outer end.
Each interostial pillar contains a main duct which enters the outer end of one of the 4 stomach lobes and is formed by the union of the main ducts of the 2 mouth arms arising from the same pillar. The main ducts of the 2 arms unite somewhat beyond the scapulets, and the main duct formed by their union receives on each side a duct formed by the union of the ducts of the two scapulets of that side. The main duct of each mouth arm re- ceives a number of smaller ducts from the inner surface of the mouth arm and a very large duct from each of the 3 outer wings of the distal portion of the arm.
The color in both preserved and living specimens is opaque white.
This medusa was very common in Taytay Bay, Palav/an, during May, 1913. Nearly every specimen examined contained one or more living individuals of a species of a crab, Charibdis {Gonion^ emus) crucifera (Fabr.) M. Edwards. These crabs were con- siderably paler than is typical for the species, which would seem to indicate a somewhat extensive residence within the medusa. I have also seen the medusa accompanied by large numbers of small fish apparently belonging to the genus Caranx. In some instances, these fish were seen to be eating the medusa, but in all such cases the medusa was dead. When the medusa was alive, they seemed to maintain a commensal relation. The fish would be seen play- ing about among the mouth arms and appendages and on being alarmed would disappear under the edge of the bell, between the arms or in the subgenital porticus. A similar condition was found in the case of Lobonema mayerL I am told that R, visayana which is closely related to the common edible medusa of Japan, R, esculenta Kishinouye, is used for food by the inhabitants of the east coast of Leyte where it is preserved in vinegar. As it is apparently a common form in the Visayas (hence the name), there is no reason why it should not form a staple article of food.
It is very closely related to R, hispidum Maas, but differs from it in having a distinct pigmental area in the sense organ, in having its mouth arms united for more than two-thirds of their length, and in having 3 wartlike papillse in the mouth of the subgenital ostia.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Drawings by Santos, Fajardo, and Penya) TEXT FIGURES
Fig. 1. Cassiopea polypoides Keller var. culionensis var. nov., a sense organ from the subumbrellar side. Much enlarged.
2. Cassiopea medusa sp. nov., a sense organ and the adjacent canal
system from the subumbrellar side. Very much enlarged.
3. Cassiopea medusa^ a portion of a mouth arm, showing the scattered
mouths and the very typical appendages. X 1.
4. Acromitus maculosus gen. et sp. nov., lateral view of the medusa.
X 8/9.
5. Acromitus maculosus, an exumbrellar view of a sense organ; dia-
grammatic. Much enlarged.
6. Acromitus maculosus, an exumbrellar view of a portion of the
boll, showing the canal system as seen when injected; somewhat diagrammatic.
7. Lobonema mayeri sp. nov., a quadrant of the exumbrellar surface,
showing the papillae, sense organs, and tentaclelike marginal lap- pets. X 1/2.
8. Lobonema mayeri, a mouth arm, showing the appendages, the
windowlike openings, and the irregular arrangement of the ducts; somewhat diagrammatic. X 1/3.
9. Lobonema mayeri, a sense organ from the exumbrellar side. Much
enlarged.
10. Lobonemoides gracilis, an exumbrellar view of half the bell, showing
the canal system, the marginal lappets, etc. X 1.
11. Lobonemoides gracilis gen. et sp. nov., ventral view of the medusa.
X 1/2. Two of the mouth arms of this specimen are aborted.
12. Lobonemoides gracilis, a diagrammatic representation of a quadrant
of the bell from the subumbrellar side, showing the subgenital ostium, canals, etc. X 1.
13. Lobonemoides gracilis, lateral view of one mouth arm and an interos-
tial pillar, showing the ducts as seen in an injected specimen; diagrammatic. X 1.
14. Rhopilema visayana sp. nov., an exumbrellar view of a sense organ,
showing the adjacent canals as seen in an injected specimen. Enlarged.
15. Rhopilema visayana, subumbrellar view of a quadrant, showing the
canal system, the radial muscles, and the subgenital ostium with the three papillae. X 1/2.
16. Rhopilema visayana, a diagram of the arrangement of the ducts of
two mouth arms supported by a common pillar and of their scap-
ulets. X 1/2.
231
NOTES ON PHILIPPINE ALCYONARIA
PART II : LEMNALIOIDES KUKENTHALI, A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF
ALCYONARIA FROM THE PHILIPPINES AND A DISCUSSION OF THE
SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE NEW GENUS
By S. F. Light
(From the Zoological Laboratory, College of Liberal Arts, University of the Philippines)
One plate and 8 text figures
Genus LEMNALIOIDES novum
Generic characters, — The colony is upright, treelike, or bushy, and consists of a number of stems coalesced in one or more groups for some distance above the base. The tubular, non- retractile polyps are scattered singly or in little groups on the branches and lateral and terminal twigs. The spiculation of the cortex and the canal walls is similar to that in Lemnalia. The tentacles contain a very few, very small, scattered spicules, and the stomodseum contains no spicules. The tentacles beai: more than one row of pinnules, and show a median longitudinal band of muscle fibers on their outer surfaces. The type of the genus is Lemnalioides kukenthali sp. nov.
Lemnalioides kiikenthali sp. nov. (Plate I; text figs. 1 to 6).
Type. — This species is described from a single well-developed colony from one of the shallow reefs in Port Galera Bay, Min- doro. No. C. 254, zoological collection. University of the Philip- pines. Collected by S. F. Light in May, 1912.
The colony, which is 115 mm. in height and 110 mm. in greatest breadth across the polypary, arises from a small somewhat en- crusting base, 38 mm. in length and 25 mm. in width. It consists of 2 main stalks or groups of stems which divide at a height of about 40 mm. to form a number of stems or main branches. These are divided and subdivided toward their outer ends to form a number of distally directed, closely approximated branches. On the slender, lateral and terminal twigs of these branches and scattered to some extent on the branches themselves are the large, tubular, nonretractile polyps. They arise singly or in little groups, and are all expanded in the type specimen (Plate I), where they average from 1 to 2 mm. in length and
233
234
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Fig. 1. Spicules from the polyp and tentacles of Lem- nalioides kiikenthali; a, a polyp spindle showing the axis to be seen in cleared specimens ; b, a spindle from the distal end of one of the double rows, showing the axis and the divided and sculptured distal end ; c, tentacle spicules. X 112.5.
about 0.5 mm. in diameter. The lateral twigs decrease in length from as much as 9 mm. at the base of a branch to 3 or 4 mm. toward the tip of the branch. The lines of the canal walls are distinct on the stem and branches, and each polyp can be plainly seen to be the termination of a canal. The stomodseum is long, thick walled, and spindle-shaped, and contains no spicules. In an aver- age polyp it is 0.6 mm. in length and 0.2 mm. in greatest (central) diam- eter. The tentacles are large with a double row of short thick pinnulse on each side and a median band of muscle fibers on the outer surface (fig. 6). They contain only a very few, small, scattered spicules.
The polyp armature is not heavy, and consists of smooth spindles in an ir- regularly transverse arrangement on the body of the polyps. Distally, they form a double row of 5 or 6 pairs of spindles at the base of each tentacle (fig. 6).
The polyp spindles are rather irregular, bent, or curved, with a few low projections, and a narrow, distinct, central axis, and ap- pear, in cleared specimens, to be more like flexible fibers than stiff spicules (fig. 1, a). They are from 0.15 to 0.20 mm. in length and from 0.005 to 0.008 mm. in diameter, and have somewhat swollen and divided ends. This is particularly true of the distal
ends of the spindles of the double rows which are mushroomed and much divided and sculptured (fig. 1, 6).
The very few tentacle spicules are irregular forms found in the crotch between two tentacles and here and there in the pinnules of the lower part of the tentacles. They range from 0.04 to 0.05 mm. in length, and are sculptured over their entire sur- face, particularly heavily at the outer ends (fig. 1, c).
The spicules of the stem and branch cortex are spindles. They are numerous, but do not seem to have the hard brittle character of the spicules of Lemnalia, as the cortex of the colony except at the base is soft and pliable. In the upper stem, these spindles are smooth and curved and are very similar to those of the polyp
Fig. 2. Spindles from the stem cortex of Lemnalioides kiiken- thali; a, from the upper stem ; h, from the mid stem. X 112.5.
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria 235
but with a wider, more conspicuous axis and with slightly en- larged, divided, and roughened ends (fig. 2, a). Among them are a few heavier spindles, whose axes are not distinct and which show a few projections on the convex surface (fig. 2, 6). Prox- imally, the spicules of the latter type increase in number and become rougher and more irregular. Some of these spindles have numerous blunt projections in zones, others have projections on the convex surface, some of them graduate into 4-rayed forms and forms approaching the double stars or capstanlike forms of so many species of Lemnalia (fig. 3). In the extreme base, these double stars and capstanlike forms predominate (fig. 5).
The spindles of the branch cortex reach a length of 0.15 mm. and a diameter of 0.01 mm.; those of the cortex of the upper stem are from 0.17 to 0.29 mm. in length and from 0.008 to 0.015 mm. in diameter ; those of the cortex of the middle of the stem are from 0.18 to 0.3 mm. in length and from 0.009 to 0.02 mm. in diameter. The curved spindles of the cortex of the lower stem are from 0.05 to 0.19 mm. in length and from 0.019 to
Fig. 3. Spicules from the cortex of the lower part of the stem of Lemnalioidea kiikenthali.
X 112.5.
0.036 mm. in diameter, and the club-shaped forms are from 0.08 to 0.12 mm. in length, from 0.04 to 0.05 mm. in greatest diameter, and about 0.025 mm. in least diameter. The spicules of the base are from 0.057 to 0.08 mm. in length, from 0.04 to 0.07 mm. in maximum diameter, and about 0.02 mm. in least diameter.
The spicules of the canal walls are similar in form throughout the whole colony, being smooth, rodlike bodies with roughened, expanded, and divided ends (fig. 4). These increase from an average length of 0.25 mm. and a diameter of 0.009 mm. in the branches to a length of 0.5 mm. and a diameter of 0.026 mm. in the base.
The cortex of the entire colony contains large numbers of unicellular algse. These are particularly numerous toward the base, and give the cortex a characteristic appearance in cleared specimens when examined under the microscope.
236
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Fig. 4. The ends of two spicules from the canal walls of Lemnalioides kuken- thali, near the base of the colony. X 230.
The stem is yellowish brown and the polyp-bearing portion is light brown in formalin.
I have named the type species of the genus in honor of Prof. Dr. Willy Kukenthal, whose epoch-making work in bringing order out of chaos in the classification of the Alcyonaria is too well known to need recounting here.
I was pleased to see in a recent reprint (1913), which the author kindly sent me, that Kukenthal has come to the conclusion that the first four species, in- cluded in his revision of the Nephthyidse (1903), in group A of the key to the species of the genus Lithophytum as well as L. elegans, brassica, and armatum belong to the genus Lemnalia and to a new genus Paralemnalia rather than to Lithophytum. As the classifica- tion stood before, Lemnalia and Lithophytum overlapped and neither was clearly defined. I had been forced to this conclusion by a study of the large collection of Nephthyidse in the museum of the University of the Philippines. It was first and most strikingly brought to my attention when separating the species into generic groups. Following Kukenthal's key to the genera of the Nephthyidse (1903), a distinct group of species was found which seemingly belonged to Lemnalia, and a study of the literature of that genus confirmed me in that opinion. On study- ing the key to the species of Lithophytum, however, I found the same group of species to agree very closely with certain of the species of group A of that genus. A further study of the descriptions of the species in group A convinced me that some of them were of the same genus if not of the same species as the specimens in our collection, which after a careful study of the works of Gray (1866), Bourne (1900), and Kukenthal (1903) I concluded were, without the pos- sibility of mistake, species of the genus Lem- nalia Gray emend. Bourne emend. Kukenthal. By placing the five species africana May, elegans May, flava May, brassica May, and armatum Ktikth. in the genus Lemnalia, Kukenthal has put it and the genus Lithophytum on a clearer and more workable basis as he has clearly shown in his Alcyonarien des Rothen Meeres.
In this paper, Kukenthal also describes the new genus Para- lemnalia to receive the species thrysoides Ehrbg. and flabellum
Fig. 5. Two spicules from the cortex of the extreme base of Lem,' nalioides kukenthali. X 112.5.
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria 237
Q. and G. (including Ammothea digitatum May) , both previously placed by him in the genus Lithophytum, and a new species P. eburnea, thereby further clearing up the situation in the genus Lithophytum. He diagnoses the new genus Paralemnalia as follows :
Die von einer gemeinsamen Basis entspringenden glatten sehr rigiden und zerbrechlichen Hauptstamme sind nicht weiter verzweigt, hochstens konnen sie sich gabeln. Die Polypen sitzen direkt an diesen Hauptstammen, und zwar stets einzeln, niemals in "Biindel," *^Buschel" oder "Katzchen" vereint, die Polypen sind retraktil, und ihr unterster Teil kann mehr oder wenig deutlich zu einem Kelch umgebildet sein. Die Kanalwande sind diinn, aber dicht erfullt mit einem Netzwerk spindelformiger Spicula. In ihrer Gestalt schliessen sich die Spicula der verschiedenen Regionen an die von Lemnalia an. Verbreitung; Indopazifischer Ozean, in flachem Wasser.
This new genus has for its type species Ammothea thrysoides Ehrbg. which Gray (1868) placed together with Ammothea (Alcyonium) ramosa (Q. and G.) in his new genus Verrilliana. His diagnosis of this, as of so many other genera, Lemnalia for example, was not only incomplete but incorrect, and was ignored by subsequent workers. In the case of Lemnalia, although the description was incorrect, the species described, including the type species (that is, the first one named, as no type was de- signated), did belong to a distinct genus, and Bourne when he revised the genus retained Gray's name, Lemnalia. In the case of Verrilliana, however, of the two species named as belong- ing to the genus, Ammothea ramosa was given first and is, therefore, since no type was named, the type species of the genus. This form, however, is undoubtedly a species of the older genus Ammothea (now Lithophytum), and thus the name Verrilliana, the type species having been removed or rather re- turned to another genus, becomes a homonym. This, together with the very poor diagnosis, would seem to afford ample reason for dropping the name Verrilliana.
Ktikenthal speaking of this point says:
Est ist mir daher ganz unmoglich, den namen Verrilliana fur die von mir aufgestellte Gattung wieder zu verwenden, um so mehr als Gray ausser der A, thyrsoides auch noch das Lithophytum arboreum (Q. and G.) zu seiner neuen Gattung rechnete.
Beide Arten haben aber nicht das geringste miteinander zu tun, * * *.
He evidently refers here to Alcyonium ramosa of Quoy and Gaimard, which Gray gave as the first species of his genus Verrilliana, as I find no references to Lithophytum arboreum (Q. and G.), and Lithophytum arboreum, the type species of the genus Lithophytum, was named by Forskal. In either case, Ktikenthal is eminently correct in finding no resemblance be-
238 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
tween such forms as Paralemnalia thyrsoides and such charac- teristic Lithophyta as L. ramosa and L. arboreum.
Our collection contains a number of specimens of the type species of this genus, Paralemnalia thrysoides (Ehrbg.) Kiiken- thal. They are from three rather widely separated regions: Bantayan Islands; Sabong (near Port Galera Bay), Mindoro; and Batas Island on the east coast of Palawan. I found it especially abundant on the reefs of the Sulu Sea side of Palawan, where it was one of the common reef Alcyonaria. The spreading colonies with their stiff upright stems reach a diameter of more than a meter, and are usually found associated with Alcyonidss to which they have a superjficial resemblance. It is one of the most beautiful of the Philippine reef Alcyonaria. The expanded colony has in life a soft velvety appearance, owing to the long flexible polyps which reach a length of from 10 to 15 millimeters.
An examination of the stomodseal walls of these specimens has demonstrated the presence of numerous spicules (fig. 8) some- what similar to those found in the stomodaeal walls of Lemnalia (fig. 7).
Judging from May's description and drawings (1899) and from a study of a large collection of Lemnalia in our museum, I suspect that Ammothea digitatum May which Kiikenthal has included with L. flabellum as Paralemnalia flabellum is a species of Lemnalia rather than of Paralemnalia or at least an inter- grading form. A reference to May's figures (1899) of Am- mothea digitata will show that the stems are branched. The diagnosis is further based on the retractility of the polyps and their arrangement singly on the stems. These characters must be used with caution as it is very difficult to differentiate between extreme contractility and retractility of polyps. A number of species of Lemnalia in our collection have polyps which are scattered singly on the stems and twigs and which are so strongly contractile as scarcely to show above the surface and yet they are unmistakably species of Lemnalia.
Paralemnalia, however, as may be easily seen by a comparison of the type species, P. thrysoides, with any species of Lemnalia, is a distinct genus related to Lemnalia and Lemnalioides. It forms with these two a series of closely related genera of which Lemnalioides is most nearly related and Paralemnalia least nearly related to the genus Lithophytum. The method of branch- ing, the form of the colony, the arrangement of the polyps, and the proportion between the barren and polyp-bearing portions of the colony are similar in Lemnalia and Lemnalioides, but different from that in Paralemnalia. Lemnalia and Paralemnalia, on the
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria 239
other hand, have the characteristic stomodseum spicules which are not found in Lemnalioides. The tentacle spicules also, which are numerous in Paralemnalia and Lemnalia, are very few and scattered in Lemnalioides, and may very probably be found to be entirely absent in species as yet undiscovered.
In 1896 Klikenthal described and figured Ammothea carnosa, a new species from Ternate. In his revision of the Nephthyidse (1903), he includes this species in group A of his key to the species of the genus Lithophytum, where its characters would naturally place it as the group was at that time defined. Since that time, two of the five species in this group, L. fiavum and L. africanum, have been removed (Klikenthal, 1913) to the genus Lemnalia and two others, L. thrysoides and L. flabellum, to Kukenthars new genus Paralemnalia. This leaves L. carnosum as the only member of group A remaining in the genus Litho- phytum, and this in spite of the fact that Klikenthal says (1903) :
Vorliegende Art bildet zusammen mit L. africanum^ fiavum und digitatum eine naturliche Gruppe innerhalb der Gattung Lithophytum.
The excellent figures and description of A. carnosa show it to have characteristics which suggest a relationship to Lemnalia, Paralemnalia, and Lemnalioides. The small polyp-bearing area restricted to the anterior portion of the colony; the colony con- sisting of a number of stems united for a part of their length; and the typical form and size of the spicules, their arrange- ment on the polyps, and their presence (supposedly in consider- able numbers) in the canal walls are all characters which suggest relationship to these genera. The absence of stomodseum spicules and the absence (or apparent absence) of tentacle spicules pre- vent A. carnosa from being included in the genus Lemnalia, and this character together with the branching colony exclude it from the genus Paralemnalia. But the presence of very few tentacle spicules and, possibly, as only one form has been examined, their entire absence is characteristic of the genus Lemnalioides. The form of its cortex and canal-wall spicules, and also their size and arrangement, are strikingly suggestive of Lemnalioides kilkenthali. It seems probable then that a re- examination of the type in the light of the recent changes in the genus Lithophytum would show Lithophytum carnosum (Klikth.) to belong to the genus Lemnalioides proposed in this paper or to be a form connecting that genus with Lithophytum.
While in many ways the genus Lemnalioides, as the name indicates, approaches the genus Lemnalia to which it is un- doubtedly closely related as I have shown above, the differences
240
The Philippine Journal of Science
seem to me to be of generic value. In my study of a large col- lection of Lemnalia in which Lemnalioides kukenthali was at first included, I found that the differences between it and any species of Lemnalia in the collection were so much greater than the differences between the most widely different species of Lem- nalia that it seemed impossible to place it with them in that genus. With the addition of the five species transferred from Lithophytum and the new Philippine species, the genus Lemnalia will contain some 20 or more species. As further collections in the Philippines and elsewhere will undoubtedly add to this number and as these species are closely related and very dif- ficult to differentiate from descriptions without specimens for ' comparison, the separation from the genus of any natural group seems to be amply justified.
The Philippine species of Lemnalia all show on dissection more or less numerous, characteristic spicules in the walls of the stomodseum (fig. 7). I have found no references to such spicules in any species of Nephthyidse except Gersemnia studer (Koch). Gray (1866), Bourne (1900), and ^^>^ Kiikenthal (1903 and 1913) evidently overlooked these spicules, and I have no doubt that a re- examination of the type specimens would show them to be present in all the known species of Lemnalia, This oversight is not to be wondered at as these spicules are very seldom to be seen unless the stomodseum is dissected away from the rest of the polyp and would not be discovered except by accident or by a more thorough mor- phological investigation than is usually under- taken in purely systematic work. They would probably escape detection in a histological investigation, also, such as that made by Bourne (1900) as the material must be decalcified before sectioning. I found dissection under the binocular mi- croscope of specimens cleared in clove oil to be the best method of separating the stomodseum and studying the spicules of its walls. I have examined the stomodseal walls of several of the species of Lithophytum, Nephthya, Dendronephthya, Stereo- nephthya, Capyiella, and Siphonogorgia in our collection, but find the stomodseum. to be without spicules of any kind. In Paralemnalia thrysoides, however, as I have mentioned above, I found stomodseal spicules to be abundant.
In all the Philippine species of Lemnalia, there is a single row of pinnules on each side of the tentacle. Bourne (1900) notes
Fig. 6. Two ten- tacles from a cleared specimen of Lemnalioides kukenthali, show- ing the median muscle bands, the double rows of pinnules, and the double rows of polyp spicules. X 48.5.
IX, D, 3
Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria
241
the same condition in L. nitida (Verrill), and judging from the figures of Bourne (1900), M^y (1899), and Kukenthal (1903) the same is probably true of all the previously described species.
All the species of Lemnalia described by Bourne, Kukenthars L. umbellata, and the Philippine species have numerous tentacle spicules. There are no tentacle spicules mentioned in the de- scriptions of May's species, but I have no doubt that, as in the case of the stomodseal spicules, a reexamination of the type would show them to be present.
Kukenthal (1913) has emended his earUer diagnosis of Lemnalia (1903) to read:
Von einer gemeinsamen, oft stark verbreiterten Basis erheben sich ein Oder mehrere ausserlich glatte, wenig biegsame Hauptstamme, die sich an ihrem oberen Ende in verschiedener Weise verzweigen und an ihren End- zweigen in Biindeln oder Biischeln aber niemals in "Katzchen" angeordnete
Fig. 7. Two spicules from the stomodseal walls of an undescribed species of Lemnalia. X 1,000. Actual lengths, 0.038 and 0.0532 mm., respectively.
Fia. 8. A spicule from the stomodseal walls of Paralemnalia thrysoidea (Ehrbg.) Kukenthal. X 1,000. Actual length 0.0513 mm.
Polypen tragen. Die Polypen sind nicht retraktil. Die Kanalwande sind diinn, aber dicht erfullt mit einem Netzwerk spindelformiger Spicula. An der Polypenwand finden sich neben grosseren, schlanken, bedornten Spindeln kleinere vor, bei denen die Dornen in ein Paar Kranzen angeordnet sind. Die Tentakel enthalten plattenformige, fein skulpturierte Spicula. In der Rinde der Aste liegt ein dichtes Netz schlanker, meist gekriimmter Spindeln, die nach der Basis zu mit kleineren, mehr sternformigen Spicula untermischt werden. Verbreitung; Indopazifischer Ozean, in flachem Was- ser, auf Korallenriffen.
I have found no small spicules in the polyp walls having two zones of projections as spoken of in the above diagnosis ("schlanken, bedornten Spindeln kleinere vor, bei denen die Dornen in ein Paar Kranzen angeordnet sind.*') I have found such spicules, however, in the stomodseal walls of all the specimens I have studied, and I have also found them in very small numbers in the oral surface of a few species, and they are present in
242 The Philippine Jourmal of Science 1914
large numbers in the tentacles of two species. It seems very- probable that the spicules here referred to are the stomodseal spicules which may sometimes be made out through the polyp walls of cleared specimens.
I propose still further to emend the diagnosis of the genus Lemnalia to read as follows :
Genus LEMNALIA Gray emended
Generic characters, — The colony is upright, stiff, or rigid, and consists of one or more stems arising from a common often broadened base. The stems may or may not be coalesced prox- imally in one or more groups for a portion of their length. They divide distally to form numerous branches and twigs. The polyps are not retractile, but may be so strongly contracted as to appear retractile. They are scattered singly, or in little groups, on the branches and lateral and terminal twigs. The tentacles bear on each side a single row of pinnules. The thin canal walls contain a close network of spindle-shaped or rod- shaped spicules whose ends are usually roughened, enlarged, and divided. The spicules of the polyp wall are spindles usually forming 8, more or less, distinct converging double rows in the bases of the tentacles; those of the branch cortex are spindles forming an interlacing felt work over the surface; those of the stem form a thick layer of spindles, club-shaped forms, 4-rayed forms, and double stars, the last predominating toward the base. The tentacles contain numerous spicules which may be of three types, curved or rod-shaped forms, finely sculptured flattened sclerites, or slender, irregularly branched, rod-shaped spicules. The walls of the stomodseum contain small, sculptured or un- sculptured, rod-shaped or flattened, irregularly branched spic- ules, usually having two zones of projection and often showing bifurcation of one or both ends.
Lemnalioides it will be seen differs from Lemnalia as thus diagnosed, in that the tentacles contain very few spicules, in that the stomodseum contains no spicules, and in that there is a double row of pinnules along each side of the tentacles. Two other characters which may prove to be specific rather than generic in value are the presence in the mid line of the outer surface of each tentacle of a longitudinal band of muscle fibers and the presence in the ectoderm of Lemnalioides of little batteries of nematocysts which I have as yet been unable to find in any species of Lemnalia.
Lemnalioides differs from Paralemnalia most distinctly in its softer consistency, in its more treelike colony form, in that
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on PhUippine Alcyonaria 243
the polyps are sometimes arranged in little groups and are borne on the branches and twigs, in the absence of stomodseal spicules, and in the scarcity of spicules in the tentacles.
Because of these differences, I consider Lemnalioides a natural genus between Lemnalia and Lithophytiim. It approaches Litho- phytum in that the tentacle spicules ,are few and scattered and in the absence of stomodseal spicules. It further approaches it in its softer consistency and more treelike colony form. It is much more closely related to Lemnalia, however, which it resembles in its colony formed of proximally coalesced stems, in that the polyp-bearing portion of the colony is confined to a small distal portion of the colony, in its mode of branching, and very strikingly in the spiculation of the canal walls and cortex.
A further characteristic of Lemnalioides which separates it together with Lemnalia and Paralemnalia from Lithophytum as from all other nephthyid genera is the presence of very numerous long, sticky, elastic mesenterial filaments, extending to the base of the colony. This would seem to be a character which, together with the very characteristic form, size, and arrangement of the spicules of the canal walls and cortex and the presence of distinct polyp-bearing and barren portions of the stem with the prepon- derance of the barren portion, might justify the separation of the three genera Paralemnalia, Lemnalia, and Lemnalioides as a sub- family, Lemnaliinse, within the family Nephthyidse.
LITERATURE
Bourne, G. C. On the Genus Lemnalia Gray with an Account of the Branching Systems of the Order Alcyonacea. Trans. Linn, Soc. Lon- don (1900), II, 7, 521-538, 3 plates, 3 text figures.
Gray, J. E. Descriptions of Some New Genera and Species of Alcyonid Corals in the British Museum. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1868), 2, 441-445 (woodcut).
KUKENTHAL, W. Alcyonaceen von Ternate. Nyphthyidae Verrill und Si- phonogorgiidae Kolliker. Abhandlungen der Senckenbergischen Natur- forschenden Gesellschaft (1895), 23, pt. 1, 81-144, 4 plates.
Idem. Versuch einer Revision der Alcyonarien. II. Die Familie der Nephthyiden. 1. Thiel. Zool. Jahrb., Syst. (1903), 19, 99-172, 3 plates.
Idem. Alcyonaria des Roten Meeres. Expeditionen S. M. Schiff "Pola" in das Rote Meer, nordliche und sudliche Halfte, 1895-96-97-98. Zool Ergeb. (1913), 29, 1-33 (reprint), 3 plates, 27 text figures.
May, W. Beitrage zur Systematik und Chorologie der Alcyonaceen. Jena. Zeitschr. f. Naturw. (1899), 33, 1-180, 5 plates.
124685 4
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I. Lemnalioides kilkenthali gen. et sp. nov. The colony, natural size. (Photograph by Cortes)
TEXT FIGURES (From camera lucida outlines)
Fig. 1. Spicules from the polyp and tentacles of L. kilkenthali; a, a polyp spindle showing the axis to be seen in cleared specimens; 6, a spindle from the distal end of one of the double rows, showing the axis and the divided and sculptured distal end; c, tentacle spicules. X 112.5.
2. Spindles from the stem cortex of L. kilkenthali; a, from the upper
stem; b, from the mid stem. X 112.5.
3. Spicules from the cortex of the lower part of the stem of L. kilken-
thali. X 112.5.
4. The ends of two spicules from the canal walls of L. kiikenthalii
near the base of the colony. X 230.
5. Two spicules from the cortex of the extreme base of L. kilkenthali.
X 112.5.
6. Two tentacles from a cleared specimen of L. kilkenthali, showing the
median muscle bands, the double rows of pinnules, and the double rows of polyp spicules. X 48.5.
7. Two spicules from the stomodaeal walls of an undescribed species of
Lemnalia. x 1,000. Actual lengths, 0.038 and 0.0532 mm., respectively.
8. A spicule from the stomodasal walls of Paralemnalia thrysoides
(Ehrbg.) Kiikenthal. X 1,000. Actual length, 0.0513 mm.
245
Light: Notp:s on Philippine Alcyonaria.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
PLATE I. LEMNALIOIDES KiJKEiMTHALI GEN. ET SP. NOV. THE COLONY, NATURAL SIZE.
NOTES ON JAPANESE LEPIDOPTERA AND THEIR LARV^: PART 1
By A. E. WiLEMAN
{Manila, P. I.)
Three colored plates
RHOPALOCERA
While residing in Japan, I took a keen interest in the varied and curious forms of lepidopterous larvae met with, an interest further stimulated by the perusal of works such as those of Owen Wilson and of Buckler.
With the exception of Nawa, Nagano, Matsumura, Miyake, and Sasaki, who have published articles in the Insect World (Konchu Sekai) and in other periodicals, few Japanese authors have devoted much attention to describing and figuring the larvse of Japanese Lepidoptera which are comparatively unknown to science, and I felt that a wide and almost inexhaustible field of labor existed in this particular branch of entomological research. Therefore, I decided to figure the most interesting larvse met with in my collecting rambles which have extended to many parts of Japan. As I was unable to make drawings of these specimens, I engaged the services of a Japanese artist, Hisashi Kaido, in order that they might be accurately represented. In the course of two years, 1901 and 1902, while residing at Kobe and Hakodate, I accumulated 200 colored drawings, some of which will be used to illustrate this series of articles.
Hisashi Kaid5, at the time that I engaged him, had no experience in figuring larvse, but I think the general results he has attained are very satisfactory.
Apart from the pleasure which the enthusiastic lepidopterist feels in being able to identify any curious larva he may meet by referring to the plates of special works and to descriptions and figures of the various stages of butterflies and moths, he may render much valuable assistance to the specialist in classifying species, and for this reason all individual efforts are welcome in a field where the harvest is great but the laborers are few.
For the scientific classification of Rhopalocera and Heterocera not only a knowledge of structure, such as wing venation and
247
248 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
the genitalia, is necessary, but also a knowledge of the ova, larva, and pupa is required; and this is gained by tracing the life history of a species. In this respect I regret to say that my paper is incomplete as I have been unable to work out the life history of each species recorded. My aim has been merely to figure as many species of larvse as I could collect and to accompany these figures with brief descriptions which have been taken from the original drawings by Hisashi Kaido — not from the living pupa and larva. In describing larvae, I have taken the head as the first segment.
As this paper is written with the thought of its aiding Japanese and other lepidopterists who may be working upon Japanese species, I have made a special point of quoting in the synonymy references to the works of Japanese authors. In some cases, the larvse figured by me have also been previously figured either in colors, or in black and white, by Nawa and Nagano at Gifu.^
A most interesting characteristic of many lepidopterous larvae, especially among the Heterocera, is their adaptability for har- monizing in color with their environment so closely that it is difficult to detect them. This is termed protective resemblance and may be special or general. Poulton,^ has written at great length on this subject, and gives a table by which the colors of animals are classified according to their uses. As I shall have occasion to refer to this table when commenting upon the protective resemblance of certain larvae figured, more especially with reference to species of Heterocera, I reproduce the data here as Table I with the consent of the publishers.
In order to obviate confusion I will say that Tokio, or Tokyo, the capital of the Japanese Empire, which in Japanese is called Dai Nihon Teikoku, is situated on an island equally well-known
"" Insect World {Konchu Sekai) (1897-1913), 1-16. Other Japanese authors to whom I have referred in the course of this paper are the following :
Matsumura, Catalogus Insectorum Japonicum (sic.) (1905), 1 (no plates); and Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Thousand Insects of Japan) (1907), 4; (1909), supplement 1; (1910), supplement 2; (1911), supplement 3; all of these deal with Japanese Lepidoptera in the Japanese language, accom- panied by many uncolored plates.
Miyajima, Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Japanese Butterflies) (1904), with many colored plates.
Various details occurring in these works concerning the larvse of the species figured by me and their food plants, the times of appearance, and geographical distribution of the imago have been incorporated in my notes.
^ The Colours of Animals. 2d ed. London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co. Ltd. (1890), i-xiii + 1-360.
Oversized Foldout
IX, D. 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 249
by any one of the three names of Hondo, Honto, or Honshu. Dai Nihon Teikoku is translated as the Japanese Empire or Great Japanese Empire, in the same way as the British Isles are known as Great Britain.
Matsumura ^ calls the island on which the capital is situated Honto, and later ^ he calls it Honshu. For the sake of uniformity, I have adopted the name he uses in his latest work. Yezo he calls Hokkaido, as the name Yezo is but little used by modern Japanese. There will be no confusion with regard to the two large islands of Kyushu and Shikoku which are only known by these names.
The following are the names, given in their geographical order, of the chain of most important islands under Japanese rule, extending from Saghalien to Formosa.
Karafu-to (Saghalien), southern portion only Japanese.
Chishima-to (Kurile Islands).
Hokkaido (Yezo).
Hondo, Honto, or Honshu, on which the capital, Tokyo, and the ports of
Yokohama and Kobe are situated. Shikoku.
Kyushu (Kiushiu). Tanegashima. Yakushima.
Shichi-to (Linschoten Islands or Cecilia Archipelago). Ryukyu-to (Loochoo Islands), consisting of the Hokubu-to (northern group),
Chubu-to (central group), and Nambu-to (southern group). The two
latter groups are also known, respectively, as the Sannan and Miyako
Islands. Ogasawara-jima (Bonin Islands), to the east of Formosa. Taiwan (Formosa).
The Japanese names of the food plants of larvae described in this series of articles were mostly derived from my Japanese collector, Uehara Magoichi, who is now dead. He collected many of the larvae for me, and although not a trained botanist he had a good working knowledge of Japanese flowering plants acquired during an experience of many years as a collector of Lepidoptera. I referred for the Latin names of these food plants to a book by Matsumura.^ In cases of doubt, I have occasionally queried the Japanese or Latin name of the food plant.
^ Catalogus Insectorum Japonicum (sic.) (1905).
* Thousand Insects of Japan (Nihon Senchu Dzukai) (1907-1911).
^ Shokubutsu Mei-i. Enumeration of selected Scientific names of both Native and Foreign Plants with Romanized Japanese names and in many cases Chinese Characters (1906).
250 The Philippine Jommal of Science 1914
RHOPALOCERA
PAPILIONID^
Genus PAPILIO Doubleday
Papilio Doubleday, Gen. Diurn. Lep. (1846), 1, 5.
Papilio xuthus Linnaeus.
PI. I, figs. 1-2, young larvae; fig. 3, full-grown larva; fig. 4, food plant.
Japanese name, ageha.
Papilio xuthus LiNN., Syst. Nat. (1767), 1, 2, 751; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon. (1886), 2, PI. 1, fig. 2 b, c?; Tokyo Zool. Mag. [Tokyo Dobut- sugaku Zasshi (Jap.)] (May 15, 1891), 3, No. 31, PI. 2, fig. 1, imago, xuthulus; fig. 2, imago, xuthus; fig. 3, larva 4th stage; fig. 4, larva 5th stage; fig. 5, pupa; Nawa, Insect World [Konchii Sekai (Jap.)] (1898), 2, 6, PI. I, transf.; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1894), 2, 514; Matsumura, Jap. Injurious Insects [Nihon Gaichuhen (Jap.)] (1899), 108, PI. 46, fig. 1, imago; fig. 2, larva; Miyajima, Jap. Butterf. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 72, PI. I, fig. 1, c?; Dyar, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 939, fig. 4, larva; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, No. 1, 1; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 62, PI. 63, fig. 1, 5; Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 11, PI. 6a; Jordan, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 48.
Papilio xuthulus Brem., Bull. Acad. Petr. (1861), 3, 463 (spring form) ; Brem., Lep. Ost.-Sib. (1864), 4, PI. I, fig. 2; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1886), PI. I, fig. 2a; Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 11, PI. 6a.
Papilio xanthus LiNN., Rothsch. Nov. Zool. (1895), 2, 278; Moore, Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 45. (=P. xuthus Linn.)
The full-grown larva figured (Plate I, fig. 3) was taken in September, 1900, at Kobe, Settsu Province, on karatachi {^gle sepiaria DC). No record was kept of the date upon which the imago emerged from the pupa resulting from this larva, but I have bred the species on many occasions from similar larvse taken chiefly on .^gle sepiaria on which it is very common ; therefore, I am well acquainted with it. The karatachi shrub is much used in the environs of Tokyo for ornamental hedges, and is very useful for that purpose because of its spines. I have also found the larva feeding on inu-zansho (Xanthoxylon schinnifolium S. and Z.), which is also mentioned by Pryer as a food plant. Leech,^ quoting Graeser, states that the larva feeds on Phellodendron amurense (Japanese name, kiwada) in Amurland, that it is greenish black, with irregular milk-white
'^ Berl ent Zeitschr. (1888), 32, 62.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 251
spots and bands, and that when sitting on the upper side of a leaf it resembles a bird-dropping. It is very true, as may be observed from the figures given of the young larvse (Plate I, figs. 1 and 2), that they have this peculiar resemblance, but it only lasts up to the fourth molt, after which the larva assumes the green color which marks the last, or adult, stage. In the adult stage it closely resembles the larva of P. demetrius Cramer.
This is an instance where the larva is first protected during the greater part of its existence by special protective resemblance and in its last stage by general protective resemblance, both apparently of a constant nature.
Up to the fourth molt it is evidently protected against enemies by special resemblance as the appearance of a bird-dropping is copied in outline and color as a protection against enemies. In its last stage it is protected by general resemblance as its green color harmonizes with the total artistic effect of its environment ; namely, the foliage of the karatachi. (Table I, 1, procryptic colors, a andb).
Matsumura also gives the orange tree, mikan {Citrus nobilis Lour.), as a food plant.
The larva of Papilio helenus Linn., judging from the figure of the young larva by Kershaw,^ seems to enjoy a similar protective resemblance, both the young and full-grown larvae being somewhat like those of P. xuthus, Nawa ^ gives colored figures of the metamorphoses of P. xuthus and of an ichneumon fly parasitic on it, and represents the larva with two yellowish osmeteria, or nuchal horns, exserted from the junction of the head and the first thoracic segment. These give oflf a strong odor, and probably have an intimidating effect on enemies.
In the Tokyo Zoological Magazine (Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi), there is a good uncolored plate showing the metamor- phoses of P. xuthus, but no allusion is made to this plate in the succeeding Japanese text, and the author, therefore, cannot be named. Seitz states that
the larva is very similar to that of P. hianor Cramer; bright green; a grey, white-marked, transverse band on the third, fifth, and twelfth somites, a similar oblique band over the seventh and eighth segments; above the pro- legs large, rounded, white spots. From June to November it is found on ^gle sepiaria and various fruit trees. The chrysalis is green, rarely brown; the anterior abdominal segments laterally somewhat swollen and carinate, caputal processes strongly developed; an obtuse, somewhat thorn- like process on thorax.
'Butterflies of Hongkong (1907), PI. 4a, fig. 7. 'Insect World (1898), 2, 6, PI. I.
252 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Matsumura records P. xuthus from Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, Shikoku, and Kyushu, the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu), Formosa, Ogasawara (Bonin Islands), Korea, China, Manchuria, and Amurland. He ^ also gives a short life history, accompanied by figures of the imago and larva. He says that there are three broods in the year and that it hibernates in the pupal stage. The nuchal horns of the larva are tolerably long, and the imago emerges in May or June. He refers here, no doubt, to typical P. xuthus which emerges in early summer. In December, 1912, I discovered its existence at an altitude of 2,800 meters (8,300 feet) in Luzon, at Pauai (Haight's Place), Benguet subprovince, where I collected 5 specimens. Semper does not record this species from the Philippines, so that it must be regarded as new to the fauna of these Islands. It is interesting to discover that it occurs so far south in the Indo-Malayan subregion at such an altitude. Jordan remarks that this mainly Palsearctic species extends southward to Upper Burma and also occurs in Formosa, the Bonin Islands, and Guam and that Fruhstorfer has based upon a single male from Formosa the subspecies koxinga. I have myself taken P. xuthus in the Formosan mountains, and have observed it in the Japanese Islands from March to August and occasionally in September and October. P. xitthulus, which is the spring brood, appears first, coming out in March, followed in early summer by P. xuthus.
In Hokkaido (Yezo), in the extreme north of Japan, where the winter is long and severe, lasting until April, the spring form, P. xuthulus, does not emerge until June and the summer form, P. xuthus, follows in September, which is much later than in the southern latitudes of Japan with a warmer climate.
Subgenus Cosmodesmus Haase
Cosmodesmus Haase, Bibl. Zool. Heft. (1892), 8, 15; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 14.
Papilio (Cosmodesmus) sarpedon Linnaeus.
PL I, fig. 5, young larva; fig. 6, full-grown larva; fig. 7, pupa; fig. 8, food plant.
Japanese names, aosuji-ageha and kuro-taimaL
Papilio sarpedon Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. (1767), 1, 2,747; Moore, Cat. Lep. Mus. E. I. C. (1857), 1, 113, PL 3, fig. 8, larva; (Dalchina), Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 12, PL 471, figs. 1, la-lc, larva and pupa; imago, d* ?; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1886), 5, PL 1, fig. 9; Tokyo Zool. Mag, [Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi (Jap.)] (Aug. 15, 1891), 3, No. 34,
'Matsumura, Jap. Injurious Insects [Nihon Gaichuhen (Jap.)] (1899), 108, PL 46, fig. 1, imago; fig. 2, larva.
IX, D. 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 253
PL 5, fig. 1, c?; fig. 2, ?; fig. 3, larva first stage; fig. 4, larva fifth stage; fig. 5, pupa; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892- 1894), 2, 524; MACKINNON and NiCEViLLE, Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. (1898), 11, PL W, figs. 26a, b, pupa; Scott, AustraL Lep. Mus. Austral. (1898), 2, PL 17; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 79, PL V, fig. 2, c?; Dyar, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 937, fig. 1, larva; Matsumura, Cat. Insect. Jap. (1905), 3, No. 14; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 65, PL 64, fig. 1, ?; KERSHAViT, Butterfl. Hongkong (1907), 113, PL 13, fig. 5; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 15, PL 8c; Jordan, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 94.
Dalchina teredon Felder, Verh. ZooL-bot. Ges. Wien (1864), 14, 305; Moore (Dalchina), Lep. Ceyl. (1881), 1, 143, PL 62, figs. 1, la-lb, (^ ?, larva and pupa; Moore (Dalchina) , Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 14, PL 472, figs. 1, la-lc, larva and pupa, <^ ?. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. (1890), 5, 364.
Papilio sarpedon Davidson and Aitken, nee Linn. (= teredon), Journ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. (1890), 5, 364.
The full-grown larva figured (Plate I, fig. 6) was taken in September, 1900, at Yoshino, Yamato Province, on tabu-no-ki (Machilus thunbergii S. and Z.), a species of the Lauracese. It pupated on September 11, 1900, and a female specimen emerged on May 1, 1901. A male specimen was bred from a similar larva on May 3, 1901. These two specimens are probably refer- able to P. sarpedonides Fruhst., but as they are not before me I am unable to say whether they should be assigned to the spring form, P. sarpedonides, or the summer form, P. nipponits. Moore describes the larva and pupa of P. sarpedon as follows.^*^
Larva, — "Smooth, thickened from the second to the 5th segment, and thence decreasing to the end; with two short subdorsal fleshy spines on the 4th segment, between which ia a transverse pale yellow line, two shorter spines also on the second and third, and two on the anal segment; color, green, with a longitudinal posterior lateral and lower pale yellowish line."
Pupa. — "Conical, truncated in front; thorax produced into a lengthened obtusely pointed frontal process."
The spines on segments 2 and 3 are not well represented in my figure of the adult larva (Plate I, fig. 6).
Kershaw states that both larva and pupa are very much like those of P. eurypilus Linn, and that, in Hongkong, the larva feeds on citrus plants and on Laurus camphora.
Mackinnon and Niceville^^ figure the pupa, but not having
"Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 12, PL 471, figs. 1, la-lc, larva and pupa.
^' Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. (1898), 11, PL W, figs. 26 a, b, pupa.
254 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
access to the volume in which the illustration occurs I have been unable to examine their figures. Seitz remarks ^^ that —
the larva is green, with two pointed tubercles anteriorly and at the anus, bearing also two small points on each side of the third and fifth segments, on Aurantiaceae. Dorsal thoracical projection of the pupa strongly- acuminate.
Jordan states ^^ that —
the young larva is black or dark green, with numerous spines, of which those on the meta thorax are long and bristly; when full grown green, beneath lighter, with a pair of short spines on each of the three thoracic segments and on the last segment; on the metathorax a yellow transverse band and from the metathorax to the anal segment a yellowish stripe above the legs; on Machilus odoratissima, Geijera salicifoUa, Litsaea, Alseodaphne, etc., and especially Camphora officinalis, where this tree has been imported. Pupa green, the thoracic horn slenderer, more pointed and straighter than in the allied species, the lateral ridges extending downwards from the horn straight, between this carina and the frontal one a very slight, somewhat curved vertical ridge.
Pryer states that the larva feeds on the young leaves of the evergreen, Machilus thunbergii, and that its color resembles very closely that of the young green leaves of this tree.
Butler ^* records P. teredon Feld., from Nikko, Central Japan ; this is the Ceylon form of the species, and according to Moore's figure of the imago only differs from typical P. sarpedon in the narrower band of the forewing and in having the anal angle of secondaries more produced.
Moore describes the larva of P. teredon as follows:
Larva smooth, green, with a paler lower lateral line, and a dorsal band ending in a lateral tubercular spot on fourth segment; a pair of short tuber- cles on front and anal segment. Pupa green, with lateral and dorsal longi- tudinal yellowish streaks. Feeds on Cinnamomeum [sic].
Davidson and Aitken describe the larva of teredon as follows :
Larva, — "Very like that of agamemnon but prettier, being of a soft dark green, inclining to emerald and passing into a pale bluish on the last segment and the underparts."
Pupa, — **Easily distinguished from that of agamemnon by one mark, viz., the horn is not straight but curves slightly backwards."
In the Tokyo Zoological Magazine (Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi), already cited, there is a good uncolored plate showing the metamorphoses of P. sarpedon, but no allusion is made to
"Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 15.
''Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 94.
"Ann. & Mag. Nat Hist (1881), V, 7, 133.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 255
this plate in the succeeding Japanese text and the author, there- fore, cannot be named. He gives black and white figures of the larva in its first and fifth stages, of the pupa, and of the imago.
Matsumura records P. sarpedon from Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, Shikoku, Kyushu, and Formosa. Miyajima records it also from the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu), and states that it feeds upon inu-gusu, Inu-gusu as well as shiro-gusuy are merely other Japanese names for tabu-no-ki, previously referred to as the food plant on which I bred the larva ; that is, Machilus thunbergii. The imago flies from May to September. Matsumura also gives Machilus japonica S. and Z. {ao-gashi) as a food plant.
Jordan states ^^ that ''sarpedon occurs from China and South Japan to the Solomon Islands in numerous geographical forms."
The forms which are geographically connected with China, Japan, and the Philippines are as follows :
Papilio nipponus Fruhst. (= morius Fruhst.), Seitz, 1, PI. 8c (described as sarpedon), from Japan and the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Papilio sarpedonides Fruhst., f. vern., spring form from Japan.
Papilio nipponus is the Japanese race separated into spring and summer forms which differ in the bands of the forewing being broad in sarpedo- nides and narrower in nipponus.
Papilio connectens Fruhst., from Formosa and Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Papilio semifasciatus Honr., from southeastern, central, and western China.
Papilio sarpedon Linn., typical ( = demophon Meerb. nee. Linn. ; demophoon Shaw; luctatius Fruhst.; hagus Fruhst.; colus Fruhst.); (Seitz, 9, pi. 44d) ; distributed from Hainan, Tonkin, and North India to the Philip- pines and Lombok. In the broad-banded specimens the median and submedian veins are more or less white inside the band of the forewing. In the summer specimens of the northern districts, f . aest. melas Fruhst. (= demophoon Shaw), the band is narrower and the veins are black.
Subgenus Pharmacophagus Haase
Pharmacophagus Haase, Bibl. Zool. Heft (1892), 8, 15; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 8.
Papilio (Pharmacophagus) alcinous Klug.
PI. II, fig. 12, full-grown larva; fig. 13, dorsal aspect of segment; figs. 14-16, pupa.
Japanese names, jako-ageha, yama-joro.
Papilio alcinous Klug, Neue Schmett. (1836), 1, PI. 1, figs. 1-4; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1886), 4, PL 3, fig. 3, 2; Tokyo Zool. Mag. [Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi (Jap.)] (Aug. 15, 1891), 3, No. 34, PI. 4, fig. 1, imago, <S\ fig. 2, imago, ?; fig. 3, larva 5th stage; fig. 4, pupa; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1894), 2, 539; Dyar, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 938, fig. 2, larva; Matsumura, Cat. Insect.
'' Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 95.
256 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Jap. (1905), 1, 2, No. 8; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu-Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 60, PI. 62, fig. 2, 5; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 9, PI. 2 a, d* 5; 2 b, c? ?, f. aest.; Jordan, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo- austral. (June 20, 1910), 9, 33; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Cho-rui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 76, PI. 3, fig. 2, ?; 71 (woodcut), ova, fig. 1; larva, fig. 2; pupa, fig. 3.
The pupa figured (Plate II, figs. 14-16) was taken at Kobe, Settsu Province, Honshu, in July, 1901, and a male specimen of P. alcinous emerged from it, but no record was kept of the date. The larva figured (Plate II, fig. 12) was taken while it was crawling upon the ground, at the same locality, in August, 1901, and pupated, but the imago failed to emerge. The pupa taken in July, 1901, was similar in all respects to the one result- ing from the larva of August, 1901, and I am satisfied that the two pupae are of the same species. I have also compared the figures of my pupa with that shown by Miyajima.^^ He gives a good woodcut in which the larva, pupa, and ova of P. alcinous Klug are figured, together with the food plant, and states that the larva feeds upon the following plants: Uma-no-suzukusa {Aristolockia debilis S. and Z.) ; ikema (Cynanchum caudatum Maxim.) ; kaga4mo, scientific name unknown; ao-tsuzura (Coc- cuius thunbergii DC), also known as tsuzura-fuji. The larva figured by him also agrees with my original figure (Plate II, fig. 12), so that, although no imago ever developed from my larva, I have no hesitation in referring it to P. alcinous. Nawa ^^ also gives a black and white figure of the pupa which agrees with my figures as to form, but he does not give one of the larva. In the Tokyo Zoological Magazine [Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi (Jap.)], there is a good uncolored plate showing the metamorphoses of P. alcinous, but no allusion is made to this plate in the succeeding Japanese text and, therefore, the author cannot be named.
Pryer states that the larva feeds on Cocculus thunbergii DC, and resembles a partially ripe mulberry and that the pupa is most beautifully sculptured. The figures given (Plate II, figs. 14-16) fully bear out his description of the pupa which is yellowish in color and most delicately chiseled. Jordan describes the larva as follows :
Larva olive-brown, with numerous dark, light-edged spots; on the 6th and 7th segments a very broad red-white oblique girth, which is dorsally interrupted or strongly constricted; the tips of the tubercles reddish, the upper lateral projections of the pro thorax pale red with dark tips.
"Japanese Butterflies (1904), 71.
"Insect World (Konchu Sekai) (1907), 11. 559.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 257
Dyar ^^ remarks that —
the larva of Papilio alcinous Klug is allied to the American philenoVf and retains in the last stage the peculiar black and white coloration, resembling bird excrement, so characteristic of most all young Papilios.
Seitz and Jordan ^^ give many forms of the P. alcinous group which is distributed from Japan to western China and Tonkin. Seitz remarks that 'T. alcinous Klug is a black, geographically variable, Papilio which inhabits the Pacific, district of the Palsearctic region" and that "it is almost exclusively Palaearctic, only a few forms entering the most northern districts of the Oriental Region." The forms given by them are quoted for convenience of reference, although only three of them inhabit Japan proper; the rest are mostly Chinese.
Papilio alcinous Klug (Seitz, 1, 9, PI. 2a, 2b) (= spathatus Butl., hssma-
tostictus Butl.), from Japan. Papilio nagasakii Fruhst. (Seitz, 1, PI. 2a, (? ?; PI. 2b, c? ?, f. aest), from
southern Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, and Kyushu. Papilio confusus Rothsch. (Seitz, 1, PI. 2c, c? ?), from China, southward to
Yunnan. Papilio plutonius Oberth. (Seitz, 1, PI. 2c, c? ?), from central China and
Tibet. Papilio dsemonius Alpher. (= fatuus Rothsch.), from Ta-tsien-lu, western
China and Tibet. Papilio impediens Rothsch. (Seitz, 1, PI. 3a), from Ta-tsien-lu, western
China. Papilio mencius Feld. (Seitz, 1 , PI. 2b, c? 2) , from central and southeastern
China. Papilio bradanus Fruhst. (= intermedia Oberth.) (Seitz, 9, 33), from the
Sannan group (Ishigaki-Shima, Loochoo Islands). Papilio decora Oberth. ab. (Seitz, 9, 33), locality not given. Papilio loochooanus Rothsch. (Seitz, 9, PL 19c, cT; r. 1, PI. Ic, 9, underside),
from the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu). Papilio mansonensis Fruhst. (= mausonensis Fruhst.) (Seitz, 9, 33) ; from
Formosa, eastern and central China (westward to Chang-yang), and
Tonkin; the male is not distinguishable from the species from western
China, P. confusus, but the female is as pale as in P. loochooanus.
According to Matsumura, P. alcinous occurs in Honshu, Shi- koku, Kyushu, and the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu) ; also, in Korea and China. It flies from March to September in two broods, spring and summer, both of which are figured by Seitz.
The following description of a Papilio larva was entered in my notebook on May 2, 1908. The larva was taken by me at Kanshirei, in southern Formosa, but unfortunately never pupated,
" Dyar, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 938, fig. 2, larva. " Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 9, and Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 33.
258 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9h
so that no imago emerged for identification. From its resem- blance to the larva of P. alcinous Klug, I thought it would probably turn out to be the larva of a species closely allied to P. alcinous which was flying at Kanshirei at an altitude of 300 meters (1,000 feet). I captured several specimens of this species which I believe is referable to P. febanus Fruhst.^^
Description. — White lateral stripe on side of segment 7 not quite meeting on the dorsum and ending in fleshy, white tubercles on dorsum ; lateral, white, fleshy tubercles on segment 10 and two on dorsum of segment 10 ; lateral white tubercles also on segment 6, from which segment the lateral white band on the side of segment 7 commences, so that there is an oblique white band on segments 6, 7, not quite meeting on the dorsum; all other tubercles claret colored, red tipped; chocolate-colored diamond pattern mediodorsal stripe on dorsum; three rows of tubercles: subdorsal, subspiracular, and suprapedal.
A comparison of the foregoing description with my figure of the larva of Japanese P. alcinous (Plate II, fig. 12) shows a striking resemblance.
According to Seitz, the Japanese forms of P. alcinous are not taken in Formosa, and I have never taken them myself at Kanshirei, although of course they may possibly occur there. The only form of P. alcinous which is at present known to occur in Formosa is P. mansonensis Fruhst., so that if my larva described above be not that of the Japanese P. alcinous it may belong either to P. febanus Fruhst. or P. alcinous var. mansonensis Fruhst.
I may mention that Kanshirei is the Japanese pronunciation of the Chinese ideographs with which Koannania is written and that it was at Koannania that Matsumura took his type of P. koannania (= febanus Fruhst.).
SATYRID^
Genus NEOPE Butler
Neope Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1867), III, 19, 166; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 89; Fruhst, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 324.
Neope goschkevitschii Menetries.
PI. II, fig. 7, larva; figs. 8-9, dorsal aspect of segments; fig. 10, head; fig. 11, food plant. Japanese name, kimadara-hikage.
=" Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 33.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 259
Lasiommata goschkevitschii Men., Cat. Mus. Petr. (1855), 2, 121, PI. 10, fig. 4; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 52; Nagano, Nawa's Insect World [Konchu Sekai (Jap.)] (August 15, 1910), 14, 418, PI. 17, figs. 1-6, transf.; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (June, 1908), 1, 90, PI. 33c, c? $; Fruhst., Seitz*s Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 324.
Lasiommata gaschkevitschii Felder, Wien, ent. Mon. (1862), 6, 28; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PL 9, fig. 11; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 109; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 101, PI. 72, fig. 8, 2; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 150, PI. 16, fig. 8.
Neope niphonica Butl., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1881), V, 7, 133.
Neope japonica Butl. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1867), III, 19, 167.
The larva figured (Plate II, fig. 7) was taken in July, 1901, at Yoshino, Yamato Province, Honshu, on bamboo grass, sasa- gusa ( ? Lophatherum elatum Zoll.) . The imago failed to emerge from the pupa resulting from this larva. Nagano gives lengthy descriptions of the metamorphoses of this species including a figure of the larva in his plate which agrees with my colored figure. I am unable to follow the written description of his larva with accuracy as it is in technical Japanese language, and have therefore depended only on his figure for identification. I think, however, that there can be no doubt that my larva is identical with that of N. goschkevitschii, figured by Nagano on a species of bamboo.
The following description is taken from my original figure.
Larva. — Length, 32 millimeters. Grayish brown with a yellow tinge ; faint longitudinal mediodorsal dark lines ; subdorsal dark spots and crosses; midlateral longitudinal dark line; series of dark spiracular blotches; yellowish longitudinal subspiracular stripe.
Matsumura records this species from the Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, Kyushu, and Shikoku, where it is very common. I have captured it in all those islands from April to August.
Fruhstorfer 2^ remarks that 'W. goschkevitschii reaches the farthest north and inhabits all the islands from Hokkaido (Yezo) to Formosa" and gives the following races :
Neope japonica Butler, described from Hakodate, Hokkaido (Yezo). Neope watanahei Mats., from Formosa (Hoppo).
Fruhstorfer does not mention N. niphonica Butl. which was described in 1881 from Nikko, Honshu.
''Seitz^s Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 324.
124685 5
260 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Genus LETHE Hubner
Lethe Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 56; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 82; Fruhst, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 321.
Subgenus Kirrodesa Moore
Kirrodesa Moore, Lep. Ind. (1892), 1, 237.
Lethe (Kirrodesa) siceKs Hewitson.
PI. II, fig. 1, larva; fig. 2, head; figs. 3-4, dorsal aspect of segments; fig. 5, pupa; fig. 6, food plant.
Japanese name, hikage-cho.
Debis sicelis Hewitson, Exot. Butterfl. (1862), 3, PL 1, fig. 3.
Lethe sicelis Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PI. 9, fig. 10; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 36; Matsumura, Cat. Insect, Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 113; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)], 4, 98, PI. 72, fig. 1, $; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 84, PL 31b; Nagano, Nawa's Insect World [Konchu Sekai (Jap.)] (1910), 14, 590, PL 24, figs. 1-12, transf.; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)], (1904), 146, PL 16, fig. 3; Fruhst., Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, ^22.
The larva figured (Plate II, fig. 1) was taken in July, 1901, at Kobe, Settsu Province, on bamboo grass, sasa-gicsa, (? Lophatherum elatum ZolL). From this an imago emerged, but no record was kept of the date of emergence nor of the sex. A second larva was taken by me, also on sasa, on September 9, 1900; this pupated on September 20, and emerged on Sep- tember 25, 1900. The pupa figured is the pupa of the second larva. I have also taken the larva of this species on kaya (? Torreya nucifera S. and Z.), a kind of reed grass, and on tsubana ( ? Imperata arundinacea Cyr.) , a species of grass. Two males and one female were bred by me at Kobe from the larvse, June 7 and 8, 1901.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva. — Length, 39 millimeters. Yellowish green; green me- diodorsal longitudinal stripe edged with yellow lines on each side; yellow midlateral and whitish suprapedal longitudinal stripes; horns of head pink tipped.
Pupa. — Light green with two rows of four white spots on the dorsum. Suspended by tail from food plant.
Pryer remarks that he took the larva of L. sicelis and believes that it feeds on bamboo grass. Matsumura records the species from Honshu, Shikoku, and Kyushu, but not from Hokkaido (Yezo), where it does not seem to occur. Miyajima gives its season of flight as being from July to August, but I have taken it in various localities in the islands enumerated by Matsumura
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 261
from May to September. Pryer says that it goes only a short distance up the mountains, where it is replaced by L. diana Butler. However, I have taken specimens up to an altitude of from 300 to 500 meters (1,000 to 1,500 feet) on the mountains of Omine-san and Odai-san in Yamato Province, Honshu. In Tosa Province, Shikoku Island, it occurs in May, and I have taken it at Nikko, Honshu, in the same nu)nth at an elevation of about 500 meters (1,500 feet).
Fruhstorf er ^2 describes a distinct race of L. sicelis from Kyushu, which he names vanelia. It is characterized by the absence of the gray- or blue-violet bordering to the eyespots on the underside of the hind wing which is always present in examples from Hondo (Honshu) and which Hewitson and Seitz ^^ distinctly figure.
Subgenus Rangbia Moore
Lethe Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 56; Seitz, Macrolep. of
the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 82. Ranghia MoORE, Lep. Ind. (1890-1892), 1, 232; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322.
Lethe (Rangbia) diana Butler.
PL III, fig. 1, larva; fig. 2, head; figs. 3-4, dorsal aspect of segments; figs. 5-6, pupa; fig. 7, food plant.
Japanese name, kuro-hikage.
Debis diana Butler, Journ. Linn. So«.. Zool. (1866), 9, 55; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PI. 9, fig. 12; Oberthur, ]£tud. d'Entom. (1881), 6, 16, PI. 7, fig. 2; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 28; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 112; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 108, PL 73, fig. 10, 2; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 84, PI. 31a; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322; Miya- JIMA, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 147, PI. 16, fig. 4.
Lethe whitelyi BuTLER, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1867), III, 20, 403, PI. 9, fig. 8.
Lethe consanguis Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1881), V, 7, 133.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 1) was taken on June 3, 1902, at Hakodate, Oshima Province, Hokkaido (Yezo), on bam- boo grass, sasa-gusa (? Lophatherum elatum ZolL). It pupated on June 15, 1902, and a female imago emerged on July 3, 1902. A male and female emerged from similar larvse on June 27 and July 2, 1902.
The f ollow^ing descriptions are taken from my original figures.
'' Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322. '' Seitz^s Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 84, PI. 31b.
262 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Larva, — Length, 27 millimeters. Pinkish gray; dark medio- dorsal pattern; spiracles black; whitish suprapedal longitudinal line.
Pupa. — Bronze-brown with lighter reflections and black dots ; two short white lines on the dorsum extending one-third way from tail; mediodorsal white line on dorsum extending half way from tail and continuing black ; suspended by the tail from the food plant.
Matsumura records this species from Hokkaido (Yezo), Hon- shu, Shikoku, and Kyushu ; also, from Korea and China. I have taken it from May to August, and have noticed that in Honshu and Kyushu it appears to be a mountain butterfly, while in Hok- kaido it inhabits the plains. As far as I am aware, no figure or description of the larva has been published before.
Fruhstorf er 2* lists the following forms of L. diana.
Lethe diana Butl., described from Hakodate, Hokkaido (Yezo).
Lethe consanguis Butl., aberration from Nikko, Hondo (Honshu).
Lethe celeja Fruhst., subspecies, normal form (= figure given in Seitz, 1,
PL 31a), from Hondo (Honshu). Lethe whitelyi Butl., from Nagasaki, Kyushu. Lethe fixseni Butl., subspecies from Korea.
*^Diana is the only Lethe which bears a long hair tuft on the underside of the forewing, placed below the submedian.^*
Subgenus Tansima Moore
Lethe Hubner, Verz bek. Schmett. (1827), 56; Seitz, Macrolep. of
the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 82. Tansima MoORE, Lep. Ind. (1890-1892), 1, 271.
Lethe (Tansima) marginalis Motschulsky.
PL III, fig. 17, larva; fig. 18, head; fig. 19, dorsal aspect of segment; fig. 20, food plant; figs. 21-22, pupa.
Japanese name, kuro-hikage-modoki.
Satyrus marginalis Motschulsky, fitud. d'Entom. (1860), 9, 29; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 25; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (June 23, 1908), 1, 86, PL 31d, d' 2; MiYAJiMA, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Ch5rui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 147, PL 16, fig. 5.
Lasiommata maacki Bremer, Bull. Acad. Petr. (1861), 3, 468; Brem., Lep. Ost.-Sib. (1864), 22, PL 3, fig. 3; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. Ill; (Lethe), Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 101, PL 72, fig. 7, $.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 17) was taken in June, 1901, at Yoshino, Yamato Province, on sitsuki, a species of grass (? Miscanthus sinensis Anders.), and a female imago emerged from the pupa resulting from this larva on June 23, 1901.
'* Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 263
Three males also emerged on July 6 and 11, 1901, from other larvae taken about the same time.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva. — Length, 48 millimeters. Yellowish green; horns on head pink tinged; mediodorsal longitudinal dark green stripe; subdorsal midlateral supraspiracular longitudinal green stripes; whitish longitudinal suprapedal stripe.
Pupa, — Yellowish green; three darker lines on dorsum; wing cases edged with yellow. Suspended from food plant by tail.
Matsumura records the species from Hokkaido (Yezo) and Honshu and also from Formosa, Korea, China, and eastern Siberia (Ussuri and Amurland). I have taken the imago in Yamato Province, Honshu, and also in lyo Province, Shikoku. It appears to be a mountain species except in Hokkaido, where it inhabits the plains. It flies in July and August.
Subgenus Harima Moore
Lethe Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 56.
Harima MooRE, Lep. Ind. (1892), 1, 299 (type, callipteris Butl.). Sinchula Moore, Lep. Ind. (1892), 1, 275; Fruhstorper, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 313.
Lethe (Harima) callipteris Butler.
PI. Ill, figs. 23-24, dorsal aspect of segments ; fig. 25, head ; fig. 26, larva ; figs. 27-28, pupa; fig. 29, food plant.
Japanese name, hime-kimadara-hikage,
Neope callipteris Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1877), IV, 19, 92; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PI. 10, fig. 2; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 36, PI. 6, figs. 3 c^, 4 5; Miya- JIMA, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 148, PI. 16, fig. 6; Matsumura, Cat. Insect. Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 110; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 103, PI. 72, fig. 10, $; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (June 23, 1908 J, 1, 86, PL 31e.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 26), was taken in June, 1902, at Hakodate, Oshima Province, Hokkaido (Yezo), on bamboo grass, sasa-gusa (? Lophathenvm elatum ZolL). It pupated on July 4, 1912, and a female imago emerged from the pupa result- ing from it on July 19, 1902. A male emerged on August 10, 1902, from a second larva taken.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva. — Length, 35 millimeters. Bluish green; mediodorsal longitudinal green stripe edged with yellow lines ; subdorsal and midlateral longitudinal yellow stripes; white suprapedal longi- tudinal stripe; horns of head tipped with pink.
Pupa. — Bluish green; four rows of white spots on dorsum and thorax. Suspended by tail from food plant.
264 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
This species appears to be confined to the Japanese Islands. Matsumura records it from Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, and Kyushu, and I have taken it in Kyushu. It flies from July to September.
Pryer states that it is a mountain insect. This is quite true in Honshu and Kyushu Islands, as I discovered when collecting there, but at Hakodate in Hokkaido, which is a great deal farther north, it inhabits the plains as well as the mountains, like several other species, which in the more southern parts of Japan are only found in the mountains, but which in Hokkaido occur commonly in the plains; for example, Vanessa io Linn, and Lasiommata epimenides Men. I found L. callipteris especially abundant in July and August on the summit of the Raiden Toge (Raiden Pass), in Hokkaido, at an elevation of 500 meters (1,500 feet) where the vegetation mainly consisted of bamboo grass, or sasa, the food plant of the larva.
Seitz 2^ remarks :
L. callipteris has the appearance of being a small form of labyriyithea Leech, from central and western China in July, but the male is without the dentate bandlike scent organ found in that species. Callipteris has, hither- to, only been known from Japan; the specimen from which our figure is taken and which belongs to Tring Museum, England, however bears the locality "Kashmir." If that be not an error in labeling, I am inclined to regard callipteris Butl. and labyrinthea Leech, in spite of the difference in the scent organ, as being localized forms of one widely distributed species.
Genus MYCALESIS Hubner
Mycalesis Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 55; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 80; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 330.
Subgenus Sadarga Moore
Sadarga MoORE, Tr. Ent. Soc. Lond. (1880), 157.
Mycalesis (Sadarga) gotama Moore.
PI. Ill, fig. 8, larva; fig. 9 head; figs. 10-11, dorsal aspect of segments; fig. 12, food plant; figs. 13-14; pupa; figs. 15-16, pupa previous to emergence.
Japanese name, hime-janome.
Mycalesis gotama Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. G. (1857), 1, 232; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 30, PI. 9, fig. 1; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 14; Nawa, Insect World [Konchu Sekai (Jap.)] (1900), 4, 373, PI. 10, figs, transf. larva, pupa, imago, food plant; Miyajima, Jap Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 145, PI. 16, fig. 1; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, 15, No. 118; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon
"Macrolep. of the World, Fauna Pal. (1908), 1, 86.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 265
Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 99, PL 72, figs. 6 c?, 2 $; Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 81, PL 29c, c? $; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 348. Mycalesis borealis Feld. and Rogen., Reise Novara (1867), 500.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 8) was taken in July, 1901, at Yoshino, Yamato Province, Honshu, on bamboo grass, sasa-gusa ( ? Lophatherum elatum Zoll.) , and a female imago emerged from the pupa resulting from it on August 9, 1901.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva, — Length, 30 millimeters. Yellowish green ; dark green mediodorsal longitudinal line edged with yellow ; yellow subdorsal longitudinal line.
Pupa. — Green with two lines of four white spots on the dorsum; suspended by the tail from food plant; it is green for some time after pupation, and, as in the case of the pupae of many other Lepidoptera, turns brown before emergence (Plate III, figs. 15 and 16) . Three males and two females also emerged at later dates from similar larvse. There is another form of the larva which, instead of being green, is a dirty grayish brown with the dorsal and subdorsal lines dark. On May 12, 1901, I found a larva of this form at Yoshino from which an imago of gotama emerged on May 31, 1901. The color of this larva, however, may have been due to the fact that it was preparing to pupate as the larvse of many Lepidoptera change color before entering on the pupal stage.
Nawa 2^ gives a black and white figure of the larva of this species, together with its transformations. Matsumura records its occurrence in Honshu, Shikoku, Kyushu, and Ryukyu (Loochoo Islands) . I have taken it in Honshu, Kyushu, and Shikoku, from May to September. Miyajima records it from Hokkaido (Yezo) , but I have never taken it there, and Matsumura does not record it from that island. Rice is given as its food plant by Matsumura.
Fruhstorfer ^^ remarks :
M, gotama, an East Asiatic collective species, which inhabits the Jap- anese Islands from Hondo (Honshu) onwards, has spread from central and western China to Annam and Upper Assam.
He also gives the following subspecies, races, and forms which are referable to M. gotama.
Mycalesis gotama Moore, subspecies from Shanghai, China. Mycalesis borealis Feld., subspecies from China and Japan (Nagasaki, Kyushu Island).
''' Insect World (Konchu Sekai) (1900), 4, 373, PL 10.
" Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 348.
266 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Mycalesis fulginia Fruhst., form of M. borealis, from Japan (Kyushu Island).
Mycalesis seriphus Fruhst., Seitz, 1, PI. 29c, from Japan, Honshu Island.
Mycalesis madjicosa Butler, Seitz, 9, 92 d. ?; island race; described by Butler from Madjico-shima in Cat. Satyr. Brit. Mus. (1868), 135, PI. 3, fig. 10. Madjico-shima (recte ? Majiko-shima) is undoubtedly a Japanese island but I have been unable to trace its geographical posi- tion; it is probably one of the Loochoo Islands; specimens are in the Fruhstorfer collection from Oshima, one of the Loochoo Islands, and from Ishigaki-shima, which is situated in the southern or Miyako group of the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Mycalesis nanda Fruhst., subspecies from Tainan and Horisha in Formosa.
Mycalesis charaka Moore, subspecies from India, Tonkin, and Assam.
Mycalesis oculata Moore, dry season form, from Assam and Bhamo, Burma.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Drawings by Hisashi Kaido)
Plate I
Figs. 1 to 4. Papilio xuthus Linnaeus.
1 and 2y young larvae; ^, full-grown larva; 4, food plant. 5 to 8. Papilio (Cosmodesmus) sarpedon Linnaeus.
5, j'^oung larva; 6, full-grown larva; 7, pupa; 5, food plant.
Plate II
Figs. 1 to 6. Lethe (Kirrodesa) sicelis Hewitson.
1, larva; 2, head; S and ^, dorsal aspect of segments; 5, pupa; 6, food plant.
7 to 11. Neope goschkevitschii Menetries.
7, larva; 8 and P, dorsal aspect of segments; 10, head; 11, food plant.
12 to 16. Papilio (Pharmacophagits) alcinous King,
12, full-grown larva; 13, dorsal aspect of segment; lU to 16, pupa.
Plate III
Figs. 1 to 7. Lethe (Ranghia) diana Butler.
1, larva; 2, head; 3 and J^, dorsal aspect of segments; 5 and 6, pupa; 7, food plant.
8 to 16. Mycalesis (Sadarga) gotama Moore.
8, larva; 9, head; 10 and 11, dorsal aspect of segments; 12, food plant; 13 and i-4, pupa; 15 and 16, pupa previous to emergence.
17 to 22. Lethe (Tansima) marginalis Motschulsky.
17, larva; 18, head; 19, dorsal aspect of segment; 20, food plant; 21 and 22, pupa. 23 to 29. Lethe (Harima) callipteris Butler.
23 and 2^, dorsal aspect of segments; 25, head; 26, larva; 27 and 28, pupa; 29, food plant.
267
WiLEMAN : Japanese Lepidoptera,]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
PLATE 1. PAPILIO XUTHUS AND PAPILIO SARPEDON.
WiLEMAN : Japanese Lepidoptera.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
U
%
©
PLATE II. LETHE SICELIS, NEOPE 60SCHKEVITSCHII, AND PAPILIO ALCINOUS.
WiLEMAN : Japanese LEPioorTERA.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
PLATE III. LETHE DIANA, L. MARGINALIS, L. CALLIPTERIS, AND SADARGA GOTAMA.
NEUE FULGORIDEN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN: I. THEIL
Von L. Melichar
{Brilnn, Moravia)
Eine Tafel
CIXIIN^
Benna sinuata sp. nov. (Fig. 1.)
Diese Art ist durch die etwas abweichende Form der Flugel- decken gekennzeichnet. Die Fliigeldecken sind wie bei alien Benna- Arten nach hinten verbreitert. Der Apikalrand ist jedoch nicht schrag gerundet, sondern deutlich konkav, so dass die abgerundete Suturalecke starker hervortritt da auch der innere Apikalrand schwach gebuchtet ist. Die Apikalecke ist breit abgerundet. Im iibrigen treffen alle charakteristischen Merk- male dieser Gattung zu. Der Kopf, Thorax, die Unterseite und Beine blassgelb oder wachsgelb. Die Fliigeldecken schmutzig milchweiss zur Spitze und zum Schlussrand leicht gelblich. Die Adern sind gelblichweiss, zart, nur in der Mitte der Fliigeldecken und im Apikalteile braun, in den Endzellen am Apikalrande (mit Ausnahme der zweiten Apikalzelle) je ein brauner Langs- strich, zusammen 6 an der Zahl. Die stielartigen Fortsatze zu beiden Seiten des Korpers blassgelb, die erweiterte Spitze schwarz, mit aufliegendem weissen Sekret. Die Apikalrandader schwarz.
Lange s 6.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar Baker).
DERBIN^^
Syntames tubulifer sp. nov. (Fig. 2.)
Scheitel breiter als lang, von der Stirne nicht abgetrennt, die Rander gekielt, in der Mitte ein Kiel, welcher sich auf die Stirne f ortsetzt. Stirne langlich, nicht schmal, die Seiten schwach nach aussen gebogen und gekielt. Fuhler kurz, jedoch von oben sichtbar, das zweite FUhlerglied doppelt so lang wie breit, etwas keulenf ormig. Subantennalplatte f ehlt. Clypeus langlich dreieckig, in der Mitte schwach gekielt. Pronotum langer als der Scheitel, vorne schwach gerundet, hinten flach gebuchtet, mit 3 scharfen Kielen, die Seitenkiele stark nach aussen konkav, die Hinterecken des Pronotums erreichend. Schildchen breit, stark gewolbt, mit 3 parallelen Langskielen, die Seitenkiele dem
269
270 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Mittelkiel genahert. Fliigeldecken mehr als doppelt so lang wie einzeln breit, der aussere Sektor nahe der Basis gegabelt (Subcosta und Radia nach Kirkaldy), der zweite Sektor in der Mitte der Flugeldecken, der innere ungefahr hinter der Mitte der Clavusnaht gegabelt. Im Clavus eine gegabelte Ader, der Costalrand ist hinter der Mitte eine kurze Strecke fein quer- gestrichelt. Hintersehienen mit einem sehr kleinen Dome hinter der Mitte. Ein ganz besonderes Merkmal fiir diese Art sind auf jeder Seite des Bauches befindliche zwei Rohren welche wahrscheinlich Trachealrohren sind. Die erste langere Rohre befindet sich an der Grenze zwischen der Hinterbrust und des basalen Ventralsegmentes, und hat zwei ofFnungen, eine grossere vorne, eine kleinere hinten, die zweite kurzere Rohre befindet sich in der hinteren Seitenecke des 1. Ventralsegmentes und hat nur eine offnung; die Basis der Rohrchen ist schwarz, die Spitze gelb.
Der ganze Korper ist schwarz, glanzend, bloss die Bauchlappen des Pronotums, das 2. Fiihlerglied, mit Ausnahme der schwar- zen Basis, die Mittel- und Hinterbrust und die Beine schmutzig blassgelb. Im Apikalteile der Flugeldecken 13 Randmakeln (Spitzen der Endadern) am Aussenrande und eine Makel am Innenrande schmutzig weiss. Die Schenkel etwas braunlich, das Basalglied der Hintertarsen halb so lang wie die Hinterschiene, in der Mitte braunlich.
Lange ^ $ 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (2 Exemplare Baker).
Vekunta lineata sp. nov.
Blassgelblich, die Augen, eine Mackel in der Mitte des Clypeus, eine Langsbinde nahe dem Costalrande, der Schlussrand, eine Mackel auf den Seiten der Vorderbrust und die Rander der Deckschuppen schwarz. Der Scheitel ist so breit wie an der Basis, nach vorne etwas verschmalert, die gehobenen Seiten- rander mit Kornchen dicht besetzt. Der Scheitel bildet mit der Stirne eine Ecke, die Stime lang, schmal, zum Clypeus etwas verbreitert, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Fiihler kurz, das 2. Fiihlerglied ziemlich gross, globulos. Subantennalplatte fehlt. Die Kiele des Pro- und Mesonotums sehr undeutlich. Fliigel- decken langlich schmal, die Adern gelblichweiss, am Costalrande feine Kornchen und zu beiden Seiten des ausseren Clavusader eine Reihe solcher jedoch starkerer Kornchen. Der Apikalteil leicht rauchbraun. Unterseite und Beine blassgelblich.
Lange $ 5 mm., 9 6 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (2 Exemplare Baker) .
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 271
Megatropis interruptolineata sp. nov.
Strohgelb, glanzend, Fliigeldecken mit 3 schwarzen Langs- strichen und zwar: ein Strich an der Basis des Clavus in der Nahtzelle, der zweite tiefer hinten in der Mitte der Suturalzelle des Coriums und der dritte in der Mitte des Coriums zwischen dem mittleren und inneren Sektor. Im Apikalteile 4 querlie- gende Zellen. Die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet, mit dem gerundeten and gehobenen Scheitelrande eine leichte Einker- bung bildend, so dass die Abrundung keine vollstandige ist. Die Augen halbmondformig, die Fiihler tief unten eingelenkt, das 2. Fiihlerglied reicht bis zum vorderen Augenrande, ist cylin- drisch, an der Spitze eingekerbt, die Fuhlerborste distal einge- fiigt. Der obere Scheitelrand ist mit feinen Kornchen (sensible Organe) besetzt.
Lange 8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios {Baker).
Megatropis obliquefasciata sp. nov. (Fig. 3.)
Weiss, Stirne von der Seite betrachtet parabolisch vorgezogen, der Scheitelrand hinten gerundet, nach vome fast horizontal in die Wolbung der Stirne iibergehend, die Breite der Stirne vor den Augen betragt gut den dreifachen Langsdurchmesser des Auges. Vor dem Auge eine rotliche Querbinde. Augen schwarz. Fiihler lang, cylindrisch, bis iiber die Mitte der Wangen reichend, cylindrisch zur Spitze verschmalert, an der Spitze rotlich, eingekerbt, Fuhlerborste distal. Die Basis des zweiten Fuhlergliedes ist in einen gleich dicken Fortsatz nach hinten verlangert, welcher ungefahr J der Lange des 2. Fiihler- gliedes betragt. Fiihlerdecken hyalin, milchweiss, mit weissen Adem und einer braunen schragen Querbinde, welche von der Clavusspitze schrag nach hinten und aussen zum Costalrande zieht. Im Apikalteile 4 querliegende Zellen. Die Apikalzellen am Innenrande braunlich gesaumt. Flugel hyalin, mit weissen Adern. Korper und Beine blass gelblichweiss.
Lange sammt Fliigeldecke 8-9 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Leptaleocera bakeri sp. nov.
Lang gestreckt, scharlachrot, die Augen, die Deckschuppen, eine von der Basis bis zum Apikalrande reichende Langsbinde in der Mitte der Fliigeldecken und der schmale innere Rand des Apikalteiles hinter der Clavusspitze schwarz. Der Scheitel und die Stirne bilden von der Seite betrachtet einen zusammenhan- genden Bogen. Die Wangen kaum so breit wie der Querdurch-
272 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
messer des Auges. Das Auge hat die fur die Gattung charakteristische Form, in dem das vordere Ende des Auges sich verschmalert und mit dem Stirnrande parallel und bogenf ormig bis zur unteren Wangenecke herabreicht. Die Fiihler sind bei diesem Exemplare leider abgebrochen. Unterseite und Beine scharlachrot, die Schienen mehr gelblich. Diese schone Cicade ist nach der Farbung und Zeichnung, der eigentiimlichen Form der Augen leicht zu erkennen.
Lang ^ samt Flugeldecke 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar Baker).
Genus DENDROKARA novum
Eine durch die Form der Fuhleranhangsel an die Gattung Devandanda Dist. erinnernde Gattung. Der Korper ist langlich, schmal. Der Scheitel mit der Stirne von der Seite betraehtet gerundet. Scheitel dreieckig, ziemlich breit, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Augen klein, langlich oval. Clypeus ktirzer als die Stirne, gewolbt, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Die Fiihler sind in der unteren Wangenecke eingelenkt, das Basalglied langlich, flach, an die Wangen angelegt, das 2. Fuhlerglied kurz, oval Oder langlich oval, mit dem ersten Gliede einen rechten Winkel bildend, nach aussen gerichtet, an der Basis mit kurzen oder langen, oft moosartig verzweigten Appendices. Pronotum schmal, in der Mitte deutlich gekielt. Schildchen stark gewolbt, mit 3 Kielen, die Seitenkiele nach aussen konkav, dem Mittelkiel genahert. Flugeldecken lang, schmal, hinten schrag abgerundet, der innere Apikalrand hinter der Clavusspitze etwas vorgewolbt. Das Geader ist aus der Abbildung ersichtlich. Flugel etwas ktirzer als die Fltigeldecke, aber immer mehr als Zweidrittel der ganzen Lange. Beine grazil, Hinterschienen ohne Dornen.
Typ. gen.: Dendrokara monstrosa sp. nov.
Dendrokara monstrosa sp. nov. (Fig. 4.)
Die Stirne bildet mit dem Scheitel (von der Seite betraehtet) keinen einfachen Bogen, sondern der Scheitel ist hoher gewolbt und bildet mit dem Stirnbogen eine seichte Einkerbung. Der Scheitel und die Wangen mit Ausnahme einer kleinen zentralen Partie schwarz. Pronotum auf de^ Scheibe pechbraun, an den Seiten gelb. An der Basis des 2. Ftihlergliedes sind 3-4 lange, moosartig geformte schwarze Anhangsel verschiedener Lange. Das 2. Glied selbst ist langlich oval, schwarz, mit feinen weissen Warzchen besetzt, die Spitze mit einem roten Punkt, die kurze Fuhlerborste etwas distal gestellt. Schildchen schwarz, die Spitze breit gelb. Flugeldecken pechbraun, in der Mitte breit
IX, D, 3 Melickar: Neue Fulgoriden 273
gelb, und eine grosse gelbe Mackel am inneren Apikalrande hinter der Clavusspitze. Brust und Beine gelb, Hinterleib pechbraun. Diese Art ist sofort nach den eigenttimlichen Anhangseln der Fuhler zu erkennen. Die Stirnbildung erinnert an die Gattung Megalropis, aber die Augen sind nicht halbmond- f ormig, sondern rund, die Fuhler ganz abweichend.
Lange ^ 7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar Baker).
Dendrokara torva sp. nov. (Fig. 5.)
Von derselben Form und Grosse, aber der Scheitel (von der Seite betrachtet) bildet mit der Stirne einen gleichmassigen Bogen. Das 2. Fiihlerglied ist globulos mit eingeschnurrter Basis, aus welcher zwei kurze schwammartig geformte Blatter entspringen, welche das Fiihlerglied schalenformig fast ein- schliessen. Der Wangenrand und die ganze Oberseite des Kor- pers braun, glanzend, die Unterseite samt Beine gelb, der Hin- terleibsriicken pechbraun. Die Form und das Geader der FlU- geldecken genau wie bei monstrosa. Diese Art ist durch die Fuhlerbildung geniigend gekennzeichnet.
Lange $ 7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar Baker).
DELPHACIN^ Tropidocephala pMlippina sp. nov.
Weib. Scheitel so lang wie das Pronotum, nach vorne verschmalert und leicht nach unten gebogen, sowie Pronotum und Schildchen griinlichgelb oder schmutzig gelb, ohne Zeichnung. Stirne blass griinlichgelb, am unteren Ende des Mittelkieles ein brauner Fleck. Clypeus schwarzbraun, Fiihler gelb, am 2. Fiihlergliede ein schrager schwarzer Strich, die Wangen unter- halb der Fiihler schwarz, Fliigeldecken hyalin, mit blassgelb- lichen fein granulierten Adern, am Ende des mittleren Sektors ein schwarzer glanzender Hocker, der Clavus griinlichgelb, im Apikalteile zum inneren Rande eine gelblichbraune Mackel, an den Spitzen der Endnerven schwarze Punkte (2-3), und ein kleiner Punkt hinter der Mitte des Schlussrandes. Unterseite und Beine griinlichgelb.
Mannchen. Die kleineren Mannchen ebenso gezeichnet, die dunkle Farbung breitet sich mehr aus und verdrangt die griin- lichgelbe Farbung bis auf einen kleinen Saum am Schlussrande, im Apikalteile einige helle Randflecken. In der Mitte der Fliigel- decken nur ein dunkler glanzender Hocker wie beim $ .
Lange $ 2.5 mm., $ 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (Baker) .
274 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Genus BAMBUSARIA novum
Kopf samt Augen etwas schmaler als dei? Thorax. Scheitel nur wenig die Augen uberragend, vorne gerundet, die Seiten nach vorne schwach konvergierend, gekielt, in der Mitte ein deutlicher starker Langskiel, welcher sich auf die Stirne fort- setzt. Stirne langlich, viereckig, die Seiten parallel, oben und unten (Clypeusnaht) gerade, die Seiten stark gekielt, der ebenso starke Mittelkiel auf den Clypeus verlangert, dessen Seiten sowie die Wangen ebenfalls gekielt sind. Augen halb- kugelig, dicht am unteren Rande die Fuhler eingelenkt ; dieselben sind lang, das Basalglied etwas wenig langer als das 2. Fuhler- glied, zusammengedriickt kanntig, das 2. Fiihlerglied an der Basis oben mit einer glatten Platte versehen, der iibrige Teil mit kleinen Warzchen und Harchen bedeckt. Pronotum breit, hinten flach gebuchtet, mit 3 Kielen, die Seitenkiele nach vorne konvergierend. Schildchen breit, gewolbt, mit 3 Langskielen, die Seitenkiele dem Mittelkiel etwas genahert, daher nicht in der Fortsetzung der Pronotumkiele liegend, nach hinten schwach divergierend.
Mannchen. Das Pygophor ist langlich oval, der Aussenrand etwas gewulstet, in der Mitte des unteren Randes etwas erhaben. Die GrifFel gross, hornartig, aus breiter Basis zur Spitze ver- schmalert, nach aussen gebogen, mit der Spitze einander beriihrend.
Lange $ 4 mm., $ 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling {Baker).
Kommt auf Bambusrohr vor und ist demselben schadlich.
Typ. Gen.: Bambusaria pi'Cta sp. nov.
Bambusaria picta sp. nov. (Fig. 6.)
Braunlichgelb. Die Stirne, Clypeus und Wangen schwarz, die Kiele weiss; Scheitel schwarz, die Kiele weiss, die schwarze Farbung des Scheitels verlangert sich auf das Pro- und Mesono- tum, nach hinten zu beiden Seiten des hellen Mittelkieles eine Langsbinde bildend. Das Basalglied der Fuhler ist schwarz liniert, die Kanten weiss. Die Platte auf der Oberseite des 2. Fuhlergliedes weiss mit einem schwarzen Punkt. Flugeldeck- en hyalin, mit einer breiten braunen Querbinde in der Mitte und einer halbmondformigen, 2-3 hyaline Randflecken einschlies- sende Marginalbinde, am inneren Apikalrande, an den Enden der beiden ausseren Endadern spitzdreieckige Mackeln, eine kleine Mackel an der Teilungsstelle des inneren Sektors und eine solche am Schlussrande vor der Clavusspitze. Die Sektoren
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 275
sind hinter der Querbinde verdickt, pechbraun, daselbst mit feinen Kornchen besetzt. Flugel hyalin, mit pechbraunen Adern, die Vorderbrust braun, an den Seiten der Mittelbrust eine braune runde Makel, die Bauchsegmente an der Basis braun, die Rander hellgelb, Samtliche Schenkel schwarz langsliniert. Fliigeldecken hyalin, hinten abgerundet, der aussere und innere Sektor hinter der Mitte gegabelt, die Gabelaste durch eine Queraderlinie untereinander verbunden, aus welcher 5 Endadem entspringen, die beiden ausseren nach aussen gebogen, die 3. gerade die 4. und 5. nach innen stark gekrummt. Im Clavus eine Gabelader. Beine einfach; Hinterschienen mit 2 kleinen Dornen, der erste dicht an der Basis, der zweite hinter der Mitte. Der bewegliche Apikalsporn stark.
Genus MALAXA novum
Kopf samt Augen schmaler als der Thorax. Scheitel lang- lich, nach vorne etwas wenig verschmalert, die Augen nur wenig iiberragend, mit fast undeutHchen Kielen. Stirne sehr lang und schmal, parallelseitig, an den Randem und in der Mitte, sowie die Wangen gekielt. Der Mittelkiel auf der Scheitelspitze ein sehr kleines seichtes Dreieck bildend. Augen halbkugelig. Fiihler sehr lang, die Basis der Fliigeldecken iiberragend, cylin- drisch, dunn, das 2. Fiihlerglied um i langer als der Basalglied, die Borste sehr kurz. Pronotum breit, vorne gerade abgestutzt, mit 3 Kielen und 2 Griibchen zwischen denselben. Schildchen breiter als lang, mit 3 Langskielen. Fliigeldecken hyalin, hinten stark zugespitzt, mit 3 Sektoren, welche aus einer langlichen Basalzelle entspringen. Die beiden ausseren Sektoren einfach, der innere Sektor gegabelt, 5 Endadern, die mittlere gegabelt, der aussere Gabelast in die Apikalspitze mundend. Im kurzen Clavus eine Gabelader. Beine sehr grazil, Hinterschienen mit einem sehr kleinen Dorn in der Mitte. Endsporn fast so lang wie das Basalglied der Hintertarsen, dtinn, aalformig.
Typ. gen.: Malaxa acutipennis sp. nov.
Malaxa acutipennis sp. nov. (Fig. 7.)
Kopf, Thorax und Unterseite samt Beine wachsgelblich. Fliigeldecken hyalin mit zwei braunen Querbinden. Die erste Binde schmal, vor der Mitte, die zweite breitere auf der Quer- aderlinie, samtliche Endadern braun gesaumt. Auf dem Hinter- leibsrticken zwei breite Langsbinden. Die Schenkel vor der Spitze schwarz geringelt, die Spitzen der Schienen schwarzlich.
Lange 9 ungefahr 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar Baker).
124685 6
276 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
ISSIN.^^
Genus AUGILINA novum
Korper lang gestreckt. Kopf samt Augen schmaler als der Thorax, in einen dreieckigen nach oben gekrummten kurzen Fortsatz verlangert. Die Seiten des Scheitels gescharft, nach vorne konvergierend, die Spitze dicht vor den Augen nach oben gebogen, die Scheitelflache glatt, nicht gekielt oder mit einem schwachen Mittelkiel versehen. Stirne langlich, nach unten verbreitert, die Rander gescharft gehoben, die Stirnflache an der Basis vertieft, unten mehr oder weniger gewolbt, nicht gekielt. Clypeus langlich dreieckig, gewolbt, nicht gekielt. "Rostrum bis zur Mittelbrust reichend, kurz, Augen gross, halbkugelig, stark vorgewolbt, die Fiihler kurz, Fuhlerborste lang. Ocellen vorhan- den. Pronotum glockenformig, an den Seiten gerundet, oben konvex, vorne schwach gerundet, hinten gerade auf der Scheibe 2 nach hinten divergierende und abgekiirzte vorne zusam- menstossende kurze Kiele, welche eine dreieckige Grube be- grenzen. Schildchen stark gewolbt, breiter als lang, mit 3 parallelen schwachen Langsbinden. Flugeldecken sehr lang und schmal, die Hinterleibsspitze uberragend, hinten abgerundet, am Aussenrande in der Mitte leicht gebuchtet. Drei lange Adern, von welchen die beiden ausseren sich nahe der Basis miteinander verbinden; die Sektoren bilden im hinteren Viertel der Fliigel- decken durch Gabelung zwei pentagonale ZeUen und eine innere viereckige Zelle, welche auf einer von der Clavusspitze nach aussen ziehenden geraden Querader aufsitzen. Aus der letzteren entspringen 5 Endadern, die 2. und 3. bilden eine Gabel und entspringen mit der 4. Ader aus einem Punkte. Der Apikalrand besitzt einen schmalen fein quergestrichelten Saum. Der Cla- vus sehr lang, die beiden Clavusadem nahe der Basis vereinigt, eine sehr kurze Gabel bildend, der Gabelschaft miindet vor der Clavusspitze in die Clavusnaht. Flugel wenig ktirzer als die Flugeldecken, mit wenigen Langsadem, Hinterleib walzenfor- mig, lang gestreckt, nach hinten verengt. Beine sehr lang, grazil, insbesondere die Vorderschenkel und Schienen auffallend lang und diinn, Hinterschienen mit 1 Dome hinter der Mitte. Basalglied der Hintertarsen lang.
Typ. gen. : Augilina longipes sp. nov.
Augilina longipes sp. nov. (Fig. 8.)
Kopf in einen kurzen dreieckigen, dicht vor den Augen nach oben gekrummten Fortsatz verlangert. Der Scheitel und die
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 277
Stirne samt Clypeus schwarz, glanzend, die Seitenkiele des Scheitels und der Stirne weiss. Pronotum weiss, die zwischen den Kielen liegende kleine dreieckige Grube schwarz. Die Seiten des Kopfes mit Ausnahme der Schlafen schwarz, glanzend, Fuhler gelblich. Schildchen schwarz, glanzend, die Spitze blass- gelblich, mit einem schwarzen Langsstrich. Flugeldecken hyalin, schwach milchig getriibt, an der Basis rotlich, mit einer breiten dunkelbraunen Querbinde auf der Querader und Teilungs- stellen der Sektoren. Samtliche Adern sind tief schwarz. Die Vorderbrust und die Vorderhiiften schwarz, glanzend, die Mittel- und Hinterbrust blassgelb, auf der Seite eine grosse schwarze Mackel. Hinterleib blassgelb, eine breite Querbinde und die Spitze schwarz. Vorder- und Mittelschenkel braunlichgelb, an der Unterseite schwarz, die Schienen und Tarsen pechbraun, die Hinterbeine tief schwarz, die Hintertarsen weiss.
Lange $ 7.5 mm. ; Breite 2 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (1 Exemplar Baker).
Genus SYMPLANA Kirby
Symplana Kirby, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. (1891), 24, 136. Melichar, Hom.-Fauna Ceylon (1903), 19. Distant, Fauna Brit. Ind., Rhynch. (1906), 3, 254.
Kopf in einen dreieckigen nach oben gebogenen Fortsatz verlangert. Der Fortsatz ist von der Seite betrachtet spitzig, von oben betrachtet abgestumpft, fast quer gestutzt. Der Scheitel nach vorne verschmalert, die Seitenrander gehoben gekielt, so dass der Scheitel vertieft erscheint. Stirne lang schmal, mit 3 starken Kielen, welche sich auf der Stimbasis miteinander verbinden. Clypeus langlich dreieckig, in der Mitte fein gekielt. Die Augen halbkugelig, Ocellen vorhanden, Fuhler kurz, Fuhlerborste lang. Rostrum kurz. Pronotum schmal, vorne schwach gerundet, hinten sehr schwach gebuchtet, fast gerade, ohne deutliche Kiele, hinter den Augen jederseits ein kleiner Hocker. Schildchen breiter als lang, mit zwei paral- lelen schwachen Seitenkielen, der Mittelkiel sehr undeutlich. Flugeldecken lang, schmal, hinten abgerundet, mit 3 einfachen Sektoren, die beiden ausseren an der Basis miteinander verbun- den, die Sektoren bilden durch Gabelung hinter der Mitte eine viereckige und zwei pentagonale Zellen, welche auf einer geraden Querader aufsitzen, aus welcher 5 Endadem entspringen, die 2. und 3. bilden eine Gabel, der Gabelschaft mit der 4. Ader aus einem Punkte entspringend. Clavus sehr lang, die beiden Cla- vusadern nahe der Basis vereinigt, die Gabelaste langer als bei
278 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Augilina, Flugel wenig kurzer als die Fliigeldecken. Beine ein- fach, nicht auffallend lang, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hin- ter der Mitte.
Typ. gen. : Symplana viridinervis Kirby.
Kirby hat diese Gattung auf Grund eines auf Ceylon gefun- denen Exemplares gegrundet und stellte diese Gattung zu den Dictyophorinen, mit welchen sie eine grosse aussere Ahnlichkeit hat. Da ich diese Cikada nicht kannte, folgte ich in meiner Arbeit Horn. Fauna Ceylon der Angabe Kirby's. Distant sprach mit voller Berechtigung den Zweif el aus, dass diese Gattung eine Dictyophorinengattung sei. Das mir von Baker von den Philip- pinen eingesendete Exemplar ist ohne Zweifel die Kirby'sche Symplana, welche mit der philippinischen Gattung Augilina sehr verwandt ist. Die Form und die Bildung der Fliigeldecken und das Geader ist bei beiden voUkommen gleich, nur sind bei Symplana 3 Stirnkiele vorhanden, bei Augilina keine Kiele, die Beine sind bei Augilina auffallend lang, bei Symplana gewohnlich lang. Zu den Dictyophorinen konnen beide Gattungen nicht gerechnet werden, weil dieselben keine Seitenrandkiele besitzen, der Hinterrand des Pronotums gerade ist und der Schaft der Clavusadern nicht in den Schlussrand miindet. Nach meiner Ansicht gehoren beide Gattungen zu den Issinen und zwar in die Nahe der Gattung Augila Stal mit welcher sie eine gewisse Verwandschaft zeigen.
Symplana viridinervis Kirby. (Fig. 9.)
Symplana viridinervis Kirby, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. (1891), 24, 136, Tafel VI, fig. 11; Melichar, Hom.-Fauna Ceylon (1903), 19; Distant, Fauna Brit. Ind., Rhynch. (1906), 3, 254.
Der ganze Korper blassgriin, mit einer orangegelben Langs- binde, welche von der Scheitelspitze iiber das Pro- und Mesono- tum und den Schlussrand bis zur Clavusspitze zieht. Die Spitze der Dornen der Hinterschienen dunkel.
Lange 7-8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker) ; Ceylon, Punda- loya (Kirby).
Eupilis rubrovenosa sp. nov.
Der E. nigrinervis Stal ahnlich, die Adern der Deckflugel sind lebhaft rotbraun. Scheitel quadratisch, mit zwei eingepressten schwarzen kommaformigen Langsstrichen. Stirne langlich, nach oben schwach verengt, mit 3 schwachen Kielen, die ausse- ren nach aussen gebogen, auf der Basis mit dem Mittelkiel ver- bunden. Die Stirnbasis ist mit hellen flachen Kornchen besetzt,
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 279
welche sich jederseits langs des Stirnseitenrandes bis ungefahr zur Mitte der Stirne herabziehen. Die Stirne braun, mit 4 helleren Flecken. Flugeldecken und das Geader wie bei E. nigri- nervis, die Flugeldecken fast hyalin, nicht gefarbt, hochstens zum Schlussrande hellbraunlich, die rotbraunen Adern stark vortretend. Flugel hyalin, mit pechbraunen Adern, die Unter- seite und Beine braunlichgelb, die Schenkel und Schienen an den Kanten dunkel.
Lange 11 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling {Baker) ,
Eupilis hyalinocosta sp. nov.
Von alien bekannten Arten sofort dadurch zu unterscheiden, dass die innere Halfte der Flugeldecken rotbraun oder gelblich- braun, von helleren Adern durchsetzt ist, die aussere Halfte samt Adern hyalin und graulichweiss ist. Femer befindet sich stets auf den griinen Brustlappen des dunklen Pronotums ein grosser schwarzer Punkt. Auf der Basis der Stirne in den Stirndrei- ecken keine Kornchen, diese sind bloss am Seitenrande der Stirne bis zur Spitze sichtbar. Die Stirne ist nicht dunkel gezeichnet, die Unterseite und Beine schmutzig olivengrun oder graulichgelb. Auf dem quer viereckigem Scheitel nahe dem Hinterrande 2 schwarze eingestochene Punkte, sowie 2 Griibchen auf der Scheibe wie bei alien Arten.
Lange 10-12 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios, Mount Maquiling (Baker),
Hemisphaerius affinis sp. nov.
Korper oval, olivengrun. Die Stirne lederartig gerunzelt, griin. Der Clypeusspitze schwarz. Unterseite und Beine schmutzig graulichgelb, die Vorder- und Mittelschienen an der Spitze schwarz, die Hinterschenkel braunlich. Dem H. chloro- phanus Mel. durch die lederartig gerunzelte Stirne sehr nahe stehend, unterscheidet sich von dieser Art durch schwarze Clypeusspitze und die bloss an den Spitzen schwarzgeringelten Schienen der vorderen Beine.
Lange 5 mm.; Breite 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Hemisphaerius triangularis sp. nov.
Von der Form und Grosse der H. affinis. Stirne hellgriin, schmal rot gerandet, mit einem roten Dreieck in der Mitte. Clypeus schwarz, Scheitel rot. Pro- und Mesonotum hellgriin, die Rander des letzteren und ein kleines Basaldreieck rot. Flugeldecken fein lederartig gerunzelt, olivengrun, der Schluss-
280 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
rand von der Basis bis zur Mitte rot gerandet, daneben ein hell- griiner Langsstreifen, welcher nach aussen durch einen roten Streifen begrenzt ist. Die Costalrandader schwarzlich. Unter- seite und Beine schmutzig graulichgelb, die Schenkel mit Aus- nahme der Basis und der Spitze, 2 Ringe an den Vorder- und Mittelschienen schwarz. Hinterschenkel braunlich.
Lange 5 mm. ; Breite 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Hemisphaerius rufus sp. nov.
Stirn lederartig gerunzelt wie bei H. affinis, wie die ganze Ober- seite blutrot, Clypeus mit Ausnahme der Basis schwarz. Die Beine schmutzig gelb, bloss die Spitzen der Vorder- und Mittel- schienen schwarz, die Hiiften und die Hinterschenkel, letztere mit Ausnahme der Spitze schwarz. Bauch mit 2-3 dunklen Querstreifen in der Mitte. Von affinis durch die blutrote Far- bung der Oberseite verschieden.
Lange 5 mm.: Breite 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Genus LAPITHASA novum
Kopf stark nach vorne vorgezogen. Der Scheitel parallel- seitig, der liber die Augen vorragende Teil doppelt so lang wie der Basalteil bis zum vorderen Augenrande, die Schlafenecken winkelig vorspringend, von der Seite betrachtet abgerundet. Scheitelrander etwas gescharft gekielt, in der Mitte ein voU- standiger Langskiel. Stirne sehr lang, vor dem Clypeus plotzlich verbreitert, indem die Seitenrander eine nach aussen abgerundete Ecke bilden, mit 3 Kielen auf der Stirnflache, welche sich auf der Stirnbasis miteinander verbinden. Clypeus ein Drittel der Stirnlange, an den Seiten nur in der Mitte gekielt. Rostrum, die Hinterhiiften erreichend, das letzte Glied kurz. Fiihler kurz, das 2. Fiihlerglied nur wenig langer als breit. Ocellen vorhanden. Pronotum vorne schwach gerundet, hinten fast gerade, oben mit 3 Kielen, ein Seitenrandkiel. Schildchen mit 3 Langskielen, die seitlichen schwach nach vorne konver- gierend. Flugeldecken doppelt so lang wie einzeln breit, die Seiten parallel, hinten breit abgerundet, die Apikalecke starker abgerundet als die Suturalecke. Der 1. Sektor nahe der Basis, die beiden inneren Sektoren hinter der Mitte gegabelt. Die Costalmembrane an der Basis schmal, nach hinten verbreitert, quergeadert. Im Apikalteile zahlreiche dichte Apikaladern, welche durch zahlreiche Queradern untereinander verbunden sind. Ein dem Apikalrande genaherte Subapikallinie. Die
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 281
beiden Clavusadern hinter der Mitte des Schlussrandes vereinigt. Die Vorder- und Mittelbeine zusammengedruckt, die Schenkel an der Unterkante, die Schienen an der Aussenkante massig erweitert. Hinterschienen zur Spitze verbreitert mit 2 starken Dornen vor der Spitze, das Basalglied der Hintertarsen langlich. Typ. gen : Lapithasa bakeri sp. nov.
Lapithasa bakeri sp. nov. (Fig. 10.)
Braun. FlUgeldecken pechbraun, auf der inneren Halfte mehr oder weniger gelblich, nur gebandert und gesprenkeit, am Costalrande hinter der Mitte eine grosse gelblichweisse hie und da braune quergesprenkelte Mackel, vor derselben am Costalran- de zahlreiche kleine hyaline Fleckchen, nach hinten mehrere hyaline Querstriche und dreieckige Randmackeln, insbesondere ist am Apikalrande aussen und innen je eine Quermackel, da- zwischen in der Mitte des Apikalrandes eine kleine dreieckige Mackel. Vor der Suturalecke ist auf dunklem Grunde ein kleiner schwarzer Punkt. Flugel rauchbraun, mit schwarzen Adern. Die Unterseite und Beine braun. Das letzte Glied der Schnabelscheide weiss.
Lange 12 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios (Baker).
uber die systematische Stellung dieser Gattung bin ich nicht im Klaren. Nach dem ausseren Habitus wurde man geneigt sein dieselbe zu den Lophopinen zu rechnen, aber dagegen spricht der Urn stand, dass das Basalglied der Tarsen lang, nicht verdickt ist. Zu den Dictyophorinen kann diese Gattung aus dem Grunde nicht gerechnet werden, weil der Schaft der Clavusnerven in die Clavusspitze miindet und der Hinterrand des Pronotums gerade ist, nicht winkelig ausgeschnitten. Gegen die Einreihung in die Subf. Issinse spricht der starke Seitenrandkiel auf dem Pronotum. Die Form der Stirne erinnert sehr an die von Acarua und Kasserota und wurde vielleicht am ehestens in die Nahe der letztgenannten Gattung zu stellen sein, von welcher sich diese Gattung durch den langen Scheitel und die zusam- mengedrlickten, etwas erweiterten Vorderbeine unterscheidet.
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I
Fig. 1. Benna sinuata sp. nov.
2. Syntames tubulifer Mel.
3. Megatropis obliquefasciata sp. nov.
4. Dendrokara monstrosa sp. nov.
5. Dendrokara torva gen. et sp. nov.
6. Bambusaria picta gen. et sp. nov.
7. Malaxa acutipennis gen. et sp. nov.
8. Augilina longipes gen. et sp. nov.
9. Symplana viridinervis Kirby. 10. Lapithasa bakeri gen. et sp. nov.
283
Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden : I.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
TAFEL I. NEUE FULGORIDEN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN.
ENUMERATION DES SERPHIDES (PROCTOTRUPIDES) DES
ILES PHILIPPINES AVEC DESCRIPTION DE GENRES
NOUVEAUX ET D'ESPfeCES NOUVELLES ^
Par J. J. KlEFFER
{Bitsch, Germany)
Les premiers auteurs qui se sont occupes des Serphides ou Proctotrupides sont: Westwood, Ashmead, Brown et Crawford. Le nombre des especes observees par eux est de 27. J'ai ajoute a ce chiffre 70 autres especes, qui ont ete recueillies a Los Baiios, Luzon, par le professeur Ch. Fuller Baker. Ces 97 especes, auxquelles viennent s'aj outer 24 nouvelles especes, se repartissent de la fagon suivante:
DRYINID^
1. Lestodryinus browni Ashmead (Dryinus), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905),
29, 109. ?.
2. Lestodryinus luzonicus Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189. $.
3. Lestodryinus perkinsi Kieffer, Bull. Soc. ent. France (1914), No. 1. ?.
4. Prodryinus (?) stantoni Ashmead (Dryinus), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1904), 28, 134. ?.
BETHYLID^
5. Goniozus philippinensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28,
134. ?.
6. Goniozus depressus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 318. 2-
7. Dissomphalus tibialis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28,
134. ?.
8. Misepyris exaratus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 317. 2.
9. Misepyris longiceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 318. $.
10. Rhahdepyris luzonicus Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189. c?.
11. Epyris apertus Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189.
12. Epyris philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 258. d*, ?.
13. Chlorepyris flavipennis Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189.
14. Neurepyris tagala Ashmead (Epyris) y Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905),
29, 109. c?.
15. Xenepyris compressicomis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 259. c?.
16. Foenobethylus gracilis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 257. c?.
17. Cleistepyris minimus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 257. c^.
18. Cleistepyris minor Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 256. c?.
19. Cleistepyris philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 254. c?, ?•
^ Since this paper was received, the author has sent descriptions of 1 more new genus and 4 more new species; namely, Epyris filiformis, genus Uro- scelioy Uroscelio luteipeSy Dilapitha nitida, and Macroteleia flaviceps. The descriptions of these species will be found under their respective genera, but the species are not included in the keys. — The Editors.
285
286 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
SCELIONID^
20. Prosparasion cceruleum Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 190. (?.
21. Scelio philippinensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28,
963. ?.
22. Scelio aratigena Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 320. c?, $.
23. Scelio consobrinus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 319. c?, $.
24. Scelio variicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 319. c?, $.
25. Platyscelio abnormis Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
126. (?.
26. Platyscelio punctatus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 321. (?.
27. Sparasion philippinense Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 320. d, $.
28. Calliscelio philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 322. c?.
29. Opisthacantha nigriclavata Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29,
399. ?.
30. Macroteleia manilensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 963,
c?; Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 127. ?.
31. Macroteleia craivfordi Kieffer nom. no v. [kiefferi Crawford, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 127. ?; non kiefferi Brues.]
32. Macroteleia striativentris Crawford, Proc. U. S Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
126. c?, ?.
33. Macroteleia philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 323, 367. c?, $.
34. Hoploteleia pacifica Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 112. ?.
35. Hoploteleia car'inata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 368. ?.
36. Hoploteleia philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 369. d", ?.
37. Hoploteleia unidens Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 370. c?, S-
38. Camptoteleia carinata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 387. $.
39. Camptoteleia excavata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 388. <S.
40. Chrestoteleia bakeri Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 389. c?, $.
41. Xenoteleia flavipennis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 390. ?.
42. Hadronotus flavipes Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 399. $.
43. Hadronotus philippinensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28,
153. ?.
44. Anteris atriceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 428. ?.
45. Habroteleia brotvni Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
125. c?.
46. Neurocaciis philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 429. c?.
47. Aeolus luteipes Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 124. ?.
48. Hoplogryon longispina Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 429. <?.
49. Hoplogryon flaviclava Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 191. ?.
50. Hoplogryon roberti Crawford (Prosacantha) , Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1910), 38, 125. <S.
51. Hoplogryon striaticeps Crawford (Prosacantha) , Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1910), 38, 125. c?.
52. Telenomus catacanthsB Ashmead, Canad. Ent. (1904), 36, 284. d", ?.
PLATYGASTERID^
53. Anopedias luzonicus Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28,
964. ?.
54. Ceratopsilus rufipes Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 461.
IX, D, 3 Kieifer: Enumeration des Serphides 287
CERAPHRONID^
55. Ceraphron manilas Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28, 135. ?.
DIAPRIIDiE
56. Galesiis manilss Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 397. J, 5-
57. Galesus luzonicus Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 398. d*.
58. Galesus clavaticornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 430. 2.
59. Galesus philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 431. c?.
60. Galesus crawfordi Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 432. c?.
61. Galesus curticeps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 432. cJ.
62. Hemigalesus niger Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 434. cJ, $.
63. Hemigalesus rufus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 434. c?, $.
64. Hemigalesus brevicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 434. d*.
65. Hemigalesus gracilis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 435. c?.
66. Lipoglyptus primus Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 122.
c?, S.
67. Cologlyptus kiefferi Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
124. ?.
68. Scapopria atriceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 441. ?.
69. Acidopria variicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 442. c?, ?.
70. Acidopria tricomuta Crawford (Loxotropa), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1910), 38, 122. c?, ?.
71. Acidopria monachanta Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 192. c?.
72. Acidopria tetratoma Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 442. ?.
73. Phoenopria rufa Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 455. 2-
74. Phcenopria nigriceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 455. c?*
75. Phcenopria exilis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 456. c?.
76. Loxotropa philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 456. c?.
77. Trichopria caudata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 456. 2.
78. Trichopria analis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 457. 2-
79. Trichopria semirufa Kieffer, Insecta (1913) 3, 457. c?.
80. Trichopria insulas Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 458. d*.
81. Ashmeadopria bakeri Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 458. c?.
82. Ashmeadopria nigriventris Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 459. c?.
83. Ashmeadopria bipunctata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 459. d*.
84. Aparamesius carinatus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 436. c^, 2.
85. Aparamesius filicomis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 437. c?.
86. Aparamesius levistilus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 437. c?.
87. Aparamesius depressus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 437. 2-
88. Spilomicrus carinifrons Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 438. c?, 2.
89. Spilomicrus variicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 439. 2.
90. Spilomicrus opertus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 440. d*.
91. Spilomicrus dispansus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 440. d*.
92. Spilomicrus nitidicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 441. d*.
93. Spilomicrus consobrinus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 441. 2.
94. Loboscelidia rufescens Westwood, Thesaur. entom. Oxon. (1874), 172.
BELYTID^
95. Aclista punctulata Kieffer, Insect (1913), 3, 459. d, 2.
96. Xenotoma philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 460. 2.
97. Procinetus rectinervis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 461. d*.
288 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
DESCRIPTION DES NOUVELLES ESPECES ET DES NOUVEAUX GENRES
BETHYLID^ Genus GONIOZUS Foerster
Parmi les 26 especes dont se compose ce genre, les trois suivantes reviennent aux Philippines :
1. Segment median margine lateralement et posterieurement, ayant sur la
moitie anterieure de sa partie mediane un espace preeminent, trian-
gulaire et lisse G. triangulifer sp. nov.
Segment non margine, sans espace releve et triangulaire 2.
2. Tete plane, circulaire, entierement lisse G. depressus Kieffer.
Tete allongee, parsemee de points G. philippinensis Ashm.
Goniozus triangulifer sp. nov. {$ , $ .)
Noir, brillant, mandibules, antennes, genoux, tibias et tarses, parfois les quatre femurs posterieurs d'un jaune clair. T6te presque circulaire, tres faiblement chagrinee, parsemee de points peu prof onds. Clypeus fortement carene. Yeux deux f ois aussi longs que leur distance du bord occipital. Ocelles posterieurs touchant le bord occipital, plus eloignes des yeux que Tun de I'autre. Articles antennaires 3-5 chez le male ou seulement le 3^ chez la femelle, un peu allonges, les suivants globuleux, sauf le 13^ qui est allonge. Thorax tres finement chagrine. Pronotum de moitie plus long que le mesonotum, sillons parapsi- daux nuls. Scutellum avec un mince sillon transversal. Segment median margine lateralement et posterieurement, mat et chagrine, ayant dans la moitie anterieure de sa partie mediane un espace releve, triangulaire, lisse et brillant, a pointe dirigee en arriere et reliee au bord posterieur par une arete longitudinale. Ailes hyalines, prostigma, stigma et radius bruns, les autres nervures jaunes, radius presque droit, recourbe a Textremite, basale brisee fortement en angle, sa partie inferieure plus longue que la superieure. Abdomen lisse et brillant, segment anal incurve chez le male, droit et a tariere proeminente chez la femelle.
Taille: 2.5-3 mm.
Localites: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos et Mont Maquiling, et Manila.
Genus EPYRIS Westwood
Epyris filiformis sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, lisse, brillant, glabre ; mandibules, 4 ou 5 premiers articles antennaires, palpes, tibias et tarses roux, reste des antennes graduellement assombri. Corps tres mince. Tete quadrangu- laire, au moins deux fois aussi longue que large, convexe, beau-
IX. D. 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 289
coup plus large que le thorax, partie anterieure faiblement ponc- tuee, avec trace d'une ligne enf oncee longitudinale. Yeux glabres, allonges, grands, plus courts que Tocciput. Joues nulles. Front decoupe en arc au bord anterieur. Clypeus situe plus bas que le front, fortement carene. Mandibules mediocres, graduelle- ment elargies, avec 3 ou 4 petites dents noires. Ocelle anterieur situe plus en arriere que le bord posterieur des yeux. Palpes courts, les maxillaires avec 3 petits articles apres la flexion. Scape arque, aussi long que les 3 ou 4 articles suivants reunis et guere plus gros, article 3® tres transversal, les suivants un peu transversaux sauf le 13% tous serres. Thorax quatre a cinq f ois aussi long que haut. Pronotum deux f ois aussi long que large, trois f ois aussi long que le mesonotum, sillons parapsidaux visibles seulement au tiers posterieur, elargis en virgule. Fossettes du scutellum separees seulement par une arete. Segment median horizontal, quadrangulaire et tres long, deux fois et demie aussi long que large, densement strie en travers, margine lateralement par deux aretes separees par une gouttiere striee transversalement, bord posterieur non margine, graduelle- ment arrondi, mesopleures et metapleures densement ridees en long. Ailes subhyalines, atteignant le milieu de Tabdomen, sous- costale conf ondue avec la postale, sauf distalement, basale oblique et distante du stigma de ses deux tiers, transversale perpen- diculaire, stigma obconique, guere plus long que large, radiius a peine arque, deux fois aussi long que la basale, sans autres nervures. Femurs tres elargis, les anterieurs en ellipse, articles 2-4 du tarse anterieur cordiformes et aussi larges que longs, crochets tarsaux ayant au moins une dent. Abdomen aussi long que le reste du corps ou plus long, mince, graduellement en pointu, termine par un stylet, comme d'ordinaire, tariere proeminente.
Taille: 6 mm. sur une largeur n'atteignant pas 1 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
SCELIONID^ Genus SCELIO Latreille
Quatre especes du genre Scelio etaient connues pour les Philippines; j'en ajoute deux nouvelles, qui se distinguent des precedentes d'apres le tableau suivant.
1. Sillons parapsidaux plus ou moins distincts 2.
Sillons parapsidaux nuls 3.
2. Tete et thorax avec des points serres et ombiliques, scape jaune brunatre,
joues non striees S. philippinensis Ashm.
290 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Vertex et mesonotum lisses, avec de rares points non ombiliques, scape
noir, joues striees en partie S. bisectus sp. nov.
8. Joues striees 4.
Joues reticulees comme le reste de la tete 5.
4. Front strie jusqu'au milieu des yeux, hanches et massue des femurs d^un
brun noir S. aratigena Kieff.
Stries n'atteignant pas la base des yeux, hanches et pattes jaunes en
entier S. luzonicus sp. nov.
6. Articles antennaires 3-5 rouges chez le male, scape de la femelle noir,
hanches rousses S. variicornis Kieff.
Antennes noires en entier chez le male, scape de la femelle roux, hanches noires S. consobrinus Kieff.
Scelio bisectus sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; antennes brunes, scape noir, mandibules d'un brun noir, les 2 lobes aigus et longs, pattes d'un jaune sale, hanches noires, massue des quatre femurs posterieurs brune, tarse poste- rieur brunatre. Tete a ponctuation grosse et dense. Yeux reunis aux mandibules par un sillon. Bas du front strie de chaque cote, ces stries ne depassent pas le sillon et n'atteignent pas ou h. peine la base des yeux ; f ossette f rontale remplacee par un petit espace lisse et brillant au-dessus du tubercule antennaire. Vertex brillant, lisse, a points epars et peu gi«os. Ocelles posterieurs distants des yeux de moins de leur diametre. Article 3« des antennes obconique, plus gros et un peu plus long que le 2% a peine plus long que gros, 4« obconique et transversal, 5« tres gros, transversal, 6-10 egalement minces, serres, tres transversaux sauf le 10% qui est ovoidal. Thorax glabre. Pro- notum ponctue densement. Mesonotum lisse, brillant, avec quelques rares points peu gros ; sillons parapsidaux percurrents, profonds, divergents en avant, lobe median du mesonotum plus large en arriere que les lateraux. Scutellum ponctue grossiere- ment en de. Metanotum a aretes longitudinales formant des f ossettes, milieu en forme de tubercule peu apparent. Segment median a grosses rides longitudinales. Pleures ridees en long et ponctuees, sans espace lisse. Ailes faiblement enfumees, sous- costale jaune, marginale circulaire, d'un brun noir, stigmatique d*un brun clair, presque perpendiculaire. Metatarse posterieur un peu plus long que les articles 2 et 3 reunis. Abdomen en ellipse allonge, deprime, un peu d^passe par les ailes, arrondi en arriere, tous les tergites transversaux, stries en long avec le bord posterieur lisse, 6« et 7« seulement ponctues densement, les trois premiers graduellement plus longs.
Taille: 4.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 291
Scelio luzonicus sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir ; mandibules d'un brun noir, les 2 lobes aigus et peu longs, pattes jaunes, hanches plus sombres a la base. Tete a polls blancs, appliques, courts, plus denses sur les tempes, grossiere- ment reticulee, sauf a la base du front qui est striee en long de chaque cote, ces stries ne depassent pas le sillon qui reunit Toeil a la mandibule et n'atteignent pas ou a peine la base de Toeil. Fossette frontale comme chez le precedent. Antennes noires en entier, 3« article obconique, bien plus long que le 2^, deux fois aussi long que gros ou que le 3^. Thorax a polls plus rares que sur la tete, grossierement reticule, sans sillons parap- sidaux, les pleures plutot ridees-ponctuees. Ailes faiblement enfumees, subhy alines a la base, nervures tres pales. Abdomen comme chez le precedent sauf que le 6® ou dernier segment est chagrine, triangulaire, aussi long que large.
Taille: 6 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus TJROSCELIO novum
9 . Yeux glabres. Mesonotum avec 2 sillons parapsidaux. Postmarginale plus longue que la stigmatique. Thorax inerme. Abdomen avec une corne, 6« segment subitement aminci et for- mant une longue queue. Le type est :
TJroscelio luteipes sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; mandibules, antennes sauf les 5 derniers articles, han- ches et pattes d'un jaune sale, abdomen brun noir, marge laterale plus claire. Tete glabre, brillante, presque deux fois aussi large que longue vue d'en haut, beaucoup plus haute que longue vue de cote, un peu plus large que le thorax. Ocelles en triangle, les posterieurs distants des yeux de leur diametre, beaucoup plus distants du bord posterieur que de Tanterieur. Joues lisses, egalant la moitie des yeux, avec une ponctuation assez grosse et assez dense et un prof ond sillon. Tempes larges, graduellement elargies par en bas, lisses, avec une ponctuation plus eparse que celle des joues. Vertex strie ou ride densement en long. Front strie transversalement en arc, sans fossette, a peine deprime au milieu. Antennes avec une niassue de 6 articles, scape subcylin- drique, un peu plus long que les articles 2 et 3 reunis, article 2« obconique, deux fois aussi long que gros, 3« egal au 4«, subcylin- drique, presque double du 2«, 5^ un peu plus court que le 4® et a peine plus gros, encore trois fois aussi long que gros, 6« un peu plus gros que le 5s de moitie plus long que gros, 7« h peine plus
292 The Philippine Journal of Sciefice i^u
long que gros, formant le commencement de la massue, plus gros que le 6® mais moins gros que le 8% 7-11 presque trans versaux et serres, 12« un peu allonge. Thorax peu convexe, mesonotum et scutellum mats, chagrines, finement pubescents. Pronotum a peine visible d'en haut, mesonotum semicirculaire, sillons pa- rapsidaux percurrents, peu divergents en avant, bord posterieur du lobe median deux f ois aussi large que les lateraux. Scutellum transversal, separe du mesonotum par une rangee transversale de fossettes, bord posterieur margine par des fossettes plus pe- tites. Metanotum transversal, plus long que la moitie du scutellum, grossierement cannele en long, inerme. Segment median decoupe en trapeze jusqu'a sa base. Propleures avec un espace elliptique traverse par des aretes longitudinales ; meso- pleures tres excavees, lisses et brillantes. Ailes a peine teintees, pubescentes, ciliees, atteignant le milieu du 5^ tergite, sous-costale brune et situee contre le bord, les autres nervures pales, basale tres oblique, marginale plus courte que la stigmatique, qui est oblique, longue, noueuse au bout, postmarginale plus de deux fois aussi longue que la stigmatique. Pattes greles, tibia poste- rieur beaucoup plus long que le femur, metatarse posterieur tres long, deux fois aussi long que les 4 suivants reunis. Abdomen deux fois aussi long que le reste du corps, brillant; petiole presque deux fois aussi long que large, lineaire, grossierement cannele, avec une corne obtuse striee transversalement en arc et s'engageant entre les deux lobes du segment median, segments 2-5 formant un fuseau, le 2^ un peu plus long que le 1^^ graduellement elargi, grossierement cannele en avant, finement strie dans le reste, de moitie plus long que large, 3« a peine transversal, egalant les deux suivants reunis, finement ride en long et ponctue, 4« et 5« tres transversaux, le 4« un peu plus long que le 5% tous deux densement ponctues, 6^ tergite subitement aminci, beaucoup plus etroit que le 5«, formant une queue lineaire, deprimee, pubescente, presque aussi longue que les 3 tergites precedents reunis, cotes de Tabdomen faiblement pubescents.
Taille: 4.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus HOPLOTELEIA Ashmead
Hoploteleia carinata Kieff .
On ne connaissait de cette espece que la femelle. Le male differe par les antennes qui sont d'un jaune rougeatre et assez
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 293
grosses, 2« article tres petit, 3« presque deux fois aussi long que le 2% plus long que le 4% 4-11 un peu plus gros que le 3% a peine pus longs que gros, le 5^ avec une minime dent laterale, 12« allonge. Tete seulement de moitie plus large que longue. Ab- domen aussi long que le reste du corps, sculpte comme chez la f emelle, sauf que le 3« tergite est ponctue densement, les suivants plus finement ponctues, le 7« tres court, tronque en arriere, avec une minime dent a chaque angle posterieur. Metatarse poste- rieur grossi. Pubescence du corps faible, peu apparente, jau- natre.
Taille : 4 mm.
Localites: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos, Mont Maquiling.
Genus DILAPITHA novum
Voisin de Neuroteleia Kieif., dont il differe surtout par la presence des sillons parapsidaux. Le type est D. albipes sp. nov.
1. Thorax brun noir, brillant D. nitida sp. nov.
Thorax roux mat, avec une bande longitudinale d'un brun noir.
D. albipes sp. nov.
Dilapitha albipes sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; thorax roux, lobe median du mesonotum sauf Textre- mite anterieure, scutellum, metanotum et milieu du segment median noirs, hanches posterieures et toutes les pattes blan- chatres, les hanches anterieures brunes, mandibules rousses, antennes d'un brun noir, scape blanc sale, sauf Textremite. Tete presque deux fois aussi large que longue, densement striee ou ridee en travers sur le dessus. Yeux glabres, margines au cote median. Joues petites, striees, avec un sillon. Antennes greles, filiformes, scape a peine plus gros que le flagellum, 2« article globuleux, 3-6 subegaux, cylindriques, trois fois aussi longs que gros, les suivants graduellement raccourcis, le 10« de moitie plus long que gros, flagellum pubescent. Thorax un peu plus long que haut. Pronotum non visible d'en haut. Me- sonotum transversal, mat, tres finement ponctue ou chagrine comme le scutellum, sillons parapsidaux percurrents, faiblement divergents en avant. Scutellum separe du mesonotum par une ligne crenelee, arrondi en arriere. Metanotum arme de deux petites dents separees par une incision arquee. Segment median graduellement declive. Ailes depassant Tabdomen, pubescentes, ciliees, faiblement teintees, nervures pales, sous-costale proche du bord, marginale tres courte, stigmatique longue, oblique, deux
294 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
fois aussi longue que la marginale, radius oblique, trois fois aussi long que la stigmatique, formant avec la postmarginale une longue cellule radiale fermee, basale arquee, formant avec la mediane une cellule basale fermee, deux autres nervures longi- tudinales parcourent la moitie distale de Taile. Abdomen depri- me, a peine plus long que le reste du corps, arrondi en arriere, spatule, petiole a bords paralleles, a peine transversal, 2® seg- ment allonge, graduellement elargi, tous deux stries en long et avec des fossettes le long du bord anterieur, 3® tergite transver- sal, a peine plus courte que le 2^ mat et ponctue densement comme les trois suivants.
Taille: 2.5 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Dilapitha nitida sp. nov. {$ .)
Noir; thorax brun noir, mandibules devant du scape et pattes d'un jaune sale, hanches d'un brun jaune. Tete aussi large que le thorax, tres transversale, glabre, brillante, grossierement striee en travers. Tempes etroites, lisses et finement ponctuees. Joues egalant le tiers des yeux, striees en eventail, une arete va de Tocelle externe, le long du bord interne de Toeil, et traverse ensuite la joue jusqu'aux mandibules, entre les antennes se trouve une fine carene qui se prolonge encore en arriere. Front a peine deprime, avec des stries arquees et transversales mais sans fossette. Yeux glabres. Ocelles posterieurs situes contre les yeux. Scape subcylindrique, un peu plus long que les deux suivants reunis, 2® obconique, guere plus long que gros, 3-12 cylindriques, pubescents, graduellement raccourcis, le 3® pres- que trois fois aussi long que gros, 11« pas deux fois aussi long que gros, plus court que le 12% le 5^ avec une petite dent avant le milieu. Thorax a peine plus long que haut, pronotum non visible d'en haut, mesonotum transversal, fortement convexe, brillant et tres finement ponctue comme le scutellum, lobe median un peu moins large en arriere que les lateraux, sillons parapsidaux convergents faiblement en arriere. Scutellum transversal, separe du mesonotum par une rangee de fossettes, des fossettes semblables sont alignees le long de son bord poste- rieur. Metanotum petit, cannele, les deux dents petites et rap- prochees. Segment median transversal. Propleures avec un espace elliptique borde en avant de fossettes alignees, mesopleures bordees en arriere de fossettes alignees. Ailes un peu brunies, depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, sous-costale distante du bord, basale oblique, distante de la marginale de sa longueur, marginale
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 295
deux fois aussi longue que large, n'ayant que la moitie de la stigmatique qui est oblique et noueuse au bout, postmarginale deux a trois fois aussi longue que la stigmatique, radius oblique, atteignant le bord un peu en arriere de la postmarginale, recur- rente, courte, continuant la direction du radius, anale percur- rente. Abdomen deprime, a peine plus long que le reste du corps, spatule, petiole un peu transversal, cannele, a fossettes en avant, 2« tergite graduellement elargi, un peu plus long que le 3®, strie, avec des fossettes en avant, 3^ a peine plus court que les 3 suivants reunis, ponctue densement comme les suivants, tous les tergites transversaux.
Taille : ^ , 2.5 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus APEGUS Foerster
Apegus maquilingensis sp. nov. ( 9 .)
Noir mat; antennes et pattes sauf les hanches d'un jaune vitellin. Tete un peu transversale, a ponctuation eparse et super- ficielle. Yeux glabres. Ocelles posterieurs distants des yeux de moins de leur diametre. Joues striees, separees de la face par un sillon. Fosse frontale profonde, lisse, brillante, marginee, trois fois aussi large que sa distance du bord oculaire. Article 2^ des antennes a peine plus long que gros, 3« deux fois aussi long que gros, obconique comme le 4«, et un peu plus long que lui, 2-4 egalement minces, les suivants distinctement grossis, le 5® obco- nique, un peu plus long que gros, 6-12 subglobuleux ou un peu transversaux et bien separes. Thorax peu convexe, chagrine dorsalement. Sillons parapsidaux percurrents, divergents en avant. Scutellum separe du mesonotum par un sillon, son bord posterieur arrondi et precede de gros points alignes. Metano- tum inerme. Ailes legerement jaunatres, nervures pales, sous- costale eloignee du bord, marginale petite, presque ponctiforme, stigmatique longue, oblique, noueuse au bout, postmarginale deux fois aussi longue que la stigmatique. Abdomen un peu plus long que le reste du corps, deprime, presque d'egale largeur sauf aux deux extremites qui sont un peu moins larges, les trois premiers tergites graduellement plus longs, 1^^ et 2« stries, avec des fossettes le long du bord anterieur, transversaux, 3« presque aussi long que large, mat et densement ponctue comme les suivants qui sont transversaux.
Taille: 3.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
296 • ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Genus CAMPTOTELEIA Kieffer
Les especes dont se compose ce genre se repartissent de la fa^on suivante:
1. Front sans impression; metanotum a deux dents aignes et se touchant
presque a la base C. carinata Kieff.
Front avec une profonde impression; metanotum avec une dent unique excavee dorsalement 2.
2. Dent du metanotum longue, egalant les deux tiers du scutellum.
C. magna sp. nov. Dent du metanotum petite, large, un peu transversale 3.
3. Mesonotum et scutellum grossierement rides en tr avers.
C. flavipennis sp. nov. Mesonotum et scutellum brillants et lisses, a points epars et fins 4.
4. Ailes brunes, abdomen aminci graduellement et fortement en arriere, 2e
tergite reticule, 3-7 stries, sans ponctuation C. excavata Kieff.
Ailes subhyalines, abdomen faiblement aminci en arriere, tergites 2-7 grossierement ponctues entre les aretes C. cupularis sp. nov.
Camptoteleia magna sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; mandibules jaunes, antennes sauf la massue, hanches et pattes d'un jaune sale, tarse posterieur brun. Tete, vue d'en haut, subglobuleuse, a peine transversale, grossierement ridee en travers, intervalles des rides formant des gros points ocelles. Yeux grands, glabres ; ocelles en triangle, les posterieurs touchent les yeux. Vertex depuis Tocelle poster ieure jusqu'a Texeavation frontale formant un espace deux fois aussi long que large, a bords paralleles ; bord posterieur du vertex margine en arc comme le bord posterieur des yeux, puis declive oblique- ment en arriere, cette partie oblique a gros points ocelles. Tempes graduellement et fortement elargies par en bas, leur bord posterieur aigu et margine. Joues ayant le tiers de la longueur des yeux, avec un large sillon. Excavation frontale profonde, plus de quatre fois aussi large que sa distance du bord oculaire, lisse et brillant, sa partie superieure striee en arc transversalement, son extremite superieure arquee et marginee. Antennes avec une massue de sept articles, scape aussi long que les trois articles suivants reunis, 2^ article deux fois aussi long que gros, 3« de moitie plus long que le 2^, 4® plus court que le 2«, 5® un peu plus court que le 3^ et a peine plus gros, 6-12 subitement grossis et serres, le 6« moins gros que les suivants, qui sont un peu transversaux, sauf le dernier. Pronotum nul au milieu, le bord dorsal du prothorax etant forme par le col, situe plus bas que le mesonotum ; celui-ci un peu allonge, brillant, pubescent, a points epars et fins, arete mediane traversant
IX, D, 3 Kieifer: Enumeration des Serphides 297
encore le scutellum, sillons parapsidaux divergents en arriere. Scutellum grand, atteignant presque la demi-longueur du mesonotum, arrondi en arriere et ponctue comme le mesonotum, bord posterieur releve, tranchant et separe du disque par un enfoncement en forme de gouttiere, qui est traverse par de courtes aretes longitudinales. Metanotum tres court, parcouru par des aretes, armee d'une dent horizontale, longue, atteignant les deux tiers du scutellum, graduellement amincie et profonde- ment excavee dorsalement. Segment median court, parcouru par des aretes, divise au milieu, jusqu'a sa base, en deux lobes. Pleures ridees en long, mesopleures tres excavees, propleures avec un long espace elliptique margine. Ailes jaunes, atteignant le segment anal, sous-costale eloignee du bord, marginale ponc- tif orme, postmarginale nulle, stigmatique oblique, longue, noueuse au bout. Abdomen un peu plus long que le reste du corps, aussi large que le thorax, graduellement aminci en arriere, compose de 6 segments transversaux, sauf le 6« qui est triangulaire, et aussi long que large, les trois premiers graduellement plus longs, stries en long comme les autres.
Taille : $ , 6 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Camptoteleia flavipeimis sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; scape, hanches et pattes jaunes. Tete sans arete transversale en arriere des ocelles, non declive obliquement en arriere mais decoupee en arc, grossierement ridee-ponctuee, vertex ridee en travers, joues a sillon, yeux non margines, fossette frontale comme chez le precedent mais non striee. Antennes filiformes; scape un peu plus long que les articles 2 et 3 reunis, lisse et glabre comme le 2«, les suivants pubescents et mats, le 3^ un peu plus long que le 2^, 4-11 cylindriques, aussi longs que le 2« mais plus gros, a peine aussi longs que gros, le 5^ avec une minime dent au milieu du bord exteme, 12^ plus long que le 11®. Thorax conforme comme chez le precedent, sauf la sculpture et la dent du metanotum; sa partie dorsale est ^grossierement ridee en travers, la dent du metanotum est petite, large, un peu transversale, excavee dorsale- ment et cupuliforme. Ailes jaunes, atteignant le segment anal, nervures brunes, conformees comme chez le precedent. Abdomen a peine plus long que le reste du corps, graduellement et fortement aminci en arriere a partir du milieu, les deux derniers segments n'ayant pas la demi-largeur du second, le premier strie, les suivants grossierement reticules, 3^ et 4^ aussi
298 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
longs que larges, les autres transversaux, 6^ et 7^ deux fois aussi larges que longs, sans appendices.
Taille : $ , 3.8 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Camptoteleia cupularis sp. no v. ( ^ .)
Noir ; scape, hanches et pattes d'un jaune pale, antennes brunes, tarse posterieur assombri. Tete grossierement ponctuee, les points non ocelles, vertex ride en travers. Article 3« des antennes deux fois aussi long que le 2^ distinctement plus long que le 4% 4-12 cylindriques, un peu allonges, subegaux sauf le 12« qui est plus long que le 9«. Mesonotum et scutellum brillants, a points epars et fins, dent du metanotum cupuliforme comme chez le precedent. Ailes subhyalines, nervures jaunes. Abdomen de moitie plus long que le reste du corps, tergites stries en long, 2-7 non lisses et brillants entre les aretes mais grossiere- ment ponctues et mats, le 3« le plus long, faiblement allonge, 2® et 8« aussi long que larges, les autres transversaux, le 7« tronque, avec une dent a peine perceptible a chaque angle posterieur.
Taille : ^ , 5.5 mm. Pour le reste, semblable au precedent.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus MACROTELEIA Westwood
Les representants de ce genre dans les lies Philippines se distinguent comme il suit:
1. Scutellum muni, en arriere, de deux bouquets de longs polls blancs, ligne
dorsale du 6^ tergite fortement arquee M. manilensis Ashm.
Scutellum sans bouquets de polls, ligne dorsale du 6^ tergite droite 2.
2. Thorax densement pubescent dorsalement et mat; impression frontale
tres faible, mate et ponctuee sauf le centre, 7^ tergite depassant de
moitie le 7© sternite M. superans sp. nov.
Thorax presque glabre, impression frontale profonde, lisse et brillante.. 3.
3. Postmarginale guere plus longue que la marginale, 2e et 3^ tergites de la
$ d'egale longueur.... M. crawfordi Kieff. (M. kiefferi Crawf. non Brues). Postmarginale au moins deux fois aussi longue que la marginale 4.
4. Impression frontale moins large que sa distance des yeux, tete et meso-
hotum densement ponctues, 6^ tergite de la ? comprime et plus long
que le 5e M. striativentris Crawf.
Impression frontale au moins deux fois aussi large que sa distance des yeux, 6e tergite de la ? deprime comme les autres, plus court que le 5^, tous deux transversaux 5.
5. Tete lisse, a ponctuation superficielle, eparse et peu distincte.
M. philippinensis Kieff. Tete k points gros et serres M. cavifrons sp. nov.
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 299
Macroteleia superans sp. nov. ( S .)
Noir, mat; scape, hanches et pattes d'un jaune clair, reste des antennes d'un jaune brunatre. Tete de moitie plus large que longue, pubescente, ponctuee densement et assez finement, tempes ridees en long ou reticulees. Fossette frontale remplacee par une faible depression non marginee, moins large que sa distance des yeux, mate et ponctuee, sauf un petit espace lisse au centre. Joues a sillon, mesurant le quart des yeux, ceux-ci glabres. Ocelles posterieurs distants de Toeil de leur diametre. Scape un peu arque, a peine plus court que les articles 2 et 3 r^unis, 2« un peu plus mince que les suivants, obconique, deux f ois aussi long que gros, 3« trois fois aussi long que gros, 4-11 cylindriques, allonges mais moins que le 2^, le 5^ avec une dent laterale, 12« plus long que le 11«. Thorax dorsalement plus fortement pubes- cent de gris que la tete, de sorte que sa ponctuation, qui est plus fine que celle de la tete, est a peine perceptible. Pronotum aussi eleve que le mesonotum, profondement decoupe au milieu et seulement ponctiforme a cet endroit. Mesonotum allonge, sillons parapsidaux percurrents, tres divergents en avant. Ailes un peu jaunatres, nervures jaunes, marginale aussi longue ou a peine plus longue que la stigmatique, postmarginale presque triple de la stigmatique, celle-ci oblique, longue, noueuse au bout. Segment median glabre, ride en long, tronque posterieurement, sans inci- sion et sans dents. Pleures subglabres, rugueuses, mesopleures cannelees superieurement, enfoncees, lisses et brillantes dans la moitie inferieure. Metatarse plus de deux fois aussi long que le 2« article, egalant les 3 suivants reunis. Abdomen presque deux fois aussi long que le reste du corps, fusiforme, les 7 tergites allonges, le 1«^ d'un tiers plus long que large, 2« un peu plus court que le 3% qui est deux fois aussi long que large, 4« a peine plus court que le 2% plus long que le 1«^ 5® plus long que le 6% un peu plus court que le 4% 6^ egal au 1^% 7® mince, en pointe triangulaire, un peu plus long que large; vu de cote le 7® tergite depasse de sa demi-longueur le 7® sternite; les 4 premiers tergites sont stries en long, 5® faiblement ride en long, 6® et 7^ mats et chagrines, vus de cote, leur ligne dorsale est droite.
Taille: $, 6.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Macroteleia eavifrons sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, brillant; scape, hanches et pattes d'un jaune sale, tarse posterieur noir. Tete presque deux fois aussi large que longue.
300 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
avec des points gros et denses, sauf dans la fossette du front, qui est profonde, lisse, et atteignant presque les yeux. Joues tres petites, avec un sillon. Ocelles en triangle, les posterieurs sont distants des yeux de moins de leur diametre. Thorax con- forme comme chez le precedent, sauf la sculpture; mesonotum presque lisse, avec une ponctuation tres fine et peu distincte, bord anterieur a gros points alignes, sillons parapsidaux divergents en avant. Scutellum transversal, presque lisse. Metanotum grossierement sculpte, egalant le tiers du scutellum. Segment median petit, decoupe, les angles en forme de petite dent. Propleures avec Tespace elliptique ordinaire. Ailes hyalines, marginale egalant la stigmatique, atteignant le tiers de la postmarginale, stigmatique oblique, longue, avec un noeud au bout. Metatarse posterieur egalant au moins les 4 articles suivants reunis. Abdomen a peine deux fois aussi long que le reste du corps, f usiforme, les 5 premiers tergites grossierement stries en long, 6® et 7® chagrines et mats, tous deprimes, le 1^"^ un peu allonge, plus court que le 2^, 2-4 subegaux, au moins aussi longs que larges, 5® et 6® a peine transversaux, 7® tres petit.
Taille : $ , 6 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Macroteleia flaviceps sp. nov. {$ *)
Noir ; tete jaune et mate, alentours des ocelles assombris, scape, hanches, pattes et thorax sauf le dessus d'un jaune mat, milieu des tergites 2-4 et des sternites 2-4 d'un jaune roussatre, flagellum brun. Tete decoupee en arc posterieurement, grosse, un peu transversale, lisse ou a peine chagrinee. Tempes tres larges, aussi larges que les yeux. Joues egalant les deux tiers des yeux, traversees par un sillon. Ocelles posterieurs touchant presque les yeux. Scape aussi long que les trois articles suivants reunis, articles 2 et 3 obconiques, au moins de moitie plus longs que gros, 4-11 egaux, cylindriques, a peine plus longs que gros, le 5^ un peu grossi, le 4® un peu plus court que le 6®, 12« faiblement allonge. Mesonotum plan, allonge, mat, pubes- cent, avec une ponctuation mediocre et dense, sillons parapsidaux percurrents, f ortement convergents en arriere. Scutellum trans- versal, sculpte comme le mesonotum, tronque en arriere, borde posterieurement par des fossettes. Metanotum a peine visible. Segment median horizontal, transversal, tronque en arriere. Ailes subhyalines, atteignant le milieu du 4^ tergite, sous-costale
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 301
eloignee du bord, marginale plus longue que la stigmatique, celle-ci oblique, mediocrement longue, noueuse au bout, post- marginale presque triple de la stigmatique, basale nuUe. Meta- tarse posterieur un peu plus court que les 4 articles suivants reunis. Abdomen deux fois et demie aussi long que le reste du corps, plus etroit que le thorax, presque lineaire, sauf que les 3 derniers segments sont un peu plus etroits, tous allonges, 1-3 graduellement plus longs, le 3* deux fois aussi long que large, tous trois stries, leurs bords lateraux avec une arete marginale plus forte, 4^ egal au 2«, 5-7 graduellement raccourcis, rides en long ou finement chagrines et pubescents.
Taille: 4.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
DIAPRIID.ZE
Genus PARAMESITJS Westwood
Paramesius luzonicus sp. nov. ( S >)
Noir, lisse et brillant ; flagellum roux brun, mat et pubescent, mandibules, hanches et pattes d'un roux sombre, palpes blan- chatres. Tete un peu transversale vue d'en haut, plus haute que longue vue de cote, sans ponctuation. Yeux glabres. Joues sans sillon. Palpes maxillaires ayant apres la flexion 3 articles dont le 1^^ est tres petit, le 2« comprime et triangulaire, tous deux reunis aussi longs que celui qui precede la flexion, le dernier un peu plus long que Tavant-dernier. Antennes aussi longues que le corps, scape cylindrique, egalant le 3« article, le 2^ glabre, brillant, globuleux, mince comme les suivants, 3^ quatre fois aussi long que le 2^, 3-13 graduellement amincis et raccourcis, le 12® plus de deux fois aussi long que gros, egal au 13^ Sillons parapsidaux percurrents, divergents en avant, lobe median du mesonotum un peu plus large en arriere que les lobes lateraux, ceux-ci f aiblement deprimes, avec une fossette allongee pres du bord externe. Scutellum avec deux fossettes separees par une arete. Segment median avec une dent pointue mais petite. Ailes faiblement brunies, depassant un peu Tabdomen, brievement ciliees, sous- costale atteignant le milieu, marginale guere plus longue que large, stigmatique oblique, egale a la marginale, recurrente indiquee par une trace, basale indiquee par un trait a peine perceptible, arque et distant de la marginale de moins de sa longueur. Thorax brievement ovoidal, guere plus long que haut. Tiers distal du tibia posterieur subitement grossi. Petiole
302 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
egalant la demi-longueur de rabdomen, trois fois aussi long que gros, cannele; abdomen en ellipse allongee, deprime, gra- duellement aminci en avant jusqu'au petiole, 2^ tergite occupant les t, 2« sternite occupant les f de Tabdomen.
Taille: 3.6 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus SPILOMICRUS Westwood
Ce genre comprenait 5 especes dans les lies Philippines ; nous y ajoutons une sixieme.
1. Sillons parapsidaux percurrents 2.
Sillons parapsidaux nuls ou marques seulement en arriere, tete sans
ponctuation 3.
2. Tempes et joues ponctuees S. carinifrons Kieff.
Tete sans ponctuation S. philippinensis sp. nov.
3. Scutellum ayant, outre les 2 fossettes basales, une fossette laterale
allongee et une rangee de points au bord posterieur 4.
Scutellum sans fossettes laterales ni posterieures ; sillons parapsidaux formant seulement un point allonge S. variicornis Kieff.
4. Yeux relies aux mandibules par un sillon, sillons parapsidaux marques
au tiers posterieur S. opertus Kieif.
Yeux non relies aux mandibules par un sillon, les sillons parapsidaux forment seulement un point allonge au bord posterieur 5.
5. Flagellum roux brun, tergites ne couvrant pas les sternites.
S. dispansus Kieff. Flagellum noir brillant et plus gros, tergites couvrant les sternites.
S. nitidicornis Kieff.
Spilomicrus philippinensis sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; flagellum brun noir, hanches et pattes d'un jaune bru- natre. Tete non ponctuee, lisse comme le reste du corps. Yeux velus. Antennes filiformes, 2^ article globuleux, 3^ plus court que le scape, presque trois fois aussi long que gros, 4« non echancre, 12« encore deux fois aussi long que gros, plus court que le 13«; pubescence fine. Sillons parapsidaux percurrents, fortement divergents en avant. Scutellum avec 2 fossettes ba- sales separees par une arete, fossettes laterales petites et minces. Segment median avec une petite dent pointue. Ailes ciliees, sous-costale parallele a la costale, depassant un peu le tiers basal de Taile, marginale pas plus longue que large, stigmatique oblique, un peu plus longue que la marginale, basale faiblement marquee, arquee. Petiole presque deux fois aussi long que gros, strie; abdomen deprime, en ellipse, releve a sa base, d6passe de beaucoup par les ailes.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
IX, D, 3 Kieifer: Enumey^ation des Serphides 303
Genus DIGALESUS novum
Semblable a Galesus, dont il differe par le scape non bispinu- leux, par les antennes de 13 articles et les ailes pourvues d'une sous-costale, d'une marginale et d'une stigmatique. Le type est : Digalesus flavipes sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, lisse et brillant, flagellum brun sombre et pubescent, pattes jaunes, hanches assombries, moitie posterieure des tempes, devant du prothorax et metapleures, avec un f eutrage blanchatre. Tete allongee, presque droite dessus et dessous, declive presque verticalement en avant, plus longue dorsalement que haute, ven- tralement encore plus longue et prolongee en un bee forme par les mandibules et atteignant le prosternum; vertex avec 2 aretes longitudinales qui atteignent les ocelles, ceux-ci groupes en triangle, se touchant et situes au bord anterieur de la tete; une carene mediane descend de Tocelle anterieur j usque entre les an- tennes en s'elevant graduellement, Tarete qui contourne le bord des yeux se prolonge en carene parallele a la carene mediane et s'arrete brusquement en forme de dent, comme la mediane ; lamelle f rontale prolongee encore au-dela de la tete, bilobee et portant les antennes. Scape long, un peu arque, subcylindrique, sans spi- nules a son extremite, a peine plus long que le 3® article, 2« article de moitie plus long que gros, 3® presque triple du 2®, au moins de moitie plus long que le 4% 5« un peu plus court que le 4% un peu plus long que le 6®, 6-12 egaux, cylindriques, de moitie plus longs que gros, 13® plus long que le 12^ Pronotum profon- dement decoupe en arriere ; mesonotum un peu transversal, sillons parapsidaux larges, faiblement convergents en arriere, ou ils sont distants de deux fois leur largeur. Scutellum allonge, fossettes anterieures allongees, separees par une arete, un peu plus courtes que les fossettes laterales, fossettes du bord poste- rieur ponctiformes. Segment median a 3 aretes paralleles, angles posterieurs prolonges en dent. Ailes jaunatres, costale nulle, sous-costale brune, atteignant presque le milieu de Taile, marginale carree, stigmatique oblique, pas plus longue que la marginale, un trait brunatre indique une trace de recurrente oblique, bords non cilies. Tibias graduellement et faiblement renfles. Petiole deux fois aussi long que gros, subcylindrique, avec 3 fortes aretes dorsales ; abdomen ellipsoidal, deprime, grand tergite occupant un peu plus des deux tiers anterieurs, a sillon traversant le tiers anterieur, les quatre suivants graduellement raccourcis.
Taille: 3.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
304 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Genus HEMIGALESUS Kieffer
Les especes qui forment ce genre sont particulieres aux Phil- ippines; elles se distinguent de la fagon suivante:
1. Les deux spinules externes de la tete sont pointues et plus longues que
larges 2.
Les deux spinules externes sont en forme de lamelle un peu transversale et arrondie 5.
2. Mesonotum fortement convexe dans sa partie mediane, deprime ou enfonce
lateralement 3.
Mesonotum egalement convexe partout, sans depressions laterales 4.
3. Noir; face, pleures en partie, hanches et pattes rousses, tete un peu trans-
versale vue d'en haut H. niger Kieff.
Roux; abdomen noir sauf le petiole, tete un peu allongee vue d'en haut.
H. rufus Kieff.
4. Yeux deux fois aussi larges que leur distance du bord occipital.
H. brevicornis Kieff. Yeux a peine plus larges que leur distance du bord occipital.
H. gracilis Kieff.
5. Bouche perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete et atteignant la demi-
hauteur de la tete, 2® article antennaire du male obconique, au moins
aussi long que le 4® H. longrirostrum sp. nov.
Bouche ayant au maximum le quart ou le tiers de la hauteur de la tete, 2e article antennaire du male subglobuleux, n*atteignant que la demi- longueur du 4« 6.
6. Bouche continuant la direction du grand axe de la tete, scape avec une
dent au milieu du cote externe, tete et thorax roux (c^).
H. dentatus sp. nov.
Bouche perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete, scape inerme, tete et
thorax noirs (d"), ou tete noire, thorax roux (2)- H. auriculatus sp. nov.
Hemigalesus auriculatus sp. nov. ($ , ? .)
Tete noire, thorax et abdomen d'un brun noir chez le male, roux marron chez la femelle, petiole de la femelle et pattes d'un roux jaune, antennes d'un brun sombre chez le male, d'un roux jaune chez la femelle. Tete subglobuleuse, spinule mediane petite, les 2 laterales en forme de lamelle un peu transversale, subarrondie. Palpes jaunes, pluriarticules. Scape droit, bispinuleux a Textr^- mite, sans dent au milieu du cote externe, 2« article tres court et subglobuleux chez le male, moins gros et de moitie plus petit que le 4«, le 3« plus long que le 4«, 4-13 cylindriques, presque de moitie plus longs que gros, 14« de moitie plus long que le 13® et aussi gros que lui, flagellum pubescent et mat, 3® article de la femelle obconique, 3-9 egalement minces, 4-9 d'abord globuleux, puis un peu transversaux, 10-12 subitement tres grossis, 10* et 11« aussi longs que gros, cylindriques, 12® ovoidal. Bouche en forme de bee, presque perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete,
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 305
egalant le tiers ou le quart de la hauteur de la tete. Ocelles situes en avant, a la limite de la surface horizontale du vertex et du front qui est presque vertical. Tete vue de cote aussi longue que haute. Thorax d'un tiers plus long que haut. Partie poste- rieure des tempes et partie anterieure du prothorax avec un feu- trage blanc. Mesonotum transversal, convexe au milieu, deprime lateralement, de moitie plus long que le scutellum. Celui-ci trian- gulaire, aussi large que long, avec une f ossette en avant. Segment median avec une arete. Ailes subhyalines, depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, ciliees longuement, sous-costale tres rapprochee du bord, depassant un peu le tiers proximal de Taile, marginale ob- cuneiforme, basale d'un jaune pale, double de sa distance de la marginale, perpendiculaire mais n'atteignant pas la sous-costale. Tibia posterieur subitement renfle au tiers distal. Petiole non strie, aussi long que gros ; abdomen deprime, chez le male graduel- lement elargi jusqu'a Textremite du 2« tergite, qui occupe les f anterieurs de Tabdomen ; chez la f emelle Tabdomen est elliptique et le grand tergite atteint presque Textremite.
Taille : 2.5 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Hemigalesus dentatus sp. nov. ( $ .)
Tete, thorax et petiole d'un roux marron, abdomen brun noir, deux premiers articles antennaires d'un roux brun, pattes d'un jaune roux. Tete vue de cote un peu plus longue que haute, plus longue ventralement que dorsalement, bee continuant la direction du grand axe de la tete. Scape avec une petite dent au milieu du cote externe. Thorax de moitie plus long que haut. Pour tout le reste, semblable au precedent.
Taille: 2.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Hemigalesus longirostrum sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; antennes d'un roux brun comme la bouche, hanches et pattes d'un roux clair. Bee perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete, long, atteignant la demi-hauteur de la tete. Scape graduel- lement grossi depuis sa base, sans dent au cote externe, son extremite est deux f ois aussi grosse que le 2® article, bispinuleuse ; 2« article obconique, au moins aussi long que le 4% 3® distincte- ment plus long que le 4^, 4-13 cylindriques, a peine plus longs que gros, 14« plus mince que le 13« et pas plus long que lui. Tarse posterieur comprime, ce qui est aussi le cas pour les deux especes precedentes. Petiole un peu transversa], lisse et brillant;
306 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
terg'ites 3-6 egaux et tres courts, abdomen de la longueur du thorax.
Taille : 2.5 mm. Pour tout le reste, semblable a H. auriculatus.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus GALESUS Curtis
Les especes de ce genre qui ont ete observees aux Philippines se distinguent de la f agon suivante :
1. Ailes entieres, non incisees ni pliees 2.
Ailes incisees a Textremite ou en arriere de Textremite 4.
2. Pattes posterieures rousses, sauf les hanches 3.
Pattes posterieures en grande partie noires G. manilse Ashm.
3. Petiole densement pubescent de blanc, articles du flagellum du male deux
fois aussi longs que gros G. luzonicus Ashm.
Petiole glabre dorsalement, articles du flagellum du male a peine plus longs que gros G. philippinensis Kieff.
4. Sillons parapsidaux se touchant en arriere G. clavaticornis Kieff.
Sillons parapsidaux distants en arriere 5.
5. Sillons parapsidaux distants en arriere d*un peu plus de leur largeur,
petiole du male deux fois aussi long que gros G. crawfordi Kieff.
Sillons parapsidaux distants en arriere de deux fois leur largeur, petiole de moitie plus long que gros 6.
6. Surface dorsale de la tete plus courte que la hauteur de la tete, sillon
atteignant presque le milieu de Tabdomen G. curticeps Kieff.
Surface dorsale de la tete plus longue que la hauteur, sillon du 2® tergite prolonge par une ligne atteignant le dernier tiers.... G. lineatus sp. nov.
Galesus (Schizogalesus) lineatus sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, brillant, pattes sauf les hanches d'un roux clair. Tete allongee, sa surface dorsale plus longue que sa hauteur, plus courte que sa surface ventrale, lisse et brillante. Dents laterales du devant de la tete assez grandes. Yeux margines en haut par une arete. Face tres convexe, separee de Toeil par un profond sillon, de chaque cote. Scape deux fois aussi long que gros, ride en long, bispinuleux a Textremite, 2® article a peine plus long que le 3®, tous deux cylindriques, un peu plus longs que gros, 4« et 5^ aussi longs que gros, 2-5 egalement gros, 6® a peine plus gros que le 5«, mais un peu moins que le 7«, presque transversal, 7-11 transversaux, 12® ovoi'dal, pas de massue distincte ou mas- sue de 6 ou 7 articles ; flagellum pubescent. Collier du prothorax et feutrage des tempes d'un gris sombre. Sillons parapsidaux profonds, divergents en avant, distants de deux fois leur largeur au bord posterieur. Fossettes du scutellum separees par une arete, un peu allongees, mais moins longues que les fossettes laterales, les 2 fossettes posterieures ponctif ormes. Ailes un peu brunies, pliees, echancrees en arriere de la pointe alaire. Tibia
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 307
posterieur graduellement et faiblement grossi dans sa moiti^ distale, metatarse posterieur pas deux fois aussi long que le 2« article. Petiole de moitie plus long que gros, cannele grossiere- ment, 2^ tergite occupant presque tout le dessus de Tabdomen, sillon traversant le tiers anterieur du grand tergite, prolonge ensuite par une fine ligne jusqu'a Textremite du 2« tiers; a sa base se voit de chaque cote une petite f ossette ; le 2^ tergite couvre encore de chaque cote un quart de la largeur des sternites 2-5 et une partie du 6^, dorsalement il couvre les tergites 3-5.
Taille : 3.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Genus STYLOPRIA novum
Differe de Phsenopria surtout par les yeux poilus et le scape, dont la moitie proximale est filiforme et la moitie distale subite- ment grossie tres fortement. Le type est:
Stylopria rufa sp. nov. ( $ .)
Roux clair; antennes a massue d'un brun noir, abdomen noir, tiers posterieur brun roux sombre. Tete globuleuse, lisse et brillante comme tout le corps, large comme le thorax. Yeux glabres, circulaires. Bouche non proeminente. Palpes tres courts, non proeminents. Bord posterieur des tempes avec une pubescence soyeuse. Scape a moitie distale subitement grossie, trois fois aussi grosse que la moitie basale qui est filiforme, 2® article obconique, deux fois aussi gros que le 3^ 3-9 egalement minces, obconiques, sauf le 9« qui est subglobuleux, 10-12 for- mant une massue subite et grosse, 10^ subglobuleux, 11® transver- sal et plus gros que le 10®, 12® brievement ovoi'dal. Thorax un peu plus long que haut. Prothorax avec un collier de feutrage blanc, interrompu en haut. Mesonotum transversal, convexe, sans sillons parapsidaux. Scutellum convexe, sans fossette a sa base. Segment median avec une faible carene. Ailes de- passant beaucoup Tabdomen, longuement ciliees, hyalines, sous- costale formant le bord, depassant un peu le tiers basal, margi- nale obcuneiforme, de son extremite elargie part une trace de la basale dirigee obliquement vers la base alaire et fortement courbee en angle au milieu, une trace semblable ou ligne jaunatre indique une mediane eloignee du bord, arquee, graduellement rapprochee du bord a son extremite qui aboutit a la base de la marginale. Aile inferieure lineaire, sauf que son bord anterieur est releve triangulairement a Tendroit des crochets frenaux, cils inferieurs deux fois aussi longs que la largeur de Taile. Tibia posterieur subitement grossi au tiers distal. Petiole aussi
124685 8
308 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
long que gros, pubescent de gris ; abdomen a peine deprime, f usi- forme, aussi long que le reste du corps, 2« tergite occupant les deux tiers anterieurs, 5® tergite egalant le 3« et le 4« reunis, extremite de Tabdomen en pointe.
Taille: 1.2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Genus ASHMEADOPRIA Kieffer
Quatre especes de ce genre reviennent aux Philippines; elles se distinguent comme il suit:
1. Yeux poilus A. (?) trichota sp. nov.
Yeux glabres 2.
2. Scutellum carene ^ 3.
Scutellum convexe, non carene 4.
3. Petiole pas plus long que gros, verticilles antennaires atteignant Textre-
mite de Particle suivant (c?) A. bakeri Kieff.
Petiole de moitie plus long que gros (?) A. subcarinata sp. nov.
Petiole deux fois aussi long que gros, verticilles antennaires atteignant la
massue du 2® article suivant (c?) A. luzonica sp. nov.
4. Scutellum a fossette unique, tete et thorax noirs A. nigriventris Kieff.
Scutellum a 2 fossettes ponctiformes et tres distantes, tete et thorax
noirs A. bipunctata Kieff.
Ashmeadopria luzonica sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir, brillant; antennes, hanches et pattes rousses, moitie basale du scape et massue des articles 4-13 un peu obscurcies. Yeux glabres. Antennes de moitie plus longues que le corps, 3« article cylindrique, aussi long que le 4% a 2 verticilles de poils, 4-13 avec une massue deux fois aussi longue que grosse, petiole au moins aussi long que la massue, mais graduellement rac- courci et massue graduellement allongee, au 14® article le petiole est tres court, verticilles longs, atteignant la massue du 2« article suivant. Prothorax a collier de feutrage blanc. Mesonotum convexe partout. Scutellum carene, avec une fossette unique. Segment median avec une lamelle triangulaire. Ailes hyalines, longuement ciliees, depassant de beaucoup Tabdomen, marginale comme d'ordinaire, n'atteignant pas Textremite du tiers basal, de son extremite distale part une trace de la basale jaune brisee en angle au milieu. Petiole deux fois aussi long que gros, lisse, brillant, sauf sur les cotes qui ont des poils soyeux blancs, longs, denses et dresses; abdomen en ellipse allongee, deprime, grand tergite atteignant presque Textremite.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
IX, D. 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 309
Ashmeadopria bipunctata Kieff .
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Get insecte n'etait connu que de Los Baiios; la femelle reste encore a decouvrir.
Ashmeadopria subcarinata sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; antennes rousses, sauf la massue, hanches et pattes jaunes. Tete globuleuse. Scape cylindrique, 2« article 6gal au 3®, obconique, 4-7 egalement minces, pas plus longs que gros, retrecis basalement, 8-12 formant une massue graduelle, aussi longs que gros, sauf le 12® qui est ovoidal et plus long, pubescence tres fine et tres courte. Tempes, devant du prothorax et m^ta- pleures avec un feutrage blanc. Scutellum a peine caren6, fossette unique. Ailes depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, ciliees longuement, nervation ordinaire de ce genre. Tiers distal du tibia posterieur subitement grossi. Petiole de moitie plus long que gros, sa moitie posterieure porte dorsalement un feutrage blanc, dense et long; abdomen un peu plus long que le thorax, deprime, en ellipse, 2® tergite occupant plus des deux tiers anterieurs, extremite un peu en pointe.
Taille: 1.8 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Ashmeadopria (?) trichota sp. nov. ( $ .)
Se distingue de tous ses congendres par les yeux a poils longs et epars. Roux; antennes et pattes d'un roux plus pale, deux derniers articles antennaires noirs, abdomen brun au milieu. Tete globuleuse. Tempes, devant du prothorax et metapleures, avec un feutrage blanc et dense. Scape subcylindrique, arque, aussi long que les 3 articles suivants reunis, 2® article de moitie plus long que le 3® et plus gros que lui, tous deux obconiques, 4« obconique, un peu plus court que le 3«, un peu plus long que gros, 5-9 a peine plus longs que gros, 3-9 egalement minces, a poils egalant leur grosseur, 10« bien plus gros que le 9« mais bien moins gros que le 11% ovoidal, 11« et 12« tres gros, finement pubescents, le 12« ovoidal court, le 11® a peine transversal. Meso- notum convexe, transversal, sans sillons. Scutellum carene, avec une fossette en avant. Ailes hyalines, depassant I'abdomen, longuement ciliees, nervation ordinaire. Tibia posterieur subite- ment renfle au tiers distal. Petiole subglabre dorsalement, de moitie plus long que gros; abdomen deprime, aussi long que le thorax, en ellipse allongee, 2« tergite occupant les deux tiers anterieurs, tiers posterieur graduellement aminci.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
310 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Genus TRICHOPKIA Ashmead
Les especes de ce genre qui ont ete observees aux Philippines se distinguent comme il suit :
1. Thorax roux 2.
Thorax noir comme la tete et Tabdomen 3.
2. Tete et quart posterieur de Tabdomen roux T. analis Kieff.
Tete et abdomen noirs, sauf le petiole T. semirufa Kieff.
3. Scutellum avec deux fossettes T. maquilingensis sp. nov.
Scutellum avec une fossette unique T. caudata Kieff.
Trichopria maquilingensis sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir, brillant ; 2 premiers articles antennaires roux, hanches et pattes jaunes. Tete globuleuse. Scape cylindrique, un peu plus court que les articles 2 et 3 reunis, 2® obconique, egal au 5% 3« cylindrique, un peu plus long que le 4^ presque deux fois aussi long que le 5®, 4^ arque fortement, grossi a Textremite, plus long que le 5% 5-13 un peu plus longs que gros, sub- cylindriques, a poils epars, egalant en longueur les f de la grosseur des articles, 14« article un peu plus long que le 13«. Scutellum convexe, avec 2 fossettes distantes de leur largeur. Ailes hyalines, depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, ciliees longuement, pubescentes sauf aux alentours de la sous-costale, marginale comme d'ordinaire, de son extremite sort une ligne jaune et perpendiculaire. Tibia posterieur subitement grossi au tiers distale. Petiole pubescent, de moitie plus long que gros ; abdomen deprime, elliptique.
Taille: 1.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus SCAPOPRIA Kieff er Scapopria atriceps Kiejff.
Get insecte, dont le male est encore a decouvrir, n'etait connu que pour Los Bafios. M. Baker vient aussi de le decouvrir au Mont Maquiling, tres pres a Los Bafios.
BELYTID^
Genus XENOTOMA Foerster
Une espece etait connue pour Los Bafios; nous y ajoutons une seconde.
1. Pattes blanchatres, abdomen droi.t X. philippinensis Kieff.
Pattes d'un roux brun, abdomen recourbe au bout X. sorer sp. nov.
Xenotoma soror sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; mandibules rousses et se croisant, antennes d'un brun noir, scape noir, pattes d'un roux brun. Antennes filiformes,
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 311
scape plus long que le 3« article, 2« article globuleux, 3« quatre fois aussi long que gros, 3-14 graduellement raccourcis, le 14« un peu plus long que gros, plus court que le 15«. Cellule radiale fermee, tres mince, deux fois et demie aussi longue que large, beaucoup plus courte que la postmarginale, stigmatique oblique et tres courte, recurrente plus longue que la marginale, continuant la direction du radius, puis dirigee par en bas, margi- nale un peu plus courte que la cellule radiale. Petiole presque deux fois aussi long que gros, strie; abdomen aussi mince a la base que le petiole, piriforme, grand tergite occupant les |, le dernier i forme une pointe conique recourbee par en haut.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Genus CINETUS Jurine
Cinetus maquilingensis sp. nov. { S .)
Noir; mandibules rousses, antennes d'un brun noir, pattes anterieures d'un jaune clair, sauf les trochanters et les hanches, les quatre pattes posterieures brunes sauf les hanches. Anten- nes filiformes, 2« article subglobuleux, 3® plus long que le 1®^ et le 2« reunis, fortement decoupe au tiers distal, renfle a Textre- mite, un peu plus long que le 4^ les suivants graduellement raccourcis, les derniers encore trois fois aussi longs que gros. Ailes hyalines, marginale plus longue que la cellule radiale qui est etroite, fermee et a peine plus longue que la moitie de la postmarginale, stigmatique tres courte, recurrente presque double de la cellule radiale, dirigee par en bas des son origine, parallele a la basale. Petiole fortement strie, deux fois et deniie a trois fois aussi long que gros, egalant au moins la moitie de Tabdomen qui est deprime, brievement fusiforme, strie a sa base, ou il passe insensiblement au petiole, sans separation bien distincte.
Taille: 2.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont MaquiHng.
NOTES ON A NESTING PLACE OF CROCODILUS PALUSTRIS
LESSON
By W. SCHULTZE
{From the Entomological Section, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of Science,
Manila, P. I.)
One plate
During the biological expedition of the Bureau of Science and the University of the Philippines to Taytay, Palawan, April 7 to June 7, 1913, opportunity was taken to explore two lakes near Taytay, the larger one being called by the natives from the village of Bantolan *'Manguao," the smaller one "Nagsirocan." According to the statements of old natives, neither had been visited before by white men. Lake Manguao is located approx- imately 8 kilometers south of the town of Taytay. Mr. E. D. Merrill and several natives relocated an old direct trail from Taytay to Lake Manguao during the latter part of April, 1913. A second trip to the lake was made on May 11, by a party con- sisting of A. L. Day, R. A. Rowley, Mrs. Schultze, myself, and several assistants and guides, and we camped there until May 16. Our camp was located on the southwestern shore. On May 14, while going close to the shore on a raft, Mr. Day^ discovered a peculiar heap or mound of grass on the beach in one of the little bays of the lake. Upon coming back to camp, our guides, natives of the town of Bantolan, were asked as to the nature of the peculiar mound. They stated that it might be the nest of a crocodile. Whereupon the next morning Mr. Rowley, his assistant, Mrs. Schultze, and I went on a bamboo raft to investigate the place. The mound was made of a very coarse, wiry, thick-stemed grass {Ischaemum sp.) which had been torn out by the roots, scratched together, and piled up. A space about 8 meters long and 5 meters wide, on the sandy beach, had been cleared absolutely of the grass. The mound
^ He states :
Lake Manguao is indicated on various charts, but because of the fact that very little surveying has been done in northern Palawan the lake has hereto- fore been incorrectly located. On May 14, I went on a bamboo raft south- east from our camp. On the southeast side of the second point I observed a mound of grass, the nature of which was not clear.
313
314 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
was located about 2 meters from the water. It was somewhat irregular in shape, about 2.5 meters in diameter at the base and 1.5 meters in height. All around the mound, foot marks of a crocodile and furrows made by the animal's claws could be seen, so it was evident that the reptile had completed the nest very recently, that is, within the preceding few days, as several heavy rains would have washed away the marks in the sand. In pull- ing the mound apart, it was noticed that the material was very firmly packed. The grass was mixed with sand and was moist. In about the center of the mound and about 40 centimeters above the ground, 30 eggs were found arranged in several layers. The eggs were taken with part of the nest material to our camp. One egg was opened, and it appeared to be absolutely fresh. On the next day, the eggs were transported in a tin can by carriers over a bad mountain trail to our main camp at Taytay. I there packed the eggs in a box filled with fresh grass, leaves, and some of the original nest-material. On June 7 the eggs were taken to Manila, where I kept them with the object of determin- ing the period of incubation and time of hatching. Measure- ments of 20 eggs gave the following results.
Measurements, in millimeters, of 20 eggs of Crocodilus palustris Lesson.
|
78 X50 |
77 X49.5 |
77 X49.5 |
83.5X46 |
|
75.5X49.5 |
76 X49.5 |
76 X49 |
78 X50 |
|
76 X49.5 |
76 X49.5 |
73.5X49 |
79 X49 |
|
76 X49.5 |
76 X49 |
80 X49 |
79 X48 |
|
75.5X49.5 |
75.5X49.5 |
83.5X50 |
82 X48.5 |
Average 77,65x49.15.
The egg is decidedly oblong ellipsoidal and has a very hard porous shell with a high porcelain luster. Though the color is a translucent white, the egg has very strongly marked opaque white band around the middle (girth). The band is about 4 centimeters wide and in strong contrast with the two ends of the egg.
The eggs were kept in the box with the original material and covered with a 5-centimeter layer of old horse manure. As the incubation proceeded, the white band on the egg became less dis- tinct. On July 1, one egg was opened; the embryo was about 6.5 centimeters long. On August 19, another egg was opened, and the embryo was found to be 19 centimeters long. On Sep- tember 4, as no egg had hatched, I opened all of those which showed signs of incubation and found that all of the embryos had died except in one egg which was about ready to hatch. Their death was probably due to the fact that the material in
IX, D, 3 Schultze: Nesting Place of Crocodilus palustris 315
which they were packed had shrunken to such an extent that most of the eggs were not covered by more than 2 centimeters of the packing and that they therefore became too dry. At any rate, the time of incubation of the eggs of Crocodilus palus- tris is from seventeen to eighteen weeks in the Philippines.
During our stay at Taytay, we frequently noticed crocodiles close to the shore in the sea. The species was probably Croco- dilus porosus Schneid., the widely distributed seashore species. On an expedition to Malampaya Sound, west of Palawan, on August 20, 1913, I saw a specimen of this species at very close range, and the natives informed me that these reptiles are very abundant at the farther end of the sound. This statement was verified by members of our party, who saw as many as twenty at one time. Their abundance there is probably due to the large number of fish found in the sound. A specimen of C porosus Schneid., from Zamboanga, Mindanao, which I have had under observation for three years, measured 30 centimeters when re- ceived, and at the present time measures 85 centimeters, which indicates that crocodiles grow faster than is ordinarily supposed, at least during the early years of their life.
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I
Fig. 1. A nest of Crocodilus paluatris Lesson. (Photograph by R. A. Rowley.) 2. An egg of Crocodilus paluatris Lesson. Actual size. (Photograph by Charles Martin.)
Vol. IXy Sec, Dy No, 1 of this Journal was issued May 28, 191U; No. 2 was issued August 2^, IQIJ^.
317
Schultze: Nesting Place of Crocodilus palustris.] [Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
Fig. 1. A nest of Crocodilus palustris Lesson.
Fig. 2. An egg of Crocodilus palustris Lesson. Actual size. PLATE I.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology, AND Anthropology
Vol. IX AUGUST, 1914 No. 4
PALAEMONS of the PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
By R. P. COWLES
(From the Department of Zoology, College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
Three plates and 1 text figure
The palaemons are widely distributed over the world, but are usually confined to the fresh-water lakes and rivers of trop- ical and subtropical countries. A few species, however, inhabit the temperate regions and some live in the sea and in brackish water. In the Philippine Islands this genus is well represented, and especially is this the case in the lakes and rivers near Manila where several species are very abundant. The palaemons, com- monly but incorrectly spoken of as ''shrimps'' or "lobsters,'' appear occasionally in our markets, and are considered an excellent food, being even more highly esteemed than the so- called ''salt water shrimps" belonging to the genus Penaeus. They form an important article of food for the Filipinos who live inland; consequently, most of them are purchased before they reach the markets of such coast cities as Manila.
A glance at a map of the Philippines shows how rich the Islands are in rivers and streams which flow to the sea. It is safe to say that all of them contain palaemons and that these are used by the Filipinos for food. I have collected these crus- taceans from streams near Port Galera on Mindoro Island, from streams at Taytay on Palawan Island, from a small river at Sisiman on Luzon Island, and from Mariquina, San Juan, and Pasig Rivers near Manila. In addition to specimens from the
129877 319
320 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science iqh
above-mentioned localities, we have in our collection specimens from Gandara, Samar Island; from Lake Lanao, Mindanao Island; from Jaro, Leyte Island; and from Pampanga River, Luzon Island.
While the palaemon fishery in the Philippines is not so large as some other fisheries, it is an industry which is carried on all over the Islands and is one which deserves to be improved if possible. The French people are famous for the way in which they have cultivated the fresh-water crayfish in France, and even here near Manila it is said that an attempt has been made to grow palaemons in some of the fishponds. A series of ex- periments conducted on a scientific and practical basis would be of great value to this industry.
METHODS USED IN FISHING
At least seven methods of fishing for palaemons are employed in the Philippine Islands. (1) The larger forms are often caught in a large fish trap known as the baclad. This consists of a split bamboo fence arranged in the form of a V. The palaemons follow the two wings of the V until they reach a narrow opening at the angle, through which they pass into an inclosure. The narrow opening is guarded by pieces of bamboo which point in- ward and prevent the crustaceans from escaping. (2) The smaller forms are frequently caught by men and boys who dive and feel about in holes and crevices for them. (3) Another trap which is used is the bobo, a rectangular box made of bamboo. The bobo is filled with hay or grass through an opening in one side, and is then lowered to the bottom. It is allowed to remain in the water for two or three weeks until the hay or grass has decayed, after which the palaemons enter to feed on the material and the trap is hauled up. (4) The familiar cast net is also used in shallow water where the palaemons can be seen. It has been given the name dala by the Filipinos. (5) Another familiar way of catching these crustaceans is by hauling an ordinary seine. This seine, which is provided with a pocket, is called pukot.
(6) A method frequently employed is the following: Two men are seated in a banca, the one in the bow handles a dip net and the other in the stern does the paddling. The frame to which the net is attached is triangular, and is firmly attached at one angle to a long handle. This net is held close to the bottom where it catches the palaemons as the banca moves forward.
(7) The talabog consists of a large bundle of roots bound to- gether at both ends. This is lowered into the water and the palaemons instinctively cling to it or hide among the roots.
IX, D, 4 Cotvles: Palaemons of the Philippi7ie Islands 321
When the talabog is brought to the surface, they still remain attached. On Mindoro there is a modification of this method. Instead of the roots, a large bundle of leaves baited inside with cooked rice is used.
VALUE OF THE FISHERY
The commercial value of the palaemon fishery is difficult to estimate. Many Filipinos living along the banks of the rivers and lakes catch only enough for their own use. Fishermen who make a business of catching palaemons usually retail their catch in the locality where they live ; and in the neighborhood of towns or cities, as an example, Manila, the catches are not taken to the markets unless they are large.
The price varies a little with the abundance of the catch. Very small individuals, those from 1 to 2 centimeters long, are sold by measure, while those from 10 to 15 centimeters long bring about 2 or 3 centavos^ each. Palaemons larger than these are sold for 20, 30, or 40 centavos, while the largest with a body length of from 30 to 35 centimeters bring from 40 to 50 centavos each. I have been told that larger specimens than any in our collec- tion are caught occasionally and that these may bring as much as 80 centavos.
The palaemon fishery is at its height during the hot and rainy seasons, and it is then that the bulk of the year's catch is made. Unfortunately, it is at this time that the breeding occurs in most of the species. One of the most successful fishermen living on the banks of San Juan River at the town of San Juan del Monte states that he and another fisherman, together with three helpers, catch from 20,000 to 25,000 palaemons in a season and that these net from about 540 to 550 pesos. There are a few other fishermen farther up the river whose business is not so large, but it is safe to say that the total value of the palaemon fishery in this one river easily reaches 2,000 pesos in one season.
In Pasig River and, especially, where it and its branches have their origin from Laguna de Bay, the palaemon fishery is of much more importance than that in San Juan River. A trip from the barrio of Tagig along one of the smaller branches of Pasig River to Laguna de Bay will convince one of this. One bank of this stream is lined by fishermen's houses, each with its small baclad for catching the kind of palaemon that is sold by measure, and where the stream widens out as it issues from Laguna de Bay one may see several hundred of the large baclads
^ One centavo equals 0.5 cent United States currency; 100 centavos equal 1 peso or 50 cents United States currency.
322
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
planted in the shallow water. It is in these large baclads that during the months of April, May, June, July, and August, especially, a local form of Palaemon carcinus Fabricius of India is caught in great numbers. The fishery in this region must amount to from 20,000 to 25,000 pesos per year.
EXTERNAL CHARACTERS OF A PALAEMON
As it is the purpose of this paper to describe the various species of Philippine palaemons so that people in the Philippine Islands who are not zoologists may be able to identify specimens, I shall devote a little space to a simple description of the external anatomy of a palaemon (fig. 1).
Flagella of first antenna
Cephalothorax
Abdomen
Antennal scale Rostpm \ Peduncle'
^y^ First, tooth
Flagellum of second ajUemta
Carpus
Ischium
Fig. 1. Diagram of a palaemon.
The body of the palaemon may be divided into a forward or anterior part known as the cephalothorax and a hind or poste- rior jointed part known as the abdomen. The cephalothorax is composed of a head and a thorax which are so closely joined together that there is no neck, and it is covered above — dorsally — and on the side — laterally — ^by a tough shield-shaped carapace. From the front of the carapace a pointed beak or rostrum ex- tends forward, and is armed with teeth along its dorsal and its lower — ^ventral — border. The "first tooth*' in the following description means the most posterior tooth arising from the carapace and the number of teeth on the dorsal and ventral borders of the rostrum is indicated in the form of a fraction
which I have called the rostral or dental formula /i^^JL.^il? ^ ^ There are 2 spines on each side of the carapace near the
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 323
anterior border. The upper one is called the antennal spine; the lower one, the hepatic spine. On each side of the rostrum where it has its origin from the carapace is an eye mounted on a stalk. The stalk occupies a little niche in the carapace known as the orbit. Extending forward from the base of the eye stalk along each side of the lower border of the rostrum is a peculiar structure known as the peduncle of the first antenna. Each one bears a pair of whiplike flagella. The outer flagellum of the pair has a short branch arising near its origin from the peduncle. Below the peduncle of the first antenna on each side of the rostrum lies a large scalelike structure known as the antennal scale. From the underside of each scale where it has its origin from the cephalothorax arises the long whiplike flagellum of the second antenna. On the lower side of the cepha- lothorax are attached 5 pairs of leglike structures, which are known as the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth pairs of legs. The chelipeds (second pair of legs) are much larger than the others, and terminate in pincers. The first legs, which are much shorter and slenderer than the chelipeds, have their origin from the cephalothorax in front of the origin of the chelipeds, . and are usually folded once under the body. They also terminate in small pincers. The third, fourth, and fifth legs are slenderer and shorter than the chelipeds, but stouter than the first legs. They do not end in pincers. Each leg consists of jointed pieces or segments. The segments of the cheliped are as follows: The pincers are made up of 2 fingers, which are armed with teeth. One of these is movable, and is known as the mobile finger ; the other is known as the immobile finger, and is continuous with a thick piece known as the palm. The immobile finger and the palm are often spoken of as the propodus. The propodus, in- cluding the mobile finger, is called the chela. The segment next to the chela is the wrist or carpus, which is joined to another segment known as the merus. Finally, the last piece or ischium follows the merus and is attached to the cephalothorax by 2 very short pieces, the names of which it is not necessary for us to consider. The first leg is made up of the same number of segments as the cheliped, and these have the same names.
The back or posterior portion of the body, which is often bent under, is known as the abdomen, and is composed of 7 pieces, the first 6 of which are known as somites. The seventh or terminal piece, which is pointed, is called the telson. Each somite has a tough covering, the dorsal surface and part of the lateral surface of which are known as the tergum. The lower part of the lateral surface is called the pleuron. Each
324 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
of the first 5 somites has a pair of branched structures at- tached to its lower surface, which are known as swimmerets, and the sixth somite has a somewhat similar but larger pair called the uropods. The uropods and the telson together make up the tail fin.
While zoologists might have no difficulty in identifying palae- mons among a number of other crustaceans more or less related, one who is not specializing in this line might have considerable trouble. For this reason, I shall compare several forms found in the waters about Manila which might be mistaken for them. One of the commonest crustaceans, which may be seen almost any day in our markets, is the "salt water shrimp'' belonging to the genus Penaeus. This can be distinguished from the pala- emon by the more or less evident keellike ridge on the dorsal surface of the posterior part of the abdomen, by the absence of large legs, and by the presence of pincers on the first, second, and third legs.
The pistol crab, belonging to the genus Alpheus, is occa- sionally seen in the markets, and differs from the palaemons in the following particulars : The rostrum is very small or absent, the first legs are strong and provided with pincers, the second legs are weak and have small pincers, and the third, fourth, and fifth legs are weak and without pincers.
Another form which is used for food by Filipinos, although not highly thought of, belongs to the genus Atya, and is found in mountain streams. It may be distinguished easily from the palaemons by the peculiar pincers of the first and second legs. These pincers are provided with brushes of hairs which are used to catch mud and minute organisms. The third, fourth, and fifth legs have no pincers.
Finally, I shall mention the large brillantly colored '*sea crawfish" or "spiny lobster" (langosta del mar) belonging to the genus Palinurus. It lives along rocky shores washed by the open sea, and is occasionally seen in our markets. All five legs are without pincers, and the antennae are very long and spiny.
PHILIPPINE SPECIES OF THE GENUS PALAEMON
Palaemon carcinus Fabricius. Plate I, figs. 1 and la-;.
The largest palaemon in our collection, and undoubtedly the largest one in the Philippine Islands, I have diagnosed as Palaemon carcinus Fabricius. This conclusion was arrived at after a careful study of a large series, although a comparison
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 325
of this series with individuals of the Indian species shows certain distinct and constant differences. The local form differs slightly from typical P. carcinus in the shape of the rostrum, the rostral formula, the arrangement of the teeth on the rostrum at all ages, and the position of the tip of the rostrum with reference to the tip of the antennal scale at different ages ; there is, however, a close similarity in the shape, armature, and proportions of the segments of the chelipeds. The characters of the chelipeds, just mentioned are of great diagnostic value in determining species of the genus Palaemon, and for this reason I have not described it as a new variety. It should be mentioned, however, that our local form of Palaemon carcinus probably closely resembles a form originally known as Palaemon rosenbergii de Man,^ but which is now considered by de Man,' Ortmann,^ and others as a variety of P. carcinus. The original description of P. rosenbergii was based upon a single full-grown female, and as no male has been seen I shall not place our local form under de Man's variety. However, his description agrees closely with a female specimen of about the same size which is in our collection. The shape, size, and toothing of the rostrum, as well as the measurements of the chelipeds, are almost identical.
The detailed description of the Philippine form of P. carcinus which follows is considered advisable, because our form differs from the type, because our collection affords a large number of different ages and sexes, and because it is the most important species from a commercial point of view in the Philippine Islands.
Rostrum and antennal scale. — An examination of 21 female specimens, varying in body length ' from 115 to 250 millimeters, shows with one exception that the rostrum extends beyond the antennal scale. This exception (230 millimeters long) has a rostrum which appears to be normal, but the tip just reaches the distal end of the scale. In the largest specimen (250 milli- meters), however, the tip extends slightly beyond, while in a young female (115 millimeters) the rostrum extends one-fourth of its length beyond the end of the. antennal scale. Thirty-six
^ Notes Leyden Mus. (1879), 1, 167.
' Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandish Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 417.
*Zool Jahrb., Systematik (1891), 5, 701.
^ By body length, or length, is meant the distance from the tip of the rostrum to the tip of the telson.
326
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
O C4
«H OJ S 3
> U CO
•S o
"S 6
»H ^ -M 5 4? <i^
U «H
2 3 OD
Ms
«H X ^ «H
o o
Q « '
So S S
' Q Q
c c c O O O
O n
d ^ ?
2
t! 5
jj 3 s p»
§ "S 'g 'g
P S* S- S-
^ P P P
"—J ^< »^ ^<
<; PL( (Xi P4
<H U O •H
o o'g'S'g o'g o'S'S O O o'g'g
P^ (li dn
2 6
01 rt
:§ s it
H P^
Pi »^
«« O O ^
^3
«M 5
00 C
» pq I
^ ^ '§'2
If
-S « g ^
1^
U ^ -S X 73 -O o ft !r3
l^gl
^ o :g .g
d OD ^
fe § ;2
S-s
H fa
loouaiooooiooooiooooooooooooo
^ »-tT-»r-tTHrH»-4rHTHiHTHrHC<I01 r^ r-i r-i r-i r-i
OOWiOOOOOU3i0U3OOOOOOOOOOOOO
^oideooc)od«>M>j«id«dc4'<i'ooc)ou3<d"^'od-«tc4o>-^ ggNeoeoco'<*<u3?oooooo>o-*t'<i'oo(Mr-ti-i»?bu3«Bc-t-o>
SrHr-JtHi-HrHrHr-(rHr-lT-lr-l<M<NM(MCO»-lrHrHiH,-H»H»Hr-l
'^^5^3^3^D^D^3'b'b'b'b'b"D'b'b'bC>C><>CM-<>OfOfC>
ja ^ ja
»Hoieo'^iO<ot-oocf>OTHMeo-«*"iO«ct-ooo»OrHweO'<f
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
327
|
1 |
c |
J < |
|
|
a C t c £ IT C |
A 1 |
cr «♦- c E E c- T c ■1 |
|
|
c |
i o |
§ J O 1 |
|
|
o o o |
|
1 ! |
C |
1 |
V N |
c .3: |
d |
OD |
|||||||||||||
|
tC |
o |
'ft -r? |
S" |
||||||||||||||||
|
«H |
^ |
||||||||||||||||||
|
g |
s |
C |
1 |
.£ |
^ |
||||||||||||||
|
si |
be |
bo |
gl |
1 |
|||||||||||||||
|
^ |
1 <3 |
"5 |
o |
d 0 |
d c |
0 |
1 |
OD c4 |
0 |
d d d ^ |
d |
||||||||
|
1 |
1 PQ |
0 |
Q 0 |
P C |
p |
P |
Q Q Q £ > |
Q |
|||||||||||
|
1 |
2 |
||||||||||||||||||
|
Q> |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
b« |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
c |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
tC |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
«H |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
I |
o |
«n ' 1 |
|||||||||||||||||
|
§. |
b() |
§ i i ^ |
|||||||||||||||||
|
RJ |
.S |
3 1 ! c |
|||||||||||||||||
|
O |
o |
o c |
c |
1 -M o ? |
« c |
c |
c |
O |
c |
.2 * ' a ' P, O O rt o |
|||||||||
|
1 |
1 |
TJ |
T3 t: |
'C |
T3 |
1 |
'C |
X |
n3 |
T |
« T3 'O bo 'c |
||||||||
|
_ |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
"c |
c« |
||||||||||||||||||
|
£ |
s |
||||||||||||||||||
|
t^ |
'S |
X |
|||||||||||||||||
|
o |
O |
||||||||||||||||||
|
^ |
u |
||||||||||||||||||
|
p |
a |
||||||||||||||||||
|
n ft |
IS 1 |
o ■tJ |
1 > |
§ |
|||||||||||||||
|
^ A U |
J3 |
§ |
§ |
||||||||||||||||
|
o |
J |
O |
O 0 |
1 |
i «H OJ C |
c |
c |
c |
01 |
o |
c |
.i4 ! I o 1 I 5 o o^ |
1 . |
||||||
|
(^ |
m |
tJ |
T3 t |
H |
rt SI -^ |
ro -r |
T |
0 |
'C! |
'C |
>> TJ "O ^ |
'a rt |
|||||||
|
E |
-^ C |
c) ! ; ^ |
£ '^ |
||||||||||||||||
|
<«5 |
w |
{S |
> I : <; |
w |
|||||||||||||||
|
j3 |
>* |
Hi |
o o |
*IA |
lO o |
U5 Ifl |
o |
in |
in |
o |
o o o o |
o |
|||||||
|
a> |
CO |
^' j5 |
to |
«d 00 |
d o |
c; |
t- |
d |
Tj< |
^* ^' £5 ^ |
csi |
||||||||
|
r-i |
1-t tH |
tH (N |
(N |
(N |
N |
CO |
|||||||||||||
|
!5 |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
o |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
m |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
Ui |
o |
o o |
O |
o o |
O lO |
O |
O |
in |
o |
o o o o |
o |
||||||||
|
1 |
^ |
o |
U5 |
U3 « |
oc |
00 d |
»H C^ |
d |
CO |
d |
00 |
SS S I 5^* |
?J |
||||||
|
5 |
rH |
r-t N |
<N M |
(N |
CO |
CO |
CO |
rH |
|||||||||||
|
1 |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
m |
o |
lO |
o o |
Irt |
»o O |
O O |
»o |
o |
in |
o |
o o o in |
in |
|||||||
|
3 |
CO |
00 |
oJ a |
w cc |
id d |
00 |
oc |
oi |
t-^ |
»H f-3 OJ CC |
d |
||||||||
|
1 |
ft |
<M |
cj (^^ |
M c^ |
eg |
CO |
•^ |
r}< |
r-t r-l (M rH |
||||||||||
|
1 O |
S |
r-( tH rH |
|||||||||||||||||
|
•s |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
bo |
o |
lO |
o in |
O |
o o |
o ta |
o |
o |
o |
O |
o o o in |
o |
|||||||
|
g g |
00 |
d |
CO p: |
ui |
M5 t- |
ci "n* |
t- |
d |
d |
c»: |
g* 1 g «> |
d |
|||||||
|
►S |
rH iH |
W (N |
(M |
CO |
Tf |
Tj« |
|||||||||||||
|
u |
o |
o |
O lO |
o |
o o |
O U3 |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o o o in |
in |
|||||||
|
<u |
u> |
N |
CO « |
w |
MS t- |
d r-i |
•<f |
(M |
d |
«o |
tr-^ rH in oo |
i> |
|||||||
|
bo |
w w |
<N |
CO |
CO |
oo |
«£> t- 00 |
|||||||||||||
|
c |
S |
||||||||||||||||||
|
£ |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
o |
la |
o o |
o |
o o |
o o |
O |
o |
o |
o |
o o o o |
in |
||||||||
|
63 |
Jh' |
-^* |
«5 t> |
d |
d ■<i5 |
N to |
« |
d |
05 |
g g s s |
d |
||||||||
|
2: |
N |
(N (N |
CO |
CO CO |
^ ^ |
kO |
«£> |
t- |
t- |
||||||||||
|
P-l o |
g |
||||||||||||||||||
|
a |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
4) |
"o |
^) |
^D ^3 |
^D |
^ ^ |
^D ^3 |
•b |
^D |
^5 |
"c |
\i \) ^ o* |
O |
|||||||
|
w |
^ £1 M |
||||||||||||||||||
|
n. |
T7 |
OJ |
CO -^ |
lO |
t£> r- |
00 o> |
o |
~~^ |
N |
cc |
Tt in ic t^ |
00 |
|||||||
|
z |
r-l *H <U
d O
328
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
o
O
1
5J
^ .s
o o o o
Q Q Q Q Q Q P
'O'O'C'O u'O'O'a
OiOOOOOOOO
g ?5
(M N OJ CO CO CO
u5moomoou50 c5 o ui M lo oj
S g:j
(N <M M CO CO CO
|
m |
o |
O |
O |
U3 |
\a |
la |
in |
o |
o |
|
|
3 |
s |
r^l |
ro |
CO |
«> |
CO |
•^ |
CO |
t- |
|
|
o. |
M |
<M |
M |
(M |
w |
CO |
Tj« |
■>* |
||
|
s |
||||||||||
|
rt |
||||||||||
|
O |
||||||||||
|
L.O |
O |
kO |
O |
US |
\a |
o |
o |
\o |
||
|
a |
s |
?o |
lO |
00 |
rn |
to |
rA |
d |
t^ |
lA |
|
<N |
CO |
CO |
■>* |
|||||||
|
& |
s |
|||||||||
|
U5 |
o |
o |
o |
o |
O |
o |
o |
o |
||
|
? |
S |
(M |
CO |
fO |
rj< |
^ |
on |
«> |
w |
CO |
|
bo |
rH |
r-4 |
c^ |
CO |
CO |
|||||
|
C |
S |
|||||||||
|
b |
Pu. 5
OOU5O»0iCOO»0
00 "Tj< o o o
M CO CO CO CO
to OS 00 lO CO t-
OfOOOOOf OfOof
OOrHMCO'TflOtOt-
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 329
male individuals (short chelipeds)/ varying in body length from 100 to 240 millimeters, show that the rostrum overreaches the antennal scale. In specimens from 100 to 110 millimeters long the rostrum extends almost one-third of its length beyond the antennal scale, and this distance gradually decreases until in individuals 240 millimeters long it overreaches the antennal scale only slightly. Finally, in 4 large males (chelipeds enor- mously developed) measuring from 250 to 320 millimeters, the rostrum fails to reach the tip of the scale. In fact, in another male only 240 millimeters long but with the chelipeds enormously developed the condition is similar. While this gradual decrease in the length of the rostrum might be explained by the as- sumption that during the life of these palaemons the tip is repeatedly broken off and then partially regenerated, it is hard to believe that such is the case, considering the uniform character of the decrease shown by the series at hand.
The descriptions or figures of Palaemon carcinus by Fabricius,^ Herbst,^ M. Milne-Edwards,^ Ortmann,'^ de Man,^^ and Hender- son and Matthai ^^ all indicate that the rostrum extends beyond the antennal scale, while Henderson's ^^ description and Rumphius's ^* figure show that these authors have examined some specimens in which the rostrum extends to the tip of the antennal scale only or fails to reach it. Von Martens ^' mentions the fact that the rostrum of Palaemon carcinus from Luzon is strikingly short. Henderson finds great variation in the length of the rostrum of P. carcinus from India, some specimens show- ing the rostrum scarcely longer than the scale. This fact and others leave him in considerable doubt as to the limitations of
" In our collection, except in one case, male specimens of P. carcinus, from the shortest to those 240 millimeters long, have the short weakly developed chelipeds like those of the female, but in males 250 millimeters long, or longer, the chelipeds are enormously developed.
^ Fabricii Entomologia Systematica Supplementum (1798), 5, 402.
'^ Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der Krabben and Krebse (1796), 2, Tab. XXVIII, Fig. 1.
''Histoire Naturelle des Crustaces (1837), 2, 395.
^''Zool Jahrb. Systematik (1891), 5, 701.
^^ Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 414.
^"^ Records Indian Mus, (1910), 5, PI. XV, fig. la. Henderson and Mat- thai, in the general part of their paper on palaemons, state that the rostrum in the young is relatively longer than in the adults and that it is usually relatively longer in females than in males.
'* Trans, Linn. Soc. London, Zool. (1893), 5, 411.
'' D'Ambonische Rariteitkamer (1741), PI. I, fig. B.
''Arch, f. Naturgesch. (1868), 5, 35.
330 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science isu
the species, and he is forced to regard such species as belonging to a variety in which the apical growth of the rostrum has been arrested. It does not seem to me probable that the gradual decrease in length between the tip of the anten- nal scale and the tip of the rostrum, which is so strikingly illustrated in our series, is unique for the form we have here in the Philippines. On the contrary, I believe that an examination of a large series of P. carcinus from India will show a similar condition, and I am inclined to agree with that part of Henderson's statement in which he says that the apical growth of the rostrum may be arrested. From a study of specimens of Palaemon carcinus and Palaemon philippinensis sp. no v., I believe that the growth of the rostrum becomes partially arrested when the so-called mature characters are acquired and that this change is especially marked in the males.
Curvature and dental formida of rostrum, — Females of all ages show the distal one-third of the rostrum curved upward, but this is more evident in the young than the old. The arching over the eye, which is pronounced in Palaemon carcinus from India, is not conspicuous in the Philippine form, and remains about the same throughout the life of the female. The upward curve of the distal part of the rostrum in the males does not seem to differ from that in the females, except in the large males (those with the enormously developed chelipeds), where the tip scarcely bends upward at all. The degree of arching over the eye is slightly greater in the old than in the young males.
The dental formula is very variable. An examination of the specimens in the collection shows the formula for the males
(100 to 320 millimeters) to be ^l' }^\}^\]'^. In one exceptional
o, y, lu, 11
case 12 teeth are found on the lower border, 2 of which, how- ever, are situated well up under the arch over the eye. The
12 smallest male (100 millimeters) has the formula -5-, while the
o
largest male (320 millimeters) has — . In the females (115
11 12 13
to 250 millimeters) the formula is ' \ . Those of the smallest
o, y, 10
12
(115 millimeters) and largest (about 250 millimeters) are ^
12 and -^, respectively. It appears that the number of teeth in
the males is somewhat greater than in the females, but there
IX, D, 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 331
is no evidence that the number of the teeth increases with the ag-e. In the large majority of both males and females the
formula is ^ ^^^^ . The dorsal border of the rostrum in young y to 10
males and females may be divided into a proximal two-thirds armed with 9 or 10 teeth and a distal one-third usually un- armed, except near the tip where there may be 2 or 3 teeth. (A similar condition has been described by von Martens ^^ for Palaemon carcinus from Luzon.) The bases of the first and second teeth and part of the base of the third tooth lie back of the orbit. These teeth are more widely separated from one another than the following 6 or 7 teeth, and also the ninth and tenth teeth are separated somewhat more from the teeth directly back of them. The unarmed portion of the distal one- third has a length of 9 or 10 millimeters in specimens measuring 115 millimeters in body length, and beyond this lie the 2 or 3 rather widely separated teeth of the tip region. The usual 9 or 10 teeth of the ventral border are more widely separated toward the tip than at the proximal end. In middle-aged males and females the arrangement of the teeth is similar, but the unarmed space is, relatively, slightly shorter. The bases of the first, second, and third teeth of the upper border in the largest males lie back of the orbit, and the unarmed space is proportionately shorter than in the middle-aged males and females.
The following facts concerning the rostrum of Palaemon carcinus found in the Philippines seem clear from the study of our collection:
1. The rostrum increases in length as the body length becomes greater.
2. In young males and females the rostrum extends much beyond the an-
tennal scale.
3. As the males and females grow older, the rostrum extends less beyond
the antennal scale; this is, especially, the case in males.
4. In old males (250 to 320 millimeters), those with the enormously devel-
oped chelipeds, the rostrum fails to reach the antennal scale by a considerable distance.
5. The number of the teeth does not vary with the length of the rostrum,
with the length of the body, nor with the age of the individual.
Relative position of first antenna and rostrum. — ^As in other palaemons, the peduncle of the first antenna fails to reach the antennal scale. While it increases in length as the animal grows older, it retains about the same relative proportions; that is, the peduncle extends forward over about three-fifths of the
^'Ibid, (1868), 5, 35.
332 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
antennal scale of the second antenna. A glance at Table I shows that the tip of the peduncle varies in position with reference to the teeth on the lower border of the rostrum. In the smallest males and females it extends to the third or fourth tooth, while in the largest males with the small legs and in the largest females it extends to the fifth, sixth, or seventh tooth. In the large males with the enormously developed chelipeds the tip of the peduncle reaches almost to the end of the rostrum.
First pair t>f legs. — The length of the first pair of legs with reference to the length of the antennal scale does not seem to vary much. In young males and females usually the propodus of the first leg extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale, while in the largest males the propodus and as much as one- fourth or one-half of the carpus may be seen beyond the tip of the scale.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds are much shorter in young males and females than the length of the body from the tip of the rostrum to the tip of the telson. Even in the adult and largest females these fail to equal the body length. Also, males under 240 millimeters in length with weakly developed legs have the chelipeds shorter than the body, but males over 250 millimeters in length have the chelipeds longer than the body. The chel- ipeds of the largest male in our collection (body length, 320 millimeters) measure 486 millimeters (ischium, merus, carpus, and propodus), and they extend with one-half of the merus beyond the tip of the antennal scale. As a rule, in young males and females the palm and fingers are nearly of the same length, but as the animals grow older the palm increases in length more rapidly than the fingers, so that the proportion may be as much as 1 : 1.43. In Table I it will be seen that the smallest male in the collection shows a proportion of 1 : 1.33. Only one cheliped is present in this case, and I believe the proportion is unusual. A similar proportional increase in the length of the palm is seen in the female, but it is not so striking. In all of our speci- mens, male and female, the carpus is shorter than the propodus. The difference is not so great in the young specimens, and I think it probable that younger specimens than we have might show the carpus to be longer than the propodus, a condition which de Man has observed in the young of the Indian form.
The fingers of young specimens (100 millimeters) show no toothing, but at 115 to 120 millimeters the teeth begin to make their appearance. The mobile finger is armed along its cutting edge with 2 acute teeth. The distal tooth is situated at a point one-third of the distance or a little more from the articulation
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 333
to the tip of the finger, and it is flattened laterally.^^ It measures 2.5 by 2 millimeters at the base in our largest specimens, and is 2.5 millimeters high. The proximal tooth is found about midway between the distal tooth and the articulation of the finger. It is flattened laterally, and in the largest males is smaller than, but of the same shape as, the distal tooth. In old males with the enor- mously developed chelipeds there are 4 teeth present on the immobile finger. The distal one, which is conical in shape (3 millimeters at the base and 3 millimeters in height) , is the largest, and is situated 4 or 5 millimeters anterior to the proximal tooth of the mobile finger. Also, in younger males and females this tooth is found in front of the proximal tooth of the mobile finger but much closer to it. The next tooth, which is much smaller and less acute than any so far described, touches the proximal tooth of the mobile finger on its posterior side when the fingers are closed. Directly back of this tooth and almost continuous with it is the third tooth, which is still smaller. The fourth tooth is continuous with the third, and might be considered as a smaller cusp of the third tooth. In young males and females and even sometimes in the very old males the fourth tooth is not distin- guishable, but is represented by a short raised piece of the cutting edge. In the oldest male in our collection (320 milli- meters) there is an indication of a fifth or sixth tooth, which might become more distinct in larger specimens. While the toothing in general is much like that of Palaemon carcinus F. of India as described and figured by Henderson and Matthai,'^ the teeth in our form seem to be somewhat more robust. A felt- like coat of hair is present on the mobile finger of both males and females, except when they are very young. Specimens in our collection from 100 to 115 millimeters long show no signs of this hair. As a rule, only the proximal one-half of the finger is coated in the young measuring from 115 to 140 millimeters, but as the animals grow older the coat extends gradually until it covers all but the distal one-fourth. Herbst's ^^ figure of Pa-
" In most living palaemons the chelipeds are held so that the immobile finger lies more nearly in a dorsal position and the mobile finger more nearly in a ventral position, but sometimes in preserved specimens the cheliped becomes twisted so that the fingers lie in a horizontal plane. In this paper the immobile finger will be considered as dorsal in position with reference to the mobile finger, and in the case of P. carcinus the long rows of large spines will mark the dorsal and ventral surfaces of the merus and carpus. The ischium remains in about the same position after preservation.
""Rec, Indian Mus. (1910), 5, 281, PI. XV, fig. la.
" Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der Krabben und Krebse (1796), 2, Tab. XXVIII, fig. 1.
334 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
laemon carcinus shows a condition similar to that found in our form, except that the coating of hair extends a little farther toward the tip. In the figure shown by Henderson and Matthai, however, the pubescence extends to the tip of the finger. The tips of both fingers curve inward in specimens of all ages, and overlap when the fingers are closed. In young specimens with a body length of about 150 millimeters or less, the fingers when closed lie close together throughout their extent, but larger in- dividuals have the fingers gaping. In old males the immobile finger, which is curved less sharply at the tip than the mobile finger, extends beyond the latter. The immobile finger of the largest male presents 13 or 14 indistinct longitudinal rows of small spines. Several of these rows, especially the one along the cutting edge, are made up of larger spines than those of the other rows. Near the tip of the finger the cutting edge disap- pears and the number of rows of spines is reduced. Spines are absent along the cutting edge and the region covered by the felt of the mobile finger, but a few spines are to be seen along the incurved tip. The cutting edge disappears near the tip. In young males and females the fingers are spineless.
The palm of the largest male in our collection measures 122 millimeters in length. It is flattened laterally at the distal one-half, measuring 13 by 16 millimeters, but at the proximal one-half it becomes almost cylindrical in cross section, measuring about 15 millimeters in diameter. It presents about 18 lon- gitudinal rows of spines, which in general are larger than those on the fingers, and the rows on the inner surface are made up of spines which are larger than those of the rows on the outer surface. An average-sized spine of the larger kind measures 2 millimeters in length. The palm is marked on each lateral surface by a longitudinal groove, and each of these grooves is continued, except with a break at the joint, into a **linear space" on the outer and inner surfaces, respectively, of the carpus which is similar to that described by Hoffman, von Martens, and Coutiere. The shape of the palm in all younger males and females is the same as that of the old males. Males and females of middle age show the characteristic rows of spines, but these are not so conspicuous, and in young males and females they are only visible with a lens. The grooves can be seen in speci- mens of all ages and both sexes represented in our collection.
The carpus in our largest male equals the palm in length, but probably in larger specimens it is shorter. In the oldest fe- males the palm is shorter than the carpus, and the same is true of young individuals of both sexes. Table I shows that the
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 335
palm grows faster than the carpus as the individuals increase in size, a fact which has been pointed out by several authors. The carpus of the largest male in the collection measures 122 millimeters in length, and is cylindrical in cross section through- out practically the whole extent. Near its distal end the diameter is 17 millimeters, while at a point near the proximal end it measures 13 millimeters. Eleven indistinct longitudinal rows of small spines are present on the outer surface, and these are separated from 3 indistinct rows of medium-sized spines on the inner surface by a dorsal and a ventral longitudinal row of blunt and conspicuous spines. One of the largest of these spines is 4 millimeters in length. The 2 linear spaces men- tioned above are very distinct, and lie on the dorsolateral and ventrolateral regions of the outer surface. All younger males and females show the carpus to be of the same shape as that of the large male. In the youngest individuals (100 to 115 milli- meters) minute spinules may be seen with a lens, and slightly older specimens show the beginnings of the 2 rows of largest spines. The ''linear spaces" can hardly be made out until the spines show clearly to the naked eye.
The merus, which retains about the same relative proportion in length to the carpus throughout life, is cylindrical anteriorly in the largest male, and has a length of 100 millimeters. It increases gradually in size, passing from the proximal end for- ward, and near the distal end suddenly decreases in diameter thus giving the impression of a swelling. About 13 milli- meters from its proximal end it measures 13 millimeters, and at the thickest part of the distal end it measures 18 millimeters in diameter. The merus at its articulation with the ischium is much flattened dorsoventrally, so as to correspond to the distal end of the ischium. The dorsal and ventral longitudinal rows of large spines, which are very conspicuous on the carpus, are even more so on the merus, one of the largest spines measuring 5 millimeters in height. There are 6 indistinct longitudinal rows of small spines on the outer surface and 5 indistinct rows of medium-sized spines on the inner surface. The more dorsal "linear space" of the carpus is continued on the merus, while the more ventral one is absent or at least not clearly marked. The description of the character of the surface of the carpus in younger males and females applies to that of the merus in speci- mens of the same age.
The ischium (57 millimeters in length) in the largest male is greatly flattened dorsoventrally, and increases in size toward the distal end. On the dorsal and ventral surfaces there are 2 lon-
129877 2
336 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
gitudinal grooves, one of which is deep. These divide the surface into 3 regions — 2 lateral and 1 median. Distally the median region of the dorsal surface is highly convex and armed with several stout spines, while the rest of this surface is spine- less. The median region of the ventral surface is smooth. The externolateral region of the ventral surface presents a lon- gitudinal row of fairly stout spines and 2 rows of smaller spines ; the intemolateral region of the same surface is armed with 2 longitudinal rows of fairly stout spines ; the externolateral region of the dorsal surface presents 2 rows of medium-sized spines; and the intemolateral region presents 1 row of fairly stout spines. In younger males and females the more shallow groove mentioned above is absent, so that the same regions cannot be distinguished. The armature and shape remain about the same, except that the spines diminish in size until in the smallest specimens no spines are visible. The ischium grows slower (Table I) than the merus and carpus, a fact which has been noted in the publications of other authors on palaemons in general.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs. — The third pair of legs in speci- men 2 is absent. The tip of the fourth leg and the dactylus of the fifth leg extend beyond the tip of the antennal scale. The diameter of the propodus of the fifth leg in the middle is 0.75 millimeter, and the length is 15 millimeters. In specimen 9 the tips of the dactyli of the third, fourth, and fifth legs extend slightly beyond the tip of the antennal scale, and the measure- ments for the propodus of the fifth leg are 1.25 by 25 millimeters. The fifth leg only of specimen 16 is present, and 7 millimeters of its propodus extend beyond the scale. It measures 4 milli- meters in diameter at its middle, and is 61 millimeters long.
Telson, — The telson of the local form agrees with the de- scriptions and figures which have been published for Palaemon carcinvs. The innermost pair of lateroterminal spines on each side of the tip is the largest and best developed. The tip of the telson is acute, and does not extend as far as the posterior border of the uropods.
Character of surface, — ^As in many other palaemons, the char- acter of the surface of the carapace and abdomen differs with the age. The carapace and abdomen of males and females from 100 to 190 millimeters in length are strikingly smooth to the touch and under magnification show no spines. The third, fourth, and fifth pairs of legs are beset with rows of minute yellowish spinules, especially along their distal two-thirds, but the first pair of legs are devoid of spines of any sort. Males and
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 337
females, 190 to 240 millimeters long, show a similar condition to that found in the smaller individuals, except that the merus and ischium of the first pair of legs are armed with spinules and the spinules of the third, fourth, and fifth legs are larger. The surface of the carapace in large males (240 or 250 to 320 millimeters, with long chelipeds) is rough to the touch and beset with spinules, except along the extreme posterior border. The spinules of the dorsal and anterolateral regions are larger than those of other parts. These spinules, which are usually acute, point forward, and average about 0.5 millimeter in length. Most of the dorsal and lateral surfaces of the abdominal segments and the dorsal surface of the inner ramus of each uropod have a growth of fine spinules, causing them to feel rough to the touch. The first, third, fourth, and fifth legs are armed like younger specimens, but the spines are larger.
Eggs, — The eggs of the local form of Palaemon carcinus measure from 0.5 by 0,5 to 0.5 by 0.66 millimeter.
Color of living specimens. — The local form of Palaemon carci- nus varies in color with the age, but the color is fairly constant for any one age. The following color notes are taken from living specimens. The carapace of females (115 to 190 milli- meters) is greenish gray, but is marked with brown, gray, or cream-colored streaks running longitudinally. The terga and pleura of the abdomen have a general color similar to that of the carapace, and are marked with rather irregular but more or less parallel streaks of brown, gray, or cream, which make a somewhat definite pattern. In the region of the hinge of each of the abdominal somites is an orange-colored patch; these patches are especially evident on the fourth, fifth, and sixth somites. The ventral and lateral edges of the first 3 abdominal somites show a cream-colored band, while the ventral edges of the fourth and fifth somites have a similar but narrower band. A cream-colored band is also present along the edges of the rami and the outer edge of the basipodite of the swimmerets. The chelipeds are blue or lavender in color, but where the segments join there is an orange-colored patch. The first and second antennae are blue, in part at least, and the internal flagellum of the first antenna is a conspicuous blue. The rostrum is strikingly marked by the vermilion color of its lateral longitu- dinal ridge. The colors practically all disappear, sooner or later, when the specimens are preserved, leaving the animals yellow in color. Living males (100 to 190 millimeters) have a color which is similar to that of the young females, except that the cream-colored band is absent on the pleura of the abdomen.
338 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
A faint cream-colored band is present on the external rami of the swimmerets. As the males and females (190 to 240 or 250 millimeters) grow larger and the chelipeds become longer, the general color becomes a darker blue and the brown, gray, or cream-colored lines on the carapace and abdominal somites and the cream-colored bands on the pleura become much less dis- tinct. The color of other parts still persists, but becomes some- what darker. In old males (240 or 250 to 320 millimeters) with the enormously long chelipeds the color is much less brilliant than in the younger specimens. The dorsal region of the cara- pace and abdomen is brownish green, and the lateral regions are light green or brown. The brown, gray, or cream-colored mark- ings and bands so characteristic of smaller individuals disappear almost entirely, while the orange-colored spots on the abdomen and at the articulations of the segments of the chelipeds, the vermilion color of the ridge on the rostrum, and the conspicuous blue of the first and second antennae usually persist to some ex- tent, but become noticeably darker. The chelipeds appear at first sight a dirty black, but on closer examination they are seen to be a very dark, dirty blue, except in the proximal region where they are greenish blue. The third, fourth, and fifth legs are bluish green in color. The ventral border of the pleura of the sixth abdominal segment shows a distinct orange-colored band.
A comparison of the color of the local Palaemon carcintts with descriptions and color drawings of Palaemon carcinns from India shows, that while there is a general similarity there are some striking differences. The blue color of the cephalothorax and abdomen is absent, and in its place there are cream-colored bands and other markings. The latter may be present in young specimens of the Indian form. The first and second antennae, so far as I have been able to make out from colored drawings and descriptions, are not blue like those of our local form, and it is of interest to note that in no other palaemon in the Philip- pines with which I am familiar are the antennae colored in the same way as those of the local form of P. carcinus. Finally, the striking changes in color as we pass from the younger specimens to the older ones, if occurring in Palaemon carcinus of India, do not seem to have been recorded.
Old and young males, — While specialists on the genus Palae- mon are familiar with the fact that the old males in some species look very different from the young males and while it seems probable that the same is true for all species of Palaemon, it is difficult to convince one who is not a zoologist or even a zoologist
IX, D, 4 Cotvles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 339
who is not familiar with palaemons that the old males are of the same species as the young males and females. The fol- lowing are my reasons for considering the large brownish pa- laemon, which is seen in our museums and sometimes in our markets and which has the extremely long and thick chelipeds, as the same species (P. carcimis) as the beautifully colored young males and females with short weak chelipeds:
1. Both the first and second antennae show the deep peacock blue color,
which is found in no other species in our collection.
2. If we assume that the large brown form with the enormous chelipeds
is a different species from the smaller brightly colored males and females, then we have to account for the facts that all of the large brown forms are males, that no females have been found corre- sponding to them in size and shape, and that the fishermen have never caught any females like them.
3. The number of teeth on the dorsal and ventral borders of the rostrum
is approximately the same in both.
4. While the rostrum is distinctly shorter proportionately in the large brown
form, a gradual reduction in the relative length of the rostrum can be traced if we place both kinds together in a series arranged according to increasing body length. 6. In living specimens a series shows how the brilliant color of the young gradually grades into the dull brown of the old form.
6. Both kinds have the coat of felted hair on the mobile finger.
7. The chelipeds are blue in both forms, but very dark blue in the large
form.
''Males feminises,'' — It is not possible to determine whether or not our collection of P. carcimis contains what Coutiere -'* speaks of as ''males feminises,'' although all the males, except the oldest ones, show the female characteristics; that is, the chelipeds are weak and short. Plate I, figs, le and 1/, shows how little the chelipeds of the full-grown female and the chelipeds of the young male differ from one another. As a matter of fact, our collection does not contain any young male which has taken on the characteristics of the old males, with the possible exception of the specimen (240 millimeters) noted in Table I. These males are more numerous in our collection of Palaemon philip- pinensis sp. nov., which is described on page 340.
The enormous increase in the size of the chelipeds and the change in shape of the fingers in the old males of P. carcinus, P. lar, P. jamaicensiSy and other species are phenomena which cannot fail to stimulate the mind of the zoologist. Ortmann 2' thinks that we have every reason for believing that the beautiful
'''Ann. ScL Nat., Zool. (1900), 11, 269.
'' Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs (1901), 5, 1242.
340 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
chelipeds of the male Palaemon carcinus are sexual adorn- ments. In our local form of Palaemon carcinits the chelipeds of young males, young females, and mature females are blue or lavender, while the chelipeds of the old males are very dark, inconspicuous blue. I can readily believe that the blue color is an adornment, but I can hardly believe that it is attractive to the females, even if we assume that they have color sense, as these palaemons live in water which is far from clear. A study of the habits of the palaemons may throw some light on the meaning of these large chdipeds.
Localities, — ^We have in our collection 41 males and 21 females which were collected from Pasig River, San Juan River (a tributary of Pasig River), and Laguna de Bay, the source of Pasig River. All of these bodies of water are in the neighbor- hood of Manila, Luzon. Since the above was written, several large specimens have been added to the collection by A. L. Day, who collected them in Naujan Lake near Calapan, Mindoro.
Palaemon philippinensis sp. nov. Plate II, figs. 2 and 2a-m.
This species presents much variation in the shape and general appearance of the rostrum. The proportion of the carpus to the merus of the chelipeds is not constant, the carpus increasing in length faster than the merus as the animal grows longer. Another characteristic of this sp^ies (possibly of all species of Palaemon) is the occurrence of dimorphic males; that is, some of the males of medium size have chelipeds of about the same length and shape ("males feminises" of Coutiere)22 as those of the females of the same size, and other males of small or medium size, but usually covered with brownish sediment, have the characteristics of the largest and undoubtedly mature males; namely, enormously long chelipeds with well-armed and gaping fingers (young mature males). In our collection the "males feminises" far outnumber the other males (Table II).
^^Ann, Sci, Nat, Zool, (1900), 11, 269. In the present paper the follow- ing terms are used to distinguish between different forms of males : "Young males," "males feminises," "young mature males," and "old mature males." The distinction between the different forms is not always clearly defined, but the terms are used for convenience in description and for the purpose of indicating my attitude in reference to Coutiere's statement that di- morphic males exist among palaemons. It should be understood, however, that I have no proof that the "males feminises" are nonbreeding in- dividuals or that the "young mature males" are breeding individuals. The former term is used for medium-sized male specimens that have chelipeds like those of the females and the latter term is employed for such small or medium-sized males as have chelipeds like those of the largest males.
IX, D, 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 341
Palaemon philippinensis seems to be most nearly related to P. nipponensis de Haan,^^ differing from this species in size, in the absence of the rather thick coating of hairs on the fingers, and in the presence of distinct tubercles along the sides of the cutting edge. The tubercles (absent in young males, in most "males feminises,'' and in all females but the largest specimen) remind one of P. elegans de Man ^^ and P. rudis Heller,^^ but in Palaemon philippinensis the tubercles are found on both sides of the cutting edge of the mobile finger and only on one side, the inner, of the cutting edge of the immobile finger.
Two other striking characteristics of this species are the variability in the shape of the rostrum, reminding one of P. weberi de Man, and the variability in proportion between the lengths of the carpus and merus, which also seems to be characteristic of P. ritsemae de Man ^^ and P. rudis Heller. These variations, together with the occurrence in the collection of both forms of the male, would have aroused a doubt in my mind as to the specimens being of one species if I had not seen them all shortly after they were taken from the water, when the living color was still retained and when they showed a characteristic T-shaped pigment mark and certain obliquely placed pigment marks on each side of the carapace, which are found in no other species in our collection. (See discussion on the color of P. philippinensis.)
The following is a description of the largest male specimen in the collection (one from San Juan River near Manila), after which follows a comparative description of specimens differing in age and sex :
This male (Table II, specimen 31) (Plate II, figs. 2, 2a, 26, and 2c) measures 144 millimeters in length. The rostrum fails to reach the tip of the antennal scale. The dorsal border is conspicuously convex over the eye, the ventral border curves upward moderately, but the tip is not directed upward. The ridge along the side of the rostrum divides the surface of the latter into an upper wide and a lower narrow area. Along the dorsal border are 12 teeth, the first, second, and third of which are situated on the carapace. These are separated by wider intervals than those immediately following. The ninth and eleventh teeth are also farther apart than those immediately
** Fauna Japonica. Siebold (1833), 1, 171.
" Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 440.
* Reise der Osterreichischen Frigatte Novara (1868), 2, 115. ''Zool Jahrb., Systematik (1897), 9, 774.
342
The Philippine Journal of Science
k
^ ^
<
|
1 1 |
n 3 |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
m a |
(+• |
CQ |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
OS ,' |
O P |
3 |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
'S'S |
n 3 |
& I |
(S (»' |
*« ^ |
OQ |
m |
|||||||||||||||||
|
ill lis lis |
S E |
3 3 S S 5 •s .-s . 1 |
i |
fl P 3 Bo, o 2.S 8 |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
OD V |
4i |
ere o S c 4J U 4- 1°^ |
•^ s i g 1 s 1 OS o a c s .t |
1 8 ^ & 2 lull'"'! |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
< |
H <! C |
^ ^ < |
iz; << iz; <5 O < |
< |
<J {S |
^ <J Z |
|||||||||||||||||
|
1 |
1 |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Jq |
>> |
m |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
g |
+ X |
3 O |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
1! |
1 |
3 & OS |
0] s |
. |
03 3 & |
a |
3 |
||||||||||||||||
|
•Si u t 2 |
11 ft g |
1 |
1. It ^ |
OD J -£ % I c |
\\ 1 ° Is |
c c |
C a + |
8 Is S.1 |
*H OQ t 00 u^ l" O Uj ft tw ^ V ^ ^ o i § S "H .^ 0 i 2 5 2 e |
o: c C 1 1 |
1 s •« " t: a '©33 ' rt "^ X ft o 3 " ft X g i ii "V B o ? ^ |
||||||||||||
|
h |
H <3 O |
<! 3 < |
;q<H^<Ohqo<U<h40<J<Jb5 |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
a> |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Is 11 |
1 |
1^ |
1 |
1 |
.jC |
4- |
|||||||||||||||||
|
11 |
ill o fi >^ 'S -5 . |
11 |
1 |2 |
1 .£3 |
ii li -1 |
I 3 |
1 |
1 1 |
1 |
111 ^ i: •B i a % >> -M «H 2 IS E |
|||||||||||||
|
sl |
1 |
Ill 2 -^ "'. 2 3 -e |
i § § E & S "3 .Q X> |
o |
1 a ^ i -g 6 -^ o S § "^ +J 13 "^ X5 ^ o g ^ i> II ^ -^ S |
o Q 4J 3 |
s s U5 |
o |
i 1 0 |
0 |
1 o 0 o |
||||||||||||
|
o |
o o a |
1 s s £i \a iti |
-c |
3 |
s z |
•x. |
s |
t: |
III |
||||||||||||||
|
H |
<< H <5 |
< rA ^ |
<J << W <J hJ |
< |
< |
H |
<J <J rH- |
||||||||||||||||
|
CO |
U5 |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
« 6 |
\, |
\ |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
lO |
CO •* rf |
Ili CO "^ |
"^Jt Tf Tj« lO CO ^ |
(M |
■^ |
T}< |
■^ |
to |
CO ■<* '<* |
||||||||||||||
|
\ |
;::?;:?;::; |
V "v "^ |
"\ \ \ \ 7* \ |
> |
\ |
\ |
•\ |
^ |
\ |
\ "\ \ |
|||||||||||||
|
CO |
^ ^ ?^ |
CQ M rH CO lia CO |
CO |
c< |
C^ |
(N |
c^ |
CI T-< N |
|||||||||||||||
|
O u |
1-i |
^ ^ ^ ^ « ^ |
r-t |
fH tH rH |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
tf o |
o |
(N |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
S-l |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Carapace length (pos- terior face of eye to posterior border of car- apace) . |
O O VO 00 N eo |
lO O U5 t-' t-^ oi |
O O U5 O O O o' c> d oi d o |
O |
O d |
lO |
o d |
O |
o d |
o o o d M 1-5 |
|||||||||||||
|
M (M |
(M <N <N |
C4 <N CO N CO CO |
eo |
« |
CO |
CO |
00 |
CO |
CO CO o o %6 tA |
||||||||||||||
|
Body length (tip of rostrxim to tip of telson). |
U) § n |
kfi O ift ^ g SJ |
kO O Ift III |
O no lO O lO o 1 1 1 s s ::i |
lO |
U5 |
o |
o 3 |
o |
o |
o ■-4 |
||||||||||||
|
1 |
« |
J^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
i |
^ |
•b ^5 ^D |
"O ^3 "0 |
•b '^^ ^3 "D "o ^D |
"o |
b |
b |
b |
b |
^ |
\) ^-) b |
||||||||||||
|
d 5? |
^ |
* CJ| CO |
^ lO «£> |
t- 00 OS O rH ^ |
00 |
3 |
lO |
to |
t- |
00 |
0» O tH |
||||||||||||
|
tH |
»-< <M C<J |
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
343
«H O JL
g X
*^ s *=• »
?5
5 •- C0 X
O O
6 e8 fi ■«
O
&
H
o o
^1
X5 C ^ <j O <J
^'S
43 «M O
73 -5 T
►J o
e *
1-4 ^ ^ -^ ^ 4J
.^ 'S
O
;= ^
O ft g ^ ^
■*^ *^ "tS rt 0)
^ G 'T. _! -r: .P
<5
m O
H <J H PM
8 1
eo M (N CO
\ \ "^ >v. -\ \ --x
d CO CO M (M CI N
9 ?^
O O O lO
O O us lO O lO o
•^;H T-trH WtN't (N
O O lO o
00 o> 1-5 ^
^u ;:: ?i y
O U3 O O U5 O O
in lo ci c^ t- :^ t;:
M M OJ eo CO 222 "^
\a o o
iH to CO
t- OO OS
^^■b^ ^'b'b'b^^'bCH- Ofo+ oocM- Of o
i:3g5SS S&5SS^53§S n^
at
344
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
o
.I
-si
•J
O O „ "
-hJ3 • S I
I I I I o I I I I en
<«{ fi< fe
So 73 ^ -a
bo *S bo
G cJ C
ft ^ "ft
bfl -c b« ■
o £* o
^ CO ;?;
o o o o o . _
73 t3 TJ TJ T3 13 T3
«
£ ««
I ^ !2; o :z;
lOOOU5000U3iLOOOOkOiOOO»OOU30»00
§j s I g Si g* ^ i o 8 g' § o I s ^ I ^ 1 1 1 g
U300U3kOiOU50000U3kOOlOO»000000
i-HT}<fr>'<foi-^u3»ococ<i
«ooo»gioui«5'X)irft>
T-(i-tr-lTHrHiHr-«THTH
O O O kO «o
CO (m' C> U3
OOOOOOU5I0U5OOOOOOOO 05 t- O Oi o> o
r> lO t- 05 00 00 (3> r-l Cvj T-H iH r-( rH W
OOOOOO10OU5OOOOU0OU5OOU5OO
00 0> r-J id 00 i-H «5
th CO tj< ca "^ M
«0 CO U3
U30»rtU500U5tO»00>OOOOOoOOOOlOO
I lo «o CO «>
Cv] N CVI C4
»r> eo CO «c5
§1 55' Si §^ §i §^ ^ s* s s* % gj ^
kAOlAOOiOlOOUaOkOO
t- 00 «0 U3 t-
lA U3 la
c4 t-i
o o o o o o
C<Jr-tC0r-(MrHrHtHr-(r-(r-«rH
OOOU50»OOU30000»OUJlOkOOOOOiOO
S S* S S ^ 4 n ^ ^ §S 5 :5 S ^' S 5* 9 n 4 i 2§ ^'
|
Sex. |
'r)'bV)^^'b"o«D'b'b"o^)^D'b^«o"D^3^D'b^D'b'b |
|
1 |
rH^C^eOTjiU5^t>000»OrHNe9'*IO«OI>000>OrHCl |
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
345
COOO-^'<i<COt>Or-tQ
OOOOOOOOCC- _ - _ -
<U ^ S) ^ 'O
•^ '^ 'O tJ ID 13
|
O mZ |
TS ^ |
rt 6 |
53 > |
o 1 J2; I |
||||||||
|
lO U5 VO |
o |
O |
o |
o |
o |
kO |
o »o |
lo \a |
o |
o |
o |
lO |
|
1 g g |
g |
g |
i |
i |
^ s |
% S |
c- |
c- |
a |
i |
|
o |
in |
o |
o |
o |
US |
us |
o |
us |
us |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
us |
us |
|
§3 |
'X> |
tr- |
^ |
§ |
§ |
g |
Cv| |
§5 |
us |
o |
a> |
•"* |
CO |
CM |
^ |
s |
|
\a |
o |
io |
o |
o |
o |
us |
o |
us |
o |
U5 |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
|
ri |
<— > |
on |
o |
CM |
lO |
<£> |
o> |
Ci |
CM |
'Jt |
-^ |
CO |
a> |
|||
|
CO |
w |
C^ |
CO |
CO |
CO |
■^ |
■^ |
|||||||||
|
lO |
us |
US |
o |
us |
o |
us |
us |
o |
us |
o |
us |
o |
o |
o |
o |
us |
|
^ |
s |
^ |
o |
^ |
■^ |
Ci |
Tf |
CO |
t^ |
r4 |
en |
CO |
00 |
|||
|
CO |
CO |
CO |
CD |
us |
us |
00 |
00 |
CM |
CM |
CM |
||||||
|
o |
o |
us |
O |
us |
us |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
us |
|
o* |
.n |
US |
CM |
g |
■^ |
y-i |
o |
«5 |
o |
o |
CO |
s |
Tj< |
O) |
55 |
|
|
TJ« |
CO |
(N |
us |
Tj* |
t- |
t- |
||||||||||
|
lO |
to |
O |
o |
o |
o |
us |
o |
us |
o |
o |
o |
us |
o |
o |
us |
o |
|
05 |
o |
00 |
r^ |
t- |
<x> |
us |
r^ |
00 |
us |
00 |
00 |
o |
00 |
CM |
cm" |
00 |
|
<M |
N |
co |
CM |
CM |
CM |
00 |
CO |
|||||||||
|
lO |
»o |
lO |
o |
US |
us |
us |
o |
us |
o |
o |
o |
us |
o |
o |
us |
us |
|
«d |
5B |
CO |
e^' |
a> |
CT> |
CTJ |
00 |
oo |
00 |
00 |
s |
o> |
to |
o |
rM |
|
|
<£> |
||||||||||||||||
|
a |
||||||||||||||||
|
■b |
"D ^) ^D |
•b |
^5 |
\> |
\5 |
\> |
o |
o |
CM- |
o |
Of O CH- |
o |
||||
|
03 |
•'f |
us |
to |
t^ |
00 |
a |
o |
^ |
CI |
s§ |
•^ |
^ |
o |
r- |
00 |
Oi |
|
CM |
C4 |
CM |
CM |
CO |
CO |
346 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
posterior to them. On the lower border are 3 teeth, the distal one of which lies some distance back of the tip. The peduncle of the first antenna reaches almost to the tip of the rostrum. One-third of the carpus of the fully extended first pair of legs extends beyond the antennal scale.
The left cheliped, which is a little longer than the right (not true of all specimens), measures 266.5 millimeters, being a little less than twice as long as the body. The immobile finger extends farther forward than the mobile finger, and is not curved in- ward so sharply. The fingers are a little more than one-half as long as the palm (1 : 1.81), and in this specimen they gape; that is, when their tips meet, there is an open space between the fingers. Of the 2 teeth situated near the proximal end of the mobile finger, the more distal one, which is subacute and flattened laterally, is 2 millimeters high and 2 millimeters wide at the base. The more proximal one is smaller, less acute, and is flattened laterally. It measures 1.5 millimeters in height and 1 millimeter at the base. The cutting edge of the mobile finger is seen with difficulty, being simply a very slightly raised ridge. On each side of it is a row of 12 plainly visible tubercles, which do not extend to the tip. There is no thick coating of hair as in Palaemon nipponensis. On the immobile finger, which is also without the thick coating of hair, is a large subacute tooth, which is situated a little posterior to the distal tooth of the mobile finger. It is conical in shape, measuring 2.5 millimeters in height and 2 millimeters in width at the base. Back of this tooth may be seen a series of 4 closely set teeth. The most anterior of the 4, which is the largest, is on a level with the more proximal tooth of the mobile finger. The second, third, and fourth decrease gradually in size, and the last 2 are incompletely separated. A series of 8 or 9 tubercles, similar to those on the mobile finger, is situated along the inner side of the very in- conspicuous cutting edge. The palm, which is almost cylindrical in cross section, is flattened slightly laterally. It is of about the same size throughout its extent, and is shorter than the carpus. The cylindrical carpus, which reaches its greatest diameter (9 millimeters) some little distance back of the distal end, is much shorter than the chela, while the slightly curved merus, which is almost cylindrical near its distal end and decidedly flattened near its proximal end, is much shorter than the carpus, showing a ratio of 1:1.5. The much flattened ischium has its dorsal and ventral surfaces divided into 2 regions by a longitudinal groove. The lengths, in millimeters, of the parts of the cheliped
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 347
just described are as follows: Propodus, 105.5; fingers, 38.5; palm, 70 ; carpus, 84 ; merus, 45.5 ; ischium, 28.5.
The telson of this specimen ends in a subacute spine. The extemolateral spines are slightly less than 1 millimeter in length, while the internolateral spines, which extend with a little less than one-half their length beyond the tip of the telson, measure about 1.5 millimeters in length. (See description of telson in smaller specimens.)
Patches of very obtuse spines are present on the anterior sur- face of the carapace. Similar spines are seen on the ventral and lateral parts of the pleura, on the dorsal surface of the sixth somite and the telson, and on exposed parts of the dorsal and ventral surfaces of the uropods. These spines are especially numerous on the last three structures named.
The ischium of the first pair of legs and the 5 distal segments of the third, fourth, and fifth pairs of legs are clothed with acute spinules. Eight or 9 indistinct longitudinal rows of blunt, small spines (much smaller than the tubercles) are seen on the mobile finger of the chelipeds, and the immobile finger bears 7 or 8 rows of similar spines. The palm is armed with 26 or 27 more distinct longitudinal rows, made up of larger and more acute spines than those of the palm, the spines of the ventral and dorsal surface being the largest. On the carpus are 17 or 18 longitudinal rows of spines, similar to those of the palm. A dorsal ''linear space'' is evident, and a ventral ''linear space" is very conspicuous. It will be seen that these spaces are not situated on the lateral surface as in the local P. carcinus. The merus presents about the same number of longitudinal rows made up of spines similar to those of the carpus, and the dorsal and ventral "linear spaces'' can still be seen, although the former is not very clear. There are 14 or 15 rows of acute spines on the ischium, the largest ones being situated on the dorsal, ventral, and internolateral surfaces.
Rostrum and antennal scale. — The 8 female specimens in our collection, when arranged according to increasing body length, show a gradual reduction in the length of rostrum relative to the length of the antennal scale. In a specimen 47 millimeters long the rostrum extends slightly beyond the tip of the antennal scale; in others, 69, 71.5, and 86 millimeters long, they are equal; in specimens 93, 97, 99.5, and 118 millimeters long the rostrum fails to reach the tip of the antennal scale by 2.5, 1, 3, and 3 millimeters, respectively. The rostrum extends 1 millimeter beyond the tip of the antennal scale in the smallest male specimen
348 2^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
(33.5 millimeters) ; in specimens from 90 to 96.5 millimeters long the tip of the rostrum barely reaches the tip of the antennal scale ; in those from 96.5 to about 124 millimeters long the rostrum usually fails to reach the tip of the antennal scale by from 1 to 3 millimeters; and in specimens from 124 to 144 millimeters long this distance usually increases to from 4 to 6 millimeters. The specimen (111.5 millimeters) indicated in Table II is a male which has assumed adult male characters (young mature male), although its body is still only of medium length. It is covered with a dirty brown sediment, and its chelipeds are enormously developed relative to the body length. The rostrum fails to reach the antennal scale by 7.5 millimeters. The chelipeds, al- though much shorter than those of the specimen 144 millimeters long (Table II), are almost perfect miniatures, showing prac- tically the same proportions. While the decrease in the relative length of the rostrum with reference to the antennal scale is not so regular with increasing size as in the local form of Palaemon carcinus, it is, nevertheless, plainly apparent.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum. — Specimens of dif- ferent ages show such a remarkable difference in the shape of the rostrum, that if I had not seen all of my specimens when alive I should hesitate to consider them as belonging to the same species. In this respect P. philippinensis reminds one of the variable form of the rostrum in P. weberi de Man ^^ and P. dispar von Martens."^ Certain characteristic markings men- tioned under the section devoted to the color of the living in- dividuals and not found in any other species in our collection were present in all. The youngest males (33.5 and 39.5 milli- meters) and the youngest females (47 to 71.5 millimeters) have the dorsal border of the rostrum almost straight, only a very slight convexity over the eye being apparent. As the "males feminises" (those similar in general appearance to females) and females increase in body length, the convexity becomes gradually more pronounced. In the largest males it is very striking, but in the largest females it is not so much so. The young and middle-aged males which take on the adult characters usually show a greater curvature of the dorsal border of the rostrum over the eye than do the "males feminises" of the same size. Correlated with this increase in the convexity, as these males and
^ Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 421.
^ Arch. /. Naturgesch. (1868), 5, 41.
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 349
females become more nearly mature there is an increase in the
distance between the longitudinal ridge on the side of the rostrum
and the dorsal border. At the same time there is a decrease
in the relative length of the rostrum, so that the rostrum of
younger individuals is a rather narrow blade while that of the
older individuals is a broader blade.
The dental formula for the males (33.5 to 144 millimeters) is
11 12 13
jc-^^c — ^ — ^, while that for the few females in our collection is,
^, 6, 4, 5
11 12 13 with one exception, — '-o-j — • As in the local form of Palaemon
carcinus, there is no evidence that the number of teeth on the
rostrum increases with age. It should be mentioned that the
exception referred to above is a female 93 millimeters long, in
18 which the rostral formula is -^ (Table II). This specimen has
recently carried eggs, and has a rostrum similar in shape to the largest males. The living color markings agreed exactly with those of other females of this species. The chelipeds, in shape, armature, and proportion, are much like the chelipeds of specimen 37 (97 millimeters) indicated in Table II. I have hesitated before diagnosing this individual as P. philippinensis, but as I can find no character which would rule out the specimen, except the large number of teeth on the dorsal border, I am forced to include it. In young and middle-aged males the teeth 9 and 10, or 10 and 11, or 11 and 12, or 12 and 13 on the dorsal border of the rostrum are more widely separated from one another than those farther back. The comparatively wide space between any two or any three of the teeth just mentioned is very evident in the young, but it decreases gradually as the animal grows larger, until in the largest males these teeth are almost evenly spaced. Similar prominent spaces are seen on the young, middle-aged, and older females. The first, second, and third teeth are usually found on the carapace in both males and females, although occasionally the third is astride of the edge of the orbit. The distance between the first and second and usually also between the second and third is greater than that between the teeth immediately succeeding. The lower border of the rostrum in both sexes and at all ages curves upward in its distal two-thirds, but this upward curving is not so pronounced in old age. The most distal tooth of the lower border is almost invariably at a considerable distance from the tip of the rostrum.
350 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The specimens of Palaemon philippinensis in our collection bring out the following facts concerning the rostrum in this species :
1. The rostrum increases in length as the body grows longer.
2. Its relative length compared with the length of the antennal scale
becomes less with increasing age, and only in the young does it extend beyond the tip of the scale.
3. The convexity of the dorsal border over the eye increases as the indi-
viduals grow more mature, and as a result the distance between the longitudinal ridge on the side of the rostrum and the dorsal border increases greatly.
4. The wide spacing between the teeth near the tip of the rostrum decreases
with age, and almost disappears in old males.
Relative position of first antennas and rostrum. — The peduncle of the first antenna retains the same relative proportions with reference to the antennal scale of the second antenna throughout life, and never extends to the tip of the scale. Generally in young and middle-aged males and females the peduncle of the first antenna extends to about the third or fourth tooth of the lower border of the rostrum, but in the largest specimens, espe- cially the males, it reaches or almost reaches the tip of the rostrum. Small males which have taken on the mature male characteristics (young mature males) also sometimes show the tip of the peduncle even with the tip of the rostrum (Table II, No. 13). The relative position of the tip of the rostrum and the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna at different ages reminds one of the condition in the local form of Palaemon carcinus, although in a series of Palaemon philippinensis sly- ranged according to increasing body length the approximation of the tips of the peduncle and rostrum does not take place so gradually and uniformly with increasing body length as in the former.
First pair of legs, — In the smallest males and females a portion of the propodus extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale, while in larger males and females a portion of the carpus is also seen extending beyond it (Table II).
Chelipeds, — The chelipeds of small males and females are shorter than the body, and with certain exceptions this condi- tion persists with increasing body length, although the chelipeds of larger individuals show a relatively greater length compared with that of the body (Nos. la, 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 25 (?), 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39). The excep- tions mentioned are the large mature males (Nos. 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31) and the smaller males which have taken on the mature characters (Nos. 3, 4, 6, 11, 13, 15, 23, 24). By mature charac-
IX. D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 351
ters are meant the gaping of the fingers, the proportionately lar- ger teeth on the fingers, the exceedingly long chelipeds, and the roughness of carapace, pleura, sixth abdominal somite, and telson.
All specimens of P. philippinensis in our collection possess fingers which are shorter than the palm, the next to the smallest male (No. la) showing a proportion of 1:1.22 and one of the largest males (No. 30) a proportion of 1:1.91. In general, as the body grows larger the palm increases in length at a greater rate than the fingers. A similar but much less marked pro- portional increase occurs in the females. The fingers of P. phil- ippinensis show no signs of the long hairs or of the felted hairs which are characteristic of P. nipponensis and P. carcinus, respectively, but all specimens in the collection possess a few scattered tufts of hair, which do not obscure the underlying structures in the least. The teeth, which have been described above as present on the fingers of a large male, can be seen in the youngest males and females only with a high-power magnify- ing lens. They soon increase in size as the' animal grows larger (90 millimeters), and become visible to the naked eye. In the small males (No. 3 and others that have taken on the mature form and which for convenience I have called young mature males) the teeth are conspicuous, their size being in proportion to the length of the cheliped. Two teeth on the mobile finger and 1 tooth (the distal) on the immobile finger are present in the youngest males and females (Nos. la and 32). In females and "males feminises" of the size of No. 19 the small teeth back of the proximal tooth on the immobile finger are just beginning to form. The tips of the fingers curve inward at all ages and meet, except in the largest males and sometimes in the young mature males, where the immobile finger curves in much less and extends beyond the mobile finger. In small males, in "males "feminises," and in all the females with the possible exception of No. 39, the fingers do not gape when closed, but in young mature males and especially in the old males the gaping is conspicuous. A keellike cutting edge is found on both fingers of all males and females. This is rather high and sharp in young males (including "males feminises" and young mature males of smaller size) , but it decreases in height markedly with increasing body length in the young mature males and less rapidly in the "males feminises" and females. In the large males Nos. 30 and 31 and the older young mature males Nos. 23 and 26, the keel is reduced to an inconspicuous raised line which can be seen only with a magnifying lens. The tubercles
352 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
mentioned in the description of the large male as being present along the outer and inner sides of the cutting edge of the mobile finger and along the inner side of the immobile finger cannot be seen in the smallest males (Nos. la and 2) nor in any of the females except No. 39, in which they are slightly developed. In the smallest young mature male (No. 3) they show slightly, becoming better developed in specimens of larger size (Nos. 4, 6, 11, 13, 15, 23). "Males feminises," when sufficiently large (Nos. 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 27), show the tubercles, but in one of these. No. 17, the row on the outer border of the cutting edge of the mobile finger is re- presented by only 2 tubercles. In No. 18 this row is not present, but the inner row on each finger is well developed, while in Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10 only very few tubercles along the inner border of both fingers are seen. Numbers 14, 16, 20, 21, 22, 24, and 25 show the characteristic 2 rows on the mobile and 1 row on the immobile finger.
The palm in specimens of all sizes and sexes is similar in shape to that of the larger male already described. In young speci- mens the fingers are a little shorter than the palm (1: 1.22 in No. la), but as the body length increases the palm grows faster than the fingers, until in the oldest male the fingers are only a little more than half the length of the palm. It is probable that smaller specimens than those in our collection would show the fingers equal to, or even shorter than, the palm.
The carpus, which is cylindrical in cross section and a little shorter than the propodus in all our specimens, increases grad- ually in diameter, passing from the distal to the proximal end. The palm is always shorter than the carpus, but a comparison of lengths at different ages indicates, in general, that the palm grows a little faster than the carpus, although considerable variability is seen in a series arranged according to the body length.
The relative lengths of the merus and carpus are shown in Table II, where the specimens are arranged according to increas- ing body length. Here again much variability appears, but if the young mature males are separated the variability is not so marked. The* proportions given in Table II show clearly that, in general, the merus of the male does not increase in length as fast as the carpus. This condition is not evident in the small number of females we have in the collection. A similar and no less striking increase in the proportion of the merus to the car- pus may be seen in the specimens of P. ritsemae de Man examined
IX. D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 353
by Coutiere,^^ and I believe that large series of P. idae Heller ^^ and P. rtidis Heller ^^ will show the same thing. The merus, which is flattened dorsoventrally along the proximal part, be- comes almost cylindrical in cross section and of greater diameter at the distal part. As in other palaemons, the merus grows more rapidly than the ischium. While Table H shows that there is some variability in the proportion between the merus and ischium when a series of specimens is arranged according to increasing body length, it may also be seen that when the measurements for young mature males are separated from the rest this variability is much reduced.
The description of the shape of the ischium given for the largest male applies to specimens of all ages and sexes.
The chelipeds of young specimens show spines on the palm and anterior part of the carpus, but the "linear spaces'' are not distinguishable. The covering of spines increases as the animals become larger, but it is not until they have reached about the middle size that the spines become apparent on the fingers and ischium. The **linear spaces" then show clearly.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs. — The third legs are missing in specimen la. One-quarter and two-fifths of the propodus extend beyond the tip of the antenna! scale in the fourth and fifth legs, respectively. The measurements for the propodus of the fifth leg are 0.16 millimeter in diameter at the middle and 7 milli- meters in length. In No. 16 the third, fourth, and fifth legs ex- tend with two-thirds, two-fifths, and one-fourth of the propodus, respectively, beyond the antennal scale. The propodus of the fifth leg is 0.7 millimeter in diameter at the middle and 17 milli- meters in length. A large specimen measuring 133 millimeters (not indicated in Table H) shows one-fourth of the propodus of the third leg extending beyond the antennal scale. In this specimen the dactylus of the fourth leg extends beyond the scale, while in the fifth leg merely the tip of the dactylus overreaches the scale. The propodus of this leg is 19 millimeters in length, and 1 millimeter in diameter at its middle point.
Telson. — The armature of the telson varies with the size, but the difference may be due to wear. In a young female 47 millimeters long (Plate II fig. 21) the tip of the telson is long, the extemolateral spines are well developed, and the interno- lateral spines are very long, with almost three-fourths of their
'*Ann. Sci, Nat., Zool. (1900), 11, 314.
"^^ Sitzungsber. Akad. d. Wiss., math.-nat. Klasse, Wien (1862), 45, 416.
"Reise der Osterreichischen Frigatte Novara (1868), 2, 115.
354 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
length reaching beyond the tip of the telson. This condition figured by Ortmann.^^ j^ older specimens (Plate II, fig. 2k), however, the tip, the externolateral spine, and the internolateral spines are proportionally much shorter.
Character of surface. — All females and all ''males feminises," with the exceptions of Nos. 20 and 22, present no areas of spi- nules on the carapace, telson, or abdominal somites. Nos. 20 and 22 are slightly rough to the touch along the anterior part of the carapace. All of the young mature males and the old males show the characteristic areas of spinules described above for the largest male specimen.
Eggs. — The eggs of P. philippinensis, when preserved, measure about 1 by 1.3 millimeters.
Color of living specimen. — Palaemon philippinensis is not brilliantly colored. The surface is translucent, showing an underlying ground color of gray which is usually punctated on the dorsal and lateral regions of the abdomen and carapace with fine brownish red dots. The telson is usually bright brownish red in color, although not conspicuously so. The fol- lowing striking pigment marks which may be seen through the translucent carapace are characteristic of the species (Plate II, fig. 2m) :
1. Two usually brownish black lines running longitudinally on each side
of the dorsal median line of the carapace.
2. A conspicuous T-shaped dark pigment mark seen on the posterior part
of each gill cover.
3. Usually a dark, obliquely placed pigment mark immediately back of the
hepatic spine.
The first and second antennae are marked with brownish red and show no blue color. Along the ventral border of the pleura of the fourth and fifth abdominal somites is a purple band. The first, third, fourth, and fifth legs are translucent and punctated with reddish brown dots, while the chelipeds are dark in color and marked longitudinally with dark greenish bands. The color of the pigment varies somewhat in different specimens and also probably in the same specimens at different times. The color disappears almost entirely after preservation. In the young mature males and sometimes in the adult males a covering of brownish sediment often obscures the color, but the sediment may be rubbed off, leaving the markings visible.
Localities. — We have in our collection 31 males and 8 females, all but one of which were taken in San Juan River (usually
^^Zool Jahrb.^ Systematdk (1891), 5, Tafel XLVII, Fig. 4.
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 355
fresh) which empties into Pasig River near Manila. The one specimen j,ust mentioned was captured in an estero (brackish water) emptying into Pasig River in the city of Manila. It is very probable then that P. philippinensis might be taken in considerable numbers in brackish water.
Palaemon sundaicus Heller. Plate II, figs. 3 and 3a-/.
There is in our collection a fairly complete series of a palaemon which may be distinguished in life and sometimes in the preserved condition from other species found near Manila by the beautifully marbled or tortoise-shell-like markings on its chelipeds. This form is probably Palaemon sundaicus Heller," although there are certain differences which will be mentioned below. The young specimens in our collection agree very well with the descriptions of de Man and Coutiere for P. sundaicus, but our series contains a number of much larger males exhibit- ing characters which have not been described by Heller, de Man,3* or Coutiere.^^ I regret that I have not been able to see the paper of Hilgendorf.**
A study of the females and the young males in our series shows how closely they resemble specimens of like size described by the authors mentioned above. The shape, length, and dental formula of the rostrum and also the relative lengths of the different segments of the chelipeds are strikingly similar. In our collection the males reach a larger size than the females, the former ranging from 59.5 to 108 millimeters, the latter from 53.5 to 89 millimeters. Unfortunately, both de Man and Coutiere had small collections, the individuals of which were mostly fe- males, and in all cases the males which they examined were no larger than the smallest males in our series.
The fingers of the chelipeds in all of our males except the smallest are covered with felted hair which increases in thickness as the animals become larger. This does not seem to be true of any of the males described by de Man or Coutiere, although it must be mentioned that all of our specimens bearing this felt are larger than any specimens described by these authors. Another difference is that in our series we have males of medium size (young mature males) in which the fingers gape widely and in which the relative length of the segments of the chelipeds
^^ Sitzungsber. Akad. d, Wiss., mafh.-nat. Klasse, Wien (1862), 45, 415. '' Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 437.
'"Ann. Sci, Nat, Zool (1900), 11, 332.
'"Land und Siisswasser-Dekapoden Ostafrikas (1899), 130.
356 '^h^ Philippine Journal of Science i^u
differs considerably from the specimens described by de Man and by Couti^re.
The specimens listed in Table III were all seen by me while they were still alive. Judging from certain characteristic color markings, especially the pattern on the chelipeds, which were present in specimens of all sizes and sexes, one could not fail to include them under one species. Even the young mature males (Nos. 15 and 20) with the exceptionally long chelipeds showed the characteristic markings.
Notwithstanding the differences between our large males and the smaller males described by de Man, I do not feel justified in establishing a new species until larger collections of the Javan form are made.
While I have not been able to see any figures or specimens of the American species, Palaemon acanthurtts Wiegmann,^^ except Ortmann's ^^ drawing of the telson which agrees well with young individuals of this species, the descriptions indicate that it is a larger form, although I believe our series does not include the largest specimens to be found. The proportion of the palm to the fingers in old males and the shape of the rostrum are different, but the coat of felted hairs on the fingers of the males is present in both. I believe that Palaemon acanthurus Wieg- mann and the form under consideration are closely related, and I should not be surprised if, when further collections of Palaemon sundaicMs from Java are made, older males with more mature characters are brought to light which will ally the Javan species closer to Palaemon acanthurus.
Rostrum and antennal scales. — The position of the tip of the rostrum with reference to the tip of the antennal scale does not vary much in our specimens. In both males and females the tip may be even with, extend slightly beyond, or fail slightly to reach, the distal end of the scale. It is possible, however, that in larger males the rostrum may not extend so far forward.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum. — There is little difference in the shape of the rostrum in the males and females of all ages. The distal third is turned upward somewhat, and there is in nearly every case a gentle convexity over the eye. Usually there are 3 rostral teeth on the carapace, the fourth being over the edge of the orbit, and rarely are there 2 or 4 on the carapace. The rostral ridge divides the lateral surface of the rostrum into an upper and a lower area which are of
''Arch, /. Naturgesch. (1836), 1, 150.
''Zool Jahrb., Systematik (1891) 5, Tafel XLVII, Fig. 5.
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 357
about equal width. Usually those teeth which are near the distal end of the upper border are separated from one another more than those posterior to them. The first tooth is nearly always separated from the second tooth by a distance which is con- siderably greater than the distances separating the teeth immediately anterior to them. The dental formula for the
specimens in the collection is — — * ^ ' ' , but the large
4, 5, b, 7
majority of the females show a dental formula of — *^ — .
First pair of legs. — The first legs extend beyond the tip of the antennal scale in all specimens; in the youngest, only the propodus is seen beyond it, but in larger specimens more of the first legs overreaches the scale, and finally in the largest individuals as much as one-third of the carpus extends beyond it.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds in this species are approximately equal. All the females have chelipeds which are shorter than the body, and the same is true of practically all the males until they reach a length of about 77 millimeters. Beyond this size the chelipeds are usually longer than the body, and in certain specimens, Nos. 15, 16, and 17, which I consider to be young mature males, they are relatively long. In the largest female, No. 38, the tip of the merus extends beyond the antennal scale, while in the smallest female. No. 25, three-fourth of the carpus overreaches the scale. One of the largest males. No. 20, shows more than one-half of the merus beyond the scale, while in the smallest male only four-fifths of the carpus extends beyond it.
It will be seen, if reference is made to Table III, that the fingers of all individuals are shorter than the palm, except in Nos. 1 and 2, which are the smallest males in the series. In the case of the males the palm seems to grow much faster than the fingers, so that an individual 88 millimeters long (No. 14) has a palm one and two-thirds times as long as the fingers. One of the young mature males. No. 20, shows the palm to be one and three-fourths times as long as the fingers. The largest males in the series have chelipeds which are shorter than the body length except in the case of No. 23. At first sight I considered these specimens to be "males feminises,*' but upon examining them more closely I find that they have well-developed spines on the carapace and abdominal somites and I am of the opinion that these individuals are old mature males whose chelipeds are regenerating. The palm of the largest male. No. 24, is a little more than one and one-half times the length of the fingers.
358
The Philippine Journal of Science
1
00
o
g
s
|
n |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
G |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
oi |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
A |
« s |
T3 J |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
CD |
i I . I |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
1-3 |
3 e |
8 . ° i § s -. |
OQ _ < Q |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
1- |
g 1 *H Oi 1 ! 1 g |
•H S ^ s s s ^ S a X ^ g E i ^lllllllllll^^ |
a a X < |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
% "O |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
§ |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Xi |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
1 . |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
■'I^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
n ^1 |
a |
oc |
BC |
sc |
ft |
CO |
0 g |
a |
! |
||||||||||||||
|
0. |
3 |
3 a 3 «H S •« |
3 ; |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
»4 «M |
& 8 |
§8 S- S^ S .^ g g 8 « |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
^ c8 |
§ |
. o |
3 |
•H |
"s^-g-l-Si |
«M ! |
|||||||||||||||||
|
0. |
1 .c |
O |
o • |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
6 "H c |
;i c |
•y c |
C |
0 |
S c |
c |
C |
C |
■s s 5 § ■a § 5ls |5 1 |
C |
-Z i 5 o |
||||||||||||
|
P, O T 2 ** |
;r |
O T |
T |
t |
r |
T |
T |
t: |
sHlil |
t: |
si |
||||||||||||
|
<x, p |
• o |
H |
o |
O O H <J O <J |
o I |
||||||||||||||||||
|
•11 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Ei |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
9^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
|i |
T |
?^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
2| |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
O g |
t3 |
73 |
ts T3 |
73 |
« T3 |
||||||||||||||||||
|
§B |
(3 |
(: |
c c |
C |
•Q C |
||||||||||||||||||
|
p |
P |
o |
>» *s |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
>> |
>> |
^ >> |
>> |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
'g |
^ |
^ |
^ ^ |
^ |
2 « |
||||||||||||||||||
|
c |
>» |
t»> |
>. >» |
>. |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
o |
' O O ^3 |
43o*»+3oooo '^ooS+5 |
o o |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
C »© T3 X C |
X-oXJC-o-onaTS CJSta-oS.c |
c |
•c -o |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
? |
U) « |
.$? |
J^ .5f |
« U |
C M |
o |
|||||||||||||||||
|
1 |
> |
w W |
W |
OQ W |
W § |
6 W |
> |
||||||||||||||||
|
•35' 11 |
lO lO to lO ■»* |
U5^tOU3lOCO«OlOlOVOlf5<CU3M5 |
U3 |
to kO |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
^ ^ > ^ ^ |
>^^>o^^^^^>^^^S |
\ |
^^ |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
ri |
tH ^ |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
«£ |
U3 |
O |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
S^.Sog"S . |
O lO O O lO |
OiOOOOiOlOiO |
o o o o o o |
o o |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
Carapa lengt] (post crior fa of eye posteri border cara- pace) |
• ^ uj to* t-* od ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ |
t-* 00 0> Oi* O O O Cvj '^' ""t lO* ui U5 «> to |
od |
od od |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
^rM,Hr-(NC^l<NCS|<NW<NWNN<N |
d |
O C<l |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
.^v.g'S^ |
to kO lO o o |
OOiOOOOOOOOU5»000 |
la |
o o |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
Bodj lengt! (tipo rostru to tip telson |
g g f^ ^D ^D "O |
^0 |
8 |
II |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
1 |
•d "l |
"D"D"D'b'b"D"0^5«D"D"0\)'D^3 |
•b |
^D -b |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
o |
th M eo '«»' lo |
«>t-00<?>OjHMCD^^JOt;;jOOO»0 |
C4 |
§^ S3 |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
Z |
]X, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
359
|
of cari arpus. of car] of car] carpus carpus |
||||
|
00 U CD so ^ «^ |
o |
3 O rj |
||
|
»H O H JCS 00 «n |
U3 |
Mr- U, |
||
|
uo. Thrce-fou One-third Three-fou Seven-eig Two-third Four-fifth |
§ |
it < |
Tip of me Almost al Carpus, Tip of me |
ft T3 O
TJ 'O TJ TJ
8 g •S 8
2 8
8:S
O «H ^ "H jC V V A. V V
O O H O O
"O .g "Ta c TS
o .-
W CO W W W W
|
to to tjO |
lO |
ifi |
lO |
lO |
kft |
m |
»o |
to |
IbO |
kO |
to |
1 |
|
■\ \ \ |
*V |
V |
> |
\ |
V, |
•^ |
X |
\ |
\ |
\ |
\ |
\ |
|
;:5 ?} ;::: |
»H |
<-> |
||||||||||
|
*"* |
*"* |
" |
" |
|||||||||
|
U5 lO O |
o |
o |
o |
o |
lO |
o |
o |
la |
o |
o |
o |
\a |
|
S5 S S |
■«f |
■«1« |
la |
*£> |
to |
S |
s |
o> |
g |
d |
^ |
§3 |
|
O lO o |
o |
o |
o |
O |
o |
lO |
o |
lO |
o |
o |
o |
o |
|
gS5S |
E5 |
K |
s |
s |
s |
s |
^ |
e |
gi |
ss |
s |
|
|
tH ^ ^ |
x> |
Ji |
||||||||||
|
^3 O CH |
o |
o |
Of |
Of Of Of |
Of |
Of |
Of |
Of |
Of Of |
|||
|
■^ \0 f£> |
r- |
00 |
o> |
o |
^ |
CJ |
eo |
^ |
vo |
«o |
t- |
s |
|
M N N |
C4 |
C4 |
N |
CO |
eo |
CO |
CO |
eo |
CO |
360
The Philippine Journal of Science
-2
O
CO
?5
<
|
O ® M 3 |
s s |
S 2S ^ |
1 ^ |
o e» |
S |
s |
i 55 ^ ^ ql 53 gJ |
||||||||||||||
|
tA rH |
rH r^ ,H |
tA rA rA |
! ^ ^- ^* ^- ^ »H |
||||||||||||||||||
|
fi'-^gS |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
^ |
: |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
13 |
(U |
I "* |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
> |
> |
> |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
« |
« |
4 |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
-a |
'0 |
i '^ |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
1 |
l' |
1 4 |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
C |
>> |
^ ^ |
! ^ 1 > |
§ |
|||||||||||||||||
|
«c |
Xi |
I T |
t) |
||||||||||||||||||
|
1 |
a > |
J |
1 '^ |
oped. Short, but fai oped. Increasing Think |
-2 1 |
i w |
c |
0 |
4i i |
c |
-§ |
||||||||||
|
£ |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
«c |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
"S |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
bo |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
c |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
ft |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
03 |
il |
1 |
1 |
||||||||||||||||||
|
Oi |
,^^ C |
O O 0 |
O " 4J |
I ' 4J ■ O O O |
|||||||||||||||||
|
i' ^ |
'C |
'C |
'0 |
t: |
:2 bo |
0) X * T 1 J5 OT :? |
'a |
73 |
|||||||||||||
|
A . |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
o o |
U3 lO lO |
1 U3 |
U3 lO O |
o |
! O US »0 m O lO |
||||||||||||||||
|
^ |
3f2 |
t- t' a |
i ^ |
1 g 2 |
S |
1 83 1 8 §* ^ §* |
|||||||||||||||
|
6 |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
C"- |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
i |
o o |
o o o |
I lO |
O O O |
o |
1 O O O O O lO |
|||||||||||||||
|
_3 |
M 1-H CO |
i ^ |
U3 t-* «)' |
a |
1 ^ UD U3 t^ f* CO |
||||||||||||||||
|
^ |
r-f fH |
1-1 iH iH |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
^ W |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
CD |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
CD |
o o |
O O tA |
! o |
O O O |
o |
1 O U3 O U3 O lA |
|||||||||||||||
|
3 |
5 |
N ^ |
IS ;3 ^ |
> tr- |
CJ C^l (N |
« |
1 ^ §j -^' 00 00 00 |
||||||||||||||
|
S |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
n |
o o |
O lO o |
! \a |
O O lO |
o |
1 O O O O UJ O |
|||||||||||||||
|
1 |
3 |
g |
S i^ |
W CvJ N |
\ ^ |
CO ■Tl« w |
00 |
! U3 (M* d N d r4 1 N CO CO r-5 r-t r-l |
|||||||||||||
|
•i |
!« |
g |
|||||||||||||||||||
|
o |
o |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
1) |
o |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
o o |
moo |
\ to |
o o |
o |
[ O O O O O U3 |
||||||||||||||||
|
s |
s |
g s |
(M* W |
JO to o |
I <T. |
U5 -Tjl cd |
lO |
< 00* kO tH f' 00 t-* |
|||||||||||||
|
a |
2 |
w ec <M |
CO |
1 rH (N (N |
|||||||||||||||||
|
OQ |
o o |
o o o |
I O |
lA to lO |
o |
1 O O lO o »o o |
|||||||||||||||
|
1 |
i |
^s |
ass |
1 ^ |
sss |
s |
' N JO CO d «o* l> |
||||||||||||||
|
£ |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
o o |
U5 O O |
! lo |
U5 »0 U3 |
o |
I O O lO O lO lO |
||||||||||||||||
|
sl |
8 e |
si S |
g^^ |
i g| |
§' Ig ^' |
18 |
1 f f S* ?2 3 ^ |
||||||||||||||
|
1 |
^) "0 |
"d "o "o |
«0 "D |
■b "D 'b ^ *D ^ "b |
"O "O "b "b CM- Of O |
||||||||||||||||
|
i |
t- 00 |
» s s |
S S |
•^ lO «D t- 00 0> O |
?3 §3 §5 S ^ S S |
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
361
•<tco»oSS>A-^S-«*wvo
o o o o o
o o o o o
oooooooo
tOOiOOUSkOWOOOO ■rf U3 ,-? '^' C> C4 T-H rH 00 U5 us
OO10OOU3OOU3U3O 00t>0d050>0>OTHO»-JM
US00000W0U500 CO Ci O p O W r^ ^ CO ^* «C
ooooooooooo
<N5c<iu5lO»O<»t>»Ha>C0iC>
ooooooooooo
OOOOlOOOOOiOO t> 00* t-* Oi t-* O* r4 rH r-I tH CO
OOOOU30000U50 «5t^OOO«9eOCOlOkO«OTM rHT-4TH(Mr-t<M(MCM(MC<ICO
|
o |
CH- |
o |
o |
O*- |
o |
o |
Of |
Of Of |
Of |
|
|
?5 |
OI |
o CO |
CO |
n |
?3 |
^ |
^ |
^ |
CO |
?§ |
362 ^^^^ Philippine Jour^ial of Science 1914
The fingers and palm are more nearly of the same length in the females, the palm being one and two-fifths times as long as the fingers in the largest individual. All of the male in- dividuals, except the three smallest (Nos. 1, 2, 3), have both fingers of the chelipeds covered with felted hair, a condition which is not found in the females. The fingers of both males and females are slender, and each has a rather low cutting edge, extending from the teeth to the tip. The youngest males (Nos. 1 and 2) and all the females, except No. 25, show 2 teeth on the mobile and 1 tooth on the immobile finger. In No. 25 only
1 tooth is seen, and this is situated on the mobile finger. The males, Nos. 3 to 13 and 22 to 24, inclusive, show 2 teeth on the mobile finger and 2 on the immobile, but in the young mature males the teeth on the immobile finger are increased in number by the addition of 2, 3, or even 4 confluent teeth, which are situated between the most proximal of the two teeth just men- tioned and the joint, a condition which is characteristic of mature males in some other species at least.
The palm is almost cylindrical, that of the smallest measuring
2 by 2.5 millimeters at its middle and that of the large male, No. 20, measuring 4.5 by 5 millimeters at a similar point.
The carpus is cylindrical in cross section, and increases grad- ually in diameter passing from the proximal to the distal end. It is shorter than the propodus and longer than the palm, but it does not increase in length so fast as does the palm. In the mature males there is a slight swelling of the carpus a little posterior to the distal end.
The proportion of the merus to the carpus ranges from 1 : 1.33 to 1 : 1.77, and the measurements indicate that the carpus grows faster than the merus. The latter is slightly longer than the palm in the young but slightly shorter in old individuals. It is always shorter than the carpus and longer than the fingers. The merus, which is flattened dorsoventrally along the proximal part, becomes almost cylindrical and of greater diameter at the distal part.
As in other palaemons, the merus grows faster than the ischium, so that the proportion between the ischium and merus increases with increasing body length. In the young mature males this increase is especially evident. The ischium is flattened dorsoventrally, the upper and lower surfaces being divided into two regions by a median longitudinal groove.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs, — The third, fourth, and fifth legs extend with their dactyli beyond the tip of the antennal scale in young individuals of both sexes. In older individuals as much
IX, D, 4 Co ivies: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 363
as one-fifth or one-third of the dactyli may extend beyond. The propodus of the fifth leg (No. 1) measures 0.5 millimeter in diameter at its middle and 8.75 millimeters in length. Similar measurements for Nos. 24, 25, and 38 are 0.8 by 15, 0.3 by 7.5, and 0.6 by 13 millimeters, respectively.
Telson. — Specimens in which the telson has not been worn show the intemolateral spines extending about two-thirds of their length beyond the acute median spine. The externolateral spines are short and of about the same length as the median spine. In some specimens the tip of the telson is worn and the intemolateral spines are considerably shortened.
Character of surface. — The carapace and abdominal somites of all females and males (Nos. 1 to 13, inclusive) are smooth to the touch, and show no spines under a lens. Male specimens larger than these have patches of spinules on the carapace, pleura of abdomen, tergum of sixth somite, upper surface of uropods, and the telson. These spinules are especially numerous on the young mature males, and the surface is distinctly rough to the touch. The surface of the first pair of legs is smooth, except in the old males where the ischium and part of the merus are covered with a few spinules. The spines on the chelipeds make their appear- ance at an early age. Specimen 1 shows a few rather indistinct rows of spines on the palm and distal half of the carpus. The area of spines increases with the body length, so that in No. 4 it covers the proximal end of the finger, the palm, the carpus, and the distal half of the merus. In No. 8 the condition is similar except that the ischium also is covered. Young mature males, as an example. No. 20, show a few spines at the proximal end of the fingers and about 12 longitudinal rows of medium- sized spines, which are distributed on the inner, ventral, and dorsal surfaces of the palm. The outer surface of the palm is covered with innumerable very small spines, which are not arranged regularly in rows. A similar condition exists on the carpus, merus, and ischium. The dorsal and ventral "linear spaces'' are visible especially on the palm, carpus, and merus. In middle-sized specimens the "linear spaces" are more con- spicuous. The third, fourth, and fifth legs are smooth in all but the largest males, where the propodus, carpus, and sometimes the met*us are covered with very minute spinules.
Eggs. — The eggs of this species when preserved are almost spherical, and average 0.5 by 0.46 millimeter.
Color of the living specimens. — The general surface of the body owes its color mainly to the layer of pigment cells under the transparent chitinous covering. The color is not always the
364 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
same in any one individual. It may range from green to blue or even to brick red, and in old specimens these colors may be partially obscured. No T-shaped, L-shaped, or diagonal mark- ings are seen under the sides of the carapace, but in living speci- mens the chelipeds are conspicuously marked, so as to appear like tortoise shell (Plate II, fig. 3c). These markings, which are probably the same as the marbled markings spoken of by de Man, sometimes persist temporarily after preservation, but usually dis- appear as do all other colors mentioned. The uropods are colored a conspicuous red, and there is a purple spot on the postero- lateral portion of the exopodite. The internal flagella of the first pair of antennae are marked on their dorsal surface with bright yellow, and similar yellow spots are also seen on the uropods and telson. The color notes which have just been given apply to both sexes, but there are certain markings which distinguish the males from the females. A cream-colored transverse band on the tergum of the third abdominal somite is present in all the females of this species, but in the males it is much reduced in size or almost absent. This band is found in some other species which are described below. In the females the ventral border of the pleura of the fourth and fifth somites has a blood-red color which is absent in the males.
Localities. — We have in our collection 73 females and 24 males. Most of these were collected in Obando River flowing into Manila Bay near Manila (brackish water) ; some were taken in San Francisco River (usually fresh), which is a branch of Pasig River; others were obtained from an estero (often brackish) emptying into Pasig River within the city of Manila. Nos. 2, 6, 7, 9, 12, 17, 19, and 21 (Table III) are from San Francisco River.
Palaemon lanceifrons Dana. Plate II, figs. 4 and 4a.
The collection contains several palaemons which agree well with Dana's ^® description of Palaemon lanceifrons. The fingers of the chelipeds are about equal to the palm in most specimens, although in the old mature males (Dana's specimen was evidently a rather old male) the fingers are considerably shorter than the palm and are two-fifths of the length of the propodus. (Plate II, figs. 4 and 4a.) The propodus is a little longer than the carpus in all cases and a little slenderer. Characteristic tubercles (not mentioned in Dana's description), teeth, and thick hair are
'•United States Exploring Expedition, Crustacea (1852-1854), 13, 589.
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 365
present on the fingers. These structures are described below in a description of a local form of this species.
The dental formula is — ' ^ J » and the shape and size
d, 4, 5
of the head and rostrum agree very well with Dana's figure.
The rostrum never extends beyond the antennal scale, and is
decidedly convex over the eye in older specimens.
The general surface of the body is sometimes dark and some- times light. The color is due partly to closely set brownish pigment spots, which often have a dark reddish tinge, and in addition to this ground color there are patches of yellowish cream flecks scattered over the surface. Usually the tips of the uropods and the telson have a reddish brown color. The characteristic markings of this species (Plate II, fig. 5g) are an almost straight diagonal mark, an inverted V-shaped mark, and 2 marks shaped like an inverted L. These are often bluish in color, and may always be seen more or less clearly on the sides of the carapace. The horizontal limb of the anterior inverted L extends poste- riorly from the anterior border of the carapace, ventral to the spines. The posterior inverted L is situated back of the anterior inverted L, and its horizontal limb is on a level considerably higher than that of the former. The diagonal mark, which really lies on the tissues beneath the carapace and is seen on account of the transparency of the latter, extends from the point where the horizontal and vertical limbs of the posterior L meet to the posterior margin of the carapace. Finally, the inverted V-shaped mark lies directly above the anterior L. The first and second antennae are never colored blue, but are usually marked, especially in the male, with reddish brown transverse bars. The second legs or chelipeds are mottled in a manner somewhat sim- ilar to that of Palaemon sundaicus, but the coloring is reddish brown and greenish cream, and does not resemble tortoise shell in appearance.
Palaemon lanceifrons Dana, judging from our specimens, is distinct from Palaemon idae Heller, The carpus is always shorter than the propodus, and the proportion is about the same throughout the series. Furthermore, the chelipeds of P. lanceifrons are thicker and the rostrum is broader.
I agree with de Man's statement that P. lanceifrons is distinct from P. sundaicus. The shape of the rostrum, the shape of the different. The color markings and the tubercles on the fingers, fingers, and the distribution of the hair on the fingers are
366 "^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
which are seen in our specimens of P. lanceifrons, are absent in P. sundaicus.
Palaemon lanceifrons is not the young of Palaemon philip- pinensis. The latter has differently shaped fingers, there is no thick coating of hair on them, the eggs are much larger, and the color markings are different.
De Man's *° suggestion that Palaemon lanceifrons Dana is possibly identical with Palaemon dispar von Martens receives considerable support from my observations. I believe that the former is very closely related to the latter, the only differences being found in the shape of the rostrum, the number of proximal teeth on the fingers, the number of distal tubercles on the fingers, and the shape of the tip of the immobile finger. Further col- lections and an actual comparison of specimens of the two species may show them to be identical.
There are 9 males and 24 females of this species in the col- lection; they were all purchased in a Manila market. Nearly all the females bear eggs. These measure from 0.5 to 0.7 by 0.6 to 0.8 millimeter.
A local form of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana, collected in San Juan River near Manila, differs slightly from the specimens just described. Except for minor differences, the chelipeds have the same proportions and general characteristics. The rostral for- mula is practically the same, but the rostrum is slightly longer and is less convex over the eye.
Rostrum and antennal scale. — The rostrum extends about as far forward as the antennal scale, but in some cases fails to reach it or extends beyond it a very short distance.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum. — The shape of the rostrum does not vary much, but it must be added that there are not many individuals in the collection and that they do not show a very great range in size. The tip of the rostrum of old and middle-aged specimens turns up slightly, but in the young it is straight. The rostrum usually has its origin rather far forward on the carapace, but in Nos. 5, 7, and 8 (Table IV) it arises from about the middle of the same. Usually, there are 2 teeth on the carapace, and the 4 distal teeth at the tip of the rostrum are more widely separated than the rest. The first and second teeth are more widely separated than those immediately anterior to them. The lateral surface of the rostrum is divided
^•^ Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 419.
IX. D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 367
into an upper wider and a lower narrower region by the usual ridge. The dental formula varies somewhat I — ' ^' a^ — )*
First pair of legs, — In young males about one-half of the pro- podus, in the middle-aged males the whole of the same segment, and in the old males the tip of the carpus extends beyond the antennal scale.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds of the young specimen, No. 2, are equal in length, but in all the rest of the specimens in which the chelipeds are present they are unequal in length. This inequality seems to increase with age, and it seems probable that it is not due to injury and regeneration. Only in the mature males, Nos. 7 and 8, are the chelipeds as long as the body. In the youngest male only two-fifths of the carpus extends beyond the antennal scale, while in the mature males from one-fourth to one-third of the merus may be seen beyond it.
The fingers of the youngest male, No. 1, are longer than the palm, slightly older specimens show the fingers to be a little shorter than the palm, and the old mature males have fingers which are much shorter than the palm. In specimen 8 the proportion of the fingers to the palm is 1:1.66 (left cheliped) and 1:1.44 (right cheliped). Thick hair is not present on the fingers of the youngest specimens, Nos. 1 and 2, but it makes its appearance on both fingers in slightly older individuals. The mature males have a thick coating of hair, which covers all but the tip of the mobile finger. The immobile finger bears a small patch of hair, which is limited to a narrow region extending as far forward as the middle of the finger on both sides of the cutting edge. Four broad and inconspicuous tubercles bear- ing a few stiif hairs are present along the inner side of the cutting edge of the immobile finger. These are situated on the swollen distal half, and are only seen in the mature males, Nos. 7 and 8. The mobile fingers of the specimens just mentioned have 3 long low tubercles along the inner side of the cutting edge. They are situated on the distal half of the finger. The keel of the cutting edge is well developed but low in the young and middle-aged individuals, and it becomes reduced to a raised line in the mature males. The youngest male. No. 1, shows 2 teeth on the mobile finger and 1 tooth on the immobile finger, but these may be seen only through a strong lens. In specimen 3, the beginnings of 1 or 2 confluent teeth posterior to the large tooth of the immobile finger are present. In the mature males, Nos. 7 and 8, there is an indication of the beginning of a
129877 4
368
The Philippine Journal of Science
I
|
% |
il |
s^!s |
i§ g§ ^ ^ § s |
|||||||||||||
|
1 m • |
yA T^ rA rA y-\ tA |
|||||||||||||||
|
II 11 |
«• '2 . |
|||||||||||||||
|
1 ! "> |
||||||||||||||||
|
S |
td |
I 1 cc |
||||||||||||||
|
H H O w O H O |
§ |
i i 1 |
||||||||||||||
|
O O -M O •♦J I |
||||||||||||||||
|
« t) TJ ^ TJ ,C ' |
||||||||||||||||
|
"H |
o .' I ^ |
.s • |
||||||||||||||
|
(3 |
J5 ; 1 OT |
53 ; |
||||||||||||||
|
« |
||||||||||||||||
|
^ |
||||||||||||||||
|
C |
||||||||||||||||
|
o . |
||||||||||||||||
|
12 |
||||||||||||||||
|
V cS |
||||||||||||||||
|
•M O |
||||||||||||||||
|
i^, " |
t |
|||||||||||||||
|
Vm |
o |
|||||||||||||||
|
ii |
00 53 |
T |
T |
1)0 |
||||||||||||
|
•h C |
1 E JH |
§ |
§ |
«H o |
||||||||||||
|
o « |
S « 5 |
P. |
||||||||||||||
|
00 |
X O o'S'm'S 0«h |
o |
||||||||||||||
|
)M |
j^'O'O ao a-o o |
|||||||||||||||
|
p;; |
S |
1^1 |
O. |
.; o o o o o ; « rg rg fQ fQ rc3 , |
||||||||||||
|
O |
(1| H 04 |
H |
00 |
1 1 i |
||||||||||||
|
8 |
||||||||||||||||
|
2 43 |
ft |
O O O O ITS o I l> r-J r4 00 id U5 1 |
||||||||||||||
|
* |
(N CO CO CO CO CO 1 |
|||||||||||||||
|
!« |
O |
|||||||||||||||
|
5*3 |
c " |
|||||||||||||||
|
ti S |
||||||||||||||||
|
^« |
3 |
o o o »o »o O ] |
||||||||||||||
|
i| |
id xd «>' CO* «d «d ■ |
|||||||||||||||
|
vi S |
o |
|||||||||||||||
|
43 V |
00 |
|||||||||||||||
|
OS -^ |
||||||||||||||||
|
Si |
||||||||||||||||
|
\a \a lo lo \a o ! |
||||||||||||||||
|
•Hm |
1 |
00 |
||||||||||||||
|
o o |
73 |
"O tJ frt 'O |
»d «o «o t-* t-' t> 1 |
|||||||||||||
|
ao, |
§ |
o |
1 § 1 § |
«) |
||||||||||||
|
■m:p |
>> |
>, |
rfl >i 43 >> |
s |
||||||||||||
|
"85 |
§ ! |
,a ^ ^ ^ |
||||||||||||||
|
n |
O O O O to lA 1 |
|||||||||||||||
|
.2 |
A U A ti A A Xi JS, |
3 |
00* oi oi -j o o I |
|||||||||||||
|
b««6o«b«b0t*l« |
1 |
|||||||||||||||
|
o |
;= > s > ;= s s ;= |
|||||||||||||||
|
04 |
wWwWwwww |
o |
U |
|||||||||||||
|
•3 «• |
tti |
O U5 O o o o ! |
||||||||||||||
|
23 II |
g |
s |
-sjJ id id t-* <»* «>* 1 |
|||||||||||||
|
►J |
s |
|||||||||||||||
|
Carapace lentrth (poste- rior face of eye to posterior border of carapace. |
OU50U500010 |
n |
U5 O lO O O lO 1 |
|||||||||||||
|
::j ^* s ;5 ;s ^ s s |
'^ |
^ Tf< Tj! «d id »d I |
||||||||||||||
|
^•ggo^ |
OOOiOlOlOtOO |
U3 lO lO O O lO I |
||||||||||||||
|
>»t3 O J3 I C |
^ 18 S g g S' S S |
ft |
00 o> cri CO 1^* rH 1 Pl^ J pi ^' tf' h4 tf' |
|||||||||||||
|
i |
"o^o'b'b'b'b'b'b |
d |
•b \) "o ^ |
|||||||||||||
|
CO |
OT |
|||||||||||||||
|
o |
fHMC0-^IO(Ot*00 |
1 |
r-l W CO -^ |
|||||||||||||
|
z |
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 369
a la la
«> CO i>
O O lO o t:^ ^ eo tA «D t> 00 to
lo in o o
00 00 o 00
o o o aj 05 00
o lO o o TjJ -^ai lo ec
o o o
rj< CO rH
O O to O
lO O O O
o o o t^ (£ tc
o o o o cj o co' oi
U5 O O O
CO 00* (m' <m'
<N <N CO N
^4 tf >j tf J pi kJ «
^ \-)
370 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
third confluent tooth and the first or most anterior confluent tooth is almost separated from those back of it. The large tooth of the immobile finger measures 1 millimeter in height, and the teeth of the mobile finger are about half as high (No. 8).
The palm is cylindrical in cross section, and is always shorter than the carpus. The proportion of the palm to the carpus in the smallest specimen is 1:2, and in the largest mature male the length of the palm is contained about one and one-third times in that of the carpus (No. 8).
The carpus reaches it greatest diameter some distance posterior to the distal end in mature males, and is cylindrical in cross section. In all of our specimens it is shorter than the propodus, but only slightly so in the immature specimens (Nos. 1-6).
The proportion of the merus to the carpus ranges from 1:1.37 to 1:1.76. The former is always longer than the fingers, and it is longer than the palm except in the mature males (Nos. 7 and 8).
Third, fourth, and fifth legs, — In the smallest male the dactylus of the third leg, one-fourth of the propodus of the fourth, and one-half of the propodus of the fifth leg extend beyond the antennal scale. The propodus of the fifth leg meas- ures 8 millimeters in length, and has a width of 0.33 millimeter at its middle point. One-half of the propodus of the third leg extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale in the largest male, and one-third of the same segment of the fourth and fifth legs overreaches the scale. The measurements for the propodus of the fifth leg are 11.5 by 0.5 millimeters.
Telson. — The telsons of the two largest males and the smallest male are damaged. The tip in uninjured specimens is sub- acute, the externolateral spines fail to reach the tip of the telson by a distance equal to their own lengths, and the internolateral spines extend with three-fifths (No. 7) and two-thirds (No. 1) of their lengths beyond the tip.
Character of the surface, — The carapace and abdominal somites of all specimens except the two largest males, Nos. 7 and 8, are smooth. The last-mentioned mature males have the usual spinules on the pleura of the abdomen, the tergum of the sixth somite, the uropods, the telson, and the carapace. No spines can be seen on the legs of the smallest specimen. The surface of the first legs is smooth in all individuals except in the two largest males, where a few spines may be seen on the ischium. The chelipeds of No. 1 are smooth, and in No. 2 a few spinules may be seen on the immobile finger, the palm, and the car-
IX, D. 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 371
pus, but these are only visible under rather high magnification. In older specimens the spines are larger and cover the proximal part of the immobile finger, the palm, the carpus, the merus, and the ischium. The spines on the chelipeds are inconspicuous, being broad, low, and subacute. ''Linear spaces" cannot be distinguished. Very minute spinules may be seen, with the aid of a lens, on the propodus, carpus, and merus of the third, fourth, and fifth legs.
Eggs, — There are no females of this form in the collection.
Color of the living specimens. — The color of these specimens agrees with that of the typical Palaemon lanceifrons Dana, the pigment marks on the sides of the carapace being plainly visible.
Locality, — All of these specimens were captured in San Juan River near Manila.
Palaemon lanceifrons Dana var. montalbanensis var. nov. Plate II, figs. 6 and 6a4,
I have collected from the water supply of the city of Manila at Montalban 72 specimens of a form which I consider to be a variety of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana and one which in some respects is very similar to Palaemon elegans de Man. It is char- acterized by the decided convexity and shortness of the rostrum, by the fingers being much shorter than the palm in large speci- mens, and by the presence of tubercles in older males along the sides of the cutting edge of the fingers.
This variety, which I have called P. I, var. montalhayiensls, differs from P, lanceifrons as originally described by Dana in the following particulars: The number of teeth on the dorsal and ventral borders of the rostrum is less, the rostrum does not extend so far forward, and the carpus is considerably shorter than the propodus even in young specimens.
Palaemon lanceifrons var. montalbanensis, while very similar to P. elegans de Man, differs as follows : The number of teeth on the dorsal and ventral borders of the rostrum is less ; the teeth at the distal end of the dorsal border of the rostrum are spaced more widely ; the chelipeds are unequal in length except in the young ; the relative length of the fingers and palm of the chelipeds is different; the segments of the chelipeds are thicker; and the tubercles along the sides of the cutting edge of the fingers are distributed differently. Judging from the 37 males and 35 fe- males in our collection, the mature females are much smaller than the old males.
The following description applies to the large male listed as No. 12 in Table V. This specimen, which measures 65.5 milli-
372 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
meters in length, has a rostrum which reaches the tip of the
peduncle of the first antenna. The dorsal border of the rostrum
begins at the middle of the carapace, but in this region and for
some distance forward it is without teeth. The ventral border
curves upward moderately, the tip extends directly forward,
and the ridge along the side of the rostrum divides the blade
into a wide upper and narrow lower area. The rostral formula
9 is ^, and the proximal and distal teeth of the dorsal border
are more widely separated than those between them. On the ventral border the 2 teeth are situated well back from the tip.
The slender first pair of legs extends with the whole of the propodus beyond the antennal scale.
The chelipeds which are decidedly unequal in length extend with from one-third to one-half of the merus beyond the scale, and are both considerably longer than the body. Of the two chelipeds, the left is the longer, measuring 87 millimeters from the tip to the proximal end of the ischium; the right measures 75 millimeters, and is slenderer. The description which fol- lows applies to the left cheliped : The immobile finger curves in less sharply and extends farther forward than the mobile finger. It is considerably more than half as long as the palm (1 : 1.68), and is distinctly swollen along its distal half. The keel of the cutting edge is reduced to a raised line, but a short distance in front of the proximal end of the finger there is a well-developed triangular tooth measuring 1.5 millimeters in height, which meets the cutting edge of the mobile finger and aids in preventing the fingers from closing. Posterior to the tooth just mentioned is a row of 3 much smaller confluent teeth (4 in specimen 14). All of these teeth are obscured by a thick growth of hair, which is limited to a narrow region on both sides of the cutting edge as far forward as the middle of the finger. Along the inner side of the cutting edge of the distal portion of this finger is a row of 5 broad, low, and inconspicuous tubercles, which bear a few stiff hairs. The sharply curved mobile finger is covered, except at the tip, with a dense coat of hair and is not swollen. The keel of the cutting edge is reduced as in the case of the immobile finger. Along the cutting edge are 2 teeth, measuring 1 millimeter in height, which curve slightly posteriorly. The palm is cylindrical in cross section and considerably shorter than the carpus (1 : 1.26). The carpus, which reaches its greatest dia- meter some distance back from the distal end, is much shorter than the chela (1:1.28), while the merus, which is only slightly
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 373
flattened at the posterior end, is much shorter than the carpus (1:1.57). The dorsal and ventral surfaces of the ischium each present a median longitudinal groove. The lengths, in millimeters, of the parts just described are as follows: Propodus, 33.5; finger, 12.5; palm, 21; carpus, 26; merus, 16.5; ischium, 11; total, 87.
The telson of this specimen ends in a subacute spine. The extemolateral spines do not extend to the end of the telson, and the internolateral spines extend with about half their length beyond the tip. (See below, description of telson of smaller specimens.)
Patches of poorly developed spines are present on the an- terior part of the carapace. Similar spines are seen on the ventral and lateral parts of the pleura, the dorsal surface of the sixth somite, and the exposed parts of the dorsal and ventral surfaces of the uropods and the telson. These spines are espe- cially numerous on the last three structures named. The is- chium of the first legs and the distal segments of the third, fourth, and fifth legs are covered with very fine spines, which are scarcely stronger than stiflf hairs. The immobile finger, palm, carpus, merus, and ischium of the chelipeds are armed with short blunt spines, which are larger in size and fewer in number on the inner than on the outer surface of these seg- ments. The mobile finger is spineless. "Linear spaces" cannot be seen.
Rostrum and peduncle of first antenna. — An examination of the 72 specimens in our collection shows that the rostrum may extend as far as the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna, may extend slightly beyond it, or may fail to reach it. In no case does the rostrum extend to the tip of the antennal scale, and there is no indication that the rostrum decreases in pro- portional length with reference to the peduncle of the first antenna.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum, — There is little variation in the shape of the rostrum, but in the old males the convexity of the dorsal border is much more pronounced than in the females or young males. The tip does not turn up, the ros- trum begins about halfway back on the carapace, and 1 or 2 teeth have their origin on the carapace. In all specimens the distal teeth of the dorsal border are more widely separated from one another than the teeth immediately posterior to them, and in the old males the first 2 teeth on the carapace are slightly more separated than those which immediately follow. The ridge
374 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
along the side of the rostrum divides the blade into an upper
and lower region, the former being the wider of the two in
specimens of all ages. The dental formula is very constant
„ /8, 9, 10\
m all specimens V o"^ — f'
First pair of legs. — The first pair of legs in young males and mature females extends with the tip of the propodus beyond the antennal scale, but in the large males the whole propodus is seen beyond the scale.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds of the smallest males and all the females are approximately equal. An examination of Table V shows that in the males the inequality between the chelipeds in- creases with the increase in body length and that the difference in length is most marked in those specimens which show mature characteristics (Nos. 7, 8, 12). While it is difficult to determine whether this unequal length is the result of injury and regenera- tion or whether this condition is always characteristic of un- injured middle-aged and old males, the fact that none of the specimens in the collection shows chelipeds of such unequal length that there can be no doubt that the smaller one is regenerating indicates that the inequality is characteristic. The chelipeds of the females (Nos. 15, 16, 17), the "males feminises'* (Nos. 9, 11, 13), and the young immature males are shorter than the body (Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) . Young mature males and old mature males have the chelipeds longer than the body (Nos. 7, 8, 10, 12) . In the smallest males, one-half of the carpus extends beyond the antennal scale, while in the largest males one-third of the merus may be seen beyond. The females do not show a great range in size, and a small fraction of the carpus only extends beyond the antennal scale.
The fingers of the youngest male. No. 1, are longer than the palm, and those of the youngest female. No. 15, are equal in length to those of the palm ; in slightly larger males and females the palm becomes longer than the fingers, and in some of the largest males the fingers are contained one and one-half times in the palm. All of the male individuals except the smallest one have felted hair on the mobile finger, a condition which is not found in the females. There is also hair on the immobile finger of the males, but this does not appear to be present until the individual has reached a considerable size (No. 6). The immobile finger of young mature males and old mature males (Nos. 7, 8, 10, 12, 14) is swollen, and bears from 5 to 8 tubercles along the inner side of the cutting edge. The mobile finger of the same specimens is conspicuosly curved, and bears
IX, D, 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
375
<
|
V |
c |
|
c |
f^ |
|
?i |
|
|
e |
|
|
si |
0) |
|
cs |
s |
|
q |
§rt |
|
CO |
'SI |
|
?^ |
1^ |
&2
.&§
o o
2-i
«£
to »-
6 t
e 6 § S § iJ S 6 S «
I -E S ^ S -S 2 -s -2 I
V vj <u "^ V n V
c ® c ® c ® c O S O S O S O
^ H
ago
S^sB.2^^ o o «^ (=•
O, t3 TJ
O a O ft O A P.
/-^ O o O O Jl O
H H ft.
O
^ '^ ^
'O 'T3 TJ
C C C
>> X >.
0) o a>
ua J2 ^
>>>>>>
43 +3
' ! .^ > .5? ^ .^ .^ .^ M H 55 W CO w w
CONCO COC<ICO(MMCO<NeO
be
VM ^ >^
00 o ^
lO O O lO o
U3OOOOOOOO10OU5
OOCOeOOO"^ »OtOl««>b-C»0000OiOirHT-«
o »o o o o
OOlOlOOOiOUSO
c>odt-*ocoioi«a>o
^ \) >o \) X •c^^•o"D^:."D^D•D'^^oocH
CSICO'^^kO <£>t-OCO»OrHC<ICO-«*'U5«>t-
376
The Philippine Journal of Science
o
I
e I
Eh
§ =3
|
por- n of us to pus. |
§§ :? |
S S |
^ 5? S 2 |
g; S s |
5 J§ g tg |
^ ^ |
s |
'^. ^ |
c- eo tA kO |
||||||||||||||
|
rH rH |
TH >H |
r-4 rH ■ |
tH tH |
r-i rH |
rH |
tM ^* |
iH rH |
rA rA |
rH |
r-i r-5 |
r-i rH |
||||||||||||
|
2.2 fe§^ |
w_^w |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
Ut |
ci |
^ |
I »^ |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
V |
'O |
« |
1 (l> |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
bo |
fl •• |
bo |
(« |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
c |
3 S5 |
c |
• C |
||||||||||||||||||||
|
«c |
tC |
' « |
|||||||||||||||||||||
|
e |
P |
S |
u |
V |
I ^ |
||||||||||||||||||
|
& |
JQ |
^ |
01 |
1 |
a |
1 2 |
S |
||||||||||||||||
|
c |
fi |
0 .2 |
c «3 |
c |
g |
I c |
1 |
||||||||||||||||
|
o |
2 |
S |
12 |
g |
X |
c |
X |
; o |
- |
||||||||||||||
|
0) |
V 6 5 -^ |
+3 |
^ |
+3 |
I ^ |
||||||||||||||||||
|
-M |
g |
5 |
g |
^ |
3 |
i |
I -^ |
9 |
|||||||||||||||
|
S |
o |
i |
§ |
§! |
§ |
§ |
§ |
i 2 |
g |
||||||||||||||
|
1 |
s |
1 |
d |
s - IS |
-s |
d |
T3 *S 0 |
"t |
1 3 1 ** |
||||||||||||||
|
1 |
00 |
6 |
§ |
6- |
i |
d |
I |
! O |
J |
||||||||||||||
|
c |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
« |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
•g |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
bo |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
)3 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
p. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
el |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
m |
O |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
-s |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
o, |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
o |
|||||||||||||||||
|
V |
Tl |
TS |
TS |
'O |
'd |
o |
tJ |
2 |
V |
I <y |
<0 |
||||||||||||
|
"3 |
c |
"O |
c |
t: |
• c |
TJ |
|||||||||||||||||
|
6 |
o |
J_ |
_i^ |
_1^ |
^ |
^ |
_i^ |
-i- |
^ |
i i |
^_ |
||||||||||||
|
Total length begin- ing with schium. |
§3 §^ |
kO lA eo CO |
38 |
o o |
lO |
o o |
O lO E^8 |
O lO |
c s |
1 o o i 18 s |
o o S5 ^ |
||||||||||||
|
V C"^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
6 3 |
kO »o |
lO lO |
o o |
o o |
o |
o o |
lO o |
o o |
c |
1 O IC5 |
O lO |
||||||||||||
|
Tf Tti |
id id |
id id |
to* «d |
<d <o* |
00* |
00* 00* |
00* 00* |
t-* c-' |
c |
< 00 00 |
r-i O* |
||||||||||||
|
2 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
o |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
<n |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
s |
iO iO |
O U5 |
o o |
O kO |
o o |
o |
O lO |
lO kO |
kO to |
kfi |
I o la |
lO o |
|||||||||||
|
^ ^ |
to to |
t-' c^ |
00 t-* |
00* 00* |
d |
CO* N* |
TjJ eo* |
ai 00 |
kfi |
1 r-5 r-J |
ed id |
||||||||||||
|
il |
tH |
iH »H |
rH |
1 ,^ r-t |
rH iH |
||||||||||||||||||
|
m |
O Ui |
o o |
o o |
kO %o |
o o |
o |
O lO |
o o |
to lO |
C |
1 O O |
O O |
|||||||||||
|
1 |
P |
fO <d |
oi o |
s's- |
23' d |
:i ^ |
13 |
d s' |
C4 C<l |
23 9 |
^ |
i s s |
^* §5 |
||||||||||
|
k |
1 |
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
t |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
to o |
o o |
O lO |
kO o |
lO o |
lO |
o o |
o o |
O iO |
c |
I o o |
O lO |
||||||||||||
|
2 |
eo CO |
«d t^ |
t-* t"^ |
00 00* |
l> 00* |
o* |
JO ^ |
00 kd |
r-j cn* |
^ |
I rH* id |
^* id |
|||||||||||
|
a |
r-l |
r-i r-« |
<N |
1 rH rH |
CO .H |
||||||||||||||||||
|
2 |
lA kO |
O lO |
O lO |
o o |
o o |
o |
o o |
O O |
o o |
U3 |
1 kO o |
lO o |
|||||||||||
|
a> |
'* -^ |
id id |
id id |
tJ ^• |
*6 fo |
o> |
O 00* |
juj o |
od r-* |
W |
i ''* ^ |
^' d |
|||||||||||
|
b« |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
c |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(^ |
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
O \Q |
O lO |
o o |
lO o |
ta o |
kO |
o o |
o o |
O kO |
kC |
I lO O |
lO lA |
||||||||||||
|
n |
ao c-' |
;:i?3* |
c4 eg |
id ^ |
s;? |
OS* |
§5 gj |
ss* |
SS |
S5 |
i S* ^" |
ss ^ |
|||||||||||
|
a |
J « |
i« |
^4 tf |
)J Qi |
J* « |
iL^ |
iM |
ni (« |
J « |
^ |
ji i±S |
t±£ |
|||||||||||
|
1 |
^5 |
"b |
^D |
"O |
"o |
•b |
•o |
"b |
^ |
O ^3 |
"0 |
||||||||||||
|
6 |
CQ |
eo |
•^ |
lO |
«o |
t- |
00 |
o> |
S 7^ |
S3 |
|||||||||||||
|
% |
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
377
s §3
s s
1 I
G B O "*
O O U5 O U5 O
O 0> CI
o o o o o o
<«)• rt< LO to lO lO
lO U5 O O O O
yef -^ lei id lo lii
kA U3 lO O ta lA
«o «c> <o t- c- t-
O us lA
lA eo r-5
lA U3 O O lA »A CO CO LA lA «4< Tjt
lA »A O O lA O 00 CO '^ '^ ^ '^
|
O lA |
lA |
o o |
O O |
O lA ai 00* dS |
|
^ |
\i |
O |
o |
Of |
|
S |
^ |
tA |
CO |
t- |
378 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
from 2 to 4 tubercles along a similar region. These characters do not appear in young males, **males feminises," nor females. The keel of the cutting edge of both fingers in young males and all females is well developed but low. It decreases in height as the body length increases, so that in the oldest males it is only a raised line. In the youngest males and females (Nos. 1 and 15) no teeth can be seen on the fingers, but slightly older speci- mens (Nos. 2 and 16) show 2 teeth on the mobile and 1 tooth on the immobile finger. The condition last mentioned is char- acteristic of all the females of this species in our collection, ex- cept of No. 15, but an examination of the older males shows the presence of confluent teeth back of the tooth, mentioned above, on the immobile finger. These teeth make their first appearance in No. 3, being represented by 1 or 2 very small teeth, but with increasing body length the number increases to 3 or 4.
The palm is cylindrical in cross section, that of one of the large males (No. 12) measuring 4 millimeters and that of a small male (No. 3) measuring almost 2 millimeters in diameter at the middle point.
The carpus is also cylindrical in cross section, and in females, young males, and ''males feminises'' it increases in diameter passing from the distal to the proximal end. The same is true for young mature and old mature males, except that the greatest diameter is reached some distance posterior to the distal end. The carpus is shorter than the propodus and longer than the palm or the fingers; the palm, however, grows faster than the carpus.
The proportion of the merus to the carpus ranges from 1 : 1.33 in the smallest male to 1 : 1.64 in the largest, showing that the carpus increases in length faster than the merus. The latter is longer than the palm and is of the same length as the fingers in the smallest male and shorter than the palm and longer than the fingers in the largest. The merus, as in other species, is flattened dorsoventrally along the proximal part, becoming almost cylin- drical and of greater diameter in the distal region.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs, — In the smallest male, the dactyli of the third and fourth legs and the tip of the propodus of the fifth leg extend beyond the antennal scale. The propodus of the fifth leg measures 5.5 millimeters in length and 0.1 milli- meter in diameter at the middle region. One of the oldest males (No. 12) shows one-third of the propodus of the third and fourth legs beyond the tip of the antennal scale, while in the fifth leg one-fourth of the propodus is seen beyond. The propodus of
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 379
the fifth leg measures 10.5 millimeters in length, and has a width of 0.5 millimeter at its middle point.
Telson, — The telson of a large male has been described above. In young specimens the telson tip is subacute, the externolateral spines extend posteriorly almost as far as the telson tip, and the internolateral spines overreach the tip by more than two- thirds of their length.
Character of the surface, — The carapace and abdominal so- mites of all females (Nos. 15, 16, 17), "male feminises'* (Nos. 9, 11, 13), and young immature males (Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) are smooth to the touch, and show no spines under a lens. Young mature males and old mature males (Nos. 7, 8, 10, 12, 14) have spines on the carapace, pleura of the abdomen, tergum of the sixth somite, the uropods, and the telson. The surface of the first pair of legs is smooth, except in the old males where the ischium presents a few feeble spinules. No spines can be seen on the chelipeds of the smallest male and female specimens (Nos. 1 and 15). Very minute and feeble spinules, which can only be seen under a rather high power lens, are present on the palm, carpus, and merus of specimens Nos. 2 and 16. The spines are more conspicuous in specimens Nos. 3 and 17. In the medium-sized and large males, the spines become better developed than in any of the females. Specimen 4 and all indi- viduals of greater body length have spines on the ischium in addition to the spines on the palm, carpus, and merus. Speci- mens 7 to 14, inclusive, have also a few spines on the immobile finger. The spines in this species are not conspicuous, being broad, low, and subacute in old males. The **linear spaces" cannot be distinguished. There are very minute spines present on the merus, carpus, and propodus of the third, fourth, and fifth legs, but these can only be seen in the old males.
Eggs, — The eggs of this variety when preserved measure from 0.5 to 0.7 by 0.7 to 1 millimeter. Those of P. lanceifrons measure from 0.5 to 0.7 by 0.6 to 0.8 millimeter. The eggs of both are smaller than those of Palaemon elegans de Man, which measure 1 to 1.1 by 1.4 to 1.5 millimeters.
Color of the living specimens. — The color of the general sur- face of the body is similar to that of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana. The pigment marks which are so characteristic of the carapace of the latter are plainly seen.
Localities, — There are 37 males and 35 females of this variety in our collection; all of them were collected below the dam at Montalban near Manila.
380 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Palaemon lar Fabricius. Plate II, figs. 7 and la-h.
The widely distributed Palaemon lar Fabricius is represented in our collection by a large number of specimens, most of which were collected in Mindoro.
Rostrum and penduncle of the first antenna. — The rostrum in our specimens usually extends to a point slightly beyond or slightly behind the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna, but in one case it reaches to the tip of the antennal scale. In males possessing mature characters (chelipeds longer than the body and fingers gaping widely and with heavy teeth) the rostrum does not extend as far forward with reference to the tip of the antennal scale as in the younger, immature individuals.
Cu7^vature and dental formula of rostrum, — In the youngest
specimens the tip of the rostrum is straight and there is almost
no convexity of the dorsal border of the rostrum, but older
specimens show a slight upward curve of the tip and a gentle
convexity over the eye. The first 2 rostral teeth are found on
the carapace, and usually are separated from one another by
a greater distance than are those farther forward. Frequently,
the third tooth lies partly on the carapace. The lateral ridge
on the rostrum divides the surface into an upper wider and a
lower narrower region. The number of teeth does not vary
7 8 through a very great range, the dental formula being 5- -q— ;<•
Z, o, 4
First pair of legs. — The whole of the propodus extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale in all the specimens, and in most individuals this distance is increased by from one-fifth to one- third of the carpus.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds of immature specimens are approx- imately equal in length except in cases where one cheliped is re- generating. Some of the mature males have chelipeds which are about equal in length, but as a rule there is considerable inequal- ity. Here again, as in many other palaemons, it is impossible to determine from preserved specimens whether the inequality is the result of injury or whether it is a normal, characteristic condition. An interesting case is shown in Plate II, fig. 76, where one of the chelipeds is considerably longer than the other but the palm of the former has a smaller diameter and the fingers are more weakly developed. Our collection does not include the oldest mature males which may attain a body length of almost 200 millimeters. Specimens 10 and 13 are young mature males, and their chelipeds are longer than the body. The younger im- mature males, the ''males feminises*' (No. 12, Table VI), and the
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 381
females have chelipeds which are shorter than the body. In the youngest individuals, as a rule, the propodus and part of the car- pus extend beyond the antennal scale, with increasing size the tip of the merus is seen beyond, and finally in the largest of our males from one-third to one-half of the merus overreaches the scale.
The fingers of all individuals of this species in our collection are shorter than the palm, in the young they are only slightly shorter, but in the largest specimens the length of the fingers is contained one and one-half times or more in the length of the palm. A few stiff hairs are present on the fingers, but there is no dense felt such as is seen in some other species. Young males, **males feminises,*' and all the females show no gaping of the fingers, but in the old males the gape is very wide and the immobile finger extends a little beyond the mobile finger. There is no keel on the cutting edge of the fingers in the old males, but in other individuals it is present. Four or 5 small proximal teeth and 1 larger distal tooth are seen on the mobile finger of young males, "males feminises," and all females, but in mature males the smaller teeth become reduced to 2 or 3 long inconspicu- ous tubercles and the large tooth becomes very much larger. On the immobile finger 1 tooth is present in the youngest males and females, but in older individuals (Nos. 7 to 13, inclusive) a second smaller and proximal tooth appears. These 2 teeth are well developed in the old males (figs. 7a and 76).
The palm of the oldest males is almost cylindrical in cross section, but in younger individuals it is flattened laterally.
The carpus of young individuals is almost as long as the palm and longer than the fingers, but with increasing body length the palm becomes much longer than the carpus and even the fingers show a greater length than the latter. The cylindrical carpus is much wider at its distal than at its proximal end.
The merus is always longer than the carpus or the fingers. It is equal in length to the palm in young individuals, but much shorter in old specimens. The proportion of the merus to the carpus is very constant, varying from 1:0.75 to 1:0.93. The merus is flattened dorsoventrally at its proximal end, and in old individuals is much enlarged at its distal end.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs. — The tip of the dactylus of the third pair of legs extends slightly beyond the tip of the antennal scale in young specimens (No. 2). The dactylus of the fourth pair of legs fails to reach the tip of the scale by a short distance, and the dactylus of the fifth pair of legs extends slightly beyond the end of the carpus of the chelipeds. The propodus of the
382
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
I 'H -ON I
I *8ndJ[«9 o:^ snjaui jo uoi:^aodo4j j
e
k
?- ^
-2
bo j^
•S bo
eOfrJ
•uintqD
O to lO lO
•uiniqDSj I
o o
•snaaj^
o o CO oi
•8n(lJ«3 i
•i"l«<I
lO o
•snpodojj
O lO t> 00
I
p. s p- s p"
<
S'^
o o c
e« (3
a^ o lull
(1^
•«inuiaoj i«a:j8oy
•(uosiar^ j
JO <Ip^ (y\ lunat^soj jo dp) m3uai iCpoa !
•xas !
•ON
W 00
• (ao9d[«x«3 JO jspjoq JOU9:^8od <y\ 9K9 JO 90V} JOiJd^^Bod) q^JSuai 9o«d«j«3
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
383
11
.2 6
o o o »o
Cj N WNeoeo ^ f2
o o us o lo irj Tj5 U3
O U3 UJ O
t-J t^ 00 OS
OJ o o o
O "«»• CO -^ lO <D
O "5 to O
O O O lO
o oi 00* t-^
o o o o o o 00 00 '^ -^ i£ vi
_r-t____r-4 Cg_C^_N_W _
iO O lO lO o o
i6 ifi to to o> 00
kO o o o
O O O lO o rH id 00 t^ t-4
lO o o
§* 4 ^
d o o
o
5^3
A s
§' O 0)
s*
5 8
eg
6 .
ft o o.
oo ^
§1
•5 <:^ -«
e3 c3 ^ « C
^ <!)
►J tf ni tf J
3 .
O m
o
i 2
« 2
i 2
|
5 a |
|
|
s i |
S « o>
2 2^
ft
a ft
U
^ ft
II
a S'S
2 *> •«
I ^" < O
129877-
384 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
right fifth leg measures 0.5 millimeter in diameter at its middle point, and is 7 millimeters long. In old specimens (No. 13) the tip of the dactylus of the third leg extends slightly beyond the antennal scale, the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg fails slightly to reach the tip of the scale, and one-fifth of the propodus of the fifth leg extends beyond the tip of the peduncle of the second antenna. The diameter of the propodus of the right fifth leg at the middle point is 1.5 millimeters, and its length is 17 millimeters.
Telson. — The tip of the telson (specimen 81 millimeters long and not listed in the table) is subacute, the externolateral spines fail by their own length to reach the level of the telson tip, and the internolateral spines extend with three-fifths of their entire length beyond the tip of the telson.
Character of the surface, — All specimens of Palaemon lar in our collection have smooth bodies. Even the largest males show no signs of the patches of spines which are found on the carapace, pleura of the abdominal somites, tergum of the sixth somite, uropods, and telson of mature males in some other species. The first legs are smooth in small specimens, but in medium-sized and large individuals the ischium is armed with short, heavy, in- conspicuous spines. The chelipeds are well supplied with strongly developed subacute spines, which are arranged in rather definite longitudinal lines. These spines are found on all segments, and those on the inner side are the largest. Two sets of "linear spaces'* can be distinguished in all middle-sized and large specimens. One set is found on the outer lateral sur- face of the palm, carpus, and merus, the other is found along the ventral surface of the same segments. The third, fourth, and fifth legs of young individuals have well-developed spines on the propodus, but the remaining segments are smooth. With increasing size more of the segments become spiny, until in the old males with mature chelipeds the dactylus, propodus, carpus, merus, and ischium have a coating of spines.
Eggs. — The average size of the preserved eggs of the single female specimen is 0.5 by 0.6 millimeter.
Color of the living specimen. — The carapace, abdomen, and telson of the male vary in color, being grayish brown, olive, or very dark blue. The uropods are usually olive or dark blue, with reddish brown around the edges. Very distinct orange- colored spots are seen on the sides of the abdomen at the junc- tions of the terga and pleura, except in the case of the third segment. There are no T- or L-shaped markings on the carapace. The first pair of legs is blue, tinged in places with pink; the
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philipphie Islands 385
chelipeds are olive to a very dark blue, and show in places brown mottled markings; and the walking legs show a mixture of gray, blue, and brown. The color of the female is similar to that of the male, except that the ventral edges of the pleura are of a cream color. The colors are brighter in young than in old individuals.
Localities, — The collection contains 96 males and 1 female from Port Galera, Mindoro, 1 male from the settling basin of the Manila water works near San Juan del Monte, Luzon, Philip- pine Islands, and 5 males from Guam, Mariana Islands. The single specimen from the settling basin was collected by A. L. Day, and those from Guam by R. C. McGregor.
Palaemon jaroensis sp. nov. Plate III, figs. 8 and Sa-k.
The work of Coutiere^^^ on Palaemon lepidactyhis Hilgendorf and that of von Martens *^ on Palaemon grandimanus Randall indicate that there may be striking differences in the shape and proportion of the chela in a given species. The variability, especially of the former species, renders it difficult to determine whether or not one is dealing with a new species when examining specimens which are quite similar in certain respects to Palae- mon lepidactylus, but which come from new localities.
The individuals of one series of specimens in our collection, although not showing much variability, remind one of Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf.*' After a careful examination I have decided that they belong to a new and distinct species which is closely related to Palaemon placidus de Man,^^ Palaemon hilgen- dorfi H. Coutiere, and Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. This species to which I have given the name Palaemon jaroensis is represented in our collection by 23 specimens, of which 6 males and 2 females are perfect so far as the chelipeds are concerned. While there is considerable difference between the chelipeds of the females and those of the males, this is probably sexual. There is but little variability in the shape, proportions, and other characteristics of the large cheliped of the male specimens, and the same is true of the small cheliped, but there is a constant difference in the proportional length of the segments of the large cheliped when compared with those of the small cheliped of the same individual.
"Mnn. Sci. Nat, Zool, (1900), 11, 272. *^Arch. /. Naturgesch. (1868), 34, 45.
*^ Monatsher, Preussischen Akad. d. Wissensch. Berlin (1879), 838. " Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892), 2, 483.
386
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
2
<2
i
|
•BtidJBO o:^ |
^ S5 |
t^ LO t- rH |
tH tA |
tH O |
js s s ;3 8 § ^- ^- ^- ^ ^ ^ |
|||||||
|
siijaiu JO uoi:^j[odoj[ J |
^* r^ |
rH- rH ^ rH |
rH rH |
|||||||||
|
§2 |
M ' |
i : i ! |
I J |
[ J |
} J |
|||||||
|
U V si |
.H o |
o o o o |
o o |
o o |
o o '^ -^ '^ '^ |
|||||||
|
^ 'O |
'O t3 'O -a |
73 tJ |
13 TS |
73 TJ ^ w w w |
||||||||
|
H I |
! i ! ! |
i 1 |
i i |
I ; |
||||||||
|
bo 1 |
j 1 |
ill! |
[ [ |
; ; |
1 ! 1 I 1 1 |
|||||||
|
can |
0) ' |
1 1 ^ 1 1 1 |
||||||||||
|
'd o |
o o o o |
O O |
o o |
o o c o o o |
||||||||
|
g^ |
TJ 'O •« 13 |
13 'O |
ro rO |
73 73 O 13 13 13 |
||||||||
|
'uiniqosi q:^iM Suiu |
\a ya |
O U3 U5 lO |
o \a |
lo \a |
lO O O O lO O |
|||||||
|
-uiaaq q:^Suai jb^ox |
88 S 88 S §8 S |
\a (x> lO oo |
^ |
4_ o |
o |
^ CO m § 5J |
||||||
|
•mniqosi |
o »o |
O «3 O W |
o o |
lO |
© © U3 © © |
|||||||
|
{ |
Ci 00 |
0> 00 O 00 |
t-* o> |
oJ t«: |
00 O t- CD t- C- |
|||||||
|
B |
t |
•8njai\[ |
o us |
O O O O t> CO t-' eo |
o o |
o o i> d |
O O O O lO © CO Oi t-* t-^ 0(3 OJ |
|||||
|
V |
tH tH |
|||||||||||
|
M |
||||||||||||
|
o |
a |
•sndJBO |
O kO |
O O O lO |
o o |
o o |
©©©©©© |
|||||
|
o -^ |
O lO o •^ |
eo o |
0» rH |
|||||||||
|
N iH |
||||||||||||
|
•uilBd JO Bsau^ioiqx |
o o i> to |
o o o o !>: W 00 »o |
o o |
o \a «o eo |
© U5 © U5 © U5 lo 00* eo' M c4 N |
|||||||
|
•uiiBdjoq:^pi^ |
o \a O «5 |
O O kO lO o c^ o «> |
o o ^ o |
o o 00 lO |
U5 lO U3 © © © t> rH CO* eo CO eo |
|||||||
|
•uiiBj |
\o o |
o o w o |
O Ui |
O W5 |
U3 O © lO © © |
|||||||
|
da |
?^ S S 5^ |
tH rH |
00 at |
•^ U3 C- U3 Oi 0> |
||||||||
|
•"i |
o o |
o o |
rH |
<N |
||||||||
|
'sjaSui^ |
o o |
O O O W5 |
© © © © © |
|||||||||
|
rH «>* |
a \Q Oi -^ |
CO o |
O tH |
lO »H 00 t- c- t- |
||||||||
|
(N .H |
N rH rH r-l |
r-t <N |
rH (M |
|||||||||
|
U3 O |
O O lO lO |
o \a |
o \o |
© © © U3 © © |
||||||||
|
4) |
9S |
c<i' 00* eg to |
CO r-< |
^ § |
© «5 lO* <M* «> «d |
|||||||
|
»:] |
•snpodoJti |
|||||||||||
|
«• J |
« fJ « ^ |
tt J- |
C^' h4 |
tf J- tf J «• .4 |
||||||||
|
X c |
; |
; |
J |
|||||||||
|
V 0) |
||||||||||||
|
3 |
3 |
|||||||||||
|
ll |
3 |
|||||||||||
|
•gl. |
•s |
<H |
O |
|||||||||
|
U'^^ |
^ |
o |
Xi |
|||||||||
|
'5 Crt |
<H |
•^ |
4^ |
|||||||||
|
^ |
«H |
«s |
||||||||||
|
(^ |
o <c |
o |
o |
CI i o |
||||||||
|
111 |
2 |
t: |
t |
13 |
X |
i: |
2 •= |
|||||
|
^ |
H |
H |
H |
|||||||||
|
« |
||||||||||||
|
^§ |
c |
|||||||||||
|
P |
-2 |
|||||||||||
|
p< |
||||||||||||
|
P |
•s |
|||||||||||
|
1 J3 |
||||||||||||
|
C V to |
5 |
|||||||||||
|
•2 8,6 |
o o |
O |
o |
o o o |
||||||||
|
%1% |
42 'S |
-XJ |
t: |
73 |
'd |
T3 |
13 |
13 |
||||
|
^ |
fa |
|||||||||||
|
c^ |
ea c<i |
N |
e<i |
M N W |
||||||||
|
•B[nuiJoj iBa:»8oa |
?3 |
\ \ |
;;j |
;;^ |
;:^ ;:? ;:r |
|||||||
|
tH T-t |
||||||||||||
|
•(aoBdBJBo JO aapjoq joij |
o |
o o |
o |
lO |
© w © |
|||||||
|
•^sod o% aXa jo aoBj jou |
tA |
5:3 S3 |
a |
S^ |
CJ «0 00 |
|||||||
|
-a^BOd) q:^J8uai ao^dBaBQ |
-- |
|||||||||||
|
•(aosia^ JO di:^ o:^ mnxx |
o |
o o |
o |
© |
© © © |
|||||||
|
-80J[ JO djq.) q:jSuai ^V^^ |
^ |
^ 5 |
s |
s |
gi § S |
|||||||
|
« |
« |
|||||||||||
|
•xas |
^D |
\> "o |
— |
^D "* |
•b |
^D Of Of |
||||||
|
o |
^ |
C4 00 |
to |
O t> 00 |
||||||||
|
:z: |
1 |
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 387
The following description applies to the largest male (No. 6, Table VII), which is 72 millimeters long. The rostrum almost reaches the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna and has the
formula - . It is convex over the eye, dipping sharply ante-
Li
riorly and then extending horizontally at the tip. The teeth on the carapace are more widely separated than those imme- diately anterior to them, and the first one is situated a little more than two-thirds of the distance from the posterior edge of the carapace to the border of the orbit.
The first pair of legs extends with two-fifths of the carpus beyond the antennal scale.
The chelipeds are decidedly unequal in size and length but similar in shape, a condition which is found in all the males of P. jaroensis in our collection and one which may be charac- teristic of all middle-aged and old males of this species. In the case of the larger cheliped, which measures 96 millimeters in length, one-third of the merus extends beyond the antennal scale. The mobile finger curves sharply, while the immobile finger is practically straight, and when their tips meet a con- siderable space is seen between them. Along the proximal por- tion of the cutting edge of the immobile finger are 6 blunt, fairly well-developed teeth which are not situated upon a raised ridge. The 4 nearest the palm are confluent. Following the 6 teeth is a space, and distal to this is a series of 11 blunt teeth arranged at rather regular intervals along the cutting edge and extending almost to the tip of the finger. The most proximal one of these is larger than the rest. A series of 9 similar teeth are present along the inner side of the cutting edge, but the teeth are not upon the latter. There is no large tooth corresponding to the one on the cutting edge. The toothing on the mobile finger consists of 3 rather large, blunt, irregular, proximal teeth and 2 distal series of smaller blunt teeth separated from the former by a space. As in the case of the immobile finger, the outer teeth are found on the cutting edge while the inner are not. There are 10 of the former and 8 of the latter, and there is no conspicuously large tooth at the beginning of either series.*^
^ An examination of the fingers on the large cheliped of smaller spec- imens shows that the dentition is similar, but that the number of teeth in the two series beyond the space may be much smaller, especially along the inner side of the finger, and that there is some variation in the number of proximal teeth. In the females very small proximal teeth are present and the keel of the cutting edge is well developed, but the proximal series of blunt teeth, so characteristic of the males, is not present on the fingers of either cheliped.
388 ^^<^ Philippine Journal of Science ^^^"^
A thick growth of rather short hairs is present along the cutting edge of both fingers, and as a result the teeth described above are completely concealed.
The much flattened palm (11.5 millimeters wide and 8.5 milli- meters thick) is longer than the fingers, the proportion of the length of the fingers to that of the palm being 1 :1.19 ; the slightly flattened carpus which is smaller in diameter and shorter than the palm equals the fingers in length ; and the merus is shorter than the carpus,^^ a condition which seems to be characteristic of Palaemon placidus, but not of Palaemon hilgendorfi or Palae- mon lepidactylus.
The smaller cheliped measures 65.5 millimeters in length, and the distal end of the merus just reaches the tip of the antennal scale. It is similar in appearance to the large cheliped, but the relative lengths of the different segments are not the same. As in the case of the large cheliped the fingers gape, the mobile one curving rather sharply and the immobile one being practically straight. The dentition of the fingers is similar to that of the fingers of the large cheliped, except that the distal series of teeth along the inner side of each finger is made up of a smaller number of teeth and that there are 8 proximal teeth on the immobile finger instead of 6. The cutting edge of each finger is clothed with a heavy coat of short hairs which con- ceals the teeth.
The fingers (15.5 millimeters) are longer than the palm (14.5 millimeters), and this is true for the small cheliped of all the male specimens. The palm is flattened, and measures, at its widest point, 7.5 millimeters in width and 5 millimeters in thick- ness. The carpus is slightly longer than the palm, and the same is true for these 2 segments in the small cheliped of all the male specimens. As in the large cheliped the merus is shorter than the carpus.
The impression one receives from comparing the large and small chelipeds of the same individual is that the smaller is merely a younger stage in the development of the larger, that if the specimen had lived and molted the palm of the former would have increased in length at a faster rate than the carpus, and that finally the small cheliped would have assumed the form, size, proportions, and general characteristics of the larger che- liped. It is impossible to determine, however, with the specimens
" All the males of this species in our collection show a similar condition, but in the females the carpus and merus are about equal, and it is probable that the latter is true of young males.
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 389
at hand if the two chelipeds ever become more nearly alike in older individuals.
The tip of the telson is acute, but the lateral spines are worn, and some of them are absent from the specimen under considera- tion. In another male specimen with a more perfect telson the extemolateral spines are very short and the internolateral spines extend beyond the tip of the telson with one-half of their length.
The carpus, abdominal segments, and uropods are smooth, but the second, third, fourth, and fifth legs are well covered with heavy spines. In general, the spines are much like those of Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf, except that there are no con- ical spines on the superior *^^ and inner surfaces of the palm of the cheliped and that in the place of these there are pointed, flattened spines, whose upper surfaces are concave and whose lower surfaces are convex. Also, these spines are found on the fingers as in the case of Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. "Linear spaces'' are present on the palm, carpus, and merus of both chelipeds.
The third, fourth, and fifth legs are stout in comparison with those of most other palaemons. There is little difference in the length of these legs ; the fifth is the shortest. One-third of the propodus of the third leg and the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg extend beyond the tip of the antennal scale, but the fifth leg extends only slightly beyond the tip of the peduncle of the second antenna. The propodus of the fifth leg measures 9 millimeters in length and 1.1 millimeters in diameter at its middle point.
The two females listed in Table VII are the only perfect ones in the collection. The right and left chelipeds in each specimen are nearly the same in size and shape. No distal teeth are pres- ent, but there is a well-developed keel on the cutting edge of both fingers, and this keel is partially concealed by a sparse growth of hair. One female, which is not listed in Table VII, carries eggs, and the measurements of these average 0.7 by 0.5 millimeter.
The 18 males and 5 females of this new species were taken in Hibucawan River, near Jaro, Leyte, by Alvin Seale and Urbano Villamor.
Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. Plate III, figs. 9 and 9a-6.
A rare species known as Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf is represented in our collection by 2 male specimens. Both indi- viduals are rather small, and one has the chelipeds missing ; the
48 a That is, the border which is continuous with the immobile finger.
390 '^he Philippine Journal of Science i^^4
uninjured individual has these appendages well developed. The body length of the latter is 58.5 millimeters and the carapace length, 18.5 millimeters ; the other has a body length of 66 milli- meters and a carapace length of 20 millimeters. The following description applies to the smaller specimen :
The rostrum extends slightly beyond the middle segment of the peduncle of the first antenna, and the first tooth on the dorsal border is 7 millimeters posterior to the anterior edge of the carapace. Five teeth are situated on the carapace, and these are more widely separated from one another than those anterior to them. The dorsal border dips anteriorly, showing only a slight convexity over the eye. The lateral ridges of the rostrum divide the lateral surface into an upper, wider region and a lower, narrower region. The dental formula of the specimen
under consideration is ^, while that of the other is -^.
Three-fifths of the carpus of the first pair of legs extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale.
The chelipeds are decidedly unequal in length and different in form, the larger being much longer than the body. One- half of the merus of the larger (left) and one-fifth of the merus of the smaller extend beyond the antennal scale. The slightly gaping fingers of the large cheliped are much longer than the palm, the length of the mobile finger being 25 millimeters and that of the palm 16 millimeters. The toothing of the fingers agrees well with Coutiere's description and figures. At the proximal end of the immobile finger close to the articulation of the mobile finger with the palm are 4 rather indefinite teeth on a short ridge, which is a continuation of the cutting edge. Fol- lowing this is a short space along the cutting edge which is without teeth. At the end of the space is a well-developed obtuse tooth, beyond which a distinct keel is seen extending to the tip of the finger. Along the inner side of this keel, but not arising from it, is a series of 16 anteriorly directed, acute teeth which are placed at somewhat regular intervals. On the outer side of the keel is another series of 14 teeth similar to the one just men- tioned, but the teeth have their origin from the side of the keel. At the proximal end of the mobile finger are 3 blunt teeth, the posterior 2 of which meet the short raised ridge of the immobile finger. The mobile finger extends beyond the immobile finger.
The oval palm, which is much wider than the carpus, measures 16.5 millimeters in length, 10.5 millimeters in width, and 6 milli- meters in thickness. The carpus (17 millimeters) is slightly
ix,L\4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 391
longer than the palm, and is much reduced in diameter at its posterior end. The merus equals the carpus in length, while the ischium measures 8.5 millimeters.
A ''linear space'* is seen along the outer surface of the merus, carpus, and palm. The spines on the posterior, outer region of the palm are scalelike and oval in shape, and each spine is rather closely applied to the palm. Toward the anterior end of the palm the spines become more pointed, and on the fingers they curve at the tip, their upper surfaces being decidedly con- cave and their lower surfaces convex. On the superior border of the palm (the border continuous with the immobile finger) are 2 rows of stout conical spines, and these spines are longer than any of the others. Similar shorter spines are distributed sparsely over the inferior inner surface of the palm, and these, toward the superior region, grade into spines like those of the outer surface of the palm. Smaller spines of similar shape and distribution to those of the palm are found on the carpus, merus, and ischium.
The smaller cheliped (right) has slender widely gaping fingers, the mobile one of which measures 15.5 millimeters in length. Along the cutting edge of each finger is a dense growth of stiff hairs, but no teeth, tubercles, or keel can be seen.
The short oval palm measures 7 millimeters in length, 6 milli- meters in width, and 4 millimeters in thickness. The carpus is not so wide (5 millimeters) as the palm, but is somewhat longer (9 millimeters). The merus (11 millimeters) is considerably longer than the carpus, and the ischium measures 6 millimeters.
The spines are much smaller than those of the larger cheliped, but they have a similar shape and distribution. "Linear spaces" are present. Patches of spines, which are characteristic of supposedly mature individuals in many species of palaemons and which are found on the carapace and abdomen, are not present in our two specimens.
In each specimen the tip of the telson is truncated, but this is probably the result of wear. The internolateral spines extend beyond the tip of the telson, a condition which is undoubtedly true of uninjured specimens. As usual, the externolateral spines are short. The inner ramus of the uropods extends poste- riorly slightly farther than the outer ramus.
The third, fourth, and fifth legs are rather stout as com- pared with most other species of palaemons. The fifth leg is the shortest and the slenderest, although there is but little difference between the three. One-half of the propodus of the third leg
392 The Philippine Journal of Science i^h
and the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg extend beyond the tip of the antennal scale, but the fifth leg barely reaches it. The propodus of the fifth leg measures 7 millimeters in length, and at its middle point it is 1 millimeter in thickness.
Both specimens are males; they were collected in a small mountain stream near Sisiman, Bataan Province, Luzon, by Tomas Banguis.
Palaemon latidactylus Thallwitz. Plate III, figs. 10 and lOa-h,
This species is represented in our collection by 2 young mature male specimens (Nos. 1087 and 1484)*^ from the region of Manila, which agree very well with Thallwitz's *" original de- scription and with the description of de Man.** There are also 2 male specimens (Nos. 73 and 128), collected in the region of Manila, which J believe belong to the same species but which I consider to be "males feminises;'' 2 females (Nos. 371 and 593) from the Manila water supply; 1 male (No. 1485) from the Manila water supply, which I hesitate to include under this species; 2 specimens (Nos. 1499 and 1500), one of which is an old male and the other a young male from Jaro, Leyte; 3 specimens (No. 1451) from Agusan River, Mindanao; and a young mature male (No. 71) from Samar, which differs only slightly from Thallwitz's original description.
I believe, as do Thallwitz and de Man, that the specimens from Manila diagnosed by von Martens *^ as Palaemon grandi- manus Randall are probably identical with Palaemon latidactylus Thallwitz. On the other hand, it is very questionable if von Martens's Manila specimens belong to Randall's Palaemon grandi- manus. Miss Rathbun's notes on Randall's type specimens and her photographic reproduction of an old male from the Honolulu market indicate that von Martens's Manila specimens belong to a different species."^^ The following description applies to an old male (No. 1484) collected from the settling basin of the Manila water supply:
It is 66 millimeters in length (carapace 20.5 miUimeters), and the rostrum extends to the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna. There are 16 teeth on the dorsal border of the rostrum,
** In this description the numbers referred to are museum numbers. *^ Abhandlungen und Berichte des Koniglichen Museums zu Dresden (1891), 17.
*^ Abh, Senckenbergischen Naturforsch. Ges, (1900), 25, 802.
"^Arch. /. Naturgesch, (1868), 34, 45.
""Bull Z7. S, Fish Comm, (1903), 23, pt. 3, 923. Published in 1906.
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Isla7ids 393
of which 4 are situated on the carapace. The first and second teeth, and in some other specimens also the second and third, are more widely separated from one another than the rest. Anteriorly the dorsal border dips, but there is scarcely any con- . vexity over the eye. On the lower border are 3 teeth, sometimes 4 in other specimens, and the tip of the rostrum does not turn upward. The posterior part of the lateral ridge on the rostrum should be shown slightly higher up than it is in the figure (Plate III, fig. 8). One-sixth of the carpus of the first pair of legs extends beyond the antennal scale, and the outer maxillipeds reach slightly beyond the peduncle of the second antenna.
The chelipeds are decidedly unlike in form and unequal in length, the larger being much longer than the body. One-sixth of the merus of the larger and one-third of the carpus of the smaller cheliped extend beyond the antennal scale. Measuring in a straight line from the articulation of the mobile finger (large cheliped) to the tip of the same, the length is 20 millimeters. This finger is strongly curved inward, it is compressed laterally throughout its extent, and crosses the tip of the immobile finger when the fingers are closed. Near the proximal end of the mobile finger, along the cutting edge, are 3 small, closely set teeth, which are followed distally by 2 somewhat larger teeth. Beyond these, 5 teeth are seen which gradually decrease in size, until near the tip the last one is nothing more than an inconspicuous tubercle. The immobile finger is strongly compressed laterally, its outer surface is decidedly concave near the palm, and its proximal end is much wider than that of the mobile finger, about 2:1. Near the proximal end of the cutting edge is a com- paratively large tooth, which curves inward ending in an acute tip. This is followed by 7 smaller teeth, which become almost like tubercles near the tip of the finger. A few scattered hairs may be seen on both fingers, but at the proximal end of the mobile finger and on its lower surface there is a small dense patch of hairs.
The palm, which is strongly compressed, measures 30 milli- meters in length, 12.5 millimeters in width at its widest point, and 6.5 millimieters in thickness in the same region. From these figures it will be seen that the palm is one and one-half times as long as the finger and that the ratio of the thickness of the palm to the greatest width is about 1 : 2.
The carpus, which is practically cylindrical in cross section and much narrower than the palm at its distal end, measures 25.5 millimeters in length, thus being shorter than the palm.
394 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The merus varies in the shape of its cross section at different points, and measures 19 millimeters in length. It is much longer than the greatly compressed ischium, which is only 7.5 milli- meters along its longest border.
There is a considerable growth of hair on the ventral edge of the palm and ischium. A few hairs are found near the ends of the carpus and merus, but for the most part the palm, carpus, merus, and ischium are without hairs. Closely set sharp spines are present on the inferior and lateral surfaces of the proximal end of the mobile finger, but the remainder of the finger is smooth. Similar closely set spines are present on the inferior border of the palm. These grade into much smaller and more widely separated teeth on the inner surface and, on the outer surface, into widely separated, very minute spines. A few rather heavy spines are located along the outer surface of the anterior border of the palm, where the mobile finger articulates. The spines on the carpus are widely separated, and on the inner surface they are fairly well developed. There are practically no spines on the upper and outer surfaces of the merus and ischium, but on the lower and inner surfaces they are very close set and well developed.
"Linear spaces'' cannot be seen, but a longitudinal depression on the outer and inner surfaces of the palm along a line connect- ing the articulation of the mobile finger with the proximal end of the palm is very conspicuous.
The smaller cheliped (left) has slender, widely gaping fingers; the mobile one measures 12 millimeters in length, and the im- mobile one is slightly shorter. Along the cutting edge of both fingers is a dense growth of stiff hairs and a well-developed keel. Near the proximal end of the immobile finger is a short portion of the cutting edge, which shows indication of breaking up into 3 or 4 teeth. This is followed distally by a short space at the end of which is a small tooth, but beyond the latter no teeth nor tubercles can be seen. Three small teeth are visible at the proximal end of the mobile finger. The short oval palm measures 7.5 millimeters in length, 4.5 millimeters in width, and 3.1 milli- meters in thickness. The carpus is not so wide (4 millimeters) as the palm, but it is considerably longer (10 millimeters). The merus (9.5 millimeters) is slightly shorter than the carpus, and the ischium measures only 6 millimeters in length.
Unlike the larger cheliped, the fingers, palm, and carpus are free from spines, but the lower surface of the merus and ischium are armed with a few spines similar to those on the large cheliped, but smaller. Patches of small spines are present on the anterior
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 395
part of the carapace in the dorsal and lateral regions, but they are not present on the abdomen nor on its appendages.
The telson ends in an acute spine; the extemolateral spines do not extend so far posteriorly as the tip of the telson, but the internolateral spines overreach it by one-half of their length. The 2 rami of the uropods extend the same distance posteriorly.
Some of the walking legs of this specimen are missing, but in the other old male (No. 1087) they are intact. In the case of No. 1087, the third, fourth, and fifth legs are of equal length but slenderer than those of Palaemon lepidactylics. The third leg just reaches the tip of the antennal scale. One-fifth of the propodus of the fourth leg and the dactylus of the fifth leg extend beyond the peduncle of the second antenna. The propodus of the fifth leg measures 8.75 millimeters in length, and at its middle point it is 0.5 millimeter in diameter.
The old male, No. 1484, which has been described in detail above, was collected in the settling basin of the Manila water supply by A. L. Day; the old male, No. 1087, was collected by Alvin Seale from Laguna de Bay, near Manila, Luzon.
Two other male specimens, Nos. 128 and 73, collected in the region of Manila, differ in the size of the body and the form of the large cheliped from the individual described above. These specimens have a somewhat greater body length, the gape be- tween the fingers of the chela is less, the mobile finger is not curved so sharply, the width of the immobile finger at the proximal end (Plate III, figs. 10c and lOd for No. 128 and No. 73, respectively) is not so great, and there is a more extensive armature of spines on the outer surface of the palm. I consider these specimens, although they are larger than the young mature males, to be "males femenises'' or at least specimens in which the mature male form of the chela has not yet developed. Unlike No. 1484, the patches of spines on the carapace are feebly de- veloped, a condition which indicates immaturity.
The 3 specimens (No. 1451) from Mindanao are very similar to the young mature male. They have about the same body length (one specimen is a little smaller), and the large chela (Plate III, fig. lOe, No. 1451x) is still well armed with spines on the outer surface, but it is approaching more nearly the shape and proportions of the mature male form. The specimen (No. 71) from Samar is smaller than the specimens from Mindanao, but the large chela has taken on the mature form and pro- portions. I consider it to be a young mature male.
One of the specimens from Leyte (No. 1500) measures 86.5 millimeters in length (carapace, 27 millimeters). It is an old
396 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science iqh
mature male and the largest one in the collection. Unfor- tunately, the fingers on the large cheliped are broken. The palm measures 35 millimeters in length, 15 millimeters in width, and 8 millimeters in thickness, indicating that with increasing age the palm becomes wider in proportion to the length (1 : 2.33) and thicker in proportion to the width (1:1.80). The patches of spines on the carapace are better developed than in any of the rest of our specimens, but as in the latter they are absent from the abdomen. The superior portion of the outer surface of the palm is absolutely smooth.
The other specimen from Leyte (No. 1499) is of interest be- cause it is a very young male, possibly a '*male feminises.'* An- teriorly, the rostrum dips only slightly, and there are no patches of spines on the carapace or abdomen. The large chela is similar in shape to that of specimen 128, but it is smaller. The palm is well covered with fine spines, and the gape between the fingers is small. There is no gape between the fingers of the small chela and no thick growth of hair. Furthermore, the slender fingers are only slightly longer than the narrow palm, which is no wider than the carpus.
The largest female. No. 593, measures 68 millimeters in body length, the carapace and abdomen are smooth, and the chelipeds are alike. There is no gape between the fingers which lack a thick growth of hair and no teeth on the distal two-thirds, but there is a well-developed keel on the cutting edge of the latter. The fingers are shorter than the palm, which is compressed and slightly wider than the carpus.
Finally, specimen 1485, an old male from the water supply of the city of Manila, is one which, owing to lack of material, I do not feel justified in classifying at the present time. It measures 91 millimeters in body length, dense patches of spines are present on the anterior part of the carapace, the abdomen is smooth, and the rostrum is practically like that of Palaemon latidactylus. The large cheliped in respect to the distribution of spines and the toothing of the fingers is like that of Palaemon latidactylus, but the shape of the chela is different. The fingers, which are only slightly shorter than the palm, gape considerably. The immobile finger is comparatively narrow at its proximal end, and the mobile finger is not curved sharply. In the case of the smaller cheliped, the palm has about the same width as the distal end of the carpus, the fingers gape only moderately, and the growth of hair on them is not so great as in specimen 1484. Further collections may justify the establishment of a new variety of Palaemon latidactylus. If the view of Henderson and
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 397
Matthai is correct concerning some species of Macrobrachium, this specimen may be a polymorphic form of Palaemon latidactylits.
Specimens 73, 128, and 371 were purchased in a Manila market by the author, and it is supposed that they were collected in Pasig River, near Manila ; No. 593 was taken from the filter of the Bureau of Science, which receives its water from the Manila water supply; No. 1485 was collected by A. L. Day from the settling basin of the Manila water supply; Nos. 1499 and 1500 were collected by Alvin Seale and Urbano Villamor in a small river at Jaro, Leyte; the 3 specimens. No. 1451, were collected by E. H. Taylor in a natural canal connected with Agusan River, Mindanao.
Palaemon sp. Plate III, figs. 11 and lla-c.
Two old male palaemons collected from the Manila water supply may be representatives of a new species, although the specimens possess certain characters which suggest Palaemon esculentus Thallwitz and especially Palaemon oenone de Man.^' However, as I have not seen specimens of either of these species and as I have 2 specimens of nearly the same size only, I do not feel justified in describing them as a new species.
The description which follows, except when otherwise stated, applies to the largest individual whose body length is 59.5 milli- meters and whose carapace length is 20 millimeters: The body length of the smaller specimen is 58 millimeters and the length of the carapace, 19 millimeters. The rostrum which curves down slightly, fails by a considerable distance to reach the tip of pe- duncle of the first antenna. Of the 15 almost evenly spaced teeth on the dorsal border of the rostrum, 7 are situated on the carapace, and of these the first 3 are smaller than those anterior to them. The first tooth is situated back of the orbit a little more than one-third of the distance from the orbit to the posterior border of the carapace. On the lower border of the rostrum are 2 teeth. From this description it is evident that the shape and dental formula of the rostrum and the arrange- ment, size, and position of the rostral teeth very closely resemble those of Palaemon oenone and not so closely those of Palaemon esculentus. The rostrum of the smaller specimen is similar to
14 the description given above, but the dental formula is only -^
with the seventh tooth directly over the posterior edge of the orbit.
"A6/i. Senckenbergischen Naturforsch. Ges, (1900), 25, 784.
398 "^he Philippine Journal of Science 1914
One-half of the carpus of the first pair of legs extends beyond the antennal scale, and the distal segment of the outer maxillipeds extends beyond the peduncle of the second antenna.
The chelipeds are decidedly unlike in form and unequal in length, the larger being much longer than the body. One-third of the merus of the larger and two-thirds of the carpus of the smaller cheliped extend beyond the antennal scale. Measuring in a straight line from the articulation of the mobile finger (large cheliped) to the tip of the same, the length is 25.5 millimeters. This finger is strongly curved inward, it is slightly compressed near the tip, and it crosses the tip of the immobile finger when the fingers are closed. Near the proximal end of the mobile finger, along the cutting edge, are 5 low blunt teeth, followed distally by a space at the end of which there is a rather large subacute tooth. Beyond this, the cutting edge, which runs more and more toward the outer surface of the finger as the tip is approached, bears 14 low tubercles, which gradually decrease in height toward the distal end of the finger. The immobile finger, which is almost straight when seen in side view, curves inward slightly and, although compressed laterally, is not concave on its outer surface. It is one and one-half times as wide as the mobile finger at the proximal end. There is a conspicuous distally directed tooth on the cutting edge at the proximal end of the immobile finger, and between this tooth and the articulation of the mobile finger is a short low ridge, which possibly in older specimens may be broken up into small confluent teeth. Along the cutting edge, distal to the conspicuous tooth, 13 tubercles may be seen, which gradually decrease in size as the tip of the finger is approached. A few scattered hairs are present on both fingers, and the elongated, anastamosing, longitudinal grooves described by de Man as characteristic of Palaemon oenone can be seen easily with a low-power lens.
The palm, which is strongly compressed, measures 26 milli- meters in length, 12 millimeters in width at its widest point, and 7 millimeters in thickness in the same region. From these figures it will be seen that the mobile finger (measured as de- scribed above) is almost equal in length to the palm and that the ratio of the thickness of the palm to the greatest width is about 1:1.71. The palm decreases suddenly in width near its proximal end where it is clothed, especially on its superior and inferior borders, by a thick feltlike growth of hairs. On the rest of the palm no hairs can be seen.
The short, much infiated carpus, which is cylindrical in cross section and much smaller in diameter than the width of the distal
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 399
two-thirds of the palm, measures 15.5 millimeters in length, thus being a little more than one-half as long as the palm. There is a fairly thick coating of long hairs over the entire carpus.
The shape of a cross section through the merus differs at different points. When seen from above, the outer border is almost straight and the inner border forms a line shaped like an elongated S. The merus, which is covered with a thick coat- ing of long hairs on its inferior, inner, and superior surfaces, measures 18 millimeters in length, and is much longer than the greatly compressed ischium. The latter is only 7 millimeters in length along its longest border.
Anteriorly directed, closely set, flattened spines which give only a sensation of slight roughness when the finger is rubbed over them are present upon the inferior border of the palm. On the inner and outer lateral regions and the superior border these are even smaller in size. These spines extend about halfway out on the fingers, but beyond this the latter are smooth so far as spines are concerned. Spines similar to those of the palm are present on the carpus, merus, and ischium, but they are better developed, and on the inner surfaces of these members they are comparatively long and sharply pointed. No ^'linear spaces" can be detected.
The large cheliped of the smaller specimen differs mainly from that of the longer specimens in the shape and size of the fingers and in the proportion of the width of the palm to its length. The mobile finger is much less strongly curved, and the palm is narrower in proportion to its length.
The smaller cheliped (left) of the large specimen has widely gaping fingers; the mobile one measures 15.5 millimeters in length, and the immobile one is slightly shorter. Along the cut- ting edge of both fingers is a dense growth of stiff hairs and a slightly developed keel. Near the proximal end of the mobile finger are 5 low blunt teeth followed by a short space, at the end of which there is a larger and more acute tooth; beyond this no tubercles or teeth can be seen. At the proximal end of the immobile finger is a short ridge on the cutting edge, remind- ing one of a similar structure on the large cheliped ; in the former, however, it shows indication of breaking up into small teeth. Beyond this ridge and very close to it is a large anteriorly di- rected tooth similar in shape to the one on the immobile finger of the large cheliped. As in the case of the mobile finger, there are no tubercles or teeth beyond the large tooth just mentioned. The palm measures 10.5 millimeters in length, 5 millimeters in width, and 4 millimeters in thickness. The carpus is not so
400 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science
wide (4 millimeters) as, and is considerably shorter (8.5 milli- meters) than, the palm. The merus (9.5 millimeters) is slightly longer than the carpus, and the ischium measures 6 millimeters in length.
The fingers are smooth, the palm is armed with a few minute spines, and the carpus, merus, and ischium have fairly well- developed spines on their inner and lower surfaces. Along the inner surfaces of the carpus, merus, and ischium is a consider- able growth of rather long hairs, and on the superior and inner surfaces of the posterior end of the palm is a patch of felted hairs similar to that on the large cheliped. The small cheliped of the smaller specimen is essentially like that of the large specimen, except that it is smaller, that the palm is relatively shorter, and that the patch of felted hair is absent.
The telson of the large specimen ends rather bluntly, a condi- tion which is undoubtedly the result of wear ; the externolateral spines are very short, and the internolateral spines extend beyond the telson tip for a considerable distance. The outer and inner rami of the uropods are of equal length.
Patches of small spines are present on the anterior part of the carapace in the dorsal and lateral regions, but are not present on the abdomen or its appendages.
The third legs are slightly longer than the fourth, and the latter are slightly longer than the fifth. They are all slenderer than those of Palaemon lepidactylus and they are about the same size as those of Palaemon latidactylus. One-fifth of the propo- dus of the third leg and the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg extend beyond the antennal scale, but the fifth leg extends with the dactylus only beyond the peduncle of the second antenna. The propodus of the fifth leg measures 8 millimeters in length, and at its middle point it is 1.0 millimeter in diameter. Both specimens were collected by R. C. McGregor from the filter of the Bureau of Science, which receives its water from the Manila city water supply.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(All the illustrations are of natural size unless otherwise stated. Drawings by Jos6 K. Santos.)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Palaemon carcinus Fabricius. Old male, 320 millimeters long. 1*. Left cheliped of same specimen. 1^, Telson of female, 116 millimeters long. x6. I''. Middle-aged male, 245 to 250 millimeters long, i"*. Full-grown female, 248 millimeters long. i^ Left cheliped of young male, probably mature, 240 millimeters
long, i'. Left cheliped, full-grown female shown in fig. 1'^. 1^. Young female, 115 millimeters long. f\ Right cheliped of same specimen, i*. Young male, 100 millimeters long. IK Right cheliped of same specimen.
Plate II
Fig. 2. Palaemon philippinensis sp. nov. Old male, 144 millimeters long.
No. 31. 2". Left cheliped of same specimen. 2^, Mobile finger of same, showing outer surface and cutting
edge. X 2. 2^ Immobile finger of same left cheliped, showing outer surface
and cutting edge. x2. 2^. "Male feminise," 114 millimeters long. No. 19. 2*. Left cheliped of same. 2'. Immobile finger of same. x3. 2^. Mobile finger of same. x2.5. 2". Left cheliped of young mature male, 111.5 millimeters long.
No. 13. Measurements given in Table II apply to right
cheliped. 2\ Young male, 39.5 millimeters long. No. 1 (a). x2. 2K Right cheliped of same. x2. 2^, Tip of telson of male, 117 millimeters long, x 10. 2\ Tip of telson of young female, 47 millimeters long. X34. 2"\ Pigment marks on the carapace of Palaemon philippinensis
sp. nov. 3. Palaemon sundaicus Heller. Young mature male, 90 millimeters
long. No. 15. 3". Left cheliped of the same, markings faded after preservation. S"", Female, 79 millimeters long. No. 36. S"". Left cheliped of same, showing markings. 3'^. Young male, 66.5 millimeters long. No. 2. 5% Left cheliped of same, showing markings. 3\ Tip of telson of young male. No. 7.
401
402 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9h
Fig. 4. Palaemon lanceifrons Dana. Mature male, 62.5 millimeters long. No. 6. V. Right cheliped of same.
5. Palaemon lanceifrons Dana (local form). Mature male, 63.5 milli-
meters long. No. 7. 5*. Left cheliped of same. 5". Right cheliped of same.
5*". Mobile finger of left cheliped (fig. 5"), inner aspect. X 3. 5^. Immobile finger of same, inner aspect. X3. 5^ Young male, 49 millimeters long. No. 1. 5*. Right cheliped of same. 5*^. Pigment marks on carapace of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana,
the local form and Palaemon lanceifrons Dana var. montal-
banensis var. nov. X2.
6. Palaemon lanceifrons Dana var. montalbanensis var. nov. Old male,
65.5 millimeters long. No. 12. 6*, Right cheliped of same. 6^. Left cheliped of same.
6^ Immobile finger of left cheliped, inner aspect. x3. 6**. Mobile finger of same, inner aspect. X 3. (?'*. Female, 45.5 millimeters long, with eggs. 6^. Cheliped of same.
6^. Young male, 51 millimeters long. No. 3. 6^\ Cheliped of same. 6K Tip of telson of young male, 43 millimeters long. xl6.
7. Palaemon lar Fabricus. Old male, 114 millimeters long. No. 10.
?*. Right cheliped of same, inner aspect.
7^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect.
7\ Young male.
7^. Left cheliped of same.
7*. Chela of specimen of about the same size as the one shown
in fig. 7^ X3. 7\ Young male. 7^. Left cheliped of same. 7". Tip of telson of young male. x8.
Plate III
Fig. 8. Palaemon jaroensis sp. nov. Old male, 72 millimeters long. No. 6. 5*. Right cheliped of same, outer aspect. 8^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect. <5^ Outline of chela of left cheliped, hair removed. 8^. Mobile finger of left cheliped. X2. 8^. Immobile finger of same. x2. 8*, Mobile finger of right cheliped. X2. 8^. Immobile finger of same. x2. 8^\ Spines on palm of No. 6. X 2. 8'. Spines on finger of No. 6. x2. 8K Right cheliped of female. No. 7. 8^. Left cheliped of same. 9. Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. Old male, 58.5 millimeters long. 9". Left cheliped of same, outer aspect. Carpus shown drawn
away from palm and hence longer than stated in text. 9^\ Right cheliped of same, outer aspect.
IX. D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 403
Fig. 10. Palaemon latidactylus Thallwitz. Old male, 6Q millimeters long. Museum No. 1484. 10^, Right cheliped of same, outer aspect. 10^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect. lO"". Large chela of specimen. Museum No. 128. 10*. Large cheliped of specimen. Museum No. 73. lO"". Chela of specimen. Museum No. 1451x. 10'. Old male, 91 millimeters long. Species? Museum No. 1485. 10^. Right cheliped of same, outer aspect. 10^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect. 11. Palaemon sp. Old male, 59.5 millimeters long. Museum No. 572. 11^. Right cheliped of same, outer aspect. 11^. Left cheliped of same, inner aspect.
ll"". Right cheliped of specimen, 58 millimeters long. Museum No. 572.
TEXT FIGURE
Fig. 1. Diagram of a palaemon.
Oversized Foldout
Oversized Foldout
[Phil. Journ. Sci., Vol. IX, C, No. 5.
CowLES : Palaemons of the Philippine Islands.]
83
Sh
8
8
8
f
89
Old male 72.0 mm. lonfl.
Fifl. 8. Palaemon jaroensis sp. nov.
No. 6. Flo. 8a. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect. Fig. 8b. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect. Fig. 8c. Outline of chela of left cheliped, hair removed. Fig. 8d. Mobile finger of left cheliped. X 2. Fig. 8e. Immobile finger of same. X 2.
Fig. 8f. Mobile finger of right cheliped. X 2.
Fig. 8g. Immobile finger of same. X 2.
Fig. 8h. Spines on palm of No. 6. X 2.
Fig. 81. Spines on finger of No. 6. X 2.
Fig. 8j. Right cheliped of female. No. 7.
Fig. 8ic. Left cheliped of same.
Fig. 9. Palaemon lepidactylus. Old male 58.5 mm. long.
10
9a. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect. Carpus shown drawn away from palm and hence longer than stated in text.
Fig. 9b. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 10. Palaemon latidactylus. Old male 66.0 mm. long. Mus. No. 1484.
Fig. 10a. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
PLATE III.
Fig. 10b. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 10c. Large chela of specimen Mus. No. 128.
Fig. lOd. Large cheliped of specimen Mus. No. 73.
Fig. lOe. Chela of specimen Mus. 1451 (X).
Fig. lOf. Old male 91.0 mm. long. Species? Mus. No. 1485.
Fig. lOg. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. lOh. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 11. Palaemon sp.? Old male 59.5 mm. long. Mus. No.
572. Fig. 11a. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect. Fig. lib. Left cheliped of same. Inner aspect. Fig. lie. Right cheliped of specimen 58.0 mm. long. Mus. No. 572.
A NEW PHILIPPINE MALARIA MOSQUITO
By Charles S. Banks {From the Entomological Section, Biological Laboratory y Bureau of Science,
Manila, P. I.)
In the course of investigations at Calamba, Laguna Province, Luzon, carried on by Drs. E. L. Walker and M. A. Barber to ascertain the species of mosquitoes capable of transmitting ma- laria, many specimens of a very interesting Myzomyia were bred between December 27, 1913, and April 12, 1914.
This mosquito, in many respects, is very much like Myzomyia ftmesta Giles and M. rossii Giles, but differs in the wing spots and female palpal markings.
A brief description of this mosquito is given by Doctors Walker and Barber^ and this more detailed description is given fully to identify the species.
Myzomyia febrifera sp. nov. S and $ .
General color pale gray, thorax darker laterally, abdomen dark, proboscis dark brown, labellse golden brown, apical third of palpi of female white with dark brown markings, as de- scribed below. Wings with 4 broad black costal spots alternating with cream spots, other veins with alternately black and cream scales. Legs wholly brown or bluish brown, with exceedingly minute golden brown spots or rings at articulations.
Male. — Pale gray, head with erect black scales on occiput, white ones on frons, and a bifurcated tuft of white hairs be- tween eyes ; antennae golden brown-gray, apical segment inflated ; palpi porrect, basal segments thin, dark brown, apical one white with brown transverse and semilongitudinal bands which are preapical and basal ; apical segment with pale bristles on interior surface; proboscis dark brown; labellse pale.
Mesonotum pale gray with a dark brown median hair-line expanding caudad before scutellum, also faint submedian and dorsolateral lines caudad. Pleurae pale with indistinct, longitu- dinal brown fasciae, golden hairs abundant on dorsum and sides. Scutellum dark mediad ; metanotum dark, narrow median fascia.
' This Journal, Sec. B (1914), 9, 384.
405
406 2^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Abdomen dark unctuous brown with golden hairs equal in length to width of segments. Genitalia ordinary, claspers sub- falcate-spatulate apically.
Legs uniformly dark brown, except coxae which are pale; all articulations marked by indistinct golden brown spots or rings.
Wings pale cream with dark areas as follows: Basal third of costa brown (1),^ then a short cream area (2), then a long brown area (3), one-fifth length of wing a pale area one-half as long (4), a brown area equal to this (5), another pale area equal to this (6), a brown area two-thirds as long as this (7), and an apical pale area (8) . Subcosta with brown area below apical half of (1) and one also below (3) . First longitudinal vein with brown area like (1) on subcosta, but its next dark area (3) is interrupted just after its beginning by a pale area equal to (2) in length, followed by brown area two-thirds the length of (3) ; the remaining apical markings of this vein are like (4), (5), (6), (7), and (8) on costa. First submarginal cell twice the length of the second posterior, its forks brown, their junction pale, the stem brown, interrupted by pale areas at cross veins. Third vein pale with 2 dark spots at cross veins and 1 at apex. Fourth longitudinal vein with pale basal third, then dark to cross veins, at which it is pale, and beyond which dark nearly to junction of forks which is pale; beyond this point, both forks are dark to apices which are pale. Fifth vein pale with a small dark subbasal spot and a spot at forks, the anterior of which has 1 long and 1 short basal dark spot and a similar preapical one; basal three-eighths of posterior fork pale, the apical five- eighths dark. Sixth vein with basal one-fourth pale, then a short dark line, a short pale line, and the apical one-half dark. Marginal fringe dark brown, with pale areas at all veins except sixth.
Female. — Color of head, body, legs, and wings similar to that of male, but wings much darker and more distinctly marked. White frontal tufts extended to middle of clypeus ; proboscis as in male but darker; palpi somewhat similar to those of M. rossii Giles, but apical third cream-white with an ill-defined wide brown ring near its middle, or subbasal in some specimens; middle and basal thirds of palpus separated by a narrow snowy ring ; basal scales erect. Antennae dark brown with golden gray verticels.
* (1), (2), etc., refer to numeration of costal areas and correlate these with areas on other veins of wing.
IX. D, 4 Banks: New Philippine Malaria Mosquito 407
Length, exclusive of proboscis: $ , 3.5 millimeters; $ , 3 milli- meters ; length of wing, 2.75.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Canlubang near Calamba {E. L. Walker and M. A. Barber).
Type $ and $ , No. 18015, in entomological collection. Bureau of Science, Manila. Paratypes bear the same number.
Time of rearing, April 2, 1914.
This species has been proved to be a malaria carrier, hence its name.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology, AND Anthropology
Vol. IX SEPTEMBER, 1914 No. 5
STUDIES IN PHILIPPINE JASSOIDEA: I, SOME REMARKABLE TETTIGONIELLID.€
By C. P. Baker
(From the College of Agriculture, University of the Philippines,
Los Banos, P. L)
Eleven text figures
It did not take long for Julian Valdez, after coming to these Islands two years ago, to bring together specimens of all of the Tettigoniellidse previously recorded from the Islands, and that from a very circumscribed region near Los Baiios, Laguna Prov- ince, Luzon. At the same time he discovered many more not yet in the Philippine list. Among the latter I find some very remarkable insects — a few belonging to genera or species de- scribed by Distant.^
One group of species in this new material represents a generic type apparently undescribed by Distant, Kirkaldy, Melichar, or Matsumura, and this group adds to the Philippine fauna not only a new genus, but a subfamily not previously known to occur so far east. The species of this genus are found, so far as known to me, only in the forests on the neighboring mountain masses of Maquiling and Banahao, and for this reason I am giving them the generic name Makilingia,
Genus IttAKIUNGIA novum
Small tettigoniellids, colored principally black and red, rarely whitish, with head much narrower than pronotum, anterior mar- gin very shortly sublaminate and strongly rounded in front between the eyes. Face rather long and narrow. Basal clypeal suture usually entirely obsolete. Lorae small and narrow. Lat-
* Fauna Brit. India-Rhynchota. 130422 409
410 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
eral frontal margins passing close to eyes. Vertex flattish or concave, variously impressed or excavated, and always longer than half width between eyes. Ocelli placed before the line of anterior margins of eyes. Pronotum longer than the vertex, of a sexangular type in form, but anteriorly strongly, quite evenly, and narrowly rounded from the lateral angles to between the eyes, the posterior lateral margins short, the posterior mar- gin gently incurved, the pleural area with a strong complete carina. Scutellum usually large, longer than wide or wider than long, and with an acuminate tip, the posterior area more or less swollen. Tegmina normal in outline or somewhat nar- rowed distad, with 4 apical cells and 2 or 3 anteapicals, some- times with indistinct and irregular cross- veins in the costal area ; clavus without cross- veins, its 2 sectors joining the commissure; appendix very short or extending to near tip of inner apical cell. Armature of hind tibiae dense and heavy. Sculpturation largely a heavy and conspicuous puncturation.
Type: Makilingia nigra sp. nov.
By reason of the very distinctive form of pronotum and head, the strong sculpturation and coriaceous tegmina this genus un- questionably finds its nearest relatives among the Hylicinae — a group very highly developed in India. Of the described hylicine genera it approaches most nearly to Bhooria. Viewed from above, the remarkable character of the head is not apparent, but a side view instantly removes it from any near relationship with Tettigoniella.
The species of this group are undoubtedly congeneric. They all conform closely to the generic type in habitus and all funda- mental characters. Within the group, however, are remarkable divergences in structural detail. It would be easy to break the genus into three or four groups equivalent to many of Distant's or Kirkaldy's "genera," although in well-founded taxonomy I do not see how they could be more than subgenera.
Synopsis of species of Makilingia.
a\ Clypeus notched at tip, the basal suture distinct at least at sides, front more than twice longer than wide; black, more or less whitish or bluish pruinose, the vertex with two triangular yellow marginal spots ;
length 7 mm M. prninosa sp. nov.
a'. Clypeus entire and rounded at tip, the basal suture obsolete; front much less than twice as long as wide. 6\ Ocelli about as near eyes as to each other; ground color in large part black; scutellum wider than long. c\ Without red spots; deep black throughout, except the yellow legs
and antennal scape; length 5-6 mm M. nigra sp. nov.
c'. With red spots on vertex and elsewhere.
IX, D, 6 Baker: Studies in Philippine Jassoidea, I 411
rf\ Deep black, four spots on margin of vertex, and a large elongate spot on claval commissure red or yellow; legs yellow; length
5-5.5 mm M. maculata sp. nov.
d\ Vertex with four large coalescent spots about margin and three smaller spots basally ; pronotum black ; tegmina bronzy greenish with basal margin of clavus calloused red; legs reddish brown;
length 5-5.5 mm M. colorata sp. nov.
6'. Ocelli distinctly nearer to each other than to eyes; scutellum longer than wide; color very pale ochraceous with two small black mar- ginal spots on vertex next eyes; tegmina milky white; length 5-5.5 mm M. pallida sp. nov.
Makiliagia nigra sp. nov.
Body and tegmina deep black, the legs and two basal antennal articles lemon yellow. Length ^ 5, $ 6 mm.
Length of face twice the width between eyes; basal clypeal suture obsolete; front a little swollen and with disc flat- tened, transversely impressed
above beneath margin of ver- / V ^xA i Ji jj^J
tex; front coarsely sparsely )/ V Y'\ / '.
punctate on disc, lateral mar- \ / ^ (1 ' / \
gins and clypeus coarsely N^^" --^^ / \ \^ iy'
shagreened; lorse and genae
with very large confluent ^w
punctures. Length of vertex
about five-sixths of the width ^^
between eyes, its anterior
lateral margins slightly bi-
sinuate ; surface coarsely
sparsely punctate, the entire ^''-'- ^^«^^'^-^^-^-<*Bp.nov.
lateral areas between ocelli and eyes deeply excavated, as is also the anterior median area. Ocelli somewhat in front of anterior line of eyes, an* about as far from each other as from eyes. Pronotum coarsely sparsely punctate, and posteriorly with in- distinct transverse rugae. Scutellum wider than long, longer than pronotum, transverse impressed line at middle very strong and medially widened ; posterior to impressed line the surface is distinctly longitudinally striolate. Tegmina opaque, coriaceous proximad including the clavus, the entire coriaceous portion strongly sparsely punctate. Last ventral segment of female rectangularly emarginate, the lateral posterior borders strongly curved.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Banahao (Julian Valdez — coll. Baker) ,
412
The Philippine Jo^irnal of Science
Makilingia pruinosa sp. nov.
Body and tegmina deep black; legs reddish brown, femora except tips black, 2 basal articles of antennae yellowish. Narrow margin of head in front of eyes, and 2 large subtriangular spots near tip of vertex, yellowish ; younger specimens entirely whitish or bluish pruinose above, this gradually disappearing in older specimens. Length $ 7 mm.
Length of face more than two and a half times the width between eyes, basal clypeal suture distinct at least at sides, the clypeus strongly notched at tip; face evenly convex, narrowly impressed below margin of vertex ; front and gense coarsely and confluently punctured, the clypeus and small area at base of
front coarsely shagreened, the front with indistinct trans- verse glabrous stripes at sides. Length of vertex a little more than three-fourths width between eyes, its disc coarsely sparsely punctate, a very fine carina very near to anterior margin and parallel- ing it; a large depression be- tween each ocellus and the margin, and another medially situated, back of tip. Ocelli far in front of the line of anterior margins of eyes, and much nearer to eyes than t® each other. Disc of prono- tum strongly transversely rugosopunctate, the lateral margins very slightly angled at hind margins of eyes (not shown in drawing) . * Scutellum wider than long, a little more than half length of pronotum, deeply broadly impressed near pronotum, the posterior portion swollen and finely rugose. Tegmina, except apically, coriaceous and strongly punctate, the veins strong, inner apical cell and ap- pendix whitish translucent. Last ventral segment of female rectangularly emarginate, the lateral posterior borders straight. Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez — colL Baker),
Makilingia maculata sp. nov.
Body and tegmina deep opaque black; the legs and basal antennal articles whitish or yellowish; front margin of head
P'IG. 2. Makilingm pruinosa sp. nov.
IX. D, 5 Baker: Studies in Philippine Jassoidea, I 413
with 4 equally spaced small bright red spots; clavus largely occupied by an irregular elongate commissural spot, broader anteriorly and constricted before the posterior end, either bright red or bright yellow; costal area with a large translucent spot slightly beyond line of tip of clavus. Length 5 5, $ 5.5 mm.
Length of face a little more than twice width between eyes; basal clypeal suture obsolete; front and clypeus evenly convex, coarsely but very uniformly shagreened throughout, scarcely at all impressed below margin of vertex; lorse and gense coarsely sparsely punctate. Length of vertex about three-fourths of width between eyes; entire surface evenly shallowly concave. Ocelli just in front of line of anterior margin of eyes, and some- what farther from each other than from eyes. Pronotum with disc coarsely shallowly irregularly punctate. Scutellum wider than long, nearly smooth an- , .,
terior to the transverse me- \ ^x /
dian fine impressed line; back /\ . --^ A )';\ |i<
of this line greatly swollen to j ' ' 5
a posterior transverse ridge, / \ r^\ / (
the surface of this posterior ^ "^ ~ \;^ /) /
area shining and minutely \ / ./^
check striate. T e g m i n a /
opaque, coriaceous basally _, -/--' \
where it is sparsely punctate. ^/"^ / ^^\\ ^ ,
Last ventral segment of fe- vjill_- -/ jitr^
male with the area of the Lz^r^ \ ■/ ^—^
emargination deep black, the ' -O.^T"'^ /
emargination occupied by a ir » itr , •/• •
^ jr ./ Pjq 3 Makihngia maculata sp. nov.
large tooth, the lateral post- erior margins straight; the last ventral segment of male is very large, strongly swollen, the hind margin medially acute, and the pygofers are distally strongly twisted, though this may not be normal.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling and Mount Ba- nahao {Julian Valdez — coll. Baker).
Makilingia colorata sp. nov.
Head and pronotum shining black with a bronzy luster; legs reddish, femora yellowish ; basal articles of antennse yellow ; face broadly banded above, this band reddish above at margin of vertex shading into yellow below, the lower margin of band sinuate. Vertex with 4 very large coalescent shining red spots on anterior margin, 2 small basal spots near eyes coalescent with these, and 1 small separated median basal spot. Basal half of
414
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
\
K
\/
\/
tegmina bronzy greenish, black punctate, remainder blackish translucent, the inner apical cell and appendix paler ; inner basal borders of clavus shining calloused and reddish. Length s 5, $ 5.5 mm.
Length of face nearly two and a half times width between eyes; basal clypeal suture obsolete; front and clypeus evenly convex, and evenly, thickly, strongly shagreened; lorse, gense, and pronotal pleurae below the carina, rugosopunctate. Length of vertex three-fourths of width between eyes ; surface broadly concave; all of the red marginal areas shining calloused and nearly smooth or slightly striate; the dark disc thickly coarsely punctate ; a longitudinal area outside of ocelli and reaching base
^^ of vertex excavated; where
this lateral depressed area reaches basal margin, the margin is cut through with a narrow sinus, a structure previously unknown in this family. Ocelli far in front of line of anterior margin of eyes, and farther from each other than from the eyes. Pronotum thickly and coarse- ly thimble-punctured. Scutel- lum much wider than long, about as long as pronotum, area anterior to the fine im- pressed transverse line coarsely thimble-punctured, behind this line slightly swollen and finely rugose. Last ventral segment of female medially rectangularly marginate, the lateral posterior margins straight.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling (Julian Valdez — coll. Baker) .
Makilingia pallida sp. nov.
Body pale ochraceous throughout; the tegmina milky white, apically narrowly margined with smoky; vertex with 2 small black spots on anterior margin next eyes and the ocelli black margined. Length ^ 5, $ 5.5 mm.
Length of face a little more than twice width between eyes; basal clypeal suture obsolete ; front and clypeus finely punctured, the former flattened on disc; lorse, genae, and pronotal pleurae below the carina rugosopunctate. Length of vertex about two-
Fig. 4. Makilingia colorata sp. nov.
IX, D, 0
Baker: Studies in Philippine Jassoidea, I
415
Fig. 5. MakUingia pallida sp. nov.
thirds the width between eyes; sparsely coarsely punc- tured, the median and lateral areas depressed. Ocelli con- siderably in front of line of anterior margins of eyes, and much nearer to each other than to eyes. Pronotum coarsely and rather sparsely punctured. Scutellum longer than wide, with a transverse deeply excavated area next pronotum, the remainder swollen and rugoso-punctate. Tegmina with apical half pearly translucent, the basal half coriaceous and sparsely strongly punctate. Last ventral segment of female emarginate, the emargination occupied by a black tooth, the whole area of the emargination being black, the lateral posterior margins straight. Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling (Julian Valdez —
coll. Baker).
Genus MILEEWA Distant
Mileewa luzonica sp. nov.
Vertex, pronotum, and scutellum ferruginous, the front margin of vertex and all below very pale yellowish, the tegmina washed with shining ferruginous. A large rectangular spot in middle of vertex, 2 round spots near basal margin of pronotum, a vary- ing and indistinct median area on posterior half of pronotum, lateral angles of scutellum broadly, a narrow longitudinal band
on clavus within commissural margin and not reaching tip of clavus, a longitudinal band on corium bordering claval suture and passing into inner apical cell, and a band from base of tegmina passing to apex of first anteapical cell, black; area of apical cells smoky translucent. Length s 4.5, $ 4.75 mm.
Length of face two and one- fourth times width between PIG. 6. Mileewa luzonica sp. nov. ^y^s, basal clypeal suture dis-
416 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
tinct, the whole surface faintly shagreened; front and clypeus strongly convex, the former slightly flattened on disc above. Length of vertex about three-fourths of width between eyes, surface smoothly convex. Ocelli nearly on line of anterior mar- gin of eyes, somewhat nearer to eyes than to each other. Pro- notum smooth, the pleural carina very fine but complete. Scut- ellum wider than long, a fine impressed transverse line at middle. Tegmina opaque proximad of apical cells, but not at all coriace- ous, and not at all punctate. If viewed squarely the hind margin of last ventral segment appears to be slightly incurved and with a median projection, the hind angles oblique; if viewed at a slight angle the hind margin appears to be deeply evenly emar- ginate.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez — coll. Baker).
Mileewa luzonica var. decolorata var. nov.
Body pale ochraceous throughout, the tegmina whit- ish subtransparent and smoky tipped. The quadrangular spot on vertex is divided into two along the median line. Pronotal spots as in M. luzo- nica. Length 4.5 mm.
The face is somewhat nar- rower in the single specimen than in typical luzonica, and
TiQ.1. MiUewaluzonicav2Lr. decolorata yB.r.Tioy. ^^C VerteX is slightly longer,
but otherwise it is very close to the species, and at present must be placed with it.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez— coll. Baker),
Genus UJNA St^l
Ujna philippinensis sp. nov.
Black, all below very pale yellowish. Vertex with 2 large lateral spots extending forward from eyes, 2 irregular spots involving the ocelli, 1 median stripe on posterior two-thirds which is broadened anteriorly and narrowly extended basally to eyes, and a narrowly triangular median spot at tip, pale yel- lowish. Scutellum with an indication of a median yellowish line anteriorly. Elytra deep smoky throughout, costal area sub- hyaline as far distad as apical cells, this area broadening distad
IX, D. 5 Baker: SUidies in Philippine J assoidea, I 417
where it is crossed by a red dash on the line of an indistinct oblique cross nervure. Length 4 mm.
Front and clypeus very strongly convex and minutely sha~ greened, the former with 2 transverse black spots on upper margin. Second antennal article very large, longer than first. Vertex very long, narrowly rounded anteriorly, nearly smooth, coarsely shagreened just before tip, length once and a half the width between eyes, slightly impressed across ocelli. Ocelli very large, on the line of anterior margins of eyes and almost as far from median line as from eyes. Pronotum nearly smooth, the pleural carina complete. Scutellum wider than long, convex and nearly smooth anteriorly, deeply transversely foveate just behind middle, the posterior area minutely rugose. Hind mar- gin of last ventral segment of / \ ^\ female slightly incurved. ' c 'o \ \ \ !}
Luzon, Laguna Province, / - \; 1/ \
Mount MsLquiling {Julian Val- ^ \ ',.;^ /{ -^
dez — coll. Baker). y" V P .^ _A -J^
This appears to be nearest \ .' I ;/ /
to U. consors of Distant. The -, >
genera Mileewa and Ujna are very small and peculiar close- ly related tettigoniellids. As C^ 'Z^--^- described by Distant they - _^^ seemed to be quite distinct- ...^/g; t/jna p/.iiippinen«« sp. nov. Mileewa with its carinate ver- tex and truncate tegmina, and TJjna with its carinate front and rounded tegmina. Both genera have only 3 apical cells in the tegmina. Melichar ^ describes a new species which he names Mileewa gillavryi, which has the head form of Mileewa, but the wing form of Ujna. Mileewa luzonica described herein does not have a distinctly carinated vertex, nor does Ujna philippinensis have the carinated front. However, the Mileewa is evidently congeneric with the type of the genus and the Ujna even shows the general color plan of Ujna delicatida and U. co7isors of Dis- tant. This leaves only the truncated tegmina on which to sepa- rate Mileewa. Melichar mentions the close resemblance of his Mileewa gillavryi to the type of Ujna, and I believe that it should be placed in that genus, if Ujna is to be kept separate from Milee^va.
'Notes Leyden Mus. (1914), 36, 125.
418
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Genus TETTIGONIELLA Jacobi
Tettigoniella whiteheadii Distant.
Very pale ochraceous throughout ; tibiae and tarsi slightly dark- ened; 2 small black dots at tip of vertex, 2 spots on margin anterior to ocelli, 1 large median angulated black spot connected with basal margin of vertex by a median stripe, a variable median stripe on pronotum and scutellum, entire commissural margin of tegmina narrowly, and principal sectors of corium, dark brown to black. Tegmina concolorous, becoming smoky subhyaline api- cally. Length s 9.5, $ 11 mm.
Length of face somewhat less than twice width between eyes. Face strongly swollen; the disc of front flattened, lateral areas with numerous transverse darker stripes, the upper angles of
the front, and the upper angles of the flattened area, each with subtriangular black spots — extensions of those on the vertex. Face and vertex very finely shagreened. Head tumidly rounded in front, the anterior portion of vertex strongly convex, posterior third with a strongly im- pressed complete transverse area in which the ocelli are placed. Length of vertex somewhat more than half width between eyes, slightly shorter in the male; anterior margin slightly incurved at eyes, much more strongly so in the male. Ocelli just behind the line of the anterior margins of the eyes, distinctly long oval in shape, and twice as far from the median line as from the eyes. Pronotum with a few scattered weak punctures and with very indistinct transverse wrinkles, the anterior third with a deep oblique groove on either side of median line. Scutellum about as wide as long, large acuminate-tipped, a little shorter than pronutum, the sharp transverse impressed line near middle of disc. Last ventral segment of female some- what produced and strongly narrowly rounded.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling and Mount Bana- hao (Julian Valdez — coll Baker) .
This species presents a remarkable superficial resemblance to Tettigoniella spectra var. nigrilinea St41, and specimens may be found under that name in collections. But apart from minor
Fig. 9. Tettigoniella whiteheadii Distant.
IX, D, 5 Baker: Studies in Philippine J assoMea, I 419
differences, the head in whiteheadii is narrower than pronotum and the disc of front is flattened. In these characters the species agrees with the genus Kolla of Distant. But the chief character mentioned by Distant for Kolla — the curvature of the anterior margin of vertex beyond eyes — varies widely in the sexes of many species of Tettigoniella, as it does in the species described above. In fact, so much does it vary, that in some species, the female might be typical Kolla and the male Tettigoniella so far as this character is concerned. In Tettigoniella, likewise, there is a wide range of flattening of the disc of the front. Distant himself figures species of Tettigoniella with head dis- tinctly narrower than pronotum.
Tettigoniella makilingensis sp. nov.
Pale greenish yellow, below concolorous, with clypeus, tibiae apically, and tips of female valves, light green. Tip of vertex with a small \ ., black spot. Length $ 11 mm. //
Head slightly broader than / pronotum. Face nearly twice as long as width between eyes and strongly swollen. Outer \ genal margins nearly straight. \
Front with disc not flattened, the lateral areas with numer- /
ous darker transverse streaks. p,,. ,,. remgomeiia .nauninacnsis sp. nov. Face and vertex finely sha-
greened. Vertex with a sharply impressed median line, the anterior areas on either side of this strongly convex. Vertex strongly angularly produced, nearly as long as width between eyes, and a little longer than pronotum. Ocelli just in front of line of anterior margins of eyes, about as far from eyes as from median line. Pronotum with a few scattering very weak punc- tures, anteriorly with a transverse impressed groove, this groove strongly roundly bent cephalad near middle, straight at the sides. Scutellum smooth, with a sharp transverse impressed line behind middle of disc; width equalling length, and this much exceeding length of pronotum. Tegmina whitish trans- lucent, apically transparent, the principal sectors of both clavus and corium brown and indistinctly beaded. Last ventral seg- ment of female with hind margin broadly evenly rounded.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez — coll Baker),
420 The Philippine Journal of Science
This species is nearest to T. quinquenotata Stal, but the latter is a smaller species, and apart from other differences, has the head narrower than the pronotum.
Tettigoniella differentialis sp. nov.
Pale green, legs white, vertex with a discal black spot and head with 2 black dots on margin in front of eyes ; tegmina semi- transparent with brownish veins, the milky white wings under- neath giving them an opaque appearance. Length $ 7 mm.
Length of face about once and a third width between eyes. Outer genal margins strongly sinuate below eyes. Face strongly swollen, the disc of front not at all flattened; lateral areas of front with numerous darker transverse stripes. Face and vertex finely shagreened. Head tumidly rounded in front, the vertex strongly convex anteriorly, impressed across the base. Length
of vertex about three-fourths
of width between eyes, an-
s^ terior margin slightly swollen
\, just in front of eyes. Ocelli
/ jx " : 1 /'^4j ij^\ just behind lines of anterior
Y n/ Y'v /V margins of eyes, and much
/ \ ' ( V /) ' nearer to eyes than to median
_ ,' ^V;\ A line. Pronotum with an
/ / evenly curved transverse im-
. / pressed groove at anterior
\/ one-fourth, back of this the
Fio.li. Tettigoniella dif^ereniioMss^. no.. surface distinctly tranversc-
ly wrinkled. Scutellum very short acuminate tipped, much wider than long, the width nearly equal t^ length of pronotum. Last ventral segment of female somewhat produced, the hind margin narrowly rounded.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling (^Julian Valdez — coll. Baker).
This species is similar in coloration to T. unimaculata Sign., but the black spot on the vertex is behind the middle and much smaller, and the vertex is much longer. Tettigoniella unima- culata is referred to Kolla by Distant while T. differentialis could not possibly be so referred. It does not appear from the descriptions given that T. unimaculata of Distant is at all that of Signoret. Distant does not attempt to define the limits of variability of the species, as he determines it. Nor does it appear that the reference of T. kinbergi to unimaculata is at all final. StSl noted the resemblance, but considered them distinct.
ILLUSTRATIONS
TEXT FIGURES (Drawings by C. F. Baker)
Fig. 1. Makilingia nigra sp. nov.
2. Makilingia pruinosa sp. nov.
3. Makilingia maculata sp. nov.
4. Makilingia colorata sp. nov.
5. Makilingia pallida sp. nov.
6. Mileewa luzonica sp. nov.
7. Mileewa luzonica var. decolorata var. nov,
8. (//na philippinensis sp. nov.
9. Tettigoniella whiteheadii Distant.
10. Tettigoniella makilingensis sp. nov.
11. Tettigoniella differentialis sp. nov.
421
PHILIPPINISCHE HISTERIDEN: P
Von H. BiCKHARDT
{C asset, Germany) Eine Tafel
Professor C. F. Baker vom College of Agriculture, University of the Philippines, in Los Baiios hatte die Giite mir eine kleine Suite Histeriden von den Philippinen su senden, die den nach- stehend aufgef iihrten Arten angehoren. Ich bin uberzeugt, dass bei grosserem Material sich noch manche weitere Art fur diese interessante Insel-Gruppe nachweisen lasst.
Hololepta elongata Erichson.
Hololepta elongata Erichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 92; Mar- SEUL, Monogr. (1853), 190, t. 4, f. 31.
Ein kleines Exemplar vom Mt. Maquiling (Nr. 1959). Die Art ist iiber den ganzen Malayischen Archipel von Indien bis zu den Philippinen verbreitet.
Apobletes tener Marseul.
Apobletes tener Marseul, Monogr. (1860), 859, t. 15, f. 5.
Die vorliegenden Stiicke wurden bei Los Baiios und am Mt. Maquiling gefunden (Nr. 1964). Auch in meiner Sammlung (ex coll. F. Schmidt) befinden sich mehrere Stucke von den Philippinen. Die Art scheint weit verbreitet zu sein. Mir liegen noch Exemplare vor von Java, Borneo, Sumatra und Formosa.
Apobletes feriatus Lewis.
Apobletes feriatus Lewis, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (1902), VII, 10, 224.
Die Philippinischen Stucke stamen vom Mt. Maquiling (Nr. 1962). Lewis vergleich die Art mit A. tener Mars, und A. schaumi Mars. Wenn ich die Exemplare richtig bestimmt habe, so ahneln die Tiere — abgesehen vom Sternum — ^viel mehr A. corti- calis Lew. Sie sind von dieser Art verschieden durch ausge- dehntere, aber noch feinere Punktierung des Halsschildes, darch andere Punktierung des Propygidiums und durch ein geandertes Pygidium.
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
423
424 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Apobletes fictitius Lewis.
Apobletes fictitius Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1885) V, 16, 206.
Apobletes difficile SCHM., Ent. Nachr. (1889), 15, 334.
Apobletes platysomoides Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1891), VI,
8, 382. Apobletes semperi Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1891), VI, 8, 382.
Diese Art ist von Professor Baker nicht gefunden worden. Ich besitze jedoch die Type von A. difficile Schm. von den Philip- pinen. Auch diese Art ist weit verbreitet und in meiner Samm- lung durch Stiicke von Borneo, Mentawei, und Sumatra vertreten.
Platysoma (Platylister) charrali Marseul.
Platysoma {Platylister) charrali Marseul, Monogr. (1861), 146, t. 3, f. 6.
Ein Stlick dieser seltenen Art, die bisher nur von Borneo bekannt war, fand Professor Baker auf den Mt. Maquiling auf Luzon (Nr. 1958). Der Lateralstreif des Halsschildes setzt sich zuerst kraftig, dann feiner, am Hinterrand (Basis) fort.
Platysoma (Platylister) corticinus sp. nov.
Oblong-ovatus, subparallelus, subeonvexus, niger, nitidus. Fronte cum clypeo antice concavo, stria transversa subrecta. Pronoto stria laterali antice interrupta. Elytris striis dorsalibus 1. et 2. integris, 3. late interrupta, 4. apicali punctiformi obsoleta vix notata, ceteris subhumeralibusque nullis. Propygidio later- ibus fortiter ocellato-punctato, pygidio minus f ortiter sed densius punctato, margine tenui elevato. Mesosterno antice emarginato, stria marginali in medio late interrupta. Tibiis omnibus 4- dentatis.
Long., 4.75-5.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (Baker Nr. 1648 et 1957).
Die Korperf orm ist langlich oval, fast parallelseitig. Die Stirn ist nur vorn, der Clypeus vollstandig concav. Der Stimstreif ist fein. Der Lateralstreif des Halsschildes ist etwas gesch- wungen, dem Rande vorn und hinten mehr genahert als in der Mitte der Seite; am Vorderrand hinter den Augen ist er unter- brochen. Der 4. Dorsalstreif fehlt meist ganz, zuweilen ist er durch einen undeutlichen apicalen Punkt angedeutet. Das Propygidium ist an den Seiten mit kraftigen Augenpunkten massig dicht besetzt, die Mitte ist fast glatt. Das Pygidium ist dichter und etwas feiner punktiert, es hat einen ziemlich schar- fen erhobenen Aussenrand. Der Randstreif des Mesosternums ist vorn breit unterbrochen. Von den 4 Zahnchen der Hinter- schienen ist das basale Zahnchen sehr klein und leicht zu iiber- sehen.
IX. D. 6 Bickhardt: Philippinische Histeriden, I 425
Die neue Art ist mit P. abruptus Er. und ramoicola Mars, nahe verwandt, sie gleicht diesen Spezies in Grosse und Habitus voU- kommen. Sie unterscheidet sich von beiden durch das dichter und f einer punktierte Pygidium ; von abruptus f erner durch den unterbrochenen Lateralstreif des Halsschildes und den ebenfalls unterbrochenen Mesosternalstreif. Von ramoicola ist die Art ausserdem verschieden durch den breit unterbrochenen 3. Dorsalstreif.
Platysoma (Platylister) ovatum Erichson.
Platysoma ovatus Erichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 1, 108; Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 257, t. 7, f. 1.
Auch diese Art ist iiber den Malayischen Archipel weit ver- breitet. Die vorliegenden Stucke wurden in Los Baiios (Nr. 1643) gefunden.
Platysoma (Platylister) abruptum Erichson.
Platysoma abruptum Frichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 1, 109;
Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 257, t. 7, f. 2; (1861), 142, t. 3, f. 2. Platysoma gorhami Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1889), VI, 3,
278; (1893), VI, 11, 418.
Die beiden mir vorliegenden Exemplare von Los Baiios (Nr. 1649 und 1650) entsprechen sowohl der Beschreibung des Plor tysoma gorhami Lew. wie auch der des Platylister abruptum Er., die ich sowohl nach Erichson wie nach Marseul verglichen habe. Lewis hat bei Beschreibung seines gorhami off enbar vergessen, die Art mit abruptus zu vergleichen ; dies hat seinen Grund darin, dass er die Art als eine afrikanische ansah (er gibt 1889 als Fundort Zansibar an, berichtigt dann 1893 in Philippinen) . P. gorhami Lew. ist identisch mit P. abruptum Er.
Platysoma (Platylister) striatiderum Marseul.
Platysoma striatiderum Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 270, t. 7, f. 15.
Diese .Art gehort wegen des erhaben gerandeten Pygidiums zur Untergattung Platylister Lew. Sie wurde von Professor Baker bei Los Baiios aufgefunden (Nr. 1640).
Auch die folgenden Arten miissen wegen des gerandeten Py- gidiums in die Untergattung Platylister gestellt werden : P. bir- manum Mars., jobiense Mars., pini Lew., sesquistriatum Mars., contiguum Mars., emptum Mars.
Platysoma (s. str.) luzonicum Erichson.
Platysoma luzonicum Erichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 1, 111; Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 265, t. 7, f. 10.
Mehrere Stucke von Los Banos (Nr. 1645).
130422 2
426 Tf^^ Philipinne Journal of Science i»i4
Platysoma (s. str.) uniforme Lewis.
Platysoma uniforme Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1894), VI, M, 176.
Die bei Los Baiios (Nr. 1642) gefundene Art scheint hierher zu gehoren. Das basale Rudiment des 3. Dorsalstreifs ist sehr undeutlich und nur bei seitlich auffallendem Licht schwach wahmehmbar. Der 5. Dorsalstreif ist kiirzer als von Lewis an- gegeben, er erreicht nicht die Mitte der Fliigeldecke sondern nur etwa zwei Funftel derselben.
Platysoma (Cylistosoma) dufali Marseul.
Platysoma dufali Marseul, Abeille I (1864), 310. Platysoma scitutum Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1889), VI, 3, 280.
Der Diagnose von Marseul und auch der von Lewis ist noch hinzuzufiigen, dass die Augenpunkte auf dem Propygidium viel grosser sind als auf dem Pygidium.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (Baker Nr. 1651).
Liopygus diopsipygus Marseul.
Apobletus diopsipygus Marseul, Ann. Mus. Geneva (1879), 14, 259.
Ein kleines Exemplar von Los Baiios (Nr. 1646). Die Art wurde bisher gefunden in Java (Teijbodas) , Perak und Sumatra ; sie scheint weit verbreitet zu sein.
Santalus philippinarum sp. nov.
Elongatus, parallelus, convexus, niger, nitidus, fronte sub- convexa, stria frontali antice recta; mandibulis curvatis, basi extus marginatis. Thorace ciliato; striis lateralibus basin at- tingentibus, versus basin convergentibus, interna antice integra, in angulo antico rotundato. Elytris stria subhumerali interna, dorsalibus 1.-3. integris, 4. antice vix abbreviata vel integra, 5. ultra medium abbreviata. Propygidio pygidioque sat fortiter punctatis. Mesosterno stria marginali antice integra obsoleta. Tibiis anticis 3-dentatis.
Long., 8 mm.
Philippinen.
Der Korper ist langlich parallelseitig, oben massig gewolbt. Der Stirnstreif ist vorn nahezu grade. Die Mandibeln sind ziemlich stark gekriimmt, aussen nahe der Basis gerandet, auf der Oberseite flach, kaum concav. Die Lateralstreifen des Hals- schildes erreichen die Basis und convergieren nach hinten. Der innere Lateralstreif ist vorn im flachen Bogen stumpfwinkelig zum Vorderrand des Halsschildes gebogen (bei dem verwandten piraticus Lew. geht der innere Lateralstreif weiter nach vorn
IX, D, 5 Bickhardt: Philippinische Histeriden, I 427
und biegt dann spitzwinkelig gerundet nach hinten zum Vor- derrand des Halsschildes um; ferner verlaufen bei dieser Art die Lateralstreifen parallel zu einander oder nahern sich gar vorn mehr einander als hinten) . Der 5. Dorsalstreif reicht bis zur Mitte der Fliigeldecke nach vorn oder noch etwas dariiber hinaus, er ist parallel zur Naht. Das Propygidium ist ziemlich kraftig und massig dicht, das Pygidium kaum feiner und dichter punktiert. Der Marginalstreif des Mesosternums ist vorn nicht unterbrochen, aber undeutlich.
Das typische Exemplar wurde am Mt. Maquiling auf Luzon von Professor Baker erbeutet (Nr. 1644). Ein Stiick meiner Sammlung, Mindoro (ex coll. Schmidt), das irrtiimlich als S, congruens Mars, bestimmt war,^ gehort unzweifelhaft hierher, trotzdem die Mandibeln etwas langer und starker concav sind. Es wird das andere Geschlecht ( $ ) sein.
Die bekannten Arten der Gattung Santalus Lew. lassen sich, wie folgt, auseinanderhalten. Sie sind samtlich in meiner Sammlung vertreten.
Tabelle der Santalus Arten,
a\ Die Fliigeldecken haben einen kraftigoa Nahtstreif und 2 subhumeral-
streifen (Indien, Birma) S. latitibius Mars.
a'. Die Fliigeldecken haben keinen Nahtstreif. Der aussere Subhumcral-
streif fehlt (hochstens ist eine punktformige Andeutung an der
Schulter vorhanden).
6*. Der aussere Lateralstreif des Halsschildes ist nach hinten abgekurzt,
er erreicht nicht die Basis.
o\ Die Vorderschienen haben 4 Zahnchen, das Zahnchen nachst der Basis
ist klein und undeutlich. Der 4. Dorsalstreif ist an der Basis
um etwa ein Drittel verkiirzt (Lombok) S. congruens Mars.
c'. Die Vorderschienen haben 3 Zahne; der 4. Dorsalstreif der Fliigel- decken ist vollstandig oder an der Basis ganz wenig abgekiirzt. cT. Die Korperform ist oval; das Propygidium ist ziemlich krftftig und massig dicht punktiert (Indien, Ceylon). S. orlentalis Payk. d^ Der Korper ist oblong; das Propygidium ist ausserst fein und seicht punktuliert (glatt erscheinend) , elongatulus Mars.
(Indien) S. parallelus Redt.
6". Der aussere Lateralstreif des Halsschildes reicht biz zur Basis.
€\ Das Propygidium und Pygidium sind glatt; hochstens finden sich seitlich einige flache Punkte. (Die Mandibeln haben eine lange, fein ausgezogene Spitze.) (Celebes.)
S. mandibular is Schmidt. e\ Das Propygidium und Pygidium sind punktiert. /\ Der Korper ist oblong, seitlich schwach gerundet. Die Hinterschienen sind weniger stark verbreitert.
^ Zu diesser Art kann das Stiick nicht gehoren, denn die Vorderschienen haben nur 3 Zahne, der aussere Lateralstreif des Halsschildes erreicht die Basis und der 4. Dorsalstreif ist langer.
428 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
g^. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes sind parallel, der Zwischenraum ist weit. Das Mesosternum ist vorn deutlich und vollstandig gerandet (Celebes).
S. rupestris Mars.
fir'. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes convergieren nach
hinten, ihr Zwischenraum ist vorn an den Vorderecken
beinahe doppelt so breit als hinten nahe der Basis. Das
Mesosternum ist in der Mitte des Vorderrandes nicht,
Oder obsolet, gerandet (Celebes) S. tabelUo Mars.
/^ Der Korper ist langgestreckt, cylindrisch, fast parallelseitig.
Die Hinterschienen sind sehr stark verbreitert.
h^. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes sind parallel, der
4. Dorsalstreif convergiert etwas mit der Naht der
Flugeldecken nach vorn (Timor).... S. piraticus Lew.
/i'. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes convergieren nach
hinten. Der 4. Dorsalstreif verlauft parallel zur Naht
(Philippinen) S. philippinarnm Bickh.
Hister (Atholus) bakeri sp, nov.
Ovatus, convexus, niger, nitidus; antennis pedibusque rufo- piceis; fronte plana, stria semihexagona valida antice recta; pronoto stria lateral! interna unica antice interrupta hamata, marginali lateribus et antice integra; eljrtris striis subhumera- libus nullis, dorsalibus 1.4 integris, 5 suturalique dimidiatis, crenatis. Propygidio pygidioque sparse punctatis. Mesosterno antice obtuso, stria marginali integra; tibiis anticis dilatatis 4-dentatis.
Long., 4.5 mm.
Philippinen.
Die K5rperform ist oval, ziemlich stark gewolbt, die Ober- seite ist glanzend schwarz. Die Fiihler und Beine sind rotbraun. Die Stirn ist eben, der Stimstreif ist vorn ganz gerade und sein Innenrand ist etwas (massig) eingedruckt. Das Halsschild hat einen Lateralstreif, der an der Basis und vorn verkiirzt ist, an der Vorderecke endigt dieser Streif in einem einv^arts gebo- genen Hakchen. Der Marginalstreif reicht ununterbrochen um Vorder- und Seitenrand herum. Die Flugeldecken haben 4 vollst^ndige Dorsalstreifen, der 5. und Nahtstreif reichen etwa bis zur Mitte der Flugeldecken nach vorn. Das Propygidium und Pygidium sind ziemlich fein und weitlaufig punktiert, gegen die Spitze wird die Punktierung des Pygidiums feiner und dich- ter. Das Prostemum hat keine Streifen. Das Mesosternum ist vorn zugerundet und mit einer kraftigen Randlinie versehen. Die Vorderschienen haben 4 Zahnchen, von denen der grossere Spitzenzahn dreieckig vorgezogen ist.
Die neue Art ist mit Atholus torquatus Mars, am nachsten verwandt. Die Korperform ist aber oval, starker gewolbt, die
IX, D. 5 Bickhardt: Philippinische Histeriden, I 429
Oberseite ist nicht punktiert, der Stirnstreif ist vorn ganz gerade (bei torquatus schwach einwarts gebogen), der Nahtstreif der Fliigeldecken ist etwas ktirzer. Das Pygidium ist ebenso punk- tiert wie das Propygidium.
Professor Baker fand die Art bei Los Bafios (Nr. 1639).
Epierus nasicomis sp. nov. Tafel I.
Ovalis, convexus, niger, nitidus; antennis pedibusque rufis; fronte antice in medio cornuta, circa impressa. Thorace sub- laevi, stria marginali integra; elytris striis dorsalibus 1.-5. su- turalique integris (3 internis partim obsoletis). Propygidio pygidioque subtiliter sparsum punctulatis. Prosterno bistriato, striis utrinque modice divergentibus, lobo magno antice obtuso ; mesosterno antice subrecto, stria marginali integra. Tibiis an- ticis breviter multispinosis.
Long., 2.20 mm.
Philippinen.
Die neue Art ist die einzige der Gattung Epierus mit einem regelrechten Kopfhorn. Am Vorderrand der Stirn, wo Stirn und Epistom zusammenstossen, steht gerade nach vorn gerichtet ein wohlausgebildetes Horn. Unmittelbar daneben und dahin- ter ist die Stirn etwas eingedruckt, ebenso ist der Clypeus con- cav. Von den 6 vollstandigen Riickenstreifen der Fliigendecken sind die 3 inneren (einschliesslich des Nahtstreif ens) auf der Scheibe sehr fein und nur durch Punktreihen angedeutet, sie sind oft nur bei schrag auffallendem Licht, zusehen. Das Pro- pygidium und das Pygidium sind sehr fein (das letztere noch feiner als das erstere) und sparlich nadelstichartig punktiert. Diese Kehlplatte des Prosternums ist sehr gross und vorn quer abgestutzt. Das Mesosternum ist am Vorderrand fast gerade, das Prosternum ist mit seiner geraden Basis unmerklich in das Mesosternum eingelassen.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (Baker Nr. 1647).
Paromatus (s. str.) sp.
Zwei Stiicke aus Los Baiios (Nr. 1641) ohne Auszeichnung auf dem Pygidium, jedoch mit in toto flach eingedriicktem ersten Abdominal-segment lassen sich unter den bekannten Arten der Gattung nicht unterbringen. Dass die Gattung dringend der Revision bedarf sehe ich vorlaufig von einer Beschreibung ab.
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I. Epierus nasicornis sp. nov.
431
BiCKHARDT ; HiSTERIDEN, I.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 5.
TAFEL r. EPIERUS NASICORNIS SP. NOV.
NEUE FULGORIDEN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN: IP
Von L. Melichar (Briinn, Atiatria)
Eine Tafel DERBIN^E Zoraida flavicomis sp. nov.
3 : Blassgelblich, Augen braun, Kopf r5tlich. Die langen Fiihler flach, zusammengedriickt, gelblichweiss, fiusserst fein braun gekSmt, die Rander rotlich, an der Spitze eingekerbt, in der Einkerbung die kurze schwarze Borste eingef iigt. Pronotum fast weiss, der Vorderrand rotlich, Schildchen gewolbt, die LSngs- kiele undeutlich, auf dem Metanotum 2 braune Punkte. Hinterleib blassgelblich, auf dem 4. oder 5. Ruckensegmente jederseits 2 braune Fleckchen, die Spitze (Genitalapparat) rotlich, Deckschuppen rot. Fltigeldecken hyalin, der Costalrand rotlichgelb, der ^usserste Rand, die Apikalrandadern und samt- liche Adem pechbraun. Die ersten 3 Apikaladern besitzen einen runden braunen Punkt, aus welchem sie verdunnt und farblos zum Apikalrande Ziehen. Fliigel kurz, rudimentftr. Unterseite und Beine blassgelb, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hinter der Mitte. $ unbekannt
Lange des Korpers, 4 mm. ; der Fltigeldecken, 10 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios und Mount Maquiling (2 Exem- plare in meiner Sammlung, C. F. Baker.)
Zoraida puncticosta sp. nov.
$ : Blass grUnlichgelb, Augen braun. Das 2. Fuhlerglied lang, zusammengedriickt, an der Spitze eingekerbt, in der Ein- kerbung die Ftihlerborste eingelenkt, blassgriin, mit feinen brau- nen Kornchen besetzt, die Spitze rotlich, Kopf und pronotum blassgriin, letzteres in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Schildchen mit mehreren braunen Flecken und Punkten und zwar 2 Langsstriche an der Basis, 2-3 Punkte an den Seiten, 2 Punkte an der Apikal- spitze und von diesen jederseits eine schiefe Querlinie zur Flii- geldeckenbasis. Hinterleib griinlich, auf den Seiten des 4.
* Proof read by C. F. Baker.
483
434 ^'/^^ Philiqypine Journal of Science 1914
Rlickensegmentes jederseits 2 braune einandergenaherte Mac- keln, die Mitte des Bauches pechbraun. Flugeldecken lang, hyalin, der Costalrand gelblich, die Costalrandader an der Basis von 2 schwarzen Linien begrenzt, dann bis zur Spitze mit klein- eren und grosseren schwarzen Punkten besetzt; die Adern gelblich. Fliigeln sehr klein, rudimentar. Beine blassgelblich, Schenkel an der Spitze auf der Unterseite mit einem braunlichen Fleck, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hinter der Mitte, die Spitze desselben dunkel.
S unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 4 mm.; der Flugeldecken, 11 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker),
Zoraida dorsopimctata sp. nov.
S : Korper gelblichbraun. Die langen flachen Fiihler pech- braun, fein gekornt. Pronotum schmutzigweiss, die Seiten braun. Schildchen gewolbt, mit 3 deutlichen Langskielen, die Scheibe mehr oder weniger dunkel. Auf dem Hinterleibsrucken befinden sich jederseits 3 Reihen von schwarzen Punkten, welche nach hinten zur Mittellinie konvergieren. Die Rander der Ge- nitalsegmente schwarz. Metanotum stark kugelig gewolbt, pechbraun. Bauch pechbraun, Brust schmutziggelb, an den Seiten braun gefleckt. Flugeldecken hyalin, am Costalrande gelblichbraun, nicht gefleckt, die Adern braun, auf den Apikal- adern keine dunklen Punkte vor dem Apikalrande, letzterer sowie der Hinterrand schmal braun gesaumt. Fliigel kurz, rudi- mentar. Beine schmutziggelb, die Schienen dunkler, die Basis der Hinterschenkel schwarzlich. Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hinter der Mitte.
$ unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 5 mm. ; der Flugeldecken, 11.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker),
Genus NEOCAMMA novum
Der Gattung Carnma Distant sehr ahnlich. Die Costalmem- brane ist breit, so breit wie die nachste Zelle, aber nicht an der Basis wie bei Camma (dilatata Dist.) vorgewolbt, der Scheitel klein, dreieckig, die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet aber nicht vorgewolbt, so dass die Wangen sehr schmal sind. Die Stirnrander einander beriihrend, an der Clavusbasis diver- gierend, ein kleines Stirndreieck bildend. Clypeus bedeutend langer als die Stirne, in der Mitte und an den Seiten fein gekielt. Die Fiihler unter den halbkugeligen, am Unterrande schwach gebuchteten Augen eingelenkt, den Stirnrand weit liberragend.
IX. D, 6 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: II 435
das 2. P^uhlerglied fast dreimal so lang als breit, cylindrisch, Fiihlerborste apikal eingefugt. Pronotum in der Mitte schmal, nach aussen erweitert, Schildchen gewolbt, mit 3 Langskielen, die Seitenkiele etwas furchenartig vertieft. Metanotum dreiek- kig, gewolbt, in der Mitte mit einer Langsfurche Flugeldeeken lang, schmal, in der Mitte am breitesten. Der Verlauf der Adern wie bei Camma, die Radialzelle ist aber nicht so breit wie bei Camma. Die Flugel ungefahr halb so lang wie die Flugel- deeken, lanzettlich, nach hinten nicht erweitert, mit einer Ader in der Mitte welche nach beiden Seiten kurze Aste zum Vor- beziehungsweise Hinter-rande sendet, nach innen zu eine kurze Gabelader. Beine grazil, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hin- ter der Mitte.
Von der Gattung Camma Dist., durch die an der Basis nicht erweiterte Costalmembrane der Flugeldeeken, die langeren Fiihler und die lanzettlich geformten Flugel, sowie die mit einem Dome versehenen Hinterschienen verschieden.
Typ. gen. Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov.
Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov. Tafel I, Fig. 1-4.
$ : Korper gelblichbraun ohne Zeichnung. Fliigeldecken hyalin mit 3 braunen Querbinden, der Costal- und Apikalrand mit braunen Flecken. Der nervus radialis ist rotlich, die iibri- gen Adern braunlichgelb. Beine gelblich.
$ unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 2.75 mm.; der Fliigeldecken, 7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
Genus ACANTHOCERA novum
Kopf samt Augen klein, der Scheitel als kleines Dreieck an der Basis erkennbar, die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet, nicht vorgewolbt, die Wangen daher schmal, die Stirne von vome linear, die Rander zusammenschliessend bis zur Spitze, Augen halbkugelig, die Fuhler die Augen iiberragend, das 2. Fiihlerglied mehr als doppelt so lang wie breit, cylindrisch, an der Aussenseite mit einem breiten Zahne versehen, wodurch sich diese Gattung von alien anderen bekannten Gattungen unter- scheidet. Clypeus gross, breit, in der Mitte und an den Seiten undeutlich fein gekielt. Rostrum die Hinterhiiften iiberragend. Pronotum in der Mitte sehr schmal, die hintere stumpfwinkelige Ausbuchtung fast den Vorderrand erreichend, die Seiten blat- tartig erweitert. Schildchen breiter als lang, vor der Spitze quer eingedriickt, mit 3 undeutlichen Langskielen. Fliigeldek- ken lang, schmal, hinter der Mitte am breitesten; das Geader
436 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9u
ist aus der Abbildung ersichtlich. Fliigel kaum halb so lang wie die Fliigeldecken, ziemlich breit, hyalin. Beine grazil, Hin- terschienen nicht bedornt.
Typ. gen., Acanthocera punctifrons sp, nov.
Acanthocera punctifrons sp. nov. Tafel I, Figs. 5-8.
$ : Blassgriin, Augen braun, auf der Stirne 5 schwarze Punkte, welche sich auf die Stimrander ausdehnen und daher auch von der Seite sichtbar sind. Fliigeldecken hyalin, mit gelblich- braunen Adern und zahlreichen hell braunlichgelben Makeln, hinter der Basalzelle, an der Teilungsstelle des nervus radialis und hinter der Clavusspitze eine dunkle pechbraune Makel. Hinterleib, Unterseite und Beine blassgriin, auf der Aussenseite der Vorderschienen an der Basis und in der Mitte je ein schwarzer Punkt.
$ unbekannt.
Mnge des Korpers, 2 mm.; der Fliigeldecken, 6 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar, C. F, Baker),
Fenuahala maculipennis sp. nov.
$ : Schmutzig gelblichweiss. Scheitel dreieckig, doppelt so breit wie der Querdurchmesser des Auges, die Seiten gescharft und aufgerichtet, mit sensiblen Organen besetzt Stirne schmal, die Rander nur in der Mitte einander beriihrend, nach oben und unten divergierend. Von der Seite betrachtet gerundet, die Wangen kaum die Halfte des Langendurchmessers des Auges breit. Fuhler in der unteren Wangenecke eingelenkt, den Unter- rand des Auges erreichend, das 2. Fiihlerglied doppelt so lang wie breit, cylindrisch. Clypeus breit, gewolbt, nicht gekielt. Pronotum schmal, seitlich verbreitert. Schildchen mit 3 Kielen, die seitlichen schwach gebuchtet. Auf den Wangen eine braun- liche undeutliche Makel, in den hinteren Scheitelecken ein schwar- zer Punkt, sonst mit weissem Sekret mehr oder weniger be- deckt. Fliigeldecken lang, hyalin, mit zahlreichen rauchbraunen zusammenfliessenden Makeln, vor der Apikalspitze dort wo die beiden Aste des nervus radialis sich verbinden eine rundliche dunklere Makel. Fliigel mehr als die Halfte der Fliigeldecken lang, breit, hyalin. Hinterleibsbasis pechbraun, die Spitze hell. Beine blass gelblichweiss, die Kanten der Schenkel schwarz, die Schienen etwas verdunkelt, die Spitze der Hinterschienen und der Hintertarsen schwarz.
S unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 3.5 mm.; der Fliigeldecken, 6 mm.
Luzon, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
IX, D. 5 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: II 437
Mecynorhynchus hyalinus sp. nov.
S : Kleine, sehr zarte Derbine. Korper und Beine wachsgelb, auf der Aussenseite des Scheitelrandes eine kleine rote Makel. FlUgeldecken etwas schwach milchig getrubt, hyalin, mit weissen Adern, ein sehr kleiner loter Punkt am Costalrande im ersten PritteL Die Bildung des Kopfes und Verlauf der Adern in den FlUgeldecken wie bie M. kershawi Kirk., von dieser durch die hyalinen, nicht dunklen Fliigeldecken verschieden. 9 unbekannt.
LSnge, ungefahr 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
Rhotana punctovenosa sp. nov.
Kopf und Thorax schmutzig gelblichweiss. Die Wangen hya- lin, mit 2 schwarzen Strichen, der eine vor dem Auge, der zweite vertikal auf der Aussenseite des Scheitelrandes. Auf dem Schildchen 2 diffuse braunliche Makeln und 2 kleine Punkt- chen vor der Spitze, Fliigeldecken breit, hyalin, graulichweiss, stellenweise braunlich geflekt, die Adern karmoisinrot, schmal hell gerandet, mit starken braunen Punkten besetzt. Ungefahr 10 schwarzbraune Punkte befinden sich am Costalrande und zwar von der Basis bis zur Wolbung der Fliigeldecken. Fliigel milchweiss getriibt. Hinterleib schwach rStlich, Beine rostgelb. Diese Art ist durch die punktierten Adern und den Costalrand besonders gekennzeichnet.
Lange, 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C F. Baker).
Ehotana excelsa sp. nov.
Korper blassgelblich, die Stirn und Scheitelrander und der Clypeus orangegelb., Augen braun, Fliigeldecken breit, hyalin, glashell, glanzend, der Costalrand blass citronengelb. Von der Mitte dieses Costalsaumes zieht eine ebenso gefarbte halb-mond- formige Binde in der Mitte der Fliigeldecken, erweitert sich an der konvexen Seite breit bis zum Schlussrande und miin- det in den Costalrand, ohne sich mit dem Costalsaum zu ver- binden. Daselbst befindet sich eine kleine braunliche Rand- makel, anschliesend an diese ein roter Fleck. Die Adern sehr zart, gelblich. Fliigel breit, in der Mitte blass citronengelb, am Apikalrande vor der Spitze eine grosse schwarze dreilappige Makel, vorne von einem blutroten Fleck begrenzt; in den mit- tleren Lappen befindet sich ein weisser Punkt. Beine blassgelb. Der R, latipefinis Walk, ahnlich, durch die Zeichnung verschieden und leicht zu erkennen.
438 ^/^^ Philippine Journal of Science
Lange, 5 mm.; Spannweite, 7-8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios und Mount Maquiling (C. F, Baker).
Rhotana basipunctulata sp. nov.
9 : Korper blassgelblich, Augen braun, Flugeldecken hyalin, stark irisirend, mit blass-gelblichen Adem, die Queradern blass- braunlich gesaiimt, so dass 2-3 Querbinden entstehen. Auf dem nervus radialis nahe der Basis befinden sich 3 schwarze Punkte welche in einer Langsreihe stehen. Unterseite und Beine blassgelb. Nach den 3 Punkten auf der ersten Langsader ist diese Art leicht zu erkennen.
^ unbekannt.
Lange samt Flugeldecken, 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I
Pic. 1-4. Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov. n-8. Acanthocera pnnctifrons sp. nov.
439
Melichar: Neue Fulgokiden, IL]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 5.
Fig. 1-4. Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov. 5-8. Acanthocera punctifrons sp. nov.
TAFEL I.
ELATERIDyE DES ILES PHILIPPINES *
Par Ed, Fleutiaux (Nogent-sur-Marney France)
Les Elaterides decrits en suite sont partie d'une collection que j'ai regu de M. C. F. Baker, professeur d'agronomie au College d' Agriculture de Los Banos, iles Philippines.
Agrypnus bifoveatus Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1857), 1, 23, 41; Revis, Mon. Elat. (1874), 8.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Lacon cervinus Erichson.
Nov. Act. Ac. Lesp. Carol. (1834), 16; SuppL, 1, 230. CandIjze, Revis. Mon. Elat. (1874), 48, 78.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Meristhus nigritulus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1893), 10. Fleutiaux, Ann. Soc. ent. belg. (1895), 167.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios. N'^tait connu que de Sumatra.
Alans scytale Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1857), 1, 214, 228; Revis. Mon. Elat. (1874), 120; Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 106.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Decrit d'abord des Philippines, puis trouve ensuite a Celebes et en Nouvelle Guinee.
^olus beccarii Candeze.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 117.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Espece decrite de Makassar, au meme temps qu'une autre tres voisine, ^. multilineatus et placees toutes deux par Tauteur dans le genre Heteroderes. La derniere se trouve egalement en Malaisie.'
^= Proof read by C. F. Baker. ' Candeze, Ann. Mus, Civ, Gen, (1894), 488. 130422 3 441
442 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i^>i i
Heteroderes drasterioides Fleutiaux. Ann. Soc. ent. France (1894), 686.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
D'Annam et de Saigon. Est avec H. intermedins Cand. tres voisin, de H. triangularis Esch. et de H. proximus Fleut.
Drasterius sulcatulus Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1859), 2, 423, 427.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Deer it de I'Hindoustan. Cite du Bengale ^ et de Sumatra.
Megapenthes inconditus Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1859), 2, 493, 504; Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 122; Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 122.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Les individus de M. Baker appartiennent a la variete citee par Candeze (1875). Se trouve aussi a Celebes.
Megapenthes junceus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 30; Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 122; Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 122.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Je rapporte presque sans aucun doute a cette espece Texem- plaire recolte par M. Baker, malgre qudques differences avec la description, notamment en ce qui concerne la couleur des pattes qui sont jaunes. Se rencontre egalement a Borneo.
Megapenthes junceus variete candezei (var. Cand., 1875).
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Differe par une tache en form d^O sur le front, une tache obscure sur le disque du pronotum et les cotes de celui-ci, avec ses angles posterieurs plus ou moins noiratres.
Megapenthes angulosus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 122.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Megapenthes luzonicus sp. nov.
Allonge, assez convexe, d'un brun noiratre avec la base des elytres jaune et le voisinage de la suture des elytres d'un brun plus clair, pubescence jaune. Tete peu convexe, fortement et
^Candeze, Compt. rend, Soc. ent. belg. (1T90), 151; Ann. Soc. ent. belg. (1892), 489.
•Fleutiaux, Anrc. Soc. ent. belg. (1895), 169.
IX, D, 6 Fleutiaux: Elateridse des lies Philippines 443
assez densement ponctuee. Antennes d'un brun noiratre. Pro- notum beaucoup plus long que large, retreci en evant, ponctuation un peu moins forte et moins serree que sur la tete, surtout a la base, angles posterieurs longs, bicarenes, legerement divergents. Ecusson oblong, attenue en arriere, peu convexe, ponctue. Elytres r6trecis en arriere a partir de la moitie, tronques au sommet, stries-ponctues, interstries granuleux. Dessous brunatre, epi- pleures des elytres jaunes, pattes jaunes.
Long., 13 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Megapenthes fulvus sp. nov.
Allonge, subpgirall^le, peu convexe, jaune clair avec le milieu du pronotum a peine rembruni, pubescence jaune. Tete peu convexe, assez fortement ponctuee. Antennes d'un jaune un peu rougeatre. Pronotum parallele, arrondi en avant, ponctua- tion peu serree mais profonde, angles posterieurs bicaren§s, prolonges en arriere. Ecusson oblong. Elytres retrecis seule- ment dans leur tiers posterieur, tronques au sommet, fortement stries-ponctues, interstries granuleux. Dessous d'un jaune un peu obscur, sauf sur les propleures. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 9 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos et Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de M. junceiis.
Melanoxanthus promecus Candeze. Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 36.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Melanoxanthus bakeri sp. nov.
Allonge, convexe, assez brillant, noir avec le prothorax entier et une grande tache humerale sur les elytres jaunes, pubescence noire clairsemee. Tete convexe et ponctuee, faiblement carenee au milieu. Antennes courtes, noires. Pronotum jaune, convexe, a peine retr6ci en avant, legerement et eparsement ponctue, pubescence rare herissee, noire, angles posterieurs unicarenes. Ecusson noir, oblong, sur un plan perpendiculaire, coupe carre- ment en arriere, eparsement ponctue. Elytres un peu plus etroits que le pronotum, faiblement attenu6 en arriere, tronques au sommet, noirs avec une grande tache humerale jaune n'at- teignant pas la suture, stries-ponctues assez fortement dans la premiere moitie, tres faiblement en arriere, interstries rugueux en avant, simplement et finement pointilles dans la partie pos- terieure. Dessous du prothorax jaune, le reste du corps noir
444 '^^^ Philippine Jouryial of Science i9i4
et assez fortement ponctue. Pattes noiratres avec les trochanters et rextremite des tarses brunatres.
Long., 8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Voisin de M. exclamationis Cand.
Melanoxanthus afOinis sp. nov.
Oblong, convexe, attenue en arriere, noir brillant avec le pronotum rouge sauf sur le bord anterieur et Textremite de ses angles posterieurs, pubescence obscure. Tete convexe, arron- die en avant, couverte d'une grosse ponctuation serree, large et peu profonde. Antennes ne depassant pas la base du thorax, noires, larges, a articles transversaux comprim^s. Pronotum un peu plus long que large, convexe, sillonne en arriere au milieu, curvilineairement retreci en avant, rouge avec le bord anterieur et rextremite des angles posterieurs noirs, ponctuation forte et serree sur les cotes, moins grosse et moins dense sur le disque. Ecusson noir, triangulaire et granuleux. Elytres un peu plus etroits que le pronotum a la base, attenues en arriere, tronque au sommet, fortement ponctues-stries surtout en avant, inter- stries rugueux dans la partie anterieure, ponctues en arriere. Dessous noir, propleures rouges. Pattes noires, extremite des tarses brunatres.
Long., 5.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de M. bicolor Cand.
Melanoxantlius luzonicus sp. nov.
EUiptique, peu convexe, noir avec le thorax et les pattes jaunes ; pubescence jaune, d'un jaune plus clair sur le pronotum et le propectus. Tete convexe, arrondie en avant couverte de points ombiliques assez rapproches. Labre et mandibules rougeatres. Pronotum jaune, graduellement retreci en avant, ses cotes arques, ponctuation assez forte et serree, angles posterieurs aigus, non divergents, carenes. Ecusson allonge, subtriangulaire. Elytres attenues en arriere, tronques au sommet, ponctues, stries, inter- stries plans et rugueux. Dessous noir, propectus jaune, ponc- tuation peu serree sur le prosternum, grosse et ecartee sur les propleures, bien distincte et peu serree sur les autres parties du corps. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Voisin de M. sangidnicollis Schw.
IX, D, 5 Fleutiaux: Elateridse des lies Philippines 445
Melanoxanthus ater sp. nov.
Oblong, attenue en arriere, peu convexe, entierement d'un noir profond peu brillant, pubescence noire. Tete convexe, ar- rondie en avant, ponctuation assez forte. Pronotum arrondi et retr^ci en avant, sillonne au milieu a la base, ponctuation nette et peu serree sur le disque, plus forte et plus dense sur les cotes, angles posterieurs courts, carenes. Ecusson oblong, r6t- reci en arriere. Elytres attenues en arriere, subtronques au sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries rugueux. Dessous et pattes noirs.
Long., 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Voisin de M. carhunculus Cand.
Melanoxanthus crucifer sp. nov.
Allonge, peu convexe, jaune avec une etroite bande noire au milieu du pronotum prolongee sur les elytres tout le long de la suture et une bande transversale de meme couleur au dela de la moitie des elytres. Tete peu convexe, front arrondi et saillant en avant, ponctuation forte et serree. Antennes jaunes. Prono- tum assez convexe, retreci en avant, sillonne au milieu a la base, assez fortement et densement ponctue, angles posterieurs pro- longes, arrondis au sommet, longuement car6nes. Ecusson allonge, retreci en arriere, rugueux. Elytres arrondis a Textrfi- mite, assez fortement ponctues-stries, Dessous et pattes en- tierement jaunes.
Long., 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Voisin de M. cruciellus Cand.
Melanoxanthus infimus Candeze.
Compt. rend. See. ent. belg. (1875), 124.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Anchastus vittatus sp. nov.
Elliptique, peu convexe, noir avec la base des antennes, les angles posterieurs du pronotum, une bande longitudinale au milieu de chaque elytre partant de la base, se retrecissant en ar- riere et s'arretant avant Textremit^, jaunes; pubescence de la couleur du fond. Tete arrondie en avant, peu convexe, ponc- tuee. Antennes depassant la base du thorax. Pronotum plus long que large, retreci en avant, ponctuation assez forte mais
446 The Philipinne Journal of Science 1914
ecartee, plus grosse sur les cotes; angles posterieurs aigus, non divergents, sans carene distincte. Ecusson noir, oblong, rugueux. Elytres graduellement retrecis en arriere, fortement ponctues- stries. Dessous d'un jaune rougeatre avec la partie mediane externe des propleures et le pourtour de Tabdomen sur une assez grande largeur noirs. Pattes jaune clair.
Long., 4.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de A. mfangulns Cand.
Anchastus unicolor Candeze. Elat. nouv. (1881), 3, 61.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Hypnoidus bakeri sp. nov.
Oblong, d'un brun noiratre brillant, pubescence grise. Tete assez convexe, bord anterieur ferrugineux. Antennes jaunes, articles du milieu un peu obscurcis. Pronotum a peine aussi long que large a la base, retreci en avant, assez convexe, tres finement et densement pointille; angles posterieurs jaunes, leur carene angulaire atteignant la moitie en avant. Ecusson brun, convexe, assez grand, retreci en arriere. Elytres ornes de deux taches jaunes, une en croissant partant de Tepaule et se dirigeant vers la suture en contournant Fecusson a une certaine distance et une autre oblongue avant Textremite, stries tres fines, non ponctuees, interstries plans. Dessous obscur, bord externe des propleures jaune, prosternum brunatre avec sa mentonniere plus clair. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Cardiophorus bakeri nom. nov.
Cardiophorus elegans Candeze, Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 132; nee. Solier.
Decrit de Celebes, j'en possede un exemplaire d'Amboine. J'ai du changer le nom de Candeze qui a ete employe anterieure- ment par Solier (1851) pour une espece chilienne.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Biploconus umbilicatus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 125.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
IX. D, 5 Fleutiaux: Elateridx des lies Philippines 447
Diploconus erythronotus Candeze. Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 46.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling. Diploconus politus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Sec. ent. belg. (1875), 126. Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios, Mont Maquiling.
Diploconus philippinensis sp. nov.
Allonge, entierement d'un rouge f errugineux peu brillant, pub- escence jaune. Tete convexe, fortement ponctuee, bord anterieur arrondi et reborde. Antennes depassant la base du thorax, ferrugineuses, premiers articles plus clairs. Pronotum plus long que large, r^treci en avant, peu convexe, regulierement ponctue, legerement sillonne au milieu de la base, angles poste- rieurs a peine divergents, bicarenes. Ecusson oblong, rugueux. Elytres attenues en arriere, arrondis et denticules au sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries faiblement rugueux. Dessous de meme couleur. Hanches posterieures nettement anguleusses et meme subdentees. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 9 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont. Maquiling.
Voisin de D. politics Candeze.
Diploconus obscurus sp. nov.
Allonge, d'un brun noiratre peu brillant, pubescence jaune. Tete peu convexe, a bord anterieur avance et saillant, tres forte- ment et densement ponctuee. Antennes d'un ferrugineux obs- cur. Pronotum plus long que large, retreci en avant, peu convexe, fortement et densement ponctue, sillonne au milieu a la base au dela de la moitie, angles posterieurs peu divergents, bicarenes. Ecusson oblong, ponctue. Elytres attenues en arriere, subtron- ques au sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries rugueux. Dessous de meme couleur. Hanches posterieures subanguleuses. Pattes ferrugineuses.
Long., 9.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de D. umbilicaUi^ Candeze.
Diploconus bakewellii sp. nov.
Allonge, peu convexe, d'un brun noiratre assez brillant, pu- bescence rousse. Tete peu convexe bord anterieur avance, arrondi et saillant, ponctuation forte, ombiliquee et serree. An-
448 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
tennes ferrugineuses, depassant la base du thorax. Pronotum plus long que large, graduellement retreci en avant, peu convexe, ponctuation assez forte, ecartee sur le disque, plus profonde et plus serree sur les bords, angles posterieurs aigue et bicarenes. Ecusson oblong, ponctue. Elytres graduellement retrecis en arriere, arrondis au sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries peu rugueux. Dessous d'un brun rougeatre clair, surtout sur Tab- domen. Ranches posterieures subanguleuses. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 6.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de D. obscurics. Je possedais deja un exemplaire de cette espece provenant de la collection Janson (ex-Bakewell.)
Melanotus ebeninus Candeze.
Mon. Elat, (1860), 3, 305, 335. Compt. rend. Soc. belg. (1875), 126.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Je possede un type de Candeze, dans la collection Chevrolat (ex-Cuming). Se trouve egalement a Tile Jolo (Dr. Platen).
Melanotus scribanus Candeze. Elat. nouv. (1893), 5, 48.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos, Mont Maquiling.
Tristilophus luzonicus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 53. Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 120.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
C'est seulement dans son Catalogue Methodique des Elaterides ' que Candeze a place cette espece dans le genre Tristilophus, cor- respondant a la section IV du genre Corymhites, dans sa Mono- graphie des Elaterides.^
Ludius hirsutus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 126.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Malgre la coloration uniformement d'un brun noiratre, de Tunique individu que j'ai sous les yeux, je ne crois pas devoir le separer de cette espece.
*(1891), 175. '(1863), 4, 85, 123.
IX, D. 5 Fleutiaux: Elateridse des lies Philippines 449
Glyphonyx erraticns Candeze.^
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 127.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
L'exemplaire de M. Baker repond a la variete citee par Can- deze.
Glyphonyx posticus (?) Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 127.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Un seul exemplaire chez lequel la pubescence est unicolore sur toute la surface.
Hemiops semperi Candeze. Elat. nouv. (1878), 2, 53.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Dicronychus bakeri sp. nov.
Subcylindrique, convexe, entierement jaune, pubescence peu visible. Tete abaissee et impressionnee en avant, bord ante- rieur arrondi et reborde, ponctuation grosse et serree. Anten- nes epaisses, depassant la base du thorax, d'un jaune obscure. Pronotum subparallele, ponctuation forte, moins serree que sur la tete, angles posterieurs courts et divergents. Ecusson sub- arrondi, irregulierement ponctue. Elytres par alleles, arrondis au somment, tres rugueux, f ortement stries. Dessous de la meme couleur. Cuisses plus clairs.
Long., 7.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de D. cinnamomeus Candeze.
•Je ne crois pas que la variete attonitus Cand., Elat. nouv. (1896), 6, 78, de Palawan puisse etre rapportee a cette espece.
CATALOGUE DES PSeLAPHIDES (COLEOPTfeRES) DES ILES
PHILIPPINES '
Par A. Rapfray (Romay Italia)
M. le Professeur C. F. Baker a bien voulu me communiquer quelques Pselaphides qu'il avait recueillis a Los Bafios et parmi lesquels il y avait plusieurs especes nouvelles.
Bien que le nombre des Pselaphides connus de TArchipel des Philippines ne represente qu'une tres minime partie des especes qui habitent certainement cette region intertropicale, j'ai pense qu'il y avait interet a donner la liste de toutes les especes connues jusqu'a ce jour et que cela pourrait encourager des recherches ulterieures.
C'est en 1890 que mon ami M. Eugene Simon fit un voyage aux Philippines d'oii il rapporta 12 especes de Pselaphides qui s'augmenterent de 5 autres especes de la collection Baer et d'une autre decrite deja par Reitter, se qui me donna Toccasion de publier un premier travail sur les Pselaphides des iles Phil- ippines.^'
Intempus punctatissimus Reitter.
Intempiis punctatissiynus Reitter, Deutsch. Ent. Zeitschr. (1885), 337, PL III, fig. 27. Manila.
Thesiastes crassipes Raffray.
Euplectus crassipes Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. F'rance (1891), 475. Bulacan.
Batrisodes cavicola Raffray.
Batrisiis cavicola Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 476, PI. 14, fig. 1. Cueva de San Mateo (Montalvan), province de Manila.
Batrisodes verticinus Raffray.
Batrisus verticinus Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 477. Cueva de San-Mateo (Montalvan), province de Manila.
Batrisocenus tumidipes Raffray.
Batrisodes tumidipes Raffray, Ann. Soc, ent. France (1891), 479, PI. 14, fig. 4. Manila.
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
'Ann. Soc, ent. France (1891), 473, PL 14.
451
452 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Batrisocenus hamatipes Raffray.
Batrisodes hamatipes Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 480, PI. 14, %. 5. Manila.
Batrisocenus clavipes Raffray.
Batrisodes clavipes Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 480, PL 14, fig. 3. Manila.
Batrisocenus squamiceps Raffray.
Batrisodes squamiceps Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1911), 478, PI. 14, fig. 2. Manila.
Batraxis pubescens sp. nov.
Oblonga, subparallela, convexa, tota rufa, setis erectis sed sparsis vestitus. Caput magnum, transversum, antice vix at- tenuatum; fronte subrecte truncata, angulis anticis integris, sulco transverse integro et juxta oculos fovea obliqua; tempor- ibus rotundatis. Antenna mediocres, articulis 1 et 2 majoribus, 1 cylindrico, 2 obconico, 3 obconico, latitudine sua longiore, 4-8 monilibus, 9 cylindrico, latitudine sua paululum longiore, 10 magno, trans verso, 11 maximo, latere interno recto, latere ex- terno obliquo, basi rotundato, apice parum acuminato. Protho- rax capite vix angustior, transversus, ad basin attenuatus, an- gulis anticis obtusis, lateribus obliquis; fovea antebasali minuta. Elytra subquadratra, lateribus rotundatis, humeris obtuse cari- natis; stria suturali Integra, dorsali nulla. Abdomen elytris aequilongum, lateribus rectis, postice rotundatum; segmento pri- mo magno, cujus margine laterali vix perspicue carinata; basi carinulis duabus brevibus et circa quartam partem disci inclu- dentibus. Pedes validi, sat elongati; femoribus sat crassis; tibiis subrectis ad apicem incrassatis.
Long., 1.40 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F, Baker),
Cette espece est excessivement voisine de Batraxis hirtella Raffray de Nouvelle-Guinee occidentale; elle en differe par la tete encore plus grosse, avec les angles anterieurs non entailles, les antennes plus longues, moins epaisses, dont le 2^ article est plus allonge, le prothorax plus gibbeux sur le disque en avant, avec les angles anterieurs plus marques.
Batraxis nitidula sp. nov.
Oblonga, antrorsum attenuata, convexa, rufotestacea, nitida, glabra, antennis leviter pubescentibus. Caput quadratum; fronte medio antrorsum declivi, utrinque in angulis quadratis elevata, transversim sulcata; inter oculos magnos, prominentes,
IX. D. 6 Raff ray: Catalogue des Pselaphides (Coleopteres) 453
antice sitos, f oveis duabus validis ; temporibus obliquis et leviter arcuatis. Antennae validse, crassse, articulis duobus primis pauIo majoribus, 3-7 subobconicis, longitudine decrescentibus, 8 ovato, 9 fere globoso, 10 magno, trapezoidali, transverse, 11 maximo, triangular!, latere externo obliquo et sulcato, apice leviter acuminate. Prothorax capite et longitudine sua per- parum latior, breviter cordatus, angulis anticis rotundatis late- ribus ad basin obliquis; fovea antebasali minutissima. Elytra leviter transversa, ad basin leviter attenuata; humeris obliquis et obtuse carinatis; lateribus leviter rotundatis; margine pos- tica trisinuata; basi bifoveata, stria dorsali nulla. Abdomen elytris sequilongum, lateribus subparallelum, postice obtusum; segmento 1^ magno; margine laterali bicarinata, carina in- terna valde obliqua et externa maxime approximata; basi utrinque foveato, medio transversim impresso et ciliato inter cannulas duas breves, plus quam tertiam partem disci includen- tes. Pedes validi et elongati ; f emoribus medio incrassatis ; tibiis ad apicem paululum incrassatis, posticis leviter incurvis; tro- chanteribus anticis obtuse angulatis.
Long., 1.70 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker).
Cette espece, par Tabsence de toute pubescence sur le corps, est tres differente de la precedente. Elle etablit une transition entre le groupe IX qui a les carenules abdominales distantes de I et le groupe X qui les a distantes de i ou f ; dans B, nitidula ces carenules sont distantes seulement d'un peu plus de J." Voisine de sinensis Raffr. de Tientsin (Chine) ; elle en differe par les carenules abdominales beacoup plus courtes, les elytres plus fortement sinues a Textremite, le dernier article des antennes notablement moins long et plus epais.
Reichenbachia rufa Schmidt-Goebel.
Reichenhachia rufa Schmidt-Gcebel, Beitr. Mon. Psel. ( ), 6,
PI. I, fig. 4. Manila. (Inde, Ceylon, Java, Singapore, Celebes, Siam, Annam, Syrie.)
Reichenbachia manillensis Raffray.
Bryaxis vianillensis Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 490, PL 14, fig. 14 et 14a. Antipole, province de Morong.
Reichenbachia laticoUis Raffray.
Bryaxis laticoUis Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 491, PI. 14, fig. 15 et 15a. Antipolo, province de Morong.
'Ann. Soc, ent. France (1904), 117, 199.
454 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Reichenbachia dama Raffray.
Bryaxis dama Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 492, PL 14, fig. 17. Quingua, province de Bulacan.
Anasis leevicoUis Raffray.
Bryonia Ixvicollis Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 493. Manila.
Rybaxis gladiator Raffray.
Rybaxis gladiator Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 481, PL 14, fig. 7. Manila et Antipolo.
Rybaxis simoniana Raffray.
Rybaxis simoniana Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 482. An- tipolo.
Tyraphus baeri Raffray.
Tyraphus baeri Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 493. Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Gentrophthaliniis philippinensis sp. nov.
Oblongus, antice attenuatus, rubrocastaneus, nitidus, longe brunneo-hirsutus. Caput triangulare ; tuberculo antennario angusto, sulcato ; inter oculos f oveis duabus magnis ; spina inf ra- oculari deficiente; temporibus dense et longe ciliatis. Oculi magni, prominentes. Palporum articulo 3 elongato-triangulari, apice recte truncate, 4 minuto, subulate. Antennae validae, crassse, clava quadriarticulata, articulis 1 cylindrico, 2 quadrate, 3-7 mineribus, quadratis, 8-10 majoribus, latitudine sua longior- ibus, 8 cylindrico, 9 et 10 ovatis, 11 magno, ovate. Pretherax capite major, latitudine sua paululum lengier, antice plus et post- ice vix attenuatus, lateribus ad basin subrectis ; fovea antebasali magna. Elytra leviter transversa, ad basin attenuata ; humeris rotundatis sed obtuse notatis ; basi bif oveata, sulco dorsali parum prefundo, oblique, ante medium evanescente. Abdomen elytris paulo longius ; segmento 1° secundo paulo minere, carinis duabus plus quam dimidiam partem disci includentibus, in prime seg- mento integris, in secundo tantum mode basi brevissimis. Pedes validi, elengati; femoribus, prsesertim anticis, crassis; tarsis anticis extus medio inflatis, intermediis et posticis subrectis.
Long., 2.60 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios ((7. F, Baker.)
Voisin de Centrophthalmtis clavatics Raffray des Nilghiri (India) par Tabsence d'epine infraoculaire qui est reduite a un tres petit tubercule mousse; elle en differe par les teguments lisses sur les elytres depourvus d'asp^rites setif eres ; les articles
IX. D, 5 Raffray: Catalogue des Pselaphides (Coleopteres) 455
8, 9 et 10 des antennes sont plus longs que larges, au lieu d'etre transversaux comme dans C clavatus; les carenules abdominales sont beaucoup plus courtes sur le 2® segment et bien moins dis- tantes entre elles; le prothorax aussi est different, retreci tout a fait en avant, avec les cotes ensuite presque droits jusqu'a la base qui est a peine retrecie.
Raphitreus bakeri sp. nov.
Oblongus, antice attenuatus, castaneus, palpis tarsisque tes- taceis, sat dense sed tenuiter pallide pubescens. Caput latitudine sua longius, antice attenuatum, postice rotundatum; tuberculo antennario magno, basi coarctato, profunde sulcato, in vertice f oveis duabus ; genis canthum inf raocularem f ormantibus, longe ciliatis. Oculi maximi, prominentes. Palporum articulis 2 apice incrassato et angulato, 3 triangulari, 4 elongato, apice valde acuminato, latere externo ad basin angulato, 2, 3 et 4 longe uniappendiculatis. Antennse elongates et crassae, articulis 1° cylindrico, 2 subovato, 3-8 minoribus et leviter transversis, clava magna, triarticulata, 10 transverso, 11 breviter ovato, basi truncato. Prothorax capite multo major, cordatus, convexus, latitudine sua paulo longior; f oveis tribus liberis, lateralibus majoribus antebasali oblonga. Elytra transversa, subdeplanata, ad basin leviter attenuata, humeris rotundatis sed obtuse elev- atis, basi bifoveata, stria dorsali medio abbreviata. Abdomen elytris ma jus, segmentis dorsalibus 1 utrinque toto carinato, 2 dimidio longiore, basi utrinque brevissime carinato. Pedes va- lidi; femoribus incrassatis; tibiis anticis leviter incurvis, medio extus inflatis, intermediis ante apicem leviter sinuatis, posticis vix incurvis.
$ : Antennarum clava ma j ore, articulo 9 obconico, latitudine sua paululum longiore. Metasternum impressum.
2 : Antennarum clava minore, articulo 9 subquadrato. Me- tasternum simplex.
Long., 2 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker).
Cette espece differe de R. speratus Sharp du Japon et de R. dentimamis Raffr. de TAnnam, Tonkin et Singapore, par Tabsence totale de ponctuation. Je suis tres heureux de dedier cette espece a Monsieur C. F. Baker qui Ta decouverte.
Dacnotillus simoni Raffray.
TmesiphoTTus simoni Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 495. Cueva de San Mateo (Montalvan).
NEW PHILIPPINE HYMENOPTERA '
By J. C. Crawford (Washington, D, C.)
CHALCIDID^
Leucospis pulchellus sp. nov.
Female. — Length, 7 mm. Black, the first 3 abdominal seg- ments red ; spot on front of scape, transverse band on anterior edge of pronotum and 1 near posterior margin, a small spot on middle of propodeum at apex, a line on middle of metapleurse, a small spot on each side of first abdominal segment, a line on each side of third segment, a line on anterior tibiae outwardly, middle tibiae except narrow brown stripe inwardly, a line on upper outer margin of hind femora which at base extends downward to first tooth on lower margin, a line on hind tibise outwardly, and on first 2 joints of hind tarsi, ivory yellow; face finely vertically rugulose, above antennal fossa more coarsely transversely ru- gulose; on each side of face a swelling just below upper end of antennal fossa; pro- and mesonotum closely coarsely punctured, punctures on mesoscutum arranged so that the interspaces in places form indistinct transverse rugse ; metanotum, propodeum, and pleurae with punctures similar to those on mesonotum ; propo- deum with median and lateral longitudinal carinae; wings dark brown; lower margins of hind femora with a tooth followed apicad by 2 or 3 much longer ones, then several smaller semif used teeth; abdomen closely punctured, the punctures on the first segment sparse, separated from each other by about two or more times a puncture width; ovipositor reaching almost to base of third abdominal segment, the groove for its reception not quite reaching base of segment; the second abdominal segment me- dially longitudinally carinate, the first segment toward apex exceedingly indistinctly carinate, being more angulate than carinate.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18401, United States National Museum.
Leucospis bakeri sp. nov.
Female. — ^Length, about 7 mm. Black, with red and yellow markings, the ovipositor not reaching the base of the third ab-
' Proof read by C. F. Baker. 130422 4 457
458 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
dominal segment, the apical two-thirds of which is deeply fur- rowed for its reception; head, thorax, and abdomen coarsely rugoso-punctate, the head black, the antennae ferruginous, dusky above, the scape yellow; pronotum with 2 broad yellow stripes, the anterior margin reddish, the 2 yellow stripes separated by a black stripe bordered with reddish; posterior margin almost hyaline, slightly tinged with reddish; pronotum with 2 trans- verse carinse, the anterior one short, at about the middle of the black stripe, the posterior one at the middle of the posterior yellow stripe and extending to the lateral margins; mesonotum black with the lateral margins yellow, and a large subquadrate reddish spot on the disk extending to the apex of the scutum; anteriorly the corners of this reddish spot are yellow ; scutellum with the apical margin narrowly reddish and just cephalad of this a transverse yellow mark ; somewhat U-shaped ; metanotum with a semicircular carinated medial elevation, this apically with a median depressed area, carinated at sides, elevation projecting over propodeum slightly at middle ; metanotum medially reddish and with a median yellow spot; propodeum coarsely punctured and with a median longitudinal carina; wings infuscated, more so along anterior margins, near apex with a darker spot ; tegulae and propectus reddish; metapleurse yellow; coxae black, the mid ones yellowish anteriorly at apex ; hind coxae with a large yellow basal spot above and 1 below at apex; fore and mid femora black, with the apical part yellow, their tibiae yellow each with a brown stripe behind, that on the mid tibiae small ; hind femora outwardly black with the upper margin yellow and a large yellow spot below at base ; lower margin with a large triangular tooth near middle and distad of this about 6 small teeth ; first abdominal segment with 2 large yellow spots, second segment transverse, yellow except apical margin, third segment near middle with a yellow band which laterally widens posteriorly and reaches the apical margin of segment; fourth segment with 2 small spots, fifth with 2 larger spots, first, second, and third segments basad of the furrow for the ovipositor with a median longitudinal carina.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18402, United States National Museum.
Pareniaca browni sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 3.5 mm. Black, the head and thorax coarsely rugoso-punctate, the antennae and fore and mid legs, except coxae, ferruginous ; antennae dusky at tips ; hind legs, ex-
IX, D, 6 Crawford: Neiu Philippine Hymenoptera 459
cept the whitish tarsi, black ; first joint of f unicle slightly longer than second, the pedicel about as long as these combined ; wings almost hyaline, very faintly dusky; first segment of abdomen longer than broad, with 4 dorsal carinse, second segment with 4 basal carinse, these not as long as the first segment and extend- ing less than one-sixth the length of the segment, second seg- ment near apex with a punctured area on each side; following segments punctured at the sides.
Male. — Length, about 3 mm. Similar in color and structure to the female, but the first joint of the f unicle shorter than the second ; wings slightly more dusky than in the female ; the petiole longer and more slender, the 4 dorsal carinse more prominent; second segment with about 7 or 8 short carinse.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Brown, S.J.). Type No. 18403, United States National Museum.
Pareniaca bakeri sp. nov.
Female, — Length, about 3 mm. Black, the head and thorax coarsely ruguso-punctate ; antennse brown, the first joint of f uni- cle slightly longer than broad, the pedicel slightly longer than first and second joints of f unicle combined ; wings hyaline, slightly whitish; fore and mid legs dark brown, the femora lighter at bases and the tibise lighter at apices, their tarsi testaceous ; hind legs, except the testaceous tarsi, black ; first segment of abdomen transverse, with 4 dorsal carinse; second segment with 8 or 9 carinse which are about three times as long as first segment, but not reaching middle of the segment; second segment with a punctured area near apex on each side; following segments with similar small areas.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Brotvn, S. J.). Type No. 18404, United States National Museum.
The type and one paratopotype were collected by R. E. Brown, S. J. ; two paratypes from Los Banos were collected by Prof. C. F. Baker, after whom the species is named.
PERILAMPID^
Perilampus luzonensis sp. nov.
Female. — Length, 5 mm. Green, face with a strong carina extending down to level of insertion of antennse, the space be- tween the carina and the eyes coarsely punctured, sides of face below coarsely punctured, inner margins of parapsidal areas with a broad smooth band ; scutellum slightly longer than mesoscutum,
460 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
the apex very slightly emarginate; legs green, the tarsi whitish testaceous; abdomen smooth, sides of the second segment very finely indistinctly punctured.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker) . Type No. 18405, United States National Museum.
Perilampus punctiventris sp. nov.
Male, — Length, about 3.5 mm. Head and thorax obscurely greenish, the middle lobe of mesonotum almost black, the ab- domen black; face with a carina on each side which meet back of anterior ocellus ; in front of the lateral ocelli and centrad of the carinas along their upper ends a few fine punctures ; between the ocelli the surface rugose, back of them transversely so; mesoscutum including outer part of parapsidal areas coarsely rugoso-punctate ; broad inner part of parapsidal areas smooth, polished, posteriorly this area with a few fine wrinkles and along the inner margin a row of large shallow punctures; wings hyaline; legs green, the tarsi testaceous; abdomen with the first segment, except basally and a broad apical margin, closely, finely punctured ; second segment at base with similar punctures.
Female. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18406, United States National Museum.
The punctures on the abdomen distinguish this species.
PTEROMALID^
Cercocephala bakeri sp. nov.
Female, — Length, about 1 mm. Head and thorax light red- dish-brown with a slight metallic sheen ; abdomen almost black, with aeneous and purple reflections ; antennae testaceous, the last 2 joints of the funicle and the club dark brown; funicle 6-jointed, the first joint quadrate ; pedicel as long as first 2 joints of funicle combined; entire insect, except the finely rugulose propodeum, smooth and polished; wings with a distinct violaceous luster, beyond the base of the marginal vein slightly infuscated; stig- mated spot on submarginal vein with a tuft of dark hairs; legs testaceous; sheaths of ovipositor exposed about one-fourth the length of abdomen, whitish, with dark tips.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F, Baker), Type No. 18407, United States National Museum.
Described from 4 specimens reared by Professor Baker from bark containing borers. This species differs from the de-
IX. D, 6 Crawford: New Philippine Hymenoptera 461
scribed species of the genus Cercocephala except elegans by having a tuft of dark hairs on the stigmated spot on the submarginal vein, and from C. {Chxtospila) elegans Westwood in having 6 joints in the funicle.
ELASMID^
Elasmus elegans sp. nov.
Female, — Length, about 2.25 mm. Head and thorax blue- green ; abdomen elongate, somewhat longer than head and thorax combined, brown, with the basal third both above and below reddish, and with the extreme base above green ; face with large, scattered punctures, those laterad of the antennal fossa arranged in 2 vertical rows; antennae long, scape whitish, rest of an- tennae brown, segments of funicle almost subequal in length, the first indistinctly longer than the pedicel, the last fully twice as long as widest diameter, and about two-thirds as long as club ; mesoscutum rather closely punctured, each puncture having a dark-colored hair; scutellum finely and indistinctly reticu- lated; metanotum yellow, with a hyaline border; wings slightly dusky; hairs on legs black; fore legs, including coxae, whitish, the coxae beneath with 4 long setae; tibiae with longitudinal rows of hairs ; mid coxae and femora, except their apices, black ; rest of mid legs whitish, the tibiae and basal joints of tarsi with longitudinal rows of hairs; basal half of hind coxae and apical half of hind femora almost black, rest of hind legs whitish ; the tibiae behind with rows of hairs arranged in diamond-shaped figures; basal joints of hind tarsi with longitudinal rows of hairs.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18408, United States National Museum.
This species resembles E. philippinensis Ashmead, but that species is much smaller, has the joints of the funicle much shorter, the hind coxae except extreme apices dark, the hind femora entirely dark, etc.
Elasmus lutens sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 2.25 mm. Yellow; ocellar triangle, a large triangular spot on rear of head extending from top of eyes almost to their bases and connected along carinate edge of occiput with ocellar spot, the axillae, a small spot on side of propodeum, a large spot covering the upper part of hind coxae, spots on the sides of abdominal segments at apices, all brown; toward apex of abdomen the spots become larger so
462 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
that the last 2 segments are almost entirely brown; rest of the dorsal surface of abdomen light brownish; face with large scattered punctures ; antennae brown, the scape yellowish white, its apex brown, the first joint of funicle slightly longer than ped- icel ; mesopleurse centrally dark brown, shading off into lighter above and below; bristles on hind tibise arranged in diamonds.
Male, — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18409, United States National Museum.
Elasmus ashmeadi sp. nov.
Length, about 1.5 mm. Yellow; the head above insertion of antennae, pronotum medially, a narrow stripe on middle of meso- scutum widening caudad, scutellum, propodeum, base of abdo- men, and spot on hind coxae above, green; head with large, scat- tered punctures; antennae brown, the scape whitish, the first joint of the funicle longer than the pedicel ; triangular plate on , metanotum yellow at base, rest of the plate hyaline ; mesopleurae largely brownish; legs, including coxae, yellowish white, the bristles on the hind tibiae arranged in diamonds.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Broivn, S, J.). Type and only specimen No. 18410, United States National Museum.
EULOPHID^
Entedon magnus sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 3.25 mm. Head and thorax bronzy, the propodeum and abdomen at base bluish green, rest of ab- domen aeneous; head and thorax coarsely reticulately rugose, on rear of head finer and more shallow, on middle of mesoscutum at rear coarser; antennae brown, scape whitish, first joint of funicle twice as long as pedicel, second joint slightly longer than pedicel; propodeum smooth, shiny, with a median carina, on each side of which is a narrow depression running to the short neck; lateral grooves on propodeum with cross carinae, the grooves somewhat resembling a chain of pits ; coxae aeneous, femora and basal half of tibiae brown, the knees, apical halves of tibiae, and tarsi, except apical joint, whitish.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos and Mount Maquiling (C. F. Baker). Type, from Los Bailos, No. 18411, United States National Museum.
Described from 4 females from the type locality and 1 from
IX, D, 5 Craivford: New Philippine Hymenoptera 463
Mount Maquiling ; 2 of the paratopotypes and the specimen from Mount Maquiling have the sculpture at rear of mesoscutum no coarser than the other.
Entedon manilensis sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 2 mm. Green, more brilliantly so on propodeum and base of abdomen; apical margin of third ad- dominal segment and beyond, purple; head and thorax coarsely reticulately rugose, sculpture on rear of head much finer ; anten- nae brown, pedicel and base of funicle slightly greenish, the scape, except apex, whitish, first joint of funicle about one and one-half times as long as pedicel, second joint of funicle slightly longer than pedicel, the club about as long as first joint of funicle; propodeum smooth, shiny with a median carina reach- ing the short neck, lateral furrows with cross carinae; a short spine on each side of propodeum back of the spiracle; coxae aeneous, femora, except tips, brown, tibiae and tarsi whitish, tibiae near base with brown annulus, that on anterior tibiae occupying about half the tibiae, on mid and hind tibiae not reach- ing beyond basal third.
Male, — Unknown.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Brown, S. J.). Type No. 18412, United States National Museum.
This species resembles E. magnus, but is much smaller, the first joint of the funicle, is shorter, and tibiae have a narrow brown annulus instead of the basal half or more being brown.
Euplectrus flavescens sp. nov.
Female, — Length, 2.5 mm. Yellow; middle lobe of mesoscu- tum, middle of scutellum, sides of axillae and of metanotum, most of propodeum and pleurae reddish honey color ; the abdomen more or less suffused with the same color; antennae brown, the scape and pedicel testaceous; joints of the funicle elongate, the first over twice as long as the pedicel, the club not longer than the last joint of funicle; pronotum and mesonotum irregularly rugose; the rugae on scutellum finer than on meso- scutum, scutellum at base with 2 large foveae; metanotum with a median longitudinal carina and on each side of it about 2 similar but indistinct carinae, the apical margin subcarinate; basal lip of propodeum strongly produced; propodeum with a median and lateral carina, being areolated ; legs yellow, the hind coxae slightly tinged with reddish, first joint of hind tarsi almost one and one-half times as long as second joint; longer spur
464 The Philippine Journal of Science
of hind tibia reaching to apex of second joint of tarsi, the shorter spur about three-fourths as long as first joint.
Male, — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18413, United States National Museum.
The complete areolation of the propodeum distinguishes this from the other species of the Oriental Region in which yellow is the predominating color.
Euplectrus nigosus sp. no v.
Female. — Length, about 2.5 mm. Black, the coxae dark brown, the femora reddish honey color, rest of legs testaceous ; antennae light brown, the scape whitish, joints of the funicle elongate, the first almost twice as long as pedicel, the club slightly longer than last joint of funicle; pronotum and mesoscutum finely rugulose, the axillae finely reticulately lineolate, the scutellum coarsely irregularly reticulately rugose, the apical margin sub- carinate, metanotum with a short median carina extending cau- dad about half the length of metanotum then dividing and each branch extending laterad then caudad again, making a median apical fovea; propodeum with a median carina, the basal lip not very strongly produced; first joint of hind tarsi not quite one and one-half times as long as second, longer spur of hind tibiae reaching almost to apex of second tarsal joint, shorter spur reaching about to base of apical fourth of first joint of tarsi.
Male. — Unknown .
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18414, United States National Museum.
This species resembles E. bicssyi Crawford from Sumatra, but in that species the metanotum is smooth, the sculpture of the middle lobe of the mesoscutum is similar to, and almost as strong as, the sculpture of the scutellum, being in both cases reticu- lately rugose, whereas in E. rugostis the sculpture of the middle lobe of the mesoscutum is much finer and of a different type than that on the scutellum.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology, AND Anthropology
Vol. IX NOVEMBER, 1914 No. 6
THE IGOROTS OF LEPANTO
Compiled and edited by James A. Robertson
(Librarian, Philippine Library, Manila, P. /.)
Nine plates and 1 text figure
INTRODUCTION
In order that local historical data regarding the Philippine Islands, which exist only in scattered manuscripts or in oral tradition, might be preserved, the Governor-General of the Phil- ippines, under date of January 26, 1911, directed each provincial governor to *'issue instructions to each nucnicipal presidente to call together the old men in each and every barrio, sitio, or arrahal in his municipality ^ and obtain from them and from any documents in their possession the entire history of such community, in so far as may be possible/' Each report was to embody, among other things, the present official name of the
^ In Spanish times, each province was divided into units termed pueblos. The present units of the provinces are called municipalities or townships — the latter name being used in Mountain Province. Each of these divisions is presided over by an official known as the preside/.t or presidente. He is assisted by a vice-president or vice-presidente, by a secretary and treas- urer or secretary-treasurer, and by a body of councilors or concejales. Each municipality or township consists of a number of small communities, known as barrios. The barrio may be likened somewhat to the ward of a city, except that many barrios are compact communities distantly sepa- rated from the rest of the larger unit. The chief official of the barrio is termed lieutenant or ieniente. Many barrios are in turn divided into small districts called sitios, although this term has no legal significance. Arrabal is a term used to designate the suburbs of a large town. It is used at times in the Philippines to denote a section of the municipality, and is itself divided into barrios. The terms comandancia and distrito relate to military not civil government. See Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905), 1, 57-59.
130429 • 465
466 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
barrio or other division, its native name and meaning, date of its establishment, the original families, lists of officials, old stories or legends, and the history of any old abandoned barrios or other divisions. The material was to be forwarded to the Executive Secretary of the Philippine Government and by him to be deposited in the Philippine Library — a Government in- stitution which bears the same relation to the Philippine Islands as the Library of Congress does to the United States.
Of course, it is recognized that some of the material gathered in this way is apt to be wrong, misleading, or fragmentary. Much of it can, however, be checked by known written history, while often one manuscript will check or correct another, and frequently common sense will act as the best guide as to what is to be received and what rejected. On the other hand, many little points that have entirely escaped writers may be preserved. The generation from which this material was obtained is rapidly passing away, and the new generation that is taking its place is losing, almost insensibly, a part of the storied traditions.
A considerable number of the 38 provinces have already com- plied fully with the order, and about 600 manuscripts of varying degrees of excellence have been added to the library. Some are written in the native languages, some in Spanish, and some in English. Many of those written in languages other than English are accompanied by English translations. Among the manu- scripts are those for Lepanto subprovince, a part of Mountain Province of northern Luzon.^ These were gathered under the
^ The evolution of the present Mountain Province is interesting, and may be followed in various Acts of the Philippine Commission. During the latter part of the Spanish regime, the 7 subprovinces now composing Mountain Province were known as distritos or comandancias, or formed part of another province. Act No. 410, enacted May 28, 1902, provided for the organization of a provincial government in the territory comprised in the comandancias of Lepanto, Bontoc, and Amburayan, and the terri- tory lying between Abra, Cagayan, and Bontoc not included within the limits of any province, and providing for justices of the peace in this territory and in Nueva Vizcaya Province [Public Laws. Manila (1903), 1, 970-972]. The new province was called Lepanto-Bontoc. Bontoc sub- province contained certain lands not before assigned. The other two sub- provinces followed closely the limits of the former comandancias. Act No. 411, enacted on the same date as the above [Public Laws (1903), 1, 972], provided for the establishment of civil governments in the townships and settlements of the province. Act No. 768, Manila, 1904, enacted May 26, 1903 [Public Laws (1904), 2, 422, 423], fixed the boundary lines between Amburayan and Lepanto subprovinces and Benguet Province. Act No. 867, enacted September 5, 1903 [Public Laws. Manila (1905), 3], declared the Mountain Judicial District to consist of the Provinces of
IX. D. 6 Robertson: The Igorois of Lepanto 467
supervision of Mr. W. A. Miller, formerly lieutenant-governor of Lepanto. The various manuscripts were all v^ritten in the Ilocano language, with the exception of that for Mancayan, generally by the presidente or secretary of the township, at the dictation of the old men, and all w^ere translated into English, evidently by a Filipino in the office of the subprovince in Cervantes. There are reports for all the 12 townships of the subprovince; namely, Ampusungan, Angaki, Bagnen, Banaao, Banco, Besao, Cayan, Cervantes, Concepcion, Mancayan, Saban- gan, and San Emilio. 'The material for Banco/' says Beyer, 'Ms quite accurately written, and is more valuable than all that pre- cedes it.'' The people of Lepanto belong in general to the wild Malayan tribe called Igorots, who are of the same stock as those of the adjoining Benguet subprovince.^ In as much as the
Lepanto-Bontoc, Benguet, and Nueva Vizcaya. Act No. 926, enacted Octo- ber 7, 1903 [Public Laws (1905), 3, 62-77], extended land laws already enacted for other provinces to Lepanto-Bontoc. Act No. 955, enacted Octo- ber 23, 1903 [Public Laws (1905), 3, 110-111], provided a method of taxa- tion, in accordance with Act No. 387 [Public Laws (1903), 1, 914-915]. Act No. 1396, enacted September 14, 1905 [Public Laws (1907), 5], pro- vided for the organization of provincial governments in all the provinces of the Islands, other than Moro Province. All parts of Acts Nos. 387, 410, and 566, at variance with this Act, were repealed. The capital of Lepanto- Bontoc was declared to be at Cervantes. Act No. 1397, enacted September 14, 1905 [Public Laws (1907), 5], provided for the establishment of local civil government among non-Christians. The subject of taxation received considerable attention in the above Act. By Act No. 1642 [Public Laws (1908), 6] the subprovinces of Kalinga and Apayao were established and boundaries fixed. Act No. 1876, enacted August 18, 1908 [Public Laws (1910), 7, 131-134], created Mountain Province, with the 7 subprovinces of Benguet, Amburayan, Lepanto, Bontoc, Ifugao (formerly comandancia of Quiangan) Kalinga, and Apayao. The boundaries of Lepanto are still somewhat vague. The Spaniards located it between 16° 45' and 17° 15' north latitude, and between 124° 10' and 124° 45' of longitude east of Madrid. Each of the 7 subprovinces is governed by a lieutenant-governor. Legislation for the province pertains to the Philippine Commission alone. ' Since early Spanish days, much confusion has existed regarding the Igorots, and the term Igorot, which simply means hillmen, has been used to designate several distinct peoples. The confusion has been marked with regard to the inhabitants of the districts (now subprovinces) of Benguet and Lepanto who are apparently of one stock, and those of Bontoc who differ from the former. Beyer \_This Journal, Sec. D (1913) , 8, 95] says definitely: "The Bontoks are sometimes wrongly called Igorots, but have no more right to that name than have the Ifugaos. They are a distinct people, occupying a part of the subprovince of Bontok." No adequate classification of the tribes of northern Luzon has yet been adopted, although Worcester has done considerable in clearing up old confusions. A classification based on dialect might perhaps answer all requirements. Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 834] says: 'The line between the territory of the Bontoc Igorots and
468'
The Philippine Journal of Science
1S14
AMBURAYAN\ Mt^ngun^M^ y^k^^
^Mt.Tun6layafl^t^. , ^^
/T4 ' M' /
Mt.Badan^vi/ ■ ji|t.Data/
%
Mt.LusonA
V
1 1 F U G \A O
A^AS^' ''l:y^J: j''^- ;
-; /
Fig. 1. A part of Mountain Province, Luzon.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 469
information contained in the documents for Lepanto was ob- tained mainly from people who, although in the lower grades of civilization, are called "wild,'' in order to distinguish them as non-Christians from the civilized Christian Malayan races prop- erly called Filipinos,* the essential parts relating to their customs and beliefs are here reproduced. The few stories recounted, fragmentary as they are, have come down by oral tradition through many generations; most of the practices described are still in force, although they are bound to disappear through contact with higher civilization. As will be seen by citations in footnotes, the present culture of the Igorots is not very dif- ferent from that of some of the Filipinos at the time of the Spanish conquest.
It is hoped that these documents will prove an addition to what has already been published about the northern peoples of Luzon by well-known writers, such as Worcester, Jenks, and Beyer, if in no other way than as a basis for comparison. Very little has been written about the Igorots of Lepanto, and little real ethnological work has been done among them. This paper is in no sense the result of personal investigation among the Igorots, and the only claim that I make for it is as editor and compiler. In editing these accounts I have considered of minor importance the orthographic peculiarities of the partially English-educated Filipino translator, interesting as these might be in a paper devoted exclusively to the study of English as learned in the Philippines, for I fear lest the phonetic spelling detract from the subject of prime importance. Most of the errors in spelling have, therefore, been silently corrected, a very few punctuation marks and capitals altered, and a few glaring grammatical errors corrected. Otherwise, the translator, when citations are made direct, is followed strictly. The material taken from the Mancayan manuscript, however, I translated
that of the Benguet-Lepanto Igorots is well defined, the first rancherias of the latter tribe on the north and west being Quinali, Besao, Payeo, Bagnen, Bangnitan, Data, Sabangan, Bonayan, Pingad, Gayan and Na- matec." He notes also (p. 851) that many Tinguians live among the Lepanto Igorots of Tiagan, Concepcion, and Angaki. The dialects spoken by the Igorots of Lepanto (p. 862) are known as Kankanai, in the southern part, and Katangnan, in the central and northern parts. Regarding their state of culture, Worcester (p. 850) says: *'A11 in all, the Benguet-Lepanto Igorots must be considered far more highly civilized than any other non- Christian northern Luzon tribe except the Tingians*' Beyer (ut supra, p. 97) implies that the Ifugaos are the most highly developed of the moun- tain peoples, or at least the most capable of development.
* Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905), 1, 22,
470 ^^^^ PhiUppi7ie Journal of Science i9i4
directly from the Spanish, as the translation furnished was very poor and inadequate. All editorial interpolations are inclosed in square brackets. Some at least of the numerous inclosures in parentheses appear to be explanations made by the translator from Ilocano to English. These are reproduced without com- ment. Excerpts from the manuscripts from the several town- ships are reproduced in alphabetical order, according to the name of the township, and in small type. Each document, or each part of each document, is signed with the marks and names of the old men consulted and by various officials. These are re- produced in no case. Considerable aid in annotation has been given by Mr. H. Otley Beyer of the Bureau of Science. All notes by him are marked with his name. Other aid has been given by Mr. Otto Scheerer of the University of the Philippines, by Mr. Luther Parker and others of the Bureau of Education, by Dr. Merton L. Miller of the Bureau of Science, and by Mr. Otis W. Barrett of the Bureau of Agriculture.
Lepanto subprovince (see map), obviously named from the celebrated battle, is bounded on the north by Abra subprovince (which belongs to Ilocos Sur), on the east by Bontoc and Ifugao subprovinces, on the south by Benguet subprovince, and on the west by Amburayan subprovince and Ilocos Sur Province. Perez (13) says that all the territories of Lepanto and Bontoc, and a great part of Abra, were formerly called Valle de Cayan, until Lepanto was declared an independent comandancia ^ in 1852. Various expeditions were made into the district. Luis Perez Dasmarinas and other officials, in their expeditions to Tuy, in the sixteenth century, and Quirante, in his gold-hunting semi- scientific expedition in 1624, probably entered the boundaries of the present subprovince. Governor Diego de Salcedo dis- patched an expedition to the mountains in 1665. But the early expeditions effected little. The expedition of 1836, dispatched by Governor Pedro Salazar, that of 1877, the earlier work in the Mission of Cayan, the mission work for some years after 1881, and the military occupation beginning with 1852 accomplished more. The term Mission of Cayan comprehended the mission- ary labors for much of Lepanto. However, Christianity never gained more than a slight foothold among the Lepanto Igorots.
'See the early official guides published during the Spanish regime; also, Perez, Igorrotes. Manila (1902). The chief official of the comandancia was the comandante politico militar, who combined in himself all three functions of government.
j^. i^- R Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 471
For the years 1881 to 1886, the reports show 58 marriages, 253 baptized children, 83 baptized adults, and 85 deaths of converts. For the years 1886 to 1891, the numbers are, respectively, 179, 524, 597, and 364. As a result of the mission work, various schools were opened both for boys and for girls, while 7 private schools were maintained at one time by the Igorots. None of the schools, as was natural, came to any prominence. The Span- iards desired to exploit the mineral resources of the district, and although the operations of the Cantabro-Filipino company were rather extensive for some years the exploitation was not thorough. The capital of the district was shifted from Cayan to Cervantes by the Spaniards, and the latter pueblo (now township) was retained by the Americans as the capital on the change of Government. With the creation of Lepanto- Eontoc Province, and later of Mountain Province (see footnote 2), the district of Lepanto was made a subprovince.
No real systematic study has yet been made of Lepanto and its inhabitants, despite the early missions and the fact that Spanish contact was rather close after 1856 because of the mines, v/hile during the American regime Cervantes has gained a new importance because of its location. This is the time for a thor- ough ethnographical survey of the subprovince to be made, for customs are insensibly changing, and if ethnological study be delayed too long much will be lost. According to Worcester, the number of Lepanto Igorots probably does not exceed 31,000. With them are found some Tinguians and Bontocs, while the enterprising Ilocanos are pushing steadily into the Igorot terri- tory. Already the pure culture is passing away, and the study of the real Igorot of the subprovince is becoming more difficult. The people are being raised to a higher level, and new standards are being created, for the march of progress cannot be ob- structed. Within a few years, the study now possible cannot be made (Plate I).
AMPUSUNGAN "'
According to the manuscript, the township of Ampusungan belonged to the district of Benguet until 1902. It was known originally as Alacan. The Spaniards, on account of its sparse population, did not organize it as a town (pueblo) until 1878.
• Local civil government was provided for all the townships of Benguet Province, to which Ampusungan formerly belonged, by Act No. 48, enacted November 22, 1900. Act No. 768, enacted May 26, 1903, fixed the boun- daries of Benguet.
472 'J'he Philippine Journal of Science j^h
For many years the Spaniards were a source of terror to the people, who promptly deserted their homes whenever any of the gitardia civil ' appeared. The account of the customs of the inhabitants of Ampusungan is meager. It is as follows:
In the olden time our parents never used to make cafiaos'^ and during their whole lives never knew of any remedies for their sickness and a great number of them died because they knew of no remedy for their sickness; but one of the old men thought that caiiaos were good for anybody that was sick, so, therefore they used to have canaos if there was anybody among them that had any kind of sickness in order that their sick might become well. And when they had their canaos they used to take and kill any kind of animals and one of the old men would pray to the sun, moon, and stars and to his dead relatives, also to the anitos' in
^ The guardia civil (civil guard) of the Spanish regime was similar to the Philippine Constabulary of to-day. It was, however, a part of the regular army. It was named after a similar body in Spain. One regi- ment was stationed in northern Luzon. See also Worcester, Philippines, Past and Present. New York (1913), 1, 378-380.
'Canao, a feast. Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 850] says: "Sick- ness is attributed to anitos. Very few native medicines are employed in treating the sick and great reliance is placed in canaos, at which carabaos, cattle, pigs, or chickens, according to the wealth of the sick person, are killed." The cafiao is common throughout Mountain Province.
"Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 817] notes that the rather vague belief in the anito is widespread among the peoples of Mountain Province. The word, he points out, is used to designate a spirit, often that of a dead person, while the anito is at times represented by an image made of wood or by tying grass or leaves together. Of the anito or its representation aid is asked, and propitiatory ceremonies are performed to it. Belief in the anito is not, however, confined alone to the mountain peoples of north- ern Luzon. There is probably not a single people in the Philippines that does not now cherish, or that has not at some time in its history cher- ished, a belief in the anito. Even the Negritos near Floridablanca, Pam- panga, who are not Malayan, believe in the anito, but they probably acquired it from the Malayan people with whom they came in contact. Loarca in his Relacion [republished in both Spanish and English in Blair and Robertson, The Philippine Islands. Cleveland (1903-1909), 5], written about 1580, says of the Tagalogs of Manila (pp. 173-175) : ''They said that this Batala (the Tagalog deity) had many agents under him, whom he sent to this world to produce, in behalf of men, what is yielded here. These beings were called anitos , and each anito had a special office * * *. When the natives were asked why the sacrifices were offered to the anito, and not to the Batala, they answered that the Batala was a great lord, and no one could speak to him. He lived in the sky; but the anito, who was of such a nature that he came down here to talk with men, was to the Batala as a minister, and interceded for them. In some places, and espe- cially in the mountain districts, when the father, mother, or other relative dies, the people unite in making a small wooden idol, and preserve it. Accordingly there is a house which contains one hundred or two hundred
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 473
order that he might be safe from any disease: **Here is an animal that we sacrifice in order that all of you may unite in the same place and use it." That was the old man's prayer. As soon as this caiiao was over the sick man would feel better, and they say that the canao that they performed acted the same as medicine. This is our strong inheritance from our old men that serves as a reminder to us and that we cannot deny, and this will be handed down again to our children.
ANGAKI ^^
The township of Angaki comprehends the barrios of Angaki, Cayos, Malideg, Patiacang, Mabalili, and Suagayan. Accord- ing to the manuscript, Angaki was first inhabited in 1836. The first inhabitants came from two small settlements on the moun- tain just west of Angaki, but their fathers and grandfathers had gone thither from other places — a fact that proves that there was considerable movement among the mountain peoples. The first Christians came in 1884. The first gobernadorcillo^^ was appointed by Ramon Tajonera, governor of Abra Province,
of these idols. These images also are called anitos; for they say that when people die, they go to serve the Batala. Therefore they make sacri- fices to these anitos, offering them food, wine, and gold ornaments; and request them to be intercessors for them before the Batala, whom they regard as God.'' For other old citations regarding the anito, see Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 6, 146; 12, 181 (Chirino, Relacion, 1604); 40, 71-73 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 222, 223 (San Agustin's cele- brated letter, 1720); 40, 333-336 (San Antonio Chronicas, 1738-44). By the early Visayans the anito was known as diwata. Cf. Jenks, Pub. l\ 1. Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 196-200.
^"Angaki is described by Perez, Igorrotes, 93-107. It is 22 kilometers northwest from Cervantes and has a picturesque location amid small streams and cascades. The township has an abundance of good mineral waters. Considerable weaving was formerly carried on there. The mission established in Angaki was organized by Fray Antonio Blanco, O. S. A. During the Spanish regime a boys' school had a more or less precarious existence.
"Montero y Vidal, Archipielago Filipino. Madrid (1886), says of the gobernadorcillo : ''Certain native functionaries, improperly called goberna- dorcillos, exercise command in the towns; they correspond to the alcaldes and municipal judges of the Peninsula, and perform at once functions of judges and even of notaries, with definite powers. As assistants they elect several lieutenants and alguacils, proportionate in number to the inhab- itants. Those assistants together with three ex-gobernadorcillos, to whom are referred the duties of judges of cattle, fields, and police, constitute a sort of town council." The recompense was so small that the office was almost honorary, the duties were onerous, and the incumbent of the office ran the risk of annoyances, fines, and imprisonment. Notwithstanding these disadvantages the office was much sought after. The above is taken from Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 17, 329, 330,
474 "^he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
as a reward for guiding the Spanish soldiers into the mountains.^- Tajonera encouraged the people to plant rice, tobacco, and other products. The first taxes were paid in wax and baskets, but *'when Angaki began to grow rich, the people began to pay taxes at the rate of 12 centavos each, and in 1887 when Mr. Ramon Francia ^^ was the governor in Cervantes, we paid 50 centavos taxes each, until the revolt between the Spaniards and the Fi- lipinos occurred, and later we paid a contribution of 40 centavos each." The customs as related by the old men of the barrio of Angaki are as follows :
These were the customs of our forefathers when one of them wanted to get married.''*
When a young man sees a young woman to whom he wants to get mar- ried, he tells it to a married man whom he asks to go and speak to the parents of the woman. And if he goes and finds out that they both have the same affection, the woman's parents tell him the day on which the young man must bring a load of fuel to the house of his father-in-law; and then each of them must begin to help the other to do some kind of work. And if it takes them a year to do this, the parents of the man and woman make an agreement as to which one of them shall build a house for the married couple. And when they have straightened out their agree- ment they tell it to some old man ^° who must then m.ake an offering of the cafiao that will unite them.
^- For a description of Abra, now a part of Ilocos Sur Province, see Memoria descriptiva de la provincia de Abra, n. p., n. d.; Perez, Igorrotes, 271-285; and Buzeta y Bravo, Diccionario geografico estadistico, historico de las Islas Filipinas. Jose C. de la Peiia, Madrid (1850-51), 1. The official government guides for 1848-50 show Ramon Tajonera as coman- dante politico militar.
^^ Ramon Francia y Parajua, according to the Guia Oficial de Filipinas for 1897, was comandante politico militar at Cervantes in 1897. No earlier mention of him is found. One peso (100 centavos) Philippine currency equals 50 cents United States currency. The peso of Spanish times was worth considerably less.
" See also, post, other descriptions of marriage customs. Cf . with the accounts of these documents the old customs of Philippine peoples in Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 3, 61 (Relation by Legazpi, Cebu, July 7, 1569) ; 3, 166 (Conquest of Luzon, 1572) ; 5, 119, 153-161 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 181-184 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589) ; 16, 124-126 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609) ; 34, 320 (1580) ; 40, 88-91 (Colin, Labor evange- lica, 1663) ; 40, 167-171 (Combes, Historia, 1667) ; 43, 123, 124 (Martinez de Zuniga, Historia, 1803). See also Jenks, Puh. P. I. Ethnol, Surv. (1905), 1, 202,203.
^° Alonso Martin Quirante in Expeditions to the mines of the Igorotes, written in 1624 (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 274) says: "Their sages or philosophers are the oldest men or women, whom they respect and obey in an extraordinary manner, and most when they are occupied in the said feasts; for they say that then and even ordinarily those persons are wont to talk with the devil, who keeps them blinded."
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 475
Thus, when they are going to celebrate the wedding, the parties on both sides are first gathered together to see if the subsistence for the caiiao is sufficient; they then tell the old men to give a canao called begnas'^" in the old men's tribunal," and after that they go from house to house to sing a caiiao song, and after this, the wedding of the couple to be married is performed and then they will again have nine days of wedding prayer until it is finished; they should not work for three years [sic] and are not allowed to go to Candon ^^ or any place until the three years are completed.
In general the townsmen m.ust celebrate a feast called begnas" thrice a year and after each they are not allowed to work for a week if it is well done; if an earthquake or some other bad thing is predicted by the old men, they cannot work for a long time.
The immediate ancestors of the people of the barrio of Malideg migrated into the mountains from the Ilocano town of Santa Maria, in order to escape the baptism which the Spaniards were forcing on them and in order to live in accordance with Igorot customs. Until American rule, this barrio w^as a part of the town of Tubo;-" subsequently, it was separated from that town and placed within the jurisdiction of Lepanto. During Spanish times, the tax amounted to 12 centavos per person, and until the rule by the Katipunan -^ the same moderate sum was required for the registration of a license for a carabao or horse. The Americans increased the taxes to 1 peso for a personal cedula and a license of 1 peso for carabaos, horses, and cows.^^ t^^ cus- toms as related by the old men are as follows:
The custom we inherited from our fathers and grandfathers is that when a young man and woman want to get married there must be one
^*^ The religious ceremony called begnas corresponds to the Ifugao honga, which is a ceremony for the general welfare of a group of people. The group may be of any size, from a single family, or a party of travelers, to a village or a whole clan. Freedom from sickness and crop failure, health, happiness, and increase of rice, chickens, pigs, and children are the chief things prayed for at a honga. — Beyer.
" The building here referred to as a tribunal is the I^epanto structure cor- responding to the Bontoc pabafunan or fawL See Jenks, Pub. P. I, Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 50-52.— Beyer.
^^ A town of Ilocos Sur, with which the Igorots carried on considerable trade. Many other instances of taboo will be noticed in the following pages.
^^ See footnote 16. The ceremony here referred to is evidently for a large group of people. Small begnas are held frequently. — Beyer.
^° By Act No. 293, this rancheria was placed in Abra Province.
^^ Meaning the short period of control exercised over the mountain dis- tricts of Luzon by the Filipino insurgents. The expression is in general use in Mountain Province.
" In addition to the taxes named, there was also for the earlier years of American occupancy a slaughterhouse tax of from 25 to 50 centavos for each animal killed. The taxes are higher than the legitimate taxes during the Spanish regime.
476 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9u
or two men to stand as witnesses to arrange the matter. Whenever one of the married couple repents and makes a complaint to the old men or principales of the town, they are punished with a fine of 1 carabao, 30 bundles of palay," 6 pesos, 1 jar of basi or tapuyy'* and this fine of the one who repents will be eaten by the people and not given to one person only. But if the married couple are quiet and live in harmony, the parents of the woman or wife must kill a hog; they will also take some basi or tapuy accompanying the hog-'s meat which they give to the parents of the hus- band; the relatives of the husband's party gather together and come to eat and drink; and from the time when the wife's party gives these eatables to the husband's party during a day and a night, and the time is rather good and [there is] no earthquake no rainbow nor shower or even [though] it rains heavily if [the weather be] not stormy and no chicken is caught by a hawk in the town, and no person dies, and both parents of the married couple always keep their fire alive, the married couple will then have rather long lives and many children. They then perform the marriage and the four parties of the wife and husband are gathered together and the number of animals that are killed are 14 hogs and 18 chickens or hens. These must not be less then the number needed; and these hogs and chickens should be eaten at once in one day.^*^ There is another and last pamegyasan (feast for wedding) , such as haquid, lapsag, sungeh, and quinaoang^ and the cere- monies for these feasts are the killing of 10 hogs and 15 chickens; this is performed for the same wedding.
When anyone dies, the clothing we use must be arranged in the follow- ing order: When an old man dies, his clothing will be a blanket, a coarse G string and aboiigos, and if an old woman, the clothing will be lanwia, bayaongy bacguet, and a coarse blanket; but if a boy dies, his clothing might be a coarse blanket; if a boy dies, his clothing must be a coarse G string
'^ Palay is unhusked rice; the same as paddy.
" A manuscript conserved in the Philippine Library, and entitled "Me- moria aprocsimada del pais Ygorrote dependiente de la 1". Division Militar, escrita por los oficiales Dn. D. S. y D. C. G. en el mes de Febrero de 1843, describes the drink basi as follows: **They (the Igorots) cook a quantity of rice, pound up another like quantity, then mix the two thoroughly with well-pressed ginger ^nd with a quantity of hay that they call anuad. After the abovesaid is thoroughly mixed, they place it in a jar, the mouth of which they stop with leaves from some tree. Then they leave it under the house for about three days in order that it may ferment. At the end of that time they use it after putting water in it." Cf. Jenks [Pub, P. /. Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 144], who describes the making of basi quite differently. According to Jenks's account, basi is a "fermented beverage prepared from sugar cane," and no rice is used in its manufacture. The authors of the manuscript seem to have confused basi with tapuy. For the method used by the Bontocs in the manufacture of tapuy, see Jenks, ut supra, 144. Tapuy appears to be much like the bubud of the Ifugaos. [For a full account of the methods of manufacture and difference between basi, tapuy, and bubud, see This Journal, Sec. A (1912), 7, 97-119. — Beyer.]
"Compare with the eat-all feasts of the North American Indians de- scribed so often by the Jesuit missionaries in their famous relations. The two seem to have but one point in common ; namely, the religious necessity and significance of disposing of all of the food and drink.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 477
and bay-an; and if it is a girl her clothing must be lamma, bacguet, and lanlan; the ceremony to be made for the dead is the killing of 10 hogs and 15 chickens; we inherited these customs from our grandfathers and fathers.'*' (Plate III.)
The second custom that we inherited is that we must perform a general caiiao called begnas in the abong" (tribunal) just after planting and harvesting of the rice crop ;" if there are some to be married, they celebrate the wedding just after this cafiao; the ceremony observed for begnas is the killing of a dog, 2 hogs, and 3 chickens, and in the afternoon of the same day we string the meat not eaten on fine split bamboos, also the chicken and dog; there are as many of them as the number of houses in our settlement; on the third day we again take a hog to be killed to the same abong, and all the people in that settlement must be gathered together, and the meat must be divided among them to be distributed to our houses for the performance of a caiiao for the hog or chicken; not one of us is allowed to go to the country to work during seven days, and no one can come into our town not even anyone who has some letters to bring us unless we let him come in; we inherited this custom from our fathers and they
*' The abongos is a headband or turban. The bayaong is a woman^s striped skirt, ornamented with conventional designs, and made only in Lepanto. — Beyer.
Jenks [Pub, P. /. Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 79, 80] describes the clothing of the Bontocs as follows: "The burial clothes of a married man are the los-adan, or blue anito-figured burial robe, and a breechcloth of beaten bark, called *chi-nang-ta.' In the coffin are placed a fa-a, or blue cotton breech- cloth made in Titipan, the fan-cha-la, a striped blue-and-white cotton blanket, and the to-chong, a foot-square piece of beaten bark or white cloth which is laid on the head. A married woman is buried in a kay-in, a particular skirt made for burial in Titipan, and a blue-bordered waist or la-ma. In the coffin are placed a burial girdle, wa-kis, also made in Titi- pan, a blue-and-white-striped blanket called bay-a-ong, and the to-chong, the small cloth or bark over the hair. * * * With the men are buried, besides the things interred with the married men, the basket-work hat, the basket-work sleeping hat, the spear, the battle-ax, and the earrings if any are possessed. * * * In addition to the various things buried with the married woman, the unmarried has a sleeping hat. Babes and children up to 6 or 7 years of age are buried in the sementera [that is, field] wrapped in a crude beaten-bark mantle. This garment is folded and wrapped about the body, and for babes, at least, is bound and tied close about them.** See also Jenks, A. Anthrop. (1904), n. s., 6, No. 5; Perez, Pub, P. L Ethnol. Surv. (1904), 3, 237; and Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 30.
" Aboiig, or abung, is the universal name throughout northern Luzon for a long, low dwelling house, built either directly on the ground or at a slight elevation above it. — Beyer.
"See Barton, This Journal, Sec. D (1911), 6, 81-103; and Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 103-105. Superstitions in regard to planting and harvesting are very common in the Philippines. Miss Emma Yule, a teacher in the Manila High School, has gathered together from her students many of the common superstitions regarding the planting, care, and har- vesting of rice. This is entitled. Some superstitions and customs of the Filipino farmer, and is soon to be published.
478 ^^^<2 Philippine Journal of Science 1914
inherited it from the grandfathers of our grandfathers, and thus we signed it and put our cross at the end of the names of those who cannot read or write.
The ancestors of the inhabitants of the barrio of Patiacang are traced by the manuscript to 1793, when they "went to a place called Balaoa, west of Santa Lucia in Ilocos Sur." The infidel Igorots were compelled to pay a tax for the benefit of living in the town and to promise to aid the Christians should harm threaten from other Igorots. In 1840, when a census or tax list of the people of Patiacang was made, the Spaniards appointed several officials in the barrio. In 1908, the barrio was organized under the American Government. No customs or beliefs are recorded.
The story of the barrio of Mabalili is as follows :
We, the inhabitants of the barrio of Mabalili, in the limits of the town- ship of Angaki, Mountain Province, have written out this history of the customs we used and how we lived in the ancient times. The first people who cleared and formed this place into a town were Guilalo, Ao-aoiden, and Balugong; they and their wives came from Sumade; they cleared these places and planted camotes, aha, maize, bananas, and squashes, which they used for their food, and when they had increased in number, Guilalo and Amasan moved to the other side, called Tube, clearing the same, and when some other people from other towns came to join them, they thought of turning the land that would be watered from the brooks into good but small rice fields; the boundary of our town is close to the mountain called Tirad on the south and touches the foot of the mountain called Tubba. The custom of marrying a young man and a young woman is first that they make an agreement and they must tell their agreement to the old men or to the principales,^^ and they [that is, the old men or principales] go to the houses of the parents of the girl and boy to witness the agreement; the [acts of the] witnesses are [that] the principales or the old men eat etag (salted pork) ; but, if at the last moment there should be one of the mar- riage couple who wishes to change his mind or to dissolve their marriage, we punish her or him with 25 (anything counted to that number) as was our custom in ancient times until now. Thus after the marriage of the couple has been witnessed, first, the husband goes to find fuel and brings it with him to the house of his parents-in-law and after that the wife gets a jar of water and takes it with her to the house of her parents-in-law also; as to their building they kill a hen, and if the hen that they kill (by beating the body of the hen with a stick or anything else until the hen dies) has a good and satisfactory gall, we inform our town mates; and everyone who comes to help them, must bring with him some cogon or bamboo that will be added to the materials that they are preparing for the building;
^ In the Filipino town, during the Spanish regime, the principalia was a class made up of those who had held the office of gobernadorcillo and cabeza de barangay. The members of the class were known as principales. Among the mountain peoples, the chiefs and often the old men form the principalia.
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 479
and after the house is built, we kill a hen and then cook it mixed with etag (salted pork) ; but when they are going to live in the house they mang- mang '° (to kill a chicken with a stick) a chicken in the stove inside of the house, and if the liver is all right they then stay in the house doing nothing for three days and then again kill a chicken in a fireplace outside of the house; but when they want to go to the country to work and the liver is all right, they again kill one hog in the fireplace outside of the house, and the meat of that hog will be given to those who come as their guests; and at the third day they must perform a canao called saguepsep in the house using one chicken; and after seven days of oayied (canao) they again baquidan hogs (the hogs are put in a frame called baquidan as required in the canao); 2 hogs and 2 chickens are needed in this canao; the hogs must be 1 female and 1 male ; and then the chickens are put between them, and no one is allowed to go as far as or to the places where the Ilocanos live for a month, during which they will not do any kind of work.
Our customary feast which we often used to offer to God so that He may let us live longer is a general canao. The ceremony that we make in this canao is the killing of a hog in the country, and when we return home we must take 1 hog to the abong in which we are gathered together, and after this we must go from house to house to agdao-es (to ask for a hen from each house and kill it, after which the meat is strung with a fine split bamboo and distributed among the houses) a hen of those who have chickens and wish to offer something to God; this is not compulsory if a man has no chicken. After the said dao-es we must perform 2 cafiaos called libaya and sagepsep in the abong, and the ceremony observed is the killing of 1 pig and 1 hen inside of the abong, and if the livers of the two are satisfactory and puffed up ^^ then we can go to the country to work after seven days. This must be done yearly for we ought to follow the customs which we inherited from our forefathers. Since the first time when our town was inhabited by the original dwellers, the chief ruler was called campoy^' and each man had to pay a tax of 8 centavos. In that time the Spanish tobacco graders were called rulers ; there was then also a meas- uring of tobacco.^' Both men and women had to pay taxes of 25 centavos each, and when the Spanish priests were scattered around, each man and woman had to pay taxes of 50 centavos, but in the year 1901, when the Katipunan was in control of the Islands, each man contributed only 20
'° MaiTg-mang means to view or to look at. In this case, the author means that they will kill a chicken and look at its gall to learn the omen. Such metaphorical uses of mang-mang are common. — Beyer. See also Jenks, Pub. P, L Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 200, 208, 209.
" The manner of reading the omen from a chicken's gall is the same among all of the Igorot, Bontoc, and Ifugao peoples. If the gall bladder is full of liquid and has a smooth surface the omen is good, but if it is empty and the surface wrinkled the omen is bad. — Beyer.
^^ From maestre de campo, the title of a Spanish military officer of high rank.
" Governor Basco de Vargas established the government monopoly over tobacco in the Philippines in 1781. At first this resulted advantageously, but it was only a forced benefit both to people and government, and soon the evils of the monopoly became apparent. It was finally repealed in 1881.
480 "^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i»i4
centavos; and in 1903, we, the men, had to pay taxes of 100 centavos; in 1904, we had to pay a cedula tax of 1 peso, and road tax of 2 pesos — in all, 3 pesos. Besides these there is another tax yearly ever since the United States of America took control of the Islands.
We have also to relate in this section our custom when a young man marries a young woman, in order that they may be married; the relatives of both sides must be all gathered together and must make their customary ceremony for a wedding; they surround a coobran (jar) of tapuy with pieces of wood and erect a bebe (a piece of log) at the door of the house, and the ceremony that they perform is the killing of 5 hogs and some chickens; and after this wedding they cannot go very far away from home for a year. But when they have a child they perform a caiiao called bay as as a galut (clothing) of their babe, and the ceremony that they must perform in this cafiao is the killing of 10 hogs besides some chickens used for their habitual offering that we inherited from our forefathers. And this is the result and end of the offering as to our ways and living at Mabi- lili, but in order that the position of our place might be seen, we will mark out the rivers, brooks, and mountains."
The barrio of Suagayan was named from oaig (brook), so called from a river on its eastern side. Customs are described as follows :
The custom of the forefathers in the ancient times when the young men and women married was a peculiar one; they did not get married (as the Christians do), but they were committed to two old men who witnessed their marriage. And they [that is, the old men] decided the day on which they must celebrate the wedding, in order that the husband and wife may live together in the same house. If one of the married couple wishes to be divorced " from the other, a fine of 1 carabao and punishment of 25 strokes is imposed upon him or her; this was the law of our forefathers in the ancient times. The organization of this village was quite good for we compelled all the lazy fellows to work and plant certain crops to feed themselves with. And thus our custom is that we must perform a caiiao called begnas (just before planting and harvesting the crops) and two after the performance of begnas. We perform another caiiao the ceremony in which is the killing of 1 hog. We must perform certain cafiaos as offerings to God so that He may save our hogs together with our chickens.
•* A rough plan accompanies the manuscript, which is not reproduced here.
"Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 850] says: ''The Benguet-Lepanto Igorots are monogamous. Children are betrothed at a very early age and often marry at the age of puberty or even before. Strong attachments are not uncommon among the married people and divorce is relatively rare." Some men in Lepanto keep concubines. The manuscript Memoria aprocsi- mada says of marriage: "Among these heathen, the passion of love is unknown, because they marry when very young. In the negotiations the contracting parties have nothing to say, for on this occasion, they are subjected to the caprice and wish of their parents. The latter generally base their reasons on one of the two following things. The first is when two intimate friends have their wives with child at the same time; and they agree to bind their offspring together, if it happen that one bear a
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 481
BAGNEN ^"^
In olden times this town was known by the name Bagnen. When the Spaniards were in control of this country, they called it rancheria" of Bagnen, but when the Katipunan were the rulers they called it a munic- ipality, and now the present Government names it a township.
No one knows the exact time when this town was settled ; the oldest men at this time and those who have been told of the history by their old people say that this town was organized before the Spaniards came to this coun- try, and thus we do not know the names of the principales and settlers who were the forefathers of the present inhabitants of the barrios.
Four barrios form the township of Bagnen, and their names are as follows: Bagnen, Data, Laylaya, and Balintoogan.
In ancient times each of these barrios, except the last named, Balin- toogan, was called a rancheria, and each of them had a gobernadorcillo, teniente mayor, alguaciles, and cabezas de barangay, who were the officials that governed their town, and they had appointments given to them by the comandante politico militar who was in authority in the district. This was not then called a province but Distrito de Lepanto."
son and the other a daughter. The second is when two friends have children, one a male and the other a female, whom they desire to be related by marriage. The contract having been made by the parents and the day set for the espousals, they advise the old woman who acts as priestess. The families assemble in the house of the parents of the bride. The drum- beat notifies the people of the village and neighbors that there is a function in that house. This is at the cost of the father of the groom. The people give 5 pesos to the father of the bride, unless the bride and groom are of importance. Then presents of 30 or 40 pesos are generally given, with which, together with what the father of the groom expects to spend, they buy basi, carabaos, and pigs which are taken to the house of the bride."
•* Bagnen is located 22 kilometers east of Cervantes. It was out of the usual route of communication, and its inhabitants were more backward than those of other pueblos. During the time of the tobacco monopoly, considerable tobacco was raised in Bagnen, but after the repeal of the monopoly only enough for home consumption was planted. After 1890 some coffee was raised. See Perez, Igorrotes, 203-207.
•^A name originally applied by the Spaniards to a small collection of huts. Some of the so-called rancherias in the Philippines approached a small hamlet in size.
" Teniente mayor, head lieutenant ; generally head of a barrio. Alguacil, constable of the courts or of a municipal body. Cabeza de barangay, for- merly the chief of the old Filipino government unit, the barangay. The Spaniards retained the title and made the office appointive or elective. The incumbents of this office were made responsible for the collection of the tribute and taxes, and each officer was supposed to be responsible for 50 families. They were subordinate to the gobernadorcillo, and together with him and all ex-gobernadorcillos and ex-cabezas de barangay, formed the principalia. See Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 17, 331; 40, 83, 347-349. Comandante politico militar, the highest Spanish officer of any given mili- tary district. See Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 850]: "While all the settlements of the Benguet-Lepanto Igorots have their own govern-
130429 — 2
482 Tlie Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The fourth barrio, named Balintoogan, was lately organized. This place is on a steep side of a large mountain between Bagnen, Sagada, and Besao. The people who are living there came from the villages of Ambasing, Balugang, and Amquileng. They left these (places) on account of the sinking and falling away of the ground and owing to fear they moved to the place which is now called Balintoogan.
There are no records showing the list of the officials of this town or the time when they served and thus we cannot give a true and exact account but nevertheless those whom we know and have heard of are as follows:
Names of 24 gobernadorcillos, 6 tenientes mayores, 7 cabezas de barangay, 4 presidentes, 4 vice-presidentes, 11 concejales or councilors, and 2 secretary-treasurers follow. These officials ''served since the time of the Katipunan, who are succeeded by the present government," but they are not of sufficient impor- tance to be reproduced here. The manuscript continues :
A SHORT DESCRIPTION
The township is situated on the steep sides of the high mountains; the people are very poor, because there is not enough good land for them to work; it is divided into small villages because the people found that the mountain side where they can plant camotes, a little maize, and other vegetables from which they could obtain their food was a rich land; camotes are the important food of the people of this town. There are some small parcels of rice fields owned by the people, but they are very hard to cultivate because they are made along the creeks and on hill- sides, and they look like disarranged steps of vertical ladders; they cannot use carabaos to plow them because they are in such bad places. They must patiently dig and clean them, and then they can plant rice in them. They are always digging camotes, but rice can only be harvested in the time of calgao (dry season) on account of the cold weather in these places.'^
RELIGION AND CUSTOMS
There is nothing to show or any proofs of any true religion which these people possess or follow, but they believe that there is a God and they call Him Cabunian;*^ they believe also in the souls of the dead,
ments, organized in accordance with the white man's law, there still remain Igorot representatives of the families from which came the chiefs of former days, who have more influence than have any of the present elected officials. Not a few individuals of these families have attained to considerable wealth.'*
" See Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 39-41. See also a description of agricultural methods among the Bontocs by Jenks [Pub. P. 7. Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 88-107]. The rice terraces of the Ifugaos are one of the wonders of the Orient. The stone walls, many of which are of great height and exceedingly well made, have an appearance of great age.
*^ I doubt if Cabunian is the name of a deity. It is probably a place. In the Ifugao religion it is the name of the sky region where most of the greatest deities dwell. — Beyer. Beyer [This Journal, Sec. D (1913),
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 483
and call them anito; and their manner of praying or making offering is somewhat like that of the people in ancient time/^ the only difference being that in ancient times when they made prayers or offerings they killed a sheep " for the ceremony ; but now the ceremony that they observe whenever they make any offering to God (Cabunian) is the killing of a hog or a chicken/'
8, 99], speaking of the Ifugaos, says that Cabunian is the layer of the sky world "immediately above the Earth World, and it is the blue-stone underfacing of this layer that we call the *sky/ " Fray Benito Herosa, 0. S. A. [see Perez, Pub. P. /. Ethnol. Surv. (1904), 3, 243] identifies Cabunian with the sun.
*^ Of the religion of the Igorots, Alonso Martin Quirante (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 273, 274) says: "The Yglotes are an idolatrous race. They say that their god is the sky, whom they call Cabunian; and they offer and sacrifice to him, in their banquets and feasts, swine and carabaos, but under no consideration cows or bulls. The method of sacrifice practiced by them is [as follows] : Having tied all the animals not prohibited about the house of the sacrifice, after the ceremony an old man or old woman, having placed on the ground a painted cloth that resembles a surplice, and which they call salili, they proceed to kill the animals, and make a great feast. They keep that up for two or three days until they have finished eating what they have, when their feast or magunito also finishes. He who keeps up such entertain- ment longest, and kills most of the said animals is most respected.'* See also, Perez, Pub, P. /. EthnoL Surv, (1904), 3, 137, 138, and Jenks, ibid. (1905), 1, 196-215.
*^ Thus in the manuscript, but probably a dog is meant, as no sheep are found in Mountain Province, except those brought in from outside, such as those now owned by the Jesuits at Baguio.
*^ See the description of a sacrifice witnessed among the Visayans in 1521 by Antonio Pigafetta, who accompanied Magellan, in Robertson, Magellan's journey around the world. Cleveland (1906), 163-167. See also, Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 3, 163-165 (Conquest of Luzon, 1572) ; 3, 198, 199 (Relation of the Western Islands called Filipinas, 1573) ; 5, 131-133, 163, 173-175 (Loarca's Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 185, 190, 191 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 12, 265-272, 302, 304 (Chirino, Relation, 1604); 13, 59, 72, 81; 21, 137, 138; 29, 284-286, 293, 294 (Bobadilla's Relation, 1640); 30, 190-192, 288, 289; 31, 145, 146, 155; 32, 55, 56, 248; 33, 167-171; 34, 319; 38, 219, 221, 236, 239; 40, 70-89 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 167 (Combes, Historia, 1667); 40, 221, 223; 40, 335-339 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44); 43, 105 (Ortiz, Practico del ministerio, ca. 1742) ; 43, 124, 125 (Martinez de Zufiiga, Historia, 1803); 47, 301, 302 (Perez, Relation of Zambales, 1680) ; 48, 107, 125, 129, 132. See also, Perez, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1904), 3, 242, 243. Mr. Luther Parker, of the Bureau of Education, Manila, has seen the sacrifices still performed by the half-wild mountain people of Panay. They resemble closely the sacrifice described by Pigafetta. The manuscript above cited, Noticia aprocsimada, gives an account of sacrifices among the Igorots, especially of that called jalujalu, which is defined as the sacrifice of pigs.
484 "^he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
They often do this, and there is no day designated especially when they have a celebration or feast to thank Cabunian for giving them a good crop to harvest, or for the increasing of their animals, their good health, or whenever there is a wedding {homayas) ,**' or when one of them dies. (Plate II, fig. 2.)
They surely believe that there are souls, and they say that anitos of their forefathers visit them frequently. They have also a belief that these anitos are the companions and helpers of Cabunian to look after the people, to give prosperity, and also to give hardship and bad luck to the people; if one of their children is sick, they say that the anito of their forefathers visited him and thus they must kill a hog or a chicken to feed him. They believe that this offering of food is eaten by the anito and that he will give health to the sick and cure him/'
According to their customs, whenever they go to any place or go to another town or the authorities call them, they must first have a canao; or if they intend to do something they first perform a inamidiSy the so-called pidis, which is that they must kill one chicken to see if its liver is satisfactory; if it is good and full they continue, but if it is unsatisfactory they stop and have another mamidis (to kill a chicken and see the liver) .
When they are already on the way, if a crow, mouse, snake, etc., runs across the road, they at once stop their journey. They say that it is bad luck or that the object of their journey will not be accomplished or that it will turn out badly. For that reason they must stop for a while or else return to the town which they started from.**
It can be seen that there exists great union among them, for when one of them has something to do and cannot do it alone all the people will agree to help; when one is going to build his house, all the people must help him to secure all the materials and other things needed and help build the house asking no pay.*'
If there is a person of any kind who asks a shelter in their house, they feed him and request no pay; they are humble and obedient to the orders of the authorities.
BANAAO ^'
^'Official names of the barrios are : Banaao, Dacudac, Pandayan, Lebga, Cagubatan, and Cada-anan.''
**A bumayas is not a wedding. It is a great ceremony given only by members of the aristocracy as a public demonstration of their right to their titles. It is often given by an aristocratic couple immediately following their wedding ceremony. — Beyer.
*' See footnote 9.
*• These superstitions were common in early times to all the peoples now called Filipinos. Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 7, 189 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589) ; 40, 341-346 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44). There are many references in Philippine documents to this superstition.
" But they expect to and do receive a very considerable quantity of food and drink. — Beyer,
** Banaao is located 18 kilometers south of Cervantes. It is the center of extensive rice fields. See Perez, Igorrotes, 141-152.
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 485
*The barrio of Dacudac was formed into a barrio on August 31, 1908; the five other barrios were formed in olden times; the old men living now have no idea as to when these barrios were formed."
The names of the original families and of the officials as far back as known follow. The manuscript proceeds :
CUSTOM OF DRESSING OF THE IGOROTS
For an Igorot one suit of clothes is sufficient for a year; this consists of a handkerchief, a blanket, and a G string for the men and of a camisa, a tapis, a waist bandage, and a string of head beads, which they call banges, for the women.
The women in this township do not wear their hair any longer than it is worn by the men; the headwear of the men differs from that of the women. The women can only use a string of beads; they are not allowed to wear anything like the men's head string. The men's headwear is a piece of cloth or handkerchief which they wind around their head; they are not allowed to wear the head ornament of the women.**
The "muebles'* [that is, possessions or property] of the Igorots consist only of pupputic (jars).'* There are many different kinds, such as hunay, sinal-itan, inot-otot, pucao, guilas, pinaypayao, tinodco, lunghoy, bimaog, guinalman, lucian, saoit, and gayang; and also a string of gold, which resembles a necklace and is called camaqui. All these properties are held very sacred by the Igorots, and they must not be sold; they would rather have their rice land sold than these properties, because they regard them as sacred relics of their forefathers."
The jars are used to make tapuy in, a drink made out of rice which they drink at any time as it is a means of diversion for them; the jars and other things are also used in the celebration of canaos.
'" x\lonso Martin Quirante (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 269) thus describes the clothing of the mountain people in 1624 : "The usual dress and clothing of that people is a loose shock of disheveled hair that reaches below the ears, and certain bands about one jeme [span] wide made from the bark of trees. Having wound these about the waist, they twist them so that they cover the privy parts. They call these bahaques, and they are worn by all classes of people, men and women. Besides the said bahaque, the chiefs wear Ilocan blankets, which they have inherited from their ancestors; this garment is crossed from the shoulder to the waist, where they knot it. Thus do they go, without any other clothes or shoes.'* See also footnote 26.
** That is, things made of clay. Putik is a common northern Luzon word for clay or mud. — Beyer.
" Throughout the entire extent of the Philippine Archipelago are found jars of Chinese origin, mute witnesses of the great extent since the earliest times of Chinese trade. Many of them are centuries old, and are considered among the most priceless treasures of their owners. See Jenks, Pub, P. L Ethnol, Surv. (1905), 1, 117-121, for a discussion of Bontoc pottery. See also Cole and Laufer, Chinese pottery in the Philip- pines, Field Mus. Pub, (1913).
486 ^^^<? Philippine Journal of Science 1914
All Igorots have tapuy in their houses; it is for them a kind of a household god; they always have tapuy set aside for drinking purposes, and no matter how much they have on hand it is sometimes drunk up in one day, because when the Igorots gather together and sit around in the shade without having anything to do, and they just feel [like drink- ing] it, they go from one house to another to hunt for tapuy, and when they find some, although the owner may be absent, they drink it all without regard to what the owner might say upon his return. When the owner returns and finds his tapuy gone, he can't say anything, because it is their custom to do so. (Plate II, fig. 2.)
SUPERSTITIONS OF THE IGOROTS WHEN GOING AWAY FROM HOME
When an Igorot goes anywhere and a bird of any kind flies across the trail ahead of him he discontinues his journey because it predicts a failure of his purpose or he might get into trouble; but, if he insists on going ahead in order to avoid delay, he must stop for about a half an hour right at the place where the bird crossed the trail, or else he must return to his home and make a new start.
IGOROT CUSTOMS
The Igorots have a custom of going to sit nearly every day in a high place from where all the trails and roads leading to the town can be plainly seen; ^^ there they do nothing but clean themselves of their head and body lice (coto, head louse; tonia, body louse) ; one Igorot cleans the head of another and so on. While sitting around that way they do also some simple work, such as making baskets, which are called taddo, balloco, labba, etc.''^ In each of the barrios there is a little house called
" Alonso Martin Quirante (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 269) says: **Their settlements are established on the peaks of the mountains, and on the roughest of them, whence afar off they can see all the paths, so that no one can approach them without being seen by their sentinels, who always guard their posts day and night. '^
" Labba is the term employed by the Ilocanos for the large carrying basket. The following information was furnished by the Bureau of Education in Manila. ^'Relative to Lepanto-Igorot basketry in general the following information can be given. Nearly all Igorot baskets are made entirely of rattan. Other materials, such as nito, are sometimes used in decoration. The rattan may be dyed black, red, or yellow for decoration. Two methods of construction are used: binding and braiding. The former is most common. It implies the employment of rather strong strips bound together by smaller pliable strips. By this method rigidity, beauty, and any desired shape can be secured. Large tampipis, vase- shaped storage and carrying baskets, and small trinket baskets of all kinds are made by this method. Baskets made by the latter method are pliable and not so pleasing to the eye. They are made entirely of narrow pliable strips braided together. Winnowing trays and rude carry- ing baskets are the principal products of this method." The following note was furnished by Dr. Merton L. Miller of the Bureau of Science: "In the Philippine museum all the basketry from Benguet and Lepanto is grouped together as there is very little, if any, difference between the basketry of the two subprovinces. It consists of carrying baskets;
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 487
dalipey (tribunal), where the young men over 8 years of age and the widowers sleep. Boys and girls old enough to wed do not sleep in their parents' home; the young women seek the houses of widows or women that are not living with a man and sleep in their houses as long as they are not married; the children sleep in the house of their parents."
A young man that has been sleeping for some time in the dalipey that wants to get married and has already found a girl that will have him, gets two or three old men to go to make a marriage agreement with the parents of the girl; the only point which they have to settle is the sabong (dowry) '^ that the man is to give to the bride. If the sabong is satisfactory to the girl's parents then they kill a rooster and a hen and get some tapuy. If the gall of the chickens proves unsatisfactory, they kill two others and so on until they find two whose galls are satisfactory; the expense for this is borne by both parties.
The old men commissioned by the bridegroom also send after his father, but not until after the agreement about the dowry has been settled; and these old men are considered as the witnesses to the marriage; the girl's parents send after the young man to live with their daughter after three days have passed, although this time can be extended to one or two years. The husband and wife can be divorced at any time they wish, without anybody being able to prevent them from doing so. A divorce is sought for the following reason: If they have no children, despite the continued observance of the jMsang (a prayer to the anito to give them children). If the husband is the one that first suggests a separation, the dowry given by him to his wife will be left to her, but if the woman first suggests the separation the dowry will go back to the husband, but what property they have accumulated during the time that they have been married will be shared equally between them. The divorced parties must not have any hard feelings toward each other during their lifetime.
ANOTHER CUSTOM OF MARRYING
The parents of both the boy and girl have a talk with each other and make an agreement to marry their children; the boy's parents turn over to the girl's parents the dowry agreed upon, which remains in their possession; if rice land, they work it until the children get old enough to marry; the profits therefrom are used for the maintenance of the girl; when the children are grown up and then refuse to marry each other, the dowry is returned to the boy's parents.
carrying frames; pouches worn by men and women; storage baskets; hats; baskets for carrying eggs, ore, and fish; and fish traps. These are made almost entirely of rattan and bamboo." Cf. also Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 121-123.
" Dalipey, see footnote 17. Beyer says that the sleeping customs of the Lepanto Igorots are the same as among the Ifugaos and that there is no public sleeping house for girls as in Bontoc. But see page 493, where a communal house for girls is described. This may have been bor- rowed from the Bontoc s.
'"' See footnotes 14 and 35. The dowry, which was always given by the man, was an important condition of marriage throughout the Philippines.
488 2^^^ Philippine Journal of Science lou
HOW THE IGOROT WORKS
The women do all the work in the rice and camote fields; they till the soil by means of iron bars; they transplant the rice and also cut the rice when it is ready for harvest; the men only help the women to build the walls in the rice fields and to carry home, once a day, part of the rice that has been cut by the women.
The men^s work consists in pounding out the rice from the palay, getting the water for home use, pasturing the animals if they have any, cooking their rice, feeding the hogs, taking care of the house, and carrying the baby around."
To build or remove an IgoroVs house is very easy; no nails are needed, only split bamboo is used to join the house together; the house is con- structed out of lumber, it has only 4 posts; the boards used are 1 decimeter thick, 4 decimeters wide, and 2 meters long.
When an Igorot intends to remove his house, he prepares two big jars of tapuy with which to entertain the people at his house; at twilight he sends a man to notify his neighbors and townspeople that he intends to remove his house to another place the next day, so that all those who were so notified will not go away but come and work on his house that day; this house is built entirely during one day's work. When it is completed, they drink the tapuy that has been prepared for them, but eat no food.
CLIMATE
The climate of Banaao is pretty cold throughout the year; we raise two rice crops a year.
There are no more old barrios left in this township in which any of the present inhabitants were born.
All the people living in any of the barrios, comprising this township,
**Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto. Manila (1877), says: "The Igorot woman is the one who attends to the planting, and on that account she is away from home most of the day. The man only plows the field and builds the rock walls of the fields. After these labors the men only attend to public matters, and even in the performance of the latter tasks, it is usual to see the women substitute the men. The children accompany the women. Meanwhile the man stays at home, cooks the rice and other food, and amuses the nursing children while their mothers are away. They give the children masticated morisqueta [cooked rice] from their own mouths. It would not be imagined that a robust, agile man, well able to work, should lend himself to so feminine an occupation and pastime, unless this was a fitting custom of the law that belongs to woman among heathen people of backward intelligence. On the other hand, the men are wont to work for a medium wage, far from their own neighborhood, and for a very small sum do not hesitate to carry heavy loads. They are good cultivators, and are always eager to get seeds and plants unknown to them." The report just cited is excellent and the work of a good observer. Lillo de Gracia was comandante politico militar of the district of Lepanto. Among the Bontocs, some care of the children devolves on the men. See Jenks, Pub. P. L Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 134-136.
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 489
observe the same custom and manners in the celebrating of the 9 following described caiiaos:
1. Canao called hagaoas. This canao is attended by all the people who have a house of their own in the barrio that celebrates the canao; this is an offering to the anito that they may have a good rice crop and [that the anito may] protect their rice from the plague of mice and keep their grain from drying up.
The ceremonies gone through in their canao are the killing of a hog in the yard of a deserted house, called ao-a. After the hog is killed, one-fourth of the liver and one-half of the breast are strung on finely split bamboo and dropped into boiling water; after this is boiled it is taken to a particular place, together with a dish of rice and a dish of tapuy, all of which, an old man, accompanied by a prayer, offers according to custom to this particular anito; after the ceremony, the old man, who made the offering, takes for himself all the provisions set aside for this ceremony; the rest of the meat is sold to anyone who wishes to buy some. Then they also make an offering for the protection of their rice from the plague; this meat, so used in this canao, is cooked and eaten the same as any other meat.
2. Canao called quesley. This caiiao is an offering and prayer to the anito to protect them against any kind of sickness or disease.
The ceremonies for this caiiao are the killing of a hog (the hog is burned) ; after the hog is killed, one or two old men take their spears and sit down facing the killed hog, which they offer to the anito, together with a dish of rice and a dish of tapuy; as is the custom after the prayers are said, these two old men, together with others, examine the gall. If it is large and puffed up, the sickness, if any, will be cured within a few days, but if the gall is small and bad they kill another hog; and if this gall is still bad they continue to kill hogs until they find one that has the right kind of a gall, but if the man killed the last hog that he can buy or can get, and the gall continues to be bad, then they give up hope and the sick person's life is in danger.
3. Canao called bayas. This canao is a feast of rejoicing in which the Igorot shows his affection and good will toward his neighbors, town mates, and other friends.
The ceremonies made in this canao are the killing of 2, 3, 5, 7, or 12 hogs; in addition to this, horses, cattle, carabaos, goats, sheep [sic], chickens, and other animals that the person giving the canao wishes to kill.
In this canao there is always more meat than can be eaten by the visitors to the canao; the rest of the meat that is left from one day's canao is cut into small pieces corresponding in number to the neighboring houses, relatives, and friends who are living in other places, [and] this meat is then distributed among them. This canao can also be made in honor of one who is dead, but without any kind of music; but if it is only a feast ganzas " are used.
The one giving this canao must stay in his house for ten days without coming out and without speaking to anyone except his housemates, nor must anyone go into his house or even into his yard during those ten days.
" Ganzas, the brass gongs used throughout the Orient, and probably of Chinese origin.
490 ^^^ Philippine Journal of SciP7ice i9i4
4. Canao called tongcala. This caiiao is to the anito to whom offerings or promises have been made by a person while sick [who] says this, for instance, "I shall offer up a hog*, together with music, according to the custom, if my sickness be cured/'
The ceremonies observed in this canao are the killing of a hog; an old man, accompanied by ganzas, takes the head of the hog, together with the liver and a little of the meat (muscle), and puts them on the end of a dry piece of wood covered with the tops of sugar cane or with the whole plant; after holding this meat up on the end of the piece of wood, it is taken off and cooked and eaten by the people; the person giving this caiiao will have to stay in his house for ten days.
5. Canao called baquid. This canao is celebrated in case the water used for irrigating the rice fields sinks into the ground and in that way passes the rice fields that are to be irrigated.
The ceremonies for this and for the increase of the water are as follows: An old man goes with the owner of the field to the place, taking with them a small pig, a chicken, and a basket, which are needed when they eat; upon arriving at the place they kill the pig and the chicken and offer them up to the anito of the fields; after the ceremony is over they cook and eat them; the person who makes this caiiao must stay in his house for one day.
6. Canao called pacde. This is a caiiao by all the people of one village or barrio to the anito so that he may give them a good crop of rice and other crops and make the grain fill out good.
The ceremonies gone through in this caiiao are the killing of a hog in the following manner: The old men bring with them a hog covered with a shield and spear, and taking it near the edge of the barrio there they kill (burn) the hog and cut it into pieces for an offering to the anito; they look at the liver, and if it is good they do not kill another hog,, but if it is bad they kill hog after hog until they find one with a good liver.
The meat of the killed hog is not eaten by the old men who only eat the liver; the meat is cut into as many pieces as there are houses in the barrio that is giving this caiiao; the meat of every hog that is killed in this caiiao, is divided to correspond to the number of the houses. Each piece of meat is strung on a split piece of bamboo and so distributed among the houses.
The value of all the hogs killed is figured up and the amount is divided by the number of houses; when it is determined what the share of each will be, they pay it to the headman or chief of the caiiao, and he pays the owners of the hogs that were killed.
This caiiao is celebrated twice a year, before the planting and harvest- ing of the rice. During this canao, every one not living or belonging to that barrio is driven away, and nobody is allowed to enter the barrio, except the officials who pass through or whose duty it is to come to the township, who may be allowed to enter.
Across all paths and trails leading into the town or barrio that is celebrating this caiiao a design of green leaves is made into an arch, which is the sign that no one may enter.
None of the people of the barrio in which this caiiao is held are allowed to go to another barrio or other place while this caiiao is going on, and every one must take great care of his animals, chickens, etc..
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 491
for it is a bad omen should a hawk or other bird take away the little chickens.
7. Caiiao called pasang. This cafiao is celebrated by married people who have lived together for a certain length of time, but who have neither sons nor daughters, in order that they may have children.
The ceremony in this canao is the killing of a hog to be offered up in the yard of the married couple, together with the things needed in the house, such as a turban of beads, camisa, belt, etc., all things used by the man as well as by the woman, and some money in addition to the above things. All these things are put together into a big wide flat basket; the woman takes the basket on her head and starts to dance and the man dances around her for about an hour, accompanied by the beating of a ganza or salibao (drum). The married couple must not do any work for two days.
8. Caiiao called palis. This caiiao is for the protection against poisoners and that the poison used by them may become harmless.
This caiiao is principally performed when a person is sick; it is for the purpose of finding out the real cause or reason for the person's sickness; but, if it is known that the person was poisoned, then this caiiao is for his cure (medicine) ; the ceremony in this caiiao is the killing of a dog, a cat, a hen, a turkey, a duck, or a goose. If every one of these animals has a bad liver, the person will die, but should they have good livers then the person will be cured and will become well.
9. The ^ caiiao that can be performed daily is the killing of a hen or other chicken; the Igorot can make this caiiao as an offering or prayer to the anito when anyone is sick; if he kills a chicken the anito will cure his sickness, providing that the chicken has a good liver.
If anyone intending to go on a trip caiiaos [that is, makes a caiiao with] a young chicken or a hen having a good liver, he will have a good trip; if he is accused of anything or some one makes a complaint against him, he kills a chicken; if he finds the liver good, he will win; but if bad then he will surely lose; the meat of these chickens is eaten.
The person making this kind of a caiiao is forbidden to go to the country or other place to work for one day and during that day he is also prohibited from speaking to anybody except to members of his own household and no one is allowed to enter his house during that day.
The real sign of the termination of any one of these nine caiiaos is that on the morning of the third, fifth, or tenth day, as the case may be, the person giving the caiiao goes to a brook or river, a little way from his house to bathe; he takes with him his spear and sticks a long chicken feather in his hair. In this manner he informs the people that the caiiao is over.
On the last day of the caiiao and when he goes to the river to bathe, he does not speak to anyone nor does he look behind nor beside him; should anyone speak to him, he will only shake his head.
Everybody knows just what kind of a caiiao anyone is performing, because a certain kind of a bunch of green leaves is put up at the gate in front or at the side of the house.
During the celebration of any one of these nine caiiaos, no one taking part in them can do any kind of work in the country or other places, [but] in their own houses they are allowed to do certain kinds of work. The people are prohibited from working or from leaving their
492 The Philippine Journal of Science iQi-i
house when they celebrate any kind of a canao, especially during the canaos called "pacde" and "palis/* because if the people living in the barrio where the canao pacde is being held go to the country or other places to work, they will have a bad harvest of their crops during one year. If during the canao palis the people go to work in their fields they will have no water for their fields for one year; and if they work on their lapog (caingan) " it will dry up as there will be no moisture.
BAUCO '^
Bauco township has 4 barrios; namely, Guinzadan, Vila, Ibanao, and Bauco. Guinzadan, one of the oldest places in the province according to the manuscript, was formerly called Lili- teg, "but when a big flood came and destroyed the town and cut it in two by a river they changed Liliteg into Guinzadan which means, damaged by water." The Spaniards established a government in this barrio after several campaigns waged against the Igorots of the district. The names of many officials are given. The barrio of Vila was so called ''after a certain kind of soil that can be made into pots and pans.'' The story of its settlement is as follows:
One time there was a famine in Qiapan and the married couple, Tayapan and Guislan, ran away to Guibasan Mountain and there they built themselves a hut according to the Igorot ways; a short time after Taycapan and Yang-gacao followed them to that place, and they did not go back to Quiapan any more, and so became the forefathers of the people of that place.
In due time a Spanish government was established in Vila, and after that "the Katipunan controlled this town for a short time" and until the coming of the Americans. The barrio of
" The caingin method of farming consists in a progressive deforestation, that is, small areas of, say, 1 to 5 hectares are felled and burned, then planted to rice, camotes, maize, yams, beans, etc.; by the end of the second season, however, so much cogon and other grasses and weeds have become established in the comparatively rich new forest soil that their influence upon any successive crop would be very great; usually, therefore, only 2 crops or perhaps in some localities 3, are grown in each cleared space; cogon then takes possession of the clearing and this, being burned every dry season, soon reduces the humus content in the otherwise rich soil (the mineral salts in the ashes readily leaching out in the rainy season). This is a most pernicious and reprehensible practice considering the waste of good land, first, through allowing cogon to enter the clearing, and secondly, through burning the cogon every dry season, thereby killing all forest seedlings and rapidly exhausting the humus. The method has been extensively used in the mountain regions. — Barrett.
"Bauco is located 18 kilometers east of Cervantes. Its inhabitants are industrious and possess many rice fields and at one time raised many cattle. See Perez, Igorrotes, 191-193.
IX, D, 6 Robertso7i: The Igorots of Lepanto 493
Ibanao received its name * 'because there was a lake in the middle of it." The story of its foundation is as follows :
Smallpox broke out in Quiapan, Bauco, and all people attacked by this disease died. Ando and Doma, a married couple, ran away to Patog-6 Mountain, and there they built a small hut; later Tanca and Andeo went after them to the same mountain and lived with Ando and Doma; as long as they lived there they never returned to Quiapan, the place where they came from, and they were the forefathers of the people.
''After the administration of the Spanish government, the Katipunan ruled these places for a short time,'' but the latter was defeated by the Americans.
BARRIO OF BAUCO
The ancient story of Padoca and Adian**" who lived in Tabeo Mountain. The man was Padoca and the woman was Adian, their first child was a boy named Opig, the second was a girl named Daoquen; when the children grew up and there was no one to marry, they married each other; when this family increased in number, they looked for a spring and a good place where they could till the ground; they found the mountain called Quiapan and settled there, and when the people grew more in number, they named the place Bauco. There also came people from other places. Not long after this Comandante Casanuba," who lived in Cayan, arrived there; he came with many guardia civil and many people of Cayan, and fought against the people of Bauco. After the fight they received a cane of authority from the rulers."'
The Spanish, Katipunan, and the Americans in succession governed the place. Various customs are described as follows:
MARRYING CHILDREN
Boys and girls that are old enough to marry don't sleep in their homes with their parents; the young women go every night to the house designated for them to sleep in, and the young men go to sleep in the atato (tribunal)."
•''The fragment of an origin myth.
"Casanova. Probably before 1852, as the names of the comandantes politico militar, up to 1890, do not show this name.
"A tasselled cane given to the chief official of a pueblo in Spanish times as a badge of authority.
" See footnote 54. See also Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 27. Among the Bontocs, the girls sleep in a communal house called oldg from the time that they are about two years old until they marry. The Igorots of Bauco may have borrowed this custom from the Bontocs. Among the Bontocs ato is used to designate one of the political units of the township. The at-ato of the town of Bauco evidently combines the functions both of the Bontoc pabufunan and fawi. See Jenks, Pub, P. I. Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 49-55.
494 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
At night time, young men go to the house where the young women are sleeping; if a young man that has been sleeping for some time in the at-ato wants to get married he tells it to the young woman whom he likes; the young woman, if she likes the young man, tells him to go to find firewood which will be taken to the house of the woman^s father; the young woman goes to the house of the young man*s father and brings him camote or rice as a sign to the parents that their son and daughter want to get married. After these ceremonies the parents of the young man and woman make an agreement that the young man shall go to the house of the woman's father and perform a caiiao with a chicken. Three days after the performance of this canao, they perform another canao with a suckling pig. When they have been living together for one year, they get 3 or 4 hogs and with these hogs they again kill a suckling pig which shows that that day the last canao has been performed.
THE IGOROT CUSTOMS
The ancient people used the bark of trees for G strings and their hats were made of fine splints of bamboo; the women made their tapis out of the fibers procured from certain kinds of trees.
When a man has a complaint to make he gathers all the old men together and tells them his complaint. The old men, after they have heard the complaint of the plaintiff, call the defendant or accused and let them speak face to face and listen to the matter. After the old men have heard the cause of the dispute of the two fellows and they have no witnesses, they let them prick each one's head with a needle; the one whose head bleeds will lose and he whose head does not bleed will win; or they let them throw a stone at each other and the one who hits the backbone is the winner; if the old men don't want to try the case in [one of] these manners, they get 2 chickens from one hen and give one to the plaintiff and the other to the defendant; each one then burns his chicken and cuts it in two before the old men. The owner of the chicken whose gall is the larger loses and the one whose chicken has the small gall wins.^^
At the beginning of planting rice in the seed beds, all the people perform a canao with a hen or rooster; before the transplanting of the rice plants in the field, they perform another canao with a chicken, and after the performance of this canao they must transplant all their rice plants to their rice fields. After the transplanting, they again celebrate a canao with a chicken, which shows that they have finished rice planting.
Before the beginning of the rice harvest every one is prohibited from leaving his town or his house, because all the people must perform a canao within ten days. The ceremony they make in this canao is the
" Cf . trial by ordeal among Filipino peoples as related by various authors in Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 16, 129 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609) ; 40, 85, 86 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 152-154 (Combes, Historia, 1667); 40, 343, 357 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44); 43, 109 (Ortiz, Practice del ministerio, ca., 1742) ; 43, 123 (Martinez de Zuiiiga, Historia, 1804). See also, Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 20; and Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 168-171.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 495
killing of a hog or a chicken; ten days after this canao an old man of the township goes and kills a hog or a suckling pig near the foot of a large tree, and after this they may harvest the rice; after harvesting all their rice the people perform a canao as a sign that they have finished the harvest. The ceremony they make in this canao is the killing of a chicken.
After the planting of camotes, the men with spears and shields go to the mountain to pray to the souls of the dead persons and when they have returned home they all go to the tribunal or abong; the head or chief of the tribunal takes a cup of water and a spear and puts them in front of the tribunal and prays.
The next morning he gets a dog or a chicken which they kill and cook and place in a dish and set it in a certain place; this is the food for the dead that they called to when they went to the mountain.
When a certain kind of caiiao is being performed, all the roads or streets or paths leading into the township are closed in order that the people from other towns may not come into their town.
The man who begins to build a house and sees a mouse does not continue it, for he thinks that it is very bad luck. After the materials for a house are collected and the house is built, if the owner of the house sees a snake or a mouse before he has occupied the house, he removes his house to another place. After the erection of the house when it is removed, if the owner does not see a dog, a crow, or a snake, he performs a canao with a chicken; three days after this caiiao, he again performs a canao by killing a suckling pig; after all these things are done, if the owner does not dream any superstitious beliefs regarding his house, he moves into it and does not leave it for three days; he again performs a canao with the ceremony of killing a chicken; but when he dreams something bad he will leave the house and find another place where he may build his house.
Igorot names for the months of the year.
Libtong, January. Hoa-6, July.
Atong, February. Leppas, August.
Panlitonan, March. Tioay, September.
Becas, April. Tiguey, October.
Deam, May. Quilingy November.
Adug, June. Esec, December.
Each month of the year is named or called by the Igorots according to the climate, weather, or season of that month, also by the birds and the things they did during that time.''"''
" This is a very common practice in all parts of the world. A manu- script history of the Visayas in the possession of the Philippine Library gives such a calendar that purports to have been handed down from as early as 1543. Mr. H. Otley Beyer, of the Bureau of Science, and Mr. Luther Parker, of the Bureau of Education in Manila, have both gathered impor- tant data of early calendar systems in the Orient, which it is hoped will soon be published. Quirante says (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 274) that the Igorots do not "know what day, month, or year, or the increase and decline of the moon, signify. They govern themselves by one
496 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
[Continuation of footnote numbered 65.]
Star that rises in the west, which they call gaganayan while they call the natives of the neighborhood by the same name. On seeing that star they attend to the planting of their waste and wretched fields in order to sow them with yams and camoteSy which form their usual and natural food." Cf. also, Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 165 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580); 7, 189, 190 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589). Mr. Otto Scheerer, of the Uuiversity of the Philippines, in a letter to me very appropriately warns against considering the native words of the calendar of the above text as the exact equivalents of the months of our calendar. They do not indicate divisions of thirty or thirty-one days. Mr. Scheerer says:
** Their names indicate the beginning, lapse, or end of rural occupation or natural phenomena, which used to take place at more or less the same time indicated by our moons, but are far from being so sharply defined and are really more in the nature of 'seasons,' such as our 'harvest,' 'fall,' etc. Banco, being a town in Lepanto, the words [of the calendar in the text] should be, so far as I know, Tinguian, a dialect of which I possess very scant information and other people, too, I believe. We possess, in the matter of linguistic data concerning these Islands, such a mass of confused and unreliable information that I should hate to see it added to in the more enlightened era of investigation by Americans. I notice that these names must have been taken down by some Filipino from the lowlands, since they show the characteristic Spanish orthography current among the Christian population of the Islands. This spelling is, however, also found adopted by one or the other literate Igorot. All I can do is to compare them with identical or similar words in other known dialects from northern Luzon, without, however, vouchsafing, in so doing, that there exists an actual identity of meaning.
Lib long. This word occurs in the same form in Ilocano, where it means lake or ditch of stagnant water.
Atong» In Isinai the word atung means heat, warmth, sickness. In Ilocano atang designates a superstition consisting in placing the first pickings of some fruit, a plate of meat, or of any other food, in the corners of the house, in the garden, or field, or somewhere in the mountain, in order to appease some malign spirit. In Ibanag atang means any kind of herb used as a vegetable. The change from *o' in atong to 'a' in atang might be nothing else than a different pronunciation of a certain indistinct primitive sound well known to linguists as the 'pepet vowel.'
Panlitonan, This word is unknown to me. In structure it is characterized by prefix pan and sufRx an, which often help to form words indicating either the place or the time where or when the action indicated by the stem is executed, so that panlitonan may mean the time when that is done which is expressed by liton.
Becas, In Inibaloi, bekds means hulled rice, which in Ilocano is bagds, in Tagalog big as. Observe here again the indistinct (pepet) vowel- changing from V to 'a' and *i.'
Beam, This is an unknown word. It might go back to a form dalam, dayam, dagam.
Adug, In Ilocano and Pampanga (and old Tagalog?) alog means inundated, low-lying land (whence, tagalog, dweller on such lands) . The changes from 'd' to '1' and from *u' to 'o' are very common.
^^' ^' ^ Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 497
[Continuation of footnote numbered 65.]
Hoa-6. This is an unknown word. I refrain from speculation on a pos- sible identity of this word with similar words in other dialects. Leppas, In Ilocano, leppas means the time when something (a work, the year, the day, etc.) finishes or is finished. In Bon toe, lipash is a season beginning about July 1; lipash expresses the idea of finishing or accomplishing. Tioay. This is an unknown word. Tiguey, In Inibaloi, tige is the word for maize. In Ilocano, tigi is the
name of a plant whose tubers are fed to pigs. Quiling. In Ilocano, hiring designates the time when the rains cease. The change from 'V to 'r' offers no difficulty. I have no doubt that we have here the same word. E-sec. In Ilocano, isek is a kind of early rice. In Inibaloi, asak gives the idea of planting; the vowels are indistinct. In Bon toe, iseg^ ishek, issek express the idea of sowing, planting. *'If we remember that Igorot calendars divide the year generally into sections that are named from the characteristic field work undertaken at the various periods, or from plants flowering, or birds appearing, at such times, we may safely set down, I believe, the present calendar as coming fully within this general description."
See also, Jenks, Pub. P. /. Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 219, 220. Some additional information has been received through Mr. D. M. Thomas, division superintendent of Mountain Province. This was obtained through the interest of Mr. C. H. Magee, assistant director of Education. Mr. Thomas cites as his authority "Rev. M. Vanoverbergh, the Belgian missionary at Bauco, who is compiling a vocabulary of the local dialect and his accurracy cannot be questioned as in all his work he is exceedingly methodical and accurate." According to the above authority, the names of 11 periods of time used in Bauco, reckoned roughly from new moon to new moon, are as follows, beginning near the first of the Gregorian year: Luya, Wdo, The name of a red hairy caterpillar.
Lede'w. Panabd.
Upoc, Tiway, The name of a sparrow; going away.
Bacdkew, Sorghum. Adug.
Kitkiti. Kiling. Furious fighting.
Kidng.
The words as given in the document belong to the Lepanto-Igorot dialect as spoken in Bauco, with the exception of libtong. . The root of panlitonan is a Bauco form, although the word itself is not used by the Igorots of the township of Bauco. Libtong is an Ilocano word meaning a pond, marsh, or swampy place. The meaning of the words of the document that can be identified by Father Vanoverbergh are as follows: Atong. Heat.
Panlitonan, This is a Cayan word, meaning the time when the palay heads. Litun means pregnancy, but the term is applied, even in Bauco, to palay; with the prefix pan and the suffix an it is used only in Cayan. Beam, Rainy season. Wao. Thus accented, it means eight. Lepas. A caiiao celebrated after the harvest. Tegey. Coarse cloth. Esec. Seed; is-ec, to sow.
130429 3
498 ^^^<^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
BESAO '^ The material for this township furnishes some very interesting and important data. The township contains 8 barrios; namely, Besao, Payeo, Ambaguio, Padangaan, Abeo, Ayubo, Banguitan, and Agaua. The township, which was organized in 1904, con- tains a population of 3,502, all Igorot and pagan,' except the family of the secretary-treasurer, which is Christian. A list of officials since 1904 is given.
HISTORY OF THE BARRIO OF BESAO
We, the old men of this barrio, caused it to be written, stating the facts as they have been handed down to us from our forefathers, who were the original people of our barrio/'
Ganggang-a and his wife Casindo of Lamaoan came to make their home in a place, now known as Besao, owing to the fact that their means of making a living had become exhausted in Lamaoan. Ganggang-a said to his wife, "We would better leave our home and find another place where we can make our living." Ganggang-a had a sister by the name of Abay; when Ganggang-a and his wife decided to move, Abay, his sister, did not want to accompany them, but decided to go down to a town called Busalan, a barrio of Candon, in the Province of Locus [that is, Ilocos] Sur, where she eventually married. Ganggang-a and his wife went in the opposite direc- tion looking for a good place where they could settle; on their way they stopped at a place now called Besao to rest for a couple of days, during which time Ganggang-a looked airound for a place to make their home. He observed that the land around there was very fertile, so they decided to remain there. During the long time that they had to wait before their camote patches began to produce, they lived on nothing but vines and wild gabe.*' During the course of many years they had 4 children, 2 girls, named Lagmaya and Golla, and 2 boys whom they named Madalang and Laongan. After these children became men and women their father wanted them to get married, but there were no other men or women in the place now called Besao whom they could marry, so they intermarried. Mada- lang married his sister Lagmaya and Laongan married his sister Golla; Madalang had 6 children by Lagmaya, 4 boys and 2 girls, and Laongan had 5 children by Golla, 2 boys and 3 girls. When Madalang and his brother Laongan's children became old enough to marry, they intermarried with their sisters, with the exception of one, the youngest son of Madalang, because there was no girl left for him to marry. Therefore, Ganggang-a
•• For a description and partial history of Besao, see Perez, Igorrotes, 171-177.
•^ What follows is a confused account of a primitive origin myth. The marrying of brother and sister is very common in these stories. Of. Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 5, 121-127 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580), in which the brother and sister consult the tunnies of the sea, the doves of the air, and the earthquake, successively, in order to calm the qualms of the woman.
" Gabe, or taro, Colocasia esculentum (L.) Schott, a plant (both root and leaves) used extensively in the mountain districts. See Census of the Philippine Islands (1905), 4, 121; see also Merrill, E. D., A flora of Manila. Manila (1912), 134.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 499
said to the brothers of his youngest grandson that they must take their youngest brother to Loma-oan to find him a wife; so they went to Loma-oan and stayed there until their brother was married. Then they returned home bringing with them Langaya, the wife of their younger brother. Up to this time the people in the place now called Besao had increased to 18 persons, or 9 families. These were the forefathers of the people now living in Besao, with the exception of a few that came later from other towns.
When the population of the place now called Besao reached the number of 300, including men, women, and children, they considered themselves strong enough to go down to the coast to buy s^lt, without being molested. So Maxsil headed a crowd of 50 persons and started for the coast; when they came to the sitio of Locbuban in the confines of Santa Lucia, Ilocos Sur, they met a man and his son. When the man saw the Igorots with their spears and shields he ran away, leaving his son there, a boy about 9 years old; the Igorots captured the boy; some of them wanted to cut his head off, but Maxsil said, "Let him live, because I want him for my son (Maxsil being sterile), for this is the place where Abay, the sister of our grandfather, made her home and married, and who knows that this boy is not related to us." They discontinued their journey to the coast and returned home taking the boy, that had been captured, with them; the boy said that his father's name was Aquino and that his name was Quino. Maxsil brought Quiiio up in the place now called Besao; the boy Quino acquired the customs of the Igorots and became a very industrious man. Maxsil married Quiiio to one of his nieces by the name of Dalinsa, and they raised a family of 7 children, 3 boys and 4 girls. By this time Quino became homesick; he thought of his father and mother, and he asked the old men of the community if they would not allow him to go down to the coast to visit his parents. They agreed, and some of the old men accom- panied him; they took with them 70 men, armed with spears and shields in order that they might protect themselves against the people that might want to attack them. When they arrived near the town of Santa Lucia they halted and Quifio took with him 8 men as guards to go with him to his father's house. When they arrived at his father's house the door was closed, as it was night already. Quino called out, and his father asked, "Who is there?" Quino answered, "I am Quino, your son!" His father and mother became very angry when they heard this reply, as they thought it certain that their son, Quino, had been captured by tattooed Igorots. The old woman got a torch and the old man armed himself with a club, as he wanted to punish the man outside who claimed to be his son. As soon as they opened the door, they recognized their son; they were convinced that he was the son they had lost years ago, though he was naked and had long hair like a woman, as was the fashion of the Igorots in those days. The old man cried out, "Here is my son that was taken away by BusoSy*^^
''See Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 845 and 850], who says that the Igorots of the northeastern mountains of Benguet, the Kayapa district, are called Busaos. This word means enemies, and is not a tribal designa- tion. Scheerer [Pub. P. L Ethnol Surv. (1905), 2, pt. 2, 99] says, "The term busol is not so much a tribal name as a hateful designation of the head-hunting, cattle-thieving, and kidnaping Igorot living around and south of the mountain Data in what is sometimes called the Kabusolan or territory of the Busol." See also, Perez, Igorrotes.
500 The Philippine Journal of Science isu
and he has returned to me!*' When their neighbors heard this they all gathered around the place and all were very glad. When all the relatives had gathered together, Quiiio gave them a complete narrative of his life among the Igorots and he also told them that he was married to an Igorot woman. His relatives were very glad to see Quino again, and they ex- tended to him and his companions a kind welcome and hospitality. While they were in Santa Lucia, an order from the civil governor of the prov- ince of Ilocos Sur was received there, stating that every town must send to Vigan, the capital of said province and the official residence of the civil governor, their representative, to receive the cane of office as capitan of their town. Quiiio's parents and relatives advised him and his companions to go with them to Vigan; they consented to go, and when they arrived at Vigan they presented themselves to the civil governor there and requested that their rancheria might be organized into some kind of a government and that one of their men might be given authority to look after the community, in order that the name of Buso, by which name the people on the coast call the Igorots, might be changed. The civil governor appointed Quino as maestre de campo, and gave him the cane of authority, a cane mounted with a rooster-shaped gold knob. The rancheria was then formed into a town and was named Besao. Formerly the people called this country the Buso's territory; the word Besao was derived from the word Buso. After Quino had received the cane of command, they all started for home, by way of Candon. When they arrived at Candon they inquired for the relatives of Abay; they found them, and it resulted that Quino was de- scended from Abay and, therefore, was related to the Igorots that captured and cared for him. As a token of relationship, the relations and descend- ants of Abay granted to the Besao people half of the plain that lies between Santa Lucia and Candon, for them to make their homes there in case they wanted to remain there. (A long time ago, it was said that the plain east of Candon belonged to the Besao people.) When the necessary papers were made out for the granting of this plain to them, they returned to their town, Besao. At that time the civil governor had imposed on the people of Besao a yearly tax; to wit, 2 pounds of beeswax and a jar for the whole town. Any time that they took their taxes to Vigan they always returned by way of Candon; there they stopped and collected salt and cotton in payment for the rent of the land granted them by the descendants and relatives of Abay, who were occupying it at the time. After many years had passed, during which time the Besao people had always collected the rent for this land, the people of Candon send word to our old men to come to Candon and bring with them the papers regarding the land in order that they might renew it. Sablay and Mangudang took the papers down to Candon and, upon their arrival there, Sr. Alberto Guirnalda and Alferez Leon's father took the papers from them; they made out new papers and copies of them were given them. They returned home without having anyone look at them to see whether they were right or not; when they returned to Besao they carefully put them away; after a good many years they showed those papers to a sergeant of infantry, stationed at Sagada, a close-by town; great was their surprise when they heard the contents of the paper read to them, as follows: "The Besao people are not in any way to be restrained to pass back and forth to Candon and they are free to make their homes in any place they wish." This was entirely different from what they had imagined.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 501
At the nomination of another maestre de campo, to relieve the outgoing one whose term had expired, the old men went again to Vigan by way of Candon. They stopped there for a while to talk over the matter of the land, but the people of Candon denied everything, and when our people asked them to return to them the old papers about the land they informed them that they were burned up. That ended the collection of rentals for this land, and from that time on they had to p^y for all the salt and cotton that they got from there. They proceeded on their journey to Vigan, and when they arrived there they called on the civil governor and requested him that he change the title of their official from maestre de campo to that of gobernadorcillo. The civil governor granted them their request, and Mangudang was appointed with that title and became the first gober- nadorcillo of Besao, and after Mangudang had received the cane of office they all returned to their homes. About that time Sr. Antonio,^* a Spaniard, arrived at Cayan as comandante politico militar for the province of Le- panto; not very long after that a man from Vila, a barrio of the rancheria of Banco, made a trip to Besao, and upon his return he stole a carabao, but the people saw him and pursued him; they overtook him at a place called Anaman in the confines of Besao, and there they killed him. When the Vila people heard that one of their men had been killed by the Besao people, they made a complaint to Sr. Antonio, the comandante politico militar. Sr. Antonio sent a force of soldiers against Besao, headed by a captain of infantry. The people of Besao heard of this expedition and the old men gathered together and with the gobernadorcillo went to meet them. They displayed a white flag (a piece of white cloth) ; they took with them also a drum, and the gobernadorcillo carried his cane; when the captain of infantry saw all these things, he knew that the people of Besao were not alzados (outlaws). However, he arrested all the old men, together with the gobernadorcillo, and took them to Cayan, the official station of the comandante politico militar. Upon their arrival there, a great many people from different towns had gathered there, to witness the executions, for they believed that the Besao people were going to be shot. The Besao people were taken to the upper story of the comandancia, to the office of the comandante politico militar, and after he had heard their declarations he decided that they were peaceful people and gave them G strings, made of condimariy^ also some handkerchiefs; but, in the place of Mangudang, he appointed Gaoli gobernadorcillo for the three towns of Besao, Payeo, and Banguitan, and gave him the official cane; he also appointed other subor- dinate officials; such as teniente mayor and cabezas de barangay. The people from the other towns, who had come there to witness the executions, were greatly surprised to see that instead of these people being executed they had been given clothes and had been honored with official positions besides.
^° Probably Antonio Perea, the first comandante politico militar of Le- panto, who held office during the years 1852-56. See Perez, Igorrotes, 47 and Pub, P, I. Ethnol Surv. (1904), 3, 362.
"Condiman (Ilocano for red) is a red cloth used extensively by the Ilocano women for making the small upper covering worn by them, as well as for tablecloths, towels, and various other purposes, such as the decora- tion of buildings on certain holidays. It is also traded by the enterprising Ilocanos with the mountain peoples.
502 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
A list of the officials of Besao, covering the period of eighty- eight years follows. The* account bears the name of the presi- dente and secretary and the names and marks of the old men consulted.
ORIGIN AND LIFE OF THE FIRST MAN AND WOMAN THAT SETTLED IN THE BARRIO OF PAYED, BESAO, LEPANTO, MOUNTAIN PROVINCE
Angpeo and Dam-may, his wife, both of the rancheria of Tubo, Abra, came to make their home in Banay, where they lived all alone. A girl was born to them, and they named her Siding. They lived on nothing hut wild gabe, bananas, and camote-moroy- as they had no rice nor anything else. When Siding grew up to be a woman, a young man from the ranch- eria of Deydey, subprovince of Bontoc, came to their place and married her. After being married many years, 3 children were born to them, 2 boys and a girl; they named the boys Baccangen and Daguillo and the girl, Biana. When these children became men and women, a young man from Tubo, whose name was Bulalacao, and who was somewhat related to Angpeo, the original settler, came there, and after staying there for some time with them married Biana. He told his father-in-law that he would go and bring his sisters over from Tubo and they could marry his two sons; he went after them, and when they arrived (their names were Un-nanay and Licona) Baccangen married Un-nanay and Daguillo married Licona. Bulalacao had 7 children with Biana, 4 boys and 3 girls; 6 chil- dren were born to Baccangen and Un-nanay, 3 boys and 3 girls; 7 children were born to Daguillo and Licona, 3 boys and 4 girls. The children of Bulalacao, Baccangen, and Daguillo, when they became old enough to marry, married among themselves. By that time they had increased to 30 persons ; then people from other places began to arrive and settle among them. Among the new settlers there was a woman named Caducali; nobody knew where she came from. She brought with her a stalk of rice; she gave this stalk of rice to Cote, the headman of this little community, and said to him, "This is the best food for people, take it and plant it in a seed bed, and when the stalks have grown big enough transplant them into swampy ground." She also said, "You had better move into another place and make the place where you are living into rice land." Therefore, they moved to the uplands and named it Payeo and turned the land from which they moved into payeos (rice paddies). From that time on rice was raised to a great extent." The population had also considerably increased, but owing to so many people coming from other towns it is impossible for us to learn the origin of all of them.
THE BEGINNING OF ENMITY BETWEEN IGOROTS AND CHRISTIANS
Langlangquioan, Oaquing, Pasicat, Lobdoy, and Bocasi, of the towns of Besao and Payeo, went down to the coast to find some work in the town of Santa Maria, Ilocos Sur. At the east side of this town they met some hunters from Santa Maria, who were looking for a dog that had strayed
" The camote moro a yellow-fleshed, red-skinned, sweet potato, grown more or less commonly throughout the Archipelago. — Barrett.
" The Ifugao myth of the origin of the lowland or irrigated rice is very similar to this. — Beyer.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 503
from them. When they saw the Igorots they thought that the Igorots had stolen their dog, as it was known that Igorots eat dogs; the Christians persuaded the Igorots to follow them, telling the Igorots that one of them had some work for them to do; they went with the Christians, who had them that night to sleep inside of a strong bamboo fence; when they were sound asleep, the Christians killed every one of them, with the exception of Bocasi, who succeeded in escaping. The Christians buried the bodies of their victims in Santa Lucia.'* Upon Bocasi's return home, he told his townspeople what had happened to them. Thereupon the people of Besao and Payeo planned a head-hunting trip to Santa Maria; they started for that place, and when they reached the outskirts of the town they saw a young man carrying ears of corn on his head. They killed him and cut off his head, arms, and legs and then returned home again, full of joy that they had avenged themselves for the cruelty of the Christians. From that time on, the Besao and Payeo people stopped going to Santa Maria until the time when Quino went to Vigan and was appointed maestre de campo; then the Igorots and the Santa Maria people made peace, with the friendly help of the people from Santa Lucia.
MURDER OF A YOUNG BOY
Pasingan and one of his sons, a boy about 7 years old, named Bulay-oc, went to Suagayan River, now in the confines of Angaqui, to fish. While fishing, instantly and without notice, they found themselves surrounded by Busos from Cagubatan.'* Pasingan's intentions were to make a stand against the Busos and defend his son, but he saw that it was useless, because he was greatly outnumbered, and that if he did not run away he also would be beheaded. The Busos cut off the boy's head, arms, and legs, and left the body there; when the Busos had gone, Pasingan returned and took the body of his son to Payeo. After three months, the whole town of Payeo went on a head-hunting expedition to Cagubatan; on their way they encountered the Cagubatan Busos, who were also on a head-hunting expedition; fighting began between the two parties, which resulted in a defeat for the Payeo people, 2 of their men being killed, Matel-lo and Yotayot, and their heads, arms, and legs being cut off. When the Cagubatan Busos had gone, the Payeo people went back to the place for the bodies of their companions, which they took back with them to their town, after which they had a mourning canao that lasted about three months. After the termination of this canao, they selected some of their men to go to Cagubatan to recover, through purchase or exchange of gold, putic (jars), and brass gongs, the heads, arms, and legs of the men that had been killed. They started out, and upon reach- ing Sumadel they found a leg of one of their people; they held a little
'* For relations between the Igorots and other Philippine peoples, see Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 20, 258, 275, 276; 21, 149; 23, 280; 43, 77; and 48, 82, 83. For their relations with Spaniards, see 14, 281-326; 17, 306; 19, 161, 255; 20, 262-303, 306; 28, 158, 167, 238; 31, 261, 262; 37, 245-249; 38, 228; 43, 76, 77; 48, 56, 57, 68, 70, 73, 81-90, 128, 131; 50, 170; 51, 49, 56; and 52, 215.
"See Beyer, This Journal, Sec. D (1913), 8, 94, and Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 21, for interesting accounts of the customs and beliefs of this place.
504 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9h
canao over it and then proceeded on their way. At Masla they found another leg, also one at Lobong; they found out that the people of Tadian and Cayan were in possession of the arms. When the Payeo people saw that all the neighboring towns were their enemies, they turned toward home, and when they went through Sumadel they redeemed the leg they found there with a putic worth about 100 pesos; then they went home. They told the people about the arms and legs and where they were; the old men then decided to send other men after the heads of their people that were killed. Banaoi and Dagdagnen were chosen for this errand; they took with them brass gongs, jars, and gold. When they reached Cagubatan they informed the people there that they had come to exchange gold, putic, and brass gongs for the heads taken by them from their people; the Cagubatan people killed them and then took their gold, jars, and brass gongs. The Payeo people waited many days for the return of Banaoi and Dagdagnen, and when they did not return they sent some of their men to look for them. When these men arrived at Sumadel, they commenced to kill the people there; when they had taken four heads they returned to their town, highly satisfied at being avenged; upon their arrival in their town they held a canao that lasted about four months. Shortly after this, the Sumadel people also started on a head-hunting expedition against the people of Payeo and Besao, but when they were halfway between Sumadel and Besao, a man that was gathering firewood saw them and ran to inform the Payeo and Besao people; immediately these two towns started out to meet the Sumadel expedition, which prevented the Sumadel people from getting into their towns. At the mountain Batay the two parties met and had a fight; the Sumadel people were defeated, and one of their warriors was beheaded by the Payeo and Besao people. When the people of Sumadel and Masla realized that they had no show against these two towns, Payeo and Besao, Quabang and his wife Ecyey decided to go to Vigan^* to make a complaint to Sr. Galbey," the commandant of infantry. Upon arriving there they presented themselves to the commandant of infantry and said to him, "We, husband and wife, have come to ask your protection against the people of Payeo and Besao who are exterminating us, and if you will go and punish them we will give you a piece of gold, in the shape and about the size of a dog.'* The comandante of infantry went to Payeo with 30 soldiers; upon arriving at a place called Sacaan, a sitio close to Payeo, the old men of Payeo went out to meet them with a white flag, made out of the bark of a tree, and took with them also things to eat, among them some chickens. The comandante made friends with them, and went to Pandangaan and remained there five days in order to observe the people, and when he was satisfied that the Payeo and Besao people were not bad people he told Quaban and his wife that their complaint was false and that they must go and get the gold, the size of a dog, that they had promised to give him. When they brought the gold, the comandante was greatly surprised, because it was not as big as the size of a dog, but it was only as big as a
" The capital of Ilocos Sur Province.
" Possibly the Col. Guillermo Galvey mentioned by Santos, Informe sobre las minas de cobre de las rancherias de Mancayan, Suyuk, Bumucun y Agbao. Manila (1862), 18.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 505
finger in the shape of a dog; the comandante insisted that he wanted the gold they had promised him and that they must find enough to enable them to make it the size of a puppy. They got together all the gold that the people of Masla and Sumadel had, and made it in the shape that the Spaniard told them, but still they had not enough gold. Then Quabang asked the Payeo people, as a favor to him, to give him some gold and thereby their tov^ns would make friends and forgive the wrongs that they had done them. The Payeo people gave Quabang two pairs of earrings, but still there was not enough; then Quabang gave to the Spaniard his unmarried sister, by the name of Dayeman, whom the Spaniard took away with him, and who has never returned to her home. Before the Spaniard went away, he appointed Paguien maestro de campo for Payeo and ordered him to Vigan to receive his instructions from the authorities there. About a year after they decided to go to Vigan, but they thought that Buluan should go to Vigan and take the place of Paguien as maestro de campo, because Paguien was a small man and thin and it would be a disgrace to them, while Buluang was a big man — fat and big headed — and his eyes were like the eyes of a carabao. They did so, and when they arrived at Vigan Buluan appeared there as maestro de campo. The authorities then told them that if possible they should quit their head-hunting. From that time on, Buluan was known as maestro de campo. Upon their arrival home, Buluan made a trip to the neighboring towns and invited them to make peace with each other; peace was established with all the towns that he visited. Later on he made another trip to Tanobong, taking with him Olbanes, Macon, Cangoy, Pacodan, and Logsing, with the intention of visiting the towns in the eastern country, but on their way they were met by Busos from Mainit who killed Buluan, the maestro de campo, Olbanes, Macon, and Cangoy. Pacdogan and Logsing made their escape and ran back to Payeo for help; all the men of the community started at once in pursuit. When they arrived at the place the Mainit Bus6s had gone, but they found the bodies of their companions and took them back to Payeo. About a half a year after, a comandante politico militar arrived at Cayan, and the Payeo people complained to him of the murder of Buluan and his companions; the comandante sent soldiers to Mainit, but the soldiers found nobody there, so they burned up all the houses that were in Mainit.
The town of Payeo was reduced to a barrio the same time as Besao; it was part of the town of Besao, originally. Many years after it was reduced to a barrio we succeeded in having it organized into a town again and were then separated from Besao again; a gobemadorcillo and other subordinate officials were appointed for Payeo. We were a separate town for more than four years, when we were again annexed to Besao; after many years we were again separated from Besao and formed into a separate town. When the American Government established the pro- vincial government in Lepanto, we were again annexed to Besao as a barrio.
BARRIO OF PADANGAAN
The original families of the barrio of Padangaan and their lives, as told us by our forefathers, are as follows:
Quindaguen and his wife Palonet from Payeo were the original people that settled at Padangaan; they had planted a piece of land there with
506 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
camotes and other vegetables, so they went and made their home there; while there they had 5 children, 3 boys and 2 girls. Smallpox then broke out at Payeo; the people there were very much frightened over it, because that was the first time that that disease ever appeared among them; consequently a good many of the Payeo people moved to Padangaan; in this manner Padangaan became inhabited and so Padangaan is the off- spring of Payeo.
In 1902, Padangaan became a barrio of Besao. A short list of its officials since that time and the names and marks of the old men consulted follow.
BARRIO OF AGAUA
The original families of the barrio of Agaua, as it has been told to us from generation to generation are as follows:
Bodoos, Seppa his wife, and his two daughters, from the rancheria of Fidelizan, of the town of Sagada, had a she hog who went to have her pigs at a place called Agaua. That was before anyone lived at that place. Bodoos went after her but he did not succeed in getting her home, so he built himself a little hut there in which he lived while taking care of the hogs. While there, he noticed that the place was good for planting, as it was swampy; therefore, he decided to make their home there; he brought his family over and they were the first settlers in Agaua. When Bodoos's daughters, who were named Bal-i and Canopa, had grown up, they married two young men, one from Fidelizan, named Pag-ha, and the other one from Tubo, Abra, named Tobtaben. Pag-ha married Bal-i and had 2 sons by her, who were named Basicon and Pilingen; Tobtaben married Canopa and had 3 children by her, 2 boys, Olao and Atioag, and 1 girl named Dal-ling. When the sons of Pag-ha and Tobtaben grew up to be men, they went to Fidelizan to get married; Fidelizan is not very far from Agaua, only a mountain separating the two; after they had all got married, they returned to Agaua with their wives; in this manner the population of Agaua increased also by many peopie coming from other places.
Lists of the officials of the barrio follow. The barrio was at first annexed to Sagada, and in 1908 it became a part of Besao.
VARIOUS EVENTS
During Domeguias's time as gobernadorcillo, the towns of Mainit, Gui- naang, and Dalican made a combined head-hunting trip to the town of Agaua, without any cause whatever that the people of Agaua were aware of. They killed 11 people, and the rest of the Agaua people, not being able to hold their own, ran away; then the head-hunters plundered the town and took everything away with them, as palay, putic (jars), brass gongs, hogs, and everything that they could find, after which they set fire to the town and not a house or granary was left standing. The people escaped in all directions, some went to Besao, some to Payeo, others went down to the coast and to other places. Five months after this incident, Domeguias, the gobernadorcillo, called all the people back to Agaua; some returned and others remained where they had made their homes by that time. When they had rebuilt their town again, they thought that they
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 507
would take the matter up with the authorities. So Domeguias, the gober- nadorcillo, and others went to Vigan to see the civil governor. After Dome- guias made his complaint to the governor, the governor sent for the comandante politico militar of Bontoc, in whose jurisdiction Agaua was at that time, and transferred the complaint to him. The comandante politico militar and Domeguias then returned to the mountains; on their way the comandante horsewhipped Domeguias and would have killed him had he not succeeded in making his escape. The comandante whipped Domeguias because he did not make his complaint direct to him; he was angry and ashamed for being called to Vigan. After Domegiuas ran away, nothing more was done about the complaint.
About that time the population of Agaua had increased considerably again and Agoyoc was appointed gobernadorcillo. Shortly after Agoyoc was appointed, the Guinaang Busos made another head-hunting expedition to Agaua in which they killed 9 people. The people of Agaua then made a complaint direct to the comandante politico militar of Bontoc, and he had the town of Guinaang set on fire and burned up.
During the time of Malaggay as gobernadorcillo, the town of Sacasa- can sent a head-hunting expedition against Agaua and killed Pagdang while he was getting firewood in the nearby mountains. And while Somi- lep was gobernadorcillo, the Guinaang people killed a man by the name of Diaoyao, of Agaua, while he was hunting in the mountains above the town.
While Docal-las was gobernadorcillo of Agaua, the Dalican people killed Anamong while he was working in his rice fields and then entered the town and killed 2 more people.
During Masidong's time as gobernadorcillo, the Mainit people killed Ban- ganay and Duquey while they were planting camotes.
When Baygo was gobernadorcillo, the Sadanga people killed Bandideo and Paquio w^hile they were cutting rice at Libo.
While Odlas was concejal of Agaua, the Tococan people killed Pampa- mayan at Bontoc, where he was studying in the industrial school.
All the above-mentioned events have taken place just as they are related and we witness it with our signature. [The signatures and marks follow.]
BARRIO OF BANGUITAN
We, the old men of Banguitan, herein relate the origin of the first people that settled in Banguitan, as accurately as it has been handed down to us by our forefathers.
Gayaman and his wife Pingan, together with 5 more families from Dali- can, Cayos, in the confines of Cervantes, went to make their homes in a place called Cablad, in the confines of Besao; they emigrated from their town, Dalican, because they were afraid of other enemies, as many of their townspeople had been killed by Busos. During the first year that they lived at Cablad, they were engaged in herding their swine; one of Gaya- man*s hogs gave birth in a forest near Cablad. After Gayaman found her there he built a house for himself to live in, while he was taking care of his hogs; later on his wife came to live with him there, and then they decided to remain there and make that their home. This place was known as Banguitan. Their relatives, still living at Cablad, finally came to make their home at Banguitan also. In this manner the barrio of Cablad became abandoned and Banguitan became settled and the people are living there to
508 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
this day. The above-mentioned people are our forefathers, the original families of this barrio. We are, however, unable to find out the origin of each of us living here; neither do we know in what year our town was made into a barrio; we only know that when a gobernadorcillo was appointed for Besao, we were annexed to it and a cabeza de barangay, who is considered as the father of the barrio, was appointed.
Lists of officials of various periods follow. At one time the barrio was annexed to the municipality of Bagnen, but in 1908 it became a part of Besao.
COMMON CUSTOMS AS THEY ARE OBSERVED ALL THROUGH THIS TOWNSHIP
Birth of a child. — The husband of a woman that is pregnant and about to give birth cannot do the following things: (a) Plant bananas; (b) erect a post of a house; (c) cut down a tree. When the child is born, the father must not do the following: (a) Build walls; (b) cut down trees; (c) lead carabaos, cattle, or horses; (d) wade a river in going to another town before three months have past; (e) climb a tree or to the top of a house until the child has teeth.'*
Marriage customs. — The parents of the young man and woman, after they know that their son and daughter wish to marry, call all their relatives together and kill a suckling pig. When they are about ready to eat, the father of the girl goes to the young man's house and takes him to the house of the girl. On their way back, they watch very closely for rats, alligators, or snakes; they also look carefully for a hawk or a crow flying over them. If they see any of these animals, the wedding is postponed for that day. If they see any of these animals for the second and third time, the young man and girl are not allowed to marry each other. During the first year of their wedded life, the husband cannot go to another town, especially if he has to cross a river.
Wedding. — After a man and woman have been married a year, a big wedding feast is prepared, for which they kill carabaos, cattle, horses, hogs, dogs, and chickens, according to the property. For two days after this feast the married couple must not eat anything. The young girls of the town stay with the wife and watch her for seven days and nights, in order that she may not sleep with her husband. For three years she must not go into another town; also she is not allowed to do the following things: (a) Eat in another house for five months after the wedding; (b) work on walls; (c) chop on a live tree; and upon going to another town for the first time she must kill a chicken upon her return.
Customs at the death of a person. — When a person becomes seriously ill, the parents or relatives kill 2 hogs and have a canao. The moment that the sick person dies, they kill 2 hogs again. Two hours after the death an- other hog is killed. They recline the body against the ladder of the Rouse and wail and cry over the dead. After their lamentations are over, they kill a chicken, and when they are about to bury the dead another chicken is killed. After the burial a she hog is killed; two days after the burial another chicken is killed; and a month after the death another hog will be killed; after four months, 2 hogs and 3 chickens are killed; three months
'• See Jenks [Pub. P, L Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 59-62] for a discussion of childbirth and care of children among the Bontocs.
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 509
after this caiiao, 1 hog and 2 chickens are killed again; four months after this, they kill 3 hogs and 2 chickens; they wait four months more and then kill 1 hog and 2 chickens more. After all these ceremonies are over the parents and relatives can depart, but if they should live in another town and there is a river to cross they cannot cross for a year.'"
Customs in the building of a house. — When a man has started to chop timbers to build a house for himself, he cannot go to another place or town until the house is completed. When he builds his house, even though it is raised already, and he digs up a toad, rat, snake, or other animal, the house is moved to another place. Also, should it rain or should a rainbow appear in the sky, while the house is under construction, or a crow or a hawk fly over it, the house is moved to a different place.
The foregoing is a description of our customs that we have inherited from our forefathers.
CAYAN '^
The barrios of the township of Cayan are Cayan, Tadian, Balaoa, Lubon, Masla, Sumadel, and Tue. **In 1844, owing to the great many dangers that threatened this town, arising from the hostilities of neighboring towns, from the stealing of their cattle, hogs, chickens, etc., and from being compelled to pay tribute to other towns, the people decided to go to Bucay, the former capital of Abra, and request the authorities there that a Spanish official be sent to their town/' Thereupon Spanish- appointed officials were established in Cayan, which became the
'^ Of mortuary customs among the Igorots, Quirante [Blair and Robert- son, ut supra, 20, 274, 275 (1624)] says: "When one of those barbarians dies, they do not bury him for many days, for, as they say, they pass one month, during which period they amass quantities of food about the deceased, to whom they give his share as well as the others. Then they continue to prick the body, and, as they say, they draw off or suck put the humors until the body is left dry. When that time comes they wrap it in their blankets, and fasten buyos (betel) and other things about the waist for the journey. Some are buried in a sitting posture and placed with their backs against their shields, in caves under the rocks, the mouths of which are stopped with stones. Others they set in the trees, and they carry food for so many days after having left them in either one of those places." Compare other mortuary customs of Philippine peoples in Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 129-141 (Loarca, Relation, ca., 1580) ; 7, 194-196 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 133 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609) ; 40, 79-82 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 165, 166 (Combes, Historia, 1667); 40, 337-339 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44). Compare also the ceremony among the Ifugaos described by Beyer and Barton, This Journal^ Sec. D (1911), 6, 227-249; among the Bontocs in Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 74-80. See also Worcester, This Journal (1906), 1, 850; Perez, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1904), 1, 201; and the manuscript Memoria aprocsimada, op. cit.
"^ For a description and partial history of Cayan, see Perez, Igorrotes, 153-162. It is located 9 kilometers from Cervantes.
510 The Philippine Journal of Science leu
capital of Lepanto. In 1883, Luis Sarela ^^ became the chief official. '*He took great interest in the people and in their future welfare; he ordered the planting of potatoes, cabbages, beans, cacao, coffee, mangos, and other fruits." The people, however, paid little attention to the order, and a penalty of imprisonment or whipping was imposed for neglect. In 1883, the capital was transferred to Cervantes, as Cayan lacked good building sites. The first friar missionary entered Cayan in 1881, and the first teacher was appointed in 1885. Lists of the officials of the va- rious barrios are given. The following customs are described:
CUSTOMS OF THE PEOPLE
The canao that is celebrated by the whole town is called begnas '^ which is celebrated twice a year, before the rice planting and the rice cutting time; this is the biggest canao that is held by the whole town; it lasts from two to three days, during which the people dance, play ganzas, and sing. This canao is held to ascertain whether the rice crop will be a good one or not; they tell it by the gall of the hogs that are killed for this caiiao; if the galls are big and full it is a sign that there will be a good crop, but if they are small and empty it is a sign that the crop will be small ; "^ during the time that the hogs are killed no one from the town is allowed to go out anywhere, nor is anyone from another town permitted to come into the town.
The canaos that were handed down to us from one generation to another by our forefathers are called bayas, baquid, obaya, and palis."
Bayas is a caiiao in which 4 to 6 hogs are killed, also carabaos, cattle, and horses; that is, if the people are rich. They sing, play on their ganzas, and dance. The persons that celebrate this canao cannot leave their houses for nine days and they cannot go to another town for three months. (This canao is held by married people, and is celebrated only three times by the same persons.) '^
Baquid is somewhat like the bayas canao, but in this caiiao ganzas are not played, nor do they sing or dance; it is only held once a year. (This canao is held for the dead.)
Obaya is a caiiao in which a hog is killed; no ganzas are played in this caiiao; the old men come together and eat; after a while they all go back home again. (This caiiao is for the purpose of finding out anything that happened in the town, such as the discovery of a thief, etc.)"®
" Luis Sarela y Figueroa became comandante politico militar of Le* panto in February, 1879, and governed the district until August, 1883. Besides moving the capital, he encouraged education and built a trail from Cervantes to the boundary of the district. See Perez, Igorrotes, 58, 59.
" See footnote 16.
•" See footnote 31.
" Compare this account with that on page 489.
•* See footnote 44. The ceremony here described is similar to the Ifugao bumaiyah. — Beyer.
'• This ceremony is the same as the Ifugao ubaya. — Beyer.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 511
Palis is a cafiao in which a hog is killed at night time; they beat the drums and sing; this cafiao is held for the sick, in order that the people afflicted with enlarged intestines, the poor, and pale and weak people may be cured; the next morning they kill another hog which they call sabusab (meaning the end of the cafiao) . These are the only cures for sickness that the people believe in.
SICKNESS
When a person gets seriously sick, the parents or relatives send for an old woman, who is called baylan (priestess). This woman prays to the anito and then speaks to the sick person, in a trembling voice, saying, "We have caused you to be sick because you have failed to offer up to us our customary sacrifice (a hog or a chicken) ; we have made you sick, so that from now on you may not forget again; we may not only make you sick, but we may kill you also." The patient then answers and says, "Yes I will sacrifice to thee all thou asketh; though I have it not, I will find it, but I pray thee, restore my health to me again.'* In the meantime the parents or relatives prepare a coconut shell of tapuy over which they pray and say, "If it be true, that thou, the anito, hast made him sick, we pray thee to restore him again to health so that he will be able to make the sacrifices that thou hast asked of him.'* If the anito, so prayed to, is the one that made the person sick, the patient will get well as soon as the sacrifice is offered; if the patient does not get well, another old women is called, who goes through the same ceremonies as the other one; this is kept up until some old woman baylan finds the anito who made the person sick."
SETTLING QUESTIONS AND COMPLAINTS
Old men only, who have reached a certain age, are allowed to take part in the settling of disputes and complaints of their townspeople. As soon as a complaint is made, the old men are called together to investigate the complaint. A dog and 2 chickens, of the same size and color, are prepared. The 2 chickens represent the 2 litigants; the chickens are killed by beating them with small sticks; then they are held over the fire and partly roasted, with the feathers on;'' after that they cut them up and take out the galL If the galls of the chickens are of equal size, they counsel the litigants to make a friendly settlement, which will settle their dispute forever. The dog and the chickens are then cooked and eaten. The litigants pay for them as well as for other things that are used up during the settlement of their question. Should the galls be of different size, the one whose chicken has the larger gall loses the case. The old men then will inform the one whose chicken had the larger gall that the case has been decided against him; then he will be obliged to make good whatever there is stated in the complaint. For instance, if he had stolen a horse, he would have to return the horse or make good in some other
" Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra; 5, 129 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ; 40, 336, 337 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44) ; 43, 108, 109 (Ortiz, •Practica del ministerio, ca. 1742) ; 43, 310-319 (Present beliefs in Luzon, 1905).
•• The object of holding the chicken over the fire is to bum the feathers off — ildgim» — Beyer.
512 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
way, with money or another horse, and the same way with cattle, carabaos, or hogs. The old men who take part in the settlement of a case are responsible and have to answer for everything, should the same case ever come up again. Questions can only be settled in the aforestated manner, when the litigants are not in any way alike in age, stature, or in any other manner; but if they are of about the same age, height, etc., the old men put a sharp piece of iron on each litigant's head inserted to the depth of 2 or 3 millimeters, and he that bleeds less wins the case. Should the party who lost the case not be satisfied with the old men's decision, he has the right to call in the old men from a neighboring town; when they arrive, the old men that decided the case will also be called together. The old men from the neighboring town speak first; they state their arguments and ask that the question be reopened and the decision given be revoked and given according to the petition of the man against whom the case was decided. The old men that decided the case in the first place say: "Our decision stands good, because we decided it by the gall of sacrificed chickens that showed that he is the guilty man, but if you insist that the decision be revoked first restore to life the dog and the chickens from which the galls were taken, before we can give another decision."
After the old men have questioned both the litigants, they make them take an oath of the most horrible nature; such as, "May your belly swell up, from which you will die if you have declared falsely;" or, "May you become blind, if what you have spoken be false;" "May you be eaten up by a boa, if you did not speak the truth." The old men set fire to a bundle of pine wood, split into small pieces, which they then stick into a shell full of tapuy. At this the litigants answer, "I swear," accompanied with howls and shrieks, signifying that he who lied will be punished by the anito according to the oath that he took."
The expenses, including the cost of dogs and chickens, incurred in the settlement of questions are paid by both the litigants.**
CERVANTES ^^
Cervantes is the capital of Lepanto. Seven barrios belong to it; namely, Concepcion, Rosario, and San Juan, inhabited by Ilocanos and other Christians; and Dain, Malaya, Brooke-Din- widdie, and Pilipil, inhabited by Igorots. In 1908 Cervantes had
'• Cf. Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663 (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 40, 78, 79), who gives the following forms of oaths used by the Filipinos at the time of the conquest: "May I die;" "May I be eaten by the crocodile;" "May I turn into a monkey." "When the chiefs of Manila and Tondo swore allegiance to our Catholic sovereigns, in the year one thousand five hundred and seventy-one, they confirmed the peace agreements and the subjection with an oath, asking 'the sun to pierce them through the middle, the crocodiles to eat them, and the women not to show them any favor or wish them well, if they broke their word.' "
^ See page 518. The expenses may be regarded as the fee paid by the one losing the case.
** For description of Cervantes, see Perez, Igorrotes, 115-124. Cervantes is called by some an Ilocano town, because of the numbers of that race living there.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 513
3,787 inhabitants, of whom 1,705 were Christians and the rest Igorots. The account of Cervantes sent to the Philippine Library- was written in 1908 by Sabas Gaerlan, a native of Tagudin, who had Hved in various parts of Lepanto since 1873. His manu- script shows that he had received a fair education. The account is simply and charmingly written, and all of it deserves publica- tion. Space and the main subject in hand, however, permit only the following excerpt to be made :
OTHER CUSTOMS OF IGOROTS
When an Igorot wants to celebrate a fiesta or perform a canao once in four or five years, he kills many hogs, carabaos, and cattle, and calls in all the rich men from neighboring towns and all the poor people in his own town. This fiesta is performed so that he may be honored by his visitors and all who know him. W^hen the canao is begun all the hogs to be used are gathered together and the carabaos and cattle are all tied up to trees. They dance accompanied by ganzas, and make an offering and ask Cabunian^'* (God) to favor the man performing the canao and to give him good health, and pray to the anito and the souls of their dead ancestors not to destroy his plants and not to kill his animals so that he may use these animals to perform another canao for them (another canao for the anito) ; this is the custom of the people in Malaya. The people of Dain and Pilipil have another name for this canao bayas,"' and it is per- formed with ganzas before they kill the hogs; first they drink tapuy on the day when the visitors arrive, and the next day they kill the hogs, carabaos, and cattle that they have prepared, and after this, one old man makes an offering to Lomaoig (God)^ to give good health, good thoughts, and customs to the rich man that performed the bayas; and the old man also calls the souls (anito) of their dead ancestors to help them in praying
•^ See footnote 40.
•" See footnote 44.
•*See Beyer [This Journal, Sec. D (1913), 8, 96 and 97] for Bontoc stories of Lumawig. I am indebted also to the same authority for the following: "Lumawig is a famous Igorot, Bontoc, and Ifugao culture hero. He is only one of many ancestral deities. Jenks [Pub. P, /. EthnoL Snrv, (1905), 1, 174, 200-204, 216, 217] is in error in speaking of Lumawig as a supreme being." Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, recites a story of Lumawig. His wife is Bangan, and the two children, Ubban, the boy, and Bugan, the girl, or Cabigat and Suyan. A sample of the manner in which the missionaries were able to turn the old stories to account is related by Perez, Igorrotes, 142, note: "Father Rufino Redondo says, * Making use of their beliefs (since they worship four gods called Lumauig, Bugan, Cabigat, and Bangan), I informed them that we also worship God (one and triune), and that Bugan, the wife of Lumauig, is no other than the most holy Virgin Mary, spouse of the Holy Spirit, and Mother of the Eternal Word. I ended my talk by exhorting them to obedience and submission to the Spanish crown.' " [The apparent inconsistency in the names mentioned in the above quotations is probably due to the fact that the authors cited obtained their information from different persons or in different clan districts. — Beyer.]
130429 4
514 The Philippine Journal of Science 1^14
to Lomaoig that he may give a better living or v^rhatever they have asked and that they may have sufficient of everything when they have their bayas (canao).
It is a custom of the people in the same barrios to have a canao v/hich they call pacde or begnas, either before or after working or harvesting; this is for all people, and it is performed in the abong (tribunal). The ceremony that they perform is the killing of a hog, but if the gall of the hog they killed is not good they kill another and continue to do so until they meet a good and full gall. As soon as they see that the gall of the hog they killed is good, they cut the hog into pieces after it is burned and ask Lomaoig or Cabunian (both Gods) to give them a good crop. If it is time for harvesting, or for good luck in the planting, they perform pacde or begnas before they begin their work. No one can go to work the day just after the canao, and they are [not] allowed to go to the country to work [until] three days after the performance of pacde or begnas if the gall of the first hog they killed is good and full, but if they had to kill [two] or three times they are longer delayed in being allowed to go to the country to work and it will [be] five or six days then before they are allowed to do any work.
If any one of them falls sick, it is their custom to call an old woman to make the canao, and if she says that 1 hog is needed the parents or relatives of the sick person must kill 1 hog; if the anito says that they must perform bayas, they must do it, and if he says that they must perform tobag they must do it also. The ceremony for tobag is the killing of a hog which they offer to Cabunian in order that the sick person may be cured. If one of them dies, they must kill a hog, and if the gall of the hog is good and full they bury the dead; but, if the gall is not good, they kill another hog and keep on doing so until they find a hog that has a good gall. The dead person is kept in the house for two or more days or until they find a good gall; after the dead person is buried, and before the separation of the visitors in front of the dead house, an old man relates a story and says: **There is Cabunian or Lomaoig looking at the level land where he puts the people who do not know their homes and are cruel. 'I make the earth sink,' he says and *I again make other mountains.* The world is flooded, and after the water becomes low there are the mountains; two people are left, a man named Gomatan and a woman named Bangan. Gomatan lived in Gangyango Mountain, a part of Malaya, and Bangan lived in Caoitan Mountain, a part of Ifugao, Banaue. When Gomatan saw a fire in Caoitan Mountain he went on a small wooden raft called salibao (drum used by the Igorots), and when they saw each other they were brother and sister. They waited in Caoitan until the water became small, and there they saw the other mountains and rivers. Cabunian saw them there and went and married them, though they did not want to get married; but Cabunian took a runo (stem of a large grass) and split it and then he put them close together and said: *This runo is only one, but can be divided into two and can be joined together again; you, Gomatan and Bangan, get married and become father and mother of many people.' The people in- creased in number and they did not bury the ones who first died; then Cabunian came down to the earth and told the people that the dead may not become obnoxious and 'After burying the dead you should make prayers and offerings so that you may not be affected by any kind of diseases.'
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 515
After they make a prayer or offering, they go to some running water and bathe themselves and after that all the people may go home."*'
CONCEPCION ^®
The township of Concepcion has 6 barrios, as follows : Alf onzo, Ananaao, Concepcion, Sigay, Mateo, and Tubaline. After giving the lists of officials for these barrios, the manuscript continues :
HISTORY OF THE PEOPLE, THEIR CUSTOMS, AND LIFE
The first condition of a child when he is born and the things he does until the end of his life are the following :
When a child is born, the old men or women perform a canao which is observed as an offering to God so that the child will have a successful life in the future. The ceremony they observe in this canao is the killing of a hog or a chicken.*^
The parents of the child, whether he is a boy or a girl, when he becomes one or two years old, make an agreement with the parents of another child of another family to marry these children, but sometimes this agreement is not carried out.
When this child, boy or girl, is about 10 years old and can do any kind of work, the parents let him go to any place where he can earn a good living or he helps his parents to find food for the family.
As the boy reaches the age of 18 or less, he wants to get married and begins the performances of some canaos according to the Igorot customs.
When this boy becomes a full-grown man, and old enough to think of the future, he builds himself a house to live in. This married couple diligently work to find enough provisions for their living and they often do the same thing as their parents did,, according to their customs; this married couple, though they were united together or living in the same house, have not the right to get the dowries given by their parents, unless the wedding ceremonies are celebrated.
When the husband and the wife want to get the dowries from their parents they tell the old men (principales) of the town that they will celebrate their marriage. The parents of both must agree to it, together with the old men of the town. The day before the marriage they prepare all the things needed for the wedding.
After the preparations are made they summon the people to come to attend the marriage ceremony. On the wedding day there is much happi- ness, and the husband and the wife as well as the visitors are full of joy. On this day the parents of both bequeath some property, such as lands, animals, house, and other things, to the married couple. In this
**' One Igorot version of the flood and the new creation. Compare with the similar story in Beyer, This Journal^ Sec. D (1913)) 8, 96. Note that in the Bontoc and Igorot story there is the same reluctance of the brother and sister to be married. Compare also the Ifugao myths related by Beyer, ut supra, 100-102, and 111-113.
•* Concepcion was f omierly a part of the district or comandancia of Bontoc. See Perez, Igorrotes, 245-247.
•' See footnote 78.
516 ^/^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
case they make out no receipts showing the property given to the husband and the wife; they only give the document of such property to the married couple.
After the marriage of the husband and wife they must build a house of their own and they themselves secure their own food.
Now if one of them dies and they have a son he will inherit their property; the son himself has the only right to keep all their property.
But if one dies and they have no son to inherit the property, the property that had been awarded cannot be given to the one left until the end of the offering done by their relatives according to custom.^^
If the married couple had accumulated or earned property besides the awarded property, that property will be divided between the two of them.
There are other habits or customs inherited from our forefathers that we can hardly relate, especially the customs regarding the Igorot canao.
HISTORY THAT TELLS HOW THE QUARRELS OF THE HUSBAND AND WIFE ARE
REGULATED
It is the habit of the married couple, when they have a quarrel and want to be divorced, that the case is told to the old men of the town who assemble at the abong. They talk about it, and the husband and wife are forced to agree and be united together again. During this, the old men in the abong, who are settling this case, compel the married couple to kill a goat or a hog which the old men will eat as their punishment [that is, of the couple] and in payment for the good advice given by the old men. If it is not agreed that the husband and wife be united, the married couple are sent to the tribunal (presidencia) to settle the question.
STORY OF A MAN WHO IS A WRONG DOER, SUCH AS ONE LIVING IN CONCUBINAGE (A MAN WHO LIVES WITHOUT BEING LEGALLY MARRIED), AND THIEVES
If a man is found to be living in concubinage, it is our custom not to complain against him to the tribunal (presidencia), but we gather all the old men, principales, of the township regarding this matter; the old men advise him not to do this same thing again. In this meeting or assembling of the old men a goat or a hog must be furnished, and they eat it according to their customs. But, if he is found doing the same thing again, he will be complained against before the tribunal."*
Now, if there is a man found who stole something, he will be counseled just the same as in the case of concubinage and be forced to return to the owner the thing he stole from him; he must suffer the punishment that the old men impose together with what advice they may give him. Such a case will not be reported to the police or to the justice of the peace if it is the first time that the person has stolen something, but if he does it again
" Compare the inheritance customs as described in Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 153 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 181, 182 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 125, 127 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609); and in Jenks, Puh, P. /. EthnoL Surv. (1905), 1, 164, 165.
•* Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 177-179 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580); 7, 182, 187 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 126 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609). See 5, 125, for the Visayan myth of the origin of concubinage.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 517
we will have the right to complain of him to the tribunal or the justice of the peace.
STORY OF THE METHODS OF BUILDING THE HOUSES AND HOW WE WORK ACCORDING TO THE CUSTOMS INHERITED FROM OUR FOREFATHERS
When an Igorot wants to build a house, his neighbors are willing to help him without pay; when the house is finished, the owner of the same will not go to live in it without first performing a canao and after the caiiao he will live in the house.
We can't begin any work unless we kill a chicken, which is used as an offering in order that we may do the work fortunately.
MANCAYAN ^^^
From the document for the township of Mancayan, the follow- ing excerpts are taken. The township contains three barrios; namely, Aban, Suyoc, and Cabali. The stories of the formation of the three settlements are similar. The customs of all three are identical. For Aban and Suyoc, the narrative of the func- tions of campo and medes and of the trial by ordeal, called pudong, are given word for word the same. That for Cabali is abbreviated. For all three, short accounts of Spanish and American rule are given, but as they have no special bearing on the main subject they are omitted here. The story of the discovery of copper occurs in the narrative for Aban, and that of gold in the narrative for Suyoc.
ORGANIZATION OF THE PUEBLO OF ABAN (MANCAYAN ) IN TIME IMMEMORIAL
The old men of the above town, by name Cacamo, Lasbaquen, Dagacen, Mullones, and Bayed, and the old women, Bangayan and Gulling, state that the persons Tibaldo and his wife Alummay, Magagneo and his wife Cupit, Cumacom and his wife Gueyna, Lagdingan and his wife Budeas, Agaguen and his wife Dapunay, Bilasi and his wife Tampacao, Disamoy and his wife Tabollo, Tiab and his wife Bacluya, and others whose names we do not remember, and who came from very distant rancherias, are the ones who formed the pueblo of Aban in time immemorial. They divided Aban into 4 barrios, according to the centers of population, the names of which are
"" For a description of Mancayan and Suyoc, see Perez, Igorrotes, 125-140. See also Eveland, Preliminary reconnaissance of the Mancayan- Suyoc mineral region, Lepanto, P. I., Bull. P. I. Bur, Min. (1905), No. 4; and Santos, Informe sobre las minas de cobre de las rancherias de Manca- yan, Suyuk, Bumucun y Agbao. Manila (1862). The last-named treatise is the first comprehensive geological report on the mining region of Lepanto. See also Hernandez, Reconocimiento de un criadero de cobre en el Monte Aban, termino de Mancayan (1850) ; von Drasche, Fragmente zu einer Geologie der Insel Luzon. Wien (1878), 36-45; its translation into Spanish, Datos para un estudio geologico de la isla de Luzon. Madrid (1881), 41-50; Memoria . . . de la sociedad Cantabro-Filipina de Mancayan. Binondo (1871).
518 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Balili, Tuboc, Banaba, and Aban. These were the fathers and grand- fathers of those who make these statements.
The wealthy old man Tibaldo, who was called campo, was headman of this pueblo, and in each barrio was a wealthy old man of the same barrio who was called mede/*^^
The names of those who have been medes that are remembered are Bang- oaiigdan, Aguelba, and Quioaen.
Those appointed held those offices [of campo and mede] for an unlimited period, and were only succeeded when the pueblo or barrio so decided, and were relieved by a son or other member of the family.
The medes [each] had in their barrio an ato (kind of court), a small building in which the entire barrio assembled, headed by the mede, in order to discuss the affairs pertaining to the barrio. (Plate II, fig. 1.) The medes communicated these matters to the campo. The latter there- upon assembled all the former in one of the atos, and the matter was discussed in order that he might give his decision. The campo could not decide any matter without the approval of one or two medes, although he believed his decision proper and necessary. There were matters that were decided by the medes, if they formed the majority.
At present this court is involved at times in family disputes and in the case of debts, and is held as follows: Any person appears before the mede and makes a complaint against another person for debt. The mede thereupon sends word to the other medes to assemble in the ato. They summon the defendant, take the declarations of the two litigants, and as soon as the defendant has been declared guilty sentence is given and the sentence communicated to the defendant, with a fine which is imposed of a hog or other animal, and of tapuy, which are consumed by all [the medes] and by those present. Furthermore, he is forced to pay double the debt. If the plaintiff loses the suit between himself and the defendant, he has to give a hog and tapuy, which are consumed by all the people as above said. In cases in which the plaintiff and defendant maintain their positions obstinately because of a strong denial on the part of the latter, the medes oblige them to take the pudong. This is a kind of examination and proof, and is conducted as follows; The medes and old men prepare a small bit of [sharp] steel, and a bamboo through which the steel can pass easily when let fall through the hollow. While the above objects are being prepared, other old men proceed to sacrifice chickens, at the same time praying to their gods to aid them with the litigants, as each one [of the gods] may desire. When everything is ready, the above- mentioned litigants are made to squat on the ground on their heels. As soon as they are in position, he who is about to perform the operation approaches. This is usually an old man, and [there is] another one who acts as witness or assistant. The former places the bamboo on top of the head of one of the above-mentioned litigants and drops the above- said piece of steel through the hollow of the said bamboo. This, through the force of its fall, makes a slight wound in the scalp, from which oozes a small drop of blood. Then he does the same to the other litigant, also in the presence of the other witness or assistant. When the operation is ended, the medes and old men examine very carefully the drops of blood
^" A note in this account later on defines campo as the headman of the pueblo and mede as the headman of the barrio.
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 519
on the heads of the above-said litigants, for the purpose of ascertaining which of the two has the greater amount of blood. That one is thereupon considered to have lost the case, and he is punished as above said.^"
The presence of the campo is not necessary for all matters, unless he wishes, but it is necessary in the most important matters.
All the affairs of the pueblo and other very important matters could not be written, because we had absolutely no knowledge of paper, pen, and ink in those times, and we preserved all such matters by memory from family to family to our present time.
Short accounts of the Spanish and American regimes follow. Spanish officials were stationed in Mancayan from 1862 until the insurrection against Spanish rule. The manuscript continues :
DISCOVERY OF THE COPPER MINES BY NATIVES''"
The men, Buansi, Gal-ey, Banggit, and two others whose names we do not now remember, the fathers and grandfathers of the declarants, and hunters in those early times, inhabitants of the old pueblo of Aban (Man-
'"'See footnote 64. Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 145-147, 161, 181-187 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 179 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 128, 129 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609); 16, 321-329 (Pla- sencia, Customs of the Pampangos in their lawsuits, 1589) ; 40, 85, 86 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 150 (Combes, Historia, 1663) ; 40, 357, 358 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44) ; 43, 109 (Ortiz, Practica del ministerio, ca. 1742); 43, 304 (in Mindanao).
^'^^ The copper deposits of this region have long been known. W. D. Smith of the Bureau of Science [Jonrn. GeoL (1913), 21, 29-61], says that the copper is found in the form of arsenates and sulphides. Eveland [Pub. P. /. Min. Bur, (1905), No. 4, 9] presents a good description of the copper fields together with a short bibliographical survey and a history of mining and the mining methods of the Igorots. See also the annual bulletin, Mineral resources of the Philippine Islands, published by the Bureau of Science. A Spanish company, called the Cantabro-Filipino Company, began operations in 1856. The company paid about 400 pesos Philippine cur- rency for the concession, and the Igorots were guaranteed employment in the mines at regular fixed rates. It is estimated that 40,250 pounds of copper were produced during the years 1840-55, valued at 117,000 Spanish pesos. The company began the work of actual production in 1860. From that time until 1875, when the company ceased operations, 2,500,000 pounds of copper were produced. The copper mined by the Igorots is smelted by a primitive method probably learned from the Chinese. Eveland says (p. 18) : **The copper obtained in this manner they sell partly in cakes to the Chris- tian people in the lowlands, and partly dedicate to the manufacture of pots and boilers which the Igorots forge with stones; also making of the same metal bars, tongs, and small pipes for smoking.*' La Guia Oficial, Manila (1893), 115, says: "In the district of Lepanto are important copper deposits and considerable exploitation has occurred in Mancayan, Suyoc, Bumucun, and Agbao. The Igorots of the most distant mountains carry the mineral down to sell it, but they are hostile to whites, and no one has gone up.'' Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 848] says of the copper mining of the Igorots: "Many of the Igorots of northern Benguet and southern Le-
520 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
cayan), while out hunting one day, in the hopes of being able to catch a deer with their dogs pursued it for some hours. They had the good fortune to catch it in one of the places where to-day is found a hole of the mines of this above-mentioned pueblo. When it came time to prepare their food, the above-mentioned hunters agreed to prepare it in the place abovesaid. For that purpose they gathered some stones on which to do their cooking and on which they set their jar. Thereupon they set fire to the wood, and after several hours one of them went to the said cooking place to see whether the food was ready. He saw that one of the supporting stones had melted like lead. Thereupon all were astonished at the melting of the stone. Upon this they examined the above- mentioned stone and made several experiments with it. As a result they converted it into a substance dark red in color. This the aforesaid dis- coverers called gambang (copper).
After continuing their experiments for some months, the discoverers succeeded in obtaining a certain number of pieces of gambang. They resolved to make jars out of it, which they called galang. The rest they converted into lumps and took them to Tagudin (Ilocos Sur) to sell, before and now a part of Mountain Province.
After some years a commission composed of several Spaniards entered the pueblo. Among them were two whose names we remember yet, namely, Senores Don Mariano del Pielago and Don Evaristo, and an Englishman.^'^* After another year, those men took possession of the copper mines, and told our ancestors that they had been given the title to those mines by the government. Thereupon, some of our abovesaid ancestors went to other pueblos, and others to other near-by places, and some remained as workmen for those men. In our days, this is our present condition. (Plates IV to IX.)
The organization of the pueblo of Suyoc is related. This is very similar to that of Aban, and the account of the pudong ceremony is word for word the same. The following is related :
DISCOVERY OF GOLD MINES BY THE NATIVES ''°
Daguioa and Al-laoas, the grandfathers of the declarants, one time when they went to the above-mentioned sitio of Palidan located within the
panto mine copper and smelt it by a process of their own. From the metal thus obtained they fashion ollas and kettles which frequently are of large size. The method employed in making kettles is kept secret by those familiar with it, and numerous attempts on the part of Americans to surprise coppersmiths at their work have proved abortive. At one time a considerable business was done in the vicinity of Suyok in making rude counterfeits of Spanish copper coins. Clay molds were taken from genuine coins, and into these molds the copper was run. These counterfeits, al- though quite recognizable as such, circulated freely for some time because of the shortage of small change. '^ American claims were staked out in 1900. See also Siantos, Informe, op. cit.
"* Possibly the forerunners of the Cantabro-Filipino Company, or the company itself. See Eveland, BulL P, I. Bur. Min, (1905), No. 4, 16-19; and Santos, Informe, op. cit.
^"^ The Igorot gold mines have long been famous. As early as 1575, Gov-
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 521
jurisdiction of the pueblo, for the purpose of bathing, on arriving at the creek, took a bit of unit (wet earth that is used as soap for the head) to rub themselves with for the bath. One of them upon rubbing his head with the abovesaid earth saw that his hands had become tinged a saffron
ernor Guido de Lavezares, influenced no doubt by report of gold, planned and despatched an expedition to northern Luzon, but the undertaking had no result. In 1591, the energetic governor, Gomez Perez Dasmarifias, sent his son Luis, afterward acting governor, and two other expeditions to explore the so-called province of Tuy. In 1594, Luis Perez Dasmarinas despatched Captain Toribio de Miranda to the same region. See Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 14, 281-326, for an account of these early expe- ditions. Pages 301-307 relate *'What has been known from old times, in these districts, of the rich mines of the Yglotes [that is, Igorots] both from seeing the great amount of gold that the Indians of those mountains have extracted without skill, and are still obtaining, and which they sell to the neighboring provinces, and trade for food; and by persons (Spaniards as well as Indians) who have been in the mines opened by those mountaineers." As early as 1624, the workings of the Igorots appear to be very old, and many of them were already abandoned. An engineer conversant with Chinese methods of mining told me recently that it was his belief that the Igorots had learned their methods from the Chinese. See Becker's account on native methods of mining in 21st Ann, Rep. U. S. Geolog. Surv. (1901), III, 576-680. Quirante writing in 1624 (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 276-279) says that the Igorot men, women, and children were accustomed to wash gold in the small mountain streams during the rainy season. This was traded in the lowlands for cattle and other animals by its quantity as determined by sight instead of by weight. Quirante says that the natives had five hills where they had tapped the gold-bearing quartz rock, although they obtained but a small amount of the metal. The workings as described by Quirante appear to have been rather extensive. Their tools he says were "certain stakes of heavy wood fashioned like pickaxes, with the knot of the said stake larger at the end of it, where, having pierced it, they fit into it a small narrow bit of iron about one palmo long. Then seated in the passages or works, as the veins prove, they pick out and remove the ore, which having been crushed by a stout rock in certain large receptacles fixed firmly in the ground, and with other smaller stones by hand, and having reduced the ore to powder, they carry it to the washing-places." The gold was then obtained by repeated washings and crushings. Under Quirante's directions 26 assays of the ore taken from the old workings were made. Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 848] says of the gold mining of the Lepanto-Igorots : *The men have mined gold for centuries. They work over the faces of exposed cliffs, when necessary suspending themselves by means of rattans, and pick out the streaks of rich ore which show free gold. This they dig with their crude iron or steel implements, the use of powder being unknown among them. The ore, after being dug, is crushed and panned. Both men and women also wash gold from the sands of the streams, and the women are especially famed for the skill with which they save the very light float gold — a skill which American miners have found it impossible to attain. The gold is usually sold in the form of dust, although it is sometimes melted and run into ingots."
522 '^he Philippine Journal of Science 1914
color. He was much surprised at that and told it immediately to his companion. The latter, on seeing the hands of the former, was also sur- prised, and they both stood looking at it for some moments. After exam- ining and studying it, they went home to get some wooden vessels. They returned to the abovesaid sitio, and gathered a big lump of unit. They performed the dayas, by which the saffron-colored substance is separated from the earth and sand. When the latter was separated from the former, the discoverers saw that the saffron-colored substance consisted of very small particles of dust, which when shaken in the abovesaid wooden vessels glittered brightly in the sun. One of the men continued to shake the par- ticles in the wooden vessel for the purpose of studying them carefully, while the other was sitting beside a small fire warming himself. After some minutes of talk, they agreed to try to melt them in the fire. This they really did by placing a certain quantity of those particles in a bit of broken jar, which they set among the live coals. After a few hours they obtained the result they desired. On becoming cool, they had a substance with the abovesaid color. But it was mixed with other substances, which were probably impurities from the coal which was used to melt the particles, and which had united with the abovesaid particles at the moment of melt- ing. That abovesaid substance they called bulauan or dadaaUy according to the condition in which it was found in the soil and subsoil when it was obtained and corresponding to its color. They continued to experiment in order to ascertain its uses. After a few days had passed, the abovesaid agreed to convert it into a kind of earrings which they called dinanpulay. At the present time only the wealthy people wear them, because of their excessive value, because of the difficulty in finding them, and because of the great cost of manufacture. Those discoverers continued their under- taking and succeeded in making a number of earrings, which they took to other rancherias to sell, as well as some pieces to Tagudin (Ilocos Sur). There the purchasers had the material tested by experts before buying it. As a consequence, it obtained the name of balitoc.^'^ From those times we have continued to work that enterprise without cessation in spite of the difficulty and costliness of the work, and in fact in the way in which it was done in those days.
SABANGAN ^^^
The township of Sabangan has 6 barrios, as follows : Bonayan, Goyan, Ilagan, Pingad, Namatec, and Sabangan (native name, Bait). Its total population is 2,232, of whom 37 are Christians
Smith [Journ. Geol (1913), 21, 59, 60] thinks that at least 1,000 pesos per month are panned by the people of the Philippines. A manuscript conserved in the Philippine Library is entitled Noticia de los Ygorrotes, de sus pueblos, gentio, y minas de oro y de varias tentativas para su des- cubrimiento. Although undated, this manuscript is of the nineteenth century. It is a compiled account of Spanish contact with the Igorots and is accompanied by a map.
^'^ Balitoc, the Ilocano word for gold.
^'^ For a description of Sabangan, or Sabangan, as it is sometimes written, see Perez, Igorrotes, 195-201. It is located 27 kilometers east of Cervantes.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 523
and the rest Igorots. The inhabitants of Bonayan claim descent from Bintua and Olimen, a brother and sister, the only two people left alive "after the big flood/' '*A she hog from Pidipid strayed over to the place now called Bonayan and there had young ones. When the owners and others went after her they saw that the place was very fertile and well adapted for planting and good pasture for their live stock." The barrio of Ilagan was formed by the inhabitants of a place called Talo, who migrated en masse because of ''the frequent visits of their neighbors, who were their enemies." The barrio of Pingad lays claim to great antiquity and size. During the Spanish regime, however, many of its inhabitants moved to other barrios. The barrio of Namatec was formerly located nearer the river, ''but for protection from their more savage neighbors they moved * * * higher up the mountain." The population of this barrio is decreasing. Various legends and customs of the township are described as follows :
LEGEND OF THE ORIGIN OF THE WORLD
In ancient times the earth was flat. When Lomaoig (God) saw that on the earth all his people and every other living thing were mixed together, He said, '*It is better that I make the earth float on water so that it could be inundated and the new creation that will come after will be more scat- tered and separated.'' A big flood came and destroyed every living thing except two people, who were brother and sister — Bintua, the brother, and Olimen, the sister. This brother and sister married each other and they had many descendants who are now scattered all over the earth.**'
CANAO
The caiiao is a sacrifice of chickens, hogs, and all other kinds of animals, offered to Lomaoig (God), that he may give them good health, better crops, and a better increase from their live stock.
MARRIAGE CEREMONY
At sunset, after supper, the young women go to their tribunal to sleep and the young men go to theirs. Late at night the young men go to the tribunal where the girls are sleeping, and the young man that wishes to get married speaks with the girl of his choice; then if the girl is willing she tells the young man to go and bring firewood to her father's house, and she takes hinohodan^'^ (a native drink made out of rice) and rice to the house of the young man's father. In this manner their parents know that their son and daughter wish to marry. Then the parents of both the young people agree that the young man shall go to the house
'"* See Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 5, 125-129, for the story regarding the separation and origin of different nations.
*°* Rather the rice that is left after tapuy is made, although here the word may be used as a synonym for tapuy. It is said to be more intoxicat- ing than tapuy.
524 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i^h
where the girl lives and there they have a canao, for which they kill a chicken; three days later they have another canao for which they kill a suckling pig, and after this canao they become man and wife. After they have been living together for one year they have a canao again for which they kill 3 or 4 hogs, at the third day of this canao they kill a suckling pig, thus signifying that the canao is over. After being married five years and after they have acquired a little property, they have another canao, for which they prepare beforehand plenty of binobodan. Preparations for this canao are commenced seven days before the date of the canao; the day before the canao they repair the roof of their house and bring in plenty of firewood. The day after all these preparations are completed the parents and relatives of both gather together there; then they kill a carabao and prepare food for all the people. In the meantime they send after all their relatives living in other towns. After all their relatives and visitors have arrived, the man and his wife erect in front of their house 4 pieces of wood; the pieces of wood are tied together at the top and spread out at the bottom; they kill a hog and roast it between these 4 pieces of wood; after it is roasted they cut the head off and place it on a little platform, which is fixed between these pieces of wood, about halfway up; this arrangement is called bansa. The married couple then dances the bansa, the man holding a basket while the woman scatters rice around it and in front of the house. The relatives and guests then make presents to the married couple, such as money, rice, or anything else that they wish to give. After this last ceremony is over, all the people are allowed to dance and sing as they please.
CANAO FOR THE SICK AND THE DEAD
When a person gets sick, a canao is made for him, for which a chicken or a hog is killed, which serves as treatment for his or her sickness.
When a person dies, all the relatives of other towns are sent for. The dead are either buried early in the morning or late in the evening; the parents and relatives have a canao for which a chicken is killed. Five days after the burial, all the people participating in this canao go to the river and take a bath; for this occasion a chicken is killed over which a prayer is offered up for the soul of the dead. A year after, the parents and relatives of the dead person have one more canao for which a she hog and 3 suckling pigs are killed. After this ceremony, the mourning for the dead is over.""
"° The death-caiiao described above is for the poor people. If the dead person is a rich Igorot, the canao will last as long as there are any animals left to be killed. When about all the animals are killed, some old woman goes into a trance and while in that state pretends to see the man sitting along the mountain side, all tired out and unable to go any farther. She will communicate this to the relatives of the dead person, and they will immediately procure a horse and kill it in order that the dead man may have a horse to ride and in that manner reach his destination. During all this time the dead person is placed in a sitting posture, tied in a chair, raised up from the ground 4 or 5 feet. Under the chair a smouldering fire is built, thereby preserving the body. This lasts sometimes ten or twelve days, according to the number of animals to be killed. — W. A. Miller. See also footnote 79.
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 525
MATERIAL OUT OF WHICH CLOTHES WERE MADE
The ancient people used G strings made out of pounded tree bark and basket-shaped hats woven out of bical (a wild bamboo). The pingad worn by the women was also made out of tree bark, pounded, finely twisted, and then woven into a cloth. (The pingad is a narrow blanket about 2 feet wide and long enough to reach around a woman's waist.) '*'
MANNER OF SETTLING COMPLAINTS
When a person has a complaint to make against anyone, all the old men of the community are called together, and the complainant states the nature of his complaint to them. They then send after the accused, and upon his arrival the complainant is asked to state his complaint before the accused; the accused then is allowed to make his statement; if neither party has any witnesses, the old men stick a fine needle in the top of their heads (complainant and accused) and he that bleeds loses the case. Another way: They make the complainant and the accused throw stones at each other and he that is not hit wins the case. Another way: They give to the complainant and to the accused [each] a small chicken, hatched by the same hen. Each one roasts his chicken before an open fire, without cleaning it, or taking the feathers off. When they are roasted they are cut into before the old men and he, the gall of whose chicken is the smallest, loses the case.^^'^
CANAO FOR PLANTING AND HARVESTING
At the time for planting rice in seed beds, all the people in the community have a common canao for which everybody kills a chicken. Before they begin to transplant their rice, they have the same kind of a canao; also, when the planting is over. For ten days before the rice cutting commences, nobody is allowed to leave the town; during this time they have a canao for which they kill hogs and chickens; after the ten days' canao is over, one of the old men goes under a big tree (the sacred tree of the community) and there he sacrifices a chicken and offers up a prayer, and after this ceremony the rice cutting begins. After the rice is all cut, another canao is held.""^
After camote planting is over, every man in the community goes, with his spear and shield, to the mountains, and there calls in a loud and sup- pliant voice for the souls of the dead to come in. Upon their return to the town they go directly to their tribunals. Then an old man from each tribunal goes to get water and a spear and places them, while offering up a prayer, in front of his tribunal. The next day they kill a dog and place it in front of the tribunal and there they leave it as food for the spirits they have thus summoned.
When a cafiao is about to commence all the paths and streets leading into the town are closed with brush and thorns in order that no one from another town may enter.
"' See footnotes 26 and 49; and cf. Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 111-114.
'" The first of the ordeals mentioned above is similar to the ordeal by pudong, described on page 518. Compare also page 512. See Jenks [Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 169] for a description of the pudong.
'" See footnote 28.
526 2^^^ Philippine Journal of Science im
SUPERSTITIONS
When a person commences to build a house and he sees a rat or a mouse, he discontinues his work, as that predicts bad luck.
After all materials needed to build a house are prepared and ready to start the work, all the people of the community come to help; but after the house is built, if the owner sees a crow, a mouse, or a snake, he at once moves the house into another solar or lot. When his house is once more built, if he sees no more of these animals, he holds a three days* canao, for which at first a chicken is killed and then some hogs. After all these ceremonies are over, if the owner has no bad dream or sees no bad omen, he will then inhabit the house. If within three days he sees or hears nothing, he holds another canao of chicken, but if he sees anything that predicts bad luck, or has a bad dream, he leaves the house forever and finds himself another place to live.
The barrio of Sabangan is the central barrio of the township and when the Spaniards first came to this country they established their headquarters for the g-uardia civil there.
This document is made out by the presidente of the township together with the secretary, due to the fact that the teniente of the barrio, the old men, and the old women do not know how to read or write.
This document of information is signed by the presidente and the old men of the community who were all present, and is dated this date (July 6, 1911).
SAN EMILIO^^*
No legends or customs are related of this township. It is comprised of the following barrios, each of which is divided into two or more parts: San Emilio, Tiagan, Baang, Lancuas, Kalumsing, Sibsibu, Paltoc, and Matibuey. Parts of the town- ship belonged formerly to Abra subprovince and to Ilocos Sur Province. The names of the old sites inhabited by the people of the present territory of the municipality were Ampagadan, Baioes, Bago, Lipay, Batbatay, Batingco, Petredo, Gunnabec, Bising, Bangbagas, Nagbukel, Liang, Paracad, Pitocan, Laqueb, Bacongan, and Limpa, but these places were deserted because of sickness, in accordance with Igorot custom. Part of the known history dates back to 1829. In Spanish times, a garrison of 1 lieutenant, 1 sergeant, 1 corporal, and 12 soldiers was stationed in San Emilio. The Filipino soldiers of the revolution followed them, and then the American soldiers were stationed there until 1904. One friar was stationed there from 1890 to 1897. "In 1894, the comandante politico militar and the friar enforced baptism upon the people of the townships of San Emilio and Concepcion. All the people, youths and adults, with no exceptions, were baptized, but the customs of the Igorots, such
"* For a description of San Emilio, see Perez, Igorrotes, 243, 244. It was formerly a part of the district of Bontoc.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 527
as performing canaos and other habits, had not been forbidden up to date; but since the revolution in the Philippines none of our children have been baptized ; the only ones are the children of the original Christians who are now living in this township/' ^^^
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1) Blair, E. H., and Robertson, J. A. The Philippine Islands: 1493-
1898. Cleveland (1903-1909). 55 vols. See index: Igorots.
(2) Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905). 4 vols. See
1, 533-544. Compiled from accounts by Governor Dinwiddie of Lepanto-Bontoc and Governor Pack of Benguet.
(3) Dinwiddie, W. Report on Igorots, Jan. 17 (1903). In Report of
the Philippine Commission. Washington (1903), pt. 1, 833-836.
(4) Drasche, R. von. Fragmente zu einer Geologic der Insel Luzon.
Wien (1878), 36-45.
(5) Idem. Datos para un estudio geologico de la isla de Luzon. Madrid
(1881), 41-50. A translation of the preceding.
(6) Eveland, a. J. Preliminary reconnaissance of the Mancayan-Suyoc
mineral region, Lepanto, P. I. BulL P. I. Min. Bur, (1905), No. 4.
(7) Hernandez, Antonio. Reconocimiento de un criadero de cobre en el
Monte Aban. Termino de Mancayan (1850).
(8) Jordana y Morera, R. Bosquejo geografico e historico-natural. Ma-
drid (1885), 56-66.
(9) Memoria de la sociedad Cantab ro-Filipina de Mancayan. Binondo
(1871). There are several reports of the operations of the above company.
(10) Memoria del distrito de Lepanto. No date, no place.
(11) Meyer, A. B., and Schadenberg, A. Album von Philippinen-typen.
Dresden (1891). Plates 32, 33, 43, 44, 47, and 48 show types of Lepanto.
(12) The Mineral resources of the Philippine Islands. Published annually
by the Bureau of Science, Manila.
(13) Perez, Angel, 0. S. A. Igorrotes. Manila (1902), 29.
(14) Santos, J. M. Informe sobre las minas de cobre de las rancherias
de Mancayan, Suyuk, Bumucun y Agbao. Manila (1861).
(15) Idem. Same title. Manila (1862).
(16) Smith, W. D. The geology of Luzon. Joum, GeoL (1913), 21,
29-61.
(17) Worcester, D. C. Our fifteen years' work in the Philippines. Mun-
sey, February (1914).
(18) Idem. The non-Christian tribes of northern Luzon. Phil Journ.
Sci. (1906), 1, 791.
^" Christianity has never obtained any great hold among the Igorots. In Lepanto, the work of the missionaries was carried on first from the mission of Cayan. Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 17, says that the Igorots called all Christian Filipinos Ilocanos. The Christian population of the subprovince is found for the most part in Cervantes, Concepcion, and San Emilio [Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905), 1].
ILLUSTRATIONS
{ Plates 1 and II are from photographs by Martin ; Plate III is from a photogrraph by Worcester ; Plates IV to IX are from photographs by Eveland.)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Lepanto-Igorot woman.
2. Lepanto-Igorot woman, showing tattooing.
Plate II Fig. 1. The ato at Sagada.
2. Group of Igorots at Cervantes with a jar of tapuy.
Plate III
Burial place of Lepanto Igorots.
Plate IV. Igorot Copper Smelting
Fig. 1. First roasting.
2. Completion of the roast.
Plate V. Igorot Copper Smelting
Fig. 1. Clearing the matte. 2. Roasting the matte.
Plate VI
Old Spanish road to copper mines at Mancayan, showing contact between overlying quartz porphyry and Mancayan diorite.
Plate VII Copper mines, Mancayan.
Plate VIII Smelter site, Cantabro-Filipino Company, Mancayan.
Plate IX Old native workings at Suyoc.
text figure
Fig. 1. Map of a part of Mountain Province, Luzon.
130429 5
529
:^|t'a^^f->V "'•*'- '•'■''■■- ■ ■ .''5w^-:. '■ ,>!.;:' A" -isia
Robertson: Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
|
f - 0^: |
> |
|
|
-»^--'^ |
h&J%
fei,*»»^
-^•"lli
/T^-*:;-..-^!^.
Fig. 1. The ato at Sagada.
|
.^.5*'-'^' |
>l |
''^'^'^J^hBHim. |
|||||
|
..^ ■ |
yJ-V |
. j ^B |
b^ |
||||
|
MH^^H |
iiiWB^ |
||||||
|
r^^"T^ |
HT |
Mm^ |
|||||
|
^">^0^i |
^Bi |
^^fl |
^^^^ |
||||
|
^H J |
f^ ^^^^BHJ |
99H |
|||||
|
m ^Uji |
IhI |
l^^l |
^^^9 |
||||
|
pf|L« ^ '^^Km^ |
919 |
ii^^^S |
^^^H |
||||
|
jJ-IVCMBM |
^M |
WH |
^H |
||||
|
1 |
H |
^H |
1 |
Fig. 2. Group of Igorots at Cervantes with a jar of tapuy. PLATE II.
Robertson : Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
PLATE I!!. BURIAL PLACE OF LEPANTO IGOROTS.
Robertson: Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
Fig. 1. First roasting.
Fig. 2. Completion of roast. PLATE IV. IGOROT COPPER SMELTING.
Robertson: Igorots of Lefanto]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
Fig. 1. Clearing the matte.
Fig. 2. Roasting the matte. PLATE V. tGOROT COPPER SMELTING.
Robertson: Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
PLATE VI. OLD SPANISH ROAD TO COPPER MINES, MANCAYAN, SHOWING CONTACT BETWEEN OVERLYING QUARTZ PORPHYRY AND MANCAYAN DIORITE.
:z5 p
Oh
O (4
o
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF PRIONOCHILUS FROM THE HIGHLANDS OF LUZON
By Richard C. McGregor
{From the Section of Ornithology and Taxidermyy Biological Laboratory, Bureau of Science, Manila, P, I.)
One colored plate
Prionochilus anthonyi sp. nov.
Specific characters. — Top of head with a conspicuous yellow patch; remainder of upper parts glossy black; chin and throat white; remainder of under parts yellow; under tail-coverts cadmium yellow.
Type. — No. 7515, $ , Bureau of Science collection. Polis Mountain, Ifugao subprovince, Luzon, P. I. Collected February 7, 1913, by R. C. McGregor and A. Celestino.
Description of type. — Forehead, lores, circumocular region, and auriculars black with very little gloss; crown and occiput cadmium yellow ; neck, back, rump, upper tail-coverts and median and lesser wing-coverts black glossed with dusky dull bluish green ; primaries and their coverts, secondaries and their greater coverts, and rectrices fuscous to chaetura black; edge of wing, wing-lining, axillars, and inner edges of primaries white; chin, throat, and malar region white ; remainder of under parts green or yellow; sides of breast citrine, becoming more yellowish on flanks ; middle of breast and abdomen empire yellow ; under tail- coverts cadmium yellow. Iris brown ; bill black ; legs, feet, and nails blackish slate ; soles pale yellow. Length in flesh, 106 mm. ; wing, 56 ; tail, 29 ; tarsus, 16.
Remarks. — Prionochilus anthonyi does not resemble any other Philippine species of the genus and appears to differ from all other described species in pattern of coloration. The bill is similar in proportions to that of P. quadricolor Tweeddale, but is very much larger. The bill is much stouter than in P. johan- nse Sharpe. The type and only specimen was collected in the mossy forest near the summit of the Government trail between Banaue and Bontoc, within a few meters of the rest house on the Banaue side. The elevation of the rest house is about 2,000 meters. The species is named for Alfred Webster Anthony.
531
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I. Prionochilus anthonyi sp. nov. (Drawn and colored from the type by T. Espinosa.)
533
McGregor: A New PRioNOCHn.us.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
PLATE I. PRIONOCHILUS ANTHONYI SP. NOV.
NITIDULID^ DES PHILIPPINES RECOLTES PAR C. F. BAKERS
Par A, Grouvelle {Paris y France)
Brachypeplus ornatus sp. nov.
Ovatus, abdominis apice acuminatus, modicissime convexus, nitidulus, tenue flavo-pubescens, capite, prothorace abdomineque rufo-testaceus, elytris ochraceo-testaceus ; capite vix infuscato, prothoracis margine postico medio, elytrorum lateribus apicequi, abdominis segmentorum disco nigris. Antennae breves; clava paulo longiore quam latiore, apice breve et obtuse acuminato- pulvinata; articulis 7° et 8° praecipue ultimo valde transversis. Caput transversum, subdepressum, crebre punctulatum, ante antennarum bases sat productum, subtruncatum ; temporibus minutis, acutis. Prothorax valde transversus antice quam postice vix angustior, lateribus rotundatus ; angulis anticis posti- cisque obtusis, vix hebetatis ; basi truncata, utrinque scutelli vix perspicue breveque sinuata, tenuiter marginata. Scutellum subsemicirculare, tenuissime punctulatum. Elytra paulo bre- viora quam simul latiora, tenuiter punctato-striata ; striarum intervallis unilineato-punctatis ; striis integris. Abdominis seg- mentum ultimum apice obtuse acuminatum.
Long., 4 nmi.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (2 individus).
Ovale, abacumine vers le sommet de Tabdomen, un peu plus de deux fois plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur; tres faiblement convexe, brillant, convert d'une fine pubescence flave, mediocrement visible, roux testace sur la tete, le prothorax et Tabdomen, testace- jaunatre sur les elytres; marge anterieure de la tete rougeatre, tete a peine enfumee; milieu de la marge posterieure du prothorax, marges laterales et epipleures des ely- tres et milieu des segments de Tabdomen noirs. Antennes courtes, massue noiratre ; 1^^ article epais, un peu plus long que large, 2« moins epais, une fois et demie plus long que large, 3« grele, 4® a peine allonge, 5« et 6« subtransversaux, 7® et 8« (8« surtout) tres transversaux, le 8« plus large que le 7**; 9« et 11« formant une massue brusque, un peu plus longue que large, dont
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
535
536 The Philippine Journal of Science i9h
le dernier article, un peu plus long que les deux premiers, est termine par un bouton conique, emousse, surbaisse. Tete moins de deux fois plus longue que large, subdeprimee, retrecie trans- versalement en avant des bases des antennes; epistome assez saillant, parallele, subtronque en avant; front tres densement pointille, faiblement impressionne en avant des bases des anten- nes, de ehaque cote de Tepistome; epistome presque lisse yeux echancrant les margues du front, mediocrement saillants, a tres petites f acettes ; tempes petites, anguleuses ; labre environ quatre fois plus large que long. Prothorax tronque en avant, a peine plus etroit en avant qu'a la base, arrondi sur les cotes, environ deux fois I plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, tres densement pointille, un peu plus fortement sur les marges late- rales ; angles anterieurs et posterieurs obtus, a peine emousses ; cotes finement rebordes; base tronquee, brievement sinuee de ehaque cote de Fecusson, tres finement rebordee. Ecusson presqu'en forme de demi-cercle, finement et tres densement pointille. Elytres tronques a la base, arrondis aux epaules, sub- paralleles, arrondis aux angles posterieurs-externes, separement et tres largement arrondis au sommet, un peu moins longs que larges ensemble, finement ponctues-stries ; stries entieres ; inter- valles larges, chacun avec une ligne de points beaucoup plus larges que les stries; calus humeraux marques; marges laterales fort- ement declives, tres etroitement rebordees. Segments apparents de Tabdomen tres densement pointilles; dessous roux testace, glabre; 1«' et 2« segment (1^^ mesure entre la hanche et le som- met) subegaux, plus courts que le 3«, 5« presqu'aussi long que 3« et 4® reunis.
Amystrops bakeri sp. nov.
Breviter oblongus, convexiusculus, nitidulus, tenuissime flavo- pubescens, ferrugineus, creberrime tenuissimeque punctulatus. Antennae fere breves; 1° articulo incrassato, intus valde rotun- dato-producto, clava paulo longiore quam latiore, articulis baud densatis. Caput transversissimum, subdepressum, antice sinu- atum, dense punctulatum; oculis productis, temporibus baud indicatis, lateribus retrorsum valde convergentibus. Prothorax transversissimus, antice valde angustatus ; margine antico medio truncato, utrinque antrorsum late subanguloso-producto ; later- ibus arcuatis, juxta basin parallelis, praecipue ad basin sat late concavo-explanatis ; angulis posticis acutis, retrorsum productis ; basi medio subsinuata, utrinque ante angulos posticos subtrunca- ta. Scutellum triangulare, transversissimum. Elytra humeris
IX, D, 6 Grouvelle: Nitidididae cles Philippines 537
rotundata, lateribus arcuata, vix ampliata, apice subtruncata, breviora quam simul in maxima latitudine latiora; elytrorum angulis suturalibus breviter rotundatis. Pygidium apice rotun- dato-acuminatum.
Long., 2.3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (2 individus).
Oblong, environ une fois et demie plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, mediocrement convexe, couvert d'une pube- scence flave, a peine visible, ferrugineux, faiblement brillant, tres densement et tres finement pointille, sauf sur la tete. An- tennes presque courtes; 1«^ article fortement dilate, arrondi en dedans, a peine plus long que large, 2« a peine epaissi par rapport au 3% un peu plus long que large; 3° moins d'une fois et demie plus long que large, 4« et 5« subcarres, 6« un peu transversal, 7« encore plus, 8« tres court et plus large que les precedents; 9** a 11« formant une massue tres accentuee, un peu plus longue que large, legerement attenuee vers Textremite, a articles faiblement sep- ares dont le 2« article est un peu plus court que le 1^' et assez nettement plus court que le 3% ce dernier termine par un bouton conique tres surbaisse. Tete beaucoup plus de deux fois plus large que longue, subdeprimee, densement pointillee, impression- nee de chaque cote vers la naissance de Tantenne ; bords lateraux fortement convergents en arriere avant les yeux, sinues en avant pour rinsertion des antennes; epistome parallele, faiblement sinue en avant; labre bien visible, arrondi aux angles anterieurs, sinue au milieu de sa marge apicale ; yeux tres saillants ; tempes nulles. Prothorax tres retreci an avant, arrondi sur les cotes, subparallele a la base, environ deux fois et i plus large a la base que long ; bord anterieur tronque au milieu, saillant en avant, de chaque cote, en formant un lobe anguleux emousse ; cotes bordes par un fin bourrelet et par une marge concave plutot etroite en avant, dilatee sur la region des angles posterieurs ; ceux-ci aigus, un peu saillants en arriere ; base largement subsinuee au milieu, presque tronque de chaque cote de cette sinuosite; ponctuation dessinant presque des strigosites transversales. Ecusson trian- gulaire, plus de deux fois plus large a la base que long. Elytres sinues a la base de chaque cote de Tecusson, arrondis aux epaules, arques sur les cotes, a peine elargis, presque tronques ensemble au sommet, nettement moins longs que larges ensemble; angles suturaux brevement arrondis; marges laterales bordees par un fin bourrelet efface vers le sommet et par une marge concave plus large a la base que celle du prothorax en avant, s'effacant vers Textremite de Telytre, se raccordant avec le disque de
538 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Telytre par une partie en pente assez inclinee; calus humeraux assez marques. Pygidium deprime, emousse a Textremite, den- sement et finement pubescent. Pygidium du male tronque, complete par un segment supplementaire triangulaire, emouss^ au sommet.
Haptoneus latior sp. nov.
$ : Breviter ovatus, ad apicem attenuatus, convexus, nitidus, vix perspicue flavo-pubescens, ferrugineo-testaceous. Antenna- rum primum articulum intus rotundato-dilatatum, tam elon- gatum quam latum; clava sesquilongior quam latior. Caput transversissimum occipite convexum, fronte subdepressum, an- tice modice sinuatum, tenuissime et parce punctulatum ; oculis prominulis, temporibus minutissimis acutis. Prothorax trans- versissimus, antice valde angustatus, tenuiter parceque punctu- latus; margine antico medio truncato, utrinque antrorsum late et modice rotundato-producto ; lateribus arcuatis, fere stricte explanato-marginatis ; angulis posticis acutis, hebetatis, retror- sum leviter productis; basi ante scutellum et utrinque inter scutellum et angulos porticos subsinuata. Scutellum triangulare, basi duplo latius quam longius, vix perspicue punctulatum. Ely- tra basi quam prothorax paulo angustiora, humeris obtuse angu- losa, apicem versus arcuatim angustata, apice fere conjunctim truncata, breviora quam simul basi latiora, subdense punctulata, lateribus latius quam prothorax explanato-marginata. Pygidium depressum, apice breviter rotundatum. Tibiae intermediae pos- ticaeque maris circiter ad medium dilatatae.
Long., 1.7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (1 individu).
Ovale, attenue vers Textremite du corps, environ une fois et un tiers plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, assez convexe, brillant, a peine visiblement pubescent, d'un testace f errugineux. Antennes mediocrement longues ; 1*^ article epais, fortement arrondi en dedands, environ aussi long que large, 2« un peu epais, moins d'une fois et demie plus long que large, 3« a 8« progressivement un peu plus larges, 3* environ une fois et demie plus long que large, 4^ et 5« subcarres, 6« a 8« progressive- ment plus transversaux, 9« a 11« formant une massue compacte, environ une fois et demie plus longue que large, dont le premier article presqu'en forme de demi-sphere est plus long que less deux autres, et dont le dernier un peu plus etroit que le precedent est termine par un bouton subconique, tres surbaisse. Tete environ deux fois plus large que longe, se retrecissant fortement en avant et en arriere des yeux, convexe sur Tocciput, subdepri-
IX, D, 6 Grouvelle: Nitidulidse des Philippines 539
mee sur le front, brevement et transversalement retrecie entre le bord anterieur de Toeil et Tinsertion de Tantenne, peu saillante en avant de celle-ci, legerement sinuee au bord anterieur, couverte d'une ponctuation extremement fine et eparse; yeux echancrant moderement les marges du front, saillants, tempes tres petites, aigues. Prothorax tres retreci en avant, presque parallele a la base, arrondi sur les cotes, environ deux fois plus long a la base que long, eparsement ponctue, mais un peu plus fortement que la tete; bord anterieur tronque au milieu, moderement saillant en avant de chaque cote en lobe largement arrondi ; cotes bordes par une marge concave presqu'etroite ; angles posterieurs un peu saillants en arriere, emousses; base subsinuee devant Tecusson et largement subsinuee de chaque cote entre Tecusson et Textre- mite. Ecusson triangulaire, deux fois plus large a la base que long, eparsement et a peine visiblement pointille. Elytres un peu plus etroits a la base que le prothorax, en angle obtus aux epaules, arques, attenues vers Textremite separement et un peu obliquement tronques au sommet, nettement moins longs que larges ensemble a la base, converts d'une ponctuation assez dense plus forte que celle du prothorax, attenuee vers le sommet ; bords lateraux bordes un peu plus largement que ceux du prothorax; marges laterales du disque brusquement declives; calus hume- raux a peine marques. Tibias intermediaires et posterieurs du male elargis dans la moitie apicale.
Appartient au groupe de H. lotrolus Er., mais taille plus grande et forme beaucoup plus large.
Aphenolia bakeri sp. no v.
Oblonga, modice convexa, nitidula, glabra, testaceo-ferruginea. Antennae modicissime elongatae; 1^ articulo intus valde lobato- producto, clava sesquilongiore quam latiore, 2^ articulo transver- sissimo, quam 1^ et 3° paulo latiore. Caput transversum, con- vexiusculum, antice truncatum, dense punctulatum, utrinque ad antennae basin puncto notatum; oculis prominulis. Prothorax antice quam postice paulo angustior, lateribus praecipue ad basin arcuatus, vix perspicue undulatus, fere 2 et i latior in maxima latudine quam longior ; crebre punctulatus ; margine antico medio truncato, utrinque oblique lateque modice producto; angulis an- ticis hebetatis, posticis obtusis, marginibus lateralibus antice modice, ante angulos late concavo-explanatis ; basi truncata, vix perspicue marginata. Scutellum transversum, subtriangulare, crebre punctulatum. Elytra humeris rotundata, lateribus ar- cuata, parum ampliata, apice separatim sub-oblique truncata, 1 et J longiora quam simul in maxima latitudine latiora, crebre et
540 ^^^^ Philippine Joimial of Science ish
quam prothorax paulo validius punctata; lateribus stricte mar- ginatis. Pygidium in maxima parte apertum, apice acuminatum, crebre punctulatum.
Long., 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (1 individu).
Oblong, un peu plus de deux fois et demie plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, moderement convexe, un peu brillant, glabre, testace-f errugineux. Antennes mediocrement allongees ; 1«^ article dilate en dedans en lobe arrondi; 2« un peu epais, environ une fois et demie plus long que large; 3® grele, plus d'une fois et demie plus long que large ; 4^ a 8« progressivement un peu plus epais ; 4« et 5^ subcarres ; 6« et 7® moderement trans- versaux, 8® nettement transversal; 9® a 11® formant une massue environ une fois et demie plus longue que large, dont le 2^ article est tres transversal et un peu plus large que les deux autres et dont le dernier est en majeure partie forme d'un bouton apical conique. Tete environ deux fois plus large que longue, retrecie transversalement en avant des yeux, obliquement en arriere; epistome parallele, tronquee au bord anterieur; occiput convexe, front subdeprime, densement pointille, marque de chaque cote pres de la base de Tantenne d'un point enfonce ; yeux echancrant moderement les marges laterales du front, presentant une saillie transversable subegale a la longueur du bord de Torbite; labre profondement et etroitement incise au milieu, environ quatre fois plus large a la base que long. Prothorax un peu plus retreci en avant qu'a la base, arrondi, a peine ondule sur les cotes, presentant sa plus grande largeur vers le premier quart de la longueur a partir de la base, environ deux fois et un tiers plus large dans sa plus grande largeur que long ; bord anterieur assez brievement tronque dans le milieu, saillant un peu obliquement en avant de chaque cote, en formant un arc peu accentu^ et peu regulier; angles anterieurs obtus, emousses, posterieurs obtus; base tronquee, tres finement et a peine visiblement rebordee. Bords lateraux bordes par une marge explanee concave, tres moderement large, se developpant sur la region des angles pos- terieurs, se raccordant en pente peu prononcee avec le disque; ponctuation fine tres serree. Ecusson subtriangulaire, trans- versal, tres densement pointille. Elytres tronques a la base, brievement arrondis aux epaules, arques sur les cotes, tres fai- blement elargis, obliquement et separement tronques au sommet, environ une fois et un tiers plus longs que larges ensemble dans leur plus grande largeur, converts d'una ponctuation tres serree, un peu plus forte que celle du prothorax ; marges laterales etroi-
IX, D, 6 Grouvelle: Nitidulidse des Philippines 541
tement rebordees, raccordees avec le disque des elytres par une pente presque normale au plan de Tinsecte; calus humeraux a peine marques. Pygidium acumine au sommet, en majeure partie decouvert, un peu convexe, tres densement et tres finement ponctue.
Cryptarcha bakeri sp. nov.
S : Ovata, convexa, nitidula, tenuiter alutacea, pube flava in prothoracis marginibus anticis lateralibusque densata vestita, picea ; margine antico capitis prothoracisque dilutiore, in singulo elytro duabus maculis fuseo-rufis: 1» basilari, juxta callum hum- erale, 2» transversa, antrorsum arcuata, ultra medium, suturam subattingente. Antennae breves; clava sesquilongiore quam latiore, I*' articulo conico, transverse, 2° transversissimo, 3° transverssissimo, sed quam 2° paulo angustiore, apice pulvino acuminate, valdissime depresso, terminate. Caput transversum, dense punctulatum; margine antico inflexo, subtruncato. Pro- thorax transversus, antice valde augustatus, dense punctulatus ; margine antico late et baud prof unde emarginato ; angulis anticis antrorsum productis; lateribus arcuatis, juxta basin, ad apicem modice convergentibus ; angulis posticis acutis, retrorsum prod- uctis ; basi subtruncata, utrinque scutelli breviter sinuata. Scu- tellum transversissimum, apice late rotundatum, tenuissime alutaceum. Elytra fere sesquilongiora quam simul basi latiora, apice conjunctim rotundata, dense punctulata, punctis subasperis.
Long., 3.2 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 individu).
Ovale, environ deux fois et un tiers plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, convexe peu brillant, tres finement alutace, convert d'une pubescence flave, plus allongee et plus dense sur le bord anterieur du prothorax et sur ses marges laterales, for- mant des bordures laterales beaucoup plus larges que la bordure anterieure; couleur brun de poix, plus claire sur le devant de la tete et vers les marges laterales du prothorax; sur chaque elytre deux taches d'un roux sombre : la 1^« basilaire, suballongee, en dedans du calus humeral, la 2« au dela du milieu, transversale, arquee en avant, atteignant presque la suture et se continuant centre le bord lateral par une tres etroite bordure atteignant le sommet. Antennes brun de poix clair, relativement courtes ; 1«' article plus epais, moins de deux fois plus long que large; 2* moins epais, environ une fois et demie plus long que large; 3« grele environ aussi long que 3^; 4« et 5« subegaux, un peu allonges; 6« a 8® subcarres; 9* a 11* formant une massue bien accentuee,
542 The Philippine Journal of Science
environ une fois et demie plus longue que large, dont le 1«^* article transversal est en forme de tronc de cone renverse, le 2« est tres transversal et le 3« subegal au 2« mais un peu plus etroit et termine par un bouton acumine a peine saillant. Tete arrondie en avant, plus de deux fois plus large que longue, densement pointillee; marge anterieure inflechie, subtronquee; labre cache, yeux non saillants. Prothorax retreci en avant, arrondi sur les cotes, legerement retreci vers Tavant, dans la partie basilaire, tres nettement plus de deux fois plus large a la base que long, a peu pres ponctue comme la tete ; bord anterieur vu de dessous largement et peu prof ondement echancre, arrondi dans le milieu ; angles anterieurs, vus de dessous, un peu aigus, saillants en avant, vus de face egalement aigus, finement rebordes comme les cotes ; angles posterieurs saillants en arriere, vus de dessus un peu aigus, vus de face presque droits ; base subtronquee en dedans des angles posterieurs, brievement sinuee de chaque cote de Tecusson. Ecusson tres transversal, largement arrondi au sommet, tres finement alutace. Elytres arques a la base, en angles obtus, a peine emousses aux epaules, retrecis vers le sommet, arrondis ensemble a Textremite, brievement dehiscentes, converts de points subrapeux, un peu plus forts et plus serres a la base que ceux du prothorax, attenues vers le sommet; stries suturales effacees sur la moitie basilaire de la longueur. Pattes larges. Dernier segment de Tabdomen du male releve dans la partie mediane de sa marge apicale; avant-dernier legerement impressionne.
INDEX
[New names are printed in heavy-faced type ; numbers in italic indicate synonyms or refer- ences of minor importance.]
Aban, organization of, 517.
Acanthocepola krusensternii (Temm. and
Schleg.), 69. Acanthocera Melichar, 435.
punctifrons Melichar, 436. Acarua, 2S1. Achilinae, 176.
Acidopria monachanta Kieffer, 287. tetratoma Kieffer, 287. tricornuta Crawford, 287. variicornis Kieffer, 287. Aclista punctulata Kieffer, 287. Acmaeodera luzonica Nonfr., 83. Aeolus luteipes Crawford, 286. Acromitus, 210.
maculosus Light, 195, 197, 212. ^^gle sepiaria DC, 250. ^olus beccarii Candeze, 441.
multilineatus, 44i. Agaua barrio, 506. Ageha, 250.
Agrilus atomus Kerremans, 87. bakeri Kerremans, 85. balnearis Kerremans, 87. discicollis H. Deyr., 85. fontanus Kerremans, 86. luzonicus Kerremans, 84. monticola Kerremans, 85. nigrocinctus Saund., 85. vilis Saund., 85. Agrypnus bifoveatus Candeze, 441. Alacan, old name for Ampusungan, 471. Alaus scytale Candeze, 441. Albatross collection, 196.
Alcyonaria, Philippine, notes on, part II, 233. Alcyonium ramosa Q. and G., 237. Allocynips Kieffer, 185.
ruficeps Kieffer, 186. Alpheus, 324. Alseodaphne, 254. Ambassida?, 65.
Amblygaster clupeoides (Bleeker), 11. perforatum (Cantor), 11. sirm (Riippell), 11. Amia bifasciata (Riippell), 63.
doderleini Jordan and Snyder, 64. elizabethsB Jordan and Seale, 63. frsenata Valenciennes, 64- kiensis Jordan and Snyder, 64. lineatus (Schlegel), 64. marginatus Doderlein, 64. semilineatus (Schlegel), 64. trimaculatus Richardson, 6S.
Ammothea (Alcyonium) ramosa (Q. and G.), 237. carnosa KUken., 239. digitatum May, 237, 238. Ampusungan, manuscript from, 471. Amystrops bakeri Grouvelle, 536. Anasis Isevicollis Raffray, 454. Anchastus rufangulus Candeze, 446. unicolor Candeze, 446. vittatus Fleut., 445. Anchovia dussumieri Cuv. and Val., 59.
indica (Van Hasselt), 59. Anchovies, 11, 59. Angaki, barrios of, 473.
manuscript from, 473. Anito, 472.
Anopedias luzonicus Ashmead, 286. Anteris atriceps Kieffer, 286. Ao-gashi, 255. Aosuji-ageha, 252. Ao-tsuzura, 256.
Aparamesius carinatus Kieffer, 287.
depressus Kieffer, 287.
filicornis Kieffer, 287.
levistilus Kieffer, 287.
Apegus I'oerster, 295.
maquilingensis Kieffer, 295. Aphanisticus bodongi Kerremans, 88. Aphenolia bakeri Grouvelle, 539. Apobletes corticalis Lewis, 423. difficile Schm., 424. feriatus Lewis, 423. fictitius Lewis, 424. platysomoides Lewis, 424' schaumi Mars, 423. semperi Lewis, 424- tener Marseul, 423. Apobletus diosipygus Marseul, 426. Apocryptes bato (Hamilton-Buchanan), 77. Apogonichtyidse, 63. Aristolochia debilis S. and Z., 256. Arius falcarius Richardson, 60. Ashmeadopria Kieffer, 308.
bakeri Kieffer, 287, 308. bipunctata Kieffer, 287, 308,
309. luzonica Kieffer, 308. nigriventris Kieffer, 287, 308. subcarinata Kieffer, 308, 309. (?) trichota Kieffer. 309. Atherina bleekeri Gunther, 60. forskilii Ruppell, 60. Atherinidae, 60. Atholus torquatus Mars., 428.
543
544
Index
Atolla bairdii Fewkes forma valdivise Van- hoffen, 196. wyvillei Haeckel, 196. Atya. 324. Augila St^l, 278. Augilina Melichar, 276, »78,
longipes Melichar, 276. Aurantiacese, 254.
solida Browne, 200. Aureliia labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt, 195, 197, 200.
BacJad, used in catching crustaceans, 320. Bagnen. description, religion, and customs of,
481. Bagoong, 4.
BAKER, C. F., Studies in Philippine Jas- soidea: 1, Some remarkable Tettigoniellidae, 409. Bamboo grass, 260. Bambusaria Melichar, 274.
picta Melichar, 274. Banaao, barrios of, 484. climate of, 488. Banak, 4.
Banded barracuda, 61. Bandfishes, 69. Banguitan barrio, 507.
BANKS, CHARLES S., A new Philippine ma- laria mosquito, 405. Barbus bantolanensis Day, 188. ivis Seale, 191. manguaoensis Day, 189. palawanensis Boulenger, 191. Barracuda, 7, 61.
banded, 61. Batraxis hirtella Raffray, ^52.
nitidula Raffray, 452. pubescens Raffray, 452. sinensis Raffray, i5S. Batrisocenus clavipes Raffray, 452.
hamatipes Raffi-ay, 452. squamiceps Raffray, 452. tumidipes Raffray, 451. Batrisodes cavicola Raffray, 451. clavipes Raffray, ASH. hamatipes Raffray, 452. squamiceps Raffray, 452. tumidipes Raffray, 451. verticinus Raffray, 451. Batrisus cavicola Raffray, 451.
verticinus Raffray, 451. Bauco, barrio of, 493. customs in, 494.
its barrios and general history, 492. marrying children in, 493. Belionota fallaciosa H. Deyr., 84. Belonidse, 60. Belytidse, 287» 310. Benna Walker, 176.
sinuata Melichar, 269. Bennaria Melichar, 175.
bimacula Melichar, 175. Besao, barrios of, 498.
history of, 498.
Bethylidae, 285.
Bhooria, 410.
BICKHARDT, H., Philippinische Histeriden :
I, 423. Birth of a child, Igorot customs in connec- tion with, 508. Bloaters, 8.
Bobo, used in catching crustaceans, 320. Bolarge, 4.
Boleophthalmus boddaerti Schlegel, 74. chinensis (Osbeck), 74. glaucus Day, 74. Bostrychus sinensis (Lacep^de), 74. Brachypeplus ornatus Grouvelle, 535. Bryaxis dama Raffray, 454.
laevicollis Raffray, 454. laticollis Raffray, 45S, manillensis Raffray, 45S. Buprestides recueillis aux iles Philippines par
C. F. Baker, 83. Butis butis (Hamilton-Buchanan), 74.
caperata Cantor, 74. Butterfishes, 63. Butterfly fishes, 71.
C
CAIN, ANDREW W., History of the Spanish normal school for men teachers in Manila, 1865-1906, 123. Callinesia fimbriolata Melichar, 17H. philippina Melichar, 178. Callionymidae, 79. Callionymus curvicornis Cuv. and Val., 79.
hindsii Richardson, 79. Calliscelio philippinensis Kieffer, 286. Callyodon dubius Bennett, 70.
limbatus (Richardson), 70. Carama Distant, 434.
dilatata Distant, 434. Camphora officinalis, 254. Camptoteleia Kieffer, 296.
carinata Kieffer, 286, 296. cupularis Kieffer, 296, 298. excavata Kieffer, 286, 296. flavipennis Kieffer, 296, 297. magna Kieffer, 296. Cafiao, 472.
planting and harvesting, 525. Caiiaos, descriptions of various kinds of, 489,
613. Carangidae, 62.
Caranx boops Cuv. and Val., 62. calla Cuv. and Val., 62. djeddaba (Forsk&l), 62. malabaricus (Bloch and Sch.), 62. ophthalmotaenia (Bleeker), 62. Caranx, young of, living in medusae, 221, 230. Cardinal fishes, 63. Cardiophorus bakeri Fleut., 446.
elegans Cand^ze, 446. Carp, 60.
Carybdea alata Reynaud. var. moseri Mayer. 196. rastonii Haacke, 196.
Index
545
Cassiopea medusa Light, 195, 197, 204. ornata Haeckel, 197. polypoides Keller (?), 195, 197, 203. var. culionensis Light, 195, 197, 201. xamachana, 206. Catfish, smoked, 9. Catfishes, 60.
Catostylus purpurus Mayer, 195, 197, 207, Cavalla, 7, 62. Cayen, barrios of, 509.
customs of people in, 510. Centrophthalmus clavatus Raff ray, 454,
philippinensis Raffray, 454. Cephalacanthidse, 78.
Cephalacanthus orientalis Cuv. and Val., 78. Cephalopholis beenack (Bloch), 65. Cephea cephea (Forsk&l) Mayer, 195, 197, 206.
octostyla L. Agassiz, 197. Cepolidae, 69.
Ceraphron manilae Ashmead, 287. Ceraphronidae, 287. Ceratopsilus rufipes Kieffer, 286. Cercocephala bakeri Crawford, 460.
(Chajtospila) elegans Westwood, i61. Cervantes, barrios of, 512. Cluptodon aureus Giinther, 71.
aureus Temm. and Schleg., 71. bella-maris SeaJe, 72. collaris Bloch, 71, 72. coUaris Day, 72. collaris Giinther, 72. ^ collaris Jordan and Fowler, 71.
desmotes Jordan and Fowler, 72. fasciatus Bleeker, 73. lunula Lacepede, 73. modestus Temm. and Schley., 72. praetextatus Cantor, 71. rafflesii Bennett, 72. reticulatus Cuv. and Val., 71, 72. Chaitodontidae, 71. Chalcididte, 457. Chal yu, 61. Charibdis (Gonionemus) crucifera (Fabr.) M.
Edwards, 230. Charybdea philippina Haeckel, 196. Chiropsalmus quadripratus Haeckel, 195, 196,
197, 199. Chick yu, 60. Chi yu, 62.
Chlorepyris flavipennis Kieffer, 285. Chrerops ommopterus Richardson, 70. Chrestoteleia bakeri Kieffer, 286. CHRISTIE, EMERSON B., Notes on irriga- tion and cooperative irrigation societies in Ilocos Norte, 99 ; Notes on the pottery in- dustry in San Nicolas, Ilocos Norte, 117. "Chrysaora stage" of Dactylometra quinque-
cirrha, 195, 196. Chrysobothris bistripunctata H. Deyr., 84. Chrysodema adjuncta Saund., 83.
eximia Cast, et Gory, 83. Cinetus maquilingensis Kieffer, 311. Cinnamomeum, 254- Cirrhitidae, 69.
130429 6
Cirrhtities aureus (Temm. and Schleg.). 69.
oxycephalus Bleeker, 69. Citrus nobilis Lour., 251. Cixiinaj, 174, 269. Cleistepyris minimus Kieffer, 285. minor Kieffer, 285. philippinensis Kieffer, 285. Clothes, material used by Igorots, 525. Cocculus thunbergii DC, 250. Cologlyptus kiefferi Crawford, 287. Complaints, Igorot manner of settling, 625. Concepcion, barrios of, 515.
people of, their customs and life, 515. Concubinage among Igorots, 516. Copper, discovery of, by Igorots, 519. Cornet fishes, 62. Corvina catalea Richardson, 68. Corymbites, US. Cosmodesmus Haase, 252.
Cothonaspis (Hexaplasta) minima Kieffer, 184. COWLES, R. P., Palaemons of the Philippine
Islands, 319. Crabs, salted, 4. Crambione, 211.
CRAWFORD. J. C, New Philippine Hy men- op tera, 457. Croakers, 68.
Crocodile, nesting of, 313. Crocodilus palustris Lesson, notes on a nest- ing place of, 313. porosus Schneid., 315. Cinistacean, flying, in the Philippine Islands,
57. Crustaceans of the genus Palaemon, 319. Cryptarcha bakeri Grouvelle, 541. Cryptocentrus filifer (Cuv. and Val.), 76.
venustus Seale, 76. Cryptodactylus philippinensis Saund., 84. Ctenophores, 196.
Cynanchum caudatum Maxim., X56, Cynipides, nouveaux, des Philippines, 183. Cynoglossus abreviatus Gray, 78.
melanopterus Richardson, 78. Cyprinidas, 60. Cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus, from
Lake Manguao, Palawan, 187. Cyprinus carpio (Linn.), 60. Cypsilurus simus (Cuv. and Val.), 60.
1)
Dacnotillus simoni Raffray, 455.
Dactylometra quinquecirrha L. Agassiz, 195, 196, 198, 221.
Dala, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Dalchina teredon Felder, 253.
DAY, ARTEMAS L., The osseous system of Ophiocephalus striatus Bloch, 19 ; Two new cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus from Lake Manguao, Palawan, P. I., 187.
Dead, canao for the, 524.
Death among Igorots, customs at, 508.
Debis diana Butler, 261.
sicelis Hewitson, 260.
Delphacinae, 273.
546
Index
Dendrokara Melichar, 272.
monstrosa Melichar, 272. torva Melichar, 273. Derbinse, 269. Diapriidae, 287, 301.
Dicercomorpha argenteoguttata Thorns., 83. Dicronychus baker! Fleut., 449.
cinnamomeus Cand^ze, U9. Digalesus Keiffer, 803.
flavipes Kieffer, 303. Dilapitha Keiffer, 293.
albipes Kieffer, 293. nitida Kieffer, 294. Diploconus bakewellii Fleut., 447.
erythronotus Candeze, 447. obscurus Fleut., 447, US. philippinnensis Fleut., 447. politus Candeze, 447. umbilicatus Candeze, 446, U7. Diploprion bifasciatum (Kuhl and Van Has-
selt), 66. Discomedusa philippina Mayer, 197. Dissomphalus tibialis Ashmead, 285. Dragonels, 79.
Drasterius sulcatulus Candeze, 442. Drepana punctata Giinther, 71. Drepane punctata (Gmelin), 71. Drepanidae, 71. DryinidsB, 285. Dryinus, 285.
Dussumiera acuta Cuv. and Val., 11. elopsoides Bleeker, 11. hasseltii Bleeker, 11. Duymairia aurigaria Giinther, 69.
flagellifera Cuv. and Val., 69. flagellifera Jordan and Snyder, 69. Dystheatias fuscovenosa Melichar, 174. punctata Melichar, 174.
Eels, smoked, 9. Elasmidae, 461.
Elasmus ashmeadi Crawford, 462. elegans Crawford, 461. lutens Crawford, 461 philippinensis Ashmead, ^61. Elateridae des iles Philippines, 441. Eleotridse, 74. Eleotrids, 74.
Endelus bakeri Kerremans, 88. Engraulidse, 11, 59. Engraulis russellii Giinther, 59. Entedon magnus Crawford, 462, 1^6S.
manilensis Crawford, 463. Enumeration des Serp hides (Proctrotrupides) des iles Philippines, avec description de genres nouveaux et d'especes nouvelles, 285. Ephippidse, 71. Ephippus orbis (Bloch), 71. Epidelus wallacei Thorns., 83. Epierus nasicornls Bickh., 429. Epinephelus boenack (Bloch), 65.
dermopterus (T. and S.), 65. gilberti Richardson, 66. merra Bloch, 65. moara (Schlegel), 65. septemfasciatus Thumb., 65.
Epyris Westwood, 288.
apertus Kieffer, 285.
ftliformis Kieffer, 288.
philippinensis Kieffer, 285. Equula insidiator (Bloch), 63.
iniconia (Hamilton-Buchanan), 63. Equulida, 63.
Eucoelidea mactuilingensis Kieffer, 184. Eulophidse, 462. Eupilis hyalinocosta Melichar, 279.
nigrinervis St&l, 278.
rubrovenosa Melichar, 278. Euplectrus bussyi Crawford, 4^4.
flavescens Crawford, 463. rugosus Crawford, 464. Euplectus crassipes Raffray, 451. Eurynomeus Kirk., 176. Exoccetidse, 600.
F
Fa paw poong, 60.
Fenuahala maculipennis Melichar, 436. Filefishes, 73.
Fish, and fishery products, preservation in the tropics, 1. drying, 1. marinated, 9. pickling, 2.
preparing for shipment, 14. preserving by smoking, 5. refrigeration of, 12. salting, 1. Fishes, clupeoid, in Philippine waters, 11.
of Hongkong, 59. Fistularia serrata Cuv., 62. Fistulariidae, 62. Flatheads, 77.
FLEUTIAUX, ED., Elaterid^ des iles Philip- pines, 441. Flying crustacean, 57. fishes, 60. gurnards, 78. Foenobethylus gracilis Kieffer, 285. Fosforo, 199. Fulgoridon, neue, 433.
von den Philippinen, 269.
Galesus Curtis, 303, 306.
clavaticornis Kieffer, 287, 306.
crawfordi Kieffer, 287, 306.
curticeps Kieffer, 287, 306.
luzonicus Ashmead, 287, 306.
manilae Ashmead, 287, 306.
philippinensis Kieffer, 306.
(Schizogalesus) lineatus Kieffer, 306. Garfishes, 60. Garoupa, 65. Geijera salicifolia, 254. Gerridas, 67.
Glossogobius giuris (Hamilton-Buchanan), 75. Glyphonyx erraticus Candeze, 449.
var, attonitus Candeze, U9. posticus ( ?) Candeze, 449. Gobies, 74.
Index
547
Gobiichthys tentacularis (Cuv. and Val.), 76.
Gobiidae, 74.
Gobius pectinirostris Gmelin, 74.
poecililicthys Jordan and Snyder, 75. Gold, discovery of, by Igorots, 520. Goniozus Foerster, 288.
depressus Kieffer, 285, 288.
philippinensis Ashmead, 285, 288.
triangulifer Kieffer, 288. GROUVELLE, A., Nitidulidae des Philippines
recoltes par C. F. Baker, 535. (brunts, 66.
H
Habroteleia browni Crawford, 286. Hadronotus flavipes Ashmead, 286.
philippinensis Ashmead, 286. Hagmulidse, 67. Hak chong, 63. Halfbeak, 60.
Halichoeres dussumieri (Cuv, and Val.), 70. javanicus Sleeker, 70. nigrescens Bleeker, 70. poecilopterus (Schlegel), 70. Haploneus latter Grouvelle, 538.
lotrolus Er., 589. Harima Moore, 263. Harvesting, canao for, 525. Hemigalesus Kieffer, 304.
auriculatus Kieffer, 304, S06, brevicornis Kieffer, 287, 304. dentatus Kieffer, 304, 305. gracilis Kieffer, 287, 304. longirostrum Kieffer, 304, 305. niger Kieffer, 287, 304. rufus Kieffer, 287, 304. Hemiops semperi Candeze, 449. Hemiramphus cantoris Bleeker, 60. Hemisphaerius af&nis Melichar, 279.
chlorophanus Melichar, t79. rufus Melichar, 280. triangularis Melichar, 279. Herring, 6.
kippered, 8. smoked, 8. Heteroderes, 4U.
drasterioides Fleutiaux, 442. intermedins Candeze, M^. proximus Fleutiaux, U2. triangularis Esch., US. Hih pe yang, 73. Hikage-cho, 260. Hime-janome, 264. Hime-kimadara-kikage, 263. Hister (Antholus) bakeri Bickh., 428. Histeriden, Philippinische, 423. History of the Spanish normal school for men
teachers in Manila, 1865-1905, 123. Holocentridae, 62. Holocentrus ruber Lac6pede, 62. Hololepta elongata Erichson, 423. Homopteren von den Philippinen, 173. Hongkong, fishes of, 69.
Hoplogryon fiiaviclava Kieffer, 286.
longispina Kieffer, 286.
roberti Crawford, 286.
striaticeps Crawford, 286. Hoploteleia Ashmead, 292.
carinata Kieffer, 286, 292.
pacifica Ashmead, 286.
philippinensis Kieffer, 286.
unidens Kieffer, 286. Houses, Igorot method of building, 617. Hymenoptera, new Philippine, 457. Hypnoidus bakeri Fleutiaux, 446.
I Igorots, Christians and, enmity between, 602.
I custom of dressing, 486.
I customs of, 494.
i discovery of copper by, 619.
! gold by, 620.
I Lepanto, 466.
I manner of settling complaints, 625.
I working, 488.
marrying customs, 487, 523. I materials used for clothes by, 625.
superstitions of, 486, 626. thieves among, 516. Ikema, 256.
Ikisha hoevenii (Bleeker), 11, Hocos Norle, irrigation and cooperative irri- gation societies in, 99. the pottery industry in San Ni- colas, 117. Imperata arundinacea Cyr., £60. Indian spadefishes, 71. Intempus punctatissimus Reitter, 461. Inu-gusu, 255. Inu-zansho, 260.
Irrigation and cooperative irrigation societies in Hocos Norte, 99.
Jako-ageha, 255.
Japanese Lepidoptera and their larvae, notes
on, 247. Jassoidea, studies in Philippine, 409. Jelly-fish, poisoning by, 199. Julis exornatus Richardson, 70,
K
Kaga-imo, 256.
Kai kung yu, 70.
Karatachi, 250.
Kasserota, S8J.
Kaya, 260.
KERREMANS, CH., Buprestides recueillis aux lies Philippines par C. F. Baker; I, 88.
KIEFFER, J. J., Nouveaux Cynipides des Philippines, 183 ; Enumeration des Serphides (Proctotrupides) des iles Philippines avec description de genres nouveaux et d'esp^ea nouvelles, 285.
Kimakara-hikage, 268.
Kirbyana Melichar, 174.
Kirrodesa Moore, 260.
Kiwada, 250.
Kolla Distant, 419.
548
Index
Kuro-hikagre, 261. Kuro-hikage-modoki, 262. Kuro-taimai, 252.
Labridae, 69.
Lacon cervinus Erichson, 441. Lamenia flavescens Melichar, 179. Lanerosta del mar, 324. Lapithasa Malichar, 281.
bakeri Malichar, 281. |
Lap yu, 66. j
Larvae of Japanese lepidoptera, 247. Lasiommata epimenides Men., 26J^. \
firaschkevitschii Felder, 259. \
goschkevitschii Men., t59. !
maacki Bremer, 262. \
Lauraceae, 253. \
Laurus camphora, 253. Legrislation relating to Mountain Pix)vince,
466. Leiognathus daura (Cuvier), 63.
edwardsi Evermann and Scale, 63. virgatus Fowler, 63. Lemnalia Gray, 2SJt, 242.
afrieana May, 236. armatum Kukenthal, 236. brassica May, 236. elegans May, 286. flava May, 236. Lemnalioides kUkenthali Light, 283. Lepanto, general history of, 470. Igorots of, 465, 471. people of, 467.
subprovince, manuscrips from, 466. Lepidoptera and their larvae, notes on Jap- anese, 247. Leptaleocera bakeri Melichar, 271. Lestodryinus browni Ashmead, 285. j
luzonicus Kieffer, 285. \
perkinsi Kieffer, 285. j
Lethe Hiibner, 260, 263. \
callipteris Butler, 264. j
celeja Fruhst., 262. !
consanguis Butler, 261, 262. \
diana Butler, 262. \
fixseni Butler, 262.
(H^ma) callipteris Butler, 263. I
(Kirrodesa) sicelis Hewitson, 260. |
labyrinthea Leech, 264. \
(Rangbia) diana Butler, 261. sicelis Pryer, 260. \
var. vanelia Fruhst., 261.
(Tansima) marginalis Motschulsky, 262. ;
whitelyi Butler, 26U 262. j
Lethrinus mahsenoides Ehrenberg, 67. |
Leucospis bakeri Crawford, 457. j
pulchellus Crawford, 457. LIGHT, S. F., Some Philippine Scyphomedusae, including two new genera, five new species, and one new variety, 195 ; Notes on Phil- ippine Alcyonaria, Part II: Lemnalioides ktikenthali, a new genus and species of Alcyonaria from the Philippines and a dis- cussion of the systematic position of the new genus, 233.
Linuche aquila (Haeckel) Mayer, 196. Liopteninae, 185.
Liopygus diopsipygus Marseul, 426. Lipoglyptus primus Crawford, 287. Lithophytum africanum, 239.
arboreoum (Q. and G.), 237. armatum Kukenthal, 236. brassica Kukenthal, 236. carnosum (Kiikth.), 239. elegans Ktikenthal, 236. flavum, 239. Litsaea, 25It. Li yo, 60. Lizard fishes, 59. Lobonema Meyer, 216.
mayeri Light, 195, 197, 217, 221,
230. smithii Mayer, 197, 199, 219, 221. Lobonemoides gracilis Light, 195, 197, 222. Loboscelidia rufescens Westwood, 287. ?Lophatherum elatum Zoll., 259, 260, 261, 263. Lorifera flagellata (Haeckel) Mayer, 197. Loxotropa philippinensis Kieffer, 287. Ludius hirsutus Candeze, 448. Lutianidse, 66.
Lutianus annularis (Cuv. and Val.), 66. erythropterus Bloch, 66. erythropterus Day, 66. monostigma (Cuv. and Val.), 66. Lychnorhyza, 212.
bartschi Mayer, 197.
M
Mababili barrio, story of, 478. Machilus japonica S. and Z., 255. odoratissima, 254. thunburgii S. and Z., 253, 25i. Mackerel family, 11. Mackerels, 62. Macroteleia Westwood, 298.
cavifrons Kieffer, 298, 299.
crawfordi Kieffer, 286, 298.
flaviceps Kieffer, 300.
kiefferi Brues, 286.
kiefferi Crawford, 286, 289.
manilensis Ashmead, 286, 298.
philippinensis Kieffer, 286, 298.
striativentris Crawford, 286, 298.
superans Kieffer, 293, 299. Majella majella Kirk., 178.
philippina Melichar, 177. Makilingia Baker, 409.
colorata Baker, 411, 413.
maculata Baker, 411, 412.
nigra Baker, 410, 411.
pallida Baker, 411, 414.
pruinosa Baker, 410, 412. Malaria mosquito, a new species, 405. Malay pangolin, Mania javanica Desmarest,
notes on the, 93. Malaxa Melichar, 275.
acutipennis Melichar, 275. Malideg barrio, customs of, 475. Mancayan, barrios of, 517. Manis javanica Desmarest, notes on, 93.
Index
549
Marriage customs of Igorols, 508, 523. Mastigias ocellata Haeckel, 197.
papua L. Agassiz, 195, 197, 209. var. sibogae Maas, 208. McGregor, RICHARD C, Description of a new species of Prinochilus from the high- lands of Luzon, 531. Mecynorhynchus hyalinus Melichar, 437.
kershawi Kirk., J^S7. Medusae, 196.
Megapenthes angulosus Candeze, 442. fulvus Fleut., 443. inconditus Candeze, 442. junceus Candeze, 442, MS. var. candezei, 442. luzonicus Fleut., 442. Megatropis interruptolineata Melichar, 271.
obliquefasciata Melichar, 271. Melanotus ebeninus Candeze, 448. scribanus Candeze, 448. Melanoxanthus affinis Fleutiaux, 444. ater Fleut., 445. bakeri Fleut., 443. bicolor Candeze, U4' carbunculus Candeze, U5. cniciellus Candeze, U5. crucifer Fleutiaux, 445. exclamationis Candeze, 4U. infimus Candeze, 445. luzonicus Fleutiaux, 444. promecus Candeze, 443. sanguinicollis Schw., 4U. Melibseus ajneifrons H. Deyr., 84.
bakeri Kerremans, 84. MELICHAR, L., Neue Homopteren von den Philippinen, 173 ; Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen : L Theil, 269 ; Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: II, 433. Meristhus nigritulus Candeze, 441. Microcanthus strigatus (Cuv. and Val.), 73. Mikan, 251. Mileewa Distant, 415. gillavryi, 417. luzonica Baker, 415, 417.
var. decolorata Baker, 416. Miscanthus sinensis Anders., 262. Misepyris exaratus Kieffer, 285. longiceps Kieffer, 285. Mojarras, 67. Monacanthidse, 73. Monacanthus chinensis (Bloch), 73. chinensis Giinther, 7S. lineolatus Richardson, 74. setifer Bennett, 73. setifer Giinther, 7S. Months, Igorot names for, 495. Mosquito, malaria, a new species, 405. Mountain Province, evolution of, 466.
legislation relating to, 466. Mugil cephalus Linn., 61.
longimanus Giinther, 61. macolipidotus Richardson, 61, oeur Forskal, 61. planiceps Cuv. and Val., 61. Mugilidae, 61. Mullet roes, 4.
Mullets, 7, 61.
Mullidae, 67.
Murder of a young boy, Igorot account of, 503.
Mycalesis Hiibner, 264.
borealis Feld. and Rogen., i69, t66.
charaka Moore, 266.
fulginia Fruhst., 268,
gotama Moore, 264f 265.
madjicosa Butler, 266.
nanda Fruhst., 266.
oculata Moore, 266.
(Sadarga) gotama Moore, 264.
seriphus Fruhst., £66. Myzomyia febrifera Banks, 405.
funesta Giles, 405.
rossii Giles, 405.
N
Naked catfishes, 60.
Nemipterus japonicus (Bloch), 66.
Neocamma Melichar, 434.
trifasciata Melichar, 435. Neope Butler, 258.
callipteris Butler, 26S.
goschkevitschii M6netries, 258.
japonica Butl., 259.
niphonica Butl., 259.
watanabei Mats., 259. Nephthyidae, 2J6, 239. Nesting place of Crocodilus palustris Lesson,
notes on, 313. Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen : I.
Theil, 269 ; II, 433. Neurepyris tagala Ashmead, 285. Neurocacus philippinensis Kieffer, 286. Neuroteleia Kieffer, 29S. NitidulidfiB des Philippines, 535. Normal school for men teachers in Manila,
history of, 123. Nysia alba Melichar, 178.
atrovenosa Leth., 178.
Ophiocephalus striatus Bloch, the osseous sys- tem of, 19.
Opisthacantha nigriclavata Ashmead, 286.
Origin of the world, Igorot legend of, 523.
Orthopagus (Udugama, Anagnia) philippinus Melichar, 173.
Osseous system of Ophiocephalus striatuR Bloch, 19.
Oxyurichthus amabalis Scale, 76. cristatus (Day), 75.
P
Padangaan barrio, 505.
Pak chong, 63.
Palaemon acanthurus Wiegmann, S56.
carcinus Fabricius, 322, 324, S47, S49, S50, 851.
dispar von Martens, 848, 866.
elegans de Man, 841* 871, 879.
esculentus Thallwitz, 897.
grandimanus Randall, 885, 892.
hilgendorfi H. Courti^re, 885, 888,
550
Index
Palaemon idae Heller, S65.
jamaicensis, SS9.
jaroensis Cowles, 385.
lanceifrons Dana 364, S71, S79.
V a r. montalbanensis Co wles, 371.
lar Fabricius, SS9, 380.
latidactylus Thallwitz, 392, 400-
lepidactylus Hilgendorf, S85, S88, 389, S95, JtOO.
nipponensis de Haan, S4i% 5^6, S51.
oenone de Man, S97, 398.
philippinensis Co wles, S30, S39, 340.
placidus de Man, S85, S88.
ritsemae de Man, S41, S52.
rosenbergii de Man, 385.
rudis Heller, 3^1.
sp., 397.
sundaicus Heller, 355, 365.
weberi de Man, 3j^1, 348, Palaemons of the Philippine Islands, 319. Palinurus, 32 4. Pan us, 78. Pangolin, Malay, Manis javanica Desmarest,
93. Papilio Doubleday, 250. agamemnon, 854. alcinous Klug, 255, 257.
var. mansonensis Fruhst., 258. bianor Cramer, 251. bradanus Fruhst., 257. colus Fruhst., 255, confusus Rothsch., 257. connectens Fruhst., 255. (Cosmodesmus) sarpedon Linnaeus,
262. daenionius Alpher, 257, decora Oberth., 257. demetrius Cramer, 251. demophon Meerb., 255. demophoon Shaw, 255. eurypilus Linn., 253. fatuus Rothsch., 257. febanufl Fruhst., 258. hsematostictus Butl., 257. hasrus Fruhst., 255. helenus Linn., 251. impedens Rothsch., 257. intermedia Oberth., 257. koannania, 258, loochooanus Rothsch., 257, luctatius Fruhst., 255. mansonensis Fruhst., 257. mencius Feld., 257. morius Fruhst., 255. nasrasakii Fruhst., 257. nipponus Fruhst., 253, 255. (Pharmacophagus) alcinous Klusr.,
255. plutonius Oberth., 257, sarpedon Davidson and Aitken, 253. sarpedon Linnaeus, 252, 255. sarpedonides Fruhst., 253 255. semifasciatus Honr., 255. spathatus Butl., 257. teredon Feld., 254.
I Papilio xanthus Linn., 250.
1 xuthulus Brem., 250.
! xuthus Linnaeus, 250.
j PapiJionidae, 250.
I Paralemnalia, 236, 242.
' eburnea Kiiken., 237.
flabellum Q. and G., 287, thrysoides (Ehrbg.), 236, 237. I Puramesius Westwood, 301.
luzonicus Kieffer, 301. ; Parupercis cylindrica (Bloch), 79. ' pulchella (Temm. and Sehleg.), 79.
I Paratangia, 178.
Pareniaca bakeri Crawford, 459. I browni Crawford, 458.
I Pjiromatus sp., 429.
Parrot fishes, 70. ' Payeo, barrio, origin and life of first man j and woman inhabiting, 502. ' Pelagia panopyra Peron and Lesueur var. placenta (Haeckel) Mayer, 196. Pelagidaj, 196. Penaeus, 319, 324.
Percia sexfasciatus Tenim. and Schleg., 79, Pevilampidae, 459. Perilumpus luzonensis Crawford, 459.
punctiventris Crawford, 460. ; Periphylla hyacinthina Steenstrup forma dode-
cabostrycha (Haeckel) Mayer, 196. i Pharmocophagus Haase, 255. Phellodendron amurense, 250, : Philanthaxia lata Kerremans, 83.
Philippine Scyphomedusae, including two new I genera, live new species, and one new va- riety, 195. I*hamopria exilis Kieffer, 287.
nigriceps Kieffer, 287. rufa Kieffer, 287. Phyllorhiza, 212. Pistol crab, 324. Plaice, 78.
Planting and harvesting, canao for, 525. Platycephalidse, 77.
Platycephalus insidiator (Forskal), 77. Platygasteridse, 286. Platylister binnanum Mars., 425. contiguum Mars., 4^5. emptum Mars., 425. jobiense Mars., 425. pini Lew., 425. sesquistriatum Mars., 425. Platyscelio abnormis Crawford, 286.
punctatus Kieffer, 286. Platysoma abruptum Erichson, 4ii5.
(Cylistosoma) dufali Marseul, 426. dufali Marseul, 426, gorhami Lewis, 425. luzonicum Erichson, 425. ovatus Erichson, 425. (Platylister) abruptum Erichson, 425. charrali Marseul, 424. cortlcinus Bickhardt,
424. ovatum Erichson, 425.
Index
551
Platysoma (Platylister) striatiderum Marseul, 425.
ramoicola Mars., 425.
scitutum Lewis, 426.
striatiderum Marseul, 425.
uniforme Lewis, 426. Pleuronectidae, 78. Plotosidfe, 60.
Plotosus arab (Forsk&l), 60. Pochazia marginalis Melichar, 179. Pochazina bakeri Melichar, 180.
handlirschi Mel., 180. Poisoning by jellyfish, 199. Polydactylus plebeius (Broussonet), 62,
tetradactylus Shaw, 61. Polynemidae, 61. Pomfret, black, 63.
white, 63. Porgies, 7, 67. Pottery industry in San Is^colas. Ilocos Norte,
notes on the, 117. Prawns, salted, 3.
Prionochilus anthonyi McGregor, 531. Priopis urotaenia (Bleeker), 65. Pristapoma hasta Bloch, 67. Procinetus rectinervis Kieffer, 287. Proctotrupides, 285.
Prodryinus ( ?) stantoni Ashmead, 285. Promiomcera ruflthorax Kieffer, 183. Prosacantha, 286.
Prosparasion coeruleum Kieffer, 286. Protective coloration, 248. Pselaphides des lies Philippines, 451. Pseudorhiza, 212,
I*seudorhombus misakius Jordan and Starks, 78. olegolepis Bleeker, 78. russellii (Gray), 78. Pseudoscarus aeruginosa Giinther, 70. Pteromalidse, 460. Pteropsaridae, 79. Pterosparids, 79. Ptoleria Stal, 175. Puffers, 74. Pukot, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Q
Quarrels of husband and wife among Igorots,
516. Questions and complaints, Igorot methods of
settling, 511.
R
RAFFRAY, A. Catalogue des Pselaphides
(Coleoptftres) des iles Philippines, 451. Rangbia Moore, 261. Raphitreus bakeri Raff ray, 455.
dentimanus Raffr., 455. speratus Sharp, 455. Refrigeration of fish, 12. Reichenbachia dama Raffray, 454.
laticollis Raffray, 453. manillensis Raffray, 453. rufa Schmidt-Goebel, 453. Rhabdepyris luzonicus Kieffer, 285. Rhizostomse, 196, 201.
Rhizostomata dichotoma, 206. pinnata, 201. triptera, 216. Rhinogobius hongkongensis Scale, 74. Rhopalocera, 250. Rhopilema esculenta Kish., 230. hispidum Maas, 2S0. visayana Light, 195, 197, 227, 230. Rhotana basipunctulata Melichar, 438. excelsa Melichar, 437. latipennis Walk., 437. punctovenosa Melichar, 437. Ricaniinse. 179. ROBERTSON, JAMES A., The Igorots of
Lepanto, 465. Rybaxis gladiator Rraffray, 454. simoniana Raffray, 454.
S
Sabangan, barrios of, 522. Sadarga Moore, 264. Salt water shrimps, S19, 324. Sambus auricolor Saund., 84. lugubris Saund., 84. Sanderia malayensis Goette, 196. San Emilio, barrios of, 526. Santalus congruens Mars., 427. elongatulus Mars., 427. latitibius Mars., 427. mandibularis Schmidt, 427. parallelus Redt., 427. philippinarum Bickhardt, 426, 428. piraticus Lewis, 426. rupestris Mars., 428. tabellio Mars., 428. Sardinella fimbrata (Cuv. and Val.), 11. gibbosa (Bleeker), 11. klunzi (Bleeker), 11. longiceps (Cuv. and Val.), 11. melanostica (Schleg.), ii. moluccensis (Bleeker), 11. sundaica (Bleeker), 11. vancibris (Jordan and Snyder), //. zunazi (Bleeker), 11. Sardines, 6.
canning, 10. Sasagusa, 259, 260, 261, 263. Satyridae, 258.
Satyrus marginalis Motschulsky, 262. Scapopria atriceps Kieffer, 287, 310. Scarichthyidae, 70. Scelio Latreille, 289.
aratigena Kieffer, 286, 590. bisectus Kieffer, 290. consobrinus Kieffer, 286, 290. luzonicus Kieffer, 290, 291. philippinensis Ashmead, 286, 289. variicornis Kieffer, 286, 290. Scelionidse, 286, 289. Schizosema cellularis Kieffer, 183. SCHULTZE, W., Notes on the Malay panga- lin, Manis javanica Desmarest, 93 ; Notes on a nesting place of Crocodilus palustris Lesson, 313. Sciaena aneus Bloch, 69.
diacanthus (Lac^pede), 68.
552
Index
Scisenidse, 68.
Scisenoides biauritus Cantor, 69.
Scolopsis vosmeri Bleeker, 66.
Scomberoides lysan (Forsk&l), 62.
Scomberomorus guttatum (Bloch), 62.
ScombridfiB, 62.
Scorpaenidaj, 77.
Scorpion fishes, 77.
Scyphomedusae, some Philippine, 195.
Sea bass, 7.
crawfish, 324. goldfishes, 69. SEALE, ALVIN, Preservation of commercial fish and fishery products in the tropics, 1 ; Fishes of Hongkong, 59. Sebastopsis marmorata (Cuv. and Val.), 77. Sek pan, 65. Semaeostomeae, 200. Serphides, 285. Serranidse, 65. Shiro-gusu, 255. Shrimps, salted, 3. Sick, caiiao for, 524. Sickness, Igorot customs during, 510. Siganidse, 73. Siganids, 73.
Siganus oramin (Bloch and Schn.), 73. Sillaginidae, 69. Sillago maculata Quoy and Gaimard, 69.
sihama (Forsk&l), 69. Siluridae, 60. Silversides, 60. Sinchula Moore, 26S. Slip months, 63. Snappers, 7, 66. Soldier fishes, 62. Solea ovata Richardson, 78. Soleidae, 78. Soles, 78.
Soles faleacea Richardson, 78. Spadefishes, 71. Spanish normal school for men teachers in
Manila, 1865-1905, history of, 123. Sparasion philippinense Kieffer, 286. Sparidse, 67. Sparus berda Forskil, 67.
datnia (Hamilton), 67. Spheroides spadiceus (Richardson), 74. Sphyraena jello Cuv. and Val., 61.
obtusata Cuv. and Val., 61. Sphyraenidae, 61. Spilomicrus Westwood, 302.
carinifrons Kieffer, 287, 302.
consobrinus Kieffer, 287.
dispansus Kieffer, 287, 302.
nitidicornis Kieffer, 287, 302.
opertus Kieffer, 287, 302.
philippinensis Kieffer, 302.
variicomis Kieffer, 287, 302. Spiny lobster, 324. Stethojulis kalosoma Bleeker, 70. Striped mullet, 61. Stolephorus delicatulus (Bennet), 11.
gracilis (Temm. and Schleg.), 11. Stromateidae, 63.
Stromateus argenteus Bloch, 63.
niger Bloch, 63. Stylopria Kieffer, 307.
rufa Kieffer, 307. Suagayan barrio, customs of, 480. Superstitions of Igorots, 526. Surmullets, 67. Susuki, 262. Symplana Kirby, 277.
viridinervis Kirby, 278. Synaptura orientalis Bloch and Schneider, 78
pan Bleeker, 78. Synodontidae, 59.
Synodus japonicus (Houttuyn), 59. Syntames tubulifer Melichar, 269.
Tabu-no-ki, 253, 255.
Talabog, used in catching crustaceans, 320. Tangina bipunctata Melichar, 176. Quadrilineata Melichar, 177 quadripunctulata Melichar, 176. Telenomus catacanthae Ashmead, 286. Tephritis sinensis (Lacepede), 78. Termites, nests of, 94. Tetraodontidae, 74. Tettigoniella Jacobi, 418.
differentialis Baker, 420. kinbergi, Jt20. makilingensis Baker, 419. quinquenotata Stil, 420. spectra var. nigrilinea St&l, 418. unimaculata Sign., J^20. whiteheadii Distant, 418. Tettigoniellidae, new species of, 409. Thalassoma lunare (Linn.), 69. Therapon cuvieri (Bleeker), 66. jarbua (Forsk&l), 67. theraps (Cuv. and Val.), 67. Theraponidae, 66. Thesiastes crassipes Raff ray, 451. Thieves, Igorot, 516. Threadfins, 61. Thysanophrys bataviensis (Bleeker), 78.
neglectus (Troch.), 78. Thysanostoma thysanura Haeckel, 197. Tmesiphorus simoni Raffray, 455. Torreya nucifera S. and Z., 260. Trachinocephalus myops (Forster), 59. Trachurus trachurus Linn., 62. Trachys bakeri Ker remans, 90. cornuta Kerremans, 89. dubia Saund., 89. formosana Kerremans, 90. Trichopria Ashmead, 310.
analis Kieffer, 287, 310. caudata Kieffer, 287, 310. insulse Kiefferj 287. maquilingensis Kieffer, 310. semirufa Kieffer, 287, 310. Tridentiger bifasciatus Steindachner, 77. Tristilophus luzonicus Cand^ze, 448. Tropidocephala philippina Melichar, 273. Trypauchen vagina Bloch and Schn., 77. Tsubana, 260.
Index
553
Tsuzura-fuji, 256.
Two new cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus
from Lake Manguao, Palawan, P. I., 187. Tylosurus caudimaculatus (Cuvier), 60. Tyraphus baeri Raffray, 454.
IT
Ugyops granulatus Melichar, 175. Ujna Sikh 416.
consors Distant, 417. delicatula Distant, 417. pMlippinensis Baker, 416, U7. Upeneoides moluccensis Bleeker, 68.
sulphureus (Cuv. and Val.), 68. tragula (Richardson), 68. Upeneus bensasi (Temm. and Schleg.), 68.
displunis Playfair, 67. Uroscelio Kieffer, 291.
luteipes Kieffer, 291.
Vanessa io Linn., 264. Varuna litterata (Fabr.), 4. Vekunta lineata Melichar, 270. Verrilliana, 237. Versura, 212.
maasi Mayer, 197.
w
Wedding feasts of Igorots, 508.
Wharf fishes, 65.
Whitings, 69.
WILEMAN, A. E., Notes on Japanese Lepi- doptera and their larvae: Part I, 247.
Wong fa yu, 69.
WORCESTER. DEAN C, Note on the occur- rence of a flying crustacean in the Philip- pine Islands, 57.
Wrasse fishes, 69.
X
Xanthoxylon schinnifolium S. and Z., 250. Xenepyris compressicornis Kieffer, 285. Xenotoleia flavipennis Kieffer, 286. Xenotoma Foerster, 310.
philippinensis Kieffer, 287, 310.
soror Kieffer, 310. Xytffima punctatum (Cuv. and Val.), 67.
Y
Yama-joro, 255. Yat sa yu, 78. Ying kung, 71.
Z
Zoraida dorsopunctata Melichar, 434. flavicornis Melichar, 433. puncticosta Melichar, 433.
O
If
X
^
•;<.,^i^i^«c
-^v:^<^
i/
l« 2
1315
Vol. IX, Sec. D, No. 6 J 'J*- " ' November, 1914
THE PHILIPPINE
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE
ALVIN J. COX, M. A., Ph. D.
GENERAL EDITOR
Section D
GENERAL BIOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY, AND ANTHROPOLOGY
EDITED WITH THE COOPERATION OF
M. L. MILLER, Ph. D.; R. P. COWLES, Ph. D.; C. S. BANKS. M. S.
ALVIN SEALE, A. B.; C. F. BAKER, A. M.
RICHARD C. MCGREGOR, A. B.
MANILA BUREAU OF PRINTING
1914
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE BY THE BUEEAU OF SCIENCE, MANILA, PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
ETHNOLOGY
A VOCABULARY OF THE IGOROT LAN- GUAGE AS SPOKEN BY THE BONTOC IGOROTS
By Walter Clayton Clapp
Order No. 408. Paper, 89 pages, $0.75,
postpaid. The vocabulary is given in Igorot-English and English-lgorot.
THE NABALOI DIALECT
By Otto Scheerer
and
THE BATAKS OF PALAWAN
By Edward Y. Miller
Order No. 403. Paper, $0.25; half mo-
rocco, $0.75; postpaid. The Nabaloi Dialect (65 pages, 29 plates) and the Bataks of Palawan (7 pages, 6 plates) are bound under one cover.
THE BATAN DIALECT AS A MEMBER
OF THE PHILIPPINE GROUP
OF LANGUAGES
By Otto Scheerer
and
*T" AND "V" IN PHILIPPINE LANGUAGES
By Carlos Everett Conant
Order No. 407.
These two papers are issued under one cover, 141 pages, paper, $0.80, postpaid.
ETHNOLOGY— Continued
STUDIES IN MORO HISTORY, LAW, AND RELIGION
By Najeeb M. Saleeby
Order No. 405. Paper, 107 pages, 16
plates, 5 diagrams, $0.25; half mo- rocco, $0.75; postpaid.
This volume deals with the earliest written records of the Moros in Mindanao. The names of the rulers of Magindanao are recorded in five folding diagrams.
NEGRITOS OF ZAMBALES
By William Allan Reed
Order No. 402. Paper, 83 pages, 62
plates, $0.25; half morocco, $0.75; postpaid.
Plates from photographs, many of which were taken for this publication, show orna- ments, houses, men making fire with bamboo, bows and arrows, dances, and various types of the people themselves.
INDUSTRIES
PHILIPPINE HATS
By C. B. Robinson
Order No. 415. Paper, 66
plates, $0.50 postpaid.
This paper is a concise record of the history and present condition of hat making in the Philippine Islands.
pages, 8
THE SUBANUNS OF SINDANGAN BAY
By Emerson B. Christie
Order No. 410. Paper, 121 pages, 1
map, 29 plates, $1.25, postpaid.
Sindangan Bay is situated on the north- ern coast of Zamboanga Peninsula. The Su- banuns of this region were studied by Mr. Christie during two periods of five and six weeks, respectively.
The 29 plates illustrate the Subanuns at work and at play; their industries, houses, altars, and implements; and the people themselves.
THE SUGAR INDUSTRY IN THE ISLAND OF NEGROS
By Herbert S. Walker
Order No. 412. Paper, 145 pages, 10
plates, 1 map, $1.25, postpaid.
Considered from the viewpoint of prac- tical utility, Mr. Walker's Sugar Industry in the island of Negros is one of the most important papers published by the Bureau of Science. This volume is a real contribu- tion to the subject; it is not a mere com- pilation, for the author was in the field and understands the conditions of which he writes.
THE HISTORY OF SULU
By Najeeb M. Saleeby
Order No. 406. Paper, 275 pages, 4
maps, 2 diagrams, $0.75, postpaid, in the preparation of his manuscript for The History of Sulu, Doctor Saleeby spent much time and effort in gaining access to documents in the possession of the Sultan of Sulu. This book is a history of the Moros In the Philippines from the earliest times to the American occupation.
A MANUAL OF PHILIPPINE SILK CULTURE
By Charles S. Banks
Order No. 413. Paper, 53 pages, 20
plates, $0.75, postpaid.
In A Manual of Philippine Silk Culture are presented the results of several years' actual work with silk-producing larvae to- gether with a description of the new Philip- pine race.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE BY THE BUREAU OF SCIENCE, MANILA, PHILIPPINE ISLANDS— Continued
BOTANY
A FLORA OF MANILA
By Elmer D. Merrill
Order No. 419. Paper, 490 pages, $2.50, postpaid.
Practically a complete flora of the cul- tivated areas in the Philippines. Descrip- tions, with keys, of over 1,000 species, 590 genera, and 136 families, with native names, glossary of technical terms, etc.
ZOOIiOGY— Continued
A MANUAL OF PHILIPPINE BIRDS
By Richard C. McGregor
Order No. 103. Paper, 2 parts, 769
pages, $4, postpaid.
A Manual of Philippine Birds contains In compact form descriptions of all the known species of Philippine birds. The usual keys and diagnoses of orders, families, and genera help the novice In identification.
THE COCONUT PALM IN THE PHIL- IPPINE ISLANDS
Order No. 37. Paper, 149 pages, 30 plates, $1, postpaid.
The reprint contains the following arti- cles: On the Water Relations of the Coconut Palm (Cocos nucifera). The Coconut and its Relation to Coconut Oil, The Keeping Quali- ties of Coconut Oil and the Causes of its Rancidity, and The Principal Insects Attack- ing the Coconut Palm.
A CHECK-LIST OF PHILIPPINE FISHES
By David Starr Jordan and Robert Earl Richardson
Order No. 102. postpaid.
This list will be found a convenient guide to the synonymy of Philippine ichthyology. The nomenclature is thoroughly revised, and the distribution of each species within tho Philippine Islands is given.
Paper, 78 pages, $0.75,
INDO-MALAYAN WOODS
By Fred W. Foxworthy
Order No. 411. Paper, 182 pages, 9
plates, $0.30, postpaid.
In Indo-Malayan Woods, Doctor Fox- worthy has brought together a large amount of accurate information concerning trees yielding woods of economic value.
ZOOIjOGY
A LIST OF THE MAMMALS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, EXCLU- SIVE OF THE CETACEA
By Ned Hollister
Order No. 418. Paper, 64 pages, $0.50,
postpaid.
This is the only recent attempt to enu- merate the mammals of the Philippine Islands. The distribution of each species is given, and the original descriptions are cited.
MEDICINE
REPORT OF THE INTERNATIONAL PLAGUE CONFERENCE
Held at Mukden, April, 1911, under the auspices of the Chinese Government,
Edited by Erich Martini, G. F. Petrie,
Arthur Stanley, and Richard P.
Strong
483 pages, 18 plates (2 colored, 4 half- tones, 12 charts and maps)
Order No. 416. Paper, $2.50; cloth,
$3.50; postpaid.
The proceedings of this International^ Con- ference and information gained therefrom, to- gether with the results of certain bacte- riological investigations, constitute the pres- ent report.
The Bureau of Science of the Govern- ment of the Philippine Islands has been appointed sole agent for the distribution of the printed proceedings of the Interna- tlonal Plague Conference.
PRICES ARE IN UNITED STATES CURRENCY
Orders for these publications may "be sent to the BUSINESS MANAGER PHILIPPINE JOTJRNAI OF SCIENCE, BUREAU OF SCIENCE, MANILA, P. I.) or to any of the agents listed below. Please give order number.
The MacmiUan Company, 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York, U. S. A.
Wm. Wesley & Son, 2 8 Essex Street, Strand, London, W. C, England.
Martinus Nijhoff, Lange Voorhout 9, The Hague, Holland.
Mayer & Miiller, Prinz Louis Ferdinandstrasse 2, Berlin, N. W., Germany,
Kelly & Walsh, Ltd., 32 Raffles Place, Singapore, Straits Settlements.
A. M. & J. Ferguson, 19 Baillie Street, Colombo, Ceylon.
Thacker, Spink & Co., P. O. Box 54, Calcutta, India.
CONTENTS
Page.
ROBERTSON, JAMES A. The Igorots of Lepanto 465
McGregor, RICHARD C. Description of a New Species of
Prionochilus from the Highlands of Luzon 531
GROUVELLE, a. Nitidulidae des Philippines recoltes par C. F.
Baker 535
Index 543
^ u. s.
The ^'Philippine Journal of Science'* is issued as follows: currency
Section A. Chemical and Geological Sciences and the Industries.. $2.00
Section B. Tropical Medicine 3.00
Section C. Botany 2.00
Section D. General Biology, Ethnology, and Anthropology (Sec- tion D began with Volume V) 2.00
Entire Journal, Volume II, III, IV, or V .. 5.00
Entire Journal, beginning with Volume VI 7.00
Single numbers of Volume I _ ,75
Single numbers (except of Volume I) - - .50
Volume I, 1906 (not divided Into sections) and supplement, sold
only with a complete file of section A, B, or C 10.00
Supplement to Volame I (ik>(any) * S.50
Volume I (without supplement), sold only with a complete file of
section A, B, or C 6.50
Euch section is separately paged and indexed.
Publications sent in exchange for the Philippine Journal of Science should be addressed: Library, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.
Subscriptions may be sent to the Business Manager, Philippine Jour- nal of Science, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I., or to any of the agents listed below:
AGENTS
The Macmillan Company, 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York City, U. S. A. Wm. Wesley & Son, 28 Essex Street, Strand, Ijondon, W. C, England. Martinus Nijhoff, Lange Voorhout 9, The Hague, Holland.. Mayer & Miiller, Prinz Louis Ferdinandstrasse 2, Berlin, N. W., Ger- many. Kelly & Walsh, lilmited, 32 Raffles Place, Singapore, Straits Settlements. A. M. <& J. Ferguson, !• Baillie Street, Colombo, Ceylon, Thackefr, Spink & Co., P. O. Box 54, Calcutta, India.
Entered at the post-office at Manila, P. I., as second-class matter
Oi
NOV ].iiS15 .
MNiv. OF r/ilCH. LIBRARY
">
- if
/
/
/